OPERATION
OF
WASTEWATER
TREATMENT
PLANTS
Volume I
A
Field
Study
Training
Program
• ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY •
• OFFICE OF WATER PROGRAMS •
• DIVISION OF MANPOWER AND TRAINING •
-------
Environmental Protection Agency Review Notice
This training manual has been reviewed by the Office of Water Program
Operations, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, and approved for publi-
cation. Approval does not signify that the contents necessarily reflect the
views and policies of the Environmental Protection Agency. Mention of trade
names or commercial products does not constitute endorsement or recom-
mendation for use by the Environmental Protection Agency, California State
University, Sacramento, California Water Pollution Control Association, au-
thors of the chapters or project reviewers and directors.
-------
OPERATION OF WASTEWATER
TREATMENT PLANTS
Second Edition
VOLUME I
A Field Study Training Program
prepared by
California State University, Sacramento
(formerly Sacramento State College)
Department of Civil Engineering
in cooperation with the
California Water Pollution Control Association
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~A
Kenneth D. Kerri, Project Director
Bill B. Dendy, Co-Director
John Brady, Consultant and Co-Director
William Crooks, Consultant
*A*****************************************-*********
for the
Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Water Program Operations
Municipal Permits and Operations Division
First Edition, Technical Training Grant No. 5TT1-WP-16-03 (1970)
Second Edition, Grant No. T900690010
1980
i
-------
NOTICE
This manual is revised and updated before each printing based on com-
ments from persons using the manual.
FIRST EDITION
First printing, 1971
5,000
Second printing, 1972
7,000
Third printing, 1973
9,000
Fourth printing, 1974
6,000
Fifth printing, 1975
4,000
Sixth printing, 1977
11,000
Seventh printing, 1979
4,000
SECOND EDITION
First Printing, 1980 7,000
ii
-------
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION
The purposes of this home study program are:
a. to develop qualified treatment plant operators;
b. to expand the abilities of existing operators, permitting better service to both their employers and the public;
and
c. to prepare operators for CERTIFICATION EXAMINATIONS.1
To provide you with information needed to operate wastewater treatment plants as efficiently as possible,
experienced plant operators prepared the material on treatment plant processes. Each chapter begins with an
introduction and then discusses start up, daily operation, interpretation of lab results and possible approaches to
solving operational problems. This order of topics was determined during the testing program on the basis of
operators' comments indicating the information they needed most urgently. Additional chapters discuss mainte-
nance, safety, sampling, laboratory procedures, hydraulics, records, analysis and presentation of data, and report
writing.
Plant influents (raw wastewater) and the efficiencies of treatment processes vary from plant to plant and from
location to location. The material contained in this program is presented to provide you with an understanding of the
basic operational aspects of your plant and with information to help you analyze and solve operational problems.
This information will help you operate your plant as efficiently as possible.
Wastewater treatment is a rapidly advancing field. To keep pace with scientific advances, the material in this
program must be periodically revised and updated. This means that you, the operator, must recognize the need to
be aware of new advances and the need for continuous training beyond this program.
Originally the concepts for this manual evolved from Mr. Larry Trumbull, 1967 Chairman of the Operator Training
Committee of the California Water Pollution Control Association. Messrs. Bill Dendy and Kenneth Kerri, Project
Directors, investigated possible means of financial support to develop and test the manual and prepared a success-
ful application to the Federal Water Pollution Control Administration (5TT1-WP-16-03). The chapters were written,
tested by pilot groups of operators and potential operators, reviewed by consultants and the Federal Water Quality
Administration, and rewritten in accordance with the suggestions from these sources.
The project directors are indebted to the many operators and other persons who contributed to the manual. Every
effort was made to acknowledge material from the many excellent references in the wastewater treatment field.
Special thanks are due Messrs. John Brady and William Crooks who both contributed immensely to the manual. Mr.
F.J. Ludzack, Chemist, National Training Center, Environmental Protection Agency, Water Quality Office, offered
many technical improvements. A note of thanks is also due our typists, Miss Linda Smith, Mrs. Gloria Uri, Mrs. Daryl
Rasmussen, Mrs. Vicki Sadlem, Mrs. Peggy Courtney, and Mrs. Pris Jernigan. Illustrations were drawn by Mr.
Martin Garrity.
Following the first year of use by over 6500 operators and persons interested in operation, minor editing changes
were necessaiy to correct typing errors and omissions and also to rewrite and expand questions and sections that
could be clarified. Improvements suggested by operators using the manual were summarized and forwarded to a
special Technical Advisory Task Force composed of operators familiar with the manual. This Task Force was
formed as a subcommittee of the Water Pollution Control Federation's Personnel Advancement Committee and was
chaired by Mr. Sam Warrington. We gratefully thank John Brady, Carlos Doyle, Otto Havens, Wilbur Hoist, William
Johnson, F.J. Ludzack and David Vandersommen for their efforts to improve our original version.
Kenneth D. Kerri
Bill Dendy
1973
1 Certification examination. An examination administered by a state or professional association that operators take to indicate a level of
professional competence. In most states the Chief Operator of a plant must be "certified" (successfully pass a certification examination),
and in a few states certification is voluntary. Current trends indicate that certification of operators will be mandatory in all states in the near
future.
iii
-------
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION
During the 1970's many people decided that something must be done to control water pollution. The United
States Congress passed the "Federal Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1972" (PL 92-500) and sub-
sequent amendments. The objective of this Act is to restore and maintain the quality of the Nation's waters. In order
to achieve this objective, the Act contains provisions for a financial grant program to assist municipalities with the
planning, construction, start up and training of personnel in publicly-owned wastewater treatment plants. Grant
funds have been used to build many new plants to date and many more plants will be built in the future. These plants
are becoming more complex and are requiring operators with higher levels of knowledge and skills in order to insure
that the plants produce a high quality effluent.
This manual, OPERATION OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANTS, was used by over 40,000 persons inter-
ested in the operation of treatment plants during the 1970's. Every year when more manuals were printed, the
manual was updated on the basis of comments and suggestions provided by persons using the manual. After six
years of use by operators, the authors, the California Water Pollution Control Association, and the U.S. Environmen-
tal Protection Agency (EPA) decided that the contents of the manual should be reexamined, updated and revised.
To accomplish this task, EPA provided the Foundation of California State University, Sacramento, with a grant to
conduct the necessary studies, writing and field tests.
Recently the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the Association of Boards of Certification (ABC) have
undertaken studies to document "need to know" tasks performed by wastewater treatment plant operators, skills
required, alternative methods of training, training material needs and availability, and the development of instruc-
tional materials for certification examinations. Every effort has been made to incorporate the results of these studies
in this Second Edition of OPERATION OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANTS.
The project directors are indebted to the many operators and other persons who contributed to the Second
Edition. Material from the many excellent references in the wastewater treatment field has been acknowledged
wherever possible. Joe Bahnick, Ken Hay, Adelaide Lilly, Frank Lapensee and Bob Rose, U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, served ably as resource persons, consultants and advisers. Special thanks are due our project
consultants, Mike Mulbarger, Carl Nagel and Al Petrasek who provided technical advice. Our education reviewers
were George Gardner and Larry Hannah. Christine Umeda and Marlene Itagaki administered the national field
testing program. A note of thanks was well earned by our typists Charlene Arora, Elaine Saika and Gladys
Kornweibel. Illustrations were drawn by Martin Garrity.
Kenneth D. Kerri
John Brady
1980
iv
-------
USES OF THIS MANUAL
Originally this manual was developed to serve as a home-study course for operators in remote areas or persons
unable to attend formal classes either due to shift work, personal reasons or the unavailability of suitable classes.
This home-study training program used the concepts of self-paced instruction where you are your own instructor
and work at your own speed. In order to certify that a person had successfully completed this program, an objective
test was included at the end of each chapter and the training course became a correspondence or self-study type of
program.
Once operators started using this manual for home study, they realized that it could serve effectively as a textbook
in the classroom. Many colleges and universities have used the manual as a text in formal classes often taught by
operators. In areas were colleges were not available or were unable to offer classes in the operation of wastewater
treatment plants, operators and utility agencies joined togehter to offer their own courses using the manual.
Occasionally a utility agency has enrolled from three to over 300 of its operators in this training program. A manual
is purchased for each operator. A senior operator or a group of operators are designated as instructors. These
operators help answer questions when the persons in the training program have questions or need assistance. The
instructors grade the objective tests at the end of each chapter, record scores and notify California State University,
Sacramento, of the scores when a person successfully completes this program. This approach avoids the long wait
while papers are being graded and returned by CSUS.
This manual was prepared to help operators run their treatment plants. Please feel free to use it in the manner
which best fits your training needs and the needs of other operators. We will be happy to work with you to assist you
in developing your training program. Please feel free to contact
Ken Kerri, Project Director
Operation of Wastewater Treatment Plants
California State University, Sacramento
6000 Jay Street
Sacramento, California 95819
Phone (916)454-6142
or 454-6366
v
-------
INSTRUCTIONS TO PARTICIPANTS
IN HOME-STUDY COURSE
Procedures for reading the lessons and answering the
questions are contained in this section.
To progress steadily through this program, you should
establish a regular study schedule. For example, many
operators in the past have set aside two hours during
two evenings a week for study.
The study material is contained in three volumes di-
vided into 29 chapters. Some chapters are longer and
more difficult than others. For this reason, many of the
chapters are divided into two or more lessons. The time
required to complete a lesson will depend on your back-
ground and experience. Some people might require an
hour to complete a lesson and some might require three
hours; but that is perfectly all right. THE IMPORTANT
THING IS THAT YOU UNDERSTAND THE MATERIAL
IN THE LESSON!
Each lesson is arranged for you to read a short sec-
tion, write the answers to the questions at the end of the
section, check your answers against suggested an-
swers; and then YOU decide if you understand the mate-
rial sufficiently to continue or whether you should read
the section again. You will find that this procedure is
slower than reading a normal textbook, but you will re-
member much more when you have finished the lesson.
At the end of each chapter, you will find an "objective
test." Mark your answers on the special answer sheet
provided for each chapter. Some discussion and review
questions are provided following each lesson in the later
chapters. These questions review the important points
you have covered in the lesson.
The objective test at the end of each lesson contains
true or false, multiple-choice, fill-in-the-blank, or match-
the-answers types of questions. The purposes of this
exam are to review the chapter and to give experience in
taking different types of exams. MAIL TO THE PRO-
GRAM DIRECTOR ONLY YOUR ANSWERS TO OB-
JECTIVE TESTS ON THE PROVIDED ANSWER
SHEETS.
After you have completed the last objective test, you
will find a final examination. This exam is provided for
you to review how well you remembered the material.
You may wish to review the entire manual before you
take the final exam. Some of the questions are essay-
type questions which are used by some states for
higher-level certification examinations. After you have
completed the final examination, grade your own paper
and determine the areas in which you might need addi-
tional review before your next examination.
You are your own teacher in this program. You could
merely look up the suggested answers from the answer
sheet or copy them from someone else, but you would
not understand the material. Consequently, you would
not be able to apply the material to the operation of your
plant nor recall it during an examination for certification
or a civil service position.
YOU WILL GET OUT OF THIS PROGRAM WHAT
YOU PUT INTO IT.
vi
-------
SUMMARY OF PROCEDURE
OPERATOR (YOU)
1. Read what you are expected to learn in each
chapter (from Chapter 4 on, the major topics are
listed at the beginning of the chapter).
2. Read sections in lesson.
3. Write answers to questions at end of sections in
your notebook. You should write the answers to
the questions just like you would if these were
questions on a test.
4. Check your answers with suggested answers.
5. Decide whether to reread section or to continue
with the next section.
6. Write answers to discussion and review ques-
tions at the end of lessons in your note book.
7. Mark answers to objective test on answer sheet.
8. Mail material to project director.
Ken Kerri, Project Director
Operation of Wastewater Treatment Plants
California State University, Sacramento
6000 Jay Street
Sacramento, California 95819
7
AVAL L
PROJECT DIRECTOR
1. Mails answer sheet for each chapter to operator.
2. Corrects tests, answers any questions, and re-
turns results to operators.
C. ORDER OF WORKING LESSONS
To complete this program you will have to work all of
the chapters. You may proceed in numerical order, or
you may wish to work some lessons sooner. Chapter 17,
"Basic Arithmetic and Treatment Plant Problems," may
be worked before Chapter 4 because Chapter 4 requires
the use of simple arithmetic. If you have trouble with the
problems in Chapter 4 or some of the following chapters,
you may find it helpful to refer to the arithmetic chapter
or you may decide to work the arithmetic chapter first.
Chapter 16, "Laboratory Procedures and Chemistry,"
may be studied with Chapter 5 because the operation of
sedimentation and flotation treatment processes re-
quires some laboratory tests. Again, you may wish to
refer to the lab chapter while working on Chapter 5 and
the other chapters, or you may wish to work the lab
chapter first.
SAFETY IS A VERY IMPORTANT TOPIC. Everyone
working in a treatment plant must always be safety con-
scious. You must take extreme care with your personal
hygiene to prevent the spread of disease to yourself and
your family. Operators in treatment plants daily en-
counter situations and equipment that can cause a seri-
ous disabling injury or illness if the operator is not aware
of the potential danger and does not exercise adequate
precautions. For these reasons, you may decide to work
on the chapter on "Plant Safety and Good Housekeep-
ing" early in your studies. In each chapter SAFE PRO-
CEDURES ARE ALWAYS STRESSED.
vii
-------
COURSE OUTLINE
VOLUME I, SECOND EDITION
Chapter Topic Page
1 The Treatment Plant Operator 1
2 Why Treat Wastes? 11
3 Wastewater Treatment Facilities 25
4 Racks, Screens, Comminutors and Grit Removal 55
5 Sedimentation and Flotation 101
6 Trickling Filters 155
7 Rotating Biological Contactors 197
8 Activated Sludge 227
(Package Plants and Oxidation Ditches)
9 Waste Treatment Ponds 275
10 Disinfection and Chlorination 319
Final Examination 397
Glossary 405
Index 435
TECHNICAL CONSULTANTS, FIRST EDITION
TECHNICAL CONSULTANTS, SECOND EDITION
Mike Mulbarger
viii
-------
COURSE OUTLINE
VOLUME II, SECOND EDITION
Chapter Topic
11 Activated Sludge
(Conventional Activated Sludge Plants)
12 Sludge Digestion and Solids Handling
13 Effluent Disposal
14 Plant Safety and Good Housekeeping
15 Maintenance
16 Laboratory Procedures and Chemistry
17 Basic Arithmetic and Treatment Plant Problems
18 Analysis and Presentation of Data
19 Records and Report Writing
Final Examination
Glossary
Index
VOLUME III, SECOND EDITION
20 Odor Control
21 Activated Sludge
(Pure Oxygen and Operational Control Alternatives)
22 Solids Handling and Disposal
23 Solids Removal from Secondary Effluents
24 Phosphorus Removal
25 Wastewater Reclamation
26 Instrumentation
27 Industrial Waste Monitoring
28 Industrial Waste Treatment
29 Support Systems
Final Examination
Glossary
Index
ix
-------
CHAPTER 1
THE TREATMENT PLANT OPERATOR
by
Larry Trumbull
and
William Crooks
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1. The Treatment Plant Operator
Page
1.0 What is a Treatment Plant Operator? 3
1.01 What does a Treatment Plant Operator do? 3
1.02 Who does the Treatment Plant Operator work for? 3
1.03 Where does the Treatment Plant Operator work? 3
1.04 What pay can a Treatment Plant Operator expect? 3
1.05 What does it take to be a Treatment Plant Operator? 3
1.1 Your Personal Training Course 4
1.2 What Do You Already Know? 4
1.3 The Water Quality Protector: YOU 4
1.4 Your Qualifications 5
1.41 Your Job 5
1.5 Manpower Needs and Future Job Opportunities 6
1.6 Training Yourself to Meet the Needs 7
-------
CHAPTER 1. THE TREATMENT PLANT OPERATOR
This portion of Chapter 1 was prepared especially for the
new or the potential WASTEWATERS treatment plant operator.
If you are an experienced operator, you may find some new
viewpoints.
1.0 WHAT IS A TREATMENT PLANT OPERATOR?
Before modern society entered the scene, water was
purified in a natural cycle as shown below:
(CLOUD4
JRAIN 0
4<4dh6
LAMP
Simplified natural purification cycle
But modern society and the intensive use of the water re-
source and the resulting water pollution could not wait for sun,
wind, and time to accomplish the purification of soiled water;
consequently, treatment plants were built. Thus, nature was
given an assist by a team consisting of designers, builders,
and treatment plant operators. Designers and builders occupy
the scene only for an interval, but operators go on forever.
They are the final and essential link in maintaining and protect-
ing the aquatic environment upon which all life depends.
1.01 What does a Treatment Plant Operator do?
Simply described, the operator keeps a wastewater (sew-
age) treatment plant working. Physically the operator turns
valves, pushes switches, collects samples, lubricates equip-
ment, reads gages and records data.
An operator may also maintain equipment and plant area by
painting, weeding, gardening, repairing and replacing. Men-
tally an operator inspects records, observes conditions, makes
calculations to determine that the plant is working effectively,
and predicts necessary maintenance and facility needs to as-
sure continued effective operation of the plant. The operator
also has an obligation to explain to supervisors, councils, civic
bodies, and the general public what the plant does, and most
importantly, why its continued and expanded financial support
is vital to the welfare of the community.
1.02 Who does the Treatment Plant Operator work for?
An operator's paycheck usually comes from a city, sanitation
district, or other public agency. The operator may, however, be
employed by one of the many large industries which operate
their own treatment plants. As an operator you are responsible
to your employer for maintaining an economically and effi-
ciently operating facility. An even greater obligation rests with
the operator because the great numbers of people who rely
upon downstream water supplies are totally dependent upon
the operator's competence and trustworthiness for their wel-
fare. In the final analysis, the operator is really working for
these vitally affected downstream water users.
1.03 Where does the Treatment Plant Operator work?
Obviously the operator works in a wastewater treatment
plant. But the different types and locations of treatment plants
offer a wide range of working conditions. From the mountains
to the sea, wherever people congregate into communities,
wastewater treatment plants will be found. From a unit process
operator at a complex municipal facility to a one-person man-
ager of a small town plant, you can select your own special
place in treatment plant operation.
1.04 What pay can a Treatment Plant Operator expect?
In dollars? Prestige? Job satisfaction? Community service?
In opportunities for advancement? By whatever scale you use,
returns are what you make them. If you choose a large munici-
pality, the pay is good and advancement prospects are tops.
Choose a small town and pay may not be as good; but job
satisfaction, freedom from time-clock hours, community serv-
ice, and prestige may well add up to outstanding personal
achievement. Total reward depends on you.
The operator's duties
1.05 What does It take to be a Treatment Plant Operator?
Desire. First you must choose to enter this profession. You
can do it with a grammar school, a high school, or a college
education. While some jobs will always exist for manual labor,
the real and expanding need is for TRAINED OPERATORS.
New techniques, advanced equipment, and increasing in-
strumentation require a new breed of operator, one who is
V/AfE'R
50IU
1 Wastewater. The used water and solids from a community that flow to a treatment plant. Storm water, surface water, and groundwater
infiltration also may be included in the wastewater that enters a plant. The term "sewage" usually refers to household wastes, but this word is
being replaced by the term "wastewater."
-------
4 Treatment Plants
willing to learn today, and gain tomorrow, for surely your plant
will move towards newer and more effective operating proce-
dures and treatment processes. Indeed, the truly service-
minded operator assists in adding to and improving the plant
performance on a continuing basis.
Tomorrow's forgotten operator stopped learning yesterday
You can be an operator tomorrow by beginning your learning
today; or you can be a better operator, ready for advancement,
by accelerating your learning today.
This training course, then, is your start towards a better to-
morrow, both for you and for the public who will receive better
water from your efforts.
QUESTIONS
Place an "X" by the correct answer or answers. After you
have answered all the questions, check your answers with
those given at the end of the chapter on page 8. Reread any
sections you did not understand and then proceed to the next
section. You are your own teacher in this training program, and
YOU should decide when you understand the material and are
ready to continue with new material.
EXAMPLE
This is a training course on
A. Accounting
B. Engineering
X c. Wastewater Treatment Plant Operation
D. Salesmanship.
1.0A. Wastewater is the same thing as:
A. Rain
B. Soil
C. Sewage
D. Condensation.
1 OB. What does an operator do?
A. Collect samples.
B. Lubricate equipment.
C. Record data.
1.0C. Who employs Treatment Plant Operators?
A. Cities.
B. Sanitation districts.
C. Industries.
Check your answers on page 8.
1.1 YOUR PERSONAL TRAINING COURSE
Beginning on this page, you are embarking on a training
course which has been carefully prepared to allow you to im-
prove your knowledge of and ability to operate a wastewater
treatment plant. You will be able to proceed at your own pace;
you will have an opportunity to learn a little or a lot about each
topic. The course has been prepared this way to fit the various
needs of operators, depending on what kind of plant you have
or how much you need to learn about it. To study for certifica-
tion examinations, you will have to cover all the material. You
will never know everything about your plant or about the
wastewater which flows through it, but you can begin to answer
some very important questions about how and when certain
things happen in the plant. You can also learn to manipulate
your plant so that it operates at maximum efficiency.
1.2 WHAT DO YOU ALREADY KNOW?
If you already have some experience operating a wastewa-
ter treatment plant, you may use the first three chapters for a
review. If you are relatively new to the wastewater treatment
field, these chapters will provide you with the background in-
formation necessary to understand the later chapters. The re-
mainder of this introductory chapter describes your role as a
PROTECTOR OF WATER QUALITY, your QUALIFICATIONS
to do your job, a little about manpower needs in the wastewater
treatment field, and some information on other TRAINING OP-
PORTUNITIES.
1.3 THE WATER QUALITY PROTECTOR: YOU
Historically Americans have shown a great lack of interest in
the protection of their water resources. We have been content
to think that "the solution to pollution is dilution." For years we
were able to dump our wastes with little or no treatment back
into the nearest RECEIVING WATERS.2 As long as there was
enough dilution water to absorb the waste material, nature took
care of our disposal problems for us. As more and more towns
and industry sprang up, waste loads increased until the natural
purification processes could no longer do the job. Many water-
ways were converted into open sewers. Unfortunately, for
many areas this did not signal the beginning of a clean-up
campaign. It merely increased the frequency of the cry: "We
don't have the money for a treatment plant," or the ever-
popular, "If we make industries treat their wastes they will
move to another state." Thus, the pollution of our waters in-
creased.
f
Water quality protector
Within the last few years, we have seen many changes in
this depressing picture. We now realize that we must give
nature a hand by treating wastes before they are discharged.
Adequate treatment of wastes will not only protect our health
and that of our downstream neighbors; it can also increase
property values, allow game fishing and various recreational
uses to be enjoyed, and attract water-using industries to the
area. Today we are seeing massive efforts being undertaken
to control water pollution and improve water quality throughout
the nation. This includes the efforts not only of your own com-
munity, county and state, but also the federal government
Great sums of public and private funds are now being in-
2 Receiving Water. A stream, river, lake, or ocean into which treated or untreated wastewater is discharged.
-------
The Operator 5
vested in large, complex municipal and industrial wastewater
treatment facilities to overcome this pollution; and you, the
treatment plant operator, will play a key role in the battle. With-
out efficient operation of your plant, much of the research,
planning, and building that has been done and will be done to
accomplish the goals of water quality control in your area will
be wasted. You are the difference between a facility and a
performing unit. You are, in fact, a WATER QUALITY PRO-
TECTOR on the front line of the water pollution battle.
Pollution
The receiving water quality standards and waste discharge
requirements that your plant has been built to meet have been
formulated to PROTECT the water users downstream from
your plant. These uses may include domestic water supply,
industrial water supply, agricultural water supply, stock and
wildlife watering, propagation of fish and other aquatic and
marine life, shellfish culture, swimming and other water contact
sports, boating, esthetic enjoyment, hydroelectric power, navi-
gation, and others.
Therefore, you have an obligation to the users of the water
downstream, as well as to the people of your district or munici-
pality. You are the KEY WATER QUALITY PROTECTOR and
must realize that you are in a responsible position.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 8.
1,3A Why must municipal and industrial wastewaters receive
adequate treatment?
1.3B How did many receiving waters become polluted?
1.4. YOUR QUALIFICATIONS
The skill and ability required for your job depend to a large
degree on the size and type of treatment plant where you are
employed. You may work at a large modern treatment plant
serving several hundred thousand persons and employing a
hundred or more operators. In this case you are probably a
specialist in one or more phases of the treatment process.
On the other hand, you may operate a small plant serving
only a thousand people or fewer. You may be the only operator
at the plant or, at best, have only one or two additional employ-
ees. If this is the case, you must be a "jack-of-all trades" be-
cause of the diversity of your tasks.
1.41 Your Job
To describe the operator's duties, let us start at the begin-
ning. Let us say that the need for a new or improved wastewa-
ter treatment plant has long been recognized by the commu-
nity. The community has voted to issue the necessary bonds to
finance the project, and the consulting engineers have submit-
ted plans and specifications. It is to the best interests of the
community and the consulting engineer that you be in on the
ground floor planning. If it is a new plant, you should be present
or at least available during the construction period in order to
become completely familiar with the entire plant, including the
equipment and machinery and their operation. This will provide
you with the opportunity to relate your plant drawings to actual
facilities.
You and the engineer should discuss how the treatment
plant should best be run and the means of operation the de-
signer had in mind when the plant was designed. If it is an old
plant being remodeled, you are in a position to offer excellent
advice to the consulting engineer. Your experience provides
valuable technical knowledge concerning the characteristics of
wastewater, its sources, and the limitations of the present
facilities. Together with the consultant, you are a member of an
expert team able to advise the district or city.
Once the plant is operating, you become an administrator. In
a small plant your duties may not include supervision of per-
sonnel, but you are still in charge of records. You are responsi-
ble for operating the plant as efficiently as possible, keeping in
Visitors touring a treatment plant.
-------
6 Treatment Plants
mind that the primary objective is to protect the receiving water
quality by continuous and efficient plant performance. Without
adequate, reliable records of every phase of operation, the
effectiveness of your operation has not been documented (re-
corded).
Vou may also be the budget administrator. Most certainly
you are in the best position to give advice on budget require-
ments, management problems, and future planning. You
should be aware of the necessity for additional expenditures,
including funds for plant enlargement, equipment replacement,
and laboratory requirements. You should recognize and define
such needs in sufficient time to inform the proper officials to
enable them to accomplish early planning and budgeting.
You are in the field of public relations and must be able to
explain the purpose and operation of your plant to visitors, civic
organizations, school classes, representatives of news media,
and even to city council or directors of your district. Public
interest in water quality is increasing, and you should be pre-
pared to conduct plant tours that will contribute to public accep-
tance and support. A well-guided tour for officials of regulatory
agencies or other operators may provide these people with
sufficient understanding of your plant to allow them to suggest
helpful solutions to operational problems.
Special care and safety must be practiced when visitors are
taken through your treatment plant. An accident could spoil all
of your public relations efforts.
The appearance of your plant indicates to the visitor the type
of operation you maintain. If the plant is dirty and rundown with
flies and other insects swarming about, you will be unable to
convince your visitors that the plant is doing a good job. YOUR
RECORDS SHOWING A HIGH-QUALITY EFFLUENT3 WILL
MEAN NOTHING TO THESE VISITING CITIZENS UNLESS
YOUR PLANT APPEARS CLEAN AND WELL-MAINTAINED
AND THE EFFLUENT LOOKS GOOD.
Another aspect of your public relations duties is your deal-
ings with the downstream water user. Unfortunately, the
operator is often considered by the downstream user as a
polluter rather than a water quality protector. Through a good
public information program, backed by facts supported by reli-
able data, you can correct the impression held by the
downstream user and establish "good neighbor" relations.
This is indeed a challenge. Again, you must understand that
you hold a very responsible position and be aware that the sole
purpose of the operation of your plant is to protect the
downstream user, be that user a private property owner,
another city or district, an industry, or a fisherman.
You are required to understand certain laboratory proce-
dures in order to conduct various tests on samples of wastewa-
ter and receiving waters. On the basis of the data obtained
from these tests, you may have to adjust the operation of the
treatment plant to meet stream standards or discharge re-
quirements.
As an operator you must have a knowledge of the compli-
cated mechanical principles involved in many treatment
mechanisms. In order to measure and control the wastewater
flowing through the plant, you must have some understanding
Clean Stream
of hydraulics. Practical knowledge of electrical motors, cir-
cuitry, and controls is also essential.
Safety is a very important operator responsibility. Unfortu-
nately too many operators take safety for granted. This is one
reason why the wastewater treatment industry has one of the
worst safety records of any industry. YOU have the responsibil-
ity to be sure that your treatment plant is a safe place to work
and visit. Everyone must follow safe procedures and under-
stand why safe procedures must be followed at all times. All
operators must be aware of the safety hazards in and around
treatment plants. You should plan or be a part of an active
safety program. Chief operators frequently have the responsi-
bility of training new operators and should encourage all
operators to become certified.
Clearly then, the modern day wastewater treatment plant
operator must possess a broad range of qualifications.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 8.
1.4A Why is it important that the operator be present during
the construction of a new plant?
1,4B How does the operator become involved in public rela-
tions?
1.5 MANPOWER NEEDS AND FUTURE JOB
OPPORTUNITIES
The wastewater treatment field, like so many others, is
changing rapidly. New plants are being constructed, and old
plants are being modified and enlarged to handle the wastewa-
ter from our growing population and to treat the new chemicals
being produced by our space age technology. Operators,
maintenance personnel, foremen, managers, instrumentation
experts, and laboratory technicians are sorely needed.
3 Effluent. Wastewater or other liquid - raw, partially or completely treated - flowing FROM a basin, treatment process, or treatment plant.
-------
»The Operator 7
A look at past records and future predictions indicates that
wastewater treatment is a rapidly growing field. Municipalities
employed approximately 20,000 operators in 1967 and over
67,000 operators in 1974. Industry employed approximately
3,500 operators in 1967 and around 12,000 plant operators by
1972. The need for trained operators is increasing rapidly and
is expected to continue in the future.4
1.6 TRAINING YOURSELF TO MEET THE NEEDS
This training course is not the only one available to help you
improve your abilities. The states have offered various types of
both long- and short-term operator training through their health
departments or water pollution control associations have pro-
vided training classes conducted by members of the associa-
tions, largely on a volunteer basis. The Water Pollution Control
Federation has developed two visual aid training courses to
complement its Manual of Practice No. 11. State and local
colleges have provided valuable training under their own
sponsorship or in partnership with others. Many state, local
and private agencies have conducted both long- and short-
term training as well as interesting and informative seminars.
The California Water Pollution Control Association has pre-
pared two textbooks, one on laboratory procedures and one on
mathematics. Excellent textbooks have been written by many
state agencies. Those of the New York State Health Depart-
ment and the Texas Water Utilities Association deserve spe-
cial attention. The Canadian government has developed very
good training manuals for operators.
Listed below are several very good references in the field of
wastewater treatment plant operation that are frequently re-
ferred to throughout this course. The name in quotes repre-
sents the term usually used by operators when they mention
the reference. Prices listed are those available when this man-
ual was published and will probably increase in the future.
1. "MOP 11." OPERATION OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT
PLANTS, WPCF Manual of Practice No. 11, Water Pollution
Control Federation, 2626 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W.,
Washington, D.C. 20037. Price $8.00 to members; $16.00
to others.
2. "NEW YORK MANUALMANUAL OF INSTRUCTION
FOR SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT OPERATORS, dis-
tributed in New York by the New York State Department of
Health, Office of Public Health Education, Water Pollution
Control Board, Distributed outside of New York State by
Health Education Service, P.O. Box 7126, Albany, New
York 12224. Price $2.59.
3. "TEXAS MANUAL." MANUAL OF WASTEWATER OPER-
ATIONS, prepared by Texas Water Utilities Association.
Obtainable from Texas Water Utilities Assocation, 6521
Burnet Lane, Austin, Texas 78757. Price $15.00.
These publications cover the entire field of treatment plant
operation. At the end of many of the chapters yet to come, lists
of other references will be provided.
n
4 Data contained in this paragraph were obtained from "Manpower and Training Needs in Water Pollution Control," Report of the Department
of the Interior, Federal Water Pollution Control Administration to the Congress of the United States, Senate Document No. 49, 90th Congress,
First Session, Washington, D.C., 1967 and from "Study of Municipal Wastewater Treatment Plant Manpower and Training Needs and
Resources," Municipal Permits and Operations Division, Office of Water Program Operations, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Washington, D.C., 1974.
-------
8 Treatment Plants
SUGGESTED ANSWERS
Chapter 1. THE TREATMENT PLANT OPERATOR
You are not expected to have the exact answer suggested
for questions requiring written answers, but you should have
the correct idea. The numbering of the questions refers to the
section in the manual where you can find the information to
answer the questions. Answers to questions numbered 1.0 can
be found in Section 1.0, What is a Treatment Plant Operator?
Answers to questions on page 4.
1.0A. C
1.0B. A, B, C
1.0C. A, B, C
^swers to questions on page 5.
1.3A. Municipal and industrial wastewaters must receive
adequate treatment to protect receiving water users.
1.3B. Receiving waters became polluted by a lack of public
concern for the impact of waste discharges and by
discharging wastewater into a receiving water beyond
its natural purification capacity.
Answers to questions on page 6.
1.4A The operator should be present during the construction
of a new plant in order to become familiar with the plant
before the operator begins operating it.
1,4B The operator becomes involved in public relations by
explaining the purpose and operation of the plant to
visitors, civic organizations, newspaper people, and
supervisors.
9
DIRECTIONS FOR WORKING OBJECTIVE TEST
Chapter 1. THE TREATMENT PLANT OPERATOR
1. You have been provided with a special answer sheet for
each chapter. Be sure you follow the special directions pro-
vided with the answer sheets. If you lose an answer sheet
or have any problems, please notify the Project Director.
2. Mark your answers on the answer sheet with a dark lead
pencil. Do not use ink.
For example, Question 2 has three correct answers (1, 2
and 3). Therefore, you should place a mark under Columns
1, 2 and 3 on the answer sheet.
Questions 4 through 7 are true or false questions. If a ques-
tion is true, then mark Column 1, and if false mark Column
2. The correct answer to Question 4 is true; therefore, place
a mark in Column 1.
Please mark your answers in your workbook for your record
because answer sheets will not be returned to you.
Mail answer sheet to the Project Director immediately after
you have completed the test.
Answer sheets may be folded (but not into more than 3
equal parts) and mailed in a 4 x 9'/2 standard white en-
velope.
-------
The Operator 9
OPERATION OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANTS
IMPORTANT
PLEASE READ INSTRUCTIONS ON REVERSE SIDE BEFORE COMPLETING THIS FORM.
Name: JOf £
Lait First Ml
Address: 7// /MM/A/ /V
r//WKVTr/> CA Q(23Y
City State Zip Code
Mail to: Professor Kenneth Kerri
California State University, Sacramento
6000 Jay Street
Sacramento, California 95819
OFFICE USE ONLY
DO NOT MARK
]
•
J
| SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER ISJuMBErI
iTKMsnna
®©©©©®®®®
•®®®©®®o®
©•©®©®©@©
®®#®@®®®®
®®®#®®©®®
®®®®#®®®®
®®®®®#©©©
©©©@©®#©©
®®®®®®®0>®
©©©©©©©©#
• ®
©#
®©
®@
©
©
©
©
©
©
FOLD-
IMPORTANT DIRECTIONS FOR MARKING ANSWERS
Use black lead pencil only ( # 2 or softer).
Make heavy black marks that fill the circle completely.
Erase clearly any answer you wish to change.
Make no stray marks on this answer sheet.
EXAMPLE
1. MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS:
correct answers. If 2 and 3 are corf
question 1, mark:
1 2 3 4 5
i@MOC
:t fori
2. TRUE-FALSE QUESTIONS: litrmt till ir
the circle in column 1; if fuse, fill\n column
If question 3 is true, mark:
1 2%3 4 5
3«®TOO
SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER
CHAPTER
NUMBER
I
z
Si lit
01
©®®®®®©®®
#©©©©©©©©
©#©©©©©©©
©®•©©©©®®
®©©#®©©©©
©®®®#®©®®
©®®©©#©©©
©©©©©©•©©
®®®®®®©•©
©©©©©©©©G
©#©©©©©©©©
•©©©
FOLD
- \
1 2 3 4 5
f 2 3V f
i®®ooo
l/®©0®£)
1 2 3 4 5
/ 1 2 3 4\5
2«MOO
|2®^OPV
1 2 3 4 5
*-<2 3^ 9
3®®000
i3®®oqo
1 2 3 4 6
1 2 3 ysy
4§®000
14®©Q
1 2 3 4 6
1 2 *3 4 5
5®®000
15 ®0OOO
1 2 3 4 6
1 2 3 4 5
6®®000
16 ©0OOO
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5(
7 ®®ooo
17®©OOC?
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
8 ®©ooo
18©®000
1 2 3 4 6
1 2 3 4 5
9®®000
19®®000
1 2 3 4 6
1 2 3 4 5
10 ®©ooo
20®®OOO
2.
o
3 4 5
reooo
r1 2 3 ~ 5
f3®®OOp
1 V8 4 5
25®®ooo
2 3 4 5
28®©000
1 2 3 4 5
29®©000
1 2 3 4 5
30®®OOO
\ vtl 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 b
1 2 3 4 b
4®®ooo
41 ©® OOO
51 ©©OOO
J 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 b
1 2 3 4 5
32® ©OOO
42 © © O O O
52 ® ©OOO
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 6
33 ® ©OOO
43®® OOO
53 ©©OOO
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
34®® OOO
44® ® OOO
54 © ©OOO
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
35®®000
45® ©OOO
55 ©©OOO
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
36® ®000
46 ® © O 0 O
56 ©©OOO
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
37®©000
47 ©©OOO
57 ©©OOO
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
38 ® ® O O O
48 ® ® O O O
58® ©OOO
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
39®®000
49 © ® 0 0 O
59©®000
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
40®©OOO
50®®OOO
60®©OOO
-------
10 Treatment Plants
OBJECTIVE TEST
Chapter 1. THE TREATMENT PLANT OPERATOR
Please mark correct answers on the answer sheet.
1. The used water and solids from a community that flow to a
treatment plant are called ?
1. Effluent 3. Sludge
2. Mixed Liquor 4. Wastewater
2. Receiving water uses protected by an operator include
1. Boating. 3. Fishing.
2. Drinking water supply. 4. None of these
3. What kinds of jobs are available in the wastewater treat-
ment field in addition to those available for operators?
1. Foremen
2. Instrumentation experts
3. Laboratory technicians
4. Maintenance personnel
5. Manager
TRUE OR FALSE:
4. In many treatment plants the operator must be a "jack-of-
all-trades."
1. True
2. False
5. A treatment plant operator is a WATER QUALITY protector.
1. True
2. False
6. Plant visitors are impressed by records showing efficient
plant operation, and their opinions are never influenced by
the appearance of the plant and grounds.
1. True
2. False
7. After finishing this program, an operator will need to con-
tinue to study in order to keep pace with changes occurring
in the field.
1. True
2. False
END OF OBJECTIVE TEST
-------
CHAPTER 2
WHY TREAT WASTES?
by
William Crooks
-------
12 Treatment Plants
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 2. Why Treat Wastes?
Page
PRONUNCIATION KEY 13
GLOSSARY 14
2.0 Prevention of Pollution 16
2.1 What is Pure Water? 16
2.2 Types of Waste Discharges 16
2.3 Effects of Waste Discharges 17
2.30 Sludge and Scum 17
2.31 Oxygen Depletion 17
2.32 Human Health 18
2.33 Other Effects 18
2.4 Solids in Wastewater 18
2.40 Types of Solids 19
2.41 Total Solids 19
2.42 Dissolved Solids 19
2.43 Suspended Solids 19
2.44 Organic and Inorganic Solids 20
2.45 Floatable Solids 20
2.5 Natural Cycles 20
2.6 NPDES Permits 21
2.7 Additional Reading 21
2.8 Review 21
-------
Waste Treatment 13
PROJECT PRONUNCIATION KEY
by Warren L. Prentice
The Project Pronunciation Key is designed to aid you in the
pronunciation of new words. While this Key is based primarily
on familiar sounds, it does not attempt to follow any particular
pronunciation guide. This Key is designed solely to aid
operators in this program.
You may find it helpful to refer to other available sources for
pronunciation help. Each current standard dictionary contains
a guide to its own pronunciation Key. Each Key will be different
from each other and from this Key. Examples of the differences
between the Key used in this program and the WEBSTERS
NEW WORLD DICTIONARY "Key1" are shown below:
1 Te r m
Pro jo c: t Key
Webster Key
1 ac id
AS-i ci
as <3cl
Jj co 1 i f o r in
C 0 A L-1 ¦ f o r ni
k o - la-f o r m
3 b i o 1 o tj i c, a 1
B U Y-o-LO DC E - i k-c u 11
bi-o-l a )- i-ka 1
In using this Key, you should accent (say louder) the syllable
which appears in capital letters. The following chart is pre-
sented to give examples of how to pronounce words using the
Project Key.
Syllable
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
Word
acid
AS
id
coagulant
CO
AGG
you
lent
biological
BUY
0.
LODGE
ik
cull
The first word ACID has its first syllable accented. The sec-
ond word, COAGULANT, has its second syllable accented.
The third word, BIOLOGICAL, has its first and third syllables
accented.
We hope you will find the Key useful in unlocking the pro-
nunciation of any new word.
1 The WEBSTER'S NEW WORLD DICTIONARY, College Edition, 1968, was chosen rather than an unabridged dictionary because of its
availability to the operator. Other editions may be slightly different.
-------
14 Treatment Plants
GLOSSARY
Chapter 2. WHY TREAT WASTES?
AEROBIC BACTERIA
AEROBIC BACTERIA
(AIR-O-bick back-TEAR-e-ah)
Bacteria which will live and reproduce only in an environment containing oxygen which is available for their respiration (breathing),
namely atmospheric oxygen or oxygen dissolved in water. Oxygen combined chemically, such as in water molecules (H20), cannot
be used for respiration by aerobic bacteria.
ANAEROBIC BACTERIA ANAEROBIC BACTERIA
(AN-air-O-bick back-TEAR-e-ah)
Bacteria that live and reproduce in an environment containing no "free" or dissolved oxygen. Anaerobic bacteria obtain their oxygen
supply by breaking down chemical compounds which contain oxygen, such as sulfate (S04).
BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND (BOD)
BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND
The rate at which microorganisms use oxygen in water or wastewater while stabilizing decomposable organic matter under aerobic
conditions. In decomposition, organic matter serves as food for the bacteria and energy results from its oxidation.
BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND (BOD) TEST BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND TEST
A procedure that measures the rate of oxygen use under controlled conditions of time and temperature. Standard test conditions
include dark incubation at 20°C for a specified time (usually five days).
COLIFORM (COAL-i-form) COLIFORM
One type of bacteria. The presence of coliform-group bacteria is an indication of possible pathogenic bacterial contamination. The
human intestinal tract is one of the main habitats of coliform bacteria. They may also be found in the intestinal tracts of warm-
blooded animals, and in plants, soil, air, and the aquatic environment. Fecal coliforms are those coliforms found in the feces of
various warm-blooded animals; whereas the term "coliform" also includes other environmental sources.
DISINFECTION (dis-in-FECK-shun) DISINFECTION
The process designed to kill most microorganisms in wastewater, including essentially all pathogenic (disease-causing) bacteria.
There are several ways to disinfect, with chlorination being most frequently used in water and wastewater treatment plants.
Compare with STERILIZATION.
EFFLUENT (EF-lu-ent) EFFLUENT
Wastewater or other liquid — raw, partially or completely treated — flowing FROM a basin, treatment process, or treatment plant.
IMHOFF CONE
A clear, cone-shaped container marked with graduations. The cone is used to measure the
volume of settleable solids in a specific volume of wastewater.
IMHOFF CONE
INORGANIC WASTE (IN-or-GAN-nick) INORGANIC WASTE
Waste material such as sand, salt, iron, calcium, and other materials which are only slightly affected by the action of organisms.
Inorganic wastes are chemical substances of mineral origin; whereas organic wastes are chemical substances usually of animal or
vegetable origin.
MILLIGRAMS PER LITER, mgIL
MILL-i-GRAMS per LEET-er)
MILLIGRAMS PER LITER, mgIL
A measure of the concentration by weight of a substance per unit volume. For practical purposes, one mgIL is equal to one part per
million parts (ppm). Thus, a liter of water with a specific gravity of 1.0 weighs one million milligrams; and if it contains 10 milligrams of
dissolved oxygen, the concentration is 10 milligrams per million milligrams, or 10 milligrams per liter (10 mg/L), or 10 parts of oxygen
per million parts of water, or 10 parts per million (10 ppm).
NUTRIENT CYCLE NUTRIENT CYCLE
The transformation or change of a nutrient from one form to another until the nutrient has returned to the original form, thus
completing the cycle. The cycle may take place under either aerobic or anaerobic conditions.
-------
Waste Treatment 15
NUTRIENTS NUTRIENTS
Substances which are required to support living plants and organisms. Major nutrients are carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, sulfur,
nitrogen, and phosphorus. Nitrogen and phosphorus are difficult to remove from wastewater by conventional treatment processes
because they are water soluble and tend to recycle. Also see NUTRIENT CYCLE.
ORGANIC WASTE (or-GAN-nick) ORGANIC WASTE
Waste material which comes mainly from animal or vegetable sources. Organic waste generally can be consumed by bacteria and
other small organisms. Inorganic wastes are chemical substances of mineral origin.
PATHOGENIC BACTERIA PATHOGENIC BACTERIA
(path-o-JEN-nick)
Bacteria, viruses or cysts which can cause disease (typhoid, cholera, dysentery). There are many types of bacteria which do NOT
cause disease and which are NOT called pathogenic. Many beneficial bacteria are found in wastewater treatment processes
actively cleaning up organic wastes.
pH (PEA-A-ch) pH
Technically, this is the logarithm of the reciprocal of the hydrogen-ion concentration, which is explained in Chapter 16, "Laboratory
Procedures and Chemistry." For now, it is sufficient to understand that pH expresses the intensity of the acid or alkaline condition of
a liquid. The pH may range from 0 to 14, where 0 is most acid and 14 is most alkaline, and 7 is neutral. Most natural waters have a
pH between 6.5 and 8.5.
POLLUTION POLLUTION
Any change in the natural state of water which interferes with its beneficial reuse or causes failure to meet water-quality require-
ments.
PRIMARY TREATMENT PRIMARY TREATMENT
A wastewater treatment process that takes place in a rectangular or circular tank and allows those substances in wastewater that
readily settle or float to be separated from the water being treated.
RECEIVING WATER RECEIVING WATER
A stream, river, lake or ocean into which treated or untreated wastewater is discharged.
SECONDARY TREATMENT SECONDARY TREATMENT
A wastewater treatment process used to convert dissolved or suspended materials into a form more readily separated from the
water being treated. Usually the process follows primary treatment by sedimentation. The process commonly is a type of biological
treatment process followed by secondary clarifiers that allow the solids to settle out from the water being treated.
SEPTIC (SEP-tik) SEPTIC
This condition is produced by anaerobic bacteria. If severe, the wastewater turns black, gives off foul odors, contains little or no
dissolved oxygen and creates a heavy oxygen demand.
STABILIZE STABILIZE
To convert to a form that resists change. Organic material is stabilized by bacteria which convert the material to gases and other
relatively inert substances. Stabilized organic material generally will not give off obnoxious odors.
STERILIZATION (stare-uh-luh-ZAY-shun) STERILIZATION
The removal or destruction of all living microorganisms, including pathogenic and saprophytic bacteria, vegetative forms, and
spores. Compare with DISINFECTION.
TRANSPIRATION (TRAN-spear-RAY-shun) TRANSPIRATION
The process by which water vapor is lost to the atmosphere from living plants.
-------
16 Treatment Plants
CHAPTER 2. WHY TREAT WASTES?
2.0 PREVENTION OF POLLUTION
The operator's main job is to protect the many users of re-
ceiving waters. As an operator you must do the best you can to
remove any substances which will unreasonably affect these
users.
Many people think ANY discharge of waste to a body of
water is pollution. However, with our present system of using
water to carry away the waste products of home and industry, it
would be impossible and perhaps unwise to prohibit the dis-
charge of all wastewater to oceans, streams, and groundwater
basins. Present day technology is capable of treating wastes in
such a manner that existing or potential receiving water uses
are not unreasonably affected. Definitions of pollution include
any interference with beneficial reuse of water or failure to
meet water quality requirements. Any questions or comments
regarding this definition must be settled by the appropriate
enforcement agency.
2.1 WHAT IS PURE WATER?
Water is a combination of two parts hydrogen and one part
oxygen, or H2O. This is true, however, only for "pure" water
such as might be manufactured in a laboratory. Water as we
know it is not "pure" hydrogen and oxygen. Even the distilled
water we purchase in the store has measurable quantities of
various substances in addition to hydrogen and oxygen. Rain
water, even before it reaches the earth, contains many sub-
stances. These substances, since they are not found in "pure"
water, may be considered "impurities." When rain falls through
the atmosphere, it gains nitrogen and other gases. As soon as
the rain flows overland, it begins to dissolve from the earth and
rocks such substances as calcium, magnesium, sodium,
chloride, sulfate, iron, nitrogen, phosphorus, and many other
materials. Organic matter (matter derived from plants and ani-
mals) is also dissolved by water from contact with decaying
leaves, twigs, grass, or small insects and animals. Thus it
should be realized that a fresh flowing mountain stream may
pick up many natural "impurities," some possibly in harmful
amounts, before it ever reaches civilization or is affected by the
waste discharges of society. Many of these substances, how-
ever, are needed in small amounts to support life and be useful
to humans. Concentrations of impurities must be controlled or
regulated to prevent harmful levels in receiving waters.
I
6
Water + Impurities
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 23.
2.1 A What are some of the dissolved substances in water?
2.1 B How does water pick up dissolved substances?
2.2 TYPES OF WASTE DISCHARGES
The waste discharge that first comes to mind in any discus-
sion of stream pollution is the discharge of domestic wastewa-
ter. Wastewater contains a large amount of ORGANIC
WASTE.1 Industry also contributes substantial amounts of or-
ganic waste. Some of these organic industrial wastes come
from vegetable and fruit packing; dairy processing; meat pack-
ing; tanning; and processing of poultry, oil, paper and fiber
(wood), and many more.
Another classification of wastes is INORGANIC WASTES,2
1 Organic Waste (or-GAN-nick). Waste material which comes mainly from animal or vegetable sources. Organic waste generally can be
consumed by bacteria and other small organisms. Inorganic wastes are chemical substances of mineral origin.
2 Inorganic Waste (IN-or-GAN-nick). Waste material such as sand, salt, iron, calcium, and other materials which are only slightly affected by
the action of organisms. Inorganic wastes are chemical substances of mineral origin; whereas organic wastes are chemical substances
usually of animal or vegetable origin.
-------
Waste Treatment 17
Domestic wastewater contains inorganic material as well as
organic, and many industries discharge inorganic wastes
which add to the mineral content of receiving waters. For in-
stance, a discharge of salt brine (sodium chloride) for water
softening will increase the amount of sodium and chloride in
the receiving waters. Some industrial wastes may introduce
inorganic substances such as chromium or copper, which are
very toxic to aquatic life. Other industries (such as gravel wash-
ing plants) discharge appreciable amounts of soil, sand or grit,
which also may be classified as inorganic waste.
There are two other major types of wastes that do not fit
either the organic or inorganic classification. These are heated
(thermal) wastes and radioactive wastes. Waters with temper-
atures exceeding the requirements of the enforcing agency
may come from cooling processes used by industry and from
thermal power stations generating electricity. Radioactive
wastes are usually controlled at their source, but could come
from hospitals, research laboratories, and nuclear power
plants.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 23.
2.2A Several of the following contain significant quantities of
organic material. Which are they?
a. Domestic Wastewater
b. Cooling Water from Thermal Power Stations
c. Paper Mill Wastes
d. Metal Plating Wastes
e. Tanning Wastes
2.2B List four types of pollution.
2.3 EFFECTS OF WASTE DISCHARGES
Certain substances not removed by wastewater treatment
processes can cause problems in receiving waters. This sec-
tion reviews some of these substances and discusses why
they should be treated.
2.30 Sludge and Scum
If certain wastes (including domestic wastewater) do not re-
ceive adequate treatment, large amounts of solids may ac-
cumulate on the banks of the receiving waters, or they may
settle to the bottom to form sludge deposits or float to the
surface and form rafts of scum. Sludge deposits and scum are
not only unsightly but, if they contain organic material, they
may also cause oxygen depletion and be a source of odors.
PRIMARY TREATMENT3 units in the wastewater treatment
plant are designed and operated to remove the sludge and
scum before they reach the receiving waters.
2.31 Oxygen Depletion
Most living creatures need oxygen to survive, including fish
and other aquatic life. Although most streams and other sur-
face waters contain less than 0.001 % DISSOLVED OXYGEN
(10 milligrams of oxygen per liter of water, or 10 mgIL* most
fish can thrive if there are at least 5 mg1L and other conditions
are favorable. When oxidizable wastes are discharged to a
stream, bacteria begin to feed on the waste and decompose or
break down the complex substances in the waste into simple
chemical compounds. These bacteria also use dissolved oxy-
gen (similar to human respiration or breathing) from the water
and are called AEROBIC BACTERIA.5 As more organic waste
is added, the bacteria reproduce rapidly; and as their popula-
tion increases, so does their use of oxygen. Where waste flows
are high, the population of bacteria may grow large enough to
use the entire supply of oxygen from the stream faster than it
can be replenished by natural diffusion from the atmosphere.
When this happens, fish and most other living things in the
stream which require dissolved oxygen die.
Oxygen depletion
Therefore, one of the principal objectives of wastewater
treatment is to prevent as much of this "oxygen-demanding"
organic material as possible from entering the receiving water.
The treatment plant actually removes the organic material the
same way a stream does, but it accomplishes the task much
more efficiently by removing the wastes from the wastewater.
SECONDARY TREATMENT6 units are designed and operated
to use natural organisms such as bacteria IN THE PLANT to
STABILIZE7 and to remove organic material.
Another effect of oxygen depletion, in addition to the killing of
fish and other aquatic life, is the problem of odors. When all the
dissolved oxygen has been removed, ANAEROBIC BAC-
TERIA8 begin to used the oxygen which is combined chemi-
cally with other elements in the form of chemical compounds,
such as sulfate (sulfur and oxygen), which are also dissolved in
3 Primary Treatment. A wastewater treatment process which takes place In a rectangular or circular tank and allows those substances In
wastewater that readily settle or float to be separated from the water being treated.
4 Milligrams per Liter, mg/L (MILL-i-GRAMS per LEET-er). A measure of the concentration by weight of a substance per unit volume. For
practical purposes, one mg/L is equal to one part per million parts (ppm). Thus, a liter of waste with a specific gravity of 1.0 weighs one million
milligrams; and if it contains 10 milligrams of dissolved oxygen, the concentration Is 10 milligrams per million milligrams, or 10 milligrams per
liter (10 mg//.), or 10 parts of oxygen per million parts of water, or 10 parts per million (10 ppm).
5 Aerobic Bacteria (AIR-O-blck back-TEAR-e-ah). Bacteria which will live and reproduce only In an environment containing oxygen which Is
available tor their respiration (breathing), namely atmospheric oxygen or oxygen dissolved In water. Oxygen combined chemically, such as in
water molecules (HJD), cannot be used for respiration by aerobic bacteria.
6 Secondary Treatment. A wastewater treatment process used to convert dissolved or suspended materials into a form more readily
separated from the water being treated. Usually the process tollows primary treatment by sedimentation. The process commonly is a type of
biological treatment process followed by secondary clarifiers that allow the solids to settle out from the water being treated.
7 Stabilize. To convert to a form that resists change. Organic material is stabilized by bacteria which convert the material to gases and other
relatively Inert substances. Stabilized organic material generally will not give off obnoxious odors.
* Anaerobic Bacteria (AN-air-O-blck back-TEAR-e-ah). Bacteria that live and reproduce In an environment containing no "free" or dissolved
oxygen. Anaerobic bacteria obtain their oxygen supply by breaking down chemical compounds which contain oxygen, such as sulfate
(SOJ and nitrate (NOJ.
-------
18 Treatment Plants
the water. When anaerobic bacteria remove the oxygen from
sulfur compounds, hydrogen sulfide (H2S), which has a "rotten
egg" odor, is produced. This gas is not only very odorous, but it
also erodes concrete and can discolor and remove paint from
homes and structures. Hydrogen sulfide also may form explo-
sive mixtures with air and is capable of paralyzing your re-
spiratory center. Other products of anaerobic decomposition
(putrefaction: PU-tree-FACK-shun) also can be objectionable.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 23.
2.3A What causes oxygen depletion when organic wastes
are discharged to the water?
2.3B What kind of bacteria cause hydrogen sulfide gas to be
released?
2.32 Human Health
Up to now we have discussed the physical or chemical ef-
fects that a waste discharge may have on the uses of water.
More important, however, may be the effect on human health
through the spread of disease-causing bacteria and viruses.
Initial efforts to control human wastes evolved from the need to
prevent the spread of diseases. Although untreated wastewa-
ter contains many billions of bacteria per gallon, most of these
are not harmful to humans, and some are even helpful in
wastewater treatment processes. However, humans who have
a disease which is caused by bacteria or viruses may dis-
charge some of these harmful organisms in their body wastes.
Many serious outbreaks of communicable diseases have been
traced to direct contamination of drinking water or food
supplies by the body wastes from a human disease carrier.
Some known examples of diseases which may be spread
through wastewater discharges are
Diseases
Fortunately these bacteria that grow in the intestinal tract of
diseased humans are not likely to find the environment in the
wastewater treatment plant or receiving waters favorable for
their growth and reproduction. Although many of these
PATHOGENIC BACTERIA9 are removed by natural die-off dur-
ing the normal treatment processes, sufficient numbers can
remain to cause a threat to any downstream use involving
human contact or consumption. If these uses exist
downstream, the treatment plant must also include a DISIN-
FECTION10 process.
The disinfection process historically employed is the addition
of chlorine. In most cases proper chlorination of a WELL-
TREATED WASTE will result in essentially a complete kill of
these pathogenic bacteria. The operator must realize, how-
ever, that breakdown or malfunction of equipment could result
in the discharge at any time of an effluent which contains
pathogenic bacteria.
2.33 Other Effects
Some wastes adversely affect the clarity and color of the
receiving waters, making them unsightly and unpopular for rec-
reation.
Many industrial wastes are highly acid or alkaline (basic),
and either condition can interfere with aquatic life, domestic
use, and other uses. An accepted measurement of a waste's
acid or alkaline condition is its p/-/.11 Before wastes are dis-
charged, they should have a pH similar to that of the receiving
water.
Waste discharges may contain toxic substances, such as
heavy metals or cyanide, which may affect the use of the re-
ceiving water for domestic purposes or for aquatic life. Plant
effluents chlorinated for disinfection purposes may have to be
dechlorinated to protect receiving waters from the toxic effects
of residual chlorine.
Taste- and odor-producing substances may reach levels in
the receiving water which are readily detectable in drinking
water or in the flesh of fish.
Treated wastewaters contain NUTRIENTS12 capable of en-
couraging excess algae and plant growth in receiving waters.
These growths hamper domestic, industrial, and recreational
uses. Conventional wastewater treatment plants do not re-
move a major portion of the nitrogen and phosphorus nutrients.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 23.
2.3C Where do the disease-causing bacteria in wastewater
come from?
2.3D What is the term which means "disease-causing"?
2.3E What is the most frequent means of disinfecting treated
wastewater?
2.4 SOLIDS IN WASTEWATER (Fig. 2.1)
One of the primary functions of a treatment plant is the re-
moval of solids from wastewater.
9 Pathogenic Bacteria (path-o-JEN-nick). Bacteria, viruses or cysts which can cause disease. There are many types of bacteria which do
NOT cause disease and which are NOT called pathogenic. Many beneficial bacteria are found in wastewater treatment processes actively
cleaning up organic wastes.
10 Disinfection (dis-in-FECK-shun). The process designed to kill most microorganisms in wastewater, including essentially all pathogenic
(disease-causing) bacteria. There are several ways to disinfect, with chlorination being most frequently used in water and wastewater
treatment plants. Compare with STERILIZATION.
11 pH. Technically, this is the logarithm of the reciprocal of the hydrogen-ion concentration, which is explained in Chapter 16, "Laboratory
Procedures and Chemistry." For now, It Is sufficient to understand that pH expresses the intensity of the acid or alkaline condition of a liquid.
The pH may range from 0 to 14, where 0 is most acid and 14 Is most alkaline, and 7 is neutral. Most natural waters have a pH between 6.5
and 8.5.
12 Nutrients. Substances which are required to support living plants and organisms. Major nutrients are carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, sulfur,
nitrogen and phosphorus. Nitrogen and phosphorus are difficult to remove from wastewater by conventional treatment processes because
they are water soluble and tend to recycle. Also see NUTRIENT CYCLE.
-------
Waste Treatment 19
WAfeR
W.9/4
fllSSOVVCP
SOW PS
MONiemeAftj
soup*
(COUOtPAL.)
zenueASLt
SOUPS
P|44-OlVfcp
¦&OLIP4
jze-4i vu&
-fofAL 4<0LlP£
[iblXt
T
\*>o
mg/1
-^tnl/imuugr gfc-f^e-4AM&A4 mg/17
MiLutirec^ pee
UTTEP*"
IN IMHOFF COMEr
0(2
urge by v^ht*
4u4PeMt?et7
NOMflLfePA&L^
R&4tc7ue-
F/'fif. 2.1 Typical composition of solids in raw wastewater
(floatable solids not shown)
2.40 Types of Solids
In Section 2.2 you read about the different TYPES of pollu-
tion: organic, inorganic, thermal, and radioactive. For a normal
municipal wastewater which contains domestic wastewater as
well as some industrial and commercial wastes, the concerns
of the treatment plant designer and operator usually are to
remove the organic and inorganic SUSPENDED SOLIDS, to
remove the DISSOLVED ORGANIC SOUDS (the treatment
plant does little to remove DISSOLVED INORGANIC SOLIDS),
and to kill the PATHOGENIC ORGANISMS by disinfection.
THERMAL and RADIOACTIVE wastes require special treat-
ment processes.
Since the main purpose of the treatment plant is removal of
solids from the wastewater, a detailed discussion of the types
of solids is in order. The figure above will help you understand
the different terms.
2.41 Total Solids
For discussion purposes assume that you obtain a one-liter
sample of raw wastewater entering the treatment plant. Heat
this sample enough to evaporate all the water and weigh all the
solid material left (residue); it weighs 1000 milligrams. Thus,
the TOTAL SOLIDS concentration in the sample is 1000 millig-
rams per liter (mgIL). This weight includes both DISSOLVED
and SUSPENDED solids.
2.42 Dissolved Solids
How much is dissolved and how much is suspended? To
determine this you could take an identical sample and filter it
through a very fine mesh filter such as a membrane filter or
fiberglass. The suspended solids will be caught on the filter,
and the dissolved solids will pass through with the water. You
can now evaporate the water and weigh the residue to deter-
mine the weight of DISSOLVED SOLIDS. In the figure above
the amount is shown as 800 mg/L The remaining 200 mgIL is
suspended solids. Dissolved solids are also called FILTERA-
BLE RESIDUE.™
2.43 Suspended Solids
Suspended solids are composed of two parts: settleable and
nonsettleable. The difference between settleable and nonset-
tleable solids depends on the size, shape, and weight per unit
volume of the solid particles; large-sized particles tend to settle
more rapidly than smaller particles. The amount of settleable
solids in the raw wastewater should be estimated in order to
design settling basins (primary units), sludge pumps, and
sludge handling facilities. Also, measuring the amount of set-
tleable solids entering and leaving the settling basin allows you
to calculate the efficiency of the basin for removing the settle-
able solids. A device called an IMHOFF CONE™ is used to
measure settleable solids in milliliters per liter, ml IL. (The
example in the figure above shows a settleable solids concen-
tration of 130 mg/L. The settled solids in the Imhoff Cone had
to be dried and weighed by proper procedures to determine
their weight.)
You may calculate the weight of nonsettleable solids by sub-
stracting the weight of dissolved and settleable solids from the
weight of total solids. In the figure above the nonsettleable
solids concentration is shown as 70 mgIL. Suspended solids
are also called NONFILTERABLE RESIDUE.13
,3 "Standard Methods" (also Chapter 16, Section 16.5, "Laboratory Procedures for NPDES Monitoring") defines FILTERABLE
residue as solids that PASS THROUGH a filter and nonfilterable residue as those solids that DO NOT PASS THROUGH a filter.
14 Imhoff Cone. A clear, cone-shaped container marked with graduations. The cone Is used to measure the volume of settleable
solids In a specific volume of wastewater.
-------
20 Treatment Plants
TREATMENT
PLANT
DISCHARGE
RECEIVING
STREAM
NITRATE
(NO3) IN
EFFLUENT
ALGAE
TAKES
UPNO3
FISH EAT
ALGAE &
PRODUCE
AMINO ACIDS,
UREA &
ORGANIC
RESIDUES
FISH DIE &
NITROGEN
COMPOUNDS
CONVERTED
TO AMMONIUM
(NHj)
„ IN THE PRESENCE
OF DISSOLVED
OXYGEN IN THE
WATER. AMMONIUM-
(nhJ)
- NITRITE ¦
(NOj)
>• NITRATE
(NOJg.
CYCLE
REPEATS
Fig. 2.2 Simplified illustration of nitrogen cycle
2.44 Organic and Inorganic Solids
For total solids or for any separate type of solids, such as
dissolved, settleable, or nonsettleable, the relative amounts of
organic and inorganic matter can be determined. This informa-
tion is important for estimating solids handling capacities and
for designing treatment processes for removing the organic
portion in waste. The organic portion can be very harmful to
receiving waters.
2.45 Floatable Solids
There is no standard method for the measurement and
evaluation of floatable solids. Since treatment units are de-
signed to remove these solids in raw wastewater and treated
effluent. Floatable solids are undesirable in the plant effluent
from an aesthetic viewpoint because the sight of floatables in
receiving waters indicates the presence of inadequately
treated wastewater.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 23.
2.4A An Imhoff Cone is used to measure - solids.
2.4B Why is it necessary to measure settleable solids?
2.4C Total solids consist of and solids,
both of which contain organic and inorganic matter.
2.5 NATURAL CYCLES (Fig. 2.2)
When the treated wastewater from a plant is discharged into
RECEIVING WATERS15 such as streams, rivers or lakes, natu-
ral cycles in the aquatic (water) environment may become up-
set. Whether any problems are caused in the receiving waters
depends on the following factors:
1. Type or degree of treatment,
2. Size of flow from the treatment plant,
3. Characteristics of wastewater from treatment plant,
4. Amount of flow in the receiving stream or volume of receiv-
ing lake that can be used for dilution,
5. Quality of the receiving waters,
6. Amount of mixing between EFFLUENT16 and receiving
waters, and
7. Uses of receiving waters.
Natural cycles of interest in wastewater treatment include
the natural purification cycles such as the cycle of water from
evaporation or TRANSPIRATION17 to condensation to precipi-
tation to runoff and back to evaporation, the life cycles of aqua-
tic organisms, and the cycles of nutrients. These cycles are
occurring continuously in wastewater treatment plants and in
receiving waters at different rates depending on environmental
conditions. Treatment plant operators control and accelerate
these cycles to work for their benefit in treatment plants and in
receiving waters rather than have these cycles cause plant
operational problems and disrupt downstream water uses.
NUTRIENT CYCLES18 are a special type of natural cycle
because of the sensitivity of some receiving waters to nut-
rients. Important nutrients include carbon, hydrogen, oxygen,
sulfur, nitrogen and phosphorus. All of the nutrients have their
own cycles, yet each cycle is influenced by the other cycles.
These nutrient cycles are very complex and involve chemical
changes in living organisms.
To illustrate the concept of nutrient cycles, a simplified ver-
sion of the nitrogen cycle will be used as an example. A
wastewater treatment plant discharges nitrogen in the form of
nitrate (NO-j~Jin the plant effluent to the receiving waters. Algae
take up the nitrate and produce more algae. The algae are
eaten by fish which convert the nitrogen to amino acids, urea
and organic residues. If the fish die and sink to the bottom,
15 Receiving Water. A stream, river, lake, or ocean Into which treated or untreated wastewater is discharged.
18 Effluent (EF-lu-ent). Water or other liquid - raw, partially or completely treated - flowing FROM a basin, treatment process, or treatment
plant.
17 Transpiration (TRAN-spear-RAY-shun). The process by which water vapor Is lost to the atmosphere from living plants.
18 Nutrient Cycle. The transformation or change of a nutrient from one form to another until the nutrient has returned to the original form, thus
completing the cycle. The cycle may take place under either aerobic or anaerobic conditions.
-------
Waste Treatment 21
these nitrogen compounds can be converted to ammonium
(NH^.In the presence of dissolved oxygen and special bac-
teria, the ammonium is converted to nitrite (NO,), then to nit-
rate (NO 3), and finally the algae can take up tne nitrate and
start the cycle all over again.
If too much nitrogen is discharged to receiving waters, too
many algae could be produced. Water with excessive algae
can be unsightly. Bacteria decomposing dead algae from oc-
casional die offs can deplete the dissolved oxygen and cause a
fish kill. Thus, the nitrogen cycle has been disrupted, as well as
the other nutrient cycles. If no dissolved oxygen is present in
the water, the nitrogen compounds are converted to am-
monium (NH 4), the carbon compounds to methane (CH4), and
the sulfur compounds to hydrogen sulfide (H2S). Ammonia
(NH3) and hydrogen sulfide are odorous gases. Under these
conditions the receiving waters are SEPTIC;19 they stink and
look terrible. Throughout this manual you will be provided in-
formation on how to control these nutrient cycles in your treat-
ment plant in order to treat wastes and to control odors, as well
as to protect receiving waters.
2.6 NPDES PERMITS (Fig. 2.3)
NPDES stands for National Pollutant Discharge Elimination
System. NPDES permits are required by the Federal Water
Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1972 with the intent of
making the Nation's waters suitable for swimming and for fish
and wildlife. The permits regulate discharges into navigable
waters from all point sources of pollution, including industries,
municipal treatment plants, large agricultural feed lots and re-
turn irrigation flows. An industry discharging into municipal col-
lection and treatment systems need not obtain a permit but
must meet certain specified pretreatment standards. These
permits may outline a schedule of compliance for a wastewater
treatment facility such as dates for the completion of plant
design, engineering, construction and/or treatment process
changes. Instructions for completing NPDES reporting forms
and the necessary forms are available from the regulatory
agency issuing the permit.
Your main concern as an operator is the effluent (discharge)
limitations specified in the NPDES permit for your plant. The
permit may specify monthly average and maximum levels of
settleable solids, suspended solids (nonfilterable residue),
biochemical oxygen demand (BOO)20 and the most probable
number (MPN) of COLIFORM21 group bacteria. Larger plants
must report effluent temperatures because of the impact of
temperature changes on natural cycles. Also, average and
maximum flows may be identified as well as an acceptable
range of pH values. Almost all effluents are expected to con-
tain virtually no substances which would be toxic to organisms
in the receiving waters. The NPDES permit will specify the
frequency of collecting samples and the methods of reporting
the results. Details on how to comply with NPDES permits will
be provided throughout this manual.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 23.
2.5A Why should an operator have an understanding of natu-
ral cycles?
2.5B What can happen when nutrient cycles are disrupted
and there is no dissolved oxygen in the receiving water?
2.6A What does NPDES stand for?
2.7 ADDITIONAL READING
For a detailed discussion of the physical and chemical com-
position of wastewater, you may wish to refer to the following
sources:
1. MOP 11, Chapter 3, "Characterization of Wastewater*."
2. NEW YORK MANUAL, Chapter 1, "Sewage."
3. TEXAS MANUAL, Chapter 1, "Wastewater, Its Composi-
tion, Chemistry and Biology."
4. TREATMENT OBJECTIVES FOR OPERATING WATER
AND WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANTS, by J.C.
Meredith, Deeds & Data, WPCF, August 1977.
* Actual chapter number and title may depend on edition.
2.8 REVIEW
In this chapter you have read why it is necessary to treat
wastewater, something about the types of waste discharges
and their effects, and a brief description of the different kinds of
solids in wastewater. This is intended to be only a general
discussion of these subjects; you will find more detail in later
chapters.
You are now ready to go on to Chapter 3 which deals with a
description of the basic elements of the wastewater collection
and treatment systems. Chapter 3 actually begins the discus-
sion of HOW to treat wastewater. Chapter 2 has told you WHY
you need to do so.
<3 w/wv y wow 0>
•GO
19 Septic (SEP-tlck). This condition is produced by anaerobic bacteria. If severe, the wastewater turns black, gives off foul odors, contains
little or no dissolved oxygen and creates a heavy oxygen demand.
20 Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD). The rate at which microorganisms use oxygen in water or wastewater while stabilizing decomposa-
ble organic matter under aerobic conditions. In decomposition, organic matter serves as food for the bacteria and energy results from its
oxidation.
21 Coliform (COAL-i-form). One type of bacteria. The presence of coliform-group bacteria is an indication of possible pathogenic bacterial
contamination. The human intestinal tract is one of the main habitats of coliform bacteria. They may also be found in the intestinal tracts of
warm-blooded animals, and In plants, soil, air, and the aquatic environment. Fecal conforms are those conforms found in the feces of various
warm-blooded animals; whereas the term "coliform" also includes other environmental sources.
-------
IO
to
MONTHLY OPERATION REPORT OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY
STABILIZATION PONDS
NAME OF FACILITY
MAX PERMIT CONDITION
S*r.d to MINNESOTA POLLUTION CONTROL AGENCY
1935 W£ST COUNTY KOAO 8 2
ftOSEVILLE, MINNESOTA 55113
ATTN: COMPLIANCE ft ENFORCEMENT SECTION
REPORTED FREQUENCY OF ANALYSIS
PERMIT CONDITION FREQUENCY" Of ANALYSIS
REPORTED SAMPLE TYPE
PERMIT CONDITION SAMPLE TYPE
TYPE OF POND (PRIMARY, SECONDARY, AERATED, ETC.)
POND
ACRES
NO
ACRES
ND
CRES
WEEK OF THE MONTH
1 at
2 nd
3 "S
4 th
5 th
i at
2nd
3rd
4 rh
5th
1 at
2 nd
3rd
4 th
5th
1 DATE OF TEST OR OBSERVATION
2. ODOR (YES OR NO )
9. AQUATIC PLANTS (% OF COVERAGE, TYPE}
4. FLOATING NATS (% OF COVERAGE , TYPE )
5. PONO WATER DEPTH (NEAREST INCH)
«. MUSKRATS. RODENTS ETC. (YES OR NO )
7. DIKE CONDITION (EROSION ETC.)
$. ICE COVER (%
GENERAL
OF COVERAGE)
ANALYSIS- POND INFLUENT, EFFLUENT
RECEIVE
G WATER
S DATA
DATE
34
S*
OAT!
•
DAY
or
WEEK
>0
INFLUENT
EFFLU E NT DISCHARGE
ABOVE OUTFALL
Mil F<
BELOW OUTFALL
Ull F«
33
PRESENT CONDITION
PRCCIPIT ATION
(INCHES)
n
F LOW
(««D)
It
SAMPLE
type
IS
too
l-l/D
T 9 9
(-I/D
19
FLOW
(weo)
it
TIME
SAMPLED
IT
• 0 0
(*•/»>
it
TSS
(-•/I)
i 1
* 2
3
V *
si I
-g I
21
DO
(•«/!)
22
» H
-r.it. J
23
TOTAL
PHOSPHORUS
AS f
(¦•/1)
24
KJ6LDAHL
NITftOtCN
( ••/¦ )
25
CHLORINE
USED
(LBS)
2S
CHLORINE
RESIDUAL
( »f/U
27
TIME
Of
DAY
20
WATER
TEMP-*F
2*
0.0.
-1/1)
JO
TIME
Of
DAY
31
WATER
TEMP-*f
32
D.O.
(¦•/I)
DEPTH
( f 1 )
WIDTH
( tt )
VELOCITT
1 1
+
NORMAL —
i
X
2
5
S
4
4
J
&
•
c
7
T
a
a
•
*
1 0
11
ti
i 2
1 s
15
14
J
1 4
1 S
1 s
l«
i a
i r
t T
i •
i a
i»
||
i»
10
y
11
I
t\
22
B
-
22
cs
23
14
24
11
2 %
ft
2 «
<7
2 T
tt
D
2a
tt
n
2*
30
n
30
9 1
II
31
TOTI
L
9
x
x
X
?K
MIN. REPC
RTED VALUE
x
X
X
_x
X
X
MIN. PERMIT CONDITION
x
XX
x
xt
XT
x;
x
x
;XT
x
X
x
X
X
x
x;
X
x;
XT
x
X
X
AV8. REPORTED VALUE
x
x
x
X
X
XI
X
X
AVG. PERMIT OONDITION
x
X
x
x
x
x
[ 'X
IX
x
X
X
x;
X
x
XT
x^.
X
X
MAX. REPORTED VALUE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
55 REMARKS: INCLUOE BYPASS AND OVERFLOW OCCURRENCES, UNUSUAL SEWAGE OR STREAM FLOW
PROBLEMS, OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS, OTHER REQUIRED PARAMETER DATA, COMPLAINTS, ETC.
IN SPACES ON SACK OF THIS FORM.
ft
B
3
-------
Waste Treatment 23
Operators of wastewater treatment plants operate their
plants with the objectives of providing the best possible treat-
ment of wastes to protect the receiving waters, downstream
users, and neighbors. They accomplish these objectives by
1. Removing wastes from the wastewater to protect the receiv-
ing waters regardless of other problems or impacts of pro-
tective action in their plant,
2. Meeting NPDES Permit requirements,
3. Minimizing odors to avoid nuisance complaints,
4. Minimizing costs,
5. Minimizing energy consumption, and
6. Maintaining an effective preventive maintenance program.
The remaining chapters in this manual were prepared for
you by operators with the intent of providing you with the
knowledge and skills necessary to be a wastewater treatment
plant operator.
SUGGESTED ANSWERS
Chapter 2. WHY TREAT WASTES?
Answers to questions on page 16.
2.1 A Some of the dissolved substances in water include oxy-
gen, calcium, carbon, magnesium, chloride, sodium, sul-
fate, iron, nitrogen, phosphorus, and organic material.
2.1 B Water picks up dissolved substances as it fails as rain,
flows over land and is used for domestic, industrial, ag-
ricultural, and recreational purposes.
Answers to questions on page 17.
2.2A a, c, and e.
2.2B Organic, inorganic, thermal, radioactive.
Answers to questions on page 18.
2.3A Organic wastes in water provide food for the bacteria.
These bacteria require oxygen to survive and con-
sequently deplete the oxygen in the water in a way simi-
lar to the way oxygen is removed from air when people
breathe.
2.3B Hydrogen sulfide gas is produced by anaerobic bacteria.
Answers to questions on page 18.
2.3C Disease-causing bacteria in wastewater come from the
body wastes of humans who have a disease.
2.3D Pathogenic.
2.3E Chlorination is the most frequent means of disinfecting
treated wastewater.
Answers to questions on page 20.
2.4A Settleable.
2.4B Settleable solids must be measured to determine the
efficiency of settling basins. This amount must also be
known to calculate loads on settling basins, sludge
pumps, and sludge handling facilities for design and op-
erational purposes. You should have recognized the
need to know the efficiency of settling basins.
2.4C DISSOLVED and SUSPENDED solids.
Answers to questions on page 21.
2.5A Operators need an understanding of natural cycles in
order to control wastewater treatment processes and
odors and also to protect receiving waters.
2.5B When nutrient cycles become disrupted and there is no
dissolved oxygen in the receiving water, these waters
become septic, stink and look terrible.
2.6A NPDES stands for National Pollution Discharge Elimina-
tion System.
AfiONAU
OLl.UtA.KlT
I4CWAB6&
UMINATtOM
V4TBM
HI I
-------
24 Treatment Plants
OBJECTIVE TEST
Chapter 2. WHY TREAT WASTES?
Please mark correct answers in the proper columns on the
answer sheet, as directed at the end of Chapter 1. Return your
answer sheet to your project Director.
1. Wastes are treated to do which of the following?
1. Prevent pollution
2. Prevent receiving waters from stinking
3. Protect human health
4. Remove harmful wastes from wastewater
2. Diseases possibly spread by wastewater discharges in-
clude
6.
1. Cholera.
2. Dysentery.
3. Hepatitis.
(Jaundice)
3. Pathogenic bacteria are
1. Disease causing.
2. Dissolved gases.
3. Easy to see.
4. Q Fever.
5. Typhoid.
4. Inorganic.
5. None of these.
4. What does an Imhoff Cone measure?
1. Colloidal Solids 4. Settleable Solids
2. Dissolved Solids 5. Total Solids
3. Organic Solids
Match the definitions on the following page by placing the
correct number from the column on the right in the proper
space in front of the definition.
EXAMPLE
^Milligrams per liter.
1. MPL
2. mgIL
3. MPN
Mark Column 2 on your answer sheet:
1 2 3 4 5
8.
9.
10.
. Bacteria which obtain their
oxygen by breaking down
chemical compounds which
contain oxygen, such as
sulfate (SO4).
Bacteria which will live and
reproduce only in an environ-
ment containing atmospheric
oxygen or oxygen dissolved
in water.
Waste material which comes
from animal or vegetable
sources.
)
)
) 1. Aerobic
Bacteria
) 2. Anaerobic
Bacteria
) 3. Inorganic
Waste
) 4. Organic
Waste
) 5. Radioactive
)
. A process which kills
disease-causing bacteria.
Any discharge of waste
that reduces receiving
water quality indicators
below the established
water quality standards.
Bacteria which can cause
disease.
)
) 1. Disinfection
) 2. Nutrients
) 3. Pathogenic
Bacteria
)4. pH
) 5. Pollution
)
)
)
11. Natural cycles could refer to which of the following?
1. Effluent cycles
2. Life cycles of aquatic organisms
3. Natural purification cycles
4. Nutrient cycles
5. Sludge cycles
12. Effluent limitations that may be specified in an NPDES
permit include
1. Acceptable range of pH values.
2. Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD)
3. Most probable number (MPN) of coliform group bac-
teria.
4. Suspended solids (nonfilterable residue).
5. Toxic substances.
END OF OBJECTIVE TEST
-------
CHAPTER 3
WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITIES
by
John Brady
and
William Crooks
-------
26 Treatment Plants
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 3. Wastewater Treatment Facilities
Page
GLOSSARY 27
3.0 Collection, Treatment, Disposal 29
3.1 Collection of Wastewater 29
3.10 Sanitary, Storm, and Combined Sewers 29
3.2 Treatment Plants 30
3.3 Pretreatment 37
3.30 Purpose 37
3.31 Screening 37
3.32 Shredding 38
3.33 Grit Chambers or Grit Channels 38
3.4 Flow-Measuring Devices 38
3.5 Primary Treatment 39
3.6 Secondary Treatment 42
3.60 Purpose 42
3.61 Trickling Filter 42
3.62 Rotating Biological Contactors 42
3.63 Activated Sludge 42
3.64 Secondary Clarifiers 43
3.7 Solids Handling and Disposal 45
3.70 Purpose 45
3.71 Digestion and Dewatering 45
3.72 Incineration 45
3.8 Waste Treatment Ponds 49
3.9 Advanced Methods of Treating Wastewater 49
3.10 Disinfection 50
3.11 Effluent Disposal 50
3.12 Solids Disposal 50
3.13 Additional Reading 51
-------
Treatment Facilities 27
GLOSSARY
Chapter 3. WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITIES
BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND (BOD) BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND
The rate at which microorganisms use the oxygen in water or wastewater while stabilizing decomposable organic matter under
aerobic conditions. In decomposition, organic matter serves as food for the bacteria and energy results from its oxidation.
BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN
DEMAND (BOD) TEST DEMAND (BOD)TEST
A procedure that measures the rate of oxygen use under controlled conditions of time and temperature. Standard test conditions
include dark incubation at 20°C for a specified time (usually five days).
COMBINED SEWER COMBINED SEWER
A sewer designed to carry both sanitary wastewaters and storm- or surface-water runoff.
COMMINUTION (com-mi-NEW-shun) COMMINUTION
Shredding. A mechanical treatment process which cuts large pieces of wastes into smaller pieces so they won't plug pipes or
damage equipment. COMMINUTION and SHREDDING usually mean the same thing.
DETENTION TIME DETENTION TIME
The time required to fill a tank at a given flow or the theoretical time required for a given flow of wastewater to pass through a tank.
DEWATER DEWATER
To remove or separate a portion of the water present in a sludge or slurry.
EFFLUENT (EF-lu-ent) EFFLUENT
Wastewater or other liquid — raw, partially or completely treated — flowing FROM a basin, treatment process, or treatment plant.
FACULTATIVE POND (FACK-ul-TAY-tive) FACULTATIVE POND
The most common type of pond in current use. The upper portion (supernatant) is aerobic, while the bottom layer is anaerobic.
Algae supply most of the oxygen to the supernatant.
GRIT GRIT
The heavy mineral material present in wastewater, such as sand, gravel, cinders, and eggshells.
HEADWORKS HEADWORKS
The facilities where wastewater enters a wastewater treatment plant. The headworks may consist of bar screens, comminutors, a
wet well and pumps.
INFILTRATION (IN-fill-TRAY-shun) INFILTRATION
The seepage of groundwater into a sewer system, including service connections. Seepage frequently occurs through defective or
cracked pipes, pipe joints, connections or manhole walls.
INFLOW INFLOW
Water discharged into the sewer system from sources other than regular connections. This includes flow from yard drains,
foundations and around manhole covers. Inflow differs from infiltration in that it is a direct discharge into the sewer rather than a leak
in the sewer itself.
INFLUENT (IN-flu-ent) INFLUENT
Wastewater or other liquid — raw or partially treated — flowing INTO a reservoir, basin, treatment process, or treatment plant.
-------
28 Treatment Plants
MEDIA MEDIA
The material in a trickling filter on which slime organisms grow. As settled wastewater trickles over the media, slime organisms
remove certain types of wastes thereby partially treating the wastewater. Also the material in a rotating biological contactor or in a
gravity or pressure filter.
PHOTOSYNTHESIS (foto-SIN-tha-sis) PHOTOSYNTHESIS
A process in which organisms with the aid of chlorophyll (green plant enzyme) convert carbon dioxide and inorganic substances to
oxygen and additional plant material, utilizing sunlight for energy. All green plants grow by this process.
PRIMARY TREATMENT PRIMARY TREATMENT
A wastewater treatment process that takes place in a rectangular or circular tank and allows those substances in wastewater that
readily settle or float to be separated from the water being treated.
SANITARY SEWER (SAN-eh-tare-ee SUE-er) SANITARY SEWER
A sewer intended to carry wastewater from homes, businesses, and industries. Storm water runoff should be collected and
transported in a separate system of pipes.
SECONDARY TREATMENT SECONDARY TREATMENT
A wastewater treatment process used to convert dissolved or suspended materials into a form more readily separated from the
water being treated. Usually the process follows primary treatment by sedimentation. The process commonly is a type of biological
treatment process followed by secondary clarifiers that allow the solids to settle out from the water being treated.
SHREDDING SHREDDING
Comminution. A mechanical treatment process which cuts large pieces of wastes into smaller pieces so they won't plug pipes or
damage equipment. SHREDDING and COMMINUTION usually mean the same thing.
SLUDGE (sluj) SLUDGE
The settleable solids separated from liquids during processing or the deposits of foreign materials on bottoms of streams or other
bodies of water.
STORM SEWER STORM SEWER
A separate sewer that carries runoff from storms, surface drainage, and street wash, but does not include domestic and industrial
wastes.
SUPERNATANT (sue-per-NAY-tent) SUPERNATANT
Liquid removed from settled sludge. Supernatant commonly refers to the liquid between the sludge on the bottom and the scum on
the surface of an anaerobic digester. This liquid is usually returned to the influent wet well or to the primary clarifier.
WEIR (weer) WEIR
(1) A wall or plate placed in an open channel and used to measure the flow. The depth of the flow over the weir can be used to
calculate the flow rate, or a chart or conversion table may be used. (2) A wall or obstruction used to control flow (from clarifiers) to
assure uniform flow and avoid short-circuiting.
WET OXIDATION WET OXIDATION
A method of treating or conditioning sludge before the water is removed. Compressed air is blown into the liquid sludge. The air and
sludge mixture is fed into a pressure vessel where the organic material is stabilized. The stabilized organic material and inert
(inorganic) solids are then separated from the pressure vessel effluent by dewatering in lagoons or by mechanical means.
WET WELL WET WELL
A compartment or room in which wastewater is collected. The suction pipe of a pump may be connected to the wet well or a
submersible pump may be located in the wet well.
-------
Treatment Facilities 29
CHAPTER 3. WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITIES
3.0 COLLECTION, TREATMENT, DISPOSAL
Facilities for handling wastewater are usually considered to
have three major components or parts: collection, treatment,
and disposal. For a municipality, these components make up
the wastewater facilities; but for an individual industry which
handles its own wastewater, the same three components are
necessary. This training course is directed primarily to plant
operators for municipalities, so the discussion in this and later
chapters will be in terms of municipal wastewater treatment
facilities. Treatment of industrial wastes is discussed in Chap-
ter 28.
3.1 COLLECTION OF WASTEWATER
Collection and transportation of wastewater to the treatment
plant is accomplished through a complex network of pipes and
pumps of many sizes.
Major water-using industries which contribute waste to the
collection system may affect the efficiency of a wastewater
treatment plant, especially if there are periods during the day
or during the year when these industrial waste flows are a
major load on the plant. For instance, canneries are highly
seasonal in their operations; therefore, it is possible to predict
the time of year to expect large flows from them. A knowledge
of the location, amount, and types of wastes from commercial
and industrial dischargers in the collection system may enable
an operator to locate the source of a problem in the plant
INFLUENT,1 such as oil from a refinery or a gas station.
The length of time required for wastes to reach your plant
can also affect treatment plant efficiency. Hydrogen sulfide gas
(rotten egg gas) may be released by anaerobic bacteria feed-
ing on the wastes if the flow time is quite long and the weather
is hot; this can cause odor problems, damage concrete in your
plant, and make the wastes more difficult to treat. (Solids won't
settle easily, for instance.) Wastes from isolated subdivisions
located far away from the main collection network often have
this "aging" problem.
3.10 Sanitary, Storm, and Combined Sewers
For most sewerage systems, the sewer coming into the
treatment plant carries wastes from households and commer-
cial establishments in the city or district, and possibly some
industrial wastes. This type of sewer is called a SANITARY
SEWER.2 All storm runoff from streets, land, and roofs of build-
ings is collected separately in a STORM SEWER,3 which nor-
mally discharges to a water course without treatment. In some
areas only one network of sewers has been laid out beneath
the city to pick up both sanitary wastes and storm water in a
COMBINED SEWER * Treatment plants that are designed to
handle the sanitary portion of the wastes sometimes must be
bypassed during storms due to inadequate capacity, allowing
untreated wastes to be discharged into receiving waters. Sep-
aration of combined sewers into sanitary and storm sewers is
very costly and difficult to accomplish.
Even in areas where the sanitary and storm sewers are
separate, INFILTRATION5 of groundwater or storm water into
sanitary sewers through breaks or open joints can cause high
flow problems at the treatment plant. Replacement or sealing
of leaky sections of sewer pipe is called for in these cases. The
Fig. 3.1 Manholes allow inspection of the collection system
11nfluent (IN-flu-ent). Wastewater or other liquid - raw or partly treated - flowing INTO a reservoir, basin, treatment process, or treatment
plant.
2 Sanitary Sewer (SAN-eh-tare-ee SUE-er). A sewer intended to carry wastewater from homes, businesses, and Industries. Storm water
runoff should be collected and transported in a separate system of pipes.
3 Storm Sewer. A separate sewer that carries runoff from storms, surface drainage, and street wash, but does not include domestic and
industrial wastes.
4 Combined Sewer. A sewer designed to carry both sanitary wastewaters and storm- or surface-water runoff.
5 Infiltration (IN-fill-TRAY-shun). The seepage of groundwater into a sewer system, including service connections. Seepage frequently
occurs through defective or cracked pipes, pipe joints, connections or manhole walls.
-------
30 Treatment Plants
treatment plant operator is generally the first to know about
infiltration problems because of the unusually high flows ob-
served at the plant during periods of storm water runoff.
Sanitary sewers are normally placed at a slope sufficient to
produce a water velocity (speed) of approximately two feet per
second when flowing full. This velocity will usually prevent the
deposition of solids that may clog the pipe or cause odors.
Manholes are placed every 300 to 500 feet to allow for inspec-
tion and cleaning of the sewer.
When low areas of land must be sewered or where pipe
depth under the ground surface becomes excessive, pump
stations (Fig. 3.2) are normally installed. These pump stations
lift the wastewater to a higher point from which it may again
flow by gravity, or the wastewater may be pumped under pres-
sure directly to the treatment plant. A large pump station lo-
cated just ahead of the treatment plant can create problems by
periodically sending large volumes of flow to the plant one
minute, and virtually nothing the next minute. These fluctuating
flows can be reduced by using variable speed pumps or short
pumping cycles.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 52.
3.1 A Why should the operator be familiar with the wastewa-
ter collection and transportation network?
3.1B List three types of sewers.
3.1 C What problem may occur when it takes a long time for
wastewater to flow through the collection sewers to the
treatment plant?
3.1 D Why are combined sewers a problem?
fOQCB A4AIW
(uHVetl Ft
PLOW
IVAT6JZ.
LIME
(CxQAVlYv fLOvO
Fig. 3.2 Collection sewer profile
3.2 TREATMENT PLANTS
Upon reaching a wastewater treatment plant, the wastewa-
ter flows through a series of treatment processes (Fig. 3.3)
which remove the wastes from the water and reduce its threat
to the public health before it is discharged from the plant. The
number of treatment processes and the degree of treatment
usually depend on the uses of the receiving waters. Treated
wastewaters discharged into a small stream used for a domes-
tic water supply and swimming will require considerably more
treatment than wastewater discharged into water used solely
for navigation.
To provide you with a general picture of treatment plants, the
remainder of this chapter will follow the paths wastewater
might travel as it passes through a plant. You will be introduced
to the names of the treatment processes, the kinds of wastes
the processes treat or remove, and the location of the pro-
cesses in the flow path. Not all treatment plants are alike;
however, there are certain typical flow patterns that are similar
from one plant to another. Figures 3.4,3.5, and 3.6 show some
possible flow patterns through treatment plants.
When wastewater enters a treatment plant, it usually flows
through a series of pretreatment processes — screening,
shredding, and grit removal. These processes remove the
coarse material from the wastewater. Flow-measuring devices
are usually installed after pretreatment processes to record the
flow rates and volumes of wastewater treated by the plant.
Next the wastewater will generally receive primary treat-
ment. During primary treatment, some of the solid matter car-
ried by the wastewater will settle out or float to the water sur-
face where it can be separated from the wastewater being
treated.
Secondary treatment processes usually follow primary
treatment and commonly consist of biological processes. This
means that organisms living in the controlled environment of
the process are used to partially stabilize (oxidize) organic
matter not removed by previous treatment processes and to
convert it into a form which is easier to remove from the
wastewater.
Waste material removed by the treatment processes goes to
solids handling facilities and then to ultimate disposal.
Waste treatment ponds may be used to treat wastes remain-
ing in wastewater after pretreatment, primary treatment, or
secondary treatment. Ponds are frequently constructed in rural
areas where there is sufficient available land.
-------
Treatment Facilities 31
TREATMENT fUNCTlOM
P/2£T0£ATM£A/r
INFLUENT
/ezMoi/ss &>or,£4<*s, dAvst/j/p**
0f£#/6 &/AZ// 7Z>A^HA,Oc/U, 0#/^
Pass/Atf 6j?/A/0£&:m'A/
(?£MOl/£S V£P
&ir> or###
£EMOM£S SU6P£A/0£P
$ P/66OZU'££> £0£/£>S
x/ws PArtfo&Wd sacter/a
Fig. 3.3 Flow diagram of wastewater treatment plant
processes
-------
w
ro
CHAP. 4
CHAP. 15
CHAP. 9
PLANT
INFLUENT
FROM
COLLECTION
SYSTEM
CHAP. 10 CHAP. 13
EFFLUENT
DISINFECTION DISPOSAL
METER
PARSHALL
FLUME
WASTE TREATMENT PONDS
CHLORINE
@
®
S
3
(D
3
a
3
PLAN
(TOP VIEW)
CHLORINE
uu
SOLIDS TO
BURIAL
PROFILE
(SIDE VIEW)
Fig. 3.4 Possible flow pattern through a pond treatment
plant
-------
CHAP. 4
CHAP. 15
CHAP. 4
CHAP. 15
PLANT
INFLUENT
FROM
COLLECTION
SYSTEM
FLOW METER. PUMP
BAR RACKS PARSHALL FLUME COMMINUTOR (IN WET WELLI
CHAP. 5
PRIMARY SEDIMENTATION TANK
CONTINUED
ON
NEXT PAGE
SOLIDS TO
BURIAL
1
PLAN
(TOP VIEW)
a
H
I 2
van.
PROFILE
(SIDE VIEW)
V
$
(TUB
SCUM TO DIGESTER OR TO BURIAL
J
SLUDGE TO DIGESTER
3
NOTE: SOLIDS FLOW NOT SHOWN, SEE SECTION 3.7
7
O
(0
Fig. 3.5 Possible flow pattern through a trickling filter plant
s
-------
CHAP. 6
CHAP. 10
CHAP. 13
CO
TRICKLING FILTER PROCESS
DISINFECTION
EFFLUENT
DISPOSAL
TRICKLING
FILTER
SECONDARY
CLARIFIER
CHLORINE
4
(TOP VIEW)
PUMP
RECIRCULATION
¥ if * 'VyT * * *
CHLORINE
NOTE:
SOLIDS FLOW NOT SHOWN,
SEE SECTION 3.7
MIXING
SLUDGE TO PRIMARY
SEDIMENTATION
TANK INLET
PROFILE
(SIDE VIEW)
PUMP
RECIRCULATION
Fig. 3.5 (Con'd) Possible flow pattern through a trickling
filter plant
-------
PLANT
INFLUENT
FROM
COLLECTION
SYSTEM
CHAP. 4
BAR RACKS
CHAP. 15
PUMP
(IN WET WELL)
CHAP. 4
GRIT CHANNEL
CHAP. 4
COMMINUTOR
CHAP. 15
FLOW METER,
PARSHALL FLUME
CHAP. 5
CONTINUED
PRIMARY ON
CLARIFIER NEXT PAGE
M
PLAN
(TOP VIEW)
SCUM
m1
SCUM TO DIGESTER
OR TO BURIAL
GRIT TO
BURIAL
SOLIDS TO v
BURIAL | _
NOTE: SOLIDS FLOW NOT SHOWN, SEE SECTION 3.7
PROFILE
(SIDE VIEW)
SLUDGE TO
DIGESTER
-------
CHAP. 8 AND 11
ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS
AERATION TANK
SECONOARY
CLARIFIER
g
CHAP. 10
CHAP. 13
3
s.
DISINFECTION
EFFLUENT
DISPOSAL
0
3
CHLORINE
RAS
PLAN
(TOP VIEW)
WAS
PUMP
RAS
WAS
C
o
c
0
0
•
c
o
0
0
0
o
0
0
PUMP
NOTE:
SOLIDS FLOW NOT SHOWN,
SEE SECTION 3.7
MIXING
CHLORINE
=2
RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE (RAS) TO AERATION TANK
WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE (WAS) TO PRIMARY CLARIFIER INLET
PROFILE
(SIDE VIEW)
Fig. 3.6 (Con'd) Possible flow pattern through an activated
sludge plant
-------
Treatment Facilities 37
Advanced methods of waste treatment are being developed
for general cleanup of wastewater or removal of substances
not removed by conventional treatment processes. They may
follow the treatment processes previously described, or they
may be used instead of them.
Before treated wastewater is discharged to the receiving
waters, it should be disinfected to prevent the spread of dis-
ease. Chlorine is usually added for disinfection purposes. After
the chlorine contact basin, sulfur dioxide (S02) may be added
to the EFFLUENT6 to neutralize the chlorine and thus detoxify
the effluent.
In the following sections these treatment processes will be
briefly discussed to provide an overall concept of a treatment
plant. Details will be presented in later chapters to provide
complete information on each of these processes.
3.3 PRETREATMENT (Chapter 4)
3.30 Purpose
Pretreatment processes commonly consist of screening
(Fig. 3.7), SHREDDING ,7 and grit removal to separate coarse
material from the wastewater being treated.
Fig. 3.7 Screened & ground
3.31 Screening
Wastewater flowing into the treatment plant will occasionally
contain pieces of wood, roots, rags, and other debris. To pro-
tect equipment and reduce any interference with in-plant flow,
debris and trash are usually removed by a bar screen (Fig.
3.8). Most screens in treatment plants consist of parallel bars
placed at an angle in a channel in such a manner that the
wastewater flows through the bars. Trash collects on the bars
and is periodically raked off by hand or by mechanical means.
In most plants these screenings are disposed of by burying or
burning. In some cases they are automatically ground and
returned to the wastewater flow for removal by a later process.
Platform
s
Bar Scr««n
(Courtesy Water Pollution Control Federation)
Fig. 3.8 Bar screens
6 Effluent (EF-lu-ent). Wastewater or other liquid - raw, partially or completely treated - flowing FROM a basin, treatment process, or
treatment plant.
7 Shredding. Comminution. A mechanical treatment process which cuts large pieces of wastes into smaller pieces so they won't plug pipes
or damage equipment. SHREDDING and COMMINUTION usually mean the same thing.
-------
38 Treatment Plants
3.32 Shredding
Devices are also available which cut up or shred material
while it remains in the wastewater stream. The most common
of these are the barminutor (Fig. 3.9) and the comminutor (Fig.
3.10). One of these devices usually follows a bar screen.
r -
Fig. 3.9 Barminutor Fig. 3.10 Comminutor
(Courtesy Chicago Pump)
3.33 Grit Chambers or Grit Channels
Most sewer pipes are laid at a slope steep enough to main-
tain a wastewater flow of two feet per second (fps). If the
velocity is reduced slightly below that, say to 1.5 fps, some of
the larger, heavier particles will settle out. If the velocity is
reduced to about 1 fps, heavy inorganic material such as sand,
eggshells, and cinders will settle; but the lighter organic mate-
rial will remain in suspension. The settled inorganic material is
referred to as GRIT.8 Grit should be removed (Fig. 3.11) early
in the treatment process because it is abrasive and will rapidly
wear out pumps and other equipment. Since it is mostly inor-
ganic, it cannot be broken down by any biological treatment
process and thus should be removed as soon as possible.
Grit is usually removed in a long, narrow trough called a "grit
channel" (Fig. 3.12). A grit channel is designed to provide a
flow-through velocity of 1 fps. The settled grit may be removed
either manually or mechanically. Since there is normally some
organic solid material deposited along with the grit, it is usually
buried to avoid nuisance conditions. Some plants are equipped
with "grit washers" that remove some of the organic material
from the grit so that organic solids can remain in the main
waste flow to be treated.
Fig. 3. 11 Removal of eggshells (Don't remove grit with your
bare hands)
A
Fig. 3.12 Grit channel
WPCF MOP No. 11
Operation of Wastewater Treatment Plants
Many treatment plants have aerated grit chambers in which
compressed air is added through diffusers to provide better
separation of grit and other solids. Aeration in this manner also
"freshens" a "stale" or septic wastewater, helping to prevent
odors and to assist the biological treatment process.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 52.
3.3A Why is grit removed early in the treatment process?
3.3B What is usually done with grit which has been removed
from the wastewater?
3.4 FLOW-MEASURING DEVICES
Although flow-measuring devices are not for TREATING
wastes, it is necessary to know the quantity of wastewater flow
so adjustments can be made on pumping rates, chlorination
rates, aeration rates, and other processes in the plant. Flow
rates must be known, also, for calculation of loadings on treat-
ment processes and treatment efficiency. Most operators pre-
fer to have a measuring device at the HEADWORKS9 of their
treatment plant.
The most common measuring device is a Parshall Flume.
Basically it is a narrow place in an open channel which allows
the quantity of flow to be determined by measuring the depth of
flow. This method is widely used for measuring wastewater
because its smooth constriction does not offer any protruding
sharp edges or areas where wastewater particles may catch or
collect behind the metering device.
8 Grit. The heavy mineral present in wastewater, such as sand, gravel, cinders, and eggshells.
9 Headwords. The facilities where wastewater enters a wastewater treatment plant. The headworks may consist of bar screens, com-
minutors, a wet well and pumps.
-------
Treatment Facilities 39
Another measuring device used in open channels is a
WEIR10 (Fig. 3.13). The weir, which is placed across the chan-
nel, is a wall over which the wastewater may fall. Weirs are
usually made of thin metal and may have either a rectangular
or V-notch opening. The flow over the weir is determined by
the depth of wastewater going through the opening. A disad-
vantage of a weir is the relatively dead water space that occurs
just upstream of the weir. If the weir is used at the head end of
the plant, organic solids may settle out in this area. When this
occurs, odors and unsightliness can result. Also, as the solids
accumulate, the flow reading may become incorrect.
NOTE: Venturi Meters must flow full.
*'< fll' 'I' ll I
End Photo of Parshall Flume
(Drawings courtesy of Water Pollution
Control Federation)
Fig. 3.13 Flowmeters
A good measuring device for flows of treated or untreated
wastewater is a Venturi meter. This meter has a special sec-
tion of contracting pipe, and it measures flow in much the same
way as a Parshall Flume. There are no sharp obstructions to
catch rags and debris. Magnetic flow meters also are being
used successfully to measure wastewater flow.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 52.
3.4A Why are weirs not frequently used to measure the in-
fluent to a plant?
3.4B Why is a Parshall Flume widely used for measuring
wastewater flow?
3.5 PRIMARY TREATMENT (Chapter 5)
We have previously discussed the reduction in velocity of
the incoming waste to approximately one foot per second in
order to settle out heavy inorganic material or grit. The next
step in the treatment process is normally called SEDIMENTA-
TION or PRIMARY TREATMENT. In this process the waste is
directed into and through a large tank or basin. Flow velocity in
these tanks is reduced to about 0.03 foot per second, allowing
the settleable solids to fall to the bottom of the tank, thus mak-
ing the wastewater much clearer. For this reason these
sedimentation tanks are called "clarifiers." The first clarifier
that the wastewater flows into is called a PRIMARY clarifier.
We will discuss later the need for another clarifier after the
biological treatment process. This second clarifier is called a
"secondary clarifier."
Clarifiers normally are either rectangular (Fig. 3.14) or circu-
lar (Fig. 3.15). Primary clarifiers are usually designed to pro-
vide 1.5 to 2 hours DETENTION TIME.11 Secondary clarifiers
usually provide slightly more time.
Generally the longer the detention time, the greater the sol-
ids removal. In a tank with two hours detention time, approxi-
mately 60 percent of the suspended solids in the raw wastewa-
ter will either settle to the bottom or float to the surface and be
removed. Removal of these solids will usually reduce the
BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND (BOD)™ of the waste ap-
proximately 30 percent. The exact removal depends on the
amount of BOD contained in the settled material.
All primary clarifiers, no matter what their shape, must have
a means for collecting the settled solids (called SLUDGE,3)
and the floating solids (called scum). In rectangular tanks
sludge and scum collectors are usually wooden beams (flights)
attached to endless chains. The collector flights travel on the
surface, in the direction of the flow, conveying grease and
floatable solids down to the scum trough to be skimmed off to
the solids (sludge) handling facilities. The flights then drop
below the surface and return to the influent end along the
bottom, moving the settled raw sludge to the sludge hopper.
The sludge is periodically pumped from the hopper to the
sludge handling facilities.
In circular tanks, scrapers (plows) attached to a rotating arm
rotate slowly around the bottom of the tank. The plows push
the settled sludge toward the center and into the sludge hop-
per. Scum is collected by a rotating blade at the surface. As in
the case of the rectangular tank, both scum and sludge are
usually pumped to the solids or sludge handling facilities.
The clear surface water of the primary tank flows from the
tank by passing over a weir. The weir must be long enough to
allow the treated water to leave at a low velocity; if it leaves at a
high velocity, particles settling to the bottom or those already
on the bottom may be picked up and carried from the tank.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 52.
3.5A What is the purpose of flights or plows in a clarifier?
3.5B What happens to the sludge and scum collected in a
primary clarifier?
10 Weir (weer). (1) A wall or plate placed in an open channel and used to measure the flow. The depth of flow over the weir can be used to
calculate the flow rate, or a chart or conversion table may be used. (2) A wall or obstruction used to control flow (from clarifiers) to assure
uniform flow and avoid short-circuiting.
11 Detention Time. The time required to fill a tank at a given flow or the theoretical time required for a given flow of wastewater to flow through
the tank.
12 Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD). The rate at which microorganisms use the oxygen in water or wastewater while stabilizing decom-
posable organic matter under aerobic conditions. In decomposition, organic matter serves as food for the bacteria and energy results from
its oxidation.
13 Sludge (sluj). The settleable solids separated from liquids during processing or the deposits of foreign materials on bottoms of streams or
other bodies of water.
-------
40 Treatment Plants
SLUDGE COLLECTOR
DRIVE UNIT
SCUM SKIMMER AND TROUGH
EFFLUENT WEIRS
TARGET BAFFLE
INFLUENT
EFFLUENT TROUGH
SLUDGE COLLECTOR CHAIN
r-AND FLIGHTS
CROSS COLLECTOR
CHAIN AND FLIGHTS
SLUDGE
WITHDRAWAL
PIPE
SUMP
(Courtesy Jeffrey)
Fig. 3.14 Rectangular clarifier
-------
Treatment Facilities 41
EFFLUENT WEIR
INFLUENT WELL
SCUM DISCHARGE
SLUDGE
WITHDRAWAL
PIPE
EFFLUENT WEIR
DRIVE UNIT
EFFLUENT
TROUGH
COUNTER
BALANCE
WEIGHTS
NFLUENT
BLADES AND SCRAPER
SQUEEGEES
-------
42 Treatment Plants
3.6 SECONDARY TREATMENT
3.60 Purpose
In many treatment plants the wastewater flows from the pri-
mary clarifier into another unit where it receives SECONDARY
or BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT. This means that the wastewa-
ter is exposed to living organisms (such as bacteria) which eat
the dissolved and nonsettleable organic material remaining in
the waste. The two processes used almost universally for
biological treatment are the TRICKLING FILTER and ACTI-
VATED SLUDGE. These are both AEROBIC biological treat-
ment processes, which means the organisms require dis-
solved oxygen (Fig. 3.16) in order to live, eat, and reproduce.
Fig. 3.16 Organisms require dissolved oxygen
3.61 Trickling Filter (Chapter 6)
The trickling filter is one of the oldest and most dependable
of the biological treatment processes. Most of these plants are
removing 65 to 85% of the BOD-causing wastes and sus-
pended solids present in the influent.
The trickling filter is a bed of 11/2- to 5-inch rock, slag blocks,
or specially manufactured MEDIA14 over which settled waste-
water from the primary clarifier is distributed (Fig. 3.17). The
settled wastewater is usually applied by an overhead rotating
distributor and trickles over and around the media as it flows
downward to the effluent collection channel. Since the media
and the space (voids) in between them are large (usually 2Vt-
to 4-inch [6 to 10 cm] diameter) and since the applied waste-
water no longer has any large particles (they settled out in the
clarifier), the trickling filter does not remove solids by a filtering
action. A more correct term would be to call the filter a "biologi-
cal contact bed" or "biological reactor" since this is the function
it performs. The filter bed offers a place for aerobic bacteria
and other organisms to attach themselves and multiply as they
feed on the passing wastewater. This process of feeding on, or
decomposing waste is exactly the same as the process occur-
ring in the stream when waste is discharged to it. In the trickling
filter, however, the organisms use the oxygen which enters the
waste from the surrounding air, rather than using up the
stream s supply of dissolved oxygen. Thus the voids between
the media must be large so sufficient oxygen can be supplied
by circulating air.
(Courtesy Water Pollution Control Federation)
(Courtesy Water Pollution Control Federation)
Fig. 3.17 Trickling filter
The wastewater being distributed on the filter usually has
passed through a primary clarifier, but it still contains approxi-
mately 70 percent of its original organic matter, which repre-
sents food for organisms. For this reason a tremendous popu-
lation of organisms develops on the media. This population
continues to grow as more waste is applied. Eventually the
layer of organisms on the media gets so thick that some of it
breaks off (sloughs off) and is carried into the filter effluent
channel. This material is normally called HUMUS. Since it is
principally organic matter, its presence in a stream would be
undesirable. This humus is usually removed by settling in a
SECONDARY CLARIFIER. Humus sludge from the secondary
clarifier is usually returned to the primary clarifier to be reset-
tled and pumped to the sludge handling facilities along with the
"raw" sludge which settles out as previously described.
3.62 Rotating Biological Contactors (Chapter 7)
Rotating biological contactors (RBC) are similar to trickling
filters and are located after primary clarifiers. Biological contac-
tors have a rotating "shaft" surrounded by plastic discs called
the "media." A biological slime grows on the media when con-
ditions are suitable. This process is very similar to a trickling
filter where the biological slime grows on rock or other media
and settled wastewater (primary clarifier effluent) is applied
over the media. With rotating biological contactors, the biologi-
cal slime grows on the surface of the plastic-disc media. The
slime is rotated into the settled wastewater and then into the
atmosphere to provide oxygen for the organisms. The waste-
water being treated usually flows parallel to the rotating shaft,
but may flow perpendicular to the shaft as it flows from stage-
to-stage or tank-to-tank. Effluent from the rotating biological
contactors flows through secondary clarifiers for removal of
suspended solids and dead slime growths.
3.63 Activated Sludge (Chapters 8, 11 and 21)
Another biological treatment unit that is used in secondary
treatment, following the primary clarifier, is the aeration tank.
When aeration tanks are used with the sedimentation process,
the treatment plant is called an ACTIVATED SLUDGE plant.
The activated sludge process is widely used by large cities and
communities where land is expensive and where large vol-
umes must be highly treated, economically, without creating a
nuisance to neighbors. The activated sludge plant is probably
the most popular biological treatment process being built today
for larger installations or small package plants. These plants
are capable of BOD and suspended solids reductions of 90 to
99 percent. The activated sludge process is a biological pro-
cess, and it serves the same function as a trickling filter or
n Media. The material in a trickling filter on which slime organisms grow. As settled wastewater trickles over the media, slime organisms
remove certain types of wastes thereby partially treating the wastewater.
-------
Treatment Facilities 43
rotating biological contactor. Effluent from a primary clarifier is
piped to a large aeration tank (Fig. 3.18). Air is supplied to the
tank by either introducing compressed air into the bottom of the
tank and letting it bubble through the wastewater and up to the
top, or by churning the surface mechanically to introduce at-
mospheric oxygen.
Aerobic bacteria and other organisms thrive as they travel
through the aeration tank. With sufficient food and oxygen they
multiply rapidly, as in a trickling filter. By the time the waste
reaches the end of the tank (usually 4 to 8 hours), most of the
organic matter in the waste has been used by the bacteria for
producing new cells. The effluent from the tank, usually called
MIXED LIQUOR, consists of a suspension containing a large
population of organisms and a liquid with very little soluble
BOD. The activated sludge forms a lacy network that captures
pollutants.
The organisms are removed in the same manner as they
were in the trickling filter plant. The mixed liquor is piped to a
secondary clarifier, and the organisms settle to the bottom of
the tank while the clear effluent flows over the top of the
effluent weirs. This effluent is usually clearer than a trickling
filter effluent because the suspended material in the mixed
liquor settled to the bottom of the clarifier more readily than the
material in a trickling filter effluent. The settled organisms are
known as ACTIVATED SLUDGE. They are extremely valuable
to the treatment process. IF THEY ARE REMOVED QUICKLY
FROM THE SECONDARY CLARIFIER, THEY WILL BE IN
GOOD CONDITION AND HUNGRY FOR MORE FOOD (or-
ganic wastes) (Fig. 3.19). They are therefore pumped back
(recirculated) to the influent end of the aeration tank where
they are mixed with the incoming wastewater. Here they begin
all over again to feed on the organic material in the waste,
decomposing it and creating new organisms.
Left uncontrolled, the number of organisms would eventually
be too great, and therefore some must periodically be re-
moved. This is accomplished by pumping a small amount of
the activated sludge to the primary clarifier or directly to the
sludge handling facilities. If the organisms are pumped to the
clarifier, they settle along with the raw sludge and then are
removed to the sludge handling facilities.
There are many variations of the conventional activated
sludge process, but they all involve the same basic principle.
These variations will be discussed in Chapters 8 and 11, "Acti-
vated Sludge."
3.64 Secondary Clarifiers (Chapter 5)
As previously mentioned, trickling filters, rotating biological
contactors and activated sludge tanks produce effluents that
contain large populations of microorganisms and associated
materials (humus). These microorganisms must be removed
from the flow before it can be discharged to the receiving wa-
ters. This task is usually accomplished by a secondary clarifier.
In this tank the trickling filter or biological contactor humus or
activated sludge separates from the liquid and settles to the
bottom of the tank. This sludge is removed to the primary
clarifier to be resettled with the primary sludge or returned to
the beginning of the secondary process to continue treating the
wastewater. In most activated sludge plants the waste acti-
vated sludge is pumped to waste sludge handling facilities
instead of to the primary clarifier. The clear effluent flows over
a weir at the top of the secondary clarifier.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 52.
3.6A Would it be a good idea to use trickling filter media of
various sizes so it could pack together better?
3.6B Why is a secondary clarifier needed after a trickling
filter, rotating biological contactor, or aeration tank?
3.6C Activated sludge can be pumped from the secondary
clarifier to
Fig. 3.19 Hungry organisms ready for more food
-------
44 Treatment Plants
TYPICAL ACTIVATED SLUDGE TANK
Diffuscrs in
aperafi'ig position
Inlet channel
Intet weir.
Air supply
Diffuse*- in
raised posiH"'-
(Courtesy Water Pollution Control Federation)
Fig. 3.18 Aeration tank
(Courtesy Water Pollution Control Federation)
-------
Treatment Facilities 45
3.7 SOLIDS HANDLING AND DISPOSAL (Chapters 12
and 22)
3.70 Purpose
Solids removed from wastewater treatment processes are
commonly broken down by a biological treatment process
called SLUDGE DIGESTION. After digestion and removal of
water (DEWATERING),15 the remaining material may be used
as fertilizer or soil conditioner. Some solids such as scum from
a clarifier, may be disposed of by burning or burial. Possible
solids handling systems are shown on Figures 3.20 and 3.21.
3.71 Digestion and Dewatering
Settled sludge from the primary clarifier and occasionally
settled sludge from the secondary clarifier are periodically
pumped to a digestion tank. The tank is usually completely
sealed to keep air from getting inside (Figures 3.22 and 3.23.)
This type of digester is called an ANAEROBIC DIGESTER
because of the anaerobic bacteria that abound in the tank.
Anaerobic bacteria thrive in an environment without dissolved
oxygen by using the oxygen which is chemically combined with
their food supply.
Two major types of bacteria are present in the digester. The
first group starts eating the organic portion of the sludge to
form organic acids and carbon dioxide gas. These bacteria are
called ACID FORMERS. The second group breaks down the
organic acids to simpler compounds and forms methane and
carbon dioxide gas. These bacteria are called GAS FORM-
ERS. The methane gas is usually used to heat the digester or
to run engines in the plant. The production of gas indicates
that organic material is being eaten by the bacteria. A sludge is
usually considered properly digested when 50 percent of the
organic matter has been destroyed and converted to gas. This
normally takes approximately 30 days if the temperature is
kept at about 95°F (35°C).
Most digestion tanks are mixed continuously to bring the
food to the organisms, to provide a uniform temperature, and
to avoid the formation of thick scum blankets. When a digester
is not being mixed, the solids settle to the bottom, leaving an
amber-colored liquid known as SUPERNATANT above the
sludge. In many plants, digester contents will be the same (no
separation of solids and liquids) after two days of sitting without
mixing. The supernatant is displaced from the tank each time a
Fig. 3.24 Don't allow digester gas and air to mix
fresh charge of raw sludge is pumped from the primary
clarifier. The displaced supernatant usually is returned from
the digester back to the plant headworks and mixed with in-
coming raw wastes. Supernatant return should be slow to pre-
vent overloading or shock loading of the plant.
A scum blanket will usually develop above the supernatant
level. Scum blankets consist of grease, soap, rubber goods,
hair, petroleum products, plastics, and filter tips from cigar-
ettes. These scum blankets may contain most of the added
food or sludge. Organisms that digest the sludge are usually
below the supernatant and little digestion will occur if the or-
ganisms and food don't get together. Control of scum blankets
consists of mixing the digester contents and burning or burying
skimmings instead of pumping them to the digester.
Above the scum blanket or normal water level is the gas
collection area. Digester gas is usually around 70 percent
methane and about 30 percent carbon dioxide. IA/HEN MIXED
WITH AIR, DIGESTER GAS IS EXTREMELY EXPLOSIVE (Fig.
3.24).
In most newer plants digesting takes place in two tanks. The
first or primary digester is usually heated and mixed. Rapid
digestion takes place along with most of the gas production. In
the secondary tank, the digested sludge and supernatant are
allowed to separate, thus producing a clearer supernatant and
better-digested sludge.
Digester sludge from the bottom of the tank is periodically
removed for dewatering. This is accomplished in sand drying
beds (Fig. 3.25), lagoons, centrifuges, vacuum filters (Fig.
3.26), and filter presses. The sludge is then burned, buried, or
used as fertilizer on certain crops (not on crops which are
eaten without cooking). Sludge that has been adequately di-
gested drains readily and is not offensive.
Some of today's activated sludge treatment plants are
equipped with aerobic digesters. An aerobic digester is usually
an open tank with compressed air being blown through the
sludge. Destruction of organic matter is accomplished by bac-
teria which require dissolved oxygen to survive. The aeration
equipment is turned off to allow time for the solids to separate
from the water before the supernatant is removed.
One advantage of this process is that no explosive gas is
produced. On the other hand, this is also a disadvantage since
the anaerobic digester gas is used as a fuel for boilers and
engines around the plant. Aerobic sludge from an aerobic di-
gester doesn't thicken as readily as sludge from an anaerobic
digester. Aerobic sludge filters about as well as an equivalent
concentration of anaerobic sludge. Supernatant from aerobic
digesters is not as strong nor difficult to treat as supernatant
from anaerobic digesters.
3.72 Incineration
Sludge may be disposed of by burning if the process does
SLUDGE DIGESTER
Fixed cover
Prmwa vacuum
tel:«< vert wrih
fiame arrester^
Sample tube
(kis-hgM moRhole' ,
Mm —~
KOTt
Mo mu nij
devtf.es sfeown
Vacuum bypass line
f with check vol»e
Cover may be concrete
B iMy bt (lot
f]
Overfly bo*
level cortM
-Gas dro»o
-------
SLUDGE
FROM
PRIMARY
CLARIFIER
ANAEROBIC
SLUDGE
DIGESTION
DIGESTED SLUDGE
TO DRYING
BEDS
DRIED SOLIDS
TO LAND FILL
OR SPREAD
ON SOIL
DRIED
SOLIDS
SUPERNATANT
PLAN
(TOP VIEW)
EFFLUENT
SUPERNATANT
TO PLANT
INFLUENT
GAS STORAGE
SCUM
SUPERNATANT
DRIED
SOLIDS
DIGESTING
SLUDGE
DIGESTED
SLUDGE
SLUDGE
HEATER
EFFLUENT
TO PLANT
INFLUENT
PROFILE
(SIDE VIEW)
Fig. 3.20 Possible sludge processing and solids disposal
flow pattern (sludge drying beds)
-------
I
SLUDGE FROM
PRIMARY
CLARIFIERS
ANAEROBIC SLUDGE DIGESTION
CHEMICAL
CONDITIONING
VACUUM
FILTRATION
DE WATERED
SOLIDS TO
LANDFILL
OR SPREAD
-r
>
FIRST
STAGE
PLAN
(TOP VIEW)
¦CHEMICALS
—fc-
/
—
r
DEWATERED
y SOLIDS
LIQUID
SUPERNATANT
SLUDGE
HEATER
~
L_
3,
£
SUPERNATANT
TO PLANT
DEWATERED
SOLIDS
OFF FILTER
TO DISPOSAL
PROFILE
(SIDE VIEW)
GAS STORAGE
CHEMICALS
SUPERNATANT
FILTERED
LIQUID
TO PLANT
INFLUENT
(D
0)
3
®
3
H
0>
o
Fig. 3.21 Possible sludge processing and solids disposal
flow pattern (vacuum filtration)
(D
o>
-------
48 Treatment Plants
rGAS DOME
VACUUM
PRESSURE
RELIEF —
INLET BOX
ACCESS
MANHOLE
SAMPLING
HOLE
ACCESS
MANHOLE
SUPERNATANT
RETURN
RAW SLUDGE
FEED-IN
DIGESTED
SLUDGE DRAIN-
OFF
NOTE: NO MIXING DEVICE SHOWN.
Fig. 3.23 Section of sludge digester
SLUDGE DRYING BED (Schematic)
Sfiiafti tie*
12 "(appwx)
Srov«l
(Courtesy Water Pollution Control Federation)
Fig. 3.25 Sludge drying bed Fig. 3.26 Vacuum filter
-------
Treatment Facilities 49
not create an air pollution problem. Sludge that has not been
dewatered previously can be conditioned by WET OXIDA-
TION,16 dewatered, and then burned. Incineration or burial of
skimmings from the clarifiers will prevent treatment plant oper-
ational problems.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 52.
3.7A What two basic types of bacteria are present in an
anaerobic digester?
3.7B Why are digesters mixed?
3.7C List some of the ways to dewater and dispose of di-
gested sludge.
3.8 WASTE TREATMENT PONDS (Chapter 9)
The waste treatment pond (Fig. 3.27), or stabilization pond,
is a special method of biological treatment deserving attention.
Ponds do not resemble the concrete and steel structures or the
mechanical devices previously discussed, but these simple
depressions in the ground are capable of producing an effluent
comparable to some of the most modern plants with respect to
BOD and bacteria reduction.
The type of treatment processes and the location of ponds
are determined by the design engineer on the basis of econom-
ics and the degree of treatment required to meet the water
quality standards of the receiving waters. In some treatment
plants, wastewater being treated may flow through a coarse
screen and flow meter before it flows through a series of
ponds. Two other types of plants using ponds include locating
the ponds after primary treatment and placing them after trickl-
ing filters.
When wastewater is discharged to a pond, the settleable
solids fall to the bottom just as they do in a primary clarifier.
The solids begin to decompose and soon use up all the dis-
solved oxygen in the nearby water. A population of anaerobic
bacteria then continues the decomposition, much the same as
in an anaerobic digester. As the organic matter is destroyed,
methane and carbon dioxide are released. When the carbon
dioxide rises to the surface, some of it is used by algae which
convert it to oxygen by the process of PHOTOSYNTHESIS17
This is the same process used by living plants. Aerobic bac-
teria, algae, and other microorganisms feed on the dissolved
solids in the upper layer of the pond much the same way they
do in a trickling filter or aeration tank. Algae produce oxygen for
the other organisms to use.
Some shallow ponds (3- to 6-feet deep) have dissolved oxy-
gen throughout their entire depth. These ponds are called
aerobic ponds. They usually have a mechanical apparatus
adding oxygen as well as their oxygen supply from algae.
Another type of aerated pond has oxygen delivered by a dif-
fused air system similar to the system used in activated sludge
plants.
Deep (8 to 12 feet), heavily loaded ponds may be without
oxygen throughout their depth. These ponds are called
anaerobic ponds. At times these ponds can be quite odorous,
and they are used only in sparsely populated areas.
Ponds that contain an aerobic top layer and an anaerobic
bottom layer are called FACULTATIVE PONDS,18 These are
the ponds normally seen in most areas. If they are properly
designed and operated, they are virtually odor-free and pro-
duce a well-oxidized (low BOD) effluent.
Occasionally ponds are used after a primary treatment unit.
In this case, they are usually called "oxidation ponds." When
they are used to treat raw wastewater, they are called "raw
wastewater lagoons" or "waste stabilization ponds."
The effluent from ponds is usually moderately low in bac-
teria. This is especially true when the effluent runs from one
pond to another or more (series flow). The long detention time,
usually a month or more, is required in order for harmful bac-
teria and undesirable solids to be removed from the pond
effluent. If the receiving waters are used for water supply or
body contact sports, chlorination of the effluent may still be
required.
QUESTION
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 52.
3.8A How are facultative ponds similar to the following:
1. a clarifier?
2. a digester?
3. an aeration tank?
3.9 ADVANCED METHODS OF TREATING WASTEWA-
TER (Volume III)
The treatment processes described so far in this chapter are
considered CONVENTIONAL treatment processes. As our
population grows and industry expands, more effective treat-
ment processes will be required. Advanced methods of waste
treatment may follow conventional processes, or they may be
used instead of these processes. Sometimes advanced
methods of waste treatment are called tertiary (TER-she-AIR-
ee) treatment because they frequently follow secondary treat-
ment. Advanced methods of waste treatment include
coagulation-sedimentation (used in water treatment plants),
adsorption, and electrodialysis. Other new treatment pro-
cesses that may be used in the future include reverse osmosis,
chemical oxidation, and the use of polymers.
Advanced methods of treatment are used to reduce the nut-
rient content (nitrate and phosphate) of wastewater to prevent
blooms of algae in lakes, reservoirs, or streams. Carbon filters
are used to reduce the last traces of organic materials. In some
parts of the arid West, advanced methods are used to enable
the use of the plant effluent for recreational reservoirs.
16 Wet Oxidation. A method of treating or conditioning sludge before the water is removed. Compressed air is blown into the liquid sludge.
The air and the sludge mixture is fed Into a pressure vessel where the organic material is stabilized. The stabilized organic material and inert
(inorganic) solids are then separated from the pressure vessel effluent by dewatering in lagoons or by mechanical means.
17 Photosynthesis (foto-SIN-tha-sis). A process In which organisms with the aid of chlorophyll (green plant enzyme) convert carbon dioxide
and inorganic substances to oxygen and additional plant material, utilizing sunlight for energy. All green plants grow by this process.
18 Facultative Pond (FACK-ul-TAY-tive). The most common type of pond in current use. The upper portion (supernatant) is aerobic, whilethe
bottom layer is anaerobic. Algae supply most of the oxygen to the supernatant.
-------
50 Treatment Plants
STABILIZATION POND
Submerged inl#t
thculd everi fy V
di*,f'bufe ^
*o p'eveot she* t circuiting
• Bottom of pond
cleaned of v«g*f»tion
(Courtesy Water Pollution Control Federation)
Fig. 3.27
QUESTION
Write your answer in a notebook and then compare your
answer with the one on page 52.
3.9A If wastewater from a secondary treatment plant were
coagulated with alum or lime and settled in a clarifier,
would this be considered a method of advanced waste
treatment?
3.10 DISINFECTION (Chapter 10)
Although the settling process and biological processes re-
move a great number of organisms from the wastewater flow,
there remain many thousands of bacteria in every milliliter of
wastewater leaving the secondary clarifier. If there are human
wastes in the water, it is possible that some of the bacteria are
PATHOGENIC, or harmful to humans. Therefore, if the treated
wastewater is discharged to a receiving water that is used for a
drinking water supply or swimming or wading, the water pollu-
tion control agency or health department will usually require
disinfection of the effuent prior to discharge.
Disinfection is usually defined as the killing of PATHOGENIC
organisms. The killing of ALL organisms is called sterilization.
Sterilization is not accomplished in treatment plants as the final
effluent always contains some living organisms after disinfec-
tion due to the inefficiency of the killing process.
Disinfection can be accomplished by almost any process
that will create a harsh environment for the organisms. Strong
light, heat, oxidizing chemicals, acids, alkalies, poisons, and
many other substances will disinfect. Most disinfection in
wastewater treatment plants is accomplished by chlorine,
which is a strong oxidizing chemical.
Chlorine gas is used in most treatment plants although some
of the smaller plants use a liquid chlorine solution as their
source. The dangers in using chlorine gas, however, have
prompted some of the larger plants to switch to hypochlorite
solution (bleach) even though it is more expensive.
Chlorine gas, which is withdrawn from pressurized cylinders
(Courtesy Water and Sewage Works Magazine)
Pond
containing liquid chlorine, is mixed with water or treated
wastewater to make up a strong chlorine solution. Liquid
hypochlorite solution can be used directly. The strong chlorine
solution is then mixed with the effluent from the secondary
clarifier. Proper and adequate mixing are very important. The
effluent is then directed to a chlorine contact basin or tank. The
basin can be any size or shape, but better results are obtained
if the basin is long and narrow. This shape prevents rapid
movement or short-circuiting through the basin. Square or rec-
tangular basins can be baffled to achieve this effect (Fig. 3.28).
Basins are usually designed to provide approximately 20 to 30
minutes theoretical contact time, although the trend is to longer
times. If the plant's outfall line is of sufficient length, it may
function as an excellent contact chamber since short-circuiting
will not occur.
In some areas the effluent must be dechlorinated or detox-
ified before discharge to the receiving waters. Sulfur dioxide
(S02) has been added after the chlorine contact basin to neu-
tralize the remaining residual chlorine.
3.11 EFFLUENT DISPOSAL (Chapters 13 and 25)
Ultimately the effluent from a wastewater treatment plant
must be disposed of in the environment. This can be into wa-
ter, onto land, or the water can be reclaimed and reused.
Effluents from most wastewater treatment plants are dis-
charged into receiving waters such as streams, rivers and
lakes. With water becoming scarcer due to increased demands
and with required higher degrees of treatment, plant effluent is
becoming a valuable resource. Both industry and agriculture
are discovering that treated effluent may be the most econom-
ical source of additional water.
Land disposal is another method of ultimate disposal and
can be a means of recharging groundwater basins or storing
water for future use. Evaporation ponds are used to dispose of
effluents to the atmosphere. Regardless of the method of ulti-
mate effluent disposal, operators must carefully operate
wastewater treatment plants so that plant effluent will not
cause any adverse impacts on the method of ultimate disposal
or on the environment.
-------
CHLORINE CONTACT BASIN
I
(Courtesy Water Pollution Control Federation)
Fig. 3.28 Chlorine contact
3.12 SOLIDS DISPOSAL (Chapter 22)
Final solids disposal is one of the major problems facing
many operators today. Solids removed from wastewater by
pretreatment processes such as bar racks, screens and grit
removal systems may be disposed of by dewatering and then
direct burial in an approved sanitary landfill or incineration with
the remaining ash disposed of in a landfill. Grease and scum
from primary and secondary treatment processes are usually
pumped to anaerobic digesters or disposed of in incinerators
or in sanitary landfills.
Both aerobic and anaerobic sludge digestion processes
produce stabilized or digested solids that ultimately must be
disposed of in the environment. Disposal methods include
composting with another material such as leaves, farm land
application as a soil conditioner or fertilizer, burial in a sanitary
landfill or incineration with ash disposal in a landfill.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 52.
3.1 OA Does disinfection usually kill all organisms in the plant
effluent?
3.1 OB Which would provide better chlorine contact, a
10,000-gallon cubical tank or a length of 10-inch pipe
flowing full and containing the same volume as the
cubical tank?
3.13 ADDITIONAL READING
Some books you can read to obtain further information on
the treatment plant and the various processes involved are:
1. MOP 77;
2. NEW YORK MANUAL;
3. TEXAS MANUAL; and
4. BASIC SEWAGE TREATMENT OPERATION, Publica-
tions Centre, Ontario Ministry of Government Services,
880 Bay Street, 5th Floor, Toronto, Ontario, CANADA
M7A 1N8. Price $2.00.
-------
52 Treatment Plants
SUGGESTED ANSWERS
Chapter 3. WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITIES
Answers to questions on page 30.
3.1A The operator should know the origin of wastes reaching
the plant, the time it takes, and how the wastes are
transported (flow by gravity or by gravity and pumped).
Such knowledge will help you to spot troubles and take
corrective action.
3.1 B Sanitary, storm, combined.
3.1C If the flow time to reach the plant is very long, hydrogen
sulfide gas may develop and cause corrosion damage
to concrete in the transportation system and in the
plant. Also undesirable odors develop and solids are
difficult to settle.
3.1D Flows are sometimes bypassed during storms because
a plant does not have the capacity to handle the addi-
tional wastewater.
Answers to questions on page 38.
3.3A Grit should be removed early in the treatment process
because it is abrasive and will wear out pumps and
other equipment.
3.3B Grit removed from the wastewater is usually buried to
avoid causing a nuisance.
Answers to questions on page 39.
3.4A Weirs are not frequently used to measure influent flows
because solids may collect behind the weir causing
odors and inaccurate flow measurements.
3.4B Parshall Flumes are widely used for measuring waste-
water flow because they have no obstructions.
Answers to questions on page 39.
3.5A "Flights" in rectangular tanks move scum along the sur-
face to a scum trough and push sludge along the bot-
tom to a hopper for removal to the sludge handling
facility. "Plows" scrape sludge along the bottom of cir-
cular tanks to a hopper for removal.
3.5B Sludge and scum are usually pumped to sludge han-
dling facilities such as digesters. Scum should be
burned or buried if possible.
Answers to questions on page 43.
3.6A No. If the media were packed together, air could not
circulate and the organisms on the media would not get
enough oxygen.
3.6B A secondary clarifier is needed after a trickling filter,
rotating biological contactor or aeration tank to allow
organisms in treated wastewater to be removed by settl-
ing.
3.6C Aeration tank or waste sludge handling facilities. Waste
activated sludge could be pumped to either of the two
places listed.
Answers to questions on page 49.
3.7A (1) a group that eats organic sludge to form organic
acids and carbon dioxide gas (acid formers); and (2) a
group that breaks down the organic acids into simpler
compounds and forms methane and carbon dioxide gas
(gas formers).
3.7B Digesters are mixed to bring food and organisms to-
gether and prevent the formation of a scum blanket.
3.7C Digested sludge may be dewatered by using sand dry-
ing beds, centrifuges, vacuum filters, or lagoons. Ulti-
mately the dried sludge may be used as a soil con-
ditioner or it may be buried.
Answer to question on page 49.
3.8A A facultative pond acts like a clarifier by allowing solids
to settle to its bottom, like a digester because solids on
the bottom are decomposed by anaerobic bacteria, and
like an aeration tank because of the action of aerobic
bacteria in the upper layer of the pond.
Answer to question on page 50.
3.9A Yes.
Answers to questions on page 51.
3.10A No.
3.10B The pipe would provide better chlorine contact because
water cannot short-circuit (take a short route) through a
pipe, while it might not move evenly through a tank and
thus some of the water would have a shorter contact
time.
-------
Treatment Facilities 53
OBJECTIVE TEST
Chapter 3. WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITIES
Please mark correct answers in the proper columns on the
answer sheet, as directed at the end of Chapter 1. Return your
answer sheet to your Project Director.
1. Name three different types of sewers.
1. Conventional, surface, combined
2. Sanitary, pipes, storm
3. Sanitary, storm, combined
4. Sanitary, storm, conventional
5. Sanitary, storm, groundwater
2. Combined sewers (1. ARE) or (2. ARE NOT) a problem to
treatment plant operators.
3. Which of the following are biological treatment processes?
1. Digesters
2. Grit removal
3. Ponds
4. Shredders
5. Trickling filters
4. The purpose of screening is to
1. Grade the solids into different sizes.
2. Prevent large solids from plugging pumps and pipes.
3. Protect public health.
4. Remove large objects and debris.
5. Thin the wastewater.
5. Flow measurements are important because they are used
to
1. Adjust pumping rates.
2. Determine chlorination rates.
3. Determine if a plant is handling its design capacity.
4. Determine loading on units.
5. Determine treatment efficiency.
6. The solids settled in a clarifier are called
1. Colloidal solids.
2. Dissolved solids.
3. Emulsions.
4. Scum.
5. Sludge.
7. The trickling filter (1. DOES) or (2. DOES NOT) remove
solids by a filtering action.
8. Why is the mixture of digester gas and air dangerous?
1. It kills grass.
2. It may explode.
3. It stinks.
9. (1. Disinfection) or (2. Sterilization) is usually defined as
the killing of pathogenic organisms, and
10. The killing of all organisms is called (1. Disinfection) or (2.
Sterilization).
11. Ponds are capable of reducing
1. BOD and bacteria.
2. Land area and cost.
3. Mosquitoes and weeds.
4. Odors and algae.
5. None of these.
12. Effluent from a wastewater treatment plant may be dis-
posed of by
1. Discharging into receiving waters.
2. Discharging onto land.
3. Evaporating into the atmosphere.
4. Recharging ground water.
5. Reclaiming and reusing.
END OF OBJECTIVE TEST
-------
CHAPTER 4
RACKS, SCREENS, COMMINUTORS AND GRIT REMOVAL
(PRETREATMENT)
by
Larry Bristow
-------
56 Treatment Plants
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 4. Racks, Screens, Comminutors and Grit Removal
Page
OBJECTIVES 57
GLOSSARY 58
4.0 Caution 61
4.1 Pretreatment 61
4.2 Bar Screens and Racks 62
4.20 Safety Around Bar Screens and Racks 64
4.21 Manually Cleaned Bar Screens 64
4.22 Mechanically Cleaned Screens 67
4.23 Operational Procedures 68
4.3 Disposal of Screenings 68
4.4 Comminution 69
4.40 Comminutors 69
4.41 Barminutors 77
4.42 Operational Procedures 77
4.5 Grit Removal 81
4.6 Grit Channels 81
4.7 Cyclone Grit Separators 87
4.70 Safety 90
4.71 Start Up 90
4.72 Operation 90
4.73 Shutdown 90
4.74 Maintenance 90
4.8 Grit Washing 91
4.9 Quantities of Grit 91
4.10 Disposal of Grit 93
4.11 Pre-aeration 93
4.12 Operational Strategy 93
4.13 Design Review 94
4.130 Racks and Screens 94
4.131 Grit Removal 94
4.132 Wet Wells 94
4.14 Additional Reading 94
4.15 Metric Calculations 94
4.150 Conversion Factors 95
4.151 Problem Solutions 95
-------
OBJECTIVES
Chapter 4. RACKS, SCREENS, COMMINUTORS AND
GRIT REMOVAL
At the beginning of the remaining chapters you will find a list
of OBJECTIVES. The purpose of this list is to stress the most
important topics in the chapter. Contained in the list will be
items you need to know and skills you must develop to operate
and to maintain your plant as efficiently and safely as possible.
Following completion of Chapter 4, you should be able to do
the following:
1. Explain the purposes of racks, screens, comminutors, grit
channels, grit separators, and pre-aeration,
2. Properly start up, operate, shut down, and maintain the
pretreatment process,
3. Identify potential safety hazards and conduct pretreatment
duties using safe procedures,
4. Determine the volume of screenings and how long a dis-
posal site will last before it is full,
5. Measure the flow velocity in a grit channel,
6. Regulate flow velocities in a grit channel,
7. Develop an operational strategy for pretreatment pro-
cesses, and
8. Review plans and specifications for pretreatment pro-
cesses.
NOTE: Information on maintenance of equipment is in Chapter
15, "Maintenance."
-------
58 Treatment Plants
GLOSSARY
AEROBIC DECOMPOSITION (AIR-O-bick) AEROBIC DECOMPOSITION
The decay or breaking down of organic material in the presence of "free" or dissolved oxygen.
ALKALINITY (AL-ka-lin-ity) ALKALINITY
The capacity of water or wastewater to neutralize acids. This capacity is caused by the water's content of carbonate, bicarbonate,
hydroxide, and occasionally borate, silicate and phosphate. Alkalinity is expressed in milligrams per liter of equivalent calcium
carbonate. Alkalinity is not the same as pH because water does not have to be strongly basic (high pH) to have a high alkalinity.
Alkalinity is a measure of how much acid can be added to a liquid without causing a great change in pH.
ANAEROBIC DECOMPOSITION (AN-air-O-bick) ANAEROBIC DECOMPOSITION
The decay or breaking down of organic material in an environment containing no "free" or dissolved oxygen.
BUFFER BUFFER
A solution or liquid whose chemical makeup neutralizes acids or bases without a great change in pH.
BUFFER CAPACITY BUFFER CAPACITY
A measure of the capacity of a solution or liquid to neutralize acids or bases. This is a measure of the capacity of water or
wastewater for offering a resistance to changes in pH.
CLARIFIER (KLAIR-i-fire) CLARIFIER
Settling Tank, Sedimentation Basin. A tank or basin in which wastewater is held for a period of time, during which the heavier solids
settle to the bottom and the lighter material will float to the water surface.
DECOMPOSITION, DECAY DECOMPOSITION, DECAY
Processes that convert unstable materials into more stable forms by chemical or biological action. Waste treatment encourages
decay in a controlled situation so the material may be disposed of in a stable form. When organic matter decays under anaerobic
conditions (putrefaction), undesirable odors are produced. The aerobic processes in common use for wastewater treatment produce
much less objectionable odors.
DETRITUS (dee-TRI-tus) DETRITUS
The heavy, coarse mixture of grit and organic material carried by wastewater.
DIFFUSER DIFFUSER
A device (porous plate, tube, bag) used to break the air stream from the blower system into fine bubbles in an aeration tank or
reactor.
DIGESTER (die-JEST-er) DIGESTER
A tank in which sludge is placed to allow decomposition by microorganisms. Digestion may occur under anaerobic (more common)
or aerobic conditions.
DISSOLVED OXYGEN DISSOLVED OXYGEN
Molecular oxygen dissolved in water or wastewater, usually abbreviated DO.
EFFLUENT (EF-lu-ent) EFFLUENT
Wastewater or other liquid — raw, partially or completely treated — flowing FROM a basin, treatment process, or treatment plant.
EXPLOSIMETER EXPLOSIMETER
An instrument used to detect explosive atmospheres. When the Lower Explosive Limit (L.E.L.) of an atmosphere is exceeded, an
alarm signal on the instrument is activated.
-------
Racks 59
GRIT GRIT
The heavy mineral material present in wastewater, such as sand, gravel, cinders, and eggshells.
GRIT REMOVAL GRIT REMOVAL
Grit removal is accomplished by providing an enlarged channel or chamber which causes the flow velocity to be reduced and allows
the heavier grit to settle to the bottom of the channel or chamber where it can be removed.
HEAD HEAD
A term used to describe the height or energy of water above a point. A head of water may be measured in either height (feet or
meters) or pressure (pounds per square inch or kilograms per square centimeter).
HEAD LOSS HEAD LOSS
An indirect measure of loss of energy or pressure. Flowing water will lose some of its } [ head loss
energy when it passes through a pipe, bar screen, comminutor, filter or other obstruction.
The amount of energy or pressure lost is called "head loss." Head loss is measured as
the difference in elevation between the upstream water surface and the downstream
water surface and may be expressed in feet or meters.
HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2S) HYDROGEN SULFIDE
Hydrogen sulfide is a gas with a rotten egg odor. This gas is produced under anaerobic conditions. Hydrogen sulfide is particularly
dangerous because it dulls your sense of smell so that you don't notice it after you have been around it for a while and because the
odor is not noticeable in high concentrations. The gas is very poisonous to your respiratory system, explosive, flammable and
colorless.
INFLUENT (IN-flu-ent) INFLUENT
Wastewater or other liquid — raw or partially treated — flowing INTO a reservoir, basin, treatment process, or treatment plant.
INORGANIC MATERIAL INORGANIC MATERIAL
Material such as sand, salt, iron, calcium, and other mineral materials which are only slightly affected by the action of organisms.
Inorganic materials are chemical substances of mineral origin; whereas organic materials are chemical substances usually of
animal or vegetable origin.
LIMIT SWITCH LIMIT SWITCH
A device that regulates or controls the travel distance of a chain or cable.
O & M MANUAL O & M MANUAL
(Operation and Maintenance Manual)
A manual which outlines procedures for operators to follow to operate and maintain a specific wastewater treatment plant and the
equipment in the plant.
ORGANIC MATERIAL ORGANIC MATERIAL
Material which comes mainly from animal or vegetable sources. Organic material generally can be consumed by bacteria and other
small organisms. Inorganic materials are chemical substances of mineral origin.
OZONIZATION (O-zoe-nie-ZAY-shun) OZONIZATION
The application of ozone to water, wastewater, or air, generally for the purposes of disinfection or odor control.
PRE-AE RATION PRE-AERATION
The addition of air at the initial stages of treatment to freshen the wastewater, remove gases, add oxygen, promote flotation of
grease, and aid coagulation.
PRETREATMENT PRETREATMENT
The removal of metal, rocks, rags, sand, eggshells, and similar materials which may hinder the operation of a treatment plant.
Pretreatment is accomplished by using equipment such as racks, bar screens, comminutors, and grit removal systems.
PUTREFACTION (PEW-tree-FACK-shun) PUTREFACTION
Biological decomposition of organic matter with the production of ill-smelling products associated with anaerobic conditions.
PUTRESCIBLE (pew-TRES-uh-bull) PUTRESCIBLE
Material that will decompose under anaerobic conditions and produce nuisance odors.
RACK RACK
Evenly spaced parallel metal bars or rods located in the influent channel to remove rags, rocks and cans from wastewater.
-------
60 Treatment Plants
RAW WASTEWATER RAW WASTEWATER
Plant influent or wastewater before treatment.
SCREEN SCREEN
A device used to retain or remove suspended or floating objects in wastewater. The screen has openings that are generally uniform
in size. It retains or removes objects larger than the openings. A screen may consist of bars, rods, wires, gratings, wire mesh, or
perforated plates.
SEPTIC (SEP-tick) SEPTIC
This condition is produced by anaerobic bacteria. If severe, the wastewater turns black, gives off foul odors, contains little or no
dissolved oxygen and creates a heavy oxygen demand.
SHEAR PIN SHEAR PIN
A straight pin with a groove around the middle that will weaken the pin and cause it to fail when a certain load or stress is exceeded.
The purpose of the pin is to protect equipment from damage due to excessive loads or stresses.
SLUDGE (sluj) SLUDGE
The settleable solids separated from liquids during processing, or the deposits of foreign materials on the bottoms of streams or
other bodies of water.
SLUDGE DIGESTION SLUDGE DIGESTION
The process of changing organic matter in sludge into a gas or a liquid or a more stable solid form. These changes take place as
microorganisms feed on sludge in anaerobic (more common) or aerobic digesters.
SLURRY (SLUR-e) SLURRY
A thin watery mud, or any substance resembling it (such as a grit slurry or a lime slurry).
SPECIFIC GRAVITY SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Weight of a particle or substance in relation to the weight of water. Water has a specific gravity of 1.000 at 4°C (or 39°F). Wastewater
particles usually have a specific gravity of 0.5 to 2.5
WEIR, PROPORTIONAL (weer) WEIR, PROPORTIONAL
A specially shaped weir in which the flow through the weir is directly proportional to the head.
-------
Racks 61
CHAPTER 4. RACKS, SCREENS,
COMMINUTORS AND GRIT REMOVAL
4.0 CAUTION
Many wastewater treatment plant operators have been seri-
ously injured due to avoidable accidents. According to regular
surveys by the Water Pollution Control Federation, the waste-
water treatment and pollution control industry has a higher
accident rate than most industries reporting to the National
Safety Council. Working in a wastewater treatment plant is not
necessarily more dangerous than working in other industries.
The poor record of the past may have been caused by
operators not being aware of unsafe conditions, not im-
mediately correcting these conditions when they became obvi-
ous, and not knowing safe procedures.
There are many potential safety hazards around a wastewa-
ter treatment plant. ACCIDENTS CAN BE REDUCED BY
THINKING SAFETY. You should protect yourself from injury by
maintaining firm footing, keeping walk areas clear, immediately
cleaning up spills, and shutting off, tagging and locking out the
electrical power before working on equipment.
You must take adequate precautions to prevent becoming
infected with water-borne diseases such as dysentery or
typhoid. At any given moment, some people in your community
are ill; disease bacteria and viruses from these people are in
the wastewater reaching your plant. When cleaning equipment
such as pumps, bar screens and grit channels, you often must
place your hands in raw wastewater. Also, the tools used to
work on equipment frequently become contaminated. Con-
sequently, GOOD PERSONAL HYGIENE MUST BE OB-
SERVED BY ALL OPERATORS AT ALL TIMES. ALWAYS
WASH YOUR HANDS THOROUGHLY BEFORE EATING OR
SMOKING.
A good practice is to change work clothing before going
home. Any clothing that has been worn at the wastewater
treatment plant must be laundered separately from the family
wash.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 96.
TRUE OR FALSE:
4.0A The wastewater and pollution control industry has a
higher accident rate than most other industries report-
ing to the National Safety Council.
4.OB Electrical power must always be shut off before working
on equipment.
4.0C Operators must wash their hands thoroughly before eat-
ing, smoking or going home.
4.1 PRETREATMENT
In various ways, a little or a lot of almost everything finds its
way into sewers and ends up at the wastewater treatment
plant. Cans, bottles, pieces of scrap metal, sticks, rocks,
bricks, plastic toys, plastic lids, caps from toothpaste tubes,
towels and other rags, sand — all are found in the plant IN-
FLUENTS
These materials are troublesome in various ways. Pieces of
metal, rocks, and similar items will cause pipes to plug, may
damage or plug pumps, or jam sludge collector mechanisms in
settling tanks (CLARIFIERS).2 Sand, eggshells, and similar
materials (grit) can plug pipes, cause excessive wear in
pumps, and use up valuable space in the sludge DIGES-
TERS.3
If a buried or otherwise inaccessible pipe is plugged, or a
sludge collector mechanism jams, or a critical pump is put out
of commission, serious consequences can result. A plant
operating at reduced efficiency increases the pollution level of
the effluent discharged into receiving waters. This can cause
health hazards to downstream water users, sludge deposits in
a stream or lake (with resultant odors and unsightliness), and
sometimes the death of fish and other aquatic life. Also, repairs
of this type involve a good deal of hard (sometimes rather
unpleasant) work and usually result in large, unbudgeted ex-
penses.
11nfluent (IN-flu-ent). Wastewater or other liquid - raw or partly treated - flowing INTO a reservoir, basin, treatment process, or treatment
plant.
1 Clarifier (KLAIR-i-fire) (settling tank, sedimentation basin). A tank or basin in which wastewater is held for a period of time, during which the
heavier solids settle to the bottom and the lighter material will float to the water surface.
3 Digester (die-JEST-er). A tank in which sludge is placed to allow decomposition by microorganisms. Digestion may occur under anaerobic
(more common) or aerobic conditions.
-------
62 Treatment Plants
With these things in mind, it is evident that an important part
of a wastewater treatment plant is the equipment used to re-
move rocks, large debris, grit and other materials as early as
possible. These items of equipment include screens, racks,
comminutors, and grit removal devices and are called "pre-
treatment facilities."
SCREENING is that part of the pretreatment facilities which
removes the larger debris (rocks, cans, bottles, rags). This
equipment may consist of parallel bars or slotted drums
through which the wastewater must pass. Accumulated debris
is removed from the screens either manually or mechanically.
In some plants, cutters shred the rags and debris accumulated
on the screens or drums, return the shredded materials to the
flow, and allow them to pass through the screens to continue in
the wastewater flow. This is considered a poor practice be-
cause this material could interfere with downstream treatment
processes.
GRIT REMOVAL involves removing the heavy INORGANIC
MATERIAL,4 such as sand and gravel, from the wastewater.
This is done by reducing the velocity of the wastewater enough
so that the heavier particles settle to the bottom of special
channels or hoppers. The grit may be further processed (sepa-
rated or dewatered) in cyclone separators or grit classifiers
(washers). Grit usually flows from the hoppers, to the cyclone
separator, and then to the classifier. Final disposal of the grit is
usually by burial which can be rather unpleasant and costly
work.
PRE-AERATION is used to freshen the wastewater and
separate oils and grease. This process tends to increase the
overall efficiency of solids and BOD removal.
See Fig. 4.1 for the location of these processes in a typical
plant. Your plant may differ in some respects from the ar-
rangement shown because of differences in one or more of the
following factors: quantity of wastewater; characteristics of the
wastewater; seasonal variations in quantity and characteris-
tics; discharge requirements; construction, operating, and
maintenance costs of various processes; and the designer's
preferences.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 96.
4.1 A The following items may be found in a treatment plant
influent:
a. Cans
b. Toys
c. Rubber Goods
d. Pieces of Wood
e. All of These
4.1B What items of equipment are used to remove rocks,
pieces of wood, metal, and rags from wastewater?
4.1 C Why should coarse debris (rocks, boards, metal) be
removed at the plant entrance or headworks?
4.2 BAR SCREENS AND RACKS
Parallel bars may be placed at an angle or vertical in a
channel in such a manner that the wastewater will flow through
the bars, but large solids and debris will be caught on the bars.
These bars are commonly called "racks" when the spacing
between them is 3 to 4 inches (7.6 to 10.2 cm) or more. When
the spacing is about % inch to 2 inches (0.95 to 5.1 cm), they
are called "bar screens." Bar screens are used to screen the
influent flow on a continuous basis and are usually mechan-
ically cleaned. Usually racks are found in bypass channels
where flows are diverted when bar screens are being serviced
or repaired. Bar racks are manually cleaned due to their in-
frequent use.
Various other mechanical screening methods are in use in-
volving actual coarse screens or perforated sheet metal.
These units are automatically cleaned with scrapers, rotating
brushes, water sprays, or air jets. The screens may be in the
form of belts, discs, or drums set in a channel so that the
wastewater flows through the submerged portion. The col-
lected debris is removed as it passes the brushes or sprays.
* Inorganic Material. Material such as sand, salt, iron, calcium, and other mineral materials which are only slightly affected by the action of
organisms. Inorganic materials are chemical substances of mineral origin; whereas organic materials are chemical substances usually of
animal or vegetable origin.
-------
Racks 63
TREATMENT PgQ6&4»5 FUNCTION
peer0£ArM£A/r
&£MOI/£S
0SS06 (7//U// 70464/V0/VU, OPt*
POS6/&!£ tf/P/J/PffifZiPA/ &/Z4A/T/2a WJ
removes &W# t&e4y£Z.
(UAM ro lAA/Pf/l/-)
?#£~6HeA/* m4T£(Mr&/2
i AJ&LP6
MEA6UP6S $ 0£Z0£PS Flt?/V
gemotes zemeAgie
ffZOA7Ag££MA7Z&/ALS
fffEAFS SOL/PS /PEMOVEP
&v or/zee p/2aS
X/LIS PAr/SO&£A//<2 gAdTE&M
Fig. 4.1 Flow diagram of typical plant
-------
64 Treatment Plants
4.21 Manually Cleaned Bar Screens
A manually cleaned bar screen is shown on Figures 4.2 and
4.3, and the purposes of the parts are summarized in Table
4.1. These bar screens require frequent attention. As debris
collects on the bars, it blocks the channel and causes waste-
water to back up into the sewer. The more debris that collects
on the bars, the greater the HEAD LOSS6 through the bar
screens. As the flow backs up, ORGANIC MATERIALS7 tend
to settle out in the channel and sewer, depleting the DIS-
SOLVED OXYGEN8 in the wastewater. Subsequently, SEP-
TIC9 conditions develop.
The seotic conditions produce HYDROGEN SULFinF*0
which has a rotten-egg odor; cai»s?» mrmginn tn
"mfltfli, and paint- and also sometimes produces a toxic an?
f^nsphftre in a poorly ventilated room. If cleaning
of the bar screens is infrequent, wastewater can back up and
overflow the influent channel or flow through the bypass chan-
nel and bar rack. In either case, larger debris will be allowed to
enter downstream treatment units. When the bar srreBns ara
cleaned a sudden rush of septic wastewater can create a
"shock load" on the treatment processes. The sudden high
flow may carry grit into the clarifiers or carry additional solids
over the clarifier weirs, reducing the efficiency of the clarifiers
and secondary treatment units. Also increased odors will most
likely result-Jhus, failure to keep the bar screens clean win
result in the lowering of the quality of the EFFLUENT11
whenever a shock load of septic wastewater is released.
Cleaning of manually cleaned bar screens may be accom-
plished with a rake with tines (prongs) which will fit between the
bars. The debris is raked to the top of the rack or into the
drainage trough (whichever is provided). After draining, the
debris is placed into the container provided (a bin or garbage
can).
50&m Manual (Operation and Maintenance Manual). A manual which outlines procedures for operators to follow to operate and maintain a
soecific wastewater treatment plant and to maintain the equipment in the plent.
a Head Loss An indirect measure of loss of energy or pressure. Flowing water w,ll lose some of its energy when it passes through a pipe, bar
screen comminutor, filter or other obstruction. The amount of energy or pressure lost is called head loss. Head loss is measured as the
difference in elevation between the upstream water surface and the downstream water surface and may be expressed in feet or meters. In
this case, the HEAD LOSS Is the height to which the water surface must build up in front of the bar screens above the water surface
downstream from the bar screens. The build up of water is caused by debris collecting on the bar screen (Figures 4.3 and 4.4).
^Organic Material. Material which comes mainly from animal or vegetable sources. Organic material generally can be consumed by
bacteria and other small organisms. Inorganic materials are chemical substances of
8 Dissolved Oxvaen Molecular oxygen dissolved in water or wastewater, usually abbreviated DO. .... „, .
» Septic (SEP-tick).' This condition is produced by anaerobic bacteria. If severe, the wastewater turns black, gives off foul odors, contains
little or no dissolved oxygen and creates a heavy oxygen demand.
,o Hvdroaen Sulfide (H S) Hydrogen sulfide is a gas with a rotten egg odor. This gas is produced under anaerobic conditions. Hydrogen
suHidefs Mrtici^arlv dangerous because it dulls your sense of smell so that you don't notice it after you have been around it for awhile and
because Z odor is not noticeable in high concentrations. The gas is very poisonous to your respiratory system, explostve, flammable and
" ImenUEF-lu-ent). Wastewater or other liquid - raw, partially or completely treated - flowing FROM a basin, treatment process, or
treatment plant.
These devices usually are not used in pretreatment, but are
installed at the outlets of clarifiers or chlorine contact basins
and at industrial pretreatment facilities. To maintain screening
equipment, look for specific information in the manufacturer's
literature, the plant 0 & M MANUAL,5 or in Chapter 15, "Main-
tenance."
4.20 Safety Around Bar Screens and Racks
Whenever you work around open channels or tanks, be
careful not to trip or slip and fall into the wastewater or moving
machinery. Falling into wastewater exposes you to disease, to
the possibility of drowning, and obviously to a very unpleasant
bath. Stay behind guardrails whenever possible. When work-
ing on mechanical equipment, tag operating controls and lock
power off, and keep the key with YOU. Run mechanical
equipment only when the guards are in place over moving
parts. The area should be posted "No Smoking" because of
the possibility of explosive materials and gases from industrial
discharges in the plant influent.
Before starting to rake material from a manually cleaned bar
screen, examine the area for objects or structures which might
interfere with the rake handle and knock you off balance. De-
termine if there are any guardrails, corners of buildings or di-
version structures, light posts or overhead lights, or electrical
wires which the end of the rake might hit. Do not stand on a
slippery surface while raking material.
Back injuries, hernials, and muscle strains can occur from
pulling too hard when lifting inlet or outlet gates or pulling
heavy, water-logged debris from the racks. Never attempt to lift
gates or rake debris that requires more strength than you can
exert safely. When lifting heavy objects, always keep your
back straight, bend at your knees, and lift with your leg mus-
cles.
-------
^»rA$S CHANNEL . _ TOP \/icuu
(USUALLY CLOSED) BAR TOPVIEW
\ Bf*1'
INFLUENT
CHANNEL^
FLOW
HEttOVj
IftLST
BAR
Sc*EEN
FLOW
TROUqh
0UT«r\%s
sSS'-
-------
66 Treatment Plants
DEBRIS
SIDE VIEW
TROUGH
I HEAD LOSS
FLOW
ROCK
TRAP
BARS
* Oi
Fig. 4.3 Manually cleaned bar screen
ft
ELEVATOR MECHANISM
DEBRIS
SIDE VIEW
TROUGH
RAKE
HEAD LOSS
FLOW
BARS
ROCK
TRAP
Fig. 4.4 Mechanically cleaned bar screen
-------
Racks 67
TABLE 4.1 PURPOSE OF MANUALLY CLEANED BAR
SCREENS AND PARTS
Part
1. Influent or Inlet Channel
2. Inlet Gate
3. Bar Screen
4. Bar Rack
5. Outlet Gate
6. Drainage Trough
7. Screening Storage Can
8. Rake
9.. Hose Bib
10. Disposal of Screenings
11. Gate Storage Rack
12. Platform
Purpose
Conveys wastewater to bar
racks.
Selects channel to be used.
Inserted in influent channel to
prevent flows from reaching
screens or racks when they
are being maintained or re-
paired.
Prevents large solids from
damaging pumps, plugging
pipes or reaching other treat-
ment processes.
Prevents large solids from
damaging pumps, plugging
pipes or reaching other treat-
ment processes while bar
screen is out of service.
Selects channel to be used.
Inserted in effluent channel to
prevent flows from reaching
screens or racks when they
are being maintained or re-
paired.
Allows screenings or solids
raked from bar screens to
drain in order to reduce vol-
ume, weight, and moisture
content of solids.
Container in which to store
dried screenings to reduce fly
and odor problems until
screenings are transported to
the disposal site.
Tool used to remove solids or
screenings from bar screens.
Provides water under pres-
sure to hose for washing
down walls, floor and bar
screens.
Screenings may be disposed
of by burning, burial on site, or
may be hauled off by a waste
removal (garbage) company
for burial in a sanitary landfill.
Stores inlet and outlet gates
when they are not inserted in
channels.
Provides safe location where
operator can stand and clean
bar screen with a rake.
EXTREME CAUTION SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN RAKING
THE SCREEN - FOOTING MAY BE POOR DUE TO THE
WATER AND GREASE UNDERFOOT, LACK OF ENOUGH
ROOM TO STAND, AND LOCATION OF THE TROUGH OR
BUCKET FOR THE DEBRIS. YOU SHOULD INSPECT THIS
AREA VERY CAREFULLY TO SPOT HAZARDS AND TAKE
CORRECTIVE ACTION, GOOD HOUSEKEEPING, A
GUARDRAIL, A HANGER OR OTHER STORAGE FOR THE
RAKE, GOOD FOOTING, AND ATTENTION TO OTHER IM-
PORTANT ITEMS WILL GREATLY REDUCE THE POSSIBIL-
ITY OF INJURY.
4.22 Mechanically Cleaned Screens
Mechanically cleaned screens (Fig. 4.4) overcome the prob-
lem of wastewater backing up and greatly reduce the time
required to take care of this part of your plant. There are vari-
ous types of mechanisms in use, the more common being
traveling rakes which bring the debris up out of the channel
and into hoppers or other debris containers. You should keep
these units well lubricated and adjusted. Lubrication and ad-
justment procedures usually will be found in the manufactur-
er's literature furnished with the equipment. Further informa-
tion may be found in the plant 0 & M manual or in the "Mainte-
nance" chapter of this manual. A few minutes spent in proper
maintenance procedures can save hours or days of trouble
and help to keep your plant operating efficiently.
Occasionally some debris which the equipment cannot re-
move will be present. Periodic checks should be made so that
these materials can be removed manually. To determine if
some material is stuck in the screen, lock out power to the unit
and divert the flow through another channel or "feel" across
the screen with a rake or similar device.
m
Always shut the unit off FIRST. NEVER reach into the
operating range of machinery while it is running. Slow-
moving equipment is especially hazardous. Because it
moves slowly, it does not appear dangerous. However,
most geared-down machinery is so powerful that it can
crush almost any obstruction. A HUMAN HAND, FOR IN-
STANCE, OFFERS LITTLE RESISTANCE TO THIS TYPE
OF EQUIPMENT.
-------
68 Treatment Plants
Other items to watch for with mechanically cleaned screens
include observation of the drive units. Adjustments are neces-
sary if the cables do not wind up evenly on the drums of cable
machines. A frayed cable or excessively worn chain must be
replaced. The equipment should be adjusted if one end of the
rake unit is riding higher than the other (causing jamming), if
the unit is traveling past its normal stopping position, or if the
equipment is jumping or chattering. Frequent hosing or wash-
ing down of this equipment will prevent the build up of slimes
with resultant odors and flies.
Ji the rake mechanism will pff* mflyq, inr tw" p^'hio
causes ofthepTSBem:
1. Rake mechanism jammed: or
2. Equipment broken.
CD
When the rake will not move trv recattinn ttrn rirrnit hrftPkf?r
If nothing happensfftum or push eauiDr"anf fju"i'"hQC-tr' off,
lock out and tag electricaLs^itches. Divert wastewater to
another channel or screenTLook foTahd remove obstructions
which have jammed the rake mechanism.
Whenever a mechanically cleaned bar rack has stalled or
the shear pin snapped, be very careful when you attempt to
uncouple the chain drive. Be sure to remove a link from the
driven side (upper length). This will allow the chain to fly out-
ward and downward towards the floor. NEVER remove a link
from the lower length because it will fly outward and upward
towards YOU.
_ Look for broken equipment when the mntnr runs hut the rack
mSawitsrrnfoes notjjpsrata The problem may be caused by
a broken chain, cableor SHEAR PIN/12 If tha mtflnr is running
the LIMIT SWITCH13 would not be the cause of the problem.
"To repair or replace a broKen part, lurn or push equipment"
switches to off, lock out and tag switches. Divert wastewater to
another channel or screen. Perform necessary repairs and
place unit in service again. Observe unit for proper operation.
4.23 Operational Procedures
Routine operation of screens and racks will depend on the
size of the treatment plant (number of screens and racks),
amount of debris in the wastewater, quantity of wastewater,
and the head loss across the unit. If the allowable back-up
(head loss) of wastewater is not specified in the plant O & M
manual, a good starting point is a limit of 3 inches (7.6 cm).
Cleaning the screens or racks and changing the number of
units in service are basic ways to keep the head loss below or
near the desired level and at a minimum. These methods
should be used daily and adjustments made to match the flow.
Mechanically cleaned screens may incorporate AUTOMA-
TIC CONTROLS14 that operate the cleaning device whenever
the head loss reaches or exceeds a preselected level. Other
screen-cleaning devices may operate on a timer which starts
the device, allows it to run for a specified time, and then shuts it
off for a selected time period. These units usually have a "con-
tinuous run" position which allows the device to operate con-
tinuously when necessary.
To place a bar rack or screen in service, start up the unit,
open the outlet gate, and then open the inlet gate (Fig. 4.2).'
To remove a bar rack or screen from service, close or insert
the inlet gate and then the outlet gate. Turn the mechanical unit
off, drain the channel and wash off the unit. If your plant has
two screens in series, one screen may be removed using a
hoist, washed off, and returned to service without diverting the
flow.
Storms or sewer-cleaning operations by maintenance crews
may cause a sudden surge of wastewater and debris and a
resultant greater head loss through the screens. Under these
conditions, quick action by the operator in adjusting the clean-
ing frequency and the number of channels or screens in serv-
ice can prevent such problems as the channels overflowing or
wastewater backing up into the sewers. If enough wastewater
backs up into the sewers, manhole covers may even pop open
and untreated wastewater will be discharged into the streets or
back up into homes. Operators must be very alert in these
situations.
4.3 DISPOSAL OF SCREENINGS
The material removed from the screens is very offensive and
hazardous. This material stinks and attracts rats and flies. Bur-
ial or incineration are two common methods of disposal.
The practice of using grinders (shredders, disintegrators) to
cut up screenings and return them to the wastewater imposes
an increased load on downstream treatment processes, espe-
cially surface skimming devices. This problem can be very
serious for plants treating combined storm and wastewater
flows when the first winter storm transports large amounts of
leaves and debris to the treatment plant.
MhAxtnt
12 Shear Pin. A straight pin with a groove around the middle that will weaken the pin and cause it to fail when a certain load or stress is
exceeded. The purpose of the pin Is to protect equipment from damage due to excessive loads or stresses.
13 Umlt Switch. A device that regulates or controls the travel distance of a chain or cable.
M Automatic controls are discussed in Chapter 15, "Maintenance," and Chapter 26, "Instrumentation.'
-------
Racks 69
Depending on plant location and surroundings, you may find
it necessary to plan ahead to locate appropriate sites for dis-
posal of screenings. If burial is used, you should estimate how
long a certain area can be used before you must find additional
space for disposal. The disposal site volume divided by the
daily volume of screenings produced will tell you how many
days the site will last. For example, assume your plant has a
flow of two million gallons per day (MGD) and that over a
two-week period you remove an average of 30 GALLONS of
screenings daily. This figures out to FOUR CUBIC FEET (cu ft)
per day. You bury the screenings each day in a pit which you
estimate will hold 15 cubic yards of screenings IN ADDITION to
the soil used to cover up the screenings.
EXAMPLE 1
(1 cu ft = about 7.5 gallons for practical purposes)15
Thus:
Volume, cu ft/day = Volume, gal/day
of Filling Rate ^gal/culfT
30 gal/day
7.5 gal/cu ft
= 4 cu ft/day
You should convert gallons to cubic feet (ft3 or cu ft) or cubic
yards (yd , cu yd) because earthwork is figured on this basis.
With this information, you are now prepared to estimate how
long before the pit will be filled.
FIRST, convert the 15 cu yd (pit) capacity to cu ft:
Pit Capacity, cu ft = Capacity, cu yd x 27
cu ft
cu yd
= 15 cu yd x 27
= 405 cu ft
cu ft
cu yd
27
x 15
135
27
405
SECOND, divide the pit capacity by the daily volume of
screenings to find the estimated time before pit is full as fol-
lows:
Time, days = Pit Capacity, cu ft
Filling Rate, cu ft/day
_ 405 cu ft
4 cu ft/day
= About 101 days.
Thus you have about 101 days from the time you begin to
bury screenings in the pit until you will have to dig another pit
provided you consider the amount of soil used to cover up the
screenings. You should keep daily records of the volume of
screenings buried to be sure it stays about the same. If it
increases very much, it could be due to an increase in daily
wastewater flow or perhaps some unnecessary disposal of
rags or other material into the sewer. You may get anywhere
from 0.5 to 12 cubic feet of screenings per million gallons of
wastewater flow depending on what people or industry dump
into the sewers. This volume per million gallons should stay
fairly constant for your plant unless something unusual is hap-
pening.
You can check on the daily flow in MGD, or during any time
period, by reading your flow totalizer. The totalizer records the
total flow through the plant. If you record the totalizer reading at
the start and at the end of any time period, the difference is the
total flow for that time period.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 96.
4.2A Manually cleaned bar screens should be cleaned fre-
quently to prevent which of the following:
a. the screen from breaking
b. septic conditions from developing upstream
c. a shock load on the plant when eventually cleaned
d. formation of hydrogen sulfide, which has a rotten
egg odor and causes corrosion of concrete and
paints
e. all of these
4.2B What safety precautions should be taken when clean-
ing a bar screen?
4.2C What should be done FIRST if a problem develops in a
mechanically cleaned screen?
4.3A How can screenings be disposed of?
4.3B A plant receives a flow of 4.4 million gallons (MG) on a
certain day. The day's screenings are calculated to be
11 cubic feet. How many cubic feet of screenings were
removed per MG of flow?
4.4 COMMINUTION (com-mi-NEW-shun)
4.40 Comminutors
Comminutors are devices which act both as a cutter and a
screen. Their purpose is to shred (comminute) the solids and
leave them in the wastewater. This overcomes problems of
screenings disposal. As with screens, they are mounted in a
channel and the wastewater flows through them. The rags and
other cuttable debris are shredded by cutters (teeth) until they
can pass through the openings. Pieces of wood and plastic are
rejected and remain on the water surface in front of the com-
minutor. This debris must be removed manually. Most of these
units have a shallow pit in front of them to catch rocks and
scrap metal. The flow to the comminutor should be shut off
periodically and the debris removed from the trap. The fre-
quency of inspecting the trap can be determined from experi-
ence. However, it is not wise to allow more than a few days
between inspections.
A comminutor consists of a rotating drum with slots for the
wastewater to pass through (Figures 4.5, 4.6 and 4.7 and
Table 4.2). Other types of comminutors have stationary slotted
screens with oscillating cutters mounted on a shaft (Figures
4.8 and 4.9). Cutting teeth are mounted in rows on the drum.
The teeth pass through cutter bars or "combs'' with very small
clearances so that a shearing action is obtained. The wastewa-
ter passes into the vertically mounted drum through the slots in
the drum and flows out the bottom. A rubber seal, held in place
by a bolted-down ring, prevents leakage under the drum. This
seal should be checked whenever the rock and scrap metal
trap is checked.
151 cu ft = about 6.2 Imperial gallons for practical purposes for operators in Canada and other nations using the Imperial gallon.
-------
f}°CK
metal
inflow
©
NOTE: Platform downstream from
stands on to ci#»ai- u
INls t
Gate
°Utfloiv
UTqR
outlet-
gate
sss&
»A^A*DD°y«
-Sfc&y
QB Tnp
Xl§W
Bars
% <5
Conn
2
sftoivn. 0perafor ^
2
f
3
3
§
«r
-------
MOTOR
HEAD LOSS
ROTATING CUTTING SCREEN
FLOW
METAL AND
ROCK TRAP
BASE SEAL
Fig. 4.6 Commlnutor ^
»
o
*¦
M
-------
72 Treatment Plants
WORTHiNGTON]
NOTE: Cutter rotates 360° around screen.
Fig. 4.7 Comminutor in channel
(Permission of Worthington Pumps, Inc.)
-------
ADJUSTING
SCREW
(VERTICAL)
OSCILLATING
CUTTER
ADJUSTING SCREW
(HORIZONTAL)
BASE
DOWNSTREAM SIDE
FILLER PLUG
SHAFT
005 NOMINAL
TZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
BALL BEARING
MECHANICAL SEAL
SCREEN
BASE PLATE
UPSTREAM SIDE
Fig. 4.8 Comminutor sectional drawing *-
(CourtMy Wofthingtor M»rtn« s Industrial Product*. Inc.) W
3
-------
74 Treatment Plants
SUPPORT
STRUCTURE
MECHANICAL
SEAL
FLOW
CUTTER AND SHAFT
MOVE
STATIONARY
CUTTER BAR
Fig. 4.9 J-Ring bellows type seal
(Courtesy Worthington Marine & Industrial Products. Inc.)
-------
Racks 75
TABLE 4.2 PURPOSE OF COMMINUTORS AND PARTS
Part
1. Comminutor
2. Inlet Channel
3. Inlet Gate
4. Outlet Gate
5. Oscillating and Stationary
Cutters
6. Adjusting Screws
7. Mechanical Seal
8. Motor and Gear Reducer
9. Bypass Manually
Cleaned
Bar Rack
10- Metal and Rock Trap
11. Platform
Purpose
Shreds (comminutes) solids
and leaves them in wastewa-
ter.
Conveys wastewater and sol-
ids to comminutor.
Selects channel to be used,
diverts wastewater and solids
to manually cleaned bar
screen, and prevents waste-
water flowing to comminutor
so equipment can be in-
spected, maintained, repaired
or replaced.
Prevents wastewater from
flowing back to comminutor
when equipment is being in-
spected, maintained, repaired
or replaced.
Devices containing sharp
blades which shred solids.
Raises, lowers or moves
sideways the cutting blades to
provide specified clearances
so that a shearing action is
achieved.
Prevents wastewater from
reaching and damaging bear-
ings (Fig. 4.8).
Moves cutting blades.
Prevents large solids from
damaging pumps, plugging
pipes or reaching other plant
treatment processes while
comminutor is not in service
or during peak storm flows.
Prevents metal and rocks
from damaging cutting blades
or teeth of comminutor.
Provides safe location where
operator can stand and clean
bar rack with a rake.
Some older comminutors may have a MERCURY SEAU6
(Fig. 4.10) to keep water out of the bearings. This is because
these units are designed so that, at their rated capacity, the top
of the drum will be under several inches of water. The mercury
seal should be checked annually or after a particularly heavy
flow. Drain the mercury; weigh it (the amount of mercury will be
specified by weight); and if it is dirty, strain it through some
heavy material (such as denim or chamois) before putting it
back in the comminutor. Add more mercury if needed.
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
Mercury is poisonous. Breathing the fumes can be fatal or
cause loss of hair arid teeth. Wash up thoroughly after han-
dling it. Remove gold rings and other jewelry from your
hands first, because they may become coated with mer-
cury. If your ring is thus coated, it will have to be heated to
burn off the mercury. If you must handle or work with mer-
cury, be sure to work over a large tray in order to catch any
spills. Plenty of fresh air ventilation is an absolute MUST.
SPECIAL NOTE:
Mercury in water can be oxidized to mercury ions which are
toxic to living organisms. Consequently, the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) has banned the use of mercury seals
in comminutors and other applications.
The various manufacturers of equipment using mercury
seals have designed conversion kits to provide the necessary
water seals by mechanical means. Detailed drawings and in-
structions are furnished with each conversion kit. It is important
that these kits be installed on all mercury-seal type com-
minutors with a mechanical seal. Details will vary with different
companies. Equipment manufacturers furnish service manuals
and parts lists with each unit.
16 Mercury seals have been outlawed because of the toxic effects of mercury In the environment. Most plants have replaced all mercury seals
with mechanical seals (Fig. 4.8 and 4.9).
-------
Treatment Plants
MOTOR
AND
SUPPORT STRUCTURE
AND BEARINGS
REDUCTION GEARS
tjfrrfc
CUTTER AND SHAFT MOVE
TOGETHER AS UNIT
¦STATIONARY CUTTER BAR
Fig. 4.10
Mercury seal in comminutor
-------
Racks 77
SAFETY
When working around comminutors, use safe procedures
and be aware of safety hazards. Wet walkways and dewatered
channels are slippery. Take appropriate precautions so you
don't slip and fall while attempting to remove floatables which
did not pass through the comminutor from the surface of the
water.
Never attempt to unplug or unjam the cutter blades without
FIRST by-passing the unit and then turning off electrical power,
locking out switches and placing tags on the switches indicat-
ing who did it and when. The moving parts of a comminutor are
especially dangerous and can quickly cut off your finger. Do
not attempt to repair or troubleshoot electrical equipment and
controls unless you are qualified and authorized to do so.
4.41 Barminutors
There are many variations of comminuting devices. One of
them has the trade name of "Barminutor" (Figs. 4.11,4.12 and
4.13 and Table 4.3). This unit consists of a bar screen made of
U-shaped bars and a rotating drum with teeth and "shear
bars." The rotating drum travels up and down the bar screen.
Careful attention must be given to maintaining the oil level in
these machines; otherwise, water may get into the bearings.
Cutting edges on the cutter should be sharpened or replaced
at regularly scheduled intervals. The frequency of mainte-
nance depends on the type and abrasiveness of the wastewa-
ter being treated.
Careful attention to preventive maintenance procedures will
save you a lot of trouble. Use the manufacturer's instructions,
the Maintenance chapter, and the plant O & M manual to be-
come thoroughly familiar with the equipment in your plant.
When ALL lubrication points and oil levels are properly main-
tained and ALL adjustments and clearances are correct, the
equipment may be expected to give long and trouble-free serv-
ice.
If you are operating an old plant and the manufacturer s
literature is no longer available, try to develop a maintenance
program that appears suited for the equipment. Old records
should provide you with an indication of how the equipment
was maintained in the past and if the procedures worked. If
TABLE 4.3 PURPOSE OF BARMINUTORS AND PARTS
Part
1. Barminutor
2. Bar Screen
3. Rotating Cutter
4. Motor and Gears
5. Counterweight (Not all
models have counter-
weights)
Purpose
Shreds solids and leaves
them in wastewater.
Retains large solids in waste-
water for shredding by rotat-
ing cutter.
Moves up and down bar
screen and shreds solids re-
tained on bar screen.
Turns rotating cutter and
moves rotating cutter up and
down bar screen.
Reduces the energy required
by the motor to move the rotat-
ing cutter up and down the bar
screen.
nothing is available, try inspecting oil levels weekly and chang-
ing oil every 90 days with SAE 90.
Safe practices which apply to working around comminutors
also apply to barminutors. Treat the rotating drum with respect
because it could easily cut you. Normal and abnormal opera-
tional procedures as well as start-up and shutdown procedures
for barminutors are similar to those used for comminutors.
4.42 Operational Procedures
Routine operation of comminutors and barminutors (com-
minution units) is basically the same as the operation of
screens and racks. The main factors are the number of units,
the amount of debris in the wastewater, and the head loss
through the unit. Look up the allowable head loss through the
unit in the manufacturer's literature or the plant O & M manual.
Where two or more comminution units are available, keep
enough units operating to stay within the head loss limits.
Sudden high flows or heavy amounts of debris (resulting
from industrial dumps, sewer line maintenance or storm flows)
may require prompt action to avoid having wastewater back up
into the sewers or overflow the channels. Automatic controls
on some equipment may take care of most of these situations.
In some plants a bypass channel (with a bar rack) is pro-
vided to relieve high flow conditions and problems during down
time on the comminution unit while it is being cleaned or serv-
iced. The debris from the bar rack may be returned to the
comminution unit's influent (a little at a time) after the unit is
back in service.
parting up or shutting down comminutors and barminutors
is done the same way as for mechanically cleaned screens,
whan starting up a npf »¦¦¦•" nrtho equipment, then open
ttre vuTlnt finnlly ripen thn inlnt gate. Observe the unit
jo see that it appears and sounds to be operating properly.
To shut down a comminution unit, reverse the procedure.
After shut down, drain the channel and hose down the channel
and the equipment to reduce problems from odors and flies.
Daily, or more often if experience indicates, shut down each
unit to look for cans and other debris and to check for "ropes"
of rags hanging from the slotted drums or "U" bars. Presence
of this type of debris indicates that the cutters may be worn or
out of adjustment. If the motor stops (kicks out), it may be
another indication of dull or improperly adjusted cutters. If the
debris is not cut when the cutters mesh, this causes an over-
load on the drive motor.
On barminutors, look for accumulations of sand and gravel
that could interfere with the travel of the drum. Other possible
problems include overtravel and on some models, difficulties
with the cables. Overtravel occurs when the cutter drum travels
too far up or too far down and reaches the bottom of the chan-
nel. Usually overtravel occurs when the limit switches on the
cable drums fail to work properly and permit excessive travel
and cable unwinding from the drum. If this happens cables
may not wind back up on the drum evenly after unwinding. This
will cause the cutter drum to travel at an angle across the
screen, thus damaging both the cutters and the screen bars.
Be sure that the unit stays level when it moves up and down,
that the cables wind evenly on the drums, and that the cables
are not frayed. A cable malfunction can result in major damage
to the barminutor.
-------
5a^
p\at*8
-------
Racks 79
mmmmsm
Fig. 4.12 Barminutor
(Permission of FMC Corporation. Environmental Equipment Division)
-------
80 Treatment Plants
Fig. 4.13 Barminutor installation
(Permission of FMC Corporation, Environments! Equipment Division)
-------
Racks 81
QUESTIONS
TABLE 4.4 PURPOSE OF GRIT CHANNELS AND PARTS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 96.
4.4A What are the advantages of comminuting machines
over screens?
4.4B What has replaced mercury seals in comminutors?
4.4C Why is it hazardous to handle mercury?
a. It is poisonous.
b. Breathing fumes may be fatal.
c. Breathing fumes may cause loss of hair and teeth.
d. All of the above.
4.4D How are comminution units different from bar racks and
bar screens?
4.5 GRIT REMOVAL
Grit (sand, eggshells and cinders) is the heavier mineral
matter which is found in wastewater and will not decompose or
"break down." This material causes excessive wear in pumps.
A mixture of grit, tar, grease and other cementing materials can
form a solid mass in pipes and digesters. This mass will not
move and cannot be removed by ordinary means. Con-
sequently, grit should be removed as soon as possible after
reaching the plant.
Part
1. Grit Channel
2. Grit Settling Area
3. Center Wail
4. Slide or Inlet Gates
5. Stop or Outlet Gates
6. Weirs
7. Grit Storage or Grit Hop-
per
8. Dewatering Drain
9. Drain Valve
Purpose
Provides a reduction in flow
velocity. The lower velocity al-
lows grit to settle to the bot-
tom while keeping the lighter
organic solids moving along
to the next treatment unit.
Provides space for grit to set-
tle, accumulate and be re-
moved.
Separates grit channels.
Regulates number of grit
channels in service in order to
maintain desirable flow vel-
ocities in grit channels.
Prevents backftow.
when cleaning.
Insert
Controls velocity in grit chan-
nel.
Accumulates and stores grit
before removal and disposal.
Drains grit channel for Inspec-
tion, cleaning and repairs.
Allows draining of grit chan-
nel.
4.6 GRIT CHANNELS (Fig. 4.14 and Table 4.4)
The simplest means of removing grit from the wastewater
flow is to pass it through channels or tanks which allow the
velocity of flow to be reduced to a range of 0.7 to 1.4 ft/sec (0.2
to 0.4 m/sec). The objective is to allow the grit to settle to the
bottom while keeping the lighter organic solids moving along to
the next treatment unit. Experience has shown that a flow-
through velocity of one foot per second (ft/sec) is best.
Velocity is controlled by several means. With multiple-
channel installations, the operator may vary the number of
channels (chambers) in service at any one time to maintain a
flow velocity of approximately one ft/sec in the grit channels.
Another involves the use of proportional weirs (Fig. 4.15) at the
outlet for automatic regulation.
The proportional weir in Fig. 4.15 will tend to MAINTAIN the
velocity in the grit channels when the flows increase. This hap-
pens because the exit area will decrease, thus increasing the
depth of water flow in the channel.
Flow velocities also may be regulated by the shape of the
grit channels. Some grit channels have cross-sectional shapes
similar to that of a proportional weir. The operator also may
regulate the velocities in a grit channel by using bricks or cin-
der blocks to change cross-sectional shape or area. However,
this can cause cleaning, maintenance and operational prob-
lems.
A simple method for estimating the velocity is to place a stick
in the channel and record the time it takes for the stick to travel
a measured distance. Calculate as follows:
WATER
SURFACE
Fig. 4.15 Proportional weir
-------
pa RETURN TO PLANT INFLUENT
8-^DRAIN VALVE
DEWATERING DRAIN
STOP GATES
Insert when
cleaning to
prevent backflow
GRIT SETTLING AREA
TO COMMUNITOR
OR BARMINUTOR
CENTER WALL
FLOW
SLIDE GATES
WEIRS (WHEN USED)
GRIT SETTLING AREA
DEWATERING DRAIN
DRAIN VALVE
RETURN TO PLANT INFLUENT
00
ro
H
5
»
3
®
3
3
u
3
**
C0
Fig. 4.14 Grit channel
-------
Racks 83
Velocity, ft/sec
Distance Traveled, ft
Time, sec
EXAMPLE 2
A stick travels 25 feet in 20 seconds.
Solution:
Velocity, ft/sec
1.25
Distance, ft
20)25.00
20
Time, sec
50
25 ft
40
20 sec
1 00
1.25 ft/sec
1 00
(0.38 m/sec)
0
The actual velocity probably will be slightly higher than your
estimate, but this is a very quick way to estimate the grit chan-
nel velocity.
A more accurate method for determining the average veloc-
ity in the grit channel is based on:
1. The cross-sectional area of the flow in the grit channel;
and
2. The quantity of flow (from the flow meter).
The formula for calculating grit channel velocity is shown in
the following example.
EXAMPLE 3
Assume your grit channel is two feet wide. The wastewater
is flowing at a depth of one foot, and the flow meter registers a
flow of 1 MGD. The cross-sectional area of the flow is (depth, ft
x width, ft = 1 ft x 2 ft) = 2 sq ft. The flow must be converted
into cubic measure. We learned that one cubic foot equals 7.5
gallons. Thus, from calculations below, 1 MGD = 1.55 cu ft/sec
(cubic feet per second, cfs):
1 MGD =
(1,000,000 9al ¦)
day
= 1.55 cfs
(7.5
gal
cu ft
x Qi. hr x fin min x fin sec)
day
hr
min
Using this new conversion factor:
Average Velocity, ft/sec = Flow Rate- cu Ksec
Area, sq ft
_ 1.55 cu ft/sec
2 sq ft
= 0.77 ft/sec (0.23 m/sec)
To obtain this answer, we converted the flow from MGD to
cu ft/sec. Then we divided the flow (1.55 cu ft/sec) by the
cross-sectional area of the wastewater in the channel (2 sq ft).
EXAMPLE 4
Since we have checked the velocity, we should now deter-
mine if the length of the channel is appropriate for our flow
conditions. All particles settle at different rates based on their
size and weight. Most grit channels are designed to remove
0.2 mm (millimeter) size sand and all other heavier materials.
Experiments have shown this size particle will settle downward
at about 0.075 ft/sec. This means that, if wastewater is flowing
in a channel at a depth of one foot and a particle of 0.2 mm is
introduced at the surface, it will take:
Settling Time, sec =
Depth, ft
Settling Rate, ft/sec
= 1
0.075 ft/sec
= 13.3 seconds to settle
FLOW VELOCITY
Of:
*4n
T'CL£
"v
°«/r
£*4
25*t
If this waste were flowing at one foot per second, it would
travel for 13.3 seconds, or a distance of 13.3 feet, before the
particle reached the channel bottom. If the waste were flowing
at a depth of three feet in the channel, it would take 13.3
seconds/ft x 3 ft = 39.9 seconds or 39.9 feet before the parti-
cle reached the bottom. Therefore, the required length of any
grit channel can be checked by using the formula:
Length, ft
(depth of channel, ft) (flow velocity, ft/sec)
(settling rate, ft/sec)
and for 0.2 mm sand and a flow velocity of 1 ft/sec:
Length, ft
(depth, ft) (1.0 ft/sec)
(0.075 fVsec)
= 1.0 x depth, ft
0.075
= 13.3 x depth, ft
Incase of rtnort spots wham organic materials settle out and
PI ITPFUCIRIF 17 a deflector (Fig. 4.16) installed at
one side may cure the trouble. (Be sure you don't create a new
dead spot.) Also, certain trouble spots could be filled in with
concrete.
Methods of grit removal range from use of a scoop shovel to
various types of collectors and conveyors. For manually
cleaned channels, the frequency of cleaning is determined by
experience. If the grit builds up too much, it may interfere with
the flow-through velocity, cause the wastewater to back up into
the sewer or may cause an overflow. The channel should be
removed from service during the cleaning operation. This
makes the job easier and no grit is washed into the
downstream treatment processes.
Since there is always a small amount of organic matter in the
grit rhannel disposal nf grit shnnlri ha trqateri the same as
disposal of screenings. Burial is the most satisfactory disposal
method. Failure to quickly cover grit with six inches (15 cm) of
soil results in odors and attracts flies and rats.
17 Putrescible (pew-TRES-uh-buii). Material that will decompose under anaerobic conditions and produce nuisance odors.
-------
DEFLECTORS
Fig. 4.16 Deflectors installed In a grit channel
-------
Racks 85
CLEANING GRIT CHANNELS MANUALLY CAN BE QUITE
HAZARDOUS. TAKE PRECAUTIONS AGAINST SUPPING
AND BACK STRAIN. BEWARE OF DANGEROUS GASES
WHEN WORKING IN COVERED GRIT CHANNELS.
There are many types of mechanical grit-collector
mechanisms. Common ones are chain-driven scrapers called
"flights" (Fig. 4.17) that are moved slowly along the bottom and
up an incline out of the water to a hopper, or along the bottom
to an underwater trough where a screw conveyor lifts the grit to
a storage hopper or truck. Some designs use conveyor belts
with buckets attached.
Before starting or diverting wastewater into a grit channel, be
sure the channel or settling area is clear of debris, tools and
people. If the grit channel has scrapers or flights, start them
and observe smooth and proper operation before diverting the
wastewater into the channel. Once the flow is going through
the grit channel, measure the velocity. Make any necessary
adjustments in the number of channels in service and adjust
the weirs or other velocity-regulating devices.
Fig. 4.17 Chain-driven scrapers (flights)
(Courtesy Jeffrey Mfg. Co.)
Normal operation consists of measuring velocities at low,
average, and high flows. To achieve desired velocities, main-
tain the proper number of grit channels in service and adjust
the weirs.
Grit should be removed on a daily basis lnpp?rt Qrit frir
organic material which could indicate that velocitiaslare too
JflW-lf less ihan expected amounts of grit are removed and tFTe
grit consists mainly of large or heavy sand, the velocities could
be too high. A little organic matter in the grit usually indicates
that proper velocities are being maintained.
Abnormal operating conditions can develop during rain
storms or periods of heavy snow melt. Peak canning seasons
or periodic industrial dumps also can create abnormal condi-
tions. Operating problems also occur during periods of high
flows and when solids loadings become excessive. During
these conditions, attempt to maintain velocities as close to 1.0
ft/sec (0.3 m/sec) as possible. Grit will have to be removed
more frequently when the grit and heavy solids loadings are
higher than usual.
Try to schedule grit channel shutdowns during periods of low
flows. Shut down grit channels for maintenance or repairs by
placing alternate or additional grit channels in service if possi-
ble. Insert sludge or inlet gate and stop outlet gate. Open the
drain valve and dewater the grit channel. Be careful the drain
does not plug. Wash out or hose down the floor of the grit
channel before entering. Dewatered grit channels have slip-
pery bottoms; so walk and work carefully.
Maintenance of grit channels consists of keeping the
facilities clean and inspecting for corrosion damages and
cracks in the walls and floor. Corrosion rates can be retarded
by the application of protective coatings. In channels with chain
and flight collectors inspect chains and sprockets for excessive
wear at least twice a year and bearings and anchor bolts every
time the channel is dewatered. Motors must be lubricated and
greased in accordance with the manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
An AERATED grit chamber is actually a tank with a sloping
bottom and a hopper or trough in the lower end (Fig. 4.18 and
Table 4.5). Air is injected through DIFFUSERS18 located along
the wall of the tank above the trough. The mixture of air and
water has a lower SPECIFIC GRAVITY19 than water so the grit
settles out better. The rolling action of the water in the tank
moves the grit along the bottom to the grit hopper. Grit is
removed from the hopper by pumps or a conveyor system.
Aerated grit chambers are most frequently found at activated
sludge plants where there is a readily available air supply, and
jjia-praaeration usually helps to "freshen" the wastewater. Jhe
older wastewater becomes, the more difficult it Is for aerobic
organisms to treat wastes and for solids to settle. A freshening
process tends to make downstream treatment processes more
effective.
To start an aerated grit chamber, be sure all equipment
works properly and the grit chamber contains no debris or
tools. Start air passing through the diffuser. Allow wastewater
to enter the aerated chamber slowly. Adjust the air flow rates to
obtain the desired circular motion in the grit chamber. Air rates
also are regulated to control the size of grit and the volume of
grit removed from the wastewater.
10 Diffuser. A device (porous plate, tube, bag) used to break the air stream from the blower system into fine bubbles.
19 Specific Gravity. Weight of a particle or substance in relation to the weight of water. Water has a specific gravity of 1.000 at 4°C (or 39°F).
Wastewater particles usually have a specific gravity of 0.5 to 2.5.
-------
WATER SURFACE
DIFFUSER
GRIT HOPPER AND COLLECTOR MECHANISM
Fig. 4.18 Aerated grit chamber
-------
Racks 87
TABLE 4.5 PURPOSE OF AERATED GRIT CHAMBER
AND PARTS
Part
1. Aerated Grit Chamber
2. Diffuser
3. Grit Hopper
4. Collector Mechanism
Purpose
Removes grit.
Disperses air into wastewater
to reduce velocities. The mix-
ture of air and water has a
lower specific gravity than
water so the grit settles out
better. The circular motion
created by the air moves the
grit to the bottom of the
chamber where it can settle
out.
Collects settled grit before
removal.
Removes grit from chamber
for disposal. Other grit collec-
tor mechanisms include screw
conveyors, buckets or pumps.
Aerated grit chambers usually have a detention time of ap-
proximately three minutes at peak flows with detention times
ranging from three to five minutes.
The velocity of roll or agitation regulates the size of particles
of a given specific gravity that will be removed in the grit
chamber. If the velocity of roll is too great, grit will be carried
out of the chamber. If the velocity of roll is too low, organic
material will be removed with the grit. With proper adjustment
of the quantity of air, almost 100 percent grit removal can be
obtained and the grit should be well washed. Wastewater
should move through the grit chamber in a circular (helical)
path and should make two to three passes across the bottom
of the tank at peak flows. There should be more passes across
the bottom at lower flows. Wastewater should be introduced
into the grit chamber in the direction of flow.
Normal operation consists of maintaining hydraulic capacity
(design flow) through each chamber and the desired circular
motion. Remove grit at regular intervals or continuously from
the grit hopper depending on the equipment and also on the
grit loading. If scum and floating debris accumulate on the
surface in dead areas, remove this material twice a day, or
more often if needed.
When abnormal operating conditions exist due to high flows
or heavy solids loadings, adjust air flow to the tank to maintain
the desired grit removal at the operating conditions experi-
enced. If grit and solids are not removed, they may be carried
over to the primary clarifiers. If so, increased primary sludge
pumping rates or more frequent or longer pumping times may
be necessary.
Shutdown procedures consist of diverting wastewater flows
around the aerated grit chamber, draining the facility and stop-
ping the air supply. Draining is not necessary during temporary
shutdown, such as taking a unit out of service during low flows.
4.7 CYCLONE GRIT SEPARATORS
Another method of separating grit from organic matter is by
the use of cyclone grit separators (Fig. 4.19 and Table 4.6).
Grit from mechanically cleaned grit channels or other grit re-
moval facilities is pumped as a SLURRY20 in water to the cy-
clone. The velocity of the slurry as it enters along the wall of the
cyclone causes the slurry to spin or swirl around the inside of
the cyclone. This is called the "primary vortex" (Fig. 4.20). The
particles of grit, being heavier than the wastewater, are forced
outward to the casing of the cyclone. The grit spirals downward
towards the apex or bottom of the cyclone. At the bottom, the
heavier particles (grit) pass out of the cyclone through a small
hole called an "orifice." The remaining lighter particles and
water are carried upward (still spinning in what is called the
"secondary vortex") and out the overflow. The primary vortex
causes the heavy particles to move towards the wall of the
cyclone and out the bottom. The secondary vortex moves the
lighter particles towards the center of the cyclone and out the
top.
20 Slurry (SLUR-e). A thin, watery mud, or any substance resembling it (such as a grit slurry or a lime slurry).
-------
GRIT
CHANNEL
TO
COMMINUTOR
OR
PRIMARY CLARIFIER
OVERFLOW DISCHARGE
TO PLANT INFLUENT
HOPPER
GRIT
PUMP
CONE
CYCLONE
GRIT
SEPARATOR
SCREW
CONVEYOR
CONICAL
CHAMBER
CLASSIFIER
STORAGE
BIN
^-DUMP
TRUCK
Fig. 4.19 Cyclone grit separator
-------
Racks
INLET
INLET
PRIMARY
VORTEX
ORIFICE
i
> OVERFLOW
SECONDARY
VORTEX
UNDERFLOW
OVERFLOW
UNDERFLOW
Fig. 4.20 How a grit cyclone separator works
(Permission of WEMCO Division, Envirotech Corporation)
-------
90 Treatment Plants
The grit is usually removed from a grit classifier at the bottom
of the cyclone by means of a screw conveyor to storage hop-
pers. Ultimately the grit is hauled away and buried at a disposal
site.
4.70 Safety
Working around and on cyclone grit separators requires the
exercise of extreme caution. Always shut off, lock out and tag
equipment before attempting to remove objects causing stop-
pages or to work on the equipment. Slowly-moving screw con-
veyors and other equipment can seriously injure you by crush-
ing or tearing your hand or leg. Sometimes the lifting of heavy
cyclone parts is required from very difficult positions which
could result in sprains or strains if you are not careful. In these
situations, hoists or ropes should be used whenever possible.
Be very cautious on slippery surfaces because a fall may result
in a serious injury.
4.71 Start Up
Prior to initial start up of a cyclone grit separator, inspect the
area and facilities for tools and debris. Pump water to the unit
to see that the piping is clear and that the pressure gage and
other equipment all function properly.
Normal operation start ups involve starting the grit conveyor
and then the pumps. Once the separator is operating, make
the necessary adjustments as discussed in the next section
under OPERATION.
4.72 Operation
FEED: The amount of water being pumped with the grit is
important. In general, dilute feed slurries will allow separation
of smaller particles. Thicker slurries will result in a slower rota-
tional motion and reduced capacity. Inlet pressure is critical
and should be maintained as close as possible to manufactur-
er's recommended pressure.
UNDERFLOW DISCHARGE: The underflow discharge from
the bottom (apex) should appear as a hollow cone shape. If the
discharge is too heavy, it appears as a rotating solid spiral
(looks like a rope) and a heavily overloaded condition will ap-
pear as a straight stream lacking spiral motion. No underflow
could mean the feed slurry is too thick or debris (such as rags)
has plugged the apex.
FEED INLET PRESSURE AND OVERFLOW DISCHARGE:
The inlet pressure affects efficiency and must be maintained
within the limits prescribed by the manufacturer. The overflow
discharge is through an adjustable orifice called the "vortex
finder" (Fig. 4.20). Inlet pressure and overflow discharge are
closely related functions. The optimum settings may be found
quickly by making the adjustments just discussed while observ-
ing the operation of the unit.
4.73 Shutdown
To remove the cyclone grit separator from service, shut
down the facility by turning off the supply pump which feeds the
cyclone.
Allow the cyclone to drain. Hose down and wash out over-
flow discharge, grit classifier and screw conveyor. Turn off grit
classifier and screw-drive motor.
4.74 Maintenance
Maintenance consists of applying procedures outlined in
your plant O & M manual and manufacturer's literature for
maintenance of the cyclone, grit pump, screw conveyor and
screw conveyor drive motor. The cyclone liner and screw con-
veyor must be replaced when excessive wear prevents proper
adjustments and the equipment no longer functions as in-
tended.
TABLE 4.6 PURPOSE OF CYCLONE GRIT SEPARATOR
AND PARTS
Part
1. Cyclone Grit Separator
2. Grit Pump
3. Entrance Chamber
4. Conical Chamber
5. Overflow Discharge Pipe
6. Grit Classifier
7. Screw Conveyor
8. Grit Storage Bin
9. Screw Conveyor Drive
Motor
Purpose
Separates grit from wastewa-
ter and organic material.
Pumps grit from hopper to
cyclone grit separator.
Introduces grit to cyclone.
Provides enclosed vessel
(tank) where grit is separated
from water and organic mat-
ter.
Carries wastewater and or-
ganic matter back to plant in-
fluent.
Removes organics from grit
by washing.
Moves grit from grit hopper
under cyclone to grit storage
bin.
Stores grit until loaded into
dump truck for hauling to dis-
posal site.
Turns screw conveyor.
-------
Racks 91
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on pages 96 and 97.
4.5A Grit is composed mostly of which of the following sub-
stances?
a. Grease
b. Sand
c. Rubber Goods
d. Eggshells
e. Wood
4.5B Why bother to remove grit?
4.6A How can you control the velocity in a grit channel in
order to maintain velocities within a range of approxi-
mately 0.7 to 1.4 fps?
4.6B A stick travels 20 feet in 40 seconds in a grit channel.
a. What is the velocity in the channel?
b. What corrective action should be taken, if any?
4.6C List the safety hazards that might be encountered while
manually cleaning a grit channel.
4.6D Assume you wish to calculate the velocity in the grit
channel at your plant's peak flow. Examining the flow
charts, you determine that peak flows are usually about
2.75 MGD. The grit channel is three-feet wide, and the
flow depth is 17 inches at peak flow. What is the velocity
in the grit channel under these conditions?
4.7A What is the purpose of a cyclone grit separator?
4.7B List the possible safety hazards an operator may en-
counter when working around a cyclone grit separator.
4.8 GRIT WASHING
A grit channel with a slower flow velocity than recommended
may allow large quantities of organic matter to settle out with
the grit. This heavy, coarse mixture of grit and organic material
is called DETRITUS.21 In some plants grit channels are called
"detritus tanks." Organic matter may be separated from the grit
by washing the detritus to re-suspend the organic matter.
In some cases the grit is used as fill material. Under these
conditions it is necessary to wash the grit. Figure 4.21 shows a
typical grit washer, and the purposes of the parts are sum-
marized in Table 4.7. Grit settles to the bottom and is removed
by a screw conveyor (or other device), while the velocity
created by the impeller suspends the lighter organic materials
so that they flow over the outlet weir.
When working around a grit washer, avoid slippery areas
where you could slip and fall or even slip into the grit washer.
Always turn off, lock out and tag the controls of the screw
conveyor before attempting to remove stuck material and to
inspect or repair the screw conveyor.
Before pumping grit or wash water to a grit washer, be sure
both the screw conveyor and screw-type impeller work prop-
erly. Under normal operating conditions, pump grit to the
washer at regular intervals as necessary. Operate the screw
conveyor during the grit-washing operation. When the grit-
washing procedure is completed, turn off the equipment.
To shut down the grit washer for inspection, maintenance or
repairs, drain the facility and wash down the walls and con-
veyor. Treat the empty washer as an enclosed space and pro-
vide adequate ventilation. Be sure two people carefully ob-
serve anyone who enters an empty grit washer for any reason
in order to rescue this person if necessary. Before entering,
test the area for toxic gases (hydrogen sulfide), sufficient oxy-
gen and explosive conditions. Wear a safety harness and have
a self-contained breathing apparatus nearby for rescue pur-
poses.
Maintenance consists of inspecting the entire facility for cor-
rosion damages and examining moving parts for wear. Oil and
grease the facilities in accordance with plant O & M manual
and manufacturer's instructions.
TABLE 4.7 PURPOSE OF GRIT WASHER AND PARTS
Part Purpose
1. Grit Washer Washes organic material out
of grit and sand.
2. Inlet Chamber
3. Wash Water
4. Screw-Type Impeller
5. Motor
6. Outlet
7. Screw Conveyor
Mixes grit and wash water and
introduces mixture into grit
washer.
Helps separate organic mate-
rial from grit and sand.
Circulates contents of grit
washer and brings water and
separated organics to surface
of washer for removal.
Turns screw-type impeller.
Removes water and organics
from grit washer.
Conveys grit from bottom of
grit washer to hopper for
transfer to truck for disposal.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 97.
4.8A Why is it necessary or desirable to "wash" grit?
4.8B List the maintenance steps for a grit washer.
4.9 QUANTITIES OF GRIT
Treatment plants having well-constructed separate waste-
water collection systems can usually expect to average 1 to 4
cu ft of grit per million gallons.22 These quantities have been
rising in recent years due to household garbage grinders. They
can also be expected to increase during storm periods.
Plants receiving waste from combined collection systems
can expect to average 4 to 15 cu ft of grit per million gallons
with peaks many times higher during storm periods. Grit col-
lected during storm periods has been reported at over 500 cu ft
per million gallons, probably the result of flow from broken
sewers or open channels.
21 Detritus (dee-TRI-tus). The heavy, coarse mixture of grit arid organic material carried by wastewater.
22 Uniform reporting of results is important. Everyone should use the same units. You should obtain a copy of the Water Pollution Control
Federation Manual of Practice No. 6, UNITS OF EXPRESSION FOR WASTEWATER TREATMENT, and use the units as recommended. The
manual can be obtained from the Water Pollution Control Federation, 2626 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW, Washington, D.C. 20037, at $2.00 for
WPCF members and $4.00 for others.
-------
<0
IO
AUXILIARY
WASH WATER
GRIT FEED
(USUALLY WASTE WATER)
WATER AND ORGANICS OUTLET
CD
»
3
-------
Racks 93
Records of grit quantities should be kept in the same manner
as for screenings.
QUESTION
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 97.
4.9A Your plant has an average flow of 2.0 MGD. An average
of 4 cu ft of grit is removed each day. How many cu ft of
grit per MG of flow are removed?
4.10 DISPOSAL OF GRIT
Final disposal of grit is by burial. This may be in a sanitary
landfill or other types of landfill operations. Regardless of the
method, at least 6 inches (15 cm) of soil should be placed over
the grit to keep out rats and flies.
4.11 PRE-AERATION
Pre-aeration is a wastewater treatment process used to help
grit removal, to freshen wastewater, to remove gases, to add
oxygen, to promote flotation of grease, and to aid coagulation.
The freshening of wastewater improves the effectiveness of
downstream treatment processes. The pre-aeration process is
usually located before primary sedimentation (Fig. 4.1). Other
processes used to accomplish freshening include OZONIZA-
TION23 and prechlorination.
Pre-aeration consists of aerating wastewater in a channel or
separate tank for 10 to 45 minutes. Aeration may be accom-
/ plished by either mechanical surface aeration units or diffused
air systems.24 Air application rates with a diffused air system
normally range from 0.5 to 1.0 cu ft of air per gallon of waste-
water (3.75 to 7.5 cu m air/cu m wastewater) treated.
4.12 OPERATIONAL STRATEGY
This chapter has covered basic concepts in the operation
and maintenance of equipment used to remove grit, rags,
coarse materials and other debris from the wastewater before
it enters the treatment plant. Now let's consider some things to
do and to watch for when a piece of equipment breaks down or
the plant becomes overloaded by excessive flows.
If screens or comminutors are overloaded or bypassed, you
can expect the following problems:
1. Sticks and rags can foul the raw sludge pumps for the
primary clarifiers;
2. Debris can plug the orifices in trickling filter distributors;
3. Debris can interfere with air diffusers in the aeration tanks
of activated sludge plants;
4. Floating debris can appear in the chlorine contact basin
and leave the plant in the final effluent; and
5. Solids can plug return sludge pumps and flow meters in
activated sludge plants.
If grit channels are bypassed or overloaded, grit can reach
the primary clarifiers. To reduce resulting problems, increase
the pumping of raw sludge to keep the clarifier hopper, piping,
and pumps from plugging.
You can get into other types of trouble by increasing pump-
ing unless your plant is equipped with sludge thickeners.
Overpumping from the clarifier will affect the digesters. The grit
will occupy valuable space; the extra water will lower the tem-
perature of the digesters or require more energy for heating
and may wash the ALKALINITY25 BUFFER26 out of the diges-
ter. Also, excessive amounts of supernatant from the digesters
will add to the organic load on the plant. Therefore, if you are
faced with this problem, you should look for ways to relieve
and/or to avoid the problem in the future. For example, the raw
sludge or digester supernatant could be pumped to a standby
tank or pond whenever the grit channels must be bypassed or
are overloaded.
To remove floating debris from chlorine contact basins and
the final effluent, try hand skimming with hardware cloth nets.
Also hardware cloth screens may be installed in the clarifier
effluent troughs and final effluent channel.
These problems and possible actions to take show how im-
portant it is for the operator to do everything possible to keep
pretreatment equipment well maintained. Obviously, break-
downs of pretreatment equipment may be expected to cause a
23 Ozonization (O-zoe-nie-ZA Y-shun). The application of ozone to water, wastewater, or air, generally for the purposes of disinfection or odor
control.
24 See Chapter 8, "Activated Sludge," for a discussion of aeration facilities.
25 Alkalinity (AL-ka-lin-ity). The capacity of water or wastewater to neutralize acids. This capacity is caused by the water's content of
carbonate, bicarbonate, hydroxide, and occasionally borate, silicate and phosphate. Alkalinity is expressed in milligrams per liter of
equivalent calcium carbonate. Alkalinity is not the same as pH because water does not have to be strongly basic (high pH) to have a high
alkalinity. Alkalinity is a measure of how much acid can be added to a liquid without causing a great change in pH.
26 Buffer. A solution or liquid whose chemical makeup neutralizes acids or bases without a great change in pH.
-------
94 Treatment Plants
lot of problems throughout the plant. In spite of good operation
and maintenance, failures may still occur.
You should consider what to do when you have a failure at
your plant. You must plan in advance what to do to correct the
situation or to adjust the other treatment processes. For exam-
ple, you can have screens made and emergency storage
facilities prepared to handle wastewater bypasses and over-
flows. Advance preparation for emergencies can save a lot of
extra work and make it possible to keep your plant operating
efficiently under unfavorable circumstances.
4.13 DESIGN REVIEW
When reviewing plans and specifications, operators can be
very helpful to design engineers, by thinking of how they plan
to operate and maintain each treatment process and facility.
This section lists a few items operators should study on plans
for expansion of existing facilities or construction of new treat-
ment plants.
4.130 Racks and Screens
1. Is there room for a rake when removing screenings?
Will the handle of the rake hit any buildings, overhead
wires, light posts or overhead lights?
2. Is there provision for a good standing place that won't
become slippery?
3. Is there some place to drain and store screenings?
4. Where is the disposal site for the screenings?
5. How many channels and racks or screens are there,
and what is the capacity of each? What will happen
during peak storm flows?
6. What are the stapdby units?
7. What are the Operation and Maintenance (O & M) re-
quirements of the facilities?
8. Are there provisions for a hoist for removal of
screenings if facility is located below grade?
9. Is there an adequate dock facility for loading containers
on a truck for disposal?
10. Is there adequate water under sufficient pressure to
hose down machinery and area?
11. Are sufficient spare parts provided in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations?
4.131 Grit Removal
1. Are there guard rails around the grit chambers or grit
channels?
2. Are there provisions for taking the grit channels or grit
chambers out of sen/ice and for draining?
3. How many channels will be required for average and
wet weather flows? What will happen during peak storm
flows?
4. Are there standby units if there are high flows or if one
unit is out for repairs during a storm?
5. How easily can the units be cleaned?
6. Can the grit hoppers be flushed easily?
7. Are there grit storage facilities and are they adequate?
8. Are there grit dewatering capabilities?
9. Are there provisions for skimming floatables from water
surfaces?
10. Have items 8 through 11 in Section 4.130, "Racks and
Screens" been checked for this Section too?
4.132 Wet Wells
1. Explosion-proof wiring should be installed in areas such
as the wet well, screening room, and any other enclosed
space. Floating fuels such as gasoline or fuel oil can
enter a wet well, evaporate, and form an explosive mix-
ture with air. Significant amounts of fuel may enter a
sanitary sewer system unintentionally by being dumped
or drained into a storm sewer system which is part of a
combined collection system or through underground
fuel line leaks. EXPLOSIMETERS27 are strongly
suggested because they can sound an alarm before
explosive conditions are reached.
2. Ventilation is very important to control toxic gases and
corrosion, as well as explosive conditions. Forced air
circulation creates a positive air pressure on wastewater
in a wet well and tends to keep toxic gases in solution.
This procedure is considered superior to an exhaust gas
system.
3. If floating oils can be expected in influent wastewaters,
skimmers can be helpful in wet wells.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 97.
4.12A What kinds of problems can be created for the
operator when screens or comminutors are over-
loaded or bypassed?
4.13A What items would you check when reviewing the plans
and specifications for racks and screens?
4.14 ADDITIONAL READING
1. MOP 11, Chapter 6, "Screening" and Chapter 7, "Grit
Removal."*
2. NEW YORK MANUAL, Chapter 4, "Preliminary Treat-
ment."
3. TEXAS MANUAL, Chapter 9, "Screens, Grinders, Grit
Chambers and Grease Traps."
* Depends on edition
4.15 METRIC CALCULATIONS
This section contains the solutions to all problems in this
chapter using metric calculations.
27 Explosimeters. Instruments used to detect explosive atmospheres. When the Lower Explosive Limit (L E. L) of an atmosphere is exceeded,
an alarm signal on the instrument is activated.
-------
Racks 95
4.150
Conversion Factors
MGD x 3785
= cu m/day
cu m/day x 0.000 264
= MGD
gallons x 3.785
= liters
liters x 0.264
= gallons
1000 L
= 1 cu m
ft x 0.3048
= m
m x 3.281
= ft
cu ft x 0.028 32
= liters
L x 0.35 315
= cu ft
Problem Solutions
Known
A wastewater treatment plant receives a flow of 8000
cubic meters per day. During a two-week period you re-
move an average of 120 liters of screenings daily.
Screenings are buried in a pit which will hold 12 cubic
meters of screenings IN ADDITION to the soil used to
cover up the screenings. How many days will the site
last?
Known
Flow, cu m/day = 8000 cu m/day
Screenings, L/day = 120 L/day
Pit Capacity, cum = 12 cu m
Unknown
Time to Fill Pit,
days
1. Calculate the filling rate of the pit in cubic meters per
day.
= 120 Uday x
1 cu m
1000 L
= 0.12 cu m/day
2. Estimate the time to fill the pit.
Pit Capacity, cu m
Time to Fill
Pit, days
Filling Rate, cu m/day
12 cu m
0.12 cu m/day
100 days
2. Estimate the velocity in a grit channel if a stick travels 10
meters in 25 seconds.
Known
Distance, m
Time, sec
10 m
25 sec
Unknown
Velocity, m/sec
1. Estimate the velocity in the grit channel.
Distance, m
Velocity, m/sec
Time, sec
= 10 m
25 sec
= 0.4 m/sec
3. A grit channel is one meter wide and the wastewater is
flowing at a depth of 0.5 meters. The flow is 10,000 cubic
meters per day. Estimate the velocity in the grit channel
in meters per second.
= 1 m
= 0.5 m
= 10,000 cu m/day
Unknown
Velocity, m/sec
Width, m
Depth, m
Flow, cu m/day
1. Convert flow from cubic meters per day to cubic me-
ters per second.
Flow,
cu m
sec
fiow, cu m v1 day
1 hr
day 24 hr 60 min
10,000 ciiHx1Ayx 1 hr
day 24 hr 60 min
1 min
60 sec
x 1 min
60 sec
= 0.116 cu m/sec
2. Determine area of grit channel.
Area, sq m = Width, m x Depth, m
= 1 m x 0.5 m
= 0.5 sq m
3. Estimate velocity in meters per second.
Velocity, m/sec = Flow' cu "***
Area, sq m
0.166 cu m/sec
0.5 sq m
= 0.23 m/sec
4. Determine the desired length of a grit channel if the depth
is 0.5 meters and the particle settling velocity is 0.023
meters per second. The flow velocity is 0.23 meters per
second.
Unknown
Grit Channel Length, m
Known
Depth, m = 0.5 m
Settling Vel, m/sec = 0.023 m/sec
Row Vel, m/sec = 0.23 m/sec
1. Calculate the desired length of the grit channel.
(Depth of Channel, m) (Flow Vel, m/sec)
Settling Velocity, m/sec
(0.5 m) (0.23 m/sec)
Length, m
0.023 m/sec
= 5 m
5. A wastewater treatment plant has an average flow of
8,000 cubic meters per day. An average of 0.12 liters of
grit is removed each day. How many liters of grit are
removed per cubic meter of flow?
Known Unknown
Flow, cu m/day = 8,000 cu m/day Grit Removed, L/cu m
Grit, L/day = 0.12 L/day
1. Calculate the grit removed in liters of grit per cubic
meter of flow.
Grit Removed,
Lieu m
or
Grit Removed, L/day
Flow, cu m/day
= 0.12 L/day
8000 cu m/day
= 0.000 015 L/cu m
= 1.5 x 10"5 L/cu m
-------
96 Treatment Plants
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
Chapter 4. RACKS, SCREENS, COMMINUTORS AND
GRIT REMOVAL
DO NOT USE IBM ANSWER SHEET. Please write your an-
swers in your notebook. The purpose of these questions is to
indicate to you how well you understand the material in this
chapter.
1. Why should coarse material (rocks, boards, metal) be re-
moved at the plant entrance?
2. Why do you think the wastewater treatment and pollution
control industry has a higher accident rate than most other
industries reporting to the National Safety Council?
3. What are the advantages of comminutors over screens?
4. What precautions should be taken when cleaning a grit
channel?
5. How can an operator regulate the velocity in a grit channel?
6. A stick travels 30 feet in 50 seconds in a grit channel. What
is the flow velocity in the grit channel? Please show your
calculations in a neat fashion so someone can help you if
necessary.
7. Calculate the grit removed from a grit channel in cubic feet
per million gallons if during a 24-hour period the average
flow was 3 MGD and 4.5 cu ft of grit were removed.
8. What would you do if the screens or comminutor in your
plant were overloaded or bypassed?
9. Why should an operator be given the opportunity to review
the plans and specifications for the expansion of existing
facilities or construction of a new wastewater treatment
plant?
SUGGESTED ANSWERS
Chapter 4. RACKS, SCREENS, COMMINUTORS AND
GRIT REMOVAL
Answers to questions on page 61.
4.0A True
4.0B True
4.0C True
Answers to questions on page 62.
4.1 A (e) All of these.
4.1 B Large pieces of material, such as rocks, boards, metal,
and rags, are removed by racks, screens, and grit re-
moval devices.
4.1C Coarse debris must be removed at the plant entrance to
prevent damage to pumps, plugging of pipes, and filling
of digesters.
Answers to questions on page 69.
4.2A (b), (c), and (d). Usually bar screens are very sturdy and
will not collapse under the load from a blockage or an
uncleaned screen.
4.2B Check to make sure that your footing will be secure by
removing any slippery substances such as water and
grease. Be certain there is adequate space to safely lift
the screenings and a receptacle for the screenings (de-
bris).
4.2C Visually identify what appears to be the cause of the
problem, then shut off the machine if you must work on
the equipment. Any moving equipment is hazardous,
regardless of its speed.
4.3A Screenings may be disposed of by covering them with a
minimum of six inches of earth or by incineration.
4.3B Quantity Removed,
cu ft/MG
_ Volume Removed, cu ft/day
Average Flows, MGD
_ 11 cu ft/day 2.5
= 2.5 cu ft/MG
Answers to questions on page 81.
4.4A Advantages of comminuting machines over screens in-
clude the elimination of screenings disposal, flies, and
odor problems. A disadvantage is that plastic and wood
may be rejected and must be removed manually.
4.4B Mechanical seals have replaced mercury seals in
comminutors.
4.4C (d). Mercury must be handled with caution at all times.
4.4D Bar racks and screens remove debris from the waste-
water while comminution units grind up debris and
leave it in the wastewater.
Answers to questions on page 91.
4.5A (b) and (d). Grit is composed of heavy material that will
settle in the grit chamber at proper flow velocities.
4.5B Grit must be removed to prevent wear in pumps
plugged lines, and the occupation of valuable space in
digesters.
-------
Racks 97
4.6A (a) Vary the number of channels in service in a multi-
ple-channel installation.
(b) Use of proportional weirs.
(c) Lining sides with bricks or cinder blocks if velocity is
too low. This could occur in a new plant.
You have the right idea if your answer includes possible
adjustments of the cross-sectional area of the flow
channel.
4.6B (a) Velocity = 0.5 ft/sec.
(b) Reduce cross-sectional area.
4.6C
Slipping or a back injury. Beware of dangerous gases
when working in a covered grit channel. Also, there
have been instances of gasoline or similar material
leaking into the sewer and creating a potentially explo-
sive hazard.
4.6D
(a) Convert the flow of 2.75 MGD to cu ft/sec.
Flow, it.-... „ 1.55 cu ft/sec
cu ft/sec
= Flow, MGD x
= (2.75 MGD)
= 4.3 cu ft/sec
MGD
1.55 cu ft/sec
MGD
2.75
1.55
13 75
137 5
275
4.2625
(b) Convert depth of flow from 17 inches to feet.
17 in
1.4
Depth, ft
12 in/ft
1.4 ft
12)177
12
50
48
(c) Calculate cross-sectional area of channel.
Area, sq ft = Depth, ft x Width, ft
= 1.4 ft x 3 ft
= 4.2 sq ft
(d) Calculate velocity.
Average Velocity, _ Flow, cu ft/sec
ft/sec
Area, sq ft
_ 4.26 cu ft/sec
4.2 sq ft
= 1.01, or 1 ft/sec
1.01
4.2)4.26
42
060
42
4.7A
4.7B
The purpose of a cyclone grit separator is to separate
grit from organic material and wastewater.
Safety hazards an operator may encounter when work-
ing around a cyclone grit separator include:
1. Electrical hazards,
2. Slowly-moving screw conveyors and other equip-
ment.
3. Lifting heavy parts or materials, and
4. Slippery surfaces.
Answers to questions on page 91.
4.8A Grit is "washed" to remove organic material before dis-
posal. If the organic matter is not removed, then odors
could develop. If used as fill material, the fill could settle
when the organics decompose.
4.8B Maintenance for a grit washer consists of:
1. Inspecting facility for corrosion damages;
2. Examining moving parts for wear; and
3. Lubricating and greasing facilities in accordance
with plant O & M manual and manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
Answer to question on page 93.
4.9A Grit removals should be recorded as cubic feet of grit
per million gallons of flow.
Answer: 2 cu ft of grit/million gallons.
Answers to questions on page 94.
4.12A Problems created when screens or comminutors are
overloaded or bypassed include:
1. Sticks and rags can foul the raw sludge pumps for
the primary clarifiers,
2. Debris can plug the orifices in trickling filter dis-
tributors,
3. Debris can interfere with air diffusers in the aera-
tion tanks of activated sludge plants,
4. Floating debris can appear in chlorine contact
basin and the final effluent, and
5. Solids can plug return sludge pumps and flow me-
ters in activated sludge plants.
4.13A When checking the plans and specifications for racks
and screens, determine if there is:
1. Room for a rake when removing screenings;
2. Space so rake handle will not hit any buildings,
overhead wires, light posts or overhead lights;
3. Some place to drain and store screenings;
4. A disposal site for the screenings;
5. Sufficient number of channels and capacity of
racks and screens;
6. Provision to handle peak storm flows;
7. A sufficient number of standby units;
8. Hoist to remove screenings if necessary;
9. Dock facility for loading containers of screenings;
10. Adequate water under sufficient pressure for hos-
ing down machinery and area; and
11. Sufficient spare parts.
-------
98
Treatment Plants
OBJECTIVE TEST
Chapter 4. RACKS, SCREENS, COMMINUTORS AND
GRIT REMOVAL
Please mark correct answers on the answer sheet as di-
rected at the end of Chapter 1. There may be more than one
correct answer.
1. You must always wash your hands before eating or smok-
ing to prevent becoming infected with a water-borne dis-
ease.
V1. True
2. False
2. Slipping and falling is one of the major safety hazards
encountered by wastewater treatment plant operators.
^1. True
2. False
3. Raw wastewater is plant effluent before any treatment.
1. True
\/2. False
4. Detritus is a common name for skimmings.
1. True
V 2. False
5. Septic wastewater looks black and smells like rotten eggs.
w 1. True
2. False
6. A sudden surge of septic wastewater into a treatment
plant can cause a "shock load" on the treatment pro-
cesses.
v/1. True
2. False
7. Manually cleaned screens are cleaned every eight hours.
1. True
v2. False
8. Screenings are usually pumped to an anaerobic digester
for treatment.
1. True
\/2. False
9. The velocity of wastewater flowing through a grit channel
affects the effectiveness of grit removal.
^1. True
2. False
10. Sludge and grit are both treated by the same processes.
1. True
N 2. False
11. Pretreatment may include
^ 1. Bar screens.
2. Clarifiers.
3. Detritus.
4. Digesters.
•J 5. Grit channels.
12. Which of the following items may be found in a treatment
plant influent?
^1. Cans
2. Clothes
v/3. Eggshells
V 4. Rocks
J 5. Toys
13. Grit is composed mostly of
1. Floating wood and paper.
2. Grease and scum.
3. Plastics and rubber goods.
•J 4. Sand and eggshells.
5. Sludge and organic materials.
14. A dead spot in a grit channel usually results in
1. Deposits of grit that become compacted and hard.
2. Deposits of grit that plug up the flow measuring device.
^3. Deposits of organic materials that become putrescible.
4. Deposits of inorganic materials that become putresci-
ble.
5. No deposits of solids.
15. Safety hazards around mechanically cleaned bar screens
and racks include
1. Drowning.
nj 2. Electrical hazards.
3. Pulling or lifting.
4. Slippery surfaces.
5. Traffic hazards.
16. What should be done FIRST when a problem develops in
a mechanically cleaned screen?
1. Attempt to fix the screen with the proper tools.
2. Find someone to help in case you get into trouble.
3. Reach in with your hand and fix the equipment.
4. Read the plant 0 & M manual and determine how to
correct the problem.
>/ 5. Turn off the electrical power to the screen, tag and lock
out.
-------
Racks 99
17. The methods used to dispose of screenings ultimately in-
clude
V 1. Burial.
2. Dumping into a nearby river.
v3. Incineration.
4. Selling for hog food.
5. Using for fertilizer.
18. An aerated grit chamber will
1. Freshen the plant effluent wastewater.
^2. Freshen the plant wastewater being treated.
3. Increase BOD in wastewater being treated.
4. Prevent clogging of flow measuring devices.
5. Soften up the grit.
19. A stick travels 30 feet in 20 seconds in a grit channel.
Estimate the flow velocity in the grit channel.
1. 0.5 ft/sec
2. 0.67 ft/sec
3. 1.0 ftysec
VA. 1.5 ffsec
5. 2.0 ft/sec
20. When starting or placing a comminutor in service, which of
the following items would you perform?
, 1. Adjust cutter blades if necessary.
** 2. Check appearance and sound of comminutor.
3. Check for proper positioning of inlet and outlet gates.
4. Inspect for proper lubrication and oil levels.
5. Look for frayed cables.
21. What problems can develop in a wastewater treatment
plant if screens or comminutors are overloaded or
bypassed?
1. Electrical controls can become jammed.
2. Floating debris can appear in the chlorine contact ba-
sin.
3. Floating debris can appear in the final effluent.
4. No problems should develop with the downstream pro-
cesses.
/5. Sticks and rags can foul the raw sludge pumps.
22. The rake on a mechanically cleaned bar screen will not
move, but the motor is running. Possible causes of the
problem include
v 1. Broken chain.
V2. Broken shear pin.
3. Limit switch is not working.
4. Screen plugged.
>/ 5. Rake mechanism jammed.
END OF OBJECTIVE TEST
-------
CHAPTER 5
Elmer Herr
-------
102 Treatment Plants
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 5. Sedimentation and Flotation
Page
OBJECTIVES 104
GLOSSARY 105
LESSON 1
5.0 Purpose of Sedimentation and Flotation 108
5.1 Operation and Maintenance 116
5.10 Start-Up Procedure 116
5.11 Daily Operation and Maintenance 117
5.12 Shutdown Procedure 117
5.13 Operational Strategy 117
5.14 Abnormal Conditions 118
5.15 Troubleshooting 119
5.150 Sludge Collector Failure 120
5.151 Sludge Pump Failure 120
5.152 Toxic Waste Discharge 120
5.2 Sampling and Laboratory Analysis 121
5.20 Need for Sampling and Analysis 121
5.21 Sampling 121
5.22 Calculation of Clarifier Efficiency 121
5.23 Typical Clarifier Efficiencies 122
5.24 Response to Poor Clarifier Performance 122
5.3 Sludge and Scum Pumping 123
5.4 General Maintenance 124
5.5 Safety 124
LESSON 2
5.6 Principles of Operation 126
5.60 Types of Units 126
5.61 Primary Clarifiers 126
5.62 Secondary Clarifiers 130
-------
Sedimentation 103
5.620 Trickling Filter Clarifiers 130
5.621 Activated Sludge Clarifiers 130
5.7 Review of Plans and Specifications 134
5.70 Operation 134
5.71 Maintenance 136
5.72 Safety 136
5.8 Flotation Processes 136
LESSON 3
5.9 Combined Sedimentation-Digestion Unit 138
5.90 Purpose of Unit 138
5.91 How the Unit Works 138
5.92 Sampling and Analysis 140
5.93 Operation 140
5.930 Start-Up Procedures 140
5.931 Normal Operation 143
5.932 Abnormal Operation 144
5.933 Shutdown Procedures 144
5.934 Operational Strategy 144
5.94 Maintenance 144
5.95 Safety 144
5.96 Acknowledgment 144
5.10 Imhoff Tanks 145
5.11 Septic Tanks 146
5.12 Additional Reading 146
5.13 Metric Calculations 146
5.130 Conversion Factors 146
5.131 Problem Solutions 146
-------
OBJECTIVES
Chapter 5. SEDIMENTATION AND FLOTATION
Following completion of Chapter 5, you should be able to do
the following:
1. Inspect new sedimentation and flotation equipment for
proper installation and operation,
2. Place new facilities in service,
3. Schedule and conduct operation and maintenance duties,.
4. Sample influent and effluent, interpret lab results, and
make appropriate adjustments in treatment process (pro-
cedures for selecting sample location and analysis of
samples are presented in Chapter 16),
5. Recognize factors that indicate a clarifier is not performing
properly, identify the source of the problem, and take cor-
rective action,
6. Determine when, how often and how much sludge should
be pumped,
7. Conduct your duties in a safe fashion,
8. Explain the principles of the sedimentation and flotation
processes,
9. Determine loadings on a clarifier,
10. Keep accurate and appropriate records on the operation
of the process,
11. Develop an operating strategy for clarifiers, and
12. Review plans and specifications for clarifiers.
-------
Sedimentation
105
GLOSSARY
Chapter 5. SEDIMENTATION AND FLOTATION
AEROBIC BACTERIA AEROBIC BACTERIA
(AIR-O-bick back-TEAR-e-ah)
Bacteria which will live and reproduce only in an environment containing oxygen which is available for their respiration (breathing),
namely atmospheric oxygen or oxygen dissolved in water. Oxygen combined chemically, such as in water molecules (H20), cannot
be used for respiration by aerobic bacteria.
ANAEROBIC BACTERIA ANAEROBIC BACTERIA
(AN-air-O-bick back-TEAR-e-ah)
Bacteria that live and reproduce in an environment containing no "free" or dissolved oxygen. Anaerobic bacteria obtain their oxygen
supply by breaking down chemical components which'contain oxygen, such as sulfate (S04).
BULKING (BULK-ing) BULKING
Clouds of billowing sludge that occur throughout secondary clarifiers and sludge thickeners when the sludge becomes too light and
will not settle properly.
COAGULANTS (ko-AGG-you-lents) COAGULANTS
Chemicals that cause very fine particles to clump together into larger particles. This makes it easier to separate the solids from the
liquids by settling, skimming, draining or filtering.
COLLOIDS (KOL-loids) COLLOIDS
Very small, finely divided solids (particles that do not dissolve) that remain dispersed in liquid for a long time due to their small size
and electrical charge.
COMPOSITE (PROPORTIONAL) COMPOSITE (PROPORTIONAL)
SAMPLE (com-POZ-it) SAMPLE
A composite sample is a collection of individual samples obtained at regular intervals, usually every one or two hours during a
24-hour time span. Each individual sample is combined with the others in proportion to the flow when the sample was collected. The
resulting mixture (composite sample) forms a representative sample and is analyzed to determine the average conditions during the
sampling period.
DENSITY (DEN-sit-tee) DENSITY
A measure of how heavy a substance (solid, liquid or gas) is for its size. Density is expressed in terms of weight per unit volume, that
is, grams per cubic centimeter or pounds per cubic foot. The density of water (at 4°C or 39°F) is 1.0 gram per cubic centimeter or
about 62.4 pounds per cubic foot.
DETENTION TIME DETENTION TIME
The time required to fill a tank at a given flow or the theoretical time required for a given flow of wastewater to pass through a tank.
EMULSION (e-MULL-shun) EMULSION
A liquid mixture of two or more liquid substances not normally dissolved in one another, but one liquid held in suspension in the
other.
FLIGHTS FLIGHTS
Scraper boards, made from redwood or other rot-resistant woods or plastic, used to collect and move settled sludge or floating
scum.
FLOCCULATION (FLOCK-you-lay-shun) FLOCCULATION
The gathering together of fine particles to form larger particles.
-------
106 Treatment Plants
FREEBOARD FREEBOARD
The vertical distance from the normal water surface to the top of the confining wall. A.
Freeboard
T~
Wall
Height
J&
Water Depth
GASIFICATION (GAS-i-fi-KAY-shun) GASIFICATION
The conversion of soluble and suspended organic materials into gas during anaerobic decomposition. In clarifiers the resulting gas
bubbles can become attached to the settled sludge and cause large clumps of sludge to rise and float on the water surface.
HYDRAULIC LOADING HYDRAULIC LOADING
Hydraulic loading refers to the flows (MGD or cu m/day) to a treatment plant or treatment process. Detention times, surface loadings
and weir overflow rates are directly influenced by the flows.
LAUNDERS (LAWN-ders) LAUNDERS
Sedimentation tank effluent troughs.
LINEAL (LIN-e-al) LINEAL
The length in one direction of a line. For example, a board 12 feet long has 12 lineal feet in its length.
MPN (EM-PEA-EN) MPN
MPN is the Most Probable Number of coliform-group organisms per unit volume. Expressed as a density or population of organisms
per 100 ml.
MASKING AGENTS MASKING AGENTS
Substances used to cover up or disguise unpleasant odors. Liquid masking agents are dripped into the wastewater, sprayed into the
air, or evaporated (using heat) with the unpleasant fumes or odors and then discharged into the air by blowers to make an
undesirable odor less noticeable.
MILLIMICRON (MILL-e-MY-cron) MILLIMICRON
One thousandth of a micron or a millionth of a millimeter.
MOLECULE (MOLL-uh-kule) MOLECULE
A molecule is the smallest portion of an element or compound that still retains or exhibits all the properties of the substance.
OSHA OSHA
The Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA) is a law designed to protect the health and safety of
industrial workers and treatment plant operators. It regulates the design, construction, operation and maintenance of industrial
plants and wastewater treatment plants. The Act does not apply directly to municipalities at present (1980), EXCEPT in those states
that have approved plans and have asserted jurisdiction under Section 18 of the OSHA Act. However, wastewater treatment plants
have come under stricter regulation in all phases of activity as a result of OSHA standards.
PACKAGE TREATMENT PLANT PACKAGE TREATMENT PLANT
A small wastewater treatment plant often fabricated at the manufacturer's factory, hauled to the site, and installed as one facility.
The package may be either a small primary or secondary wastewater treatment plant.
REPRESENTATIVE SAMPLE REPRESENTATIVE SAMPLE
A portion of material or water identical in content to that in the larger body of material or water being sampled.
RETENTION TIME RETENTION TIME
The time water, sludge or solids are retained or held in a clarifier or sedimentation tank. See DETENTION TIME.
SEPTIC (SEP-tick) SEPTIC
This condition is produced by anaerobic bacteria. If severe, the wastewater turns black, gives off foul odors, contains little or no
dissolved oxygen and creates a heavy oxygen demand.
SLOUGHINGS (SLUFF-ings) SLOUGHINGS
Trickling-filter slimes that have been washed off the filter media. They are generally quite high in BOD and will lower effluent quality
unless removed.
-------
Sedimentation 107
SLUDGE GASIFICATION
SLUDGE GASIFICATION
A process in which soluble and suspended organic matter are converted into gas by anaerobic decomposition. The resulting gas
bubbles can become attached to the settled sludge and cause large clumps of sludge to rise and float on the water surface.
SPECIFIC GRAVITY
SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Weight of a particle or substance in relation to the weight of water. Water has a specific gravity of 1.000 at 4°C (or 39°F). Wastewater
particles usually have a specific gravity of 0.5 to 2.5.
SURFACE LOADING SURFACE LOADING
Surface loading is calculated by dividing the flow into a sedimentation tank or a clarifier by the surface area of the unit.
Surface Loading, gpd/sq ft = Flow, gpd
Surface Area, sq ft
TOXIC (TOX-ick) TOXIC
Poisonous. A condition which may exist in wastes and will inhibit or destroy the growth or function of certain organisms.
WEIR DIAMETER (weer)
Many circular clarifiers have a circular weir within the outside edge of the clarifier. All
the water leaving the clarifier flows over this weir. The diameter of the weir is the
length of a line from one edge of a weir to the opposite edge and passing through the
center of the circle formed by the weir.
TOP VIEW
WEIR DIAMETER
DIAMETER
CIRCULAR
WEIR
DIAMETER
CROSS SECTION
-------
108 Treatment Plants
CHAPTER 5. SEDIMENTATION AND FLOTATION
(Lesson 1 of 3 Lessons)
NOTE: This chapter is divided into three lessons. The purpose
is to divide the material into specific subject areas to make the
information easier to study.
5.0 PURPOSE OF SEDIMENTATION AND FLOTATION
Raw or untreated wastewater contains materials which will
either settle to the bottom or float to the water surface readily
when the wastewater velocity is allowed to become very slow.
Sewers are designed to keep the raw wastewater flowing
rapidly to prevent solids from settling out in the collection-
system lines. Grit channels (see Chapter 4) are designed to
allow the wastewater to flow at a slightly slower rate than in the
sewers so that heavy, inorganic grit will settle to the bottom
where it can be removed. Settling tanks decrease the waste-
water velocity far below the velocity in a collection sewer.
In most municipal wastewater treatment plants, the treat-
ment unit which immediately follows the grit channel (see Figs.
5.1 and 5.2 for typical plant layout) is the SEDIMENTATION
AND FLOTATION UNIT. This unit may be called a settling tank,
sedimentation tank, or clarifier. The most common name is
PRIMARY CLARIFIER, since it helps to clarify or clear up the
wastewater.
Atypical plant (Figs. 5.1 and 5.2) may have clarifiers located
at two different points. The one which immediately follows the
bar screen, comminutor or grit channel (some plants don't
have all of these) is called the PRIMARY CLARIFIER, merely
because it is the first clarifier in the plant. The other, which
follows other types of treatment units, is called the SECON-
DARY CLARIFIER or the FINAL CLARIFIER. The two types of
clarifiers operate almost exactly the same way. The reason for
having a secondary clarifier is that other types of treatment
following the primary clarifier convert more solids to the settle-
able form, and they have to be removed from the treated
wastewater. Because of the need to remove these additional
solids, the secondary clarifier is considered part of these other
types of processes.
The main difference between primary and secondary
clarifiers is in the density of the sludge handled. Primary
sludges are usually denser than secondary sludges. Effluent
from a secondary clarifier is normally clearer than primary
effluent.
Solids which settle to the bottom of a clarifier are usually
scraped to one end (in rectangular clarifiers) or to the middle
(in circular clarifiers) into a sump. From the sump the solids are
pumped to the sludge handling or sludge disposal system.
Systems vary from plant to plant and include sludge digestion,
vacuum filtration, incineration, land disposal, lagoons and bu-
rial. Figures 5.3, 5.4 and 5.5 show detailed sketches of rectan-
gular and circular clarifiers. Tables 5.1 and 5.2 list the pur-
poses of the parts of the clarifiers.
Disposal of skimmed solids varies from plant to plant.
Skimmed solids may be buried with material cleaned off the
bar screen, incinerated, or pumped to the digester. Even
though pumping skimmed solids to a digester is not considered
good practice because skimmings can cause operational prob-
lems in digesters, it is a common practice.
This chapter contains information on start up, daily opera-
tion, shut down and maintenance procedures; sampling and
laboratory analyses; some problems to look out for; safety; and
basic principles of sedimentation and flotation. You may wish
to refer to Chapters 16 and 17 which contain details of labora-
tory analyses and mathematics for further information.
-------
Sedimentation 109
treatment pgoe&£6 Function
peerff£ATM£//r
influent
emovss &>&r&,&t6sl ^aa/s/j^^
#££#/£ 7VAZ4A/0/?Z£, ae//*
Pos6/£/f 6/?///£>£fifzce 7Z>/&tA/r&aiv)
eSMOl/ES 6&/./0S
X/LIS PA7?/0&£A// BAarfe/A
6C(2E£N1
Fig. 5.1 Flow diagram of typical plant
-------
WASTEWATER FLOW
SLUDGE LINES
SUPERNATANT LINES —/—/\—/—/ / /-
SCREENING
GRIT
REMOVAL
SECONDARY
CLARIFICATION
(NO. 1)
PRIMARY
CLARIFICATION
(NO. 1)
BIOLOGICAL
OR
CHEMICAL
TREATMENT
FLOW
METER
PRE-AERATION
PRIMARY
CLARIFICATION
(NO. 2)
SECONDARY
CLARIFICATION
(NO. 2)
WASTE SLUDGE ^SLUDGE RETURN
ANAEROBIC
DIGESTER
(PRIMARY)
ANAEROBIC
DIGESTER
(SECONDARY)
SOLIDS
DEWATERING
L/—/—/—/—/—/—/-/-/^v—/-/-/—/-^7-/*/-/-/~/i
(D
St
3
(0
3
"D
5*
3
<0
CHLORINE
CONTACT
TO
RECEIVING
WATERS
DRY SOLIDS
FILTRATE OR CENTRATE RETURN
F/g. 5.2 Plan diagram of typical clarifiers in a wastewater
treatment plant
-------
SLUDGE COLLECTOR
DRIVE UNIT
NORMAL
WATER
LEVEL
SCUM BAFFLE
INFLUENT
CONTROL
GATE
EFFLUENT WEIR
SCUM TROUGH SCUM SKIMMER
TARGET BAFFLE
EFFLUENT TROUGH
(LAUNDER)
INFLUENT
ANGLE TRACK-
WEARING SHOE
CHAIN AND SCRAPER
MAIN SLUDGE COLLECTOR
SLUDGE
CROSS COLLECTOR
SPROCKET
CHAIN AND SCRAPER
SLUDGE
WITHDRAWAL
PIPE
SUMP
SLUDGE
PUMP
Fig. 5.3 Side-view section of a rectangular sedimentation basin
-------
112 Treatment Plants
TABLE 5.1 PURPOSE OF RECTANGULAR
SEDIMENTATION BASIN AND PARTS
Part
1. Influent Control Gate
2. Influent Channel or Pipe
3. Target Baffle or Deflector
Plate
4. Effluent Weir
5. Effluent Trough
(Launder)
6. Main Sludge Collector
7. Cross Collector
8. Sump
Purpose
Throttles or stops the flow to
the sedimentation basin or
clarifier.
Transports wastewater to the
clarifier.
Spreads the wastewater
evenly across the width of the
clarifier for even distribution
and prevents short-circuiting.
Insures equal flow over all
weirs. Designed for small sur-
face elevation (water level)
adjustments in the clarifier
provided the plate is designed
for vertical movement (up or
down).
Collects the settled waste-
water flowing over the weirs
and conveys it from the
sedimentation basin.
Drags settled solids (sludge)
to the sump. A continuous
chain with cross pieces
(flights or scrapers) attached.
Drags sludge to deep end of
sump for removal by pumping.
Also prevents bridging of
sludge in sump.
Receives settled sludge from
the floor of the sedimentation
basin. Stores sludge in suffi-
cient quantity to avoid fre-
quent (less than once per
hour) removal by pumping,
but of sufficient volume to
maintain sludge thickness
and to exclude water in the
sedimentation basin from
being pumped out during the
pumping cycle.
Part
9. Sludge Withdrawal
Pump
10. Scum Skimmer or Collec-
tor
11. Scum Trough
12. Scum Baffle
13. Sludge Collector Drive
14. Sprocket
15. Wearing Shoe
16. Angle Track
Purpose
Removes the sludge from the
sump (pit).
Skims or collects floating ma-
terial from the surface of the
wastewater and moves it to
the scum trough.
Receives the floating material
from the scum skimmer for
removal.
Extends above the water sur-
face and prevents the floating
material from reaching the
effluent trough.
Provides power which causes
the main and cross collector
units to move.
Supports chain, adjusts ten-
sion or forces the chain to
move. A wheel with teeth
around the outside that fit in
the chain link.
Prevents wear on the scraper
cross pieces. Usually a piece
of iron attached close to the
outer ends of the scrapers.
Provides a track on which the
main collector cross pieces
ride.
-------
EFFLUENT WEIR PLATE
SCUM TROUGH
EFFLUENT WEIR PLATE
/
DRIVE UNIT
As
mm
N
EFFLUENT
TROUGH
OTBSJ5SS
.w.v.v.w.v
SSMMS
r^. VERTICAL
|j DRIVE CAGE
illllllll
SLUDGE
COLLECTOR
MECHANISM
M»V
mmm
oy.v.v.v.v.v.v
BLADE AND SCRAPER
SQUEEGEES
INFLUENT
INFLUENT
CONTROL GATE
(NOT SHOWN)
SUMP
W
£
3
3
o
3
Fig. 5.4 Side-view section of a circular ciarifier with blades
and scraper squeegees
-------
114 Treatment Plants
TABLE 5.2 PURPOSE OF CIRCULAR CLARIFIER AND
PARTS
Part
1. Influent Control Gate
2. Influent Channel or Pipe
3. Influent Well
4. Effluent Weir
5. Effluent Trough (Laun-
der)
6. Scum Skimmer Arm
7. Scum Trough
8. Scum Pipe
9. Drive Unit
10. Vertical Drive Cage
11. Sludge Collector
Mechanism
12. Blades and Scraper
Squeegees
13. Sump
14. Sludge Withdrawal Pipe
Purpose
Throttles or stops the flow to
the ciarifier.
Transports wastewater to the
ciarifier.
Receives the flow from the in-
fluent pipe, reduces flow vel-
ocities and distributes flow
evenly across the upper por-
tion of the ciarifier contents. A
small circular compartment in
the top center of the ciarifier.
Insures equal flow over all
weirs. Designed for small sur-
face elevation (water level)
adjustments in the ciarifier,
provided the plate is designed
for vertical movement (up or
down).
Collects the settled wastewa-
ter flowing over the weirs and
conveys it from the ciarifier.
Skims or collects floating ma-
terial from the surface of the
wastewater and moves it to
the scum trough.
Receives the floating material
scraped from the surface by
the scum skimming arm.
Allows the collected scum to
flow from the skimmer box to
a scum tank or a pump.
Causes the collector to rotate.
A power unit which is con-
nected to the vertical drive
cage and which causes the
collector to rotate.
Transmits power from drive
unit to the sludge collector
mechanism.
Drags settled solids across
ciarifier bottom to a sludge
collection pit or sump. A
mechanism which rotates
around the bottom of the
ciarifier and consists of
squeegee-type scrapers.
Scrape sludge from bottom of
ciarifier to sump.
Collects the sludge before
withdrawal.
Removes the sludge from the
ciarifier. Usually connected to
a sludge pump.
-------
RAKE BLADE
SLUDGE WITHDRAWAL PIPES
RETURN SLUDGE
RAKE ARM
DIRECTION OF ROTATION
PARTIAL PLAN
* •» V .
J.l'Ls J', '¦
RETURN SLUDGE
RETURN SLUDGE WELL
/
I
I
INFLUENT
I" ¦ . . *¦
J ^ SLUDGE
EFFLUENT
SQUEEGEES OR
RAKE blADES
SECTIONAL ELEVATION
Fig. 5.5 Side-view section of a circular clarifier with riser
suction pipes
3
o
3
tt
O
3
in
-------
116 Treatment Plants
5.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
5.10 Start-Up Procedure
Before starting a new unit or one which has been out of
service for cleaning or repair, inspect the tank carefully as
outlined in this section. Now is a good time to become familiar
with the "internal workings" of the clarifier because they are
usually under water.
A. Circular Clarifiers
Check items:
1. Control gates for proper operation.
2. Clarifier tank for sand and debris.
3. Collector drive mechanism for lubrication, oil level, drive
alignment, and complete assembly.
4. Gaskets, gears, drive chain sprockets and drive motor for
proper installation and rotation.
5. Squeegee blades on the collector plows for proper distance
from the floor of the tank.
6. All other mechanical items below water line for proper in-
stallation and operation.
7. Tank sumps or hoppers and return lines for debris and
obstructions.
8. Tank structure for corrosion, cracks, and other indications
of structural failure.
If everything checks out properly, turn on the mechanism.
Let it make several revolutions while checking that the
squeegee does not travel high or low, missing the bottom or
scraping in some areas. The scraping action should control the
entire area from the outside wall to the sludge hopper. Also be
certain that the mechanism runs smoothly without jerks or
jumps. Improper movement may be caused by problems with
the drive unit, squeegees that have too much drag, or an un-
even clarifier floor. If the unit is water lubricated, be sure suffi-
cient water is in the tank to cover the center bearing.
If the unit is equipped with a stall alarm, test it to see if the
mechanism will stop when overloaded. With the unit running,
time the period it takes for the plows to make one complete
revolution around the tank and RECORD the time for later
reference.
Check and RECORD the amperage that the motor draws.
Let the unit operate for several hours. If no problems develop,
it should be okay.
Always be safety conscious, even during start-up.
1. If you are working down in the tank, wear a hard hat for
protection from falling objects.
2. Keep hands away from moving equipment.
3. When working on equipment, be sure to red tag and use a
lock-out device on start-stop switches and influent control
gates to prevent equipment from starting unexpectedly and
causing equipment damage and/or personal injury. If the
lock-out device has a key, keep the key in your pocket.
B. Rectangular Clarifiers
The tank hoppers, channels, control gates, weirs, bearings,
grease lines and drive alignment should be checked the same
as for the circular clarifiers. The sludge collectors are different
in rectangular clarifiers. Wooden crosspieces or FLIGHTS1 are
laid across the tank and each end is attached to an endless
chain along both sides of the tank. The chains and crosspieces
connected together as a unit are called the "collector
mechanism." The collector chains are driven by a connecting
shaft and sprockets that drag the crosspieces along rails im-
bedded in the floor of the tank and along each side just under
the surface of the water.
Each wooden flight is equipped with metal wearing shoes to
ride the rails. A metal wearing shoe usually is a flat metal plate
attached to the end of the wooden flight to prevent excessive
wear on the wood portion. Plastic wearing shoes may be used
instead of metal ones.
Check to insure that the flights are straight across the tank,
and that the chain on one side is not one or two links longer or
shorter than the chain on the opposite side. If this occurs, the
wooden flights will run at an angle across the tank. This either
will cause sludge to pile higher on the trailing side or cause the
flights to hang up with resultant severe damage to the flights.
1Flights. Scraper boards, made from redwood or other rot-resistant woods or plastic, used to collect and move settled sludge or floating
scum.
-------
Sedimentation 117
Caution should be exercised before starting the sludge col-
lectors in an empty clarifier if they have not been operational
for several weeks. The wearing shoes on the flights may have
started rusting where they are sitting on the rails. A good prac-
tice is to lift each individual flight off the rail to be certain it is
free and to apply a light grease or SAE 90 gear oil to the shoe
and rail. If these precautions are not taken before the collector
is turned on, the flight (wearing) shoes could stick to the rails
and the whole collector system could be pulled down to the
floor of the tank. Before the collectors are started in a new tank,
each flight should be checked for a clearance of one to two
inches (2.5 to 5 cm) between the wall and the end of the flight.
If flights are too long, they may rub the tank wall and break the
flight. Do not run a sludge collector very long in an empty tank if
the lower shaft bearings of the collector mechanism depend on
water rather than oil or grease for lubrication.
Safety precautions for the start-up of rectangular cfarifiers
are similar to those for circular clarifiers.
5.11 Daily Operation and Maintenance
During normal operations, you should schedule the following
daily activities:
1. INSPECTION. Make several daily inspections with a stop,
look, listen, and think routine.
2. CLEANUP. Using water under pressure, wash off accumu-
lations of solid particles, grease, slime, and other material
from walkways, handrails, and all other exposed parts of
the structure and equipment.
3. LUBRICATION. Grease all moving equipment according to
manufacturer's specifications and check oil levels in motors
where appropriate.
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE. Follow manufacturer's spe-
cifications.
5. FLIGHTS. Examine bolts for looseness, corrosion, and ex-
cessive wear on those parts that can be inspected above
the water line.
6. CHAIN AND SPROCKET. Check for wear because 0.05
inch (1.3 mm) wear on each of 240 link pins will cause
about one foot (0.3 m) of extra slack.
7. RECORD-KEEPING. Write in your pocket notebook any
unusual observations and transfer these notes to the plant
record sheet (typical sheet is shown in the Appendix).
8. SAMPLING AND LABORATORY ANALYSIS. Details are in
the next section (5.2).
9. SLUDGE AND SCUM PUMPING. See Section 5.3.
5.12 Shutdown Procedure
Annually during periods of low flow, each clarifier should be
shut down for inspection, routine maintenance and any neces-
sary repairs. Even though the clarifier and all equipment are
wotttng properly, an annual inspection helps to prevent seri-
ous problems and failures in the future when harmful conse-
quences can result.
1. Divert the flow to other clarifiers and close the influent and
effluent control gates of the clarifier being shut down.
2. Pump all remaining sludge to digester or to solids-handling
system.
3. Dewater clarifier by draining remaining wastewater to
headworks or pumping remaining wastewater to other
clarifiers.
4. Hose down walls, floor and equipment inside clarifier while
draining clarifier.
5. Inspect clarifier in accordance with Section 5.10, Start-Up
Procedures (page 116).
6. Repair or replace all broken or defective equipment.
7. Repaint metal surfaces that have lost their protective coat-
ing or are showing signs of corrosion.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 148.
5.0A What is the main difference between the effluent from
primary and secondary clarifiers?
5.0B What is the main difference between the sludge from
primary and secondary clarifiers?
5.1 A List the significant items to check before start-up of a
circular clarifier.
5.1 B What happens when the crosspieces in a rectangular
clarifier are not straight across the tank?
5.1C What safety precautions should be taken during start-
up of a clarifier?
5.13 Operational Strategy
The purpose of a sedimentation tank or clarifier is to remove
settleable and floatable solids by sedimentation and flotation.
The factor most often reported as influencing clarifier perform-
ance is the flow into the plant. Both the SURFACE LOADING2
and DETENTION TIME3 are directly related to flow (see Sec-
tion 5.61, "Primary Clarifiers," page 126). In most plants the
surface loading and detention time vary widely throughout the
day due to the hourly changes in plant inflow resulting from the
activities of the people and industries in the community. In
spite of these great fluctuations, most clarifiers produce fairly
consistent removals of BOD and suspended solids.
Most clarifiers that do not produce an acceptable effluent
(see page 121) usually fail due to operator errors or equip-
2 Surface Loading. Surface loading is calculated by dividing the flow into a sedimentation tank or a clarifier by the surface area of the unit.
Surface Loading, gpd/sq ft = Flow, gpd
Surface Area, sq ft
3 Detention Time. The time required to fill a tank at a given flow or the theoretical time required for a given flow of wastewater to pass through
a tank.
-------
118 Treatment Plants
ment failures. The operator's job is very simple. Be sure that
accumulated settled solids are removed from the bottom of the
clarifier before SEPTICITY4 and GASIFICATION5 take place.
Also be sure that surface floatables (oil and grease) are con-
tinuously or regularly skimmed and removed from the water
surface to prevent floatables from reaching downstream sec-
ondary and disinfection processes.
/ Equipment or process failures caused by operator errors
include:
1. Insufficient frequency or time for removing sludge;
2. Poor equipment maintenance and housekeeping; and
3. Insufficient knowledge of equipment and/or treatment pro-
cess as related to:
a. Laboratory analyses,
b. Clarifier loadings,
1) Flows, MGD
2) Detention time, hr
3) Surface area, gpd/sq ft
4) Weir overflow, gpd/ft
5) Solids, lbs solids/day/sq ft (secondary clarifiers)
6) Solids balance, lbs/day in = lbs/day out
c. Inability to recognize a mechanical-electrical problem,
and
d. Not restarting a drive mechanism that tripped out during
a momentary power failure, such as one caused by a
thunderstorm.
~ T"' The best operational strategy for a clarifier is to develop and
implement a good preventive maintenance program, to closely
monitor operating conditions, and to respond to any lab results
which indicate that problems are developing (see Section 5.24,
"Response to Poor Clarifier Performance" on page 122). Any
other clarifier problems usually result from abnormal condi-
tions.
In large treatment plants with four or more clarifiers, plant
performance may be improved by diverting flows to more or
fewer clarifiers under certain circumstances. For example, dur-
ing low flow periods from midnight until 6:00 am fewer clarifiers
may be needed on the process flow line. To determine the
number of clarifiers that should be on line, try not to allow
detention times less than half an hour or longer than three
hours to last longer than four to six hours without placing more
or fewer clarifiers on line. Try to prevent detention times in
primary clarifiers from becoming too long in order to keep the
wastewater that is flowing to aerobic biological treatment pro-
cesses fresh. To place an additional clarifier on line, or to take
one off line, use the following procedures:
1. When placing a clarifier on line, open the inlet gate to the
clarifier.
2. Operate the sludge collector, skimmer and pumps accord-
ing to normal daily operating procedures.
3. When taking a clarifier off line, divert the wastewater being
treated to other clarifiers by closing the clarifier inlet gate.
4. Collect the sludge on the bottom of the clarifier and pump
the sludge from the hopper if it is thick enough to pump.
Thickness of the sludge can be determined by the sound of
the sludge pump, the use of thickness measuring sensors,
or the observation of sludge through a sight glass.
5. The skimmer and sludge collector mechanism may be left
on or turned off depending on the conditions of tank con-
tents with regard to sludge left in the clarifier or scum on the
water surface.
These procedures assume a clarifier being placed on line
has been off line for less than two days. Also when a clarifier is
taken off line, the assumption is made that the clarifier will be
back on line within two days. Usually the number of secondary
clarifiers on line remains constant on a daily or weekly basis;
however, the same procedures apply if necessary. The
number of secondary clarifiers on line may change with in-
creases or decreases in seasonal flows or the condition of the
solids in the secondary system. During extremely cold weather
be careful that clarifiers which are not covered do not freeze
when taken off the line. You may be better off leaving them on
the line so they won't freeze during severe freezing conditions.
Operational strategies for secondary clarifiers following
chemical and biological treatment processes are discussed in
the following chapters related specifically to these processes.
Also see Section 5.62, "Secondary Clarifiers," page 130.
5.14 Abnormal Conditions
Abnormal conditions influencing clarifier performance con-
sist of:
1. TOXIC6 wastes from industrial spills or dumps (also see
Section 5.152, "Toxic Waste Discharge"),
2. Storm flows and hydraulic overloads, and
3. Septicity from collection system problems.
There is not much an operator can do in terms of clarifier
operation to improve or maintain clarifier performance under
these conditions. If any of these events occurs, corrective ac-
tion should be taken. If a toxic waste dump is suspected or
identified as the cause of a plant upset, immediate action
should be taken to identify the source and prevent future
dumps. A special step to minimize reduction in clarifier per-
formance is the development and enforcement of a sewer-use
ordinance. Other helpful activities include the installation of
monitoring devices, instrumentation, control structures and
chemical feed systems in order to provide the operator with the
necessary tools to maintain clarifier performance.
4 Septicity (sep-TIS-it-tee). Septicity is the condition in which organic matter decomposes to form foul-smelling products associated with the
absence of free oxygen. If severe, the wastewater turns black, gives off foul odors, contains little or no dissolved oxygen and creates a heavy
oxygen demand.
5 Gasification (GAS-i-fi-KA Y-shun). The conversion of soluble and suspended organic materials Into gas during anaerobic decomposition. In
clarifiers the resulting gas bubbles can become attached to the settled sludge and cause large clumps of sludge to rise and float on the
wstor sutfscG
6 Toxic (TOX-Ick). Poisonous. A condition which may exist in wastes and will Inhibit or destroy the growth or function of certain organisms.
-------
Sedimentation 119
Shock loads from toxic wastes are best treated or controlled
(after they are identified) by the addition of proper chemicals
such as coagulants or chlorine at the plant headworks or at the
preliminary treatment area. Some adjustments, such as in-
creased recirculation rates with trickling filters to dilute the toxic
wastes, may be successful in the secondary treatment pro-
cesses.
In activated sludge plants, the impact of toxic wastes may be
reduced if higher aeration rates will strip (drive out) the toxi-
cants out of the mixed liquor. Usually this procedure is ineffec-
tive because the toxic waste has already passed through the
plant before its impact is discovered. Reduction of the solids-
wasting rate or stop wasting completely may help if some resis-
tant bacteria have survived. If possible, change mode of opera-
tion to contact stabilization or step aeration, thereby exposing
only a small portion of the organism population to the toxic
waste. If all the bacteria have been destroyed or if the toxicant
is bound in the sludge, get rid of the solids. Do not dispose of
toxic solids in a digester. They may be disposed of in an ap-
proved sanitary landfill.
SZATE
If storm flow infiltration is a frequent problem, the sealing of
sanitary sewers and/or the use of a flow equalization basin
may improve the quality of clarifier effluent. There may not be
much that can be done to prevent the development of septic
wastewater in a collection system. Chemical treatment with
chlorine or hydrogen peroxide added at a pump station may
improve the condition of septic wastewater and protect struc-
tures from corrosion damages.
5.15 Troubleshooting
This section iists items that could fail in a circular or rectan-
gular clarifier, how to detect the failure, the adverse effects of
the failure, and how to remedy and prevent the failure. Also
see Section 5.24, "Response to Poor Clarifier Performance,"
page 122.
-------
120 Treatment Plants
5.150 Sludge Collector Failure
Detection of Failure
1. Sludge pump will pump very thin (wat-
ery) sludge indefinitely because the col-
lector is not scraping the sludge to the
pump suction.
2. Sludge is rising to the surface because it
has been held in the tank too long and
gasification has occurred.
3. Equipment stalls, stops, is noisy, or bro-
ken parts are observed.
Adverse Effects of Failure
1. Sludge builds up in clarifier. After
equipment is in operation, the sludge
may overload the digester. Watery
sludge may wash organisms and alkalin-
ity from digester.
2. Sludge may cause odors due to severe
septic conditions.
3. Solids and soluble organics may carry
over and overload the secondary treat-
ment system.
Remedies
Circular tank
1. Restart equipment and inspect
mechanism for rotation, stall alarm, and
broken shear pin.
Rectangular tank
2. Inspect cross-collector drive, including
shear pins and motor.
3. Inspect main collector drive, including
shear pins, motor, drive chain, main
chain and flights.
Both types of tanks
4. Take tank out of operation and place a
standby clarifier in operation if available.
5. Identify failure and repair as soon as
possible.
6. Reduce the flow if there is storage space
in the collection system and make re-
pairs immediately.
Preventive Measures
1. Check loadings and determine why
mechanism stalled.
2. Conduct regular inspections.
3. Schedule and perform preventive main-
tenance.
5.151 Sludge Pump Failure
Detection of Failure
1. Pump does not pump. Failure may be
due to burned out motor or electrical
problem.
2. Sludge is rising to the surface because it
has not been pumped from the tank and
gasification has occurred.
Adverse Effects of Failure
1. Sludge builds up in clarifier. After
equipment is in operation, the sludge
may overload the digester.
2. Sludge may cause odors due to severe
septic conditions.
3. Sludge build up may cause solid parti-
cles to pass over the weirs and upset
other processes.
4. Disruption of regular solids feedings or
loadings to digester.
Remedies
1. Inspect pump for failure by checking ro-
tation, ball check valves and electrical
circuits.
2. Examine check valves on pipes.
3. Identify failure and repair.
4. If available, operate standby pump until
repairs are completed.
Preventive Measures
1. Conduct regular inspections.
2. Schedule and perform preventive main-
tenance.
5.152 Toxic Waste Discharge
Detection of Toxic Discharge
1. Color of incoming wastewater.
2. High or low pH.
3. Sludge BULKING.7
4. Odors.
Adverse Effects of Toxic Discharge
1. Organisms involved in wastewater and
waste sludge processing or living in the
receiving waters could be killed.
2. Possible violation of discharge and/or
reuse requirements.
Remedies
1. If the sludge contains a high level of tox-
icity, one or more of several procedures
may be necessary.
a. SLOWLY pump sludge to digester.
b. Pump sludge (dewatered if possible)
to tank truck and dispose of sludge in
an approved sanitary landfill.
c. Neutralize toxic waste if possible.
Preventive Measures
1. Monitor plant influent. Testing of pH will
reveal high or low levels.
2. Monitor industrial waste discharges.
3. Enforce sewer-use ordinances.
7 Bulking (BULK-ing). Clouds of billowing sludge that occur throughout secondary clariflers and sludge thickeners when the sludge
becomes too light and will not settle properly.
-------
Sedimentation 121
5.2 SAMPLING AND LABORATORY ANALYSIS
5.20 Need for Sampling and Analysis
Proper analysis of representative samples is the only con-
clusive method of measuring the efficiency of clarifiers. Tests
may be conducted at the plant site where the sample is col-
lected or in the laboratory. The tests performed depend on the
downstream treatment processes.
Detailed procedures for performing control tests on primary
treatment and sedimentation processes are outlined in Chap-
ter 16, "Laboratory Procedures and Chemistry." The fre-
quency of testing and the expected ranges will vary from plant
to plant. Strength of the wastewater, freshness, characteristics
of the water supply, weather, and industrial wastes will all
serve to affect the "common" range of the various test results.
the purpose is to collect samples which represent the true
nature of the wastewater or stream being sampled. The
amount of solids, BOD, bacteria, and pH and temperature
levels will probably vary throughout the day, week, and year.
You must determine these variations in order to understand
how well your clarifier is doing its job. Details on laboratory
analysis and data recording are contained in Chapter 16,
"Laboratory Procedures and Chemistry."
Test results obtained from collected samples may determine
the number of clarifier units that should be in operation in order
to obtain the best degree of treatment. Plants with more than
one clarifier can have too many as well as not enough clarifiers
in operation.
Common Range For
Tests
Frequency
Location
Primary Clarifiers
1. Dissolved
Oxygen (DO)
Daily
Effluent
0 - 2 mgIL
2. Settleable
Solids
Daily
Influent
Effluent
5 -15 ml IL
0.3 - 5 ml IL
3. pH
Daily
Influent
Effluent
6.5 - 8.0*
6.5 - 8.0*
4. Temperature
Daily
Influent
50 - 85°F*
10 - 30°C*
5. BOD
Weekly
(Minimum)
Influent
Effluent
150 - 400 mgIL
50 - 150 mgIL
6. Suspended
Solids
Weekly
(Minimum)
Influent
Effluent
150 - 400 mg//.**
50 - 150 mg/L**
Where discharge requirements permit primary treatment only, items
7 and 8 may be appropriate.
7. Chlorine
Residual
(if needed)
Daily
Plant
Effluent
0.5 - 3.0 mgIL
Depends on effluent
requirement
8. Coliform
Group
Bacteria
(if needed)
Weekly
Effluent
500,000 - 100,000,000
per 100 ml
Depends on effluent
requirement
* Depends on region, water supply and discharges to the collection
system.
** Also may be recorded as packed volume from centrifuge test.
5.21 Sampling
Samples of the influent to the clarifier and the effluent from it
will give you information on the clarifier efficiency as indicated
by the test results listed in Section 5.20. As with all sampling,
~1
5.22 Calculation of Clarifier Efficiency
To calculate the efficiency of any wastewater treatment pro-
cess, you need to collect samples of the influent and the
effluent of the process, preferably COMPOSITE SAMPLES8
for a 24-hour period. Next, measure the particular water quality
indicators (for example, BOD, suspended solids) you are inter-
ested in and calculate the treatment efficiency. Calculations of
treatment efficiency are for process control purposes. Your
main concern must be the quality of the plant effluent, regard-
less of percent of wastes removed.
* Composite (Proportional) Sample (com-POZ-lt). A composite sample Is a collection of individual samples obtained at regular intervals, usually
every one or two hours during a 24-hour time span. Each Individual sample Is combined with the others in proportion to the flow when the
sample was collected. The resulting mixture (composite sample) forms a representative sample and Is analyzed to determine the average
conditions during the sampling period.
-------
122 Treatment Plants
EXAMPLE 1
The influent BOD to a primary clarifier is 200 mgIL, and the
effluent BOD is 140 mgIL. What is the efficiency of the primary
clarifier in removing BOD?
Formula
Efficiency, %
(In - Out) (100%)
In
= (20° m9^- ' 140 m9^-) (100%)
200 mgIL
= (60 mgIL) (i0o%)
200 mgIL
= (.30) (100%)
= 30% BOD Removal
NOTE: The same formula is used for calculating the removal
efficiency by a clarifier for all the water quality indicators
(parameters) listed below in Section 5.23.
5.23 Typical Clarifier Efficiencies
Following is a list of some typical percentages for primary
clarifier efficiencies:
Water
Quality
Indicator
Settleable solids
Suspended solids
Total solids
Biochemical oxygen demand
Bacteria
Expected
Removal
Efficiency
90% to 99%
40% to 60%
10% to 15%
20% to 50%
25% to 75%
pH generally will not be affected significantly by a clarifier. You
can expect wastewater to have a pH of about 6.5 to 8.0, de-
pending on the region, water supply and wastes discharged
into the collection system.
Clarifier efficiencies are affected by many factors, including:
1. Types of solids in the wastewater, especially if there is a
significant amount of industrial wastes.
2. Age (time in collection system) of wastewater when it
reaches the plant. Older wastewater becomes stale or sep-
tic; solids do not settle properly because gas bubbles cling
on the particles and tend to hold them in suspension.
3. Rate of wastewater flow as compared to design flow. This is
called the "hydraulic loading."
4. Mechanical conditions and cleanliness of clarifier.
5. Proper sludge withdrawal. If sludge is allowed to remain in
the tank, it tends to gasify and the entire sludge blanket
(depth) may rise to water surface of clarifier.
6. Suspended solids, which are returned to the primary
clarifiers from other treatment processes, may not settle
completely. Sources of these solids include waste activated
sludge, digester supernatant and sludge dewatering
facilities (centrate from centrifuges and filtrate from filters).
5.24 Response to Poor Clarifier Performance
If laboratory analysis or visual inspection indicates that a
clarifier is not performing properly, the source of the problem
must be identified and corrective action taken. Listed below are
clarifier problems with related items to be checked to identify
the source of the problem. (Also see Section 5.15
"Troubleshooting.")
Check Items (pages 122 and 123)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
2.3*, 2.4*, 2.5*
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 2.7*, 2.8*
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
3, 2.1', 2.2*. 2.3*
2.6*
Problem
1. Floating chunks of sludge
2. Large amounts of floating
scum
3. Loss of solids over effluent
weirs
4. Low removal efficiencies
5. Low pH plus odors
6. Deep sludge blanket, but
pumping thin sludge
7. Sludge collector mechanism
jerks or jumps
8. Sludge collector mechanism
will not operate. Drive motor
thermal overloads, or overload
protective switches keep trip-
ping.
* Check Item 2 is divided into two parts, (a) circular clarifier and (b)
rectangular clarifier. If you have a floating scum problem (Problem
2 above), check under 2. COLLECTOR MECHANISM (page 123)
either section (a) circular or (b) rectangular items 3, 4, and 5, de-
pending on the type of clarifier in your plant.
CHECK ITEMS
1. SLUDGE PUMP9
a. PISTON PUMPS
1. Ball-check seating
2. Shear pin
3. Packing adjustment
4. Drive belts
5. High pressure switch
6. Pumping time
b. POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT SCRU (SCREW) PUMPS
1. Pump gas bound
2. Rotor plugged
3. Drive belt
4. Packing adjustment
5. Pumping time
c. CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
1. Pump gas bound
2. Packing adjustment
3. Impeller plugged
4. Pumping time
d. AIR INJECTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Air supply
Foot valves
Slide valves
Electrodes
Pumping time
• For more information on pumps, see Chapter 15, "Maintenance."
-------
Sedimentation 123
2. COLLECTOR MECHANISM
a. CIRCULAR CLARIFIER
1. Drive motor
2. Overload switch
3. Skimmer dump arm
(a) operation
(b) rubber squeegee
4. Scum trough
5. Scum box
b. RECTANGULAR CLARIFIER
1. Drive motor
2. Clutch and drive gear
3. Flights
4. Scum trough
5. Skimmer operation
6. Cross collector
7. Inlet line or slot
8. Target baffle
3. PIPES AND SLUDGE SUMP
Sometimes pipes or sumps may be cleaned by backflush-
ing.
4. QUALITY OF SUPERNATANT RETURN FROM DIGES-
TER
5. INFLUENT
a. CHANGE IN COMPOSITION OR TEMPERATURE
b. CHANGE IN FLOW RATE
An increase in flow rate can cause hydraulic overload.
This can be determined by calculating the detention
time, weir overflow rate, and surface loading rate (Sec-
tion 5.61). If a tank is hydraulically underloaded,
effluent could be recirculated back to the primary
clarifier to reduce the length of detention time.
6. JERKING, JUMPING, OR STALLED COLLECTOR
MECHANISM
a. SLUDGE BLANKET TOO DEEP
Pump out sludge if mechanism is all right.
b. DRIVE UNIT MAY HAVE BAD SPROCKET OR DE-
FECTIVE CHAIN LINK
c. BROKEN FLIGHT, OR A ROCK OR STICK JAMMED
BETWEEN FLIGHT OR SQUEEGEE BLADE AND
FLOOR OF TANK
If items (b) or (c) occur, or mechanism won't operate prop-
erly, tank must be dewatered. Never attempt to back up or
help pull a collector mechanism because severe equipment
damage will result.
Your corrective action will depend on the source of the prob-
lem and the facilities available in your plant.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 149.
5.2A List five basic laboratory measurements used to deter-
mine clarifier efficiency.
5.2B About what percentage of settleable solids should you
expect to be removed by your clarifier?
5.2C At what two points should samples be collected for
measuring clarifier efficiency?
5.2D What is the suspended solids efficiency of a primary
clarifier if the influent concentration is 300 mg/L and the
effluent is 120 mg/L?
5.3 SLUDGE AND SCUM PUMPING
The particles which settle to the floor of the clarifier are
called "sludge." The accumulated sludge should be removed
frequently. This is accomplished by mechanical cleaning de-
vices and pumps in most tanks. (See Figures 5.3, 5.4 and 5.5)
Mechanically cleaned tanks need not be shut down for clean-
ing. SEPTIC CONDITIONS may develop rapidly in primary
clarifiers if sludge is not removed at regular intervals. The
proper interval is dependent on many conditions and may vary
from thirty minutes to eight hours, and as much as twenty-four
hours in a few instances. Experience will dictate the proper
frequency of removal. Sludge septicity can be recognized
when SLUDGE GASIFICATION10 causes large clumps of
sludge to float on the water surface. Septic sludge is generally
very odorous and acid (has a low pH).
As thick a sludge as possible should be pumped from the
clarifier sump with the least amount of water. The amount of
sludge solids in the water affects the volume of sludge pumped
and the digester operation. A good, thick primary sludge will
contain from 4.0 to 8.0 percent dry solids as indicated by the
Total Solids Test in the laboratory. Conditions which may affect
sludge concentration are the specific gravity, size and shape of
the particles, temperature of wastewater, and turbulence in the
tank.
Withdrawal (pumping) rates should be slow in order to pre-
vent pulling too much water with the sludge. While the sludge
is being pumped, take samples frequently and examine them
visually for excess water. If the samples show a "thin" sludge,
it is time to stop pumping. Practice learning to recognize the
differences between thin or concentrated sludges. There are
several methods for determining "thick" or "thin" sludge with-
out a laboratory analysis:
r
1° Sludge Gasification. A process In which soluble and suspended organic matter are converted Into gas by anaerobic decomposition. The
resulting gas bubbles can become attached to the settled sludge and cause large clumps of sludge to rise and float on the water surface.
-------
124 Treatment Plants
1. Sound of the sludge pump. The sludge pump will usually
have a different sound when the sludge is thick than when it
is thin.
2. Pressure gage readings. Pressure will be higher on the
discharge side of the pump when sludge is thick.
3. Sludge density gage readings.
4. Visual observation of a small quantity (gallon or less).
5. Watch sludge being pumped through a sight glass in the
sludge line.
When you learn to use the indicators listed above, you
should compare them frequently with lab tests. The laboratory
Total Solids Test is the only accurate method for determining
exact density. However, this analytical procedure is too slow
for controlling a routine pumping operation. Many operators
use the centrifuge test (see Chapter 16, "Laboratory Proce-
dures and Chemistry") to obtain quick results.
Floating material (scum) may leave the clarifier in the
effluent unless a method has been provided for holding it back.
To collect scum, a baffle is generally provided at some location
in the tank. Primary clarifiers often have a scum collection area
where the scum is skimmed off by some mechanical method,
usually a skimming arm or a paddle wheel. If mechanical
methods are not provided, use hand tools such as a skimming
dipper attached to a broom handle.
Frequently check the scum trough to be sure it is working
properly. Clean the box with a brush and hot water. Scum may
be disposed of by burning or burial.
See Chapter 15, Maintenance, Section 15.3 for details on
how to unplug pipes and pumps.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 149.
5.3A How often should sludge be removed from a clarifier?
5.3B How can you tell when to stop pumping sludge?
5.3C How can floating material (scum) be kept from the
clarifier effluent?
5.4 GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Following are some hints to help you keep your clarifiers
operating properly:
1. Maintain a record-and-file system for future reference. This
should contain sheets to write down a description and date
for all repairs and regular maintenance activities such as
lubrication. Other items to be kept in the file are operating
instruction manuals; brochures; and names, addresses,
and telephone numbers of manufacturer's representatives.
2. ALWAYS lubricate equipment at the intervals recom-
mended by the manufacturer and use the PROPER lubri-
cants (follow manufacturer's recommendations). Be sure
that you do not over-lubricate.
3. Clean all equipment and structures regularly. Remove float-
ing material and algae from inlet baffles and effluent weirs
and launders. Keeping scum removal equipment clean and
properly adjusted will help prevent odors.
4. Inspect and correct (if possible) all peculiar noises, leaks,
pressure and vacuum gage irregularities, belts, electrical
systems, and safety devices.
5. When a sedimentation tank must be drained for inspection
or repairs, keep wooden flights moist by periodic sprinkling
with a hose to prevent cracking and warping.
6. Keep the weirs level. This helps prevent short-circuiting
which reduces the efficiency of the clarifier.
5.5 SAFETY
1. GASES
Any enclosed area, such as a wet well for a pump, may
have poisonous, asphyxiating, or explosive gases accumu-
lated in it if ventilation is not proper. The most common of
these gases are:
a. Hydrogen Sulfide (HjS). Causes a "rotten egg" odor. It
readily combines with oxygen to form sulfuric acid
which will dissolve concrete. If you breathe too much
H2S, it will cause an acid condition in the lungs and
paralyze your respiratory center. In gaseous form, it
can be flammable and explosive when mixed with the
proper amount of air (oxygen).
b. Chlorine (Cl2). Very irritating to eyes, mouth, and nose.
Causes death by suffocation (asphyxiation) and by
formation of acid in the lungs. Chlorine is extremely
dangerous (toxic). The proper type of breathing equip-
ment (self-contained oxygen) should be readily avail-
able when working with chlorine.
c. Carbon Dioxide (CO,). Odorless, tasteless. This can
cause asphyxiation by displacing oxygen in an en-
closed, poorly ventilated area.
d. Carbon Monoxide (CO). Colorless, odorless, non-
irritating, flammable, explosive. Look out for carbon
monoxide around gas engines or leaky gas systems in
poorly ventilated places.
e. Gasoline and other petroleum products. May cause
fires or explosions, or displace oxygen and asphyxiate
you.
f. Methane (CHJ. Explosive, odorless, and may cause
asphyxiation.
-------
Sed (mentation 125
For a detailed discussion
of the hazards and safety
precautions when danger-
ous gases may be present,
refer to Chapter 14, "Plant
Safety and Good House-
keeping." The NEW YORK
MANUAL, pages 174 and
175, Table 10, "Common
Dangerous Gases Encoun-
tered in Sewers and at
Sewage Treatment
Plants," contains informa-
tion on methods of testing
for gases. Contact your
local OSHA11 office for ap-
proved procedures and
equipment.
2. FALLS
Avoid falls by:
a. Cleaning up oil and grease slicks on walkways
PROMPTLY.
b. WALKING, NOT RUNNING, when near open tanks.
c. Avoid clutter. Pick up and store hoses, ropes, cables,
tools, buckets, and lumber.
d. Not sitting on, climbing through, or hanging over guard-
rails or handrails.
e. Providing gratings, deck covers, or safety chains on or
around openings to pits below floor level.
3. DROWNING
To prevent drowning:
a. Put handrails and proper walkways by all open tanks.
b. Cover open pits with gratings and deck plates.
c. Have life preservers, life lines, or inner tubes handy to
throw to anyone who may fall in. Appropriate equip-
ment should be worn when necessary.
d. Use the buddy system when working around or across
a water surface. (Example: Skimming scum manually.)
STRAINS AND OVEREXERTION
Use proper tools or equipment:
a. To move stuck or reluctant valves.
b. To lift heavy objects.
SAteTY
5. ELECTRICAL SHOCK
a. Do not use water for cleaning electrical panels, electric
motors, or other electrical equipment.
b. Use rubber floor mats in front of electrical panels.
c. Do not work on electrical equipment unless you are a
qualified electrician and authorized to do so.
on
SEDIMENTATION AND FLOTATION
Please answer the discussion and review questions before
continuing with Lesson 2.
11 OSHA. The Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA) is a law designed to protect the health and safety of
industrial workers and treatment plant operators. It regulates the design, construction, operation and maintenance of industrial plants and
wastewater treatment plants. The act does not apply directly to municipalities at present (1980), EXCEPT in those states that have approved
plans and have asserted jurisdiction under Section 18 of the OSHA Act. However, wastewater treatment plants have come under stricter
regulation in all phases of activity as a result of OSHA standards.
-------
126 Treatment Plants
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
(Lesson 1 of 3 Lessons)
Chapter 5. SEDIMENTATION AND FLOTATION
At the end of each lesson in this chapter, you will find some
discussion and review questions that you should work before
continuing. The purpose of these questions is to indicate to you
how well you understand the material in this section.
1. What is the function of a primary clarifier?
2. What items should be checked before starting a new
clarifier or one which has been out of service for cleaning or
repair?
3. Calculate the efficiency of a clarifier removing BOD if the
influent BOD is 260 mg/L and the effluent is 155 mg/L.
Show your work.
4. What would you do if the solids- and BOD-removal efficien-
cies of a primary clarifier suddenly dropped and the effluent
appeared to contain more solids than usual?
5. What safety precautions should you take to avoid accidents
when working around a treatment plant? List five that you
consider most important.
6. How often should sludge be pumped from a primary
clarifier?
7. What items should be inspected when a clarifier is taken out
of service?
8. How would you dispose of sludge in a primary clarifier con-
taining a toxic waste?'
CHAPTER 5. SEDIMENTATION AND FLOTATION
(Lesson 2 of 3 Lessons)
5.6 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
5.60 Types of Units
Sedimentation and flotation units are designed to remove
physically those solids which will settle easily to the bottom or
float easily to the top. Sedimentation is usually the principal
basis of design in such units and will be discussed in more
detail in this section. Flotation of fats, oils, hair, and other light
material also is very important to protect the aesthetics of re-
ceiving waters.
The sedimentation and flotation units commonly found are:
1. Primary clarifiers
2. Secondary clarifiers
3. Combined sedimentation - digestion units
4. Flotation units
5. Imhoff tanks
This section will describe each unit individually as it relates
to another process or as a process by itself.
5.61 Primary Clarifiers
The most important function of the primary clarifier is to re-
move as much settleable and floatable material as possible.
Removal of organic settleable solids is very important because
they cause a high demand for oxygen (BOD) in receiving wa-
ters or subsequent biological treatment units in the treatment
plant.
Many factors influence the design of clarifiers. Settling
characteristics of suspended particles in water are probably
the most important considerations. The design engineer must
consider the speed at which particles will settle in order to
determine the correct dimensions for the tank. Rapid move-
ment of water (velocity) will hold most particles in suspension
and carry them along until the velocity of water is slowed suffi-
ciently for the particles to settle. The rate of downward travel
(settling) of a particle is dependent on the weight of the particle
in relation to the weight of an equal volume of water (SPECIFIC
GRAVITY12), the particle size and shape, and the temperature
of the liquid. Organic settleable solids are seldom more than 1-
to 5-percent heavier than water; therefore, their settling rates
are slow.
If the horizontal velocity of water is slowed to a rate of 1.0 to
2.0 feet of travel per minute (grit channel velocities were
around 1 ft/sec), most particles with a specific gravity of 1.05
(5% more than water) will settle to the bottom of the container.
Specific gravity of water is 1.000 at 4.0 degrees Celsius (for-
mally Centigrade)or 39°F; it weighs 8.34 lbs per gallon.
Wastewater solids with a specific gravity of 1.05 will weigh 8.76
lbs per gallon (1.05 times 8.34 lbs equals 8.76 lbs per gallon).
The relationship of the particle settling rate to liquid velocity
may be explained very simply by use of a sketch (Fig. 5.6).
VERT ICflL
SETTLING RATE <*•
) fT C MIN OR
10 H CO IK IN
LENGTH • 200 FT
HORIZONTAL FLOI OF IATER-
?00 FT iOO MIN
DIRECTION OF
FLOI i? FT MIN)
I I)
?0
30
40 bO 60
TIME IN MINUTES
80 90
100
Fig. 5.6 Path of settling particle
Suppose the liquid velocity is horizontal at the rate of 2.0 feet
per minute and the tank is 200 feet long. It will take 100 min-
utes (200 ft divided by 2.0 ft/min) to travel through the tank. If
the particle, during its diagonal course of travel, settles verti-
12 Specific Gravity. Weight of a particle or substance in relation to the weight of water. Water has a specific gravity of 1.000 at 4°C (or 39°F).
Wastewater particles may have a specific gravity of 0.5 to 2.5. If the specific gravity of a particle is less than 1.0 it will tend to float. If it in
greater than 1.0, it will tend to sink. Most organic sludges have a specific gravity between 1.01 and 1.05.
-------
Sedimentation 127
cally toward the bottom of the tank at a rate of 1.0 foot in 6
minutes, it will rest on the floor of the tank in 60 minutes if the
tank is 10 feet deep. If the particle settles at the rate of 10 feet
in 60 minutes, it should settle in the first 60 percent portion of
the tank because the liquid surrounding it requires 100 minutes
to flow through the tank.
There are many factors which will influence settling charac-
teristics in a particular clarifier. A few of the more common
ones are temperature, short circuits, detention time, weir over-
flow rate, surface loading rate, and solids loading. These fac-
tors are discussed in the following paragraphs.
HIGH VELOCITY AREA
POOR SETTLING _
LOW VELOCITY AREA
SEPTIC CONDITIONS AND DOORS
Top View Looking Down
TEMPERATURE. Water expands as temperature increases
(above 4°C) or contracts as temperature decreases (down
to 4°C). Below 4°C, the opposite is true. In general, as water
temperature increases, the settling rate of particles in-
creases; as temperature decreases, so does the settling
rate. MOLECULES13 of water react to temperature
changes. They are closer together when liquid temperature
is lower; thus, DENSITY14 increases and water becomes
heavier per given volume because there is more of it in the
same space. As water becomes more dense, the density
difference between water and solid particles becomes less;
therefore the particles settle slower. This is illustrated in Fig.
5.7.
HATER MOLECULES ARE EXPANDED
THIS ALLOWS FOR EASY SETTLING
HATER MOLECULES ARE CLOSE
PARTICLE SETTLING DIFFICULT
0 O O o
O O O
e_£
HARM WATER
100°C (LESS DENSE)
(7 989 LBS GAL)
COLD WATER
4°C (MORE OENSE>
i 8 335 IBS GAD
Fig. 5.7 Influence of temperature on settling
SHORT CIRCUITS. As wastewater enters the settling tank,
it should be evenly dispersed across the entire cross-
section of the tank and should flow at the same velocity in
all areas toward the discharge end. When the velocity is
greater in some sections than in others, serious short-
circuiting may occur. The high velocity area may decrease
the detention time in that area, and particles may be held in
suspension and pass through the discharge end of the tank
because they do not have time to settle out. On the other
hand, if velocity is too low, undesirable septic conditions
may occur. Short-circuiting may easily begin at the inlet end
of the sedimentation tank (Fig. 5.8). This is usually pre-
vented by the use of weir plates, baffles, port openings, and
by proper design of the inlet channel.
Short-circuiting also may be caused by turbulence and
stratification of density layers due to temperature or salinity.
Temperature layers can cause short-circuiting when a
warm influent flows across the top of cold water in a settling
tank or when a cold influent flows under warm water in a
settling tank.
Side View - Warm Influent
Side View - Cold Influent
Fig. 5.8 Short circuiting
3. DETENTION TIME. Wastewater should remain in the
clarifier long enough to allow sufficient settling time for solid
particles. If the tank is too small for the quantity of flow and
the settling rate of the particles, too many particles will be
carried out the effluent of the clarifier. The relationship of
DETENTION TIME to SETTLING RATE of the particles is
important. Most engineers design settling tanks for about
2.0 to 3.0 hours of detention time. This is, of course, flexible
and dependent on many circumstances.
Detention time can be calculated by use of two known fac-
tors:
1. Flow in gallons per day (gpd)
2. Tank dimensions or volume
EXAMPLE 2
The flow is 3.0 million gallons per day (MGD), or 3,000,000
gal/day. Tank dimensions are 60 feet long by 30 feet wide by
10 feet deep. What is the detention time?
FORMULAS:
Detention
Time, hrs
Tank Volume,
cu ft
Tank Volume, cu ft x 7.5 gal/cu ft x 24 hr/day
Flow, gal/day
Length, ft x Width, ft x Depth, ft
13 Molecules (MOLL-uh-kules). A molecule Is the smallest portion of an element or compound that still retains or exhibits all the properties of
the substance.
14 Density (DEN-slt-tee). A measure of how heavy a substance (solid, liquid or gas) is for its size. Density is expressed in terms of weight per
unit volume, that Is, grams per cubic centimeter or pounds per cubic foot. The density of water (at 4°C or 39°F) is 1.0 gram per cubic
centimeter or about 62.4 pounds per cubic foot. If one cubic centimeter of a substance (such as iron) weighs more than 1.0 gram (higher
density), It will sink or settle out when put In water. If it weighs less (lower density, such as oil), it will rise to the top and float. Sludge density
Is normally expressed In gmslcc.
-------
128 Treatment Plants
CALCULATIONS:
Tank Volume, cu ft = Length, ft x Width, ft x Depth, ft15
= 60 ft x 30 ft x 10 ft
= 18,000 cu ft
Detention
Time, hrs
_ Tank Volume, cu ft x 7.5 gal/cu ft x 24 hr/day
Flow, gal/day
18,000 cu ft x 7.5 gal/cu ft x 24 hr/day
3,000,000 gal/day
3,240,000 gal-hr/day 24
3,000,000 gal/day x 7.5
1.08 hours 120
168
18,000
180
1,440,000
1,800,0
180.0 3,240,000
EVALUATION. If detention time is only 1.08 hours and if
laboratory tests indicate poor removal of solids, then additional
tank capacity should be placed into operation (if available) in
order to obtain additional detention time. You must realize that
flows fluctuate considerably during the day and night and any
calculated detention time is for a specific flow.
DISCUSSION. The formula given in this section allows you
to calculate the THEORETICAL detention time. ACTUAL de-
tention time is less than the detention time calculated using the
formula and can be measured by the use of dyes, tracers, or
floats.
4. WEIR OVERFLOW RATE. Wastewater leaves the clarifier
by flowing over weirs and into effluent troughs (LAUN-
DERSy6 or some type of weir arrangement. The number of
LINEAL17 feet of weir in relation to the flow is important to
prevent short circuits or high velocity near the weir or laun-
der which might pull settling solids into the effluent. The
weir overflow rate is the number of gallons of wastewater
that flow over one lineal foot of weir per day. Most designers
recommend about 10,000 to 20,000 gallons per day per
lineal foot of weir. Higher weir overflow rates have been
used for materials with a high settling rate or for inter-
mediate treatment. Secondary clarifiers and high effluent
quality requirements generally need lower weir overflow
rates than would be acceptable for primary clarifiers. The
calculation for weir overflow rate requires two known fac-
tors:
1. Flow in gpd
2. Lineal feet of weir
EXAMPLE 3
The flow is 5.0 MGD in a circular tank with a 90-foot WEIR
DIAMETER,18 What is the weir overflow rate?
FORMULAS:
Weir Overflow, gpd/ft
Flow Rate, gpd
Length of Weir, ft
Length of Circular Weir = 3.14 x Weir Diameter, ft
CALCULATIONS:
Length of Cir-
cular Weir, ft = 3.14 x (Weir Diameter, ft)
= 3.14 x 90 ft
= 283 Lineal Feet of Weir
3.14
90
Weir Over-
flow, gpd/ft
_ Flow Rate, gpd
Length of Weir, ft
_ 5,000,000 gal/day
283 ft
= 17,668 gpd/ft
283)"
282.60
17,668
5,000,000
2 83
2 170
1 981
189 0
169 8
19 20
16 98
2 220
2 264
SURFACE SETTLING RATE OR SURFACE LOADING
RATE. This rate is expressed in terms of gpd/sq ft of tank
surface area. Some designers and operators have indi-
cated that the SURFACE LOADING RATE has a direct rela-
tionship to the settleable-solids removal efficiency in the
settling tank. The suggested loading rate varies from 300 to
1200 gpd/sq ft, depending on the nature of the solids and
the treatment requirements. Low loading rates are fre-
quently used in small plants in cold climates. In warm re-
gions, low rates may cause excessive detention which
could lead to septicity. The calculation for surface loading
rate requires two known factors:
1. Flow in gpd
2. Square feet of liquid surface area
EXAMPLE 4
The flow into a clarifier is 4.0 MGD in a tank 90 feet long and
35 feet wide. What is the surface loading rate?
FORMULA:
Surface Loading Rate, gpd/sq ft
_ Flow Rate, gpd
Area, sq ft
15 For a circular clarifier,
Tank Volume, cu ft = 0.785 x (Diameter, ft) x Depth, ft.
16 Launders (LAWN-ders). Sedimentation tank effluent troughs. When the flow leaves a
sedimentation unit, it usually flows into a trough after it leaves the tank. The top edge of the
trough, over which wastewater flows as It enters the trough, is considered a weir.
17 Lineal (UN-e-al). The length in one direction of a line. For example, a board 12 feet long has
12 lineal feet in its length.
18 Weir Diameter (weer). Many circular clarifiers have a circular weir within the outside edge of
the clarifier. All the water leaving the clarifier flows over this weir. To find the length of this
weir, the WEIR DIAMETER must be known. The diameter of the weir is the length of a line from
one edge of a weir to the opposite edge and passing through the center of the circle formed
by the weir.
DIAMETER
CIRCULAR
WEIR
TOP VIEW
DIAMETER
CROSS SECTION
-------
Sedimentation 129
CALCULATIONS:
Surface Area, sq ft = Length, ft x Width, ft19
= 90 ft x 35 ft
= 3150 sq ft
Surface Loading _ Flow Rate, gpd
Rate, gpd/sq ft ~ Area sqft
_ 4,000,000 gpd
3150 sqft
1270 gpd/sq ft
6. SOLIDS LOADING. The term "solids loading" is used to
indicate the amount of solids that can be removed daily by
a clarifier for each square foot of clarifier liquid surface
area. If the solids loading increases above design values,
you can expect an increase in effluent solids. This concept
can be applied to secondary clarifiers and gravity sludge-
thickeners. Loading rates are expressed in pounds/day/sq
ft and depend on the nature of the solids and treatment
requirements. To calculate the solids loading requires
three known factors:
1. Flow in MGD;
2. Suspended solids concentration in mg/L; and
3. Liquid surface area in square feet.
EXAMPLE 5
A circular secondary clarifier with a diameter of 100 feet
treats a flow of 4.5 MGD (3.5 MGD inflow and 1.0 MGD return
sludge flow) with a mixed liquor suspended-solids concentra-
tion of 4200 mg/L. What is the solids loading in Ibs/day/sq ft?
FORMULAS:
Solids Applied, lbs/day = Flow, MGD x Cone., mg/L x 8.34 lbs/gal
Solids Applied, lbs/day
Solids Loading,
Ibs/day/sq ft
Solids Loading, _
Ibs/day/sq ft
CALCULATIONS:
Solids Applied,
lbs/day
Surface Area,
sq ft
Surface Area, sq ft
Flow, MGD x Cone., mg/L x 8.34 lbs/gal20
4.5 MGD x 4200 mg/L x 8.34 lbs/gal
157,620 lbs/day
{it) (Diameter, ft)2
4
(3.14) (100 ft)2
Solids Applied, lbs/day
Surface Area, sq ft
157,620 lbs/day
7854 sq ft
20.0 Ibs/day/sq ft
TYPICAL SOLIDS LOADINGS:
Primary Clarifiers
Secondary Clarifiers
(activated sludge)
Dissolved-Air Flotation
Sludge Thickening
Usually not a design consideration
12 to 30 Ibs/day/sq ft
5 to 40 Ibs/day/sq ft
5 to 20 Ibs/day/sq ft
4
7854 sq ft
DETENTION TIME, WEIR OVERFLOW RATE, SURFACE
LOADING RATE and SOLIDS LOADINGare four mathematical
methods of checking the performance of existing facilities
against the design values. However, laboratory analysis of
samples is the only reliable method of measuring clarifier effi-
ciency. IF LABORATORY RESULTS INDICATE A POORLY
OPERATING CLARIFIER, THE MATHEMATICAL METHODS
MAY HELP YOU TO IDENTIFY THE PROBLEM.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 149.
5.6A What is "short-circuiting" in a clarifier?
5.6B Why is "short-circuiting" undesirable?
5.6C How can "short-circuiting" be corrected?
5.6D A circular clarifier has a diameter of 80 feet and an
average depth of 10 feet. The flow of wastewater is 4.0
MGD and the suspended-solids concentration is 190
mg/L. Calculate the following:
1. Detention Time, in hours
2. Weir Overflow Rate, in gpd/ft
3. Surface Loading Rate, in gpd/sq ft
5.6E A circular clarifier has a diameter of 80 feet and an
average depth of 10 feet. The clarifier treats 4.0 MGD
from the plant inflow plus 1.2 MGD of return sludge
flow. The mixed liquor suspended solids concentration
is 2700 mg/L. Calculate the solids loading in Ibs/day/sq
ft.
19 For a circular clarifier,
Surface Area, sq ft = 0.785 x (Diameter, ft)2
20 The units of this formula can be proved by remembering that 1 liter equals or weighs one million milligrams.
mg _ mg _ mg
L 1,000,000 mg M mg
Therefore,
Flow, MQD x Cone., mg/L x 8.34 lb/gal = M 9*1 x m0ss x lb = lb ss
day M mg gal day
-------
130 Treatment Plants
5.62 Secondary Clarifiers
Secondary clarifiers usually are located after a biological
process in the flow pattern of a treatment plant. (See Fig. 5.2).
The most common biological processes are the ACTIVATED
SLUDGE PROCESS21 and the TRICKLING FILTER.22
In some plants a chemical process may be used instead of a
biological process, but the latter is far more common for munic-
ipal treatment plants.
5.620 Trickling Filter Clarifiers
A secondary clarifier is used after a trickling filter to settle out
SLOUGHINGS23 from the filter media. Filter sloughings are a
product of biological action in the filter; the material is generally
quite high in BOO and will lower the effluent quality unless it is
removed. A detailed description of trickling filters can be found
in Chapter 6.
Secondary tanks following trickling filters may be either cir-
cular or rectangular and have sludge-collector mechanisms
similar to primary clarifiers. Clarifier detention times are about
the same as for primary clarifiers, but the surface loading and
weir overflow rates are generally lower due to the less dense
characteristics of secondary sludges. The following are ranges
of loading rates for secondary clarifiers used after biological
filters:
Detention Time - 2.0 to 3.0 hours
Surface Loading - 800 to 1200 gpd/sq ft
Weir Overflow - 5,000 to 15,000 gpd/lineal ft
The amount of solids settling out in a secondary clarifier
following a trickling filter will be very irregular due to a number
of varying conditions in the biological treatment process. In
general, you can expect to pump about 30 to 40 percent as
much more sludge from the secondary clarifier as from the
primary; thus total sludge pumping to the digester will increase
by that amount. These figures indicate how the trickling filter
"creates" settleable solids which were not present in the raw
wastewater in settleable form.
The sludge in the secondary settling tank will usually have
characteristics and appearance completely different than the
sludge collected in a primary settling tank. This sludge will
usually be much darker in color, but should not be grey or
black. Sludge will turn black if it is allowed to stay in the secon-
dary clarifier too long. If this happens, then the sludge pumping
rate should be increased or the time of pumping lengthened or
made more frequent. These sludges generally require frequent
pumping. Pumps used to pump trickling filter sludges from
secondary clarifiers are similar to raw sludge pumps and may
be piston, progressive cavity or centrifugal-type pumps.
The particle sizes may be very irregular with generally good
(rapid) settling characteristics. The sludge may appear to be a
fluffy, humus-type material and usually will have little or no
odor if sludge removal occurs at regular intervals. Disposal of
sludge collected in the final settling tanks depends on the par-
ticular plant design and the characteristics of the sludge.
Sometimes disposal is accomplished by transferring the
sludge to a primary settling tank to be settled with primary
sludge. Other times it is transferred directly to the digestion
system.
5.621 Activated Sludge Clarifiers
Secondary clarifier tanks which follow the activated sludge
process are designed to handle large volumes of sludge. They
are more conservative in design because the sludge tends to
be less dense. The following are ranges of loading rates for
secondary clarifiers used after aeration tanks in the activated
sludge process:
Detention Time - 2.0 to 3.0 hours
Surface Loading - 300 to 1200 gpd/sq ft
Weir Overflow - 5,000 to 15,000 gpd/lineal ft
Solids Loading - 24 to 30 Ibs/day/sq ft
Their purpose is identical, except that the particles to be
settled are received from the aeration tank rather than the
trickling filter. Most secondary sedimentation tanks used with
the activated sludge process are equipped with mechanisms
capable of quickly removing the sludge due to the importance
of rapidly returning sludge to the aeration tank. The sludge
volume in the secondary tank will be greater from the activated
sludge process than from the trickling filter process.
Sludge-removal mechanisms in secondary tanks have
tended to differ from most primary clarifier mechanisms, espe-
cially those in circular clarifiers. These secondary circular
clarifiers are designed for continuous sludge removal by HY-
DROSTATIC SYSTEMS,2* with the activated sludge being
pumped back to the aeration tanks by large capacity pumps.
These pumps usually are of the centrifugal type with variable-
speed controls or are of the large air-lift type.
Figures 5.9, 5.10, and 5.11 illustrate three variations of
sludge-removal mechanisms for secondary clarifiers used in
the activated sludge process. These mechanisms are de-
signed to remove the settled activated sludge as rapidly as
possible, thus reducing the sludge- RETENTION TIME25 in the
clarifiers. Several of these mechanisms have valves or adjust-
able rings to control the return sludge rates from the different
collection points in the clarifier mechanism.
Flows may be regulated from each pipe removing activated
sludge from the clarifier in order to control the activated sludge
process. The reason for the ability to regulate each pipe is that
different activated sludge densities will develop different settl-
ing patterns in a particular clarifier. For example, an activated
21 Activated Sludge Process (ACK-ta-VATE-ed sluj). A biological wastewater treatment process which speeds up the decomposition of
wastes in the wastewater being treated. Activated sludge is added to wastewater and the mixture (mixed liquor) is aerated and agitated.
After some time in the aeration tank, the activated sludge is allowed to settle out by sedimentation and is disposed of (wasted) or reused
(returned to the aeration tank) as needed. The remaining wastewater then undergoes more treatment.
22 Trickling Filter. A treatment process in which the wastewater trickles over media that provide the opportunity for the formation of slimes or
biomass which contain organisms that feed upon and remove wastes from the water being treated.
23 Sloughings (SLUFF-ings). Trickling-fliter slimes that have been washed off the filter media. They are generally quite high in BOD and will
lower effluent quality unless removed.
24 Hydrostatic Systems. In a hydrostatic sludge removal system, the surface of the water in the clarifier is higher than the surface of the water
In the sludge well or hopper. This difference in pressure head forces sludge from the bottom of the clarifier to flow through pipes to the
sludge well or hopper.
25 Retention Time. The time water, sludge or solids are retained or held In a clarifier or sedimentation tank. See DETENTION TIME.
-------
PARTIAL PLAN
J
CENTER
WELL
SEAL-
•I
INFLUENT
SLUDGE INLET ORIFICE
]
:'" *¦ >-V: i A• • 'u. •:J
V4
• .#
^•4
EFFLUENT
i
SLUDGE
i>r^
SECTIONAL ELEVATION
F/g. 5.9 Secondary clarifier sludge-removal mechanism
(Link Belt)
3
®
3
I
O
3
U
-------
RETURN SLUDGE
RAKE BLADE
SLUDGE WITHDRAWAL PIPES
RAKE ARM
DIRECTION OF ROTATION
U
IO
(D
0>
3
3
tt
3
(0
PARTIAL PLAN
RETURN SLUDGE WELL
RETURN SLUDGE
INFLUENT
I
O
I
r>
T
'••T'l ^crtnctocM AO
j
%
*• l».
r"
>c'
' •<
1 .4*
CZ]—
EFFLUENT
f.
i
SLUDGE
SQUEEGEES OR
RAKE BLADES
SECTIONAL ELEVATION
Fig. 5. 10 Secondary clarifier sludge-removal mechanism
(Dorr Otver)
-------
SUCTION ARM
SUCTION NOZZLE
PLOUGH
DIRECTION OF
ROTATION
SUCTION AND
^ PLOW ARM
PARTIAL PLAN
SUCTION NOZZLE
SLUDGE FLOW
SUCTION NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
>TrfP*
CENTER
WELL
SEAL —
< • 4^ ' 4 ' . # ' ^ •"¦ '•I
\ INFLUENT —
e
SLUDGE SETTLES OUT
a'
SUCTION ARM
|i ii TT'ii i ^>11 i Thi i Ti*ii * i
A ^ o. Iinor »
SLUDGE
f' v
.-.A
IL
EFFLUENT
i
NOZZLE
SLUDGE DISCHARGE
SECTIONAL ELEVATION
PLOUGH
Fig. 5.11 Secondary clarifier sludge-removal mechanism
(Walker Process)
3
o
3
O
3
U
u
-------
134 Treatment Plants
sludge with an SVI26 of 100 will develop a bell pattern sludge
blanket with most of the activated sludge solids settling near
the tank inlet, thus requiring most of the sludge to be removed
from the center or inner quarter of the tank floor area (Fig.
5.12).
If the activated sludge degrades to an SVI of 500, then the
solids-settling curve takes on the shape of a bowl (Fig. 5.13).
Under this condition the sludge gathers at the outside of the
clarifier and requires higher return flow rates. Unfortunately the
outside sludge return nozzles or pipes must handle a much
larger clarifier bottom area than the inside pipes or nozzles.
Regardless of the sludge condition, the operator must adjust
return flow rates to remove solids from the tank areas where
the activated sludge is settling by reducing the return sludge
flows from areas where the activated sludge is not settling.
Under normal operating conditions, return sludge rates may
range from 10 to 50 percent of the plant inflow. During times
when the activated sludge process is upset, return sludge
rates of 100 percent may be desirable in order to maintain
sufficient activated sludge solids in the system. Under these
conditions you must be careful that the return sludge rate does
not become too high. During high return rates, the resulting
turbulence in the tank can upset the sludge blanket.
Wasting of excess activated sludge from the system should
be to some liquid-solids separation process other than the pri-
mary clarifier. In many plants, excess or waste activated
sludge is processed by separate gravity or flotation sludge
thickeners in order to concentrate the sludges to 3.0 to 4.5
percent solids before pumping the solids to the digester or
dewatering system for disposal. Waste activated sludge
pumped to the primary clarifiers in large plants usually devel-
ops into a solids buildup problem in the plant. This buildup
consists of a cycle of ever increasing amounts of activated
sludge being wasted to the primary clarifier which produces
more raw sludge. When additional volumes of raw sludge are
pumped to the digester, more supernatant carrying digester
solids is returned to the headworks for treatment. These solids
produce greater volumes of activated sludge and the cycle
continues. This solids buildup creates a solids handling prob-
lem and deterioration of the effluent until one of these sources
of solids is removed from the cycle to solve the problem.
Of all the different types of clarifiers that an operator must
regulate, secondary clarifiers in the activated sludge process
are the most critical and require the most attention from the
operator. To help the operator regulate clarifier operation, aids
have been developed which consist of instrumentation capable
of monitoring:
1. Levels of sludge blanket in clarifier,
2. Concentration of suspended solids in clarifier effluent,
3. Control and pacing of return sludge flows,
4. Level of turbidity in clarifier effluent,
5. Concentration of dissolved oxygen (DO) in clarifier effluent,
and
6. Level of pH.
Laboratory tests should be conducted to measure all of the
above items and to provide a check on the accuracy of the
instrumentation. Other tests that should be conducted on the
clarifier effluent include biochemical oxygen demand (BOD)
and ammonia nitrogen (NH3-N) measurements.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 149.
5.6F Why are secondary clarifiers needed in secondary
treatment plants?
5.6G What usually is done with the sludge that settles out in
secondary clarifiers?
5.7 REVIEW OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Plans and specifications should be reviewed by operators so
they can:
1. Become familiar with a proposed plant,
2. Learn what will be constructed, and
3. Offer suggestions on how the plant can be designed for
easier and more effective operation and maintenance.
When reviewing plans and specifications, carefully study
those areas influencing how the plant will be operated and
maintained. Also look carefully for potential safety hazards.
5.70 Operation
1. Control gates must be suitably located in order to isolate
each clarifier.
2. Baffles, weirs or skirts should be capable of controlling
clarifier inlet velocities.
3. Collector mechanisms and drive units must have protective
devices such as shear pins, clutches, stall alarms, and
on-off switches. Be sure that clarifiers with suction-type
mechanisms for removing sludge have provisions for
sludge removal from the center of the clarifier.
4. Surface skimmer for scum removal.
5. Scum box should be located with consideration given to
direction of prevailing winds and to removal of any accumu-
lation of floatables on the water surface.
6. Hose bibs (high-pressure water faucets) conveniently lo-
cated with respect to scum boxes, launders, weirs and
clarifier center columns for easy washdown.
7. Sampling equipment should be easily accessible.
8. Clarifier flow and level controllers (if installed) must be
properly located for operational purposes.
9. Grease or scum weirs must be at proper depth for scum
control and removal of floating material from water surface.
26 SVI. Sludge Volume Index. This is a test used to indicate the settling ability of activated sludge (aerated solids) in the secondary clarifier.
The test is a measure of the volume of sludge compared with its weight. Allow the sludge sample from the aeration tank to settle for 30
minutes. Then calculate SVI by dividing the volume (ml) of wet settled sludge by the weight (mg) of that sludge after it has been dried.
Sludge with an SVI of one hundred or greater will not settle as readily as desirable because it is as light as or lighter than water.
SVI = Wet Settled Sludge, ml x
Dried Sludge Solids, mg
-------
Sedimentation
135
SLUDGE
BLANKET
INFLUENT
Fig. 5.12 Activated sludge settling near center of clarifier
(ben-shaped pattern)
SLUDGE
BLANKET
INFLUENT
Fig. 5.13
Activated sludge settling near outer edge of clarifier
(bowl-shaped pattern)
-------
136 Treatment Plants
5.71 Maintenance
1. Drive mechanisms, lubrication points, locations for chang-
ing oil in gear boxes (cases), and turntables must be acces-
sible.
2. Weirs, launders and control boxes must be accessible for
cleaning, painting and other maintenance activities.
3. Sludge pumps must be conveniently located and capable of
backflushing pipelines or pumping down clarifiers.
4. Provisions should be made for connections and/or locations
for portable pumps to dewater clarifiers if clarifiers are not
connected to plant drainage system.
5. Influent and effluent pipelines, conduits or channels must
be installed so that each end can be isolated and dewa-
tered by gravity drain or portable pump.
6. Sludge and scum lines to pump suctions must be kept as
short as possible and free of fittings (90-degree bends and
reducers).
7. Cleanouts are required on sludge and scum lines to provide
access for cleaning equipment such as sewer rods and high
velocity cleaners. Cleanouts should be installed in the lines
at locations that allow the lines to be worked on while the
clarifier remains in service, instead of having to dewater the
clarifier to clear a stoppage or clean a line.
8. Auxiliary service lines (water, air, electrical, instrumenta-
tion, sample and chemical feed) should be studied. These
lines should have isolation valves (to valve off portions of
lines) at appropriate locations and should be accessible for
repairs when necessary. Conduits for instrumentation, elec-
trical wiring and cables should be equipped with pull boxes
that are WATERTIGHT. Sample lines should have clean-
outs and valving to allow for periodic flushing of the lines.
Air lines must be equipped with condensate drains at all low
points, including the ends of the line.
9. Covered clarifiers should contain lightweight openings to
provide easy access to scum channels, skimmers, launders
and drive mechanism units.
5.72 Safety
1. Clarifiers must be equipped with adequate access by stairs,
ladders, ramps, catwalks and bridges with railings that meet
all state and OSHA requirements.
2. Catwalks and bridges must have floor plates or grates firmly
secured and equipped with toeboards and nonskid sur-
faces.
3. Adequate lighting must be provided on the clarifier.
4. Launders, channels and effluent pipelines that carry flow
from the clarifier to another conduit, channel or structure
must have safety grates over the entrance to prevent acci-
dental entry into the system caused by slipping or falling.
5. In a circular clarifier, turntables, inlet adjustable deflection
baffles and return sludge-control valves must have safe
access without requiring the operator to leave a bridge or
catwalk.
6. Adequate guards must be placed over chain drives, belts
and other moving parts.
7. Safety hooks, poles, and/or floats should be stationed at
strategic locations near every basin to rescue anyone who
falls into a basin.
8. Do not allow any pipes or conduits to cross on top of cat-
walks or bridges.
9. Adequate offset of drive units, motors, and other equipment
must be provided to allow unobstructed access to all areas.
5.8 FLOTATION PROCESSES
Wastewater always contains some suspended solids that
neither settle nor float to the surface and therefore remain in
the liquid as it passes through the clarifier. Dissolved solids
will, of course, travel through the clarifiers because they are
unaffected by these units. COLLOIDS and EMULSIONS are
two other forms of solids that are very difficult to remove.
Colloids (KOL-loids) are very small, finely divided solids
(particulates that do not dissolve) that remain dispersed in liq-
uid for a long time due to their small size and electrical charge.
It is usually less than 200 MILLIMICRONS27 in size, and gen-
erally will not settle readily. If organic, it exerts a high oxygen
demand, so its removal is desirable.
An emulsion is a liquid mixture of two or more liquid sub-
stances not normally dissolved in one another, but one liquid
held in suspension in the other. It usually contains suspended
globules of one or more of the substances. The globules usu-
ally consist of grease, oil, fat, or resinous substances. This
material also exerts a high oxygen demand.
One method for removing emulsions and colloids is by a
"flotation process," pumping air into the mixture to cause the
suspended material to float to the surface where it can be
skimmed off.
The particles can be FLOCCULATED28 with air or chemical
COAGULANTS29 and forced or carried to the liquid surface by
minute air bubbles. Figure 5.14 shows the chain of events in
the flotation process.
# ®
v ¦» o
^ *
*
SMALL PARTICLES
VILL NOT SETTLE.
SMALL PARTICLES
IN FLOCCULATED
FORM.
FLOCCULATED PAR-
TICLES ATTACHED
TO AIR BUBBLES.
BUBBLES CARRY
PARTICLES TO
SURFACE.
ACCUMULATED
SCUM OR FOAM
ON SURFACE.
MOST AIR BUB-
BLES ARE
RELEASED.
Fig. 5.14 Flotation process
Most of the air bubbles are released at the liquid surface.
Particles in the form of scum or foam are removed by skim-
ming.
27 Millimicron (MILL-e-MY-cron). One thousandth of a micron or a millionth of a millimeter.
28 Flocculated (FLOCK-you-iay-ted). The gathering together of fine particles to form larger particles.
29 Coagulants (ko-AGG-you-lents). Chemicals that cause very fine particles to clump together into larger particles. This makes it easier to
separate the solids from the liquids by settling, skimming, draining or filtering.
-------
Sedimentation 137
There are two common flotation processes in practice today:
1. VACUUM FLOTATION. The wastewater is aerated for a
short time in a tank where it becomes saturated with dis-
solved air. The air supply is then cut off and large air bub-
bles pass to the surface and into the atmosphere. The
wastewater then flows to a vacuum chamber which pulls
out dissolved air in the form of tiny air bubbles. The bubbles
then float the solids to the top.
2. PRESSURE FLOTATION. Air is forced into the wastewater
in a pressure chamber where the air becomes dissolved in
the liquid. The pressure is then released from the wastewa-
ter, and the wastewater is returned to atmospheric pres-
sure. Because of the change in pressure, the dissolved air
is released from solution in the form of tiny air bubbles.
These air bubbles rise to the surface and, as they rise, carry
solids to the surface.
Any flotation process is based upon release of gas bubbles
in the liquid suspension (Fig. 5.14) under conditions in which
the bubbles and solids will associate with each other to form a
combination with a lower specific gravity than the surrounding
liquid. They must stay together long enough for the combina-
tion to rise to the surface and be removed by skimming.
For more detailed information on the operation of flotation
processes and gravity thickeners, see Chapter 22, "Solids
Handling and Disposal."
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on pages 149 and 150.
5.7A What safety items should be considered when review-
ing plans and specifications for clarifiers?
5.8A Why is the "flotation process" used in some wastewater
treatment plants?
5.8B Would you place the flotation process BEFORE or
AFTER primary sedimentation?
5.8C Give a very brief description of:
1. Colloid
2. Emulsion
5.8D Give a brief description of the vacuum flotation process.
ON)
on
SEDIMENTATION AND FLOTATION
Please answer the discussion and review questions before
continuing with Lesson 3.
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
(Lesson 2 of 3 Lessons)
Chapter 5. SEDIMENTATION AND FLOTATION
Please write the answers to these questions in your
notebook before continuing with Lesson 3. The problem num-
bering continues from Lesson 1.
9. Explain how temperature influences clarifier performance.
10. Draw a clarifier and indicate what is meant by short-
circuiting.
11. A circular primary clarifier has a diameter of 60 feet and an
average depth of 8 feet. The flow of wastewater is 2.0
MGD. Calculate the following:
1. Detention Time, in hours
2. Weir Overflow Rate, in gpd/ft
3. Surface Loading Rate, in gpd/sq ft
4. Comment on the hydraulic loading on the clarifier.
12. If the circular clarifier in problem 11 receives a plant flow of
2.0 MGD plus a return sludge flow of 0.4 MGD, what is the
solids loading in Ibs/day/sq ft if the mixed liquor sus-
pended solids concentration is 3600 mg/L?
13. What items would you study when reviewing plans and
specifications for clarifiers?
14. Why should floatable solids be removed from wastewater?
-------
138 Treatment Plants
CHAPTER 5.
SEDIMENTATION AND FLOTATION
(Lesson 3 of 3 Lessons)
5.9 COMBINED SEDIMENTATION - DIGESTION UNIT
5.90 Purpose of Unit
A combined sedimentation-digestion unit consists of a small
clarifier constructed over a sludge digester (Figures 5.15 and
5.16 and Table 5.3). Treatment units of this type have been
designed and constructed to serve small populations such as
schools, campgrounds and subdivisions. Usually they are in-
stalled instead of Imhoff tanks or septic tank systems. Waste-
water treatment efficiencies are similar to primary clarifiers with
approximately 65 percent of the suspended solids and 35 per-
cent of the biochemical oxygen demand removed from the
influent.
5.91 How the Unit Works
The combined sedimentation-digestion unit is considered a
PACKAGE TREATMENT PLANT.30 Plant influent usually
passes through some type of flow meter to record flows. A bar
screen is often the first treatment unit of the package. Coarse
solids are caught by the bar screen and removed manually on
a daily basis or oftener if necessary. Wastewater enters the
clarifier near the surface in the center and the circular influent
well directs the flow and solids towards the bottom of the
clarifier. Settled wastewater slowly flows through the clarifier
and leaves over the effluent weir around the outside of the
clarifier. The effluent leaves the unit by the effluent trough
(launder) and usually receives additional treatment in a secon-
dary package plant (Chapter 8, "Activated Sludge"), ponds
(Chapter 9, "Waste Treatment Ponds"), or land treatment dis-
posal system (Chapter 25. "Wastewater Reclamation").
SCREEN
PRIMARY
SETTLING
SLUDGE
DIGESTION
~T
I
I
±
DIGESTED
SOLIDS TO
DRYING
BEDS
EFFLUENT TO
1. TREATMENT SYSTEM
2. OXIDATION PONDS
3. LAND TREATMENT
I
I
r
SANITARY
LANDFILL
Fig. 5.15 Flow pattern for combined
sedimentation-digestion unit
30 Package Treatment Plant. A small wastewater treatment plant often fabricated at the manufacturer's factory, hauled to the site, and
Installed as one facility. The package may be either a small primary or secondary wastewater treatment plant.
-------
Sedimentation 139
BYPASS
INLET
SPLITTER GATE
MECHANISM
SUPPORT
CHAIN
PLAN
r- GEAR MOTOR
DRIVE HEAD
FLAME
CHECK
BAR SCREEN
I'll 1 INFLUENT
Irrfv B0X
CLARIFIER
BLADES v
EFFLUENT
LAUNDER'
EFFLUENT
WEIR
INFLUF.NT
WELL
CLARIFIER
COMP'T.
CLARIFIER
ARM
TRAY
-GAS
OUTLET
SAMPLING
OUTLETN
STATIONARY
PICKETS
^SQUEEGEE
^BOOT
BLADE
BOOT
SCUM
BREAKER
ARM
*-SQUEEGEE
DIGESTER
COMPT.
DIGESTER
ARM
\SLUDGE
WITHDRAWAL
DIGESTER
BLADES
SECTION
Fig. 5.16 Combined sedimentation-digestion unit
(Pwmkalon o» Dorr-Otivw Incorporated)
-------
140 Treatment Plants
TABLE 5.3 PURPOSE OF SEDIMENTATION-DIGESTION
UNIT AND PARTS
Part
1. Bar Screen
2. Flame Check
3. Gear Motor
4. Clarifier Arm and Blades
5. Clarifier Compartment
6. Digester Arm and Blades
7. Effluent Launder or
Effluent Trough
8. Scum Breaker Arm and
Stationary Pickets
9. Digester Compartment
10. Sampling Outlet
11. Sludge Withdrawal
Purpose
Removes coarse material to
prevent clogging of pipes or
interference with mechanical
units such as scrapers and
pumps.
Prevents flame from traveling
down gas outlet pipe to top of
digester compartment where
a flame could cause an explo-
sion.
Provides power to turn the
scraper blades in the bottom
of both the clarifier and the di-
gester.
Scrapes the settled solids
(sludge) to a center hole
where the sludge enters the
digester.
Provides storage space for
wastewater being treated and
allows heavy solids to settle to
the bottom and light solids to
float to the surface.
Scrapes the digested sludge
on the digester bottom to the
sludge withdrawal pipe.
Conveys the settled wastewa-
ter away from the clarifier.
Breaks up scum accumulation
in the top of the digester com-
partment.
Provides storage space for
sludge, allows digestion to
occur and the separation of
liquids and solids for disposal.
Allows withdrawal of digester
sludge for laboratory testing.
Allows digested sludge to be
removed from digester.
Solids settling to the bottom of the clarifier (tray) are scraped
to the center of the unit. A slot in the center of the tray allows
the solids to flow into the digestion compartment. Below the
slot is a sludge seal or boot which prevents gas from digestion
and digested sludge from floating up into the clarifier. In the
digester, sludge undergoes anaerobic decomposition (ex-
plained in Chapter 12). Digested sludge is removed from the
bottom of the digester by pumping or by gravity flow to drying
beds.
Scum is skimmed from the surface of the clarifier into a scum
trough. From the trough, the scum flows to the scum pit (Fig.
5.17). A submersible pump moves the scum to the digestion
compartment.
Supernatant (the liquid in the top portion of the digester) is
removed from the digester by lowering an adjustable overflow
tube (Fig. 5.17) and allowing the liquid to flow into the scum pit.
Again the submersible pump moves the supernatant to the
clarifier influent well and the supernatant flows through the
clarifier.
Gas from the digestion process rises to the top of the diges-
ter as tiny bubbles. The tray (bottom of clarifier) slopes upward
to the outside. This slope helps move sludge to the center slot
and allows gas to accumulate along the outside edge of the
digestion portion of the unit. The gas is collected in a gas dome
and usually burned by a waste-gas burner. Sufficient gas is not
produced to serve as a reliable source of energy for power or
for heating.
5.92 Sampling and Analysis
Sampling locations and laboratory tests performed depend
upon NPDES (National Pollutant Discharge Elimination Sys-
tem) permit requirements, available time and capability of facil-
ity to make operational changes on the basis of the interpreta-
tion of test results. Typical tests, their purposes and expected
ranges of test results are listed in Table 5.4.
5.93 Operation
5.930 Start-Up Procedures
Always thoroughly inspect the entire unit before allowing
wastewater to enter. Any corrections will be more difficult after
the unit is full of wastewater.
1. Remove all debris and tools from unit.
2. Follow the wastewater and solids flow paths through the
unit (Section 5.91). Be sure you understand how the unit
works and what happens when all the valves and switches
are either open or closed.
3. Lubricate all equipment.
4. Allow unit to run for two hours.
5. Observe operation of unit. Be sure all equipment has
proper alignment and clearance.
6. Keep all bolts tight.
7. Divert wastewater to unit.
8. Allow unit to fill and clarified effluent to flow over effluent
weirs.
9. Inspect tank and pipes for leaks.
Repair any leaks. If unit has not been previously tested for
leaks, allow unit to sit for 24 hours without any influent. If
water level drops more than one inch, find leak and repair
it.
10. Make sure pipes are not plugged.
11. Operate valves to be sure they operate freely and are
watertight.
12. Leave dome vent open until gas production starts. Vent
must be open to atmosphere to prevent gases from ac-
cumulating in confined spaces. Time for gas production to
start will depend on temperature of sludge under diges-
tion. The warmer the sludge, the shorter the time. Gas will
start being produced anytime after the first three weeks.
13. Chlorinate final effluent.
14. Add lime to digestion unit if pH is below 7.0. Sample
supernatant by lowering adjustable overflow tube in scum
pit and measuring pH (See Chapter 16 for procedure). If
the pH is closely controlled, these units may be started
without seeding with digested sludge. Lime should be
added on the VERY FIRST DAY DURING START-UP and
daily until the pH remains above 7.0. Recommended lime
doses are as follows:
-------
Sedimentation 141
TABLE 5.4 COMBINED SEDIMENTATION-DIGESTION
UNIT TESTS, PURPOSES AND RESULTS
Test
1. Inflow, MGD
Clarifler
2. Suspended Solids
3. Settleable Solids
4. Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)
(Optional)
Digestion
5. Temperature
6. pH
7. Quantity of sludge withdrawn
Effluent (from final treatment process)
8. Chlorine residual
Typicsl Results
Depends on population served. May range
from 80 to 130 gallons per person per day.
(Infl) 100 - 300 mgIL
(Effl) 50- 100 mgIL
(Infl) 50- 100 ml/L
(Effl) 5-15 ml IL
(Infl) 150- 300 mgIL
(Effl) 100 - 200 mgIL
Depends on location, season and whether
or not sludge is heated.
7.0 - 7.6
Depends on population, detention time in
digester and temperature.
Depends on NPDES permit requirements.
Purpose
Determine hydraulic loading on facility.
Identify flow trends and when facility is ap-
proaching design capacity.
Indicates efficiency of clarifier removal.
Indicates efficiency of clarifier removal.
Indicates efficiency of clarifier removal.
Forecasts digestion rates which depend on
temperature of digesting sludge.
Determines if effective digestion is taking
place. Too low a pH value indicates poor
digestion.
Determines effectiveness of clarifier in re-
moving solids and effectiveness of digester
in reducing solids.
Determines if sufficient chlorine is being
applied to effluent to achieve adequate dis-
infection.
Laboratory tests should be conducted on a regular basis
from twice a week to daily depending on NPDES permit re-
quirements. Results should be plotted (Fig. 5.18) immediately
to identify any trends that need correcting.
SAMPLE PIPE
AND VALVE
3-WAY 2-PORT
PLUG VALVE
CHECK VALVE
SUBMERSIBLE
SCUM PUMP
SCUM TROUGH
TO DIGESTER
SCUM DRAIN
TO CLARIFIER
INFLUENT
WELL
ADJUSTABLE OVERFLOW
TUBE. LOWERING CAUSES
FLOW FROM DIGESTER
FROM DIGESTER—J
-VALVE AND TEES ON
HEATED DIGESTER.
CLOSE VALVES WHEN
DECANTING, OPEN ALL
OTHER TIMES.
ON UNHEATED DIGESTER,
VALVE IS REMOVED AND
TEES ARE REPLACED BY
STRAIGHT PIPE.
Fig. 5.17 Arrangement of scum pit piping
(Permission of Dorr-Oliver Incorporated)
-------
EFFLUENT SETTLEABLE SOLIDS, NO TREND
FLOW, NO APPARENT TREND
Fig. 5.18 Plot of lab results to identify any trends
-------
Diameter Hydrated Water, Frequency
of Unit, ft Lime, lbs Gallons
10-18 25 30 Every 2 days
20-28 25 50 Every day
30-40 50 100 Every day
Mix the lime with water in a barrel until milky. Pour mixture
into scum pit and then pump into digestion unit using sub-
mersible pump. Be sure valves are properly set so mixture
is not pumped into clarifier. Allow some wastewater to flow
from influent of clarifier into scum pit (or washdown hose
may be used to add water to scum pit). Pump out scum pit
and wash down to remove any remaining lime to digestion
unit. Stop adding lime when pH remains above 7.0.
Another chemical used to lower the pH is anhydrous am-
monia. Be sure to handle anhydrous ammonia very care-
fully because it is a hazardous chemical.
5.931 Normal Operation
Normal operation consists of inspecting the unit on a daily
basis. Observe the flow through the facility and the operation of
the equipment. Look and listen for anything unusual.
DAILY
1. Remove debris and solids from bar screen and properly
dispose of them by burial. Hose down screen and channel
walls.
2. Hose down baffles, weirs, scum trough and scum pit to
remove any grease, scum or other floating debris. Ac-
cumulations of this material are unsightly and usually pro-
duce odors and flies if not removed immediately.
3. Measure pH in digester. If pH is below 7.0, add lime ac-
cording to start-up instructions. If pH remains fairly con-
stant and above a pH of 7.0, pH may be measured two or
three times per week.
4. Withdraw supernatant once or twice a day. Analysis and
interpretation of lab test results of suspended solids and
settleable solids in effluent can indicate the frequency of
supernatant withdrawal. Solids in the effluent may indicate
that supernatant should be removed more frequently.
Supernatant is withdrawn from the digestion compartment
by lowering the sleeve on the overflow tube in the scum
box. When the top of the sleeve is below the water surface
in the clarifier, the supernatant will flow out of the digestion
compartment. Removal of the supernatant provides more
space in the digester for sludge being scraped from the
bottom (tray) of the clarifier.
Lower the sleeve so approximately one-half inch of water
will flow over the top of the sleeve for 15 to 30 minutes
twice a day.
5. After supernatant withdrawal to the scum pit. pump the
clear supernatant to the clarifier. When most of the super-
natant has been pumped out of the pit, only scum will
remain. Pump the scum to the digester. DO NOT ALLOW
THE SUBMERSIBLE SCUM PUMP TO RUN DRY be-
cause the pump motor can be damaged. Pump the scum
frequently enough to prevent odors from developing or
flies becoming nuisances, if the supernatant is high in
solids, return the supernatant to the digester. Try to pre-
vent supernatant solids from flowing out with the clarifier
effluent. Solids may be in the supernatant during initial
Sedimentation 143
start-up. Under these conditions, the supernatant may be
pumped to drying beds until the digester solids in the
supernatant can indicate that the digested solids should
be removed from the digestion compartment (digester).
6. Digested sludge should be withdrawn from the digester
when solids start appearing in the supernatant. This will
occur several months after start-up and regularly during
normal operation. Frequency of digested-sludge removal
will depend on the solids loading on the unit, design capac-
ity and effectiveness of the digestion process in the unit.
The scraper mechanism on the bottom of the digester
helps to prevent sludge coning during sludge withdrawal.
Withdraw the sludge slowly so the sand and other grit on
the bottom of the digestion unit will be removed too. Do not
remove sludge so fast that the clarified effluent will stop
flowing over the effluent weirs. If the digested sludge is
allowed to flow out too quickly, the sludge directly above
the sludge-withdrawal pipe will flow out. A cone will
develop in the sludge and the supernatant will flow out
rather than allowing the remaining digested sludge to flow
towards the withdrawal pipe.
Always leave some digested sludge remaining in the di-
gestion compartment. As soon as the sludge starts to run
thin, stop removing sludge. If a cone has developed and a
lot of digested sludge remains, try removing some super-
natant to the scum pit and pumping it back to the digestion
compartment. One way to avoid withdrawing too much
digested sludge is to only remove a portion of the sludge
from the digester during one day. For example, if 1/40th of
the sludge from the digestion compartment will cover the
sludge drying beds with 3 inches (7.5 cm) of sludge, then
do not withdraw more than this amount on any given day.
When you are through removing digested sludge, wash
out the line with plant effluent. Shut the valve by the diges-
tion compartment and leave the remainder of the line open
so gas produced from digestion will not cause a pressure
buildup which could damage the pipe or valves.
Usually the digested sludge is discharged to sand drying
beds (Chapter 12). After the sludge is dried, it can be
removed and disposed of in a sanitary landfill.
Do not smoke around drying beds while the digested
sludge is being applied. Methane gas can mix with air to
form explosive conditions.
If odors develop from the drying bed, a neutral MASKING
AGENT31 may be applied. Lime also has been used to
control odors.
31 Masking Agents. Substances used to cover up or disguise unpleasant odors. Liquid masking agents are dripped into the wastewater,
sprayed Into the air, or evaporated (using heat) with the unpleasant fumes or odors and then discharged Into the air by blowers to make an
undesirable odor less noticeable.
-------
144 Treatment Plants
7. In colder climates the contents of the digester may be
heated in order to obtain better and faster digestion. Try to
maintain the temperature of the digester contents between
80 and 95°F (27 and 35°C). The closer to 90°F (32°C), the
faster the rate of digestion.
8. Gas production will not start until solids digestion starts in
the digester. The gas line should be equipped with a mois-
ture trap and a flame arrester, and connected to a waste
gas burner.
Be sure the gas line is clear. Scum and undigestible mate-
rial can prevent gas from flowing from the digestion com-
partment. If necessary, remove this scum and debris.
Once sufficient methane gas is produced, the waste gas
should be burned.
9. PROBLEM. Floating sludge on clarifier surface.
Floating sludge may result from sludge not passing from
bottom of clarifier, around the sludge seal, and into the
sludge digester.
a. Try withdrawing more supernatant so the sludge can
flow into the digester.
b. Shut off the sludge scraper. Check the sludge seal by
"feeling" with a pole or rod to remove any screenings
or other objects which might be plugging the hole.
c. Pump less scum or supernatant into the digester. Ex-
cessive pumping may be forcing sludge out of the di-
gestion compartment.
5.932 Abnormal Operation
Abnormal operation occurs when:
1. Inflows are higher than design flows due to storm water
inflow and infiltration.
2. Solids loadings are high due to seasonal or industrial dis-
charges, and
3. Toxic substances or high or low pH liquids are released into
the collection system.
With a single combined sedimentation-digestion unit, there
is little an operator can do in terms of adjusting valves or direct-
ing flows. If abnormal conditions occur occasionally and upset
the clarifier and/or the digestion unit, provisions should be
made to construct an emergency pond to hold the abnormal
flows and substances until they can be treated by the unit
during low flow periods.
5.933 Shutdown Procedures
The unit should be shut down annually for inspection, main-
tenance and repair. If there is only one unit for treating the
wastewater, a standby emergency pond should be available to
contain the wastewater during shutdown. Schedule shutdown
during periods of expected low flows. Shutdown procedures
are as follows:
1. Divert flow to other units or to standby pond.
2. Drain clarifier and digester to drying beds.
3. Wash down inside of unit.
4. Inspect facility. Be sure facility is adequately ventilated and
test for toxic gases, explosive conditions and sufficient oxy-
gen. Look for
a. Corrosion damage
b. Unpainted surfaces
c. Worn parts
d. Cracks and leaks
5. Make necessary repairs.
6. Follow start-up procedures to place unit back on line.
5.934 Operational Strategy
With only one unit, the operator must try to treat the entire
flow. If inflows do not exceed design capacity, problems should
not develop.
1. Follow normal operational procedures.
2. Collect and analyze samples on a regular basis.
3. Plot results of tests and look for trends.
4. Make any necessary adjustments.
5. Maintain all equipment according to schedule.
5.94 Maintenance
1. Lubricate all equipment in accordance with manufacturers'
recommendations.
2. If any tools or other objects fall into clarifier, stop rotation
and remove the tool or object.
3. If scraper mechanism stops moving, determine cause and
remove it before attempting to start mechanism again. DO
NOT TAMPER WITH THE OVERLOAD SWITCH AD-
JUSTMENTS IN AN ATTEMPT TO FORCE THE MA-
CHINE TO OPERATE AGAINST THE OVERLOAD.
5.95 Safety
1. Be careful when removing debris from open tanks. Secure
firm footing so you won't slip or fall. Do not try to lift more
than you can safely lift.
2. Be sure all moving machinery parts have covers or guards.
3. Be aware of the fact that DIGESTER GAS is VERY TOXIC
OR POISONOUS. When mixed with air this gas can BURN
or EXPLODE. Everyone must strictly observe the following
rules:
a. Post a danger sign near the gas dome indicating
"DANGER. NO SMOKING OR OPEN FLAMES."
b. Keep all lighted cigars, cigarettes, pipes or any open fire
away from the digester or digester gas at all times.
c. Do not inhale digester gas.
d. Do not enter the digestion compartment unless it is
empty of all sludge and forced ventilation has cleared it
of gas. Remember that any gas mask must have a self-
contained supply of oxygen for you to breathe.
e. Remove all oil and grease spills and other slippery mat-
ter from surfaces.
5.96 Acknowledgment
The authors wish to thank Dorr-Oliver Incorporated for allow-
ing the use of their material for the preparation of this section.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 150.
5.9A What is a combined sedimentation-digestion unit?
-------
Sedimentation 145
5.9B What abnormal operating conditions might the operator
of a combined sedimentation-digestion unit encounter?
5.9C List the major maintenance items for a combined
sedimentation-digestion unit.
5.10 IMHOFF TANKS
Imhoff tanks are rarely constructed today. Your plant may
consist of ONLY an Imhoff tank if it serves a very small com-
munity or if it was constructed many years ago. It is quite
possible that you may never have operating responsibility for
one of these units. They will be discussed for general knowl-
edge and for the few operators who will have operating re-
sponsibility for them.
The Imhoff tank combines sedimentation and sludge diges-
tion in the same unit. There is a top compartment where
sedimentation occurs and a bottom compartment for digestion
of settled particles (sludge). The two compartments are sepa-
rated by a floor with a slot designed to allow settling particles to
pass through to the digestion compartment (Fig. 5.19).
Wastewater flows slowly through the upper tank as in any
other standard rectangular sedimentation unit. The settling sol-
ids pass through the slot to the bottom sludge-digestion tank.
Anaerobic digestion of solids is the same as in a separate
digester. Gas bubbles are formed in the digestion area by
bacteria. As the gas bubbles rise to the surface, they carry
solid particles with them. The slot is designed to prevent solids
from passing back into the upper sedimentation area as a
result of gasification. Solids would flow from the unit with the
effluent if they were permitted to pass back into the upper
sedimentation area.
The same calculations previously used for clarifiers can be
used to determine loading rates for the settling area of the
Imhoff tank. (Chapter 12, "Sludge Digestion," will explain the
anaerobic process in the sludge digestion area of this unit.)
Some typical values for design and operation of Imhoff tanks
are:
Settling Area
Wastewater Detention Time — 1.0 to 4.0 hours
Surface Settling Rate — 600 to 1200 gpd/sq ft
Weir Overflow Rate — 10,000 to 20,000 gpd/ft
Suspended Solids Removal — 45% to 65%
BOD Removal — 25% to 35%
Digestion Area
Digestion Capacity — 1.0 to 3.0 cu ft/person
Sludge Storage Time — 3 to 12 months
Here are a few operational suggestions:
1. In general, there is no mechanical sludge-scraping device
for removing settled solids from the floor of the settling
areas. Solids may accumulate before passing through the
slot to the digestion area. It may be necessary to push the
accumulation through the slot with a squeegee or similar
device attached to a long pole. Dragging a chain on the
floor and allowing it to pass through the slot is another
method for removing the sludge accumulation.
2. Scum from the sedimentation area is usually collected with
hand tools and placed in a separate container for disposal.
Scum also may be transferred to the gas venting area
where it will work down into the digestion compartment.
Scum in the gas vents should be kept soft and broken up by
soaking it periodically with water or by punching holes in it
and mixing it with the liquid portion of the digestion com-
partment. The addition of hydrated lime may be helpful for
controlling odors from the gas vent area and also for adjust-
ing the chemical balance of the scum for easier digestion if
necessary.
GAS VENTS
SETTLING COMPARTMENT
SLOT
SLUDGE DIGESTION
COMPARTMENT
SLUDGE WlTHORAWAL LINE
Fig. 5.19 Imhoff tank
-------
146 Treatment Plants
3. Some Imhoff tanks have the piping and valving to reverse
the direction of flow from one end toward the other end. If
possible, the flow should be reversed periodically for the
purpose of maintaining an even sludge depth in the diges-
tion compartment. The sludge level in the digestion area
must be lower than the slot in the floor of the settling area to
prevent plugging of the slot. A line of gas bubbles directly
over the slot indicates the sludge level in the digestion
chamber is too high.
4. The explanation of sludge digestion in Chapter 12 will sup-
ply information that can be applied to the digestion area in
the Imhoff tank. Neither sludge mixing nor heating devices
are used in an Imhoff tank. Sludge loading rates, withdrawal
rates, laboratory tests, and visual appearance of sludges
are very similar to what they are in an UNHEATED digester.
If visual appearance and smell are the only methods you
have of judging the sludge, it is safe to assume that if
sludge in the digestion area is relatively odorless or has a
musty smell and is black or very dark in color, the process is
working satisfactorily.
The laboratory testing program for an Imhoff tank should be
complete enough to identify operational problems and to sup-
ply necessary information to regulatory agencies. The follow-
ing minimum program is suggested, assuming adequate labo-
ratory facilities, personnel, and size of the system.
SUGGESTED ANALYSIS USUAL RANGE
Settling Area
Settleable Solids
Suspended Solids
pH
Alkalinity
BOD
Digestion Area
pH
Alkalinity
Vol. Acids
3.0 - 10.0 mlIL
200 - 400 mgIL
6.7 - 7.3
100 - 300 mgIL
200 - 500 mgIL
6.7 - 7.3
1000 - 3000 mgIL
100 - 500 mgIL
TYPICAL
REMOVAL %
75-90
45-65
25-35
Efficiency of operation can be determined by measuring the
settleable solids, suspended solids, or BOD of the influent and
effluent.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 150.
5.1 OA What are the two components of an Imhoff tank?
5.10B Describe the sludge from an Imhoff tank which is
operating properly.
5.10C How could you maintain a fairly level sludge blanket in
the digester portion of an Imhoff tank?
5.10D How can you force settled material into the digestion
compartment?
5.11 SEPTIC TANKS
Septic tanks are used mostly for treating the wastewater
from individual homes or from small populations (such as
camps) where sewers have not been provided. They operate
very much like an Imhoff tank except there is not a separate
digestion compartment. Detention time is usually long (12 to 24
hours) and most settleable solids will remain in the tank. They
must be pumped out and disposed of periodically to prevent
the tank from filling. Part of the solids in the septic tank are
liquified and discharged with the wastewater into the soil man-
tie. Conditions are not favorable for rapid gasification and most
waste stabilization occurs in the soil.
Septic tank effluent is usually disposed of in underground
perforated pipes called LEACH LINES, and sampling of
effluent may be impossible. The ability of the soil mantle to
leach the septic tank effluent is the critical factor in subsurface
waste disposal systems.
One method of operating septic tank effluent leaching sys-
tems is to apply effluent to half of the system while the other
half rests. Monthly switch the flow from one half to the other
half. This procedure gives the leaching system a chance to
recover its percolation ability.
5.12 ADDITIONAL READING
1. MOP 11, Chapter 4, "Sampling of Wastewater" and Chap-
ter 8 "Primary Sedimentation."*
2. NEW YORK MANUAL, Chapter 5, "Primary Treatment."
3. TEXAS MANUAL, Chapter 11, "Sedimentation."
'Depends on edition
5.13 METRIC CALCULATIONS
This section contains the solutions to all problems in this
chapter using metric calculations.
5.130 Conversion Factors
MGD x 3785
=
cu m/day
cu m/day x 0.000 264
=
MGD
gallons x 3.785
=
liters
1000 L
=
1 cu m
ft x 0.3048
=
m
m x 3.281
=
ft
cu ft x 0.028 32
=
liters
L x 0.035 315
=
cu ft
5.131 Problem Solutions
1. The influent BOD to a primary clarifier is 200 mgIL, and the
effluent BOD is 140 mgIL. What is the efficiency of the
primary clarifier in removing BOD?
Known
Infl. BOD, mgIL = 200 mgIL
Effl. BOD, mgIL = 140 mgIL
CALCULATIONS:
Unknown
Prim. Clar. Eff., %
x 100%
1. Calculate the primary clarifier efficiency, %, in removing
BOD.
Efficiency, % = (ln'0ut) x 100%
In
= (200 mgIL -140 mgIL)
200 mgIL
= t60 m9/l) x 100%
200 mgIL
= (0.30) (100%)
= 30% BOD Removal
NOTE: This problem solution is exactly like the solution in the
text because the influent and effluent BODs are given
in mgIL which is the Metric System.
-------
Sedimentation 147
2. The flow to a rectangular sedimentation tank is 12,000 cu m
per day. Tank dimensions are 20 meters long by 10 meters
wide by 3 meters deep. What is the detention time?
Known
Unknown
Flow, cu m/day = 12,000 cu m/day Detention Time, hr
Length, m = 20 m
Width, m = 10m
Depth, m = 3 m
Formulas:
Detention Time, hrs
Tank Volume, cu m x 24 hr/day
Flow, cu m/day
Length, m x Width, m x Depth, m32
Detention Time,
hrs
Tank Vol, cu m
CALCULATIONS:
1. Calculate the tank volume in cubic meters.
Tank Vol, cu m = Length, m x Width, m x Depth, m
= 20 m x 10 m x 3 m
= 600 cu m
2. Estimate the detention time in hours.
_ Tank Volume, cu m x 24 hr/da^
Flow, cu m/day
_ 600 cu m x 24 hr/day
12,000 cu m/day
= 1.2 hours
3. The flow is 20,000 cu m per day in a circular tank with a
30-meter weir diameter. What is the weir overflow rate in
cubic meters per day per meter of weir length?
Known Unknown
Flow, cu m/day = 20,000 cu m/day Weir Overflow Rate,
cu m/day/m
Weir Diameter, m = 30 m
FORMULAS:
Weir Overflow Rate, = Flow, cu m/day
cu m/day/m Length of Weir, m
Length of Circular
Weir, m = ir x Weir Diameter, m
CALCULATIONS:
1. Calculate the length of circular weir in meters.
L« "'Circular = w x Wejr Djameter m
weir, m
= 3.14 x 30 m
= 94.2 m
2. Estimate the weir overflow rate in cubic meters per day per
meter of weir length.
Flow, cu m/day
Weir Overflow,
cu m/day/m
Length of Weir, m
20,000 cu m/day
94.2 m
= 212 cu m/day/m of weir
4. The flow into a rectangular clarifier is 15,000 cu m per day
in a tank 30 meters long and 10 meters wide. What is the
surface loading rate in cubic meters per day per square
meter of surface area?
Known
Flow, cu m/day = 15,000 cu m/day
Length, m = 30 m
Width, m = 10 m
FORMULA:
Surface Loading,
cu m/day/sq m
Unknown
Surface Loading,
cu m/day/sq m
Flow, cu m/day
Surface Area, sq m
CALCULATIONS:
1. Calculate the surface area in square meters.
Surface Area, sq m = Length, m x Width, m33
= 30 m x 10 m
= 300 sq m
Surface Loading,
cu m/day/sq m
2. Estimate the surface loading in cubic meters per day per
square meter of surface area.
_ Flow, cu m/day
Surface Area, sq m
= 15,000 cu m/day
300 sq m
= 50 cu m/day/sq m
5. A circular secondary clarifier with a diameter of 30 meters
treats a flow of 17,000 cubic meters per day (13,000 cu
m/day inflow and 4,000 cu m/day return sludge flow) with a
mixed liquor suspended solids concentration of 4200 mgIL.
What is the solids loading in kilograms of solids per day per
square meter of surface area?
Known
Flow, cu m/day
Diameter, m
MLSS, mgIL
= 17,000 cu m/day
= 30 m
= 4200 mgIL
Unknown
Solids Loading,
kg/day/sq m
FORMULAS:
Solids Applied, _
kg/day
Solids Loading, _
kg/day/sq m
Flow,
cu m x MLSS,
x 1000 L X
1*0
day
Solids Applied, kg/day
1 cu m 1,000,000 mg
Surface Area, sq m
CALCULATIONS:
1. Calculate the solids applied in kilograms per day.
S°kfl/day>Plled' " Ho*. — x MLSS. JD? x !™_L x 1 kq
day
'17,000 cum x 4200
day
' 71,400 kf^day
mg
L
x m1- x.
1 cu m
x !^L x
1,000,000 mg
1kg
1 cu m 1,000,000 mg
32 For a circular clarifier,
Tank Vol, cum = 0.785 x (Diameter, m) x Depth, m
ss For a circular clarifier,
Surface Area, sq m =¦= 0.785 x (Diameter, m)
-------
148 Treatment Plants
2. Calculate the surface area in square meters.
Surface Area, = W_ (Diameter, m)2
sq m 4
= (3.14) (30 m)2
4
= 706.5 sq m
3. Estimate the surface loading in kilograms of solids per day
per square meter of surface area.
. Solids Applied, kg/day
Solids Loading,
kg/day/sq m
Surface Area, sq m
= 71,400 kg/day
706.5 sq m
= 101 kg/day/sq m
gMC Or |
op ?
on
SEDIMENTATION AND FLOTATION
Please answer discussion and review questions before
working the Objective Test.
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
(Lesson 3 of 3 Lessons)
Chapter 5. SEDIMENTATION AND FLOTATION
Write the answers to these questions in your notebook be-
fore continuing. The problem numbering continues from Les-
son 2.
15. How does a combined sedimentation-digestion unit work?
16. What would you do if floating sludge appeared on the
surface of a combined sedimentation-digestion unit?
17. What is the critical factor in subsurface wastewater dis-
posal systems?
SUGGESTED ANSWERS
Chapter 5. SEDIMENTATION AND FLOTATION
Answers to questions on page 117.
5.0A The main difference between the effluent from primary
and secondary clarifiers is that the effluent from a sec-
ondary clarifier is normally clearer than primary effluent.
5.0B The main difference between the sludge from primary
and secondary clarifiers is that primary sludge is usually
denser than secondary sludge.
5.1A Sign if icant check items before starting a circular clarifier
include:
1. Control gates for operation,
2. Clarifier tank for sand and debris,
3. Collector drive mechanism for lubrication, oil level,
drive alignment, and complete assembly,
4. Gaskets, gears, drive chain sprockets and drive
motor for proper installation and rotation,
5. Squeegee blades on the collector plows for proper
installation and operation,
6. All other mechanical items below water line for
proper installation and operation,
7. Tank sumps or hoppers and return lines for debris
and obstructions, and
8. Tank structure for corrosion, cracks and other indi-
cations of structural failure.
5.1 B When the crosspieces in a rectangular clarifier are not
straight across the tank, sludge will be piled higher on
the trailing side and/or the crosspieces will hang up and
cause severe damage to the flight.
5.1C Safety precautions that should be taken during start-up
include:
1. Wear a hard hat when down in the tank for protec-
tion from falling objects;
2. Keep hands away from moving equipment; and
3. When working on equipment, be sure to red tag and
use a lock-out device on start-stop switches and in-
fluent control gates to prevent equipment from start-
ing unexpectedly and causing equipment damage
and/or personal injury.
-------
Sedimentation 149
Answers to questions on page 123.
5.2A Settleable solids, suspended solids, total solids, BOD,
and coliform group bacteria.
5.2B 90% to 95%.
5.2C Influent and effluent.
5 20 Efficiency, % = iln ' QutL 100%
In
= (300 mgIL -120 mgIL) 100o/o
300 mgIL
= 60%
Answers to questions on page 124.
5.3A Often enough to prevent septic conditions or sludge
gasification.
5.3B Stop pumping sludge when it becomes thin. Thin
sludge can be detected by the sound of the sludge
pump, differences in sludge-pump pressure gage
readings, and by visual observation of the sludge.
5.3C Scum can be kept out of the clarifier effluent by a baffle
placed around the inside edge of the overflow weir.
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN LESSON 1
Answers to questions on page 129.
5.6A Short-circuiting occurs in a clarifier when the flow is not
uniform throughout the tank. In this situation the water
flows too rapidly in one or more sections of the clarifier
to allow sufficient time for settling to occur.
5.6B Short-circuiting is undesirable because where the vel-
ocity is too high, particles will not have time to settle.
Where the velocity is too low, undesirable septic condi-
tions may develop.
5.6C Short-circuiting may be corrected by installing weir
plates or baffles.
5.6D Tank Volume, = n
cu ft
x (Diameter, ft) x Depth, ft
= 5L x (80 ft)2 x 10 ft
4
_ 3.14
x 6400 x 10
= 0.785 x 64,000
= 50,240 cu ft
.785
64000
3140000
4710
50240.000
Tank Volume, = 50,240 cu ft x 7.5 gal/cu ft
gal = 376,800 gal 50240
i,0
251200
351680
376800.0
1. Detention
Time, hrs
_ Tank Volume, gal x 24 hr/day
Flow, gal/day
_ 376,8000 gal x 24 hr/day
4,000,000 gal/day
= .376800 x 6
= 2.2608
= 2.3 hrs
2. Weir Overflow _ Flow Rate, gpd
Rate' 9Pd/ft Length of Weir, ft
15923.
= 4,000,000 gpd 251.2)4000000.0
2512
3.14 x 80 ft
= 4.ooo.ooo gpd
251.2 ft
= 15,923 gpd/ft
14880
12560
23200
22608
5920
5024
896 0
753 6
3. Surface Loading Rate
Calculate Surface Area, sq ft
Surface Area, sq ft = ?L_ x (Diameter, ft)2
4
= 314 x (80 ft)2
4
= 0.785 x 6400
= 5,024 sq ft
Surface Loading _ Flow Rate, gpd
Rate, gpd/sq ft Surface Area, sq ft
= 4,000,000 gpd
5,024 sq ft
= 800 gpd/sq ft (close enough)
NOTE: The suspended solids concentration of 190 mg/L was
not needed to solve this problem. Try to determine the
information to solve problems and forget the unimpor-
tant data.
5.6E Solids Loading
Calculate Solids Applied, lbs/day
Solids = Total Flow, MGD x Cone., mg/L x 8.34 lbs/gal
tos/day = (4 0 MGD + 12 MGD> x 2700 mglL x 8 34 lbs/9al
= 117,094 lbs/day
Solids Loading, _ Solids Applied, lbs/day
Ibs/day/sq ft Surface Area, sq ft
= 117,094 lbs/day
5,024 sq ft (from 5.6D)
= 23.3 Ibs/day/sq ft
Answers to questions on page 134.
5.6F Secondary clarifiers are needed in secondary treatment
plants to remove solids from the secondary process.
5.6G Sludge settling in the secondary clarifier may be re-
turned to the primary clarifier to be settled with the pri-
mary sludge, pumped to the beginning of the biological
process for recycling, or pumped directly to the
sludge-handling facilities.
Answers to questions on page 137.
5.7A Safety items that should be considered when reviewing
plans and specifications for clarifiers include:
-------
150 Treatment Plants
1. Access to clarifier;
2. Toeboards and nonskid surfaces on catwalks and
bridges;
3. Adequate lighting;
4. Safety grates over entrances to launders, channels
and effluent pipelines.
5. In a circular clarifier, baffles and valves should be
accessible without having to leave a bridge or cat-
walk; and
6. Guards over moving parts.
5.8A The flotation process is used to remove colloids and
emulsions.
5.8B After.
5.8C Colloids— Very small, finely divided solids (particles
that do not dissolve) that remain dispersed in a liquid for
a long time due to their small size and electrical charge.
Emulsion — A liquid mixture of two or more liquid sub-
stances not normally dissolved in one another, but one
liquid held in suspension in the other.
5.8D The vacuum flotation process consists of aerating the
wastewater and creating a vacuum to pull out the air
which will carry the solids to the water surface.
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN LESSON 2
Answers to questions on pages 144 and 145.
5.9A A combined sedimentation-digestion unit consits of a
small clarifier constructed over a sludge digester.
Treatment units of this type have been designed and
constructed to serve small populations.
5.9B Abnormal operating conditions that might be encoun-
tered include:
1. Inflows higher than design flows,
2. High solids loadings, and
3. Toxic substances or high or low pH levels.
5.9C Major maintenance items for a combined sedi-
mentation-digestion unit include:
1. Lubricate all equipment in accordance with manu-
facturers' recommendations;
2. If a tool or object falls into the clarifier, stop rotation
and remove tool or object; and
3. If scraper mechanism stops moving, determine
cause and remove it before attempting to start
mechanism again.
Answers to questions on page 146.
5.1 OA (1) Settling area, and (2) Sludge digestion area.
5.10B Digested sludge in an Imhoff tank is relatively odorless
or has a musty smell, and it is black or very dark in
color.
5.10C A fairly level sludge blanket is maintained by reversing
the flow at regular intervals.
5.10D Settled material may be forced into the digestion com-
partment by pushing it through the connecting slot with
a squeegee. Dragging a chain on the floor and allow-
ing it to pass through the slot is another method for
removing the sludge accumulation.
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN LESSON 3
OBJECTIVE TEST
Chapter 5. SEDIMENTATION AND FLOTATION
Please write your name and the correct answers on the
answer sheet as directed at the end of Chapter 1. There may
be more than one answer to each question.
EXAMPLE
The purpose of detaining water in a sedimentation tank is to:
1. Store for future use.
2. Allow solids to settle to the bottom.
3. Allow grease to float to the surface.
4. Hold until trickling filter is ready.
5. Provide chlorine contact time.
To answer this question, you should mark on your answer
sheet:
EXAMPLE:
1
I ft: : I I
I
i iftfti
i mi
1. Drowning is a constant hazard for operators of wastewater
treatment plants.
1. True
2. False
2. Primary clarification is a method used to remove settleable
solids.
1. True
2. False
3. Primary clarifiers are designed to remove colloidal solids.
1. True
2. False
4. Flotation and flocculation are both biological treatment
processes.
1. True
2. False
5. An Imhoff tank treats wastewater by both mechanical and
biological treatment processes.
1. True
2. False
6. Plant analysis of samples is a reliable method of measur-
ing clarifier efficiency.
1. True
2. False
-------
Sedimentation 151
7. Generally, pH is significantly affected by a clarifier.
1. True
2. False
8. Influent temperature has little influence on the settling of
solids in a primary clarifier.
1. True
2. False
9. "Bulking" is a wastewater term that indicates how settle-
able solids collect and settle out easily.
1. True
2. False
10. "Short-circuiting" of a clarifier can cause an operator to be
electrocuted.
1. True
2. False
11. "Sludge gasification" means pumping air into sludge.
1. True
2. False
12. If gases bubble to the surface and floating sludge is noted
on the surface of a primary clarifier, this may be a sign of
septic conditions.
1. True
2. False
13. Floating clumps of sludge indicate good flotation in a
clarifier.
1. True
2. False
14. A sludge pump that pumps a thick sludge will sound differ-
ent than when pumping thin sludge.
1. True
2. False
15. Samples taken from a clarifier for testing need to be taken
only at the effluent or discharge pipes.
1. True
2. False
16. Dangerous gases an operator may encounter in and
around a treatment plant include
1. Chlorine.
2. Fumes from gasoline.
3. Helium.
4. Hydrogen sulfide.
5. Methane.
17. What items should be checked before starting a clarifier?
1. Lubricate equipment
2. Remove debris from pipes and tank
3. Run a clarity test
4. Sample effluent
5. Turn off chlorinator
18. What factors influence the settleability of solids in a
clarifier?
1. Detention time
2. Flow velocity and/or turbulence
3. Laboratory analyses
4. Short-circuiting
5. Temperature
19. If short-circuiting occurs in a clarifier, the operator should
1. Change pump disconnect fuses.
2. Check the wiring.
3. Identify the cause.
4. Restart the pump.
5. Try installing baffles.
20. What are "sloughings?"
1. Material settled out in grit channels
2. Material washed off trickling filter media
3. Return activated sludge
4. Waste activated sludge
5. Waste sludge troughs
21. Clarifier equipment or process failures caused by operator
errors include
1. Improper equipment maintenance and housekeeping.
2. Inability to properly adjust aeration rates.
3. Inability to recognize a mechanical-electrical problem.
4. Insufficient frequency or time for removing sludge.
5. Insufficient knowledge to properly interpret results of
laboratory analyses.
22. Abnormal conditions influencing clarifier performance in-
clude
1. Influent BOD of 195 mgIL.
2. Influent suspended solids of 219 mgIL.
3. Septicity from collection system problems.
4. Storm flows and hydraulic overloads.
5. Toxic wastes from industrial spills or dumps.
23. Which of the following is A/OT an indication of poor clarifier
operation?
1. Floating clumps of sludge on water surface
2. Loss of solids over effluent weir
3. Low pH of wastewater and odors
4. Ninety to ninety-five percent settleable solids removal
5. Skimmed solids not entering the scum trough
24. An operator can tell if "thin" sludge is being pumped by
1. Pressure gage readings on the suction and discharge
pipes of the pump.
2. The color of the sludge.
3. The smell of the sludge.
4. The sound of the sludge pump.
5. Visual observation.
25. Skimmed solids may be disposed of by
1. Burying with material from bar screen.
2. Flotation.
3. Incineration.
4. Pumping to a secondary treatment process.
5. Pumping to headworks.
-------
152 Treatment Plants
26. The maintenance program for a properly operating clarifier
should include
1. Analyzing influent and effluent samples.
2. Keeping a list of repairs.
3. Lubricating equipment at regular intervals.
4. Prompt adjustment or repair when necessary.
5. Regular inspection.
27. A sludge collector failure may be detected by observing
1 Broken parts.
2. Equipment stalling.
3. Pump not pumping.
4. Sludge rising to surface.
5. Thin sludge being pumped.
28. Given the following information regarding a primary
sedimentation tank:
a. Raw sludge pump runs for 10 minutes each hour.
b. Raw sludge has 7 percent total solids at start of pump-
ing cycle and 5 percent total solids at end of pumping
cycle.
c. Sludge collectors run constantly.
d. Deep sludge accumulation over entire tank floor.
Would you make any changes in the operation of this pri-
mary sedimentation tank?
1. No, everything is satisfactory.
2. Yes, try to decrease the number of sedimentation tanks
in service.
3. Yes, decrease time of sludge collector operating cycle.
4. Yes, decrease raw sludge pumping cycle.
5. Yes, increase raw sludge pumping cycle.
29. Given the following information regarding a primary
sedimentation tank:
a. Floating sludge near effluent end of tank.
b. Raw sludge pump runs for 10 minutes out of each hour.
c. Raw sludge has 7 percent total solids at start of pump-
ing cycle, 2 percent total solids at end.
d. Sludge collectors turn on for 30 minutes before pump-
ing begins and shut off when pumping starts.
e. Moderate sludge accumulations over entire tank floor.
Would you make any changes in the operation of this pri-
mary sedimentation tank?
1. No, everything is satisfactory.
2. Yes, decrease raw sludge pumping cycle.
3. Yes, increase raw sludge pumping cycle.
4. Yes, decrease time of sludge collector schedule.
5. Yes, increase time of sludge collector schedule.
30. Secondary or final clarifiers are needed to
1. Allow septic conditions to develop.
2. Increase sludge digestion.
3. Prevent secondary flocculation from occurring.
4. Provide a home for organisms.
5. Remove biological solids from wastewater.
31. An Imhoff tank has
1. A piping system that may allow the direction of flow in
the tank to be reversed from one end to the other end.
2. A separate sludge digestion compartment under the
settling area.
3. Gas vents.
4. Mechanical sludge scrapers.
5. Two compartments.
32. Estimate the detention time in a 30,000-gallon sedimenta-
tion tank if the flow is 0.3 MGD. Select the closest answer.
1. 1.5 hr
2. 2.0 hr
3. 2.4 hr
4. 3.3 hr
5. 4.2 hr
33. Estimate the detention time in a sedimentation tank 100 ft
long, 30 ft wide, and 12 ft deep, if the flow is 3.0 MGD.
Select the closest answer.
1. 2.2 hr
2. 2.6 hr
3. 2.9 hr
4. 3.4 hr
5. 3.8 hr
-------
CLEANWATER, U.S.A.
WATER POLLUTION CONTROL PLANT
MONTHLY RECORD
19.
OPERATOR:
Ui
t-
*
o
DAY
WEATHER
o
<9
Z
*
O
mJ
U,
RAW WASTEWATER
EFFLUENT
DIGESTION
REMARKS
SUMMARY DATA
TEMP.
X
a
SETT. SOLIDS
BOD
SUSP. SOLIDS
GRIT- YD?
X
a
BOD
SUSP. SOLIDS
o
a
tn
UJ
IE
«l
-1
O
RAW SLUDGE
GAL / DAY
i
SCUM
GAL / DAY
N
o
o
*
§ 5
£2
(flio
< K
(9 U.
MIXING -HRS
% REMOVAL
BOD
S S
INF. — EFF.
30
41
SLUDGE DATA
% SOLIDS-AVG.
4Jt
1
M
MA
L200
7P
7.3
8
190
1-0
7*
110
1.0
2.1
4750
100
10400
4
LBS. DRY SOLIDS / DAY
ICC3
f
T
M
L05I
7.2
10
70*
?Ift
1.0
7.1
US
106
i,t
?,4
41 OK
110
¦*,?
O
o
0
—
3
W
¦
1.120
M
7.i
II
£20
ttz
IS
7.1
1*4
III
OA
3.0
4JOE
1°
3?
10000
%. VOL. SOLIDS - AVG.
76
4
T
«
OMf
7»
7-1
1
164
a>i
1.0
7.0
140
«
f.t
1.6
3810
no
fiWr
moo
0
Slum* -IC,ooo Sal.
LBS. VOL SOLIDS / DAY
1264
6
F
S
not
?•*
. 1
1
*'1
£10
0.7#
,.7-Q.
7.1
ise
IftO
a«
2.1
400?
4 MO
120
3t
32
110O0
4
LBS. VOL. SOL./IOOO FT.^OAY
25L3
T
S
FMk
cm
61
8
216
P.TS
7-1
140
tot
0.1
ZJD
3115
110
fit
10600
4-
GAL. SLUDGE TO BEDS
4dpoo
8
9
CU. YDS. CAKE REMOVED
22
10
FT.3 GAS / LB. VOL. SOLIDS
bS
12
FT? GAS / MG. FLOW
ia£46
13
CU. YDS. GRIT / MG. FLOW
I.O
14
13
COST DATA
16
17
MAN DAYS 44 PAYROLL
I I250 -
Iff
19
POWER PURCHASED
250 ~
46
OTHER UTILITIES (GAS ETC.)
60 -
21
22
GASOLINE. OIL. GREASE
30"
2?
CHEMICALS S SUPPLIES
60 -
24
29
MAINTENANCE
130 ~
26
VEHICLE COSTS
70 ~
29
OTHER
20"
29
TOTAL
1(870 ~
II
MAX.
OPERATING COST / MG.
I 51.37
MIN.
AV8.
urn
61
1
MS
210
1.0
7.)
135
106
0.1
2.0
415*
IOO
33
toaio
5
OPERATING COST/CAPITA/MG
i o.i9
FLOW meter:
total _2L4S6_ MG
ELECTRIC METER:
LAST _5fi£3
i>. JUI
mult.jkl. xJBL. --
raw sludge:
LAsrfi$aa5L
... watt
STROKES—SCUM
T"T«1 imT7* > 10 =ff*>m.GALS
GAS meter:
LAST H**t*
i>< 3MCTB
TOTAL ttt.llO ft'
¦< -o
o m
s o
?x
$
£
3
o
2
»
W
W
-------
CHAPTER 6
TRICKLING FILTERS
Larry Bristow
-------
156 Treatment Plants
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 6. Trickling Filters
Page
OBJECTIVES 158
GLOSSARY 159
LESSON 1
6.0 How a Trickling Filter Works 161
6.00 Description of a Trickling Filter 161
6.01 Principles of Treatment Process 161
6.02 Principles of Operation 167
6.1 Classification of Filters 169
6.10 General 169
6.11 Standard-Rate Filters 169
6.12 High-Rate Filters 169
6.13 Roughing Filters 169
6.14 Filter Staging 169
6.2 Starting, Operating and Shutting Down a Filter 171
6.20 Pre-Start 171
6.21 Placing Filter in Service 171
6.22 Daily Operation 172
6.23 Shutdown of a Filter 172
6.3 Sampling and Analysis 173
6.30 Important Considerations 173
6.31 Typical Trickling Filter Plant Lab Results 173
6.32 Response to Poor Trickling-Filter Performance 173
LESSON 2
6.4 Operational Strategy 175
6.40 Daily Operating Procedures 175
6.41 Response to Abnormal Conditions 176
6.410 Ponding 176
6.411 Odors 178
-------
Trickling Filters 157
6.412 Filter Flies 178
6.413 Cold Weather Problems 179
6.414 Plant Inflow 179
6.415 Operational Problems with Upstream or
Downstream Treatment Processes 181
6.42 Troubleshooting 181
6.5 Maintenance 183
6.50 Bearings and Seals 183
6.51 Distributor Arms 183
6.52 Fixed Nozzles 183
6.53 Underdrains 185
6.54 Recirculation Pumps 185
6.6 Safety 185
LESSON 3
6.7 Loading Criteria 186
6.70 Typical Loading Rates 186
6.71 Computing Hydraulic Loading 186
6.72 Computing Organic (BOD) Loading 187
6.73 Typical Loading Rates (Metric) 187
6.74 Computing Hydraulic Loading (Metric) 187
6.75 Computing Organic (BOD) Loading (Metric) 188
6.8 Review of Plans and Specifications 188
6.9 Additional Reading on Trickling Filters 189
6.10 Metric Calculations 189
-------
OBJECTIVES
Chapter 6. TRICKLING FILTERS
Following completion of Chapter 6, you should be able to do
the following:
1. Explain the principles of the trickling-filter treatment pro-
cess and the operation of the process,
2. Inspect a new trickling filter for proper installation,
3. Place a new filter into service,
4. Schedule and safely conduct operation and maintenance
duties,
5. Sample influent and effluent, interpret lab results, and
make appropriate adjustments in treatment process,
6. Recognize factors that indicate a trickling filter is not per-
forming properly, identify the source of the problem, and
take corrective action,
7. Develop an operating strategy for a trickling filter,
8. Conduct your duties in a safe fashion,
9. Identify the different types of trickling filters,
10. Determine hydraulic and organic loadings on a trickling
filter, and
11. Keep records for a trickling-filter plant.
-------
Trickling Filters 159
GLOSSARY
Chapter 6. TRICKUNG FILTERS
AEROBIC PROCESS (AIR-O-bick) AEROBIC PROCESS
A waste treatment process conducted under aerobic (in the presence of "free" or dissolved oxygen) conditions.
ANAEROBIC (AN-air-O-bick) ANAEROBIC
A condition in which "free" or dissolved oxygen is NOT present in the aquatic environment.
BIOMASS (BUY-O-MASS) BIOMASS
A mass or clump of living organisms feeding on the wastes in wastewater, dead organisms and other debris. This mass may be
formed for, or function as, protection against predators and storage of food supplies. See ZOOGLEAL FILM.
COLLOIDS (KOL-loids) COLLOIDS
Very small, finely divided solids (particles that do not dissolve) that remain dispersed in a liquid for a long time due to their small size
and electrical charge.
DISTRIBUTOR DISTRIBUTOR
The rotating mechanism that distributes the wastewater evenly over the surface of a trickling filter or other process unit. Also see
FIXED SPRAY NOZZLE.
FIXED SPRAY NOZZLE FIXED SPRAY NOZZLE
Cone-shaped spray nozzle used to distribute wastewater over the filter media, similar to a lawn sprinkling system. A deflector or
steel ball is mounted within the cone to spread the flow of wastewater through the cone, thus causing a spraying action. Also see
DISTRIBUTOR.
FORCE MAIN FORCE MAIN
A pipe that conveys wastewater under pressure from the discharge side of a pump to a point of gravity flow.
HUMUS SLUDGE HUMUS SLUDGE
The sloughed particles of biomass from trickling filter media that are removed from the water being treated in secondary clarifiers.
LOADING LOADING
Quantity of material applied to a device at one time.
MASKING AGENTS MASKING AGENTS
Substances used to cover up or disguise unpleasant odors. Liquid masking agents are dripped into the wastewater, sprayed into the
air, or evaporated (using heat) with the unpleasant fumes or odors and then discharged into the air by blowers to make an
undesirable odor less noticeable.
MICROORGANISMS (micro-ORGAN-is-zums) MICROORGANISMS
Very small organisms that can be seen only through a microscope. Some microorganisms use the wastes in wastewater for food
and thus remove or alter much of the undesirable matter.
NITRIFICATION (NYE-tri-fi-KAY-shun) NITRIFICATION
A process in which bacteria change the ammonia and organic nitrogen in wastewater into oxidized nitrogen (usually nitrate). The
second-stage BOD is sometimes referred to as the "nitrification stage" (first-stage BOD is called the "carbonaceous stage").
ORIFICE (OR-uh-fiss) ORIFICE
An opening in a plate, wall, or partition. In a trickling-filter distributor, the wastewater passes through an orifice to the surface of the
filter media. An orifice flange set in a pipe consists of a slot or hole smaller than the pipe diameter. The difference in pressure in the
pipe above and below the orifice may be related to flow in the pipe.
-------
160 Treatment Plants
PARALLEL OPERATION PARALLEL OPERATION
When wastewater being treated is split and a portion flows to one treatment unit while the remainder flows to another similar
treatment unit. Also see SERIES OPERATION.
PHYSICAL WASTE TREATMENT PHYSICAL WASTE TREATMENT
PROCESS PROCESS
Physical waste treatment processes include use of racks, screens, comminutors, and clarifiers (sedimentation and flotation).
Chemical or biological reactions are not an important part of a physical treatment process.
PONDING PONDING
A condition occurring on trickling filters when the hollow spaces (voids) become plugged to the extent that water passage through
the filter is inadequate. Ponding may be the result of excessive slime growths, trash, or media breakdown.
PROTOZOA (pro-toe-ZOE-ah) PROTOZOA
A group of microscopic animals (usually single-celled) that sometimes cluster into colonies.
RECIRCULATION RECIRCULATION
The return of part of the effluent from a treatment process to the incoming flow.
SECONDARY TREATMENT SECONDARY TREATMENT
A wastewater treatment process used to convert dissolved or suspended materials into a form more readily separated from the
water being treated. Usually the process follows primary treatment by sedimentation. The process commonly is a type of biological
treatment process followed by secondary clarifiers that allow the solids to settle out from the water being treated.
SERIES OPERATION SERIES OPERATION
When wastewater being treated flows through one treatment unit and then flows through another similar treatment unit. Also see
PARALLEL OPERATION.
SHOCK LOAD SHOCK LOAD
The arrival at a plant of waste which is toxic to organisms in sufficient quantity or strength to cause operating problems. Possible
problems include odors and sloughing off of the growth or slime on the trickling-filter media. Organic or hydraulic overloads also can
cause a shock load.
TRICKLING FILTER TRICKLING FILTER
A treatment process in which the wastewater trickles over media that provide the opportunity for the formation of slimes or biomass
which contain organisms that feed upon and remove wastes from the water being treated.
TRICKLING-FILTER MEDIA TRICKLING-FILTER MEDIA
Rocks or other durable materials that make up the body of the filter. Synthetic (manufactured) media have been used successfully.
TWO-STAGE FILTERS TWO-STAGE FILTERS
Two filters are used. Effluent from the first filter goes to the second filter, either directly or after passing through a clarifier.
ZOOGLEAL FILM (ZOE-glee-al) ZOOGLEAL FILM
A complex population of organisms that form a "slime growth" on the trickling-filter media and break down the organic matter in
wastewater. These slimes consist of living organisms feeding on the wastes in wastewater, dead organisms, silt, and other debris.
"Slime growth" is a more common word.
-------
Trickling Filters 161
CHAPTER 6. TRICKLING FILTERS
(Lesson 1 of 3 Lessons)
6.0 HOW A TRICKLING FILTER WORKS
6.00 Description of a Trickling Filter
In the initial chapters of this course, you have learned about
physical methods of wastewater treatment. In general, these
techniques (processes) consist of the screening of large parti-
cles, settling of heavy material, and floating of light material by
preliminary and primary treatment units (screen, grit channel,
clarifier). Although primary treatment is very efficient for remov-
ing settleable solids, it is not capable of removing lighter sus-
pended solids or dissolved solids which may exert a strong
oxygen demand on the receiving waters.
In order to remove the very small suspended solids (colloids)
and dissolved solids, most waste treatment plants now being
built include SECONDARY TREATMENT.1 This additional pro-
cess increases overall plant removal of suspended solids and
BOD to 90 percent or more. The two most common secondary
treatment processes are trickling filters and activated sludge.
This chapter will deal with TRICKLING FILTERS.2
Figures 6.1 and 6.2 show where a trickling filter usually is
located in a plant.
Most trickling filters are large-diameter, shallow, cylindrical
structures filled with stone and having an overhead distributor.
(See Fig. 6.3 and Table 6.1.) Many variations of this design
have been built. When natural media (stones) are used, the
trickling filter is usually cylindrical with a shallow bed; when
synthetic media (plastics) are used, the filter could be cylindri-
cal or rectangular with a much deeper bed. Some recent de-
signs have used redwood packing and a deep bed. Square or
rectangular filters have been constructed with fixed sprinklers
for wastewater distribution. Another type of filter is called the
"rotating biological contactor" and is discussed in detail in
Chapter 7. This contactor treats the wastewater using methods
similar to a trickling filter except instead of applying water over
the media, the media are rotated through the wastewater being
treated. The structures for trickling filters or rotating biological
contactors may be covered for odor-control purposes, or to
prevent freezing in some areas.
6.01 Principles of Treatment Process
Trickling filters, biological oxidation beds, and rotating
biological contactors consist of three basic parts:
1. The media (and retaining structure),
2. The underdrain system, and
3. The distribution system.
The media provide a large surface area upon which a biolog-
ical slime growth develops. This slime growth, sometimes
called a ZOOGLEAL FILM,3 contains the living organisms that
break down the organic material. The media may be rock, slag,
coal, bricks, redwood blocks, molded plastic (Fig. 6.4), or any
other sound, durable material. The media should be of such
sizes and stacked in such a fashion to provide empty spaces
(voids) for air to ventilate the filter and keep conditions aerobic.
For rock, the size will usually be from about two inches to four
inches (5 to 10 cm). Although actual size is not too critical, it is
important that the media be uniform in size to permit adequate
ventilation. The media depth ranges from about three to eight
feet (1 to 2.5 meters) for trickling filters.
The underdrain system of a trickling filter has a sloping bot-
tom. This leads to a center channel which collects the filter
effluent. The underdrain system also supports the media and
permits air flow. Common materials and methods for construct-
ing underdrain systems include the use of spaced redwood
stringers and of prefabricated blocks constructed of concrete,
vitrified clay, or other suitable material.
The distribution system, in the vast majority of cases, is a
rotary-type distributor which consists of two or more horizontal
pipes supported a few inches above the filter media by a cen-
tral column. The wastewater is fed from the column through the
horizontal pipes and is distributed over the media through
orifices located along one side of each of these pipes (or
arms). Rotation of the arms is due either to the rotating water-
sprinkler reaction from wastewater flowing out the orifices ("jet
like") or by some mechanical means. The distributors are
equipped with mechanical-type seals at the center column to
prevent leakage and protect the bearings, guy- or stay rods for
seasonal adjustment of the distributor arms to maintain an
1 Secondary Treatment. A wastewater treatment process used to convert dissolved or suspended materials Into a form more readily separated
from the water being treated. Usually the process follows primary treatment by sedimentation. The process commonly is a type of biological
treatment process followed by secondary clarlfiers that allow the solids to settle out from the water being treated.
2 Trickling Filters. A treatment process in which the wastewater trickles over media that provide the opportunity for the formation of slimes or
blomass which contain organisms that feed upon and remove wastes from the water being treated. Trickling filters are sometimes called
biofiltors, acceto filters or aerofilters, depending on the recirculation pattern.
3 Zoogieal Film (ZOE-glee-al). A complex population of organisms that form a "slime growth" on the trickling-filter media and break down the
organic matter in wastewater. These slimes consist of living organisms feeding on the wastes in wastewater, dead organisms, silt, and other
debris. "Slime growth" Is a more common word.
-------
162 Treatment Plants
TEEATMEMT PgQ6&^
PUNCTlOW
Pe£Tff£ATM£Ur
INFLUENT
e£MOt/£S
^CGEENIN^ 0£££/£ (%&/// 7&4/L4A/£}*y/j.,
] POS6/S^£ 6j?/A/0£j&:£%'A/ 7&/Z4Af7~/?aiVj
&Q\T (2©W0VAU 10£MO1/£S &AA/0 t&eAVZZ-
r 1 (UAl/l & J-AA/P £/tt)
IPlJg-AEGAriDN I £#£6H£M6 m5T£ M4r£/2
'PAfe|l iU£lP6 ££MOI/£ £>/Z
plow Mere<2 M£A6ue£S % ff&zoeps £u>/v
0P/A4A&P
T^£AW£A/T
^epwewfAfioM
A(J(7 ptOTAriOM
SE&wmev
TJ2£A7~M£A/T
eSMOl/BS 4£77Z£Agie
f£Z0ATAg/£MAT^/Al'S
WANPUN^
7~/P£Arg SOi/PS &£Atf>y£P
BV or//£& &e££
££MOr£S &/&?£W0££>
{ P/6£0£l/£/? 60/./0S
PI4>IMP£CTlOK> K/ltf PA7?/0&£A//d gACr£e/A
e^ujewf
F/g. 6.1 Flow diagram of treatment plant
-------
RECIRCULATION LINE
RECIRCULATION LINE
j OPTIONAL
!RECIRCULATION
l OPTIONAL
! RECIRCULAT
PR I MARY
CLARIFIER
SECONDARY
TRICKLING
FILTER
PRIMARY
TRICKLING
FILTER
PRIMARY
CLARIFIER
RAW SLUDGE
SECONDARY
CLARIFIER
HUMUS SLUDGE
TRICKLING FILTER
EFFLUENT
SUPERNATANT
ANAEROBIC
DIGESTER
SECONDARY)
ANAEROBIC
DIGESTER
(PRIMARY)
SECONDARY CLARIFIER
EFFLUENT
DRY
SOLIDS
RECEIVING
WATERS
PRETREATMENT
CHLORINE CONTACT
SOLIDS
DENATERING
o
2
5"
-------
164 Treatment Plants
DISTRIBUTOR ARM
ROTATION
BUCKLE
r.CENTjER
RETARDER
OUTLET
SPLASH PLATES
DISTRIBUTOR-,
beariings •
RETAINING
WALL
OUTLET
VALVE
SUPPORT GRILL
UNDERDRAINAGE SYSTEM
VENTILATION
SLOPED FLOOR
UNDERDRAIN CHANNEL
OUTLET BOX
INLET PIPE
OUTLET PIPE
Fig. 6.3 Trickling filter
1
-------
Trickling Filters 165
TABLE 6.1 PURPOSE OF TRICKLING FILTER PARTS
Part
1. Inlet Pipe
2. Distributor
3. Distributor Bearings
4. Distributor Arm
5. Outlet Orifice
6. Speed-retarder Orifice
7. Splash Plate
8. Arm Dump-gate
9. Filter Media
10. Support Grill
11. Underdrain System
Purpose
Conveys wastewater to be
treated to trickling filter.
Supports rotating distributor
arms.
Allow distributor arms to rotate.
Conveys wastewater to outlet
orifices located along arms.
Controls flow to filter media.
Adjustable to provide even dis-
tribution of wastewater to each
square foot of filter media.
Regulates speed of distributor
arms.
Distributes flow from orifices
evenly over filter media.
Drains distributor arm and con-
trols filter flies along filter re-
taining wall. Also used for
flushing distributor arm to re-
move accumulated debris
which might block outlet
orifices.
Provide a large surface area
upon which the biological slime
growth develops.
Keeps filter media in place and
out of underdrainage system.
Collects treated wastewater
from under filter media and
conveys it to underdrain chan-
nel. Also permits air flow
through media.
Part
12. Underdrain Channel
13. Outlet Box
14. Outlet Valve
15. Outlet Pipe
16. Retaining Wall
17. Ventilation Port
18. Stay Rod
19. Tumbuckleon
Stay Rod
20. Center Well
21. Splitter Box
22. Recirculation Pump
Purpose
Drains filter effluent to outlet
box.
Collects filter effluent before it
flows to next process.
Regulates flow of filter effluent
from outlet box into outlet pipe.
Closed when filter is to be
flooded.
Conveys filter effluent to next
treatment process.
Holds filter media in place.
Allows air to flow through
media.
Supports distributor arm.
Permits adjusting and leveling
of distributor arm in order to
produce even distribution of
wastewater over the media.
Provides for higher water head
to maintain equal flow to dis-
tributor arms. Usually a head
of 18 to 24 inches (45 to 60
cm) is maintained on the
orifices.
Divides flow to trickling filters,
for recirculation or to secon-
dary clarifiere.
Returns or recirculates flows to
trickling filters.
-------
Fig. 6.4 Installation of synthetic media in trickling filter
(Courtesy of The Dow Chemical Company)
-------
Trickling Filters 167
even distribution of wastewater over the media, and quick-
opening or arm dump-gates at the end of each arm to permit
easy flushing.
The fixed-nozzle distribution system is not as common as
the rotary type. The nozzles are located on the surface of the
filter like a lawn sprinkler system. Each fixed-nozzle consists of
a circular orifice with an inverted cone-shaped deflector
mounted above the center. The deflector breaks the flow into a
spray. Some types have a steel ball in the inverted cone. (See
Fig. 6.5.) The fixed-nozzle system requires an elaborate piping
system to insure even distribution of the wastewater. The noz-
zles extend six to twelve inches (15 to 30 cm) above the media
and are shaped so that an overlapping spray pattern exists at
the start of dosing when the head in the dosing tank is the
greatest. The pattern is carefully worked out to provide a rela-
tively even distribution of the wastewater.
Flow is usually intermittent and is controlled by automatic
siphons which regulate the flow from dosing tanks. (See Fig.
6.5.) Dosing tanks and siphons should be constructed to facili-
tate cleaning and reduce problems caused by corrosion. At-
tempt to record the time required to fill and discharge the dos-
ing chamber. If this time becomes shorter, this could indicate
that grease and solids are accumulating in the siphon and
pipes and should be removed.
6.02 Principles and Operation
The maintenance of a good growth of organisms on the filter
media is crucial to successful operation.
The term "filter" is rather misleading because it indicates
that solids are separated from liquid by a straining action. This
is not the case. Passage of wastewater through the filter
causes the development of a gelatinous coating of bacteria,
protozoa, and other organisms on the media. This growth of
organisms absorbs and utilizes much of the suspended, colloi-
dal, and dissolved organic matter from the wastewater as it
passes over the growth in a rather thin film. Part of this material
is utilized as food for production of new cells, while another
portion is oxidized to carbon dioxide and water. Partially de-
composed organic matter together with excess and dead film
is continuously or periodically washed (sloughed) off and
passes from the filter with the effluent.
For the oxidation (decomposition) processes to be carried
out, the biological film requires a continuous supply of dis-
solved oxygen which may be absorbed from the air circulating
through the filter voids (spaces between the rocks or other
media). Adequate ventilation nf thn filter must be provided;
therefore the voids in the filter media must be kept open. Venti-
lation may be by either natural ventilation or by a forced air
ventilation system. CjoggafLyoids can create operational prob-
lems including ponding and reduction in overall filter efficiency.
A method of increasing the efficiency of trickling filters is to
add recirculation. Recirculation is a process in which filter
effluent is recycled and brought into contact with the biological
film more than once. Recycling of filter effluent increases the
contact time with the biological film and helps to seed the lower
portions of the filter with active organisms. Due to the in-
creased flow rate per unit of area, higher velocities occur which
tend to cause more continuous and uniform sloughing of ex-
cess or aged growths. Uniform and continuous slouohinn of
growths is important because this provides a more aggressive
surface of new growths to treat the wastewater. Sloughing of
growths prevents ponding and improves ventilation through
the filter. Increased hydraulic loadings also decreases the op-
portunity tor snail artd filter fly breeding. The thickness oTThe
biological growtn nas Deen observed to be directly related to
the organic strength of the wastewater (the higher the BOD,
the thicker the layers of organisms). By the use of recirculation,
the strength of wastewater applied to the filter can be diluted,
thus helping to prevent excessive build-up of growths.
Recirculation may be constant or intermittent and at a steady
or fluctuating rate. Sometimes recirculation (recycling) is prac-
ticed only during periods of low flow to keep rotary distributors
in motion, to prevent drying of the filter growths, or to prevent
freezing. Recirculation in proportion to flow may be utilized to
reduce the strength of the wastewater applied to the filter,
while steady recirculation tends to even out the highs and lows
of organic loading. Steady recirculation, however, requires the
use of more energy.
Almost any organic waste which can be successfully treated
by other aerobic biological processes can be treated on trick-
ling filters. This includes, in addition to domestic wastewater,
such wastewaters as might come from food processing, textile,
carbonated beverage, dairy and fermentation industries, and
certain pharmaceutical processes. Industrial wastewaters
which cannot be treated are those which contain excessive
concentrations of toxic materials such as pesticide residues,
heavy metals, and highly acidic or alkaline wastes.
For maximum efficiaocv.-thf> slirT1ft nrnwttlS nn thp filtfff
media should bgkSptfairly aprnhir This can be accomplished
"by proper desigrfof the wastewater collection system, proper
operation of primary clarifiers, or by pretreatment of the
wastewater by aeration or addition of recycled filter effluent.
The air supply to the slimes may be improved by increased air
or wastewater recirculation. The thin slime growth may be
aerobic on the surface, but anaerobic next to the media. A
trickling filter media of rock or slag can accumulate slimes only
on the outside surface, but manufactured media provide con-
siderably more surface area per unit of dead space.
The temperatures of the wastewater and of the climate also
affect filter operation, with temperature of the wastewater
being the more important. Of course, temperature of the
wastewater will vary with the weather. Within limits, activity of
the organisms increases as the temperature rises. Therefore,
higher loadings and greater efficiency are possible in warmer
climates if aerobic conditions can be reasonably maintained in
the filter.
-------
DISCHARGE LEVEL
AIR VENT
BLOW-OFF TRAP
TO FILTER
MAIN TRAP
STEEL BALL
AUTOMATIC SIPHON,
OR DOSING CHAMBER
DEFLECTOR
FIXED-SPRAY NOZZLES
Fig. 6.5 Siphon and nozzle details for fixed-spray filters
-------
Trickling Filters 169
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 190.
6.0A Primary treatment is effective in removing (a)
and (b) , but not nearly as
effective in removing (c)
6.0B What is the purpose of "secondary treatment"?
6.0C How does the trickling-filter process work?
6.0D What causes the distributor arms or pipes to rotate on a
trickling filter?
6.0E How does recirculation increase the efficiency of a trick-
ling filter?
6.1 CLASSIFICATION OF FILTERS
6.10 General
Depending upon the hydraulic and organic loadings applied,
filters are classified as standard-rate, high-rate, or roughing
filters. Further designations such as single-stage, two-stage,
and series or parallel are used to indicate the flow pattern of
the plant. The hydraulic loading applied to a filter is the total
volume of liquid, including recirculation, expressed as gallons
per day per square foot of filter surface area (gpd/sq ft). The
organic loading is expressed as the pounds of BOD applied
per day per 1,000 cubic feet of filter media (lbs BOD/day/1000
cu ft). Where recirculation is used, an additional organic load-
ing will be placed on the filter; however, this added loading is
omitted in most calculations because it was included in the
influent load. Procedures for calculating the hydraulic and or-
ganic loadings are given in Section 6.7, "Loading Criteria."
6.11 Standard-Rate Filters
The standard-rate filter is operated with a hydraulic loading
range of 25 to 100 gals/day/sq ft (1 to 4 MGD/acre), and an
organic BOD loading of 5 to 25 lbs/day/1000 cu ft (200 to 1000
Ibs/day/ac ft). The filter media is usually rock with a depth of 6
to 8 feet, with application to the filter by a rotating distributor.
Many are equipped to provide some recirculation during low
flow periods.
The filter growth is often heavy and, in addition to the bac-
teria and PROTOZOA* many types of worms, snails, and in-
sect larvae can be found. The growth usually sloughs off at
intervals, noticeably in spring and fall. The effluent from a
standard-rate filter treating municipal wastewater is usually
quite stable with BODs as low as 20 to 25 mg/L.
6.12 High-Rate Filters
High-rate filters were the result of trying to reduce costs
associated with standard-rate filters and attempting to treat
increased wasteloads with the same facility. Studies indicated
that essentially the same BOD reductions could be obtained at
the higher design loadings.
High-rate filters usually have rock media with a depth of 3 to
5 feet. Recommended loadings range from 100 to 1000 gal/
day/sq ft (4 to 40 MGD/ac) and 25 to 300 lbs BOD/day/1000 cu
ft (1000 to 13,000 Ibs/day/ac ft). These filters are designed to
receive wastewater continually, and practically all high-rate in-
stallations utilize recirculation. Loadings may be higher for syn-
thetic media.
Due to the heavy flow of wastewater over the media, more
uniform sloughing of the filter growths occurs from high-rate
filters. This sloughed material is somewhat lighter than from a
standard-rate unit and therefore more difficult to settle.
Effluents with BODs as low as 20 to 50 mg/L are sometimes
produced by high-rate plants treating municipal wastewater.
6.13 Roughing Filters
A roughing filter is actually a high-rate filter receiving a very
high organic loading. Any filter receiving an organic loading of
over 300 lbs of BOD/day/1000 cu ft of media is considered to
be in this class. This type of filter is used primarily to reduce the
organic load on subsequent oxidation processes such as a
second-stage filter or activated-sludge process. Many times
they are used in plants which receive strong organic industrial
wastes. They are also used where an intermediate (50-70 per-
cent BOD removal) degree of treatment is satisfactory.
Operation of the filter is basically the same as for the high-
rate filters with recirculation. OVERALL BOD reductions are
much lower, but reductions PER UNIT VOLUME OF FILTER
MEDIA are greater.
6.14 Filter Staging
Fig. 6.6 shows various filter and clarifier layouts. The deci-
sion as to the number of filters (or stages) required is one of
design rather than operation. In general, however, at smaller
plants where the flow is fairly low, the strength of the raw
wastewater is average, and effluent quality requirements are
not too strict, a single-stage plant (one filter) is often sufficient
and most economical. In slightly overloaded plants, the addi-
tion of some recirculation capability can sometimes improve
the effluent quality enough to meet receiving water standards
and NPDES permit requirements without the necessity of add-
ing more stages.
In two-stage filter plants, two filters are operated in series.
Sometimes a secondary clarifier is installed between the two
filters. Recirculation is almost universally practiced at two-
stage plants with many different arrangements being possible.
Choice of recirculation scheme used is based on consideration
of which arrangement produces the best effluent under the
particular conditions of wastewater strength and other charac-
teristics. (See Fig. 6.6)
4 Protozoa (pro-toe-ZOE-ah). A group of microscopic animals (usually single-celled) that sometimes cluster Into colonies.
-------
170 Treatment Plants
RECIRCULATION LINE
INFLUENT
EFFLUENT
PRIMARY CLARIFIER
SECONDARY CLARIFIER
TRICKLING FILTER
Typical Single-Stage Recirculation Patterns
Typical Two-Stage Recirculation Patterns
Fig. 6.6 Trickling filter recirculation patterns
-------
Trickling Filters 171
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 190.
6.1 A What are the three general classifications of trickling
filters?
6.1 B What are the principal differences between standard-
rate and high-rate filters?
6.2 STARTING, OPERATING AND SHUTTING DOWN A
FILTER
6.20 Pre-Start5
A new plant is seldom started up without some unexpected,
frustrating problems. Some careful inspecting ahead of time
can prevent many of these situations.
If at all possible, you should arrange to be present when your
new equipment is serviced. You should see that the .correct-oil—
is used in all oil reservoirs. Many contractors will put motor oil
"IrTeverything and consider it serviced. For future mfprgnrp|
record the amount and type of oil each reservoir holds.
After the oil has been installed in a distributor check thn
arms for even adjustment and level. Rotate the unit by hand
and observe tofSfhooth turning. Any vibration or roughness
should be corrected before putting the unit in service.
If the distributor has adjustable orifices, get the erection
sheet and a rule and check out the opfi«» setting? Fila the
erection sheet for future reference.
In a trickling filter plant with fixed-spray nozzles, each nozzle
sho"irt ha nhftnkad to insure that it is free of foreign objects.
In order to prevent.damage to pumps, crawl into the under-
drain svstemof the filter and remQye^oyjdebus-tmcksuaieces
of wood, and other debris). "Chepk painter| surfaces for dam-
aged areas. Touch these up before they get wet to prevent
corrosion and further damage. A few nicks and scratches in a
distributor arm can seriously affect the life of the original pro-
tective coatings.
Check al| waives in the svstaiaJor smooth operation. On
sliding-gate valves, see that the gates seat properly. There are
adjustable wedges and stops on this type of valve. With the
valve adjusted, set the lock nut on the stem to prevent jamming
or closing the gate too tightly. These small precautions will
yield years of trouble-free valve operation.
In addition to the general items covered in this section, you
should be certain that the correct manufacturer's manual has
been furnished for each piece of equipment. Read each man-
ual carefully and follow the given recommendations. Obtain the
oils and greases recommended; or, it you buy from one oil
company, have their representative furnish you a WRITTEN
LIST of the company's products that are equivalent to those
recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
6.21 Placing Filter in Service
Try to schedule the starting of trickling filters during late April
through garly June (depends on local conditions). This proce-
dure will produce the most growth during the shortest period of
time. Problems avoided will include wet weather flows in the
spring, odors in the summer, the dormant bacteria in the win-
ter.
When you have checked out all equipment mechanically,
starting up the trickling-tnter portion of tne plant is very simple.
Start the wastewater flow to the filters, observing the rotating
arms carefully for smooth operation, speed of rotation, and
even distribution of the waste over the media. Time the speed
of rotation, record the flow rate, and loo them for futureTrefer-
ence. ' ' ~
NOTE: Starting up recirculation may be tricky in some plants.
The pump may run out of water before the return from
the filter has begun. You may have to block the chan-
nels (launders) in the clarifier and build up extra water
before starting the pump. Conversely, shutting off recir-
culation will result in a surge of water because the
pump is no longer removing water, but water is still
returning from the filter.
For fixed nozzles, observe the spray pattern. Usually some
debris will show up to plug some of the nozzles, the amount
depending on how thoroughly the plant was checked out prior
to start-up. Be sure to keep the nozzles clear so that the
wastewater is distributed over all of the filter media. Regular
care is required to keep fixed nozzles working properly.
Several days will pass before any growth starts to develop
on the filter media, and up to several weeks will pass before full
development occurs. Timfl nf.yaar weather conditions, and
.strength of the waste are all factors which """ flffpir*thQ timo
nt^rlftri fnr nrnwlh riffUBlPPment.
During this period of growth development, an unstable
effluent will be produced. This effluent will exert a pollutional
load on the receiving waters. Heavy chlorination is usually
used during this time to reduce the pollutional load and the
health hazard to some extent.
In some locations, such as where fish are threatened, the
use of chlorine in this manner may be restricted. If an older
plant is being phased out, it may be possible to load the new
facilities lightly or intermittently until a full growth is established.
Starting-up of pumps, clarifiers, and other equipment is dis-
cussed in other chapters.
s Contracts for treatment plant construction usually include services of the consultant and contractor to assist in start-up of new facilities. The
operator should make full use of these services.
-------
172 Treatment Plants
6.22 Daily Operation
Once growth on the media has been established and the
plant is in "normal operation," very little routine operational
control is required. Careful daily observation is important.
Items to be checked daily are:
1. Any indication of ponding,
2. Filter flies,
3. Odors,
4. Plugged orifices,
5. Roughness or vibration of the distributor arms, and
6. Leakage past the seal.
Refer to the appropriate paragraphs in the following section
on operational problems for procedures to correct these condi-
tions.
Operation of clarifiers is interconnected with trickling-filter
operation. If the recirculation pattern permits, it is a good idea
jp rati irn filter affluent to the primary clarifier? This is a very
effective odor-control measure. In some plants, increasing the
recirculation rate will increase the hydraulic loading on the
clarifier. BE SURE THE HYDRAULIC LOADING REMAINS
WITHIN THE ENGINEERING DESIGN LIMITS. If the hydraulic
loading is too low, septic conditions may develop in the
clarifier. Excessively high loadings may wash solids out of the
clarifier.
Recirculation during low inflow periods of the day and night
may help to keep the slime growths wet, minimize fly develop-
ment and wash off excessive slime growths. Reduce or stop
recirculation during high flow periods, if necessary, to avoid
clarifier problems from hydrai i[ir nvprina^jpg Recirculation of
.final clarifier ettiuenfcjilutes influentwastewater and, recircu-
lated sludpe improvesslime development on tfie medjaT
Proper recirculation rates help to cSfftrol snail po(5Uiail6rison
the media.
You should, by evaluating your own operating records, ad-,
just the process to obtain the best possible results for tha laast
cost, rower costs are a large itemin a plant budget. In order to
"conserve energy, use the lowest recirculation rat^ that will
yjfilrl, gnnrl results. Be careful not to cause ponding or other
problems that result from recirculation rates that are too low.
Also, reduced hydraulic loadings mean better settling in the
clarifiers. This results in less chlorine usage in plants which
disinfect the final effluent, since organic matter exerts a high
chlorine demand. If filter effluent, rather than secondary
clarifier effluent, is recirculated, the hydraulic loading on the
secondary clarifier is not affected.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on pages 190 and 191.
6.2A Prepare a check list of items that should be inspected
before a trickling filter is placed in service.
6.2B During start-up of a trickling filter, why should the plant
effluent be heavily chlorinated?
6.2C Prepare a check list of items needing daily inspection
during "normal operation."
6.2D What may happen to a clarifier effluent if the clarifier is
not operated within design hydraulic loadings?
6.23 Shutdown of a Filter
Always take a few minutes to plan what you are going to do
before shutting down a major plant process or piece of equip-
ment, such as a trickling filter, regardless of the seriousness of
the problem or the need for immediate action. Items that must
be considered are listed below.
1. What is the incoming flow? Could a shutdown be scheduled
at a better time such as during lower flows or when more
operators are available to perform the work?
2. How will a shutdown affect the rest of the plant? When the
process or equipment is placed back on line, will it cause
development of a hydraulic surge which will overload other
processes (clarifiers) or equipment (such as chlorinators)?
3. If the filter is to be shut down for maintenance, are the
necessary tools and other items (such as funnels, buckets,
and lubricants) available?
4. Is there any other task that should be performed while the
unit is off the line? For example, does one of the recircula-
tion pumps need repacking?
To shut down a trickling filter, consider the following step-
by-step procedures if they apply to your treatment plant:
1. Inspect your plant to be sure there are no abnormal condi-
tions hindering the effectiveness of other operating areas
and process units.
2. If the filter to be taken out of service has filter influent and
recirculation pumps that supply ONLY the filter being shut
down, reduce the pump speed to the minimum range. Re-
ducing the speed of a pump will tend to relieve a part of the
surge created to the remaining process units when the filter
is shut down. Also, due to the reduced load when the pump
is started again, the life of variable speed pumps using belt
drives will be extended.
3. Open the end gates on the distributor arms of the filter to be
shut down in order to flush the arms for a few minutes. Be
very careful when opening the end gates because the dis-
tributor arms are moving. Do not flip the level too far or the
lever can hit the media, be damaged, and stop the rotation.
4. Stop the influent flow (feed) and recirculation pumps for the
filter and close the pump discharge valves. Tag and lock out
the pump motor starters. The filter distributor will stop rotat-
ing soon because no water is flowing out the outlet orifices.
WARNING. NEVER ATTEMPT TO STOP A ROTATING
DISTRIBUTOR BY STANDING IN FRONT OF IT OR
GRABBING IT WITH YOUR HANDS.
5. Check the remaining plant parts for proper operation, par-
ticularly wet wells and distrubution or diversion structures
between the other filters and clarifiers for normal water
levels and position of flow control valves.
6. Once the distributor arm has stopped rotating, remove de-
bris and rags from the distributor-arm orifice plates. Also
remove from the top of the media any debris and rags which
could have been dumped during flushing of the distributor
arms.
If the filter is to be left out-of-service for several days or
longer, the following steps should be taken.
1. Close the filter underdrain outlet gates to prevent flow from
other units entering the underdrain channel.
2. Drain or pump down the underdrain channel to prevent
odors and insects from developing in the captured (stag-
nant) wastewater.
3. Hose down the distributor arms, side walls, vent ducts, and
underdrain channels.
4. Remove any grit or debris from the main underdrain collec-
-------
Trickling Filters 173
tion channel. Inspect the underdrains and remove any de-
bris in order to prevent stoppages.
5. Check the oil level in the distributor turntable for proper
level and the possible presence of water.
6. Inspect the turntable seal.
7. Consider removal of material (biomass) from media if
growths are very heavy. If not removed, excessive growths
may cause ponding when the filters are restarted. After
drying, the material can be removed by the use of a leaf
rake. Most of the remaining material will be flushed out
when the unit is put back in service.
These steps take a small amount of extra time, but they can
prevent unnecessary mistakes or your plant effluent from vio-
lating discharge requirements.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 191.
6.2E What is the first thing an operator should do before
shutting down a trickling filter?
6.2F What items should be considered when planning to
shut down a trickling filter?
6.3 SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS
6.30 Important Considerations
The trickling filter is a biological treatment unit and therefore
loadings and efficiencies of the unit are normally determined
on the basis of influent characteristics (inflow and biochemical
oxygen demand) and required quality of effluent or receiving
waters (dissolved oxygen and solids). Detailed procedures for
performing the trickling filter control tests are given in Chapter
16, "Laboratory Procedures and Chemistry." The frequency of
each test and expected ranges will vary from plant to plant.
Strength of the wastewater (BOD), freshness, characteristics
of the water supply, weather, and industrial wastes will all
serve to affect the "common" range of the various test results.
6.31 Typical Trickling Filter Plant Lab Results
Test Frequency Location Common Range
1.
Dissolved
Daily
Prim. Effl.
1.0-2.0 mgIL
Oxygen
2.
Settleable
Daily
Influent
5- 15 mlIL
Solids
Final Effl.
0 - 3 ml//.
3.
pH
Daily
Influent
6.8 - 8.0
Final Effl.
7.0 - 8.5
4.
Temperature
Daily
Influent
—
5.
BOD
Weekly
(Minimum)
Influent
Prim. Effl.
Final Effl.
150 - 400 mg/L
100 - 260 mgIL
15- 40 mgIL
6.
Suspended
Solids
Weekly
(Minimum)
Influent
Prim. Effl.
Final Effl.
150 - 400 mg/L
60- 150 mg/L
15- 40 mgIL
7.
Chlorine
Residual
Daily
Final Effl.
0.5 - 2.0 mg/L
8.
Coliform
Bacteria
Weekly
(Minimum)
Final Effl.,
Chlorinated
50 - 700/100 ml
9.
Clarity
Daily
Final Effl.
1 -3ft
(0.3 -1 m)
NOTES: Results of tests listed above as "Primary Effluent"
may vary at different plants due to the many variations in
recirculation patterns and activities of those discharging
wastes into the collection system.
Settleable solids tests of the effluent are usually required
by regulatory agencies. If your plant is operating efficiently,
the settleable solids will be so low as to be unreadable. In
this case, record as "Trace" or less than 0.1 mlIL.
Tests of trickling-filter effluent for dissolved oxygen, set-
tleable solids, and clarity are sometimes useful in evaluat-
ing problems when they occur. Operators should know what
range is "common" for their plants.
Frequency of testing may vary widely from that shown in
the table. In some locations (near water supply intakes or
recreational areas), a much higher frequency may be re-
quired by regulatory agencies. For example, a chlorine-
residual analyzer with recording chart may be required for
continuous monitoring.
An easy test that should be made periodically by the
operator is to check the distribution of wastewater over the
filter. Pans of the same size are placed level with the rock
surface at several points along the radius of a circular filter.
The distributor arm should then be run long enough to almost
fill the pans. The arm is then stopped and the amount in each
pan should not differ from the average by more than 5 percent.
If the distribution is not uniform, the orifices and/or the stay rod
tumbuckles must be adjusted.
6.32 Response to Poor Trlckling-Fllter Performance
There are several operational procedures an operator can
follow to correct deficiencies in plant performance. The ability
to make corrections will depend on your alertness and in-
genuity, as well as the design of the collection system and
treatment plant. In Section 6.31, the common ranges are listed
for a number of lab test results. If your plant is not operating
within or near the common ranges for your plant, then you may
have problems.
SUSPENDED SOLIDS. An effluent that is high in suspended
solids may be expected to affect all the other test results listed.
Ordinarily this will be due to three principal factors:
1. Heavy sloughing from the filters,
2. High hydraulic loading or short-circuiting through the sec-
ondary or final clarifier, and
3. Shock loading caused by toxic wastes or hydraulic or or-
ganic overloads.
Heavy sloughing may be due to seasonal weather changes,
a period of heavy organic loading on the filters, or corrective
action taken to overcome ponding, filter flies, or other problems
-------
174 Treatment Plants
(see Section 6.4). High hydraulic loading or short-circuiting in
the secondary clarifier will carry the light solids from the filters
over the weirs. If a plant is not receiving more flow than it was
designed to handle, you may be able to adjust recirculation
rates or the flow pattern (see Fig. 6.6, page 170) to reduce the
clarifier loading. Refer to Chapter 5, "Sedimentation and Flota-
tion," for solutions to problems created in clarifiers by short-
circuiting and sludge withdrawal.
BOD. The effluent BOD will generally go up or down along
with the suspended solids. This is not always the case, how-
ever. Anything you can do to assure that the wastewater ar-
rives at the plant in an aerobic condition will reduce the organic
load (and odors); consequently, the effluent BOD will be lower.
Aeration has been used in FORCE MAINS6 with some degree
of success when applied properly.
The recirculation rate and flow pattern will affect effluent
quality. These can be varied experimentally, keeping in mind
that too low a recirculation rate leads to filter flies and ponding,
while too high a rate may cause excessive sloughing or hy-
draulically overload the clarifiers. Biological systems respond
to a change in their environment and establish a balance with
the existing conditions, but it takes time. If you change your
operation, give your plant a couple of weeks to reach an equi-
librium state (level out) before you decide whether or not you
have helped the situation.
The shortcomings of the BOD test must be recognized. This
test is difficult to use as a daily operational tool unless the
influent BOD remains fairly constant. If an industry dumped
some wastewater with a high BOD, you could not measure the
BOD and base your operational adjustments on the test results
because they will not be available for five days. You will have
to adjust your operation on the basis of your experience and
the probable BOD. Use the chemical oxygen demand (COD)
test to estimate rapid changes in the influent load. For control
purposes, the COD test procedure may be altered and a very
short waiting time may be acceptable.
SETTLEABLE SOLIDS. High settleable solids in the effluent
mean that solids are being carried over the clarifier weir. This
also means that the suspended solids will be high. Refer to the
paragraph in this section on suspended solids for corrective
action.
DISSOLVED OXYGEN (DO). One of the principal functions
of a trickling filter plant is to stabilize the oxygen-demanding
substances in the wastewater being treated. This is achieved
by the addition of dissolved oxygen to the water. If the sus-
pended solids and BOD are within range, the DO is almost
certain to be in range also. Increased recirculation will increase
the DO. In plants with very low inflows, excessive detention
time in the clarifiers may cause the problem. If this is the case,
remember that any agitation of the effluent will cause it to pick
up dissolved oxygen. If the elevation is available, a staircase
type of effluent discharge will help; otherwise, it may be neces-
sary to aerate the effluent using compressed air or paddle-type
aerators (see Chapter 8, "Activated Sludge").
CHLORINE DEMAND. Difficulty in maintaining a chlorine
residual in the effluent (assuming normal detention period) will
be due primarily to excessive solids in the effluent. Refer to the
paragraph on Suspended Solids.
CLARITY. Clarity of the effluent also is related primarily to
the amount, size, shape, and characteristics of the suspended
solids in the effluent. In some cases, industrial or food-
processing wastes may cause discoloration. Trickling-filter
effluents tend to be slightly turbid.
pH. The pH of the effluent should move from whatever value
is found in the influent toward neutral (a pH of 7.0). Normally
the influent pH will be somewhat acidic (a pH of less than 7.0)
and will move up to 7.0 or slightly higher. Other than pH
changes caused by industrial waste dumps or other unusual
wastes entering the plant, the pH will remain "normal" as long
as the suspended solids and BOD are within reasonable limits.
Corrective action requires chemical neutralization.
COLIFORM COUNT. Where the bacterial count requirement
must be met, excessive solids in the effluent are a serious
problem. Even with high chlorine residuals, sporadic results
occur because some particles are not penetrated completely
by the chlorine. If in-plant corrections do not solve the solids
carry-over problem, some type of water treatment plant tech-
nique, such as coagulation and settling, or sand or diatomace-
ous earth filters, may have to be used. Good disinfection is
achieved if the previous treatment processes do their job.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 191.
6.3A How would you determine if the distribution of wastewa-
ter over a trickling filter is even?
6.3B List the laboratory tests used to measure the efficiency
of a trickling filter.
6.3C (1) Calculate the efficiency of a trickling filter plant if the
suspended solids of the plant influent is 200 mg/L
and the plant effluent suspended solids is 20 mg/L.
(2) What is the efficiency of the trickling filter only if the
effluent suspended solids from the primary clarifier
(wastewater applied to filter) is 140 mg/L and the
effluent suspended solids remains at 20 mg/L.
&I0P OF le^OAl 1
f(2lCl€lNi FILT6(Z4
6 Force Main. A pipe that conveys wastewater under pressure from the discharge side of a pump to a point of gravity flow.
-------
Trickling Filters 175
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
(Lesson 1 of 3 Lessons)
Chapter 6. TRICKLING FILTERS
Write the answers to these questions in your notebook be-
fore continuing.
1. Draw a sketch of a trickling filter and label the essential
parts.
2. Why is recirculation important in the operation of a trickling
filter?
3. Why should a trickling filter be checked carefully before a
new one is started or an existing one is placed in service
again?
4. Why would the efficiency of waste removal by a new trick-
ling filter be low during the first few days?
5. What would you do if laboratory results or visual inspection
indicated a sudden drop in efficiency of a trickling filter?
6. Calculate the suspended-solids removal efficiency of a
trickling filter plant if the influent suspended solids were 360
mg/L and the effluent suspended solids were 40 mgJL.
7. Why do laboratory test results for trickling filter plants vary
from
a. plant to plant?
b. month to month within a plant?
8. What steps would you follow when shutting down a trickling
filter?
CHAPTER 6. TRICKLING FILTERS
(Lesson 2 of 3 Lessons)
6.4 OPERATIONAL STRATEGY
In actual operation, the trickling filter is one of the most
trouble-free types of secondary treatment. This process re-
quires less operating attention and control than other types.
Where recirculation is used, difficulties due to SHOCK
LOADS7 are less frequent and recovery is faster. Suspended
solids in the trickling-filter effluent tend to make the effluent
somewhat turbid; thus a poorer quality effluent due to shock
loads may not be visibly evident. Recirculation is used to main-
tain a constant load on the filter and thus produce a better
quality of effluent. However, there are some problems which
include ponding; odors; insects; and, in colder climates, freez-
ing. These problems are all controllable, and in most cases,
preventable.
6.40 Dally Operating Procedures
Daily operation of a trickling-filter plant is in accordance with
Section 6.22, "Daily Operation." USE THE LOWEST RECIR-
CULATION RATES THAT WILL PRODUCE GOOD RESULTS
(meet NPDES permit requirements), but not cause ponding or
other problems. Low recirculation rates conserve energy and
minimize plant operating costs. In order to produce good re-
sults on a continuous basis, the operator must observe and
record those items which are critical to the wastewater treat-
ment process.
Successful operation of a trickling-filter plant requires routine
observation of the process units, analysis of plant inflows to
obtain wastewater characteristics and determination of the
water quality of the plant effluent. An alert operator will note
changes in process units by observing various physical factors
such as the flow rate or height over weirs, launder levels,
amount of scum on a clarifier, the appearance of the effluent,
the rotation of filter distributor arms, the spray pattern, the color
of the media, and odors which indicate a change in the biologi-
cal treatment system. Changes in any of these factors require
investigation to identify the cause and to determine necessary
corrective action.
Measure and record all important process factors. Plant in-
flows are measured by the plant influent flow meter. Usually
these flows produce similar daily patterns on the recording
chart during dry weather. At some plants, similar patterns will
be produced during certain storm conditions. Laboratory
analyses of samples from various process stages, including
plant influent, primary effluent, and secondary clarifier effluent,
will indicate the water quality changes taking place in the plant.
Most samples should be analyzed to determine the tempera-
ture, pH, dissolved oxygen, BOD, COD, and settleable solids.
Effluent samples should be analyzed for chlorine residual and
the most probable number of coliform group organisms in addi-
tion to the usual water quality indicators. All of this information
is used by the operator to adjust and control the treatment
processes.
Trickling-filter plants can be operated on the basis of two
loading criteria:
1. Hydraulic loading, gallons per day per square foot; and
2. Organic loading, pounds of BOD per day per 1000 cubic
feet of media.
Section 6.7, "Loading Criteria," shows how to calculate
these loadings. Operators should attempt to maintain a fairly
7 Shock Loads. The arrival at a plant of waste which is toxic to organisms in sufficient quantity or strength to cause operating problems.
Possible problems include odors and sloughing off of the growth or slime on the trickling-filter media. Organic or hydraulic overloads also
can cause a shock load.
-------
176 Treatment Plants
constant hydraulic loading on each trickling filter by adjusting
the recirculation rate. Adjust the recirculation rate to maintain a
DO from 1.5 to 2.0 mgIL in the filter effluent. The recirculation
rate should not be so low as to allow ponding to develop.
Organic loadings should be calculated on a weekly basis and
compared with plant effluent suspended solids and BOD. If the
plant effluent BOD or suspended solids are changing, look for
changes in the hydraulic and organic loadings.
The plant effluent is the main indicator of how effective a
trickling filter plant is working. If the quality of the plant effluent
starts to drop as shown by increases in the effluent BOD or
suspended solids, then changes must be made in the opera-
tion of the plant. Operational changes available to the operator
include changes in the recirculation rates and change in the
operation of the trickling filters from parallel to series operation
or vice versa.
One way to detect changes in plant effluent and select cor-
rective action is by the use of a trend chart such as the one
shown in Figure 6.7. To use a trend chart, record the day of the
month and day of the week along the bottom. Determine what
you consider are the most important operational factors for
your plant (such as plant influent flow and effluent suspended
solids) and draw a scale for each factor along the side. Plot the
results on a daily basis and look for any trends. If the effluent
suspended solids start to increase, look for the cause (in-
creased inflow or possibly too low a hydraulic loading) and
select corrective action.
Seasonal changes will have an impact on biological treat-
ment processes and the quality of your plant effluent. Change
will occur when the weather changes from cold to warm and
again when it changes from warm to cold. Changes in plant
influent characteristics caused by discharges from canneries,
meat packing houses, or metal plating processes may require
the operator to change recirculation rates or mode (sequence)
of filter operations. Operators have several methods of adjust-
ing treatment processes, but you must be able to recognize
what you can adjust and how you can control the treatment
processes in your plant. The next section, "Response to Ab-
normal Conditions," provides details on how to correct prob-
I lems.
Figure 6.7 shows the results from the operation of an actual
trickling filter. The influent and effluent data plotted are seven-
day moving averages in order to smooth out daily fluctuations
and to reveal trends. Procedures for calculating moving aver-
ages are explained in Chapter 18, "Analysis and Presentation
of Data."
Examination of Figure 6.7 reveals the value of using trend
charts and plotting the moving averages. During the week
starting on Monday, January 24, the effluent BOD increased
considerably. On the first of February the effluent BOD was still
high. What happened? How could the effluent BOD be re-
duced to previous levels?
Influent BOD and suspended solids values were fairly high
during January and fluctuated considerably from day-to-day
(the actual variation was smoothed out by plotting the moving
average). Some of this variation was due to a storm on Janu-
ary 11 (high influent suspended solids) and another storm on
January 20 (flows slightly above design capacity). These fluc-
tuations probably caused an excessive loss of the biomass
(high effluent suspended solids from January 10 to 26). Also a
period of cold weather during the latter half of January reduced
the organism activity and thus the ability of the organisms in
the biomass to remove the BOD from the effluent.
What should the operator do during these conditions? Recir-
culation should be increased to reduce the effluent BOD. In-
fluent conditions should be watched more closely in order to
maintain more constant hydraulic and organic loadings on the
trickling filters. These actions were instituted on Monday, Feb-
ruary 7, after reviewing data and plotting the moving averages.
By Tuesday, February 16, the plot of the effluent BOD moving
average was back down to typical values. Perhaps if effluent
COD values were used for operational control, the trend of
increasing effluent BOD values could have been identified and
corrected sooner.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 191.
6.4A What is the major consideration for daily operation of a
trickling filter?
6.4B Recirculation rates should be adjusted to maintain a DO
of from to mg/L in the filter effluent.
6.41 Response to Abnormal Conditions
Every wastewater treatment plant will face unusual or ab-
normal conditions. How successfully these unusual situations
are handled depends on the advance planning and prepara-
tions taken by the plant operator. In many cases, what is an
abnormal operation condition in one plant may be handled as a
routine operating procedure in another plant. This is because
the operator took the time to review the potential situation and
developed a plan to cope with the unusual event.
6.410 Ponding
Ponding usually is the result rrf.gyrftssiyp nr^nir inaHir^
withni It n lynrrnspnndinq high recirculation rate. Another cause
of ponding can betFie use of medid Which are too small nr nnt
sufficiently uniform in size. In non-uniform media, the smaller
pieces fit between the larger ones and thus make it easier for
the slimes to plug the filter. If this condition exists, replacement
of the media is the most satisfactory solution. Other causes of
ponding include a poor or improper media permitting cement-
ing or breakup, accumulation of fibers or trgsh in the filter vniris
(spaces between" nfedianrtiloh nrnanlc growth rate followed
by a shock load and rapid uncontrolled sloughing, oranexces-
sive growth o* inco^t r>r goalie ...hi^h may accumulate in
the voids. Ponding results from a loss of open area in the filter.
If the voids are filled, flow tends to collect on the surface in
ponds.
-------
Trickling Filters 177
50-r
MOVING AVERAGE
500
NO DATA
INFLUENTSS
300 ^
INFLUENT BOO
DESIGN FLOW. 24 MGD
FLOW. MGD
EFFLUENT SS
EFFLUENT BOD
-50
- - 50 - 26
Z a
* in
u. u>
u. §5
III «
JANUARY
24 26 30311 5 7
DAYS OF THE MONTH
FEBRUARY
14 15
202122
Fig. 6.7 Typical trend chart for a trickling filter plant
-------
178 Treatment Plants
The cause of ponding must be located since it may increase
rapidly and take over large areas of the filter. Increasing the
hydraulic loading by increasing the recirculation ratio or adjust-
ing the orifices on the distributor assembly so that it distributes
flow more evenly is likely to flush off some of the heavier por-
tions of the biological film and may slowly cure this condition.
Minor ponding, which may occur from time to time, can be
eliminated by any of several methods, including the following:
1. Spray filter surface with a high pressure water stream.
Sometimes stopping a rotary distributor over the ponded
area will flush the growth from the voids. One way to do this
is to shut off the flow momentarily, wait for the distributor to
stop, move the distributor to the problem area, and then
restart the flow while keeping the distributor over the
ponded area.
2. Hand turn or stir the filter surface with a rake, fork, or bar.
Remove any accumulation of leaves or other debris.
3. Dose the filter with chlorine at about 5 mgIL for several
hours. If done during a period of low flow, the amount of
chlorine used is held to a minimum.
4. If it is possible to flood the filter, keeping the media sub-
merged for 24 hours will cause the growth to slough some-
what. Keep the surface of the media covered, but don't let
the water rise high enough to get in the distributor bearings.
Under these conditions, the growths tend to become
anaerobic and loosen or liquefy. The resulting liquid is a
mess to dump and must be carefully released to avoid vio-
lating NPDES discharge requirements.
5. Shut off flow to the filter for several hours. The growth will
dry and can be removed by the use of a leaf rake. Most of
the remaining material will be flushed out when the unit is
put back in service.
Be sure to keep in mind that your primary purpose is to turn
out an effluent of consistently good quality. With this in mind,
the above corrective actions are listed in order, starting with
procedures that will least affect the effluent. If at all possible,
ponding should be corrected BEFORE it becomes serious.
Items 4 and 5 are drastic measures. However, the job must be
done so that full efficiency of the filter is restored. In cases 4
and 5, more chlorine will be needed for effluent disinfection.
Where dechlorination is required to protect fish in the receiving
stream, more chemicals also will be needed for this purpose
until the filters are again operating normally.
6.411 Odors
Since operation of trickling filters is an AEROBIC8 process,
no serious odors should exist. The presence of foul odors indi-
cates that ANAEROBIC9 conditions are predominant.
Anaerobic conditions are usually present under that portion of
slime growth which is next to the media surface. As long as the
surface of the slime growth (zoogleal film) is aerobic, odors
should be minor. Corrective measure? f^"'ilfl hfi tflKQn im-
mediately if foul rxiors Hftverop Thf> following are guidelines for
maintaining trickling filters to prevent odor problems.
1. Do everything possible (such as prechlorination or pre-
aeration) to maintain aerobic conditions in the sewer collec-
tion system and in the primary treatment units.
2. Check ventilatioain the filter. Heavy biological growths or
obstructions in the underdrain system will cut down ventila-
tion. Examine ventilation facilities such as the draft tube or
other inlets for stoppages. If necessary, force air into un-
derdraws using mechanical equipment such as fans or
compressors. Natural ventilation through a filter will occur if
the vents are open and the DIFFERENCE between air tem-
perature and filter temperature is greater than 3°F (2°C).
3. .Increase the recirculation rate to prnvirip mora nxygpnjg
Ibe. tnter pea and increase sloughing!
4. Keep the wastewater splash from the distributor away from
exposed structures, grass, and other surfaces. If slime
growths appear on sidewalks, inside walls of the filter or
distributor splash plates, remove them immediately.
5. In some cases during hot weather, odors will be noticeable
from filters in good condition. If these odors are a serious
problem (close neighbors), the situation can sometimes be
resolved with one of the commercially available MASKING
AGENTS.10
6. For covered filters, a forced-air ventilation system and odor
control of the exhaust air stream is usually provided. Refer
to the plant O & M manual and/or the manufacturer's litera-
ture for proper operation of this equipment. A covered filter
and odor control system do not substitute for good opera-
tion and housekeeping procedures. The other points
covered in this section will still apply. However, where un-
covered filters have become a problem (such as in a nearby
housing development), the addition of a cover and an odor
control system could solve the problem.
6.412 Filter Files
The tiny, gnat-size filter fly (psychoda) is the primary nui-
sance insect connected with trickling-filter operations. They
are occasionally found in great numbers and can be an ex-
tremely difficult problem to plant operating personnel as well as
rffiarhy naighKnr^ wrorarrmg arr-attgftiato onH H-y pnvj~
ronment for development, the flies are found most frequently in
low-rate filters and are usually not much of a problem in high-
rate filters. Control usually can be accomplished by the use of
one or more of the following methods.
B Aerobic (AIR-o-bick). A condition in which "free" or dissolved oxygen is present in the aquatic environment.
9 Anaerobic (AN-air-O-bick). A condition in which "free" or dissolved oxygen is NOT present in the aquatic environment.
10 Masking Agents. Substances used to cover up or disguise unpleasant odors. Liquid masking agents are dripped Into the wastewater,
sprayed into the air, or evaporated (using heat) with the unpleasant fumes or odors and then discharged Into the air hv hiqu/arx tn matra an
undesirable odor less noticeable. "Neutral" odors may be the most desirable.
-------
Trickling Filters 179
1. Increase recirculation rate. A continuous hydraulic loading
of 200 gpd/sq ft (8 cu m/day/sq m) or more will keep filter fly
larvae washed out of the filter.
2. Keep orifice openings clear, including end gates of dis-
tributor arms. The gates can be opened slightly to obtain a
flushing action on the walls.
3. Apply approved insecticides with caution to filter walls and
to other plant structures.
4. Flood filter for 24 hours at intervals frequent enough to
prevent completion of the life cycle. This cycle is as short as
seven days in hot weather. A poor effluent will result from
this practice and should be carefully monitored.
5. Dose with about 1 mgIL chlorine for a few hours each week.
The chlorine will cause some of the slime layer to slough
off. Too much chlorine will remove too much of the slime
layer, reducing BOD removal and lowering the effluent qual-
ity of the plant.
6. Shrubbery, weeds, and tall grass provide a natural sanc-
tuary for filter flies. GOOD GROUNDS MAINTENANCE
AND CLEANUP PRACTICES WILL HELP TO MINIMIZE
FLY PROBLEMS.
6.413 Cold Weather Problems
Cold weather usually does not offer much of a problem to
wastewater flowing in a pipe or through a clarifier. Occasion-
ally, however, wastewater sprayed from distributor nozzles or
exposed in thin layers on the media may reach the freezing
point and cause a build up of ice on the filter. Several mea-
sures can be taken to reduce ice problems on the filter.
1. Decrease the amount of recirculation, provided sufficient
flow will remain to keep the filter working properly.
2. Operate TWO-STAGE FILTERSU in parallel rather than in
series.
3. Adjust orifices and splash plates to reduce the spray effect.
4. Construct wind screens, covers, or canopies to reduce heat
losses.
5. Break up and remove the larger areas of buildup.
6. Partially open end gates to provide a stream rather than a
spray along the retaining wall.
7. Add hot water or steam to the influent if necessary.
Although the efficiency of the filter unit is reduced during
periods of icing, it is important to keep this unit running. Taking
the unit out of service will not only reduce the quality of the
effluent but may lead to additional maintenance problems,
such as ice forming, with the possibility of structural damage.
Also, moisture may condense in the oil and damage the bear-
ings.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 191.
6.4C What are some of the causes of ponding?
6.4D How would you correct a ponding problem?
6.4E How would you control odor problems in a trickling fil-
ter?
6.4F Trickling filter flies can be controlled by what methods?
6.4G Why should a trickling filter not be taken out of service
during icing conditions?
6.414 Plant Inflow
Plant inflows may be considered abnormal when there are
high flow rates, extreme levels of suspended solids or
biochemical oxygen demand (BOD), or inflow of a septic in-
fluent. High flow rates (greater than 2.5 times the Average Dry
Weather Flow (ADWF) usually result from one of four sources:
1. Storm water infiltration,
2. Broken collection system pipe that permits excess inflow
from groundwater or a creek or stream,
3. Clearance of a main line sewer stoppage and the release of
the backed-up wastewater, or
4. Industrial discharges.
The plant operator will always be aware when condition one
will occur; however, conditions two, three, and four may occur
without warning, yet the plant operator is often the first to know.
Each of the four conditions has a common characteristic, EX-
CESS FLOW. This excess flow may ioad the plant to its hy-
draulic capacity or exceed it. Conditions three and four can
impose other loads which the operator must also consider.
These loads include heavy solids and BOD; septicity; and in
the case of the industrial discharge, a toxic material or load
harmful to the biological treatment processes.
In a trickling-filter plant, the operator usually is provided with
three methods of controlling abnormal flows:
1. Number of filters in service (adjusts loading rates),
2. Recirculation capacity (adjusts DO and dilution), and
3. Series or parallel filter operation (adjusts loading rates).
What can a trickling-filter plant operator do to control plant
effluent during abnormal flows? The following paragraphs
suggest methods for you to consider when operating your
plant. If you understand how your plant operates and how to
adjust for abnormal conditions, you can select the best proce-
dures.
CONDITION ONE. HIGH FLOW DUE TO STORM-WATER
INFILTRATION
A. If collection system is clean from good maintenance or
from recent storms, the high flows usually will dilute the
solids and BOD and possibly reduce influent and solids
loadings to below the ADWF loading.
B. If A above is true, then the influent could have a higher
than normal DO.
PLANT OPERATION PLAN
1. Reduce or stop filter recycle or recirculation flows.
a. Recycling flows to a filter are for dilution, DO increase,
and to maintain the hydraulic load on the filter media.
b. Reduction in recycle flows in some plant designs also
will reduce the hydraulic loading on the secondary
clarifiers, thus providing for a better removal of solids
sloughed from the filter resulting from high flows.
11 Two-Stage Filters. Two filters are used. Effluent from the first filter goes to the second niter, either directly or after passing through a
clarifier. (See Fig. 6.6, page 170.)
-------
180 Treatment Plants
2. Place filters in PARALLEL OPERATION.12 Since the storm
water has diluted the inflow, the DO will be higher in the
inflow. Loading each filter equally (half of total flow to each
filter) instead of forcing the total flow across each filter will
reduce sloughing and keep each filter functioning.
3. Keep influent screening equipment operating and check of-
ten, especially if collection system is a combined sanitary-
and storm-water system which may have leaves and other
debris in the flow.
4. Increase post chlorination rates to match flows in order to
insure proper disinfection.
Other adjustments that may be considered when high flows
occur include:
5. Use the collection system as a storage reservoir by throttl-
ing the plant influent gate or by changing pumping eleva-
tions of the pumping start and stop cycles.
NOTE: a. This should be done only when the lowest man-
hole elevation in the system is known and the
maximum water level can be held at least 2 feet
(0.6 m) below the manhole rim elevation to pre-
vent system overflow.
b. Beware of pump problems developing when the
wet well water level is higher than normal. High
water levels reduce the head a pump must work
against, which results in a higher pumped flow,
which calls for an oversized pump motor.
6. Use chemicals on the influent to reduce solids and BOD
load by causing chemical precipitation in the primary
clarifiers.
7. Inspect the collection system for major defects and develop
programs to reduce inflow and infiltration.
8. Reduce pumping of digester supernatant back to head-
works in order to keep the hydraulic loading as low as pos-
sible.
9. Reduce the pumping of sludge to anaerobic digesters be-
cause sludge temperature will be lower than usual due to
the lower temperatures of the storm waters.
CONDITION TWO. HIGH FLOWS DUE TO A BROKEN
COLLECTION SYSTEM PIPE
High flows consist of relatively clear water from a creek or
stream above broken pipe or from groundwater infiltration.
PLANT OPERATION PLAN
1. Operate plant using same procedures as outlined under
CONDITION ONE.
2. Have broken pipe repaired as soon as possible.
CONDITION THREE. HIGH FLOWS DUE TO CLEARANCE
OF MAIN LINE SEWER STOPPAGES
A. Surge or slug of high flows results when stoppage is
cleared.
B. Influent septic, odorous, and probably has a high solids and
BOD load.
PLANT OPERATION PLAN
1. Increase prechlorination rates in order to:
a. Control odors, and
b. Reduce influent BOD load.
2. Store released surge in collection system and allow to flow
slowly into plant.
3. Place filters in SERIES OPERATION,13 Apply the initial
loading to the first filter and have it perform as a roughing
filter to reduce the shock load on the next filter. See Sec-
tion 6.13, "Roughing Filter," for a more complete descrip-
tion.
4. Increase recycle rates to both filters in order to:
a. Increase dilution of influent to filter, and
b. Increase DO content of water applied to filter.
5. Increase post-chlorination rates to maintain effective disin-
fection.
6. Frequently skim surface of primary clarifier to keep grease
and other floatables off the filter media and out of the
orifices on the distributor arms.
7. Frequently pump sludge from bottom of primary clarifier to
reduce solids load to filters.
8. Stop recycle flows of supernatant or other heavy solids
back to plant influent or to primary clarifier. These flows
would complicate the filter problems.
Other adjustments that may be considered when a septic
main line sewer stoppage is cleared include:
9. Feed chemicals into plant influent, and
10. Arrange with collection-system maintenance crews to in-
form plant when a system stoppage is cleared and ex-
pected to hit the plant.
CONDITION FOUR. INDUSTRIAL DISCHARGES
Influent conditions that may be expected following industrial
discharges are listed below, followed by recommended plant
operating plans for each condition.
A. High flows with normal solids and BOD loadings.
PLANT OPERATION PLAN
Operate plant using same procedures as outlined under
CONDITION ONE.
B. High flows with high solids loadings.
PLANT OPERATION PLAN
Operate plant using same procedures as outlined under
CONDITION THREE.
C. High flows and toxic material in plant influent. A toxic mate-
rial often only can be detected if the industry notifies the
plant or if the influent sampling equipment monitors for a
specific chemical and sends out an alarm. Typical toxic
conditions include an excessively high or low pH, or the
presence of excess amounts of ammonia, heavy metals, or
hydrocarbons. Unfortunately, in most plants the influent is
12 Parallel Operation. When wastewater being treated is split and a portion flows to one treatment unit while the remainder flows to another
similar treatment unit. Also see SERIES OPERATION.
13 Series Operation. When wastewater being treated flows through one treatment unit and then flows through another similar treatment unit.
Also see PARALLEL OPERATION.
-------
Trickling Filters 181
not monitored continuously for high or low pH or the spe-
cific toxic material which causes the problem. Usually the
operator never realizes that something toxic has hit the
plant until a day or two later when the biological process is
not functioning and the solids content in the plant effluent is
high.
PLANT OPERATION PLAN
1. If a toxic chemical is known (it usually is not), a neutralizing
agent may be added to the influent. For example, chlorine is
used to counteract cyanide. If a high pH is detected (in
excess of 9.0), lower the pH by adding an acid such as
acetic or sulfuric. If the pH is below 6.0, increase the pH
with caustic soda (sodium hydroxide — Na (OH)). If the pH
is not properly adjusted you could produce toxic hydrogen
cyanide or cyanogen chloride. Over chlorination may de-
stroy the entire biological process.
2. Operate the plant filters in series with a high recirculation
rate in order to dilute the influent and bring the pH towards
neutral. The first filter may slough and lose its biological
culture from the media, but you may save the biological
growths on the second filter. If the filters are operated in
parallel, the toxic flow may strip the media in both filters of
biological growths.
Other adjustments that may be considered when a toxic
waste reaches a trickling filter include:
3. Store toxic waste in collection system until diluted by other
wastewater and/or gradually release during high flows.
4. Locate industry responsible for toxic discharge and require
industry to start a source control program. Be sure your
sewer-use ordinances are enforced.
5. Restrict toxic discharges from industry. Allow releases to
occur slowly, rather than in slugs or large batches. Also
allow discharges to be released when plant can handle
toxic wastes. Another type of restriction on very toxic
agents is to allow discharges to the collection system only
when tested, neutralized, and plant flows are sufficient to
dilute the discharge. Under these conditions the wastewa-
ter treatment plant may handle all incoming wastewater
without special procedures and also without the possibility
of the plant processes becoming upset.
Some treatment plants will have more alternatives than
other plants due to design considerations and equipment, but
the best option is to have a plan for any abnormal condition
that could occur at your plant.
6.415 Operational Problems with Upstream or Down-
stream Treatment Processes
When a treatment process has operational problems, you
should be aware of the possible compensating adjustments or
actions that may be available to maintain plant effluent quality.
1. Screening
If a comminutor or other screening equipment has failed,
the operator of a trickling-filter plant should frequently clean
the bypass-bar rack to remove as much of the debris as
possible. Frequent skimming of the primary clarifiers also
will help to reduce plugging of the orifices in the distributor
arm.
The frequency of flushing" the distributor arms should be
increased to daily to keep them clean. Also, the distributor
orifices should be cleaned more frequently to insure an
even application of wastewater to the media surface. The
recirculation and influent feed pumps also should be
checked for proper flows and discharge pressures because
the pump impellers may become plugged or loaded with
debris, thus requiring shutdown of the pumps for cleaning.
2. Grit
Large volumes of grit will seldom reach the filters unless
a primary clarifier is bypassed or excessively overloaded
with flow. When the primary clarifier is excessively hydrau-
lically overloaded, the grit will be deposited in the under-
drain which will allow septic dams and conditions to develop
and produce odors. Grit also can increase ponding on a
filter by filling the small voids between the media and reduc-
ing the downward flow of water. When this occurs the filter
is taken out of service, flooded, drained, the media washed
off with water from a hose under high pressure, and the
underdrain cleaned.
3. Primary Clarifier
When a primary clarifier is out of service in a trickling-filter
plant, operate the filters in series. Use the first filter as a
roughing filter to remove the larger pieces of suspended
wastes. The first filter can perform satisfactorily this way for
several weeks, but will require a cleanup of the filter after-
wards. This procedure should keep the second filter healthy
and leave only one filter to clean.
4. Secondary Clarifier
When a secondary clarifier is out of service, solids in the
effluent will increase. Operate the filters in series. Apply
normal recirculation flows to the first filter and do not recir-
culate to the second filter. Apply the normal flow as evenly
as possible to the second filter. This procedure should
minimize sloughing from the media on the second filter for a
while and, hopefully, until the secondary clarifier is back in
service.
A simple device containing a coarse hardware-cloth
screen or a similar device could be installed in the under-
drain channel or outlet box to catch the sloughings. The
screen would have to be removed and cleaned frequently.
5. Chlorinator
When one chlorinator is not working, hopefully your plant
has another chlorinator. If no other chlorinators are avail-
able, reduce the hydraulic load on the secondary clarifiers
as much as possible to obtain the best solids removal. If
you do not have a standby chlorinator, develop emergency
procedures now to chlorinate your effluent when the
chlorinator is not working. Some smaller plants use sodium
hypochlorite as a standby disinfectant.
6.42 Troubleshooting
Table 6.2 summarizes Section 6.41 and is a quick reference
to common problems and suggested ways to correct them.
This table is primarily useful as an "idea file" which will help
you to avoid overlooking a possible solution to an operating
problem. A review of sections 6.01 and 6.02 will also help in
deciding on a course of action. Be sure to keep in mind that
trickling filters respond slowly to changes. For example, if you
change the recirculation rate, the biological system could take
several days to stabilize to the new conditions. Therefore,
change only one thing at a time, and wait until it has leveled out
to evaluate the effects of the change. Also, remember that
plant units are interrelated. For example, a change in the recir-
culation rate (where the recirculation pattern includes a
clarifier) will change the hydraulic loading on the clarifier. This
will change the efficiency of the clarifier, which will then carry a
different amount of solids to subsequent units. If the filter recy-
cle flows do not involve the clarifiers, the flows to clarifiers will
not change and the solids-removal efficiency of the clarifier
should not change either.
-------
182 Treatment Plants
TABLE 6.2 SOLUTIONS TO TRICKLING FILTER PROBLEMS
Solutions
Problems
©
X) q>
-------
Trickling Filters 183
The important thing in plant operation is to avoid problems,
and the key to avoiding problems is ALERTNESS. Many of the
common problems develop slowly and go undetected in their
early stages. For instance, ponding will occur as a result of a
buildup of heavy slime growths. The alert operator, who care-
fully inspects the filters daily, will detect the developing prob-
lem and make corrections. To the casual observer, this
operator doesn't have any problems!
F5
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on pages 191 and 192.
6.4H What are four possible sources of abnormal condi-
tions?
6.4I How can an operator adjust the trickling-filter process
when excess flows occur?
6.4J How do high flows from the clearance of a main line
sewer stoppage differ from high flows caused by a bro-
ken sewer pipe?
6.4K Why are toxic industrial discharges difficult to detect
until it is too late?
6.4L How are toxic industrial discharges often detected or
suspected?
6.4M Why should an operator only make one change at a
time in trickling filter operation and wait approximately
one week before making another change when at-
tempting to correct a trickling-filter problem?
6.5 MAINTENANCE
6.50 Bearings and Seals (Fig. 6.8)
The bearings in distributors may be located in the base of
the center column or at the top. Both types will have a water
seal at the base to prevent wastewater leakage. This is to
avoid uneven distribution of the wastewater over the media,
and also to protect the bearings when they are located in the
base. Many older distributors utilized a mercury seal. Mercury
should not be used because mercury ions are toxic to living
organisms, including operators.
Generally, the bearings ride on removable races (tracks) in a
bath of oil. The oil usually specified is a turbine oil with oxida-
tion and corrosion inhibitors added. The manufacturer's litera-
ture or the plant 0 & M manual should specify what types of oil
to use. If this information is not available, the representative
from any major oil company can recommend a suitable oil.
Be sure to monitor the oil very carefully. The level and condi-
tion of the oil are crucial to the life of the equipment, and should
be checked weekly. To check, drain out about a pint of oil into a
clean container and, if the oil is clean and free of water, return it
to the unit. If the oil is dirty, drain it and refill with a mixture of
approximately 1/4 oil and 3/4 solvent (such as kerosene), and
operate the distributor for a few minutes. Drain again, and refill
with the correct oil. (Note: Drawing off some of the oil to check
it is important. You can see if the oil is contaminated, and verify
that the oil level sensing line is not plugged.)
Water in the oil will appear at the bottom of the oil in the
container. If water is found in the oil, either the sealing fluid is
low or the gasket must be replaced in mechanical seals. Refer
to the manufacturer's literature or the plant O & M manual for
instructions.
6.51 Distributor Arms
Work on distributor orifices only after the arms have stopped
moving, unless you are using a pressure hose for cleaning and
stand outside the filter wall. The distributor arms should be
flushed weekly by opening the end dump-gates one at a time.
Also clean debris out of the filter each dav. cleaning the orifices
ftS often as paftrtorl Whan thorp ic rnngirWahlo plugging, you
should install a coarse hardware-cloth or similar type screen
ahead of the filters, if possible. Screens are easier to clean and
good distribution is maintained over the filter media. Observe
the distributor daily for smooth operation. If it becomes jumpy,
seems to vibrate, or slows down with the same amount of
wastewater passing through it, the bearings and races are
probably damaged and will require replacement. A thorough oil
check each week will probably keep this from happening. Ad-
just the turnbuckles occasionally on the guy rods to keep the
rotating distributor arms at the proper level to provide even flow
over all of the media.
The speed of rotation of the distributor should not be exces-
sive. Rotation of the distributor is due to the reaction of the
water flowing through the orifices. This is similar to the back-
ward thrust of a water hose or the spinning of some types of
lawn sprinklers. Speed is controlled by regulation of flow
through the orifices. (On larger distributors, approximately 1
rpm is normal. The manufacturer's literature or plant O & M
manual will state the maximum allowable speed.) If the dis-
tributor rotates too fast, it may damage the bearing races on
the turntable.
To reduce the speed of rotation, provision usually is made
on the front of each arm for orifices which are easily installed
(Fig. 6.3, page 164). The reaction of the water flowing through
these orifices cancels some of the thrust of the regular orifices.
If the speed of rotation is too slow, check for mechanical prob-
lems and, if none, increase flow to distributor.
Since most distributors appear rather large and bulky, many
operators are surprised to find that they are delicately bal-
anced. As soon as wastewater begins to flow from the orifices,
the distributor arm should start to move. The fan-like pattern as
the wastewater leaves the deflecting plates should be uniform.
If the plates have developed a slime growth that is affecting
uniform distribution, the slime should be brushed off.
6.52 Fixed Nozzles
Fixed-nozzle trickling-filter beds are similar to lawn sprinkler
systems because the distribution piping system is buried under
the media and feeds into riser pipes spaced evenly across the
-------
MECHANICAL
SEAL
TURNTABLE
I)
DISTRIBUTOR
ARM
OIL FILL AND LEVEL
GAGE
SEAL PLATE
DUST SEALS
THRUST BEARINGS,
RUNNING IN OIL BATH
LEVELING ADJUSTMENT
CENTER WELL
*:.Tr&s
I-B"
oO'JO.
o
Q.? to °
c. o «
00
«
D>
3
o
3
2
d>
3
5>
CENTER ASSEMBLY BEARING AND SEAL ARRANGEMENT
Fig. 6.8 Trickling filter bearing and mechanical seal
-------
Trickling Filters 185
filter bed. Each riser pipe is equipped with a spray head called
a "nozzle" at the top of the riser pipe above the filter-bed media
(Figure 6.5, page 168). The nozzles are designed to handle
high flows at low pressures and to pass some debris that would
be in the wastewater in order to prevent plugging of the nozzle.
The riser pipes and nozzles are spaced evenly just like a lawn
irrigation system in order to provide equal distribution of water
on the filter media surface.
Fixed nozzles should be observed frequently to determine
that each is putting out a desired spray pattern and evenly
covering the media.
These nozzles may become plugged or flow restricted, thus
causing poor spray patterns just like a plugged or restricted
orifice will on a rotating distributor arm. If a nozzle is not spray-
ing properly, the system should be shut down. In some in-
stallations the feed distribution pipe to that row of nozzles may
be shut off by closing the valve, thus stopping water flow to
those nozzles in that particular row. On the faulty nozzle, the
ball is removed and the rags or debris are removed from the
cone and deflector. Proper cleaning may require turning the
system on, blowing the riser pipe out to remove the stoppage,
and then re-assembling the nozzle.
If frequent plugging is a problem, a screen may be installed
ahead of the filter pumps or siphon to keep the rags and debris
out of the distribution system and nozzles.
6.53 Underdrains
The underdrains are buried under the filter bed. Usually
cleanouts or flusher branches are located on the head end of
each line or channel for flushing to remove sludge deposits or
debris from the underdrain system. If flushing will not clear the
line and your agency or city's collection system maintenance
section has a high velocity cleaner for cleaning sewer lines,
borrow their services for an hour or so and have them clean the
underdrains. You may wish to schedule this cleaning proce-
dure every three to six months in order to keep the underdrain
system open and clear. A clear underdrain system provides for
a fast carry off of filter bed effluent, does not restrict air flow for
media ventilation, and reduces problems caused by odors,
septic conditions and ponding.
6.54 Recirculation Pumps
Refer to Chapter 15, "Maintenance," for information on how
to maintain recirculation pumps.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 192.
6.5A What is the purpose of the seal in a rotary distributor?
6.5B Why should you drain some of the oil from the dis-
tributor each time it is checked?
6.5C How would you slow down the rotational speed of a
distributor?
6.5D What maintenance should be done on trickling-filter un-
derdrains?
6.6 SAFETY
In order to work around a trickling filter safely, several pre-
cautions should be taken. FIRST, SHUT OFF THE FLOW TO
THE FILTER AND ALLOW THE DISTRIBUTOR TO STOP
ROTATING BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO WORK ON IT. On all
but the very small units, the force of the rotating distributor
arms is about the equivalent of a good-sized truck. YOU JUST
CAN T REACH OUT AND STOP ONE WITHOUT ENDANGER-
ING YOURSELF. Serious injuries can result.
The slime growth on a filter is very slippery. EXTREME
CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN WALKING ON THE FIL-
TER MEDIA. Rubber boots with deeply ridged soles will help
your footing. Do not carry oil in glass containers.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 192.
6.6A Why should the flow to a trickling filter be shut off before
attempting to work on the filter?
6.6B Why should an operator walk carefully on the filter
media?
OP 3
ON
-------
186 Treatment Plants
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
(Lesson 2 of 3 Lessons)
Chapter 6. TRICKLING FILTERS
Write the answers to these questions in your notebook be-
fore continuing. The problem numbering continues from Les-
son 1.
9. Define the term SHOCK LOAD.
10. How would you correct a ponding problem?
11. Why should a ponding problem be corrected as soon as
possible?
12. What action would you take to prevent odor problems from
developing in a trickling filter?
13. Why should wastewater be kept from leaking into the bear-
ings of the distributor base?
14. Why should the flow to a trickling filter be shut off before
attempting to work on the filter?
15. What is a trend chart and how can it be used?
16. What should an operator do before an abnormal condition
occurs?
17. How would you attempt to identify the source or cause of
an abnormal condition?
18. Develop a PLANT OPERATION PLAN for when a surge of
septic wastewater hits a treatment plant from the clear-
ance of a sewer-line stoppage.
CHAPTER 6. TRICKLING FILTERS
(Lesson 3 of 3 Lessons)
6.7 LOADING CRITERIA
6.70 Typical Loading Rates
STANDARD-RATE FILTER:
Media (rock)
- 6 to 8 ft depth, growth sloughs
periodically
Hydraulic Loading - 25 to 100 gal/day/sq ft
Organic (BOD) Loading - 5 to 25 lbs BOD/day/1000 cu ft
HIGH-RATE FILTER:
Media (rock)
- 3 to 5 ft depth, growth sloughs
continually
Hydraulic Loading -100 to 1000 gal/day/sq ft
Organic (BOD) Loading - 25 to 300 lbs BOD/day/1000 cu ft
6.71 Computing Hydraulic Loading
Hydraulic loading on a trickling filter is the amount of waste-
water applied per day over the surface area of the media. This
term also is called the hydraulic surface loading. In computing
hydraulic loadings, several bits of information must be
gathered. To figure the hydraulic loading, we must know:
1. The gallons per day applied to the filter, and
2. The surface area of the filter.
NOTE: Hydraulic loadings are expressed as:
gal/sq ft/day,14 or
gal/day/sq ft = gpd/sq ftu
Both expressions mean the same. The hydraulic rate indi-
cates the number of gallons of wastewater per day applied to
each square foot of surface area or the gallons of water applied
to each square foot each day.
Suppose we have a high-rate filter that is fed by a pump
rated at 2100 gpm and the filter diameter is 100 feet.
Hydraulic Loading, _ Flow Rate, gpd
gpd/sq ft Surface Area, sq ft
For our problem, we must obtain the flow rate in gpd and
surface area15 in square feet or ft2.
(a)
(b)
(c)
Flow Rate
9Pd
2100
x 60 min x 24 hrs
min hr day
= 3,024,000 gal/day
Surface Area, = Q 785 x (Diameter ft)2
= 0.785 x 100 ft x 100 ft
= 7850 sq ft
Hydraulic
Loading,
gpd/sq ft
Flow Rate, gpd
Surface Area, sq ft
3,024,000 gpd
7850 sq ft
385 gpd/sq ft
385
7850) 3,024,000.
2 355 0
669 00
628 00
41 000
39 250
1 750
14 Loadings as well as tost results should always be presented using the same units. Theoretically a rate should have the TIME UNIT LAST
(gallsq ftlday); however, because flows are calculated as gall day, It Is easier to understand If loadings are reported as gatldaylsq ft.
15 Area of a = Q 7S5 x Diameter, ft x Diameter, ft, or
Circle, sq ft
= 0.785 D2
-------
Trickling Filters 187
Note that in computing hydraulic loadings when the filter
effluent is recirculated to the filter influent, RECIRCULATED
flow must be added to the primary clarifier effluent flow in order
to calculate the total hydraulic loading. When filter effluent is
recirculated to the primary clarifier influent, recirculated flow
must be added to the clarifier influent flow.
6.72 Computing Organic (BOO) Loading
Using the same filter as in the above example of hydraulic
loading, assume that the laboratory test results show that the
wastewater being applied to the filter has a BOD of 100 mgIL
and a filter depth of 3 feet. We need to know the pounds of
BOD applied per day and the volume of the media in cu ft.
NOTE: Organic (BOD) loadings are expressed as:
lbs BOD/1000 cu ft/day, or
lbs BOD/day/1000 cu ft.
Both expressions mean the same. The organic loading indi-
cates the pounds of BOD applied per day to the volume of
filter media for treatment.
Organic (BOD) Loading,
lbs BOD/day/1000 cu ft
BOD Applied, lbs/day
Volume of Media in 1000 cu ft
To solve this problem we must first calculate the BOD
applied in lbs/day and volume of media in cu ft.
Volume of Media, = (Surface Area sq ft) (Depth ft)
= (7850 sq ft) (3 ft)
= 23,550 CU ft
In computing BOD loadings, it is standard practice to ignore
the BOD of the recirculated effluent, where recirculation is
used. To attempt to perform this calculation (using the recircu-
lated load) is complicated and makes it difficult to compare
your loadings and resulting effluent quality with other plants.
If your plant must provide NITRIFICATION,17 lower the or-
ganic loading to 20 to 30 pounds of BOD per day per 1000
cubic feet of filter media. This should produce an effluent with
an ammonia nitrogen level below 1 mg//. and a nitrate-nitrogen
concentration of around 15 mg IL.
6.73 Typical Loading Rates (Metric)
The next three sections show typical loading rates for trick-
ling filters in the metric system and how to calculate the hydrau-
lic loading and organic loading using the metric system.
STANDARD-RATE FILTER:
Media (rock) - 1.8 to 2.4 meters depth
Hydraulic Loading -1.0 to 4.0 cu m/day/sq m
Organic (BOD) Loading - 0.08 to 0.4 kg/day/cu m
HIGH-RATE FILTER:
Media (rock) - 0.9 to 1.5 meters depth
Hydraulic Loading - 4.0 to 40 cu m/day/sq m
Organic (BOD) Loading - 0.4 to 4.8 kg/day/cu m
Volume of Media,
in 1000 cu ft
= 23.5 (1000 cu ft units)
= 23.5 thousand cubic feet
lbs/dayPP'ied = 16
= 100 mg x 3 Q24 M gal x 8.34 lb
M mg day gal
3.024
8.34
= 2522 lbs BOD/day
12096
9072
24192
25.22016
Organic BOD Loading, = BOD Applied, lbs BOD/day
lbs BOD/day/1000 cu ft Vo|ume of Media (in 10oo cu ft)
107.
_ 2522 lbs BOD/day 23.5) 2522.0
— — ' 235
23.5 (1000 cu ft)
172 0
= 107 lbs BOD/day/1000 cu ft 164 5
6.74 Computing Hydraulic Loading (Metric)
Suppose we have a high-rate filter that is fed by a pump
rated at 0.132 cu m/sec (2100 gpm), and the filter diameter is
30.5 m (100 feet):
Hydraulic Loading, = Flow Rate, cu m/day
cu m/day/sq m Surface Area, sq m
For our problem, we must obtain the flow rate in cubic me-
ters per day and the surface area in square meters.
(a) Flow Rate,
cu m/day
0132 cu m x 60 560 x 60 min x 24 hr
sec min
= 11,447 cu m/day
hr
day
(b) Surface Area, = * x (Diameter| m)*
sq m 4
= 0.785 x 30.5 m x 30.5 m
= 730.6 sq m
16 The units of this formula can be proved by remembering that one liter weighs or equals one million milligrams.
mg _ mg _ mg
L 1,000,000 mg M mg
Therefore,
HIM. BOD x MGD x 8.34 J*L = mg B0D x M ga/ x lb =lh BOD/day
L gal M mg day gal
17 Nitrification (NYE-tri-fi-KAY-shun). A process in which bacteria change the ammonia and organic nitrogen in wastewater into oxidized
nitrogen (usually nitrate). The second-stage BOD is sometimes referred to as the "nitrification stage" (first-stage BOD is called the
"carbonaceous stage").
-------
188 Treatment Plants
(c) Hydraulic
Loading,
cu m/day/sq m
or
Row Rate, cu m/day
Surface Area, sq m
11,447 cu m/day
730.6 sq m
= 15.7 cu m/day/sq m
= 385 gpd/sq ft
6.75
Computing Organic (BOD) Loading (Metric)
Using the same filter as in the above example of hydraulic
loading, assume that the laboratory test results show that the
wastewater being applied to the filter has a BOD of 100 mgIL.
We need to know the kilograms of BOD applied per day and
the volume of the media in cubic meters.
Organic (BOD)
Loading,
kg BOD/day
Bod applied, kg/day
Volume of media in cu m
6.7G Is the filter in Problem 6.7F loaded within normal limits
for a standard-rate filter?
To solve this problem we must first calculate the volume of
the media in cubic meters and the BOD applied in kilograms
per day.
Volume of Media,
cu m
BOD Applied,
kg/day
Organic BOD
Loading,
kg BOD/day
cu m
or
: (Surface Area, sq m) (Depth, m)
= (730.6 sq m) (0.9 m)
= 657.5 cu m
= (BOD, mgIL) (Flow, cu m/day) (1000 kg/cu m)1
100 mg
1,000,000 mg
= 1,144.7 kg/day
11,447 cum x 1,000 kg
day
cu m
= BOD Applied, kg BOD/day
Volume of Media, cu m
= 1,144.7 kg BOD/day
657.5 cu m
= 1.7 kg BOD/day/cu m
= 107 lbs BOD/day/1000 cu ft
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on pages 192 and 193.
6.7A What is hydraulic loading of a trickling filter and how is it
expressed?
6.7B What information must be available to figure the hy-
draulic loading on a trickling filter?
6.7C What is the hydraulic loading on a trickling filter 80 feet
in diameter that is receiving a flow of 3200 gpm?
6.7D Is the filter in Problem 6.7C within the normal hydraulic
loading range for high-rate filters?
6.7E What information is needed to figure the BOD loading
on a trickling filter?
6.7F Compute the BOD loading on a standard-rate trickling
filter with a diameter of 100 feet, media depth 8 feet,
which is receiving 350 gpm of wastewater with a BOD
of 100 mgIL.
6.8 REVIEW OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Plans and specifications should be reviewed by operators so
they can:
1. Become familiar with a proposed plant,
2. Learn what will be constructed, and
3. Offer suggestions on how the plant can be designed for
easier and more effective operation and maintenance.
When reviewing plans, carefully study those areas influenc-
ing how the plant will be operated and maintained. These
areas should include:
1. Site.
a. Access to the filter. Consider roads for maintenance
equipment and walkways for personnel.
b. Overhead clearance. Determine locations and dis-
tances to electrical power and telephone lines. Be sure
they will not interfere with the boom of a crane lifting a
turntable.
c. Trees and shrubs near filters. Trees should not be
planted or allowed to remain close to open filters be-
cause leaves will plug the voids in the media, cause
ponding, and also prevent ventilation. Evergreen trees
are recommended over trees that lose their leaves. Be
sure that trees are planted where their roots can't get
into plant piping.
d. Location of hose bibs (high-pressure water faucets).
Place hose bibs at convenient locations for washing
down the filter and other maintenance jobs.
2. Trickling filter structure.
a. Access to turntable seals and also oil drain, fill and level
plugs. Be sure sufficient space is provided for neces-
sary maintenance work.
b. Layout of underdrain grillage and channels. Space
must be provided for flushing out solids, carrying solids
away, and also proper ventilation.
c. Location of valves and gates. Provisions must be made
to allow flooding of the filter media and also dewatering
of effluent control boxes and underdrain collector
channels. Be sure valves are located between observa-
18 The density of water Is 1000 kg per cu m. Also remember that 1 liter of water weighs 1,000,000 mg.
-------
tion and sampling manholes and the filter in order to
allow flooding of the filter.
d. Access to effluent boxes. Access and space must be
available for removal of effluent box covers or grates
and also maintenance of slide gates.
e. Center column support. Support should be wide
enough for timbers and jacks to be used to raise the
distributor from the turntable for race maintenance.
f. Covered trickling filters.
1) The operator cannot easily see if the distributor arm
is moving under the cover. Some type of device
which causes a light to flash when the arm passes a
certain point should be placed on the end of one of
the arms. Then the operator can determine the
speed of rotation of the distributor arm by watching
the flashing light.
2) If the filter is completely covered, a forced-air venti-
lation system is needed. If odors cause complaints
from neighbors, an odor-scrubbing device will be
needed also. The fans should be installed so the
forced-air ventilation will be in the same direction as
natural air currents. These ventilation fans must be
equipped with air-tight seals to avoid corrosion prob-
lems.
3) Proper materials must be used to avoid corrosion of
the roof structure.
3. Equipment.
a. Distributors
1) Adjustable orifice plates should be installed on both
the leading and trailing edges of the distributor
arms.
2) Safety stops should be installed to prevent endgate
handle from catching in the media during flushing of
the distributor arm.
3) Turnbuckles on guy rods must have sufficient
thread length to make necessary adjustments.
b. Valves
1) Valves must seat properly against design heads to
prevent leakage back into channel during dewater-
ing operations.
2) A protective coating must be applied to all gates and
frames.
3) Stop nuts must be installed on all valve stems.
4. Safety
a. Guardrails must be located where necessary.
b. Look for areas where splashing water could cause slip-
pery surface and suggest corrective changes.
c. Be sure switches for turning off pumps to distributor
arms are located so that the distributor arm can be
stopped quickly and easily when necessary.
Trickling Filters 189
d. Install 115 to 120-volt receptacles at appropriate loca-
tions to permit the use of drop lights when inspecting
vents and underdrains.
NOTE: Some items may not be covered on the plans, but may
be discussed in the specifications.
When reading specifications, study the following items:
1. Equipment details should indicate the sizes, capacities,
flow rates, pressures, horsepowers, efficiencies and mate-
rials. Be sure protective guards and coatings are provided.
2. Performance capabilities of equipment.
3. Testing details. Will the equipment be tested at the manu-
facturer's factory and/or at the plant site? What are the tests
supposed to accomplish?
4. Responsibility of equipment manufacturer's representative
regarding:
a. Installation inspection,
b. Installation testing,
c. Training of staff for equipment operation and mainte-
nance,
d. Assistance during start-up, and
e. Warranty period and conditions.
5. Number of copies of prints, O & M manuals, and manufac-
turer's service manuals.
6. Lists of equipment spare parts (including serial and/or stock
numbers) and quantity of each spare part that should be
provided.
7. Safety
a. Safety equipment provided to protect operators.
b. Equipment has necessary approvals of safety agen-
cies.
6.9 ADDITIONAL READING ON TRICKLING FILTERS
1. MOP 11, Chapter 9," "Trickling Filtration."
2. NEW YORK MANUAL, Chapter 6, "Secondary Treatment."
3. TEXAS MANUAL, Chapter 12, "Trickling Filters."
4. AEROBIC BIOLOGICAL WASTEWATER TREATMENT
FACILITIES, A PROCESS CONTROL MANUAL, Municipal
Operations Branch, Office of Water Program Operations,
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, D.C.
20460, March 1977.
5. TRICKLING FILTER MANUAL, prepared by Minnesota Pol-
lution Control Agency. Available from National Environmen-
tal Training Association, 158 S. Napoleon Street, PO Box
346, Valparaiso, Indiana 46383. Price $10.00.
* Depends on edition.
6.10 METRIC CALCULATIONS
Refer to Sections 6.73, 6.74 and 6.75 for the solutions to all
problems in this chapter using metric calculations.
-------
190 Treatment Plants
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
(Lesson 3 of 3 Lessons)
Chapter 6. TRICKLING FILTERS
Write the answers to these questions in your notebook be-
fore continuing. The problem numbering continues from Les-
son 2.
A trickling filter is 70 feet in diameter and the depth of the
media is 5 feet. The average daily flow is 2450 gpm and the
BOD of the influent to the filter is 100 mgIL. Show your work
and calculate:
19. Flow in gallons per day.
20. Surface area of filter.
21. Hydraulic surface loading.
22. BOD applied in pounds per day.
23. Volume of filter media.
24. Organic loading.
PLEASE WORK THE OBJECTIVE TEST NEXT.
SUGGESTED ANSWERS
Chapter 6. TRICKLING FILTERS
Answers to questions on page 169.
6.0A (a) settleable solids and (b) scum or floatable solids, (c)
BOD, or organic material, or oxygen-demanding mate-
rial.
6.0B The purpose of secondary treatment is to remove solu-
ble and nonsettleable (or nonfloating) oxygen-
demanding substances.
6.0C The trickling filter process works by distributing settled
wastewater over the filter media. Microorganisms grow
on the filter media and convert colloidal and soluble
oxygen-demanding substances to forms that will sepa-
rate from the wastewater being treated.
6.0D The distributor arms or pipes on a trickling filter rotate
because of the reaction from the force of the water
leaving the arms (as with a lawn sprinkler or fire hose),
or by mechanical means (a motor and gears).
6.0E Recirculation increases the efficiency of a trickling filter
by increasing the time of contact of the wastewater with
the biological slime growth on the filter media, and by
washing off excess growths (sloughing). Sloughing
keeps the biological film in an aerobic condition and
seeds the lower regions of the filter with active or-
ganisms. Sometimes recirculation is used to prevent
intermittent drying of slimes on the filter media.
Answers to questions on page 171.
6.1 A The three general classifications of trickling filters are
standard-rate, high-rate, and roughing filters.
6.1 B The principal differences between standard-rate and
high-rate filters include BOD loadings, hydraulic load-
ings, depth of the media, recirculation and effluent qual-
ity.
Answers to questions on page 172.
6.2A Items that should be checked before placing a filter in
service:
~ Check type and amount of oil used in all oil reser-
voirs.
~ Examine distributor arms for rotation and level.
~ Inspect distributor orifices.
~ Remove debris from underdrain system.
~ Touch up any damage to painted surfaces.
~ Examine valves for seating and smooth operation.
~ Remove any trash on or in the media.
-------
Trickling Filters 191
6.2B During start-up heavy chlorination is necessary to re-
duce the health hazard and the pollutional load in the
receiving waters because the slime growths have not
developed on the filter media.
6.2C Items requiring daily checking:
~ Ponding
~ Filter flies
~ Odors
~ Plugged orifices
~ Roughness or vibration of distributor arms
~ Leakage past the seal
~ Splash beyond the filter media
~ Cleanup of slimes not on media
6.2D If a clarifier is operated below design hydraulic loading,
the solids in the clarifier will become septic and cause a
poor effluent. When the hydraulic loading is too high,
some solids may be washed out of the clarifier.
Answers to questions on page 173.
6.2E Before shutting down a trickling filter or any other major
plant process or piece of equipment, always take a few
minutes to plan what you are going to do.
6.2F The following items should be considered when shut-
ting down a trickling filter:
1. Incoming flow rates.
2. How will shutdown affect rest of plant?
3. Are the necessary tools and other needed items
available? and
4. Are there any other tasks that should be performed
while the filter is off the line?
Answers to questions on page 174.
6.3A To determine if the distribution of wastewater over the
trickling filter is even, place pans of the same size in the
media at several points along the radius of the filter.
Run the distributor until the pans are almost full. The
amount of water in each pan should not vary from the
average by more than 5 percent.
6.3B Laboratory tests used to measure the efficiency of a
trickling filter include BOD, suspended solids, and set-
tleable solids.
6.3C (1) Plant Efficiency:
BOD Efficiency, % =(ln ' 0ut) x 100%
In
= (200 mgIL - 20 mgIL) x 1Q0%
200 mgIL
(2) Trickling Filter Efficiency:
Trickling Filter
Efficiency, %
(|n ' 0ut> x 100%
In
= (140 mgIL - 20 mgIL) x 10Q%
140 mgIL
= 85.7%
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN LESSON 1
Answers to questions on page 176.
6.4A The major consideration for daily operation of a trickling
filter is to use the lowest recirculation rates that will
produce good results (meet NPDES permit require-
ments), but not cause ponding or other problems.
6.4B Trickling-filter effluent should be from 1.5 to 2.0 mgIL
DO.
Answers to questions on page 179.
6.4C Causes of ponding include excessive organic loadings
without corresponding high recirculation rate, media too
small or not sufficiently uniform in size, accumulation of
debris in filter spaces (voids), or an excessive growth of
insect larvae or snails.
6.4D To correct a ponding problem:
(a) Locate cause.
(b) Increase hydraulic loading by increasing recircula-
tion.
(c) Adjust distributor so it will rotate more slowly and
flush off some of the slime.
(d) If media are non-uniform, they should be replaced.
(e) Spray filter surface with a high-pressure water
stream or stop distributor and allow it to flush prob-
lem area.
(f) Rake or turn ponding area.
(g) Shut off filter for a few hours and allow growth to
dry so part of it may be flushed out.
(h) Flood filter.
(i) Dose filter with chlorine.
There are many possible ways to correct ponding. The
approach for a particular problem should be aimed at
the cause and the quickest and easiest way to correct
the situation. You are not expected to have listed all the
answers, but to know some of them.
6.4E To correct an odor problem in a trickling filter:
(a) Maintain aerobic conditions in collection system
and primary units.
(b) Maintain ventilation in filter.
(c) Increase recirculation rate if odor problems
develop.
6.4F Trickling filter flies can be controlled by:
(a) Increasing recirculation.
(b) Flooding filter weekly.
(c) Carefully applying insecticides.
(d) Cleaning around the filter, including pruning grass
and shrubbery.
6.4G A trickling filter should not be taken out of service during
icing conditions because the quality of the effluent will
be reduced and additional maintenance problems could
develop.
Answers to questions on page 183.
b.4H Four possible sources of abnormal conditions include:
1. Storm water infiltration;
2. Broken collection system pipe that permits excess
inflow from groundwater, a creek or stream;
3. Clearance of a main fine sewer stoppage; and
4. Industrial discharges.
-------
192 Treatment Plants
6.41 During excess flows, the operator can make the follow-
ing adjustments to the trickling-filter process:
1. If possible, increase the number of filters in opera-
tion. Filters should have active slime growths on
media;
2. Reduce or stop filter recycle or recirculation; and
3. Operate filters in parallel rather than in series.
6.4J High flows from the clearance of a sewer stoppage con-
tain a septic, odorous influent with a high solids and-
BOD load, but flows from a broken pipe may not be
septic or have the other problems.
6.4K Toxic industrial discharges are difficult to detect be-
cause:
(1) The plant influent is usually not monitored for the
toxic substance or condition (high or low pH), and (2)
industry may not notify the operator when a toxic spill or
dump occurs.
6.4L Toxic industrial discharges are often detected or sus-
pected when excessive amounts of solids start appear-
ing in the plant effluent, indicating that something has
upset the organisms living in the slime growths on the
trickling filter.
6.4M When attempting to correct a trickling filter problem,
make only one change at a time and wait approximately
one week to allow the organisms (biological process) to
stabilize so you can evaluate the effectiveness of each
change.
Answers to questions on page 185.
6.5A The purpose of the seal Is to prevent wastewater leak-
age from the center column before the wastewater is
distributed over the media.
6.5B Some oil should be drained from the distributor each
time it is checked to examine the condition of the oil and
to be sure the oil level sensing line is not plugged.
6.5C The rotational speed of a distributor can be reduced by
opening orifices on the front side of the distributor arms.
6.5D Trickling-filter underdrain maintenance consists of
flushing the lines or channels to remove sludge de-
posits or debris every 3 to 6 months.
Answers to questions on page 185.
6.6A Flow to a trickling filter should be shut off before at-
tempting to work on a filter because the rotating arms
can cause serious injury.
6.6B Walk carefully on the filter media because the slime
growths on the media are very slippery.
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN LESSON 2
Answers to questions on page 188.
6.7A Hydraulic loading on a trickling filter is the amount of
wastewater applied per day over the surface area, ex-
pressed as gallons/day/sq ft, or gpd/sq ft.
6.7B Gallons per day applied to the filter and surface area of
the filter in sq ft. These two items are all that are
needed. However, it is necessary to convert the other
data into the proper form (gpm to gal/day and surface
area to sq ft).
6.7C GIVEN: Diameter = 80 ft
Flow = 3200 gpm
REQUIRED: Hydraulic Loading
Hydraulic Loading, _ Flow Rate, gpd
gpd/sq ft Surface Area, sq ft
Find FLOW RATE, gpd, and SURFACE AREA in sq ft.
Flow Rate, _ 32qq 9?| x 60 min x 24 hrs
min hr day
= 4,608,000 gal/day
Surface Area, = 0.785 x (Diameter, ft)2
** ft - 0.785 x 80 ft x 80 ft
= 5025 sq ft (rounded off)
Hydraulic = Flow Rate, gpd
Loading Surface Area, sq ft
gpd/sq ft
= 4,608,000 gpd
5025 sq ft
= 917 gpd/sq ft
6.7D Yes. The hydraulic loading range for high-rate filters is
100 to 1000 gpd/sq ft.
6.7E To calculate the BOD loading on a trickling filter, the
pounds of BOD applied per day and the volume of filter
media in thousands of cu ft are needed. Since BOD is
reported in mg!L, the standard formula for converting
mgIL to pounds per day is needed (mg(L x MGD x
8.34), and usually gpm will have to be converted to
MGD (700 gpm = 1 MGD). There are many conversion
factors that can be used to obtain the correct answers,
and you should use the ones you are familiar with and
understand.
6.7F GIVEN: Diameter =100 ft
Depth =8 ft
Flow =350 gpm
BOD =100 mg/L
REQUIRED: Organic (BOD) Loading
Organic (BOO) Loading, „ BOO Applied, lbs (BOD/day
lbs BOD/day/1000 cuff volume of Media, 1000 cu ft
Find SURFACE AREA, MEDIA VOLUME, and BOD
APPLIED.
Surface Area, sq ft - 0.785 x (Diameter, ft)2
= 0.785 x 100 ft x 100 ft
" 7,850 sq ft
Volume of Media, cu ft = (Surface Area, sq ft) (Depth, ft)
= (7,850 sq 1t) (8 ft)
« 62,800 cu ft
= 82.8 (1000 eUftf
-------
Trickling Filters 193
Flow Rate, MGD
(350 gpm)
700 gpm/MGD
= 0.5 MGD
BOO Applied, = (BOD, mg/L) (Flow, MGD) (8.34 lb/gal)
lbs/day
= 100 m9 x f> k M 9a* x 8.34 A
M mg day gal
= 417 lbs BOD/day
Organic (BOD) Loading, _ BOD Applied, lbs/day
lbs/day/1000 cu ft Volume of Media, 1000 cu ft
= 417 lbs/day
62.8 (1000 cu ft)
= 6.6 lbs BOD/day/1000 cu ft
6.7G Yes. The BOD loading range for standard-rate filters Is
5 to 25 pounds of BOD per day per 1000 cu ft.
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN LESSON 3
OBJECTIVE TEST
Chapter 6. TRICKLING FILTERS
Please write your name and mark the correct answers on the
answer sheet as directed at the end of Chapter 1. There may
be more than one answer to each question.
1. Trickling filtration is a primary treatment process.
1. True
2. Falser
»
2. Trickling filters are sometimes called biofilters.
1. True ^
2. False
3. Screening and flotation are biological methods of treating
wastewater.
1. True
2. False X
4. Disinfection is done in trickling filters.
1. True
2. False^/
5. Masking agents are used to cover trickling filter media.
1. True
v2. False
6. Primary clarifier effluent is the same as trickling fitter in-
fluent In some treatment plants.
1. True*
2. False
7. Trickling filter efficiency is not influenced by temperature.
1. True
2. False ^
8. Odors can be an indication of how poorly or property a
trickling filter is operating.
1. True
^ 2. False
9.
low?
1. Aerobic conditions may develop in the secondary
clarifier.
^2. Anaerobic conditions may develop in the secondary
clarifier.
10. What might happen If recirculation rates are too high?
^1. Solids willwash out of the secondary clarifier.
2. The effluent will be sparkling clear.
11. A flow of 2100,GPM is approximately the same as
t. 0.33 MGD. t>ief
4.) ^
"o * S
2. 0.50 MGD.
3. 1.0 MGD.
4. 2 MGD.
v/S. 3 MGD.
/
3 O
12. Physical methods of waste treatment Include '
1. Activated sludge.
2. Disinfection.
" 3. Screens.
^4. Sedimentation.
5. Trickling filters.
13. The differences between high-rate filters and standard-
rate filters include
^1. Depth of filter.
v2. Flows per day per square foot of surface area.
*/3. Pounds of BOD per day per cubic foot of media.
4. Type of distributor.
5. Type of rock.
14. The basic parts of a trickling filter include
1. Distribution box.
V2. Distribution system.
V3. Media.
4. Piaiitps.
v 5. Underdrain system.
15. Before staling up a new trickling filter plant, the operator
should check the
1. niter media to be sure it consists of rooks of different
sizespacked tightlytogether.
•sJ2. Oil reservoirs lor proper amount and type of oil.
>i. 3. Rotation of distributor arm.
v 4. Underdrain system for debris.
5, Zoogleal film on filter media.
16. When operating a trlokHng fitter, the operator should
VI . Adjust the process to obtain the beat possible results
for theteast cost.
2. Bubble oxygen up through the filter.
v^3. Maintain aerobic conditions in the filter.
4. Rotate the distributor as fe*t as possible to better spray
settled wastewater over the media,
v 5. Use tiie lowest recirculation rates that wlH yield good
results to conserve power.
-------
194 Treatment Plants
17. Successful trickling filter operation depends on
1. Filtering the solids out of the wastewater.
2. Maintenance of a chlorine residual in the effluent.
v3. Maintenance of a good growth of organisms on the
filter media.
4. Preventing sludge bulking.
5. Washing all slimes off the filter media.
18. Problems associated with trickling filters include
1. Bulking.
V2. Filter flies.
v3. Odors.
*4. Ponding.
5. Turbid effluent.
19. To correct an odor problem in a trickling filter, the operator
should
vi. Check ventilation in the filter,
v 2. Increase recirculation rate.
3. Shut off flow to the filter.
v4. Take corrective action immediately,
v 5. Try to develop and maintain aerobic conditions.
20. Ponding on a trickling filter may be caused by
1. Dosing the filter with chlorine.
V2. Excessive organic loading.
*3. Insufficient recirculation rate.
4. Spraying (jetting) the filter surface with a high-pressure
water stream.
v5. Use of media which are too small.
21. Which test BEST measures the efficiency of a trickling
filter?
Vi. BOD
2. pH
3. Sludge age
4. Temperature
5. Total solids
22. Masking agents
1. Are biological agents.
2. Cover the filter.
3. Mask the plant.
V4. May be sprayed into the air.
v5. Tend to make undesirable odors unnoticeable.
23. A shock load is
1. An earthquake.
2. An electrical charge.
3. A heavy blow.
* 4. An unexpected strong influent flow.
5. A waste which is toxic to plant organisms.
24. Loadings on a trickling filter may be expressed as
V1. gal/day/sq ft.
2. gal/day/1000 cu ft.
3. lb BOD/day/sq ft
V4. lb BOD/day/1000 cu ft
5. lb H20/day/sq ft
25. The hydraulic surface loading on a trickling filter 80 feet in
diameter with a flow of 0.5 MGD is approximately
vY 100gpd/sqft. ft; . i
2. 95 gpd/sq ft. Q*X W' £T
3. 90 gpd/sq ft. /
4. 85 gpd/sq ft. f
5. 80 gpd/sq ft.
26. What is the organic load applied to a trickling filter in
pounds of BOD per day for a filter with a diameter of 80
feet, a depth of 4 feet, a flow of 0.5 MGD, and a filter
influent BOD of 100 mg/L?
2. isoibSday " ¦ r""' ' *n
V5. 417 lbs/day 4-
27. Maintenance of a distributor moved by hydraulic action
includes
1. Adjusting the end gates if the distributor arm does not
rotate smoothly.
v2. Adjusting turnbuckles occasionally on guy rods to keep
rotating arms at proper level.
V3. Cleaning orifices in the distributor amis.
4. Cleaning the filter media.
5. Greasing gears that rotate the distributor.
28. The following information is provided regarding a trickling
filter:
a. Media is uniformly sized and not disintegrating,
b. Media surface is free of debris,
c. Organic loadings have increased recently, and
d. Hydraulic loadings have remained constant.
What could be the cause of ponding on the trickling filter?
V1. Increase in biological slime growths on media.
2. Increase in chlorination dose to the filter.
3. increase in filter ventilation.
4. Increase in growths of pathogenic organisms in the
filter voids.
5. Increase in wastewater distribution over the surface of
the media.
END OF OBJECTIVE TEST
-------
CLE AN WATER, U.S.A.
WATER POLLUTION CONTROL PLANT
MONTHLY RECORD
19
OPERATOR:
DATE
DAY
WEATHER
FLOW MGD
RAW WASTEWATER
PRIM. EFF.
FINAL EFFLUENT
DIGESTION
REMARKS
SUMMARY DATA
TEMP.
Z
a
SETT. SOLIDS
BOD
SUSP SOLIDS
BOD
SUSP SOLIDS
D. 0.
X
a.
BOD
SUSP SOLIDS
o
b
V)
Id
O 4
a: o
a.
in ro
« 1-
O u.
MIXING HRS.
7„ REMOVAL
BOD
S s
INF- PRI
30.0
52.+
INF— EFF
64.6
87.2
SLUDGE DATA
1
M
FAIR
1.200
70
7.3
8
110
208
1)2
S5
2.}
7.6
21
21
7.0
2.1
5140
IDO
32
10800
4
7. SOLIDS — AVG.
4.4
2
T
n
l.f«I
6?
77
10
205
£16
143
101
1.1
7.4
SI
24
6.8
2.4
5135
1 10
32
11450
-
LBS. DRY SOLIDS / DAY
1,627
W
„
t 120
6?
7*
II
?Z0
ZZZ
153
ioe
2.0
7.0
23
26
5.1
3.0
5380
10
33
11220
ft
4
T
,,
O.W
70
7.1
1
IS4
201
127
12
2.1
7.2
26
32
£.3
1.8
4765
120
33
11570
8
Sludce to* 1 Bco - It.oooSHI..
7. VOL. SOLIDS — AVG.
76
5
F
CLW
1.008
43
7.0
7
9
232
211
1 SI
2*6
2.10
ZiS
I6£
120
2.0
7.3
7.3
7.2
31
25
8.1
1.1
50I0
1 IS
34
10110
6
LBS. VOL. SOLIDS / DAY
1,388
6
S
H
r i n?
f.A
7?
147
ins
? Z
30
ae
30
21
7.8
74
?.l
5240
120
3?
1 1200
4
7
s
FAIR
o.m
69
73
8
131
18
2.1
2.0
4815
no
32
1 El 00
4
LBS. VOL. SOLIDS/IOOOFT^DAY
27.7
8
GALS. SLUDGE TO BEDS
43,000
9
-
_ -i
10
—
CU. YDS. CAKE REMOVED
22
1 1
FT3 GAS/LB. VOL. SOLIDS
8jO
1 2
--
-
13
FT3 GAS/MG FLOW
10,800
14
IS
rn«;T HATA
16
17
~ -
MAN DAYS_±d_ PAYROLL
1 1,250-
18
POWER PURCHASED
450 ~~
19
20
OTHER UTILITIES (GAS,H->0)
G0~
2 1
GASOLINE, OIL, GREASE
30~
??
23
CHEMICALS AND SUPPLIES
95 ~~
24
-
-----
—
MAINTENANCE
140 —
25
26
VEHICLE COSTS
70—
27
OTHER
20—
28
29
TOTAL
» 2,105-
30
--
—-
j?l
Ml
tx.
OPERATING COST/MG TREATED
| €6.83
MIN.
!E\o
TSo
Too"
2.6
"7.3"
30
OPERATING COST/CAPITA / MO.
t °-21
AVG.
1.016
63
7. /
115
27
6.4
2.0
4100
100
33
II .000
4-
FLOW METER:
last 4±sa27_
,,t 41374-9
t"t»i ¦ 31.466 ur.
ELECTRIC METER :
LAST 5116
4fe2l
MULT 9° X _375_
30 OOP kwh
RAW sludge:
last 857,314
1st 699.RI4
STROKES SCUM
TnTAl 154.000 y 1.0
_i!00
. ISffiOO r.A! c
GAS meter:
LAST 724216
l5, 383216
""I ¦ 34I.QOO ct3
o
3
D
so
CO
3"
CD
(D
>
TJ
¦o
m
z
D
X
-------
CHAPTER 7
ROTATING BIOLOGICAL CONTACTORS
by
Richard Wick
-------
198 Treatment Plants
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 7. Rotating Biological Contactors
Page
OBJECTIVES 200
GLOSSARY 201
7.0 Description of Rotating Biological Contactors 202
7.1 Process Operation 210
7.10 Pretreatment Requirements 210
7.11 Start-Up 210
7.110 Pre-Start Checks for New Equipment 210
7.111 Procedure for Starting Unit 213
7.12 Operation 213
7.120 Inspecting Equipment 213
7.121 Testing Influent and Effluent 214
7.122 Observing the Media 216
7.13 Abnormal Operation 218
7.14 Shutdown and Restart 218
7.2 Maintenance 218
7.20 Break-In Maintenance 218
7.21 Preventive Maintenance Program 219
7.22 Housekeeping 219
7.23 Troubleshooting Guide 220
7.230 Roller Chain Drive 220
7.231 Belt Drive 221
7.3 Safety 222
7.30 Slow-Moving Equipment 222
7.31 Wiring and Connections 222
7.32 Slippery Surfaces 222
7.33 Infections and Diseases 222
7.4 Review of Plans and Specifications 222
7.5 Loading Calculations 222
7.50 Typical Loading Rates 222
7.51 Computing Hydraulic Loading 222
-------
Rotating Contactors 199
7.52 Computing Organic (BOD) Loading 223
7.53 Typical Loading Rates (Metric) 223
7.54 Computing Hydraulic Loading (Metric) 223
7.55 Computing Organic (BOD) Loading (Metric) 223
7.6 Acknowledgments 224
7.7 Additional Reading on Rotating Biological Contactors 224
7.8 Metric Calculations 224
-------
OBJECTIVES
Chapter 7. ROTATING BIOLOGICAL CONTACTORS
Following completion of Chapter 7, you should be able to do
the following:
1. Describe a rotating biological contactor and the purpose of
each important part,
2. Start-up and operate a rotating biological contactor,
3. Operate a rotating biological contactor under abnormal
conditions,
4. Shutdown and restart a rotating biological contactor,
5. Maintain and troubleshoot a rotating biological contactor,
6. Safely perform the duties of the operator of a rotating
biological contactor,
7. Review the plans and specifications for a rotating biological
contactor, and
8. Calculate the hydraulic and organic loadings on a rotating
biological contactor.
-------
Rotating Contactors
201
GLOSSARY
Chapter 7. ROTATING BIOLOGICAL CONTACTORS
BIODEGRADABLE (BUY-o-dee-GRADE-able) BIODEGRADABLE
Organic matter that can be broken down by bacteria to more stable forms which will not create a nuisance or give off foul odors.
COMPOSITE (PROPORTIONAL) SAMPLE COMPOSITE (PROPORTIONAL) SAMPLE
(com-POZ-it)
A composite sample is a collection of individual samples obtained at regular intervals, usually every one or two hours during a
24-hour time span. Each individual sample is combined with the others in proportion to the flow when the sample was collected. The
resulting mixture (composite sample) forms a representative sample and is analyzed to determine the average conditions during the
sampling period.
GRAP SAMPLE GRAB SAMPLE
A single sample of wastewater taken at neither a set time nor flow.
INHIBITORY SUBSTANCES INHIBITORY SUBSTANCES
Materials that kill or restrict the ability of organisms to treat wastes.
MPN (EM-PEA-EN) MPN
MPN is the Most Probable Number of coliform-group organisms per unit volume. Expressed as a density or population of organisms
per 100 ml.
NEUTRALIZATION (new-trall-i-ZAY-shun) NEUTRALIZATION
Addition of an acid or alkali (base) to a liquid to cause the pH of the liquid to move towards a neutral pH of 7.0.
NITRIFICATION (NYE-tri-fi-KAY-shun) NITRIFICATION
A process in which bacteria change the ammonia and organic nitrogen in wastewater into oxidized nitrogen (usually nitrate). The
second-stage BOD is sometimes referred to as the "nitrification stage" (first-stage BOD is called the "carbonaceous stage").
PYROMETER (pie-ROM-uh-ter) PYROMETER
An apparatus used to measure high temperatures.
SOLUBLE BOD SOLUBLE BOD
Soluble BOD is the BOD of water that has been filtered in the standard suspended solids test.
SUPERNATANT (sue-per-NAY-tent) SUPERNATANT
Liquid removed from settled sludge. Supernatant commonly refers to the liquid between the sludge on the bottom and the scum on
the surface of an anaerobic digester. This liquid is usually returned to the influent wet well or to the primary clarifier.
-------
202 Treatment Plants
CHAPTER 7. ROTATING BIOLOGICAL CONTACTORS
7.0 DESCRIPTION OF ROTATING BIOLOGICAL CON-
TACTORS
Rotating biological contactors (RBC) are a secondary biolog-
ical treatment process (Figure 7.1) for domestic and BIODE-
GRADABLE1 industrial wastes. Biological contactors have a
rotating "shaft" surrounded by plastic discs called the "media."
The shaft and media are called the "drum" (Figures 7.2 and
7.3). A biological slime grows on the media when conditions
are suitable. This process is very similar to a trickling filter
where the biological slime grows on rock or other media and
settled wastewater (primary clarifier effluent) is applied over
the media. With rotating biological contactors, the biological
slime grows on the surface of the plastic-disc media. The slime
is rotated into the settled wastewater and then into the atmos-
phere to provide oxygen for the organisms (Fig. 7.2). The
wastewater being treated usually flows paralleUaitafijataling
cfihaft, but may flow perpendicular to the shaft as it flows from
stage-to-stage or tank-to-tank.
The plastic-disc media are made of high-density plastic cir-
cular sheets usually 12 feet (3.6 m) in diameter. These sheets
are bonded and assembled onto horizontal shafts up to 25 feet
(7.5 m) in length. Spacing between the sheets provides the
hollow (void) space for distribution of wastewater and air (Fig-
ures 7.3 and 7.4).
The rotating biological contactor process uses several plas-
tic media drums. Concrete or coated steel tanks usually hold
the wastewater being treated. The media rotate while approx-
imately 40 percent of the media surface is immersed in the
wastewater (Fig. 7.4). As the drum rotates, the media pick up a
thin layer of wastewater which flows over the biological slimes
on the discs. Organisms living in the slimes use organic matter
from the wastewater for food and dissolved oxygen from the
air, thus removing wastes from the water being treated. As the
attached slimes pass through the wastewater, some of the
slimes are sloughed from the media as the media rotates
downward into the wastewater being treated. The effluent with
the sloughed slimes flows to the secondary clarifier where the
slimes are removed from the effluent by settling. Figure 7.5
shows the location of a rotating biological contactor process in
a wastewater treatment plant. The process is located in the
same position as the trickling filter or activated sludge aeration
basin. Usually the process operates on a "once-through"
scheme, with no recycling of effluent or sludge, which makes it
a simple process to operate.
The major parts of the process are listed in Table 7.1 along
with their purposes. The concrete or steel tanks are commonly
shaped to conform to the general shape of the media. This
shape eliminates dead spots where solids could settle out and
cause odors and septic conditions. These tanks may be di-
vided into four bays (stages) with either concrete walls or re-
movable baffles, depending on the design.
The rotating biological contactor process is usually divided
into four different stages (Fig. 7.6). Each stage is separated by
a removable baffle, concrete wall or cross-tank bulkhead.
Wastewater flow commonly is parallel to the shaft. Each bulk-
head or baffle has an underwater orifice or hole to permit flow
from one stage to the next. Each section of media between
bulkheads acts as a separate stage of treatment.
Staging is used in order to maximize the effectiveness of a
given amount of media surface area. Organisms on the first-
stage media are exposed to high levels of BOD and reduce the
BOD at a high rate.,AsiheJ3QD levels decr§ase4fem,$tage to
stage, the rate at which the oraamsfns~can removg_g6Pjle-
creasesT"
Treatment plants requiring four or more shafts of media usu-
ally are arranged so that each shaft serves as an individual
stage of treatment. The shafts are arranged so the flow is
perpendicular to the shafts (Fig. 7.6, Layout No. 3). Plants with
fewer than four shafts are usually arranged with the flow paral-
lel to the shaft (Fig. 7.6, Layout No. 1).
Rotating biological contactors are covered for several rea-
sons which depend on climatic conditions! ~—---—'
1. Protect biological slime growths from freezing;
2. Prevent intense rains from washing off some of the slime
growths;
3. Stop exposure of media to direct sunlight to prevent growth
of algae;
4. Avoid exposure of media to sunlight which may cause the
media to become brittle; and
5. Provide protection for operators from sun, rain or wind while
maintaining equipment.
1 Biodegradable (BUY-o-dee-GRADE-able). Organic matter that can be broken down by bacteria to more stable forms which will not create
a nuisance or give off foul odors.
-------
Rotating Contactors 203
TEEATWENT P(206B4>6
PUNC-TIOW
p££T/2£A7M£A/r
INPLU6WT
emoi/ss
0£££/g f/MZK T&JAaAr/ZC/U, ajP/^
poa/s/f 6/£>/A//?ffifzm/ &/&wr/&>n<>
££MOi/£S ^AA>0t
-------
Fig. 7.2 Rotating biological contactors
(Permission of Autotrol Corporation)
-------
Fig. 7.3 Plastic disc media and biological contactor drum
(Permission of Autotrol Corporation)
-------
206 Treatment Plants
End-view sketch illustrates exchange
of air and wastewater
Media cross section
RADIAL PASSAGES
CORRUGATED
MEDIA
Fig. 7.4 Sections of the plastic disc media
(Permission of Autotrol Corporation)
-------
CHLORINE
CONTACT
BASIN
INFLUENT
SOLIDS TO
TREATMENT
SOLIDS TO
TREATMENT
CHLORINE
COMMINUTOR
SECONDARY
EFFLUENT
SOLIDS TO
DISPOSAL
ROTATING BIO
REACTOR EFFLUENT
GRIT CHAMBER
SECONDARY
CLARIFIER
PRIMARY
CLARIFIER
ROTATING
REACTOR
NO. 1
ROTATING
REACTOR
NO. 2
PRIMARY INFLUENT PRIMARY EFFLUENT
3)
O
0)
3"
ID
O
o
Fig. 7.5 Typical rotating biological contactor £
(reactor) treatment plant "
o
0)
-------
208 Treatment Plants
TABLE 7.1 PURPOSE OF PARTS OF A ROTATING
BIOLOGICAL CONTACTOR
Part
Purpose
1. Concrete or Steel Tank Di-
vided into Bays (Sections)
by Baffles (Bulkheads)
2. Orifice or Weir
Located in Baffle
3. Rotating Media
4. Cover over Contactor
5. Drive Assembly
6. Influent Lines with Valves
7. Effluent Lines with Valves
Tank. Holds the wastewater
being treated and allows the
wastewater to come in contact
with the organisms on the
discs.
Bays and baffles. Prevent
short-circuiting of wastewater.
Controls flow from one stage
to the next stage or from one
bay to the next bay.
Provide support for or-
ganisms. Rotation provides
food (from wastewater being
treated) and air for organisms.
Protects organisms from se-
vere fluctuations in the
weather, especially freezing.
Also contains odors.
Rotates the media.
Influent lines. Transport
wastewater to be treated to
the rotating biological contac-
tor.
Influent valves. Regulate in-
fluent to contactor and also to
isolate contactor for mainte-
nance.
Effluent lines. Convey treated
wastewater from the contac-
tor to the secondary clarifier.
Effluent valves. Regulate
effluent from the contactor
and also isolate contactor for
maintenance.
8. Underdrains
Allow for removal of solids
which may settle out in tank.
-------
Rotating Contactors 209
STAGE 12 3 4
MEDIA
SHAFT
PLAN
MEDIA
INFLUENT
EFFLUENT
PROFILE
LAYOUT NO. 1 ONE SHAFT, FOUR STAGES
FLOW PARALLEL TO SHAFT
STAGE
'MEDIA
¦~-SHAFT
PLAN
VT
VT
vr
t 1
f—1
¦j 1
i l 1
i—i
.MEDIA
SHAFT
INFLUENT
PROFILE
EFFLUENT
LAYOUT NO. 2
FOUR SHAFTS, FOUR STAGES
FLOW PARALLEL TO SHAFT
STAGE 12 3 4
INFLUENT
>» EFFLUENT
PLAN
INFLUENT
MED A
SHAFT
V- EFFLUENT
PROFILE
LAYOUT NO. 3 FOUR SHAFTS, FOUR STAGES
FLOW PERPENDICULAR TO SHAFT
Fig. 7.6 Possible rotating biobgical contactor layouts
-------
210 Treatment Plants
Fiber glass covers in the shape of the media are easily re-
moved for maintenance. In some areas, the rotating biological
contactors are covered by a building. In other areas only a roof
is placed over the media for protection against sunlight. The
type of cover depends on climatic conditions.
Two types of drive assemblies are used to rotata4he-sbafts_
sOppCrting the media:
1'. Motor with chain drive (Fig. 7.7), and
2. Air drive (Fig. 7.8).
The first type of drive assembly consists of a motor, belt
drive, gear or speed reducer, and chain drive. The other drive
unit consists of plastic cups attached to the outside of the
media (Fig. 7.8). A small air header holnu" *he pHga gf thp
media releases air into the cups. The air in the cups creates a
buoyant force which then makes the shaft turn. With either type
of drive assembly, the main shaft is supported by two main
bearings.
Individual units are usually provided with influent and
effluent line valving to allow isolation for maintenance reasons.
Usually the units are not shut down during the low flow condi-
tions because power consumption is minimal and as the flows
/tefrfiasfi the percent of BOD removal increases.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 225.
7.OA How does a rotating biological contactor (RBC) treat
wastewater?
7.0B What is the purpose of a cover over the RBC unit?
7.0C Why is the RBC process divided into four stages?
7.0D What are the two types of drive units?
7.1 PROCESS OPERATION
Performance by rotating biological contactors is affected by
hydraulic loadings and temperatures below 55°F (13°C). Plants
have been designed to treat flows ranging from 18,000 gpd to
50 MGD. Typical operating and performance characteristics
are as follows:
Characteristic
HYDRAULIC LOADING2
BOD Removal
Nitrogen Removal
ORGANIC LOADING2
SOLUBLE BOD3
BOD Removal
Effluent Total BOD
Effluent Soluble BOD
Effluent NH3-N
Effluent NOa-N
Range
1.5 to 6 gpd/sq ft
1.5 to 1.8 gpd/sq ft
3 to 5 lbs BOD/day/1000 sq ft
80 to 95 percent
15 to 30mgIL
7 to 15 mgIL
1 to 10 mgIL
2 to 7 mgIL
Advantages of rotating biological contactors over trickling
filters include the elimination of the rotating distributor with its
problems, the elimination of the problems cause by ponding on
the media, and filter flies. More efficient use of the media is
achieved due to the even or uniform rotation of the media into
the wastewater being treated. A limitation of the process, as
compared with trickling filters, is the lack of flexibility due to the
absence of provisions for recirculation; however, in most in-
stallations recirculation is not needed.
7.10 Pretreatment Requirements
Rotating biological contactors are usually preceded by pre-
treatment consisting of screening, grit removal, and primary
settling. Grit and large organic matter, if nnt rpmnvpd rap
settle beneath the drums and form sludge deposits which re-
duce the effective tank volume, produce septic conditions
scrape the slimes from the media, and possibly stall the unit.
Some rotating biological contactor plants have aerated flow
equalization tanks instead of primary clarifiers ahead of the
contactors. Flow equalization tanks may be installed to
equalize or balance highly fluctuating flows and to allow for the
dilution of strong wastes and neutralization of highly acidic or
alkaline wastes. These equalization tanks are capable of re-
ducing or eliminating shock loads.
7.11 Start-Up
Prior to plant start-up, become familiar with and understand
the contents of the plant O & M manual. If you have any ques-
tions, be sure to ask the design engineer or the manufacturer's
representative. Both of these persons should instruct the
operator on the proper operation of the plant and maintenance
of the equipment.
See Section 7.5, "Loading Calculations," for procedures
showing how to calculate the hydraulic and organic loadings
on rotating biological contactors.
7.110 Pre-Start Checks tor New Equipment
Before starting any equipment or allowing any wastewater to
enter the treatment process, check the following items:
1. TIGHTNESS
Inspect the following for tightness in accordance with manu-
facturer's recommendations.
a. Anchor bolts
b. Mounting studs
c. Bearing caps
Check any torque limitations.
d. Locking collars
e. Jacking screws
2 Hydraulic and organic loadings depend on influent flow, influent soluble BOD, effluent BOD, temperature and surface area of plastic media.
Manufacturers provide charts converting flow to hydraulic and organic loadings for their media.
3 Soluble BOD Soluble BOD is the BOD of water that has been filtered in the standard suspended solids test.
-------
CHAIN
STAGES (PLASTIC MEDIA)
MOTOR
FRONT MAIN
BEARING
.v.v.;.
mmmm
:VnmViViYiV;V!r
WASTEWATER
LEVEL
INFLUENT—
PRIMARY-1
EFFLUENT
SUMP AREA FOR
PORTABLE PUMP
FOR DRAINAGE
OF TANK
SPEED
REDUCER
FRONT MAIN
BEARING
L-CHANNEL
CHAIN HOUSING
BULKHEADS
(END VIEW)
SPROCKET
AND CHAIN
(SIDE VIEW)
REAR MAIN
BEARING
EFFLUENT
SECONDARY
CLARIFIER
SPEED
REDUCER
ELECTRIC
MOTOR
MAIN SPROCKET
BELTS-
BAFFLES AND ORIFICES BETWEEN BAYS IN BULKHEADS
SJ
o
(Q
o
o
3
tt
O
Fig. 7.7 Motor with chain drive unit °
w
ro
-------
212 Treatment Plants
BEARING
AIR CONTROL
VALVE
MEDIA
AIR CUPS
BLIND FLANGE
K PIPING
xSUPPORT
BRACKET
CONCRETE
TANKAGE
AIR DIFFUSERS
AIR HEADER
HEADER FLOOR
MOUNTING BRACKETS
MEDIA
Media with polyethylene air cups attached to the outer perime-
ter capture air as it is released from the air header.
AIR CUPS
Air cups, attached to the media, capture air which in turn ro-
tates the media.
AIR CONTROL VALVE
Butterfly control valve controls inlet air supply to each unit.
AIR HEADER
Lightweight headers that carry the air through the system run
the length of the media assembly and are easily removable for
cleaning.
HEADER FLOOR MOUNTING BRACKETS
Brackets secure header to the floor of the tank.
AIR DIFFUSER
Coarse-bubble air diffusers distribute air from the header into
the air cups and media.
PIPING SUPPORT BRACKET
Bracket on each end of the header holds unit in place.
Fig. 7.8 Air drive unit
(PwmMon of Autotrol CotponUon)
-------
Rotating Contactors 213
f. Roller chain
Be sure chain is properly aligned.
g. Media
Unbalanced media may cause slippage.
h. Belts
Use matched sets on multiple-belt drives.
2. LUBRICATION
Be sure the following have been properly lubricated with
proper lubricants in accordance with manufacturer's rec-
ommendations.
a. Mainshaft bearings
b. Roller chain
c. Speed reducer
3. CLEARANCES
a. Between media and tank wall.
b. Between media and baffles or cover support beams.
c. Between chain casing and media.
d. Between roller chain, sprockets and chain casing.
4. SAFETY
Be sure safety guards are properly installed over chains
and other moving parts.
7.111 Procedure for Starting Unit
Actual start-up procedures for a new unit should be in your
plant O & M manual and provided by the manufacturer. A
typical starting procedure is outlined below.
1. Switch on power, allow shaft to rotate one turn, turn off the
power, lock out and tag switch. Inspect and correct if nec-
essary during this revolution:
a. Movement of chain casing.
b. Unusual noises.
c. Direction of media rotation.
Where wastewater flow is parallel to the rotating
media shaft, the direction of rotation is not critical. If
the wastewater flow is perpendicular to the rotating
media shaft, the media should be moving through the
wastewater against the direction of flow (see Figure
7.6, p. 209).
2. Switch on power and allow shaft to rotate for 15 minutes.
Inspect the following:
a. Chain-drive sprocket alignment.
b. Noises in bearings, chain drives and drive package.
c. Motor amperage. Compare with nameplate value.
d. Temperature of mainshaft bearing (by hand) and
drive-package pillow block. If too hot for the hand, use
a PYROMETER4 or thermometer. Temperature should
not exceed 200°F (93°C).
e. Tightness of shaft bearing-cap bolts. Tighten to manu-
facturer's recommended torque.
f. Determine number of revolutions per minute for drum
and record for future reference.
3. Open inlet valve and allow wastewater to fill the tank (all
four stages if in one tank). Open the outlet valve to allow
water to flow through the tank. Turn on power and make
inspections listed in steps 1 and 2 again while drum is rotat-
ing. Shut off power, lock out and tag switch to make any
corrections.
4. Check the relationship between the clarifier inlet and the
rotating biological contactor outlet for hydraulic balance.
This means that you want to be sure that the tank contain-
ing the biological contactor will not overflow and cause
stripping of the biomass.
5. See Section 7.20 for break-in maintenance instructions
which start after eight hours of operation.
Development of biological slimes can be encouraged by
regulating the flow rate and strength of the wastewater applied
to nearly constant levels by the use of recirculation if available.
Maintaining building temperatures at 65°F (18°C) or higher will
help. The best rotating speed is one which will shear off growth
at a rate which will provide a constant "hungry and reproduc-
tive" film of microorganisms exposed to the wastewater being
treated.
Allow one to two weeks for an even growth of biological
slimes (biomass) to develop on the surface of the media with
normal strength wastewater. After start-up, a slimy growth
(biomass) will appear. During the first week, excessive slough-
ing will occur naturally. This sloughing is normal and the
sloughed material is soon replaced with a fairly uniform,
shaggy brown-to-gray appearing biomass with very few or no
bare spots.
Follow the same start-up procedures whether a plant is start-
ing at less than design flow or at full-design flow. Start-up
during cold weather takes longer because the organisms in the
slime growth (biomass) are not as active and require more time
to grow and reproduce.
7.12 Operation
Rotating biological contactor treatment plants are not difficult
to operate and produce a good effluent provided the operator
properly and regularly performs the duties of inspecting the
equipment, testing the influent and effluent, observing the
media, maintaining the equipment and taking corrective action
when necessary.
7.120 Inspecting Equipment
This treatment process has relatively few moving parts.
There is a drive train to rotate the shaft and there are bearings
upon which the shaft rotates. Neither the media nor the shaft
require maintenance. Check the following items when inspect-
ing equipment:
1. Feel outer housing of shaft bearing to see if it is running hot.
Use a pyrometer or thermometer if temperature is too hot
for your hand. If temperature exceeds 200°F (93°C), the
bearings may need to be replaced. Also check for proper
lubrication and be sure the shaft is properly aligned. The
longer the shaft, the more critical the alignment.
2. Listen for unusual noises in motor bearings. Locate cause
of unusual noises and correct.
3. Feel motors to determine if they are running hot. If hot,
determine cause and correct.
4. Look around drive train and shaft bearing for oil spills. If oil
is visible, check oil levels in the speed reducers and chain
drive system. Also look for damaged or wornout gaskets or
seals.
5. Inspect chain drive for alignment and tightness.
6. Inspect belts for proper tension.
7. Be sure all guards over moving parts and equipment are in
place and properly installed.
8. Clean up any spills, messes or debris.
4 Pyrometer (pie-ROM-uh-ter). An apparatus used to measure high temperatures.
-------
214 Treatment Plants
7.121 Testing Influent and Effluent
Wastewater analysis is required to monitor overall plant and
process performance. Because there are few process control
functions to be performed, only a minimal analysis is required
to monitor and report daily performance. To determine if the
rotating biological contactors are operating properly, you
should measure (1) BOD, (2) suspended solids, (3) pH and (4)
dissolved oxygen (DO). Performance is best monitored by
analysis of a 24-hour COMPOSITE SAMPLE5 for BOD and
suspended solids on a daily basis. DO and pH should be mea-
sured using GRAB SAMPLES6 at specific times. Actual fre-
quency of tests may depend on how often you need the results
for plant control and also how often your NPDES permit re-
quires you to sample and analyze the plant effluent.
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
The DO in the wastewater being treated beneath the rotating
media will vary from stage to stage. A plant designed to treat
primary effluent for BOD- and suspended-solids removal will
usually have 0.5 to 1.0 mgIL DO in the first stage. The DO level
will increase to 1 to 3 mg IL in the fourth stage. A plant designed
for NITRIFICATION7 to convert ammonia and organic nitrogen
compounds to nitrate will have four stages also. The difference
between a RBC unit designed for BOD removal and one de-
signed for nitrification is the design flow applied per square foot
of media surface area. DO in the first stage of nitrification unit
will be more than 1 mg/L DO and often as high as 2 to 3 mg IL.
The DO in the fourth stage of a nitrification unit may be as high
as 4 to 8 mg/L.
EFFLUENT VALUES
Typical BOD, suspended solids, and ammonia and nitrate
effluent values for rotating biological contactors depend on
NPDES permit requirements and design effluent values. As
flows increase, effluent values increase because a greater flow
is applied to each square foot of media while the time the
wastewater is in contact with the slime growths is reduced.
Also, the greater the levels of BOD, suspended solids and
nitrogen in the influent, the greater the levels in the plant
effluent. Figure 7.9 shows influent and effluent values for a
rotating biological contactor. The influent and effluent data plot-
ted are seven-day moving averages which smooth out daily
fluctuations and reveal trends. Procedures for calculating mov-
ing averages are explained in Chapter 18, "Analysis and Pre-
sentation of Data."
If analysis of samples reveals a decrease in process effi-
ciency, look for three possible causes:
1. Reduced wastewater temperatures,
2. Unusual variations in flow and/or organic loadings, and
3. High or low pH values (less than 6.5 or greater than 8.5).
Once the cause of the problem has been identified, possible
solutions can be considered and the problem corrected.
TEMPERATURE
Wastewater temperatures below 55°F n3°Cl will result in a
reduction of biological activity and in a decrease in BOD or
organic material removal. Not much can be done by the
operator except to wait for the temperatures to increase again.
Under severe conditions, provisions can be made to heat the
building, the air inside the RBC unit cover, or the RBC unit
influent.
Solar heat can be used effectively to maintain temperature in
buildings and enclosures wiffioUfdrying out the biological slime
growths. Ceilings should be kept low to effectively use avail-
able heat. If existing buildings have high ceilings, large vaned
fans can be mounted on the ceilings to direct heat downward.
INFLUENT VARIATIONS
When large daily influent flow and/or organic (BOD) varia-
tions occur, a reduction in process efficiency is likely to result.
Before corrective steps are taken, the exact extent of the prob-
lem and resulting change in process efficiency must be deter-
mined. In most cases, when the influent flow and/or organic
peak loads are less than three times the daily average values
during a 24-hour period, little decrease in process efficiency
will result.
In treatment plants where the influent flow and/or organic
loads exceed design values for a sustained period, the effluent
BOD and suspended solids must be measured to determine if
corrective action is required.
During periods of severe organic overload, the bulkhead or
baffle between stages one and two may be removed. This
procedure provides a larger amount of media surface area for
the first stage of treatment. If the plant is continuously over-
loaded and the effluent violates the NPDES permit require-
ments, additional treatment units should be installed. A possi-
ble short-term solution to an overload problem might be the
installation of facilities to recycle effluent; however, this would
cause a greater increase of any hydraulic overload.
pH
Every wastewater has an optimum pH level for best treatabil-
ity. Domestic wastewater pH varies between 6.5 and 8.5 and
will have little effect on organic removal efficiency. If this range
is exceeded at any time (due to industrial waste discharges for
example), however, a decrease in efficiency is likely.
To adjust the pH towards 7.0, either pre-aerate the influent
or add chemicals. If the pH is too low, add sodium bicarbonate
or lime. If the pH is too high, add acetic acid. The amount of
chemicals to be added depends on the characteristics of the
water and can best be determined by adding chemicals to
samples in the lab and measuring the change in pH.
When dealing with nitrification, pH and alkalinity are very
critical. The pH should be kept as close as possible to a value
of 8.4 when nitrifying. The alkalinity level in the raw wastewater
should be maintained at a level at least 7.1 times the influent
ammonia concentration to allow the reaction to go to comple-
tion without adversely affecting the microorganisms. Sodium
bicarbonate can be used to increase both the alkalinity and pH.
Another item under pH variations could be the adding of
5 Composite (Proportional) Sample (com-POZ-it). A composite sample is a collection of individual samples obtained at regular intervals,
usually every one or two hours during a 24-hour time span. Each individual sample is combined with the others in proportion to the flow when
the sample was collected. The resulting mixture (composite sample) forms a representative sample and is analyzed to determine the average
conditions during the sampling period.
6 Grab Sample. A single sample of wastewater taken at neither a set time nor flow.
7 Nitrification (NYE-tri-fi-KAY-shun). A process in which bacteria change the ammonia and organic nitrogen in wastewater into oxidized
nitrogen (usually nitrate). The second-stage BOD is sometimes referred to as the "nitrification stage" (first-stage BOD is called the "car-
bonaceous stage").
-------
o>
NO DATA
- -200
INFL
BOD
- -175
INFL
SS-
INFL . .„rn
7
-100
1.2--
INFL
1.0
DESIGN FLOW
1 MGD
0.8--
FLOW, MGD
a
o
5
5
o
_J
LL
-30
0.6 —
a.
EFFL
SS -*¦
EFFL
BOD
0.4
-20
EFFL
SS
0.2-- EFFL^-
BOD—*
--10
20
15
20 21
30
DAYS OF THE MONTH
Fig. 7.9 Typical BOD and suspended solids values
for an RBC unit
-------
216 Treatment Plants
SUPERNATANT8 from a digester. The supernatant should be
tested for pH and suspended solids. Without testing the super-
natant, you will not know what kind of load you're placing on
the rest of the plant. Sometimes it's best to drain supernatant
at low flows to the plant. Caution should be taken to avoid
overloading the process. If the supernatant pH is too low,
supernatant could be drawn off during high flows when these
flows can be used for dilution and NEUTRALIZATION.9
7.122 Observing the Media
Rotating biological contactors use bacteria and other living
organisms growing on the media to treat wastes. Because of
this, you can use your sight and smell to identify problems. The
slime growth or biomass should have a brown-to-gray color, no
algae present, a shaggy appearance with a fairly uniform
coverage, and very few or no bare spots. The odor should not
be offensive, and certainly there should be no sulfide (rotten
egg) smells.
BLACK APPEARANCE
If the appearance becomes black and odors which are not
normal do occur, this could be an indication of solids or BOD
overloading. These conditions would probably be accom-
panied by low DO in the plant effluent. Compare previous in-
fluent suspended solids and BOD values with current test re-
sults to determine if there is an increase. To solve this problem,
place another rotating biological contactor unit in service, if
possible, or try to pre-aerate the influent to the RBC unit. Also
review the operation of the primary clarifiers and sludge diges-
ters to be sure they are not the source of the overload.
WHITE APPEARANCE
A white appearance on the disc surface also might be pre-
sent during high loading conditions. This might be due to a type
of bacteria which feeds on sulfur compounds. The overloading
could result from industrial discharges containing sulfur com-
pounds upon which certain sulfur-loving bacteria thrive and
produce a white slime biomass. Corrective action consists of
placing another RBC unit in service or trying to pre-aerate the
influent to the unit. During periods of severe organic or sulfur
overloading, remove the bulkhead or baffle between stages
one and two.
Another cause of overloading may be sludge deposits which
have been allowed to accumulate in the bottom of the bays. To
remove these deposits, drain the bays, wash the sludge de-
posits out and return unit to sen/ice. Be sure the orifices in the
baffles between the bays are clear.
SLOUGHING
If severe sloughing or loss of biomass occurs after the
start-up period and process difficulty arises, the causes may
be due to the influent wastewater containing toxic or INHIBI-
TORY SUBSTANCES10 that kill the organisms in the biomass
or restrict their ability to treat wastes. To solve this problem,
steps must be taken to eliminate the toxic substance even
though this may be very difficult and costly. Biological pro-
cesses will never operate properly as long as they attempt to
treat toxic wastes. Until the toxic substance can be located and
eliminated, loading peaks should be dampened (reduced) and
a diluted uniform concentration of the toxic substance allowed
to reach the media in order to minimize harm to the biological
culture. While the corrections are made at the plant, dampen-
ing may be accomplished by regulating inflow to the plant. Be
careful not to flood any homes or overflow any low manholes.
Toxic wastes may be diluted using plant effluent (until it con-
tains toxic material) or any other source of water supply.
Another problem which could cause loss of biomass is an
unusual variation in flow and/or organic loading. In small com-
munities one cause may be high flow during the day and near
zero flow at night. During the day the biomass is receiving food
and oxygen and starts growing; then the night flow reduces to
near zero — available food is reduced and nearly stops. The
biomass starts sloughing off again due to lack of food.
Possible solutions to sloughing of the biomass due to exces-
sive variations in plant flow and/or organic loading include
throttling peak conditions and recycling from the secondary
clarifier or RBC effluent during low flows. Be very careful when
throttling plant inflows that low elevation homes are not flooded
or that manholes do not overflow. Usually RBC units do not
have provisions for any recycling from the secondary clarifier.
If low flows at night are creating operation problems due to lack
of organic matter, a possible solution is the installation of a
pump to recirculate water from the secondary clarifier. If recir-
culation is provided, try to maintain a hydraulic loading rate of
greater than 1.0 to 1.5 gpd/sq ft. A flow equalization tank can
be used to provide fairly continuous or even fbws.
Possible rotating biological contact or process operational
problems, causes and solutions are summarized in Table 7.2.
8 Supernatant (sue-per-NA Y-tent). Liquid removed from settled sludge. Supernatant commonly refers to the liquid between the sludge on the
bottom and the scum on the surface of an anaerobic digester. This liquid is usually returned to the influent wet well or to the primary clarifier.
9 Neutralization (new-trall-i-ZAY-shun). Addition of an acid or alkali (base) to a liquid to cause the pH of the liquid to move towards a neutral
pH of 7.0.
10 Inhibitory Substances. Materials that kill or restrict the ability of organisms to treat wastes.
-------
Rotating Contactors 217
TABLE 7.2 POSSIBLE RBC OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS, CAUSES AND SOLUTIONS
Problem
1. Slime on media appears shaggy with a
brown-to-gray color.
2. Black slime
3. Rotten egg or other obnoxious odors
4. White slime
5. Sloughing or loss of slime (biomass)
6. Decrease in process efficiency
Cause
PROPER OPERATION
Solids and/or BOD overloading
Solids and/or BOD overloading
Bacteria which feed on sulfur compounds.
Also, industrial discharges containing sulfur
compounds may cause an overload.
(1) Toxic or inhibitory substances in in-
fluent.
(2) Variation in flow and/or organic loading.
(1) Reduced wastewater temperature.
(2) Unusual variatons in flow and/or or-
ganic loading.
(3) Sustained flows or loads above design
levels.
(4) High or low pH values.
(5) Improper rotation of media.
Solution
NO PROBLEM. NORMAL CONDITION.
a.
Place another RBC unit
in service if available.
b. Pre-aerate RBC influent.
c. For severe organic overloads, remove
bulkhead or baffle between stages 1
and 2.
See problem 2, solutions a, b and c above.
See problem 2, solutions a, b and c above.
a. Eliminate source of toxic or inhibitory
substances.
b. Reduce peaks of toxic or inhibitory
substances by carefully regulating in-
flow to plant.
c. Dilute influent using plant effluent or
any other source of water.
a. During low flow or loading periods,
pump from secondary clarifier or RBC
unit effluent to recycle water with food
and DO through the RBC unit.
b. During high flow or loading conditions,
attempt to throttle plant inflow during
peak periods.
c. For severe organic overloads, remove
bulkhead or baffle between stages 1
and 2.
a. Heat air inside RBC unit cover or build-
ing.
b. Heat influent to unit.
See problem 5, cause (2), solutions a, b
and c above.
Install additional treatment units.
a. If the pH is too low, add an alkali (base)
such as lime.
b. If the pH is too high, add an acid such
as acetic acid.
a. Inspect belt tension and adjust.
b. Check air pressure and adjust.
-------
218 Treatment Plants
7.13 Abnormal Operation
Abnormal operating conditions may develop under the fol-
lowing circumstances:
1. High or low flows,
2. High or low solids loading, and
3. Power outages.
When your plant must treat high or low flows or solids (or-
ganic) loads, abnormal conditions develop as the treatment
efficiency drops. For solutions to these problems, refer to Sec-
tion 7.12, "Operation," and Table 7.2. One advantage of RBC
units is the fact that high flows usually do not wash the slime
growths off the media; consequently the organisms are pre-
sent and treating the wastewater during and after the high
flows.
A power outage requires the operator to take certain precau-
tions to protect the equipment and the slime growths while no
power is available. If the power is off for less than four hours,
nothing needs to be done. If the power outage lasts longer than
four hours, the RBC shaft needs to be turned about one-
quarter of a turn twice a day. Turning prevents all the slime
growth from accumulating on the bottom portion of the plastic
disc media. Before attempting to turn the shaft, lock out and
tag the power in case the outage ends abruptly. To turn the
shaft, REMOVE THE BELT GUARD USING EXTREME CARE.
Turn the shaft by using the belts. BE CAREFUL YOU DON'T
CUT OFF YOUR FINGERS. Place a wedge-shaped block be-
tween the belts and belt sprocket to hold the shaft and media in
the desired location. Actually, the shaft is very delicately bal-
anced and easy to rotate. Do not try to weld handles or brack-
ets to the shaft to facilitate turning because this will throw the
shaft off balance.
WARNING. If the shaft starts to roll back to its original posi-
tion before you get the block properly inserted, do not try to
stop the shaft. Let it roll back and stop. If you try to stop the
shaft from rolling back, you could injure yourself and also dam-
age the belts and sprockets.
Gently spray water on the slime growth that is not sub-
merged frequently enough to keep the biomass moist
whenever the drum is not rotating.
If the power outage lasts longer than 12 hours, more than
normal sloughing will occur from the media when the unit is
placed back in service. When the sloughing becomes exces-
sive, increase the sludge-pumping rate from the secondary
clarifier.
7.14 Shutdown and Restart
The rotating biological contactor may be stopped by turning
off the power to the drive package. If the process is to be
stopped for longer than four hours, follow the precautions listed
in Section 7.13, "Abnormal Operation," when a power outage
occurs. Do not allow one portion of the media to be submerged
in the wastewater being treated for more than four hours. Oc-
casionally spray the media not submerged to prevent the slime
growth from drying out whenever the drum is not rotating.
If the tank holding the wastewater being treated must be
drained, a portable sump pump may be used. A sump is usu-
ally located at the end of the unit by the motor. Pump the water
either to the primary clarifier or to the inlet end of a RBC unit in
operation. A trough running the full length of the tank allows the
solids to be pumped out. While the tank is empty, inspect for
cracks and any other damage and make necessary repairs.
Try to keep the slime growths moist to minimize sloughing
and a reduction in organism activity when the process starts
again. A loss in process efficiency can result if the slimes are
washed off the media. DO NOT WASH THE SLIME GROWTH
OFF THE MEDIA because you will be washing away the or-
ganisms that treat the wastewater. If the unit is to be out of
service for longer than one day, the slimes may be washed off
the media to prevent the development of odor problems.
Restart rotation by applying power to the drive unit. Before
applying power, inspect the shaft and drive unit for possible
interference from such items as tools or bulkheads. If slippage
occurs from an unbalanced media, inspect and adjust align-
ment and tension.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 225.
7.1 A Why should debris, grit and suspended solids be re-
moved before the wastewater being treated reaches the
RBC unit?
7.1 B List the major items for a pre-start check.
7.1 C What are the main operational duties for an operator of a
RBC unit?
7.2 MAINTENANCE
Rotating biological contactors have few moving parts and
require minor amounts of preventive maintenance. Chain
drives, belt drives, sprockets, rotating shafts and any other
moving parts should be inspected and maintained in accord-
ance with manufacturers' instructions or your plant's O & M
manual. All exposed parts, bearing housing shaft ends and
bolts should be painted or covered with a layer of grease to
prevent rust damage. Motors, speed reducers and all other
metal parts should be painted for protection.
Maintenance also includes the repair or replacement of bro-
ken parts. A preventive maintenance program that keeps
equipment properly lubricated and adjusted to help reduce
wear and breakage requires less time and money than a pro-
gram that waits for breakdowns to occur before taking any
action. The frequency of inspection and lubrication is usually
provided by manufacturer's instructions and also may be found
in the plan O & M manual. The following sections indicate a
typical maintenance program for a rotating biological contactor
treatment process. More detail can be found in a plant O & M
manual.
7.20 Break-In Maintenance
AFTER 8 HOURS OF OPERATION
1. Recheck tightening torque of capscrews in all split-tapered
bushings in the drive package.
2. Visually inspect hubs and capscrews for general condition
and possibility of rubbing against an obstruction.
3. Inspect belt drive (drive package).
AFTER 24 HOURS OF OPERATION
1. Inspect all chain drives.
AFTER 40 HOURS OF OPERATION
1. Inspect all belt drives in drive packages.
AFTER 100 HOURS OF OPERATION
1. Change oil in speed reducer. Use manufacturer's recom-
mended lubricants.
-------
Rotating Contactors 219
2. Clean magnetic drain plug in speed reducer.
3. Check all capscrews in split-tapered bushings and
setscrews in drive package output sprocket and bearing for
tightness.
4. Inspect belt drive of drive package.
AFTER 3 WEEKS OF OPERATION
1. Change oil in chain casing. Be sure oil level is at or above
the mark on the dipstick. Use manufacturer's recom-
mended lubricants.
7.21 Preventive Maintenance Program
Interval Procedure
Daily 1. Check for hot shaft and bearings. Replace bear-
ings if temperature exceeds 200°F (93°C).
Daily 2. Listen for unusual noises in shaft and bearing.
Identify cause of noise and correct if necessary.
Weekly 3. Grease the mainshaft bearings and drive bearings.
Use manufacturer's recommended lubricants. Add
grease slowly while shaft rotates. When grease
begins to ooze from the housing, the bearings con-
tain the correct amount of grease. Add six full
strokes where bearings cannot be seen.
4 wk. 4. Inspect all chain drives.
4 wk. 5. Inspect mainshaft bearings and drive bearings.
4 wk. 6. Apply a generous coating of general purpose
grease to mainshaft stub ends, mainshaft bearings
and end collars.
3 mo. 7. Change oil in chain casing. Use manufacturer's
recommended lubricants. Be sure oil level is at or
above the mark on the dipstick.
3 mo. 8. Inspect belt drive.
6 mo. 9. Change oil in speed reducer. Use manufacturer's
recommended lubricants.
6 mo. 10. Clean magnetic drain plug in speed reducer.
6 mo. 11. Purge the grease in the double-sealed shaft seals
of the speed reducer by removing the plug located
180 degrees from the grease fitting on both the
input and output seal cages. Pump grease into the
seal cages and then replace the plug. Use manu-
facturer's recommended grease.
12 mo. 12. Grease motor bearings. Use manufacturer's rec-
ommended grease. To grease motor bearings,
stop motor and remove drain plugs. Inject new
grease with pressure gun until all old grease has
been forced out of the bearing through the grease
drain. Run motor until all excess grease has been
expelled. This may require up to several hours
running time for some motors. Replace drain
plugs.
7.22 Housekeeping
Properly designed systems have sufficient turbulence so sol-
ids or sloughed slime growths should not settle out on the
bottom of the bays. If grease balls appear on the water surface
in the bays, they should be removed with a dip net or screen
device.
If media comes apart, squeeze the two unbonded sections
together with a pair of pliers. Take another pair of pliers and
force a heated nail through the media. The heat from the nail
will melt the plastic and make a plastic weld between the two
sections of media.
1
-------
220 Treatment Plants
7.23 Troubleshooting Guide
7.230 Roller Chain Drive
Trouble
1. Noisy Drive
2. Rapid Wear
3. Chain Climbs Sprockets
4. Stiff Chain
5. Broken Chain or Sprockets
Probable Cause
1. Moving parts rub stationary parts.
2. Chain does not fit sprockets.
3. Loose chain.
4. Faulty lubrication.
5. Misalignment or improper assembly.
6. Worn parts.
1. Faulty lubrication.
2. Loose or misaligned parts.
1. Chain does not fit sprockets.
2. Worn-out chain or worn sprockets.
3. Loose chain.
1. Faulty lubrication.
2. Rust or corrosion.
3. Misalignment or improper assembly.
4. Worn-out chain or worn sprockets.
1. Shock or overload.
2. Wrong size chain, or chain that does not
fit sprockets.
3. Rust or corrosion.
4. Misalignment.
5. Interferences.
Corrective Action
1. Tighten and align casing and chain.
Remove dirt or other interfering matter.
2. Replace with correct parts.
3. Maintain a taut chain at all times.
4. Lubricate properly.
5. Correct alignment and assembly of the
drive.
6. Replace worn chain or bearings. Re-
verse worn sprockets before replacing.
1. Lubricate properly.
2. Align and tighten entire drive.
1. Replace chain or sprockets.
2. Replace chain. Reverse or replace
sprockets.
3. Tighten.
1. Lubricate properly.
2. Clean and lubricate.
3. Correct alignment and assembly of the
drive.
4. Replace chain. Reverse or replace
sprockets.
1. Avoid shock and overload or isolate
through couplings.
2. Replace chain. Reverse or replace
sprockets.
3. Replace parts. Correct corrosive condi-
tions.
4. Correct alignment.
5. Make sure no solids interfere between
chain and sprocket teeth. Loosen chain
if necessary for proper clearance over
sprocket teeth.
-------
Rotating Contactors 221
7.231 Belt Drive
Trouble
1. Excessive edge wear
2. Jacket wear on pressure-face side of
belt tooth.*
3. Excessive jacket wear between belt
teeth (exposed tension members)*
4. Cracks in Neoprene backing
5. Softening of Neoprene backing
6. Tensile or tooth shear failure."
7. Excessive pulley tooth wear (on
pressure-face and/or OD)*
8. Unmounting of flange
9. Excessive drive noise
10. Tooth shear*
11. Apparent belt stretch
12. Cracks or premature wear at belt tooth
root.*
13. Tensile break
* Pertains to a timing belt system only.
Recent systems use a V-belt drive.
Probable Cause
1. Misalignment or non-rigid centers.
2. Bent flange.
Excessive overload and/or excessive belt
tightness.
Excessive installation tension.
Exposure to excessively low temp, (below
-30°F or -35°C).
Exposure to excessive heat (+200°F or
93°C) and/or oil.
1. Small or sub-minimum diameter pulley.
2. Belt too narrow.
1. Excessive overload and/or excessive
belt tightness.
2. Insufficient hardness of pulley material.
1. Incorrect flange installation.
2. Misalignment.
1. Misalignment.
2. Excessive installation tension.
3. Sub-minimum pulley diameter.
1. Less than 6 teeth in mesh (TIM).
2. Excessive load.
Reduction of center distance or non-rigid
mounting.
Improper pulley groove top radius.
1. Excessive load.
2. Sub-minimum pulley diameter.
Corrective Action
1. Check alignment and/or reinforcement
mounting.
2. Straighten flange.
Reduce installation tension and/or increase
drive load-carrying capacity.
Reduce installation tension.
Eliminate low temperature condition or
consult factory for proper belt construction.
Eliminate high temperature and oil condi-
tion or consult factory for proper belt con-
struction.
1. Increase pulley diameter.
2. Increase belt width.
1. Reduce installation tension and/or in-
crease drive load-carrying capacity.
2. Surface-harden pulley or use harder ma-
terial.
1. Reinstall flange correctly.
2. Correct alignment.
1. Correct alignment.
2. Reduce tension.
3. Increase pulley diameters.
1. Increase TIM or use next smaller pitch.
2. Increase drive load-carrying capacity.
Re-tension drive and/or reinforce mounting.
Regroove or install new pulley.
1. Increase load-carrying capacity of drive.
2. Increase pulley diameters.
-------
222 Treatment Plants
7.3 SAFETY
Any equipment with moving parts or electrical components
should be considered a potential safety hazard. ALWAYS
SHUT OFF THE POWER TO UNIT, TAG THE SWITCH AND
LOCK THE POWER SWITCH IN THE "OFF" POSITION BE-
FORE WORKING ON A UNIT.
7.30 Slow-Moving Equipment
Slow-moving equipment does not appear dangerous. Unfor-
tunately, moving parts such as the chain sprockets, chain, belt
sprockets and belts can cause serious injury by tearing and/or
crushing your hands or legs.
7.31 Wiring ant* Connections
Wiring and connections should be inspected regularly for
potential hazards such as loose connections and bare wires.
Again, always shut off, tag, and lock out the power switch
before working on a unit.
7.32 Slippery Surfaces
Caution must be taken on slippery surfaces. Falls can result
in serious injuries. Any spilled oil or grease must be cleaned up
immediately. If covers over the media allow sufficient space for
walkways, condensed moisture on surfaces will create slippery
places. If the temperature of the air within the enclosure can be
kept several degrees above the temperature of the wastewa-
ter, condensation is significantly reduced. This condensation
cannot be avoided completely so walk carefully at all times.
7.33 Infections and Diseases
Precautions must be taken to prevent infections in cuts or
open wounds and illnesses from waterborne diseases. After
working on a unit, always wash your hands before smoking or
eating. GOOD PERSONAL HYGIENE MUST BE PRACTICED
BY ALL OPERATORS AT ALL TIMES.
7.4 REVIEW OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
When reviewing plans and specifications, be sure the follow-
ing items are included in the design of rotating biological con-
tactors.
1. Enclosure to protect biomass from freezing temperature.
Enclosure constructed of suitable corrosion-resistant mate-
rials and has windows or louvered structures in sides for
ventilation. Forced ventilation is not necessary.
2. Heating. A source of heat is helpful during winter operation
to minimize the corrosion caused by condensation and to
improve operator comfort. If the temperature of the air
within the enclosure is kept several degrees above the
temperature of the wastewater, condensation is signifi-
cantly reduced. Ceilings should be kept low to effectively
use available heat.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 225.
7.2A How often should maintenance be performed on a RBC
unit during start-up?
7.3A List some possible safety hazards operators encounter
when working around RBC units.
7.5 LOADING CALCULATIONS
7.50 Typical Loading Rates
Hydraulic and organic loadings on rotating biological contac-
tors depend on influent soluble BOD, effluent total and soluble
BOD requirements, and wastewater temperature. The loading
rates given here are for "typical" values and values for your
plant could be different.
Characteristic
Hydraulic Loading
BOD Removal
Nitrogen Removal
Organic Loading
Soluble BOD
Range
1.5 to 6 gpd/sq ft
1.5 to 1.8 gpd/sq ft
3 to 5 lbs BOD/day/1000 sq ft
7.51 Computing Hydraulic Loading
Hydraulic loading on a rotating biological contactor is the
amount (gallons) of wastewater per day that flows past the
rotating media. To calculate the hydraulic loading, we must
know:
1. Gallons per day treated by the rotating contactor, and
2. The surface area of the media in square feet.
EXAMPLE 1
A rotating biological contactor treats a flow of 3.5 MGD. The
surface area of the media is 1,000,000 square feet (provided
by manufacturer). What is the hydraulic loading in gpd/sq ft?
Known
Flow, MGD = 3.5 MGD
Surface Area, sq ft = 1,000,000 sq ft
Unknown
Hydraulic Loading,
gpd/sq ft
-------
Rotating Contactors 223
1. Calculate the hydraulic loading in gallons per day of waste-
water per square foot of surface media.
Hydraulic Loading,
gpd/sq ft
Flow, gal/day
Surface Area, sq ft
3,500,000 gpd
1,000,000 sq ft
3.5 gpd/sq ft
7.52 Computing Organic (BOD) Loading
Organic loadings on biological rotating contactors are based
on soluble BOD. Soluble BOD is the BOD of water that has
been filtered in the standard suspended solids test. If soluble
BOD information is not available, soluble BOD may be esti-
mated on the basis of the total BOD and the suspended solids
as follows:
Soluble BOD, _ Total BOD, _ Suspended BOD,
mg/L mg1L mg IL
where
Suspended BOD, = K x Suspended Solids, mg/L
Therefore,
Soluble BOD, _ Total BOD,
mg/L
mg/L
K x Suspended Solids, mg/L
where
K = 0.5 to 0.7 for most domestic wastewaters.
EXAMPLE 2
The rotating biological contactor in EXAMPLE 1 treats an
influent with a total BOD of 200 mg/L and suspended solids of
250 mg/L. Assume a K value of 0.5 to calculate the soluble
BOD. What is the organic loading in pounds of soluble BOD
per day per 1000 square feet of media surface?
Known Unknown
Flow, MGD = 3.5 MGD Organic Loading,
lbs BOD/day/1000 sq ft
Surface Area, sq ft = 1,000,000 sq ft
Total BOD, mg/L = 200 mg/L
SS, mg/L = 250 mg/L
K = 0.5
1. Estimate the soluble BOD treated by the rotating biological
contactor.
Soluble BOD, _ Total BOD, _ ^ Suspended Solids,
mg/L mg/L mg/L
= 200 mg/L - 0.5 x 250 mg/L
= 200 mg/L - 125 mg/L
= 75 mg/L
2. Determine the soluble BOD applied to the rotating biologi-
cal contactor in pounds of soluble BOD per day.
B?bs/day'ied =
-------
224 Treatment Plants
2. Calculate the organic loading in grams of soluble BOD per
day per square meter of media surface.
Organic BOD Loading, _ Soluble BOD Applied, gm BOD/day
gm BOD/day/sq m Surface Area of Media, sq m
1,125,000 gm soluble BOD/day
100,000 sq m
= 11.2 gm BOD/day/sq m
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 225.
A rotating biological contactor treats a flow of 2.0 MGD with
an influent soluble BOD of 100 mg/L. The surface area of the
media is 500,000 square feet.
7.5A What is the hydraulic loading in gallons per day per
square foot?
7.5B What is the organic loading in pounds of soluble BOD
per day per 1000 square feet of surface area?
7.6 ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Mr. Jerry Greene, Autotrol Corporation, reviewed this sec-
tion and provided helpful suggestions, photographs, drawings
and procedures.
7.7 ADDITIONAL READING ON ROTATING BIOLOGICAL
CONTACTORS
1. MOP 11, Chapter 10,* "Rotating Biological Reactors."
2. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE
BIO-SURF WASTE TREATMENT PROCESS, Autotrol Cor-
poration, 1701 West Civic Drive, Milwaukee, Wisconsin
53209.
'Depends on edition.
7.8 METRIC CALCULATIONS
Refer to Section 7.5, "Loading Calculations," for metric cal-
culations.
6NP0?
16440M
CM
ROTATING
&I0L06ICAL
C0HTMTC&
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
Chapter 7. ROTATING BIOLOGICAL CONTACTORS
Write the answers to these questions in your notebook.
1. Describe the rotating biological contactor (RBC) process
and discuss how it works.
2. What RBC equipment would you inspect on a regular basis
and how would you do it for a RBC unit?
3. What water quality indicators would you test for in the
effluent from a RBC treatment plant?
4. How do the slime growths (biomass) on the plastic media
look under (a) normal conditions and (b) abnormal condi-
tions?
5. What factors can cause a decrease in the process effi-
ciency of a RBC unit and how can these problems be cor-
rected?
-------
SUGGESTED ANSWERS
Chapter 7. ROTATING BIOLOGICAL CONTACTORS
Rotating Contactors 225
Answers to questions on page 210.
7.0A A rotating biological contactor treats wastewater by al-
lowing the slime growths to develop on the surface of
plastic media. The slime growths contain organisms
that remove the organic materials from the wastewater.
7.0B The purpose of a cover over the RBC unit is to protect
organisms from severe changes in weather, especially
freezing. Other reasons include preventing heavy rains
from washing off slime and protecting operators from
weather while maintaining equipment. Also to contain
odors and to prevent the growth of algae on the media.
7.0C The RBC process is divided into four stages to increase
the effectiveness of a given amount of media surface
area. Organisms on the first-stage media are exposed
to high levels of BOD and reduce the BOD at a high
rate. As the BOD levels decrease from stage to stage,
the rate at which the organisms can remove BOD de-
creases.
7.0D The two types of drive units are:
1. Motor with chain drive, and
2. Air drive.
Answers to questions on page 218.
7.1A Debris, grit and suspended solids should be removed to
prevent sludge deposits forming beneath the media.
These sludge deposits can reduce the effective tank
volume, produce septic conditions, scrape the slimes
from the media, and possibly stall the unit.
7.1 B The major items on a pre-start check include
1. Tightness of bolts and parts,
2. Lubrication of equipment,
3. Clearances for moving parts, and
4. Insuring that safety guards are properly installed.
7.1 C The main operational duties for an operator of an RBC
unit include
1. Inspecting equipment,
2. Testing influent and effluent,
3. Observing the media, and
4. Correcting any problems.
Answers to questions on page 222.
7.2A During start-up, maintenance should be performed on
an RBC unit:
3. After 40 hours of operation,
4. After 100 hours of operation, and
5. After 3 weeks of operation.
7.3A Possible safety hazards to operators working around
RBC units include:
1. Moving parts and equipment,
2. Electrical power,
3. Bare electrical wires and loose connections,
4. Slippery surfaces,
5. Infections in cuts and open wounds, and
6. Illnesses from waterborne diseases.
Answers to questions on page 224.
7.5A and 7.5B
Known
Flow, MGD = 2.0 MGD
Soluble BOD, mgIL = 100 mgIL
Unknown
7.5A Hydraulic Loading,
gpd/sq ft
7.5B Organic Loading,
Surface Area, sq ft = 500,000 sq ft lbs BOD/day/1000 sq ft
7.5A Calculate the hydraulic loading in gallons per day of
wastewater per square foot of surface media.
Hydraulic Loading, _ Flow, gal/day
gpd/sq ft Surface Area, sq ft
= 2,000,000 gal/day
500,000 sq ft
= 4 gpd/sq ft
7.5B 1. Determine the soluble BOD applied to the rotating
biological contactor in pounds of soluble BOD per
day.
B?bs/day'ied' = (Solub,e BOD- m9/L> (Flow' MGD) <8 34 lbs/gal)
= (100 mgIL) (2.0 MGD) (8.34 lbs/gal)
= 1668 lbs soluble BOD/day
2. Calculate the organic loading in pounds of soluble
BOD per 1000 square feet of media surface.
Soluble BOD Applied, lbs BOD/day
Surface Area of Media (in 1000 sq ft)
1668 lbs soluble BOD/day
500* 1000 sq ft
3.3 lbs BOD/day/1000 sq ft
Organic BOD Loading,
lbs BOD/day/1000 sq ft
1. After 8 hours of operation,
2. After 24 hours of operation,
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN CHAPTER 7
-------
226 Treatment Plants
OBJECTIVE TEST
Chapter 7. ROTATING BIOLOGICAL CONTACTORS
Please write your name and mark the correct answers on the
answer sheet as directed at the end of Chapter 1. There may
be more than one answer to each question.
1. Air may be used to rotate the media in a biological contac-
tor.
*j. True
2. False
2. Coarse-bubble air diffusers may be used to distribute air in
the tank of a rotating biological contactor.
"^1. True
2. False
3. Solar heat should NOT be used to maintain temperature in
buildings housing rotating biological contactors because it
will dry out the biological slime growths.
1. True
X2. False
4. When operating a nitrification process, pH and acidity are
very critical.
7M. True
2. False
5. Sodium bicarbonate can be used to decrease both the
alkalinity and pH.
1. True
%2. False
6. The rotating biological contactor treatment process usu-
ally contains provisions for recirculation or recycle as does
the trickling filter and activated-sludge treatment pro-
cesses.
1. True
v 2. False
7. Major parts of a rotating biological contactor (RBC) unit
include
1. Aerators.
V2. Drive assembly.
3. Rotating distributor arms.
y/ 4. Rotating media.
5. Wearing shoes.
8. Debris, grit and suspended solids should be removed be-
fore the wastewater being treated reaches the RBC unit to
prevent formation of sludge deposits which can
1. Increase food to organisms living in slimes.
*2. Produce septic conditions.
v3. Reduce effective tank volume,
v 4. Scrape the slimes from the media.
5. Speed up wastewater treatment.
9. Rotating biological contactors are usually covered to
1. Increase condensation on biological slime growths,
v 2. Prevent growth of algae on media,
v 3. Prevent intense rains from washing some of the slime
growth off the media.
4. Prevent winds from blowing slime growths off the
media.
n/5. Protect biological slime growths from freezing.
10. Factors which could cause a reduction in the wastewater
treatment efficiency of an RBC unit include
1. A toxic substance in the water being treated,
v 2. High influent biochemical oxygen demand levels,
v 3. High influent flows.
V 4. High or low pH values in the influent,
v 5. Reduced wastewater temperatures.
11. What should an operator do when slime growths are
sloughing from the plastic media?
V1. If excessive peak inflows have caused the problem, try
to throttle inflow during peaks,
v 2. If high organic loads have caused sloughing, try remov-
ing bulkhead or baffle between stages 1 and 2.
^ 3. Look for toxic substances which may be killing some of
the organisms and control the source.
4. Turn off the power and allow the media to stop rotating
until the slimes can become reattached.
5. Wash off all the old slimes and allow new slime growths
to get started again.
12. An operator must be aware of which of the following safety
hazards when working around a RBC treatment unit?
V 1. Infections in cuts or open wounds
/ 2. Loose electrical connections and bare wires
V 3. Slippery surfaces caused by water, oil or grease
V 4. Slow-moving parts or equipment
v 5. Waterborne diseases
13. Flow equalization tanks may be installed ahead of rotating
biological contactors to allow for
Vi. Balancing of highly fluctuating flows.
V2. Dilution of strong wastes.
^3. Neutralization of highly alkaline wastes.
4. Precipitation of phosphorus,
v/ 5. Reduction of shock loads.
14. A rotating biological contactor treats a flow of 1.6 MGD.
The surface area of the media is 400,060 square feet.
What is the hydraulic loading?
1. 1.0 gpd/sq ft
2. 2.0gpd/sqft
3. 2.5 gpd/sq ft
4. 3.0 gpd/sq ft
v/5. 4.0 gpd/sq ft
tip cD, &&
15. A rotating biological contactor treats a flow of 2.2 MGD
with an influent soluble BOD of 110 mg\L The surface
area of the media is 550,000 square leet. What is the
organic loading?
1. 2.7 lbs BOD/day/1000 sq ft , +
2. 3.0 lbs BOD/day/1000 sq ft I
3. 3.5 lbs BOD/day/1000 sq ft 1
- 4. 3.7 lbs BOD/day/1000 sq ft
5. 4.0 lbs BOD/day/1000 sq ft , / 9 Jt" <«~
W
-------
CHAPTER 8
ACTIVATED SLUDGE
Volume I. Package Plants and Oxidation Ditches
Volume II, Chapter 11
Operation of Conventional Activated Sludge Plants
Volume III, Chapter 21
Pure Oxygen and Operational Control Alternatives
by
John Brady
Revised by
Ross H. Gudgel
-------
228 Treatment Plants
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 8. Activated Sludge
(Volume I. Package Plants and Oxidation Ditches)
Page
OBJECTIVES 230
GLOSSARY 231
LESSON 1
8.0 The Activated Sludge Process 236
8.00 Wastewater Treatment by Activated Sludge 236
8.01 Definitions 236
8.02 Process Description 236
8.1 Requirements for Control 242
LESSON 2
8.2 Package Plants (Extended Aeration) 243
8.20 Purpose of Package Plants 243
8.200 Use of Package Plants 243
8.201 Types of Package Plant Treatment Processes 243
8.202 Aeration Methods 247
8.21 Pre-Start Check-Out 247
8.22 Starting the Plant 250
8.23 Operation of Aeration Equipment 250
8.24 Wasting Sludge 250
8.25 Operation 250
8.250 Normal Operation 250
8.251 Abnormal Operation 251
8.252 Troubleshooting 251
8.253 Shutdown 251
8.254 Operational Strategy 251
8.26 Laboratory Testing 252
8.27 Safety 252
8.28 Maintenance 253
8.29 Additional Reading 253
-------
Activated Sludge 229
LESSON 3
8.3 Oxidation Ditches 254
8.30 Use of Oxidation Ditches 254
8.300 Flow Path for Oxidation Ditches 254
8.301 Description of Oxidation Ditches 254
8.31 Safety 257
8.32 Start-Up 257
8.320 Pre-Start Inspection 257
8.321 Plant Start-Up 258
8.33 Operation 259
8.330 Normal Operation 259
8.331 Abnormal Operation 262
8.332 Shutdown 262
8.333 Troubleshooting 262
8.334 Operational Strategy 264
8.34 Maintenance 264
8.340 Housekeeping 264
8.341 Equipment Maintenance 264
8.35 Operational Guidelines 265
8.350 English System 265
8.351 Metric System 266
8.4 Review of Plans and Specifications 267
8.40 Package Plants 267
8.41 Oxidation Ditches 267
8.5 Metric Calculations 268
-------
OBJECTIVES
Chapter 8. ACTIVATED SLUDGE
The activated sludge process is a very important wastewater
treatment process. For this reason, the chapters on activated
sludge have been divided into three parts and will be pre-
sented in three separate volumes.
I. Package Plants and Oxidation Ditches
II. Conventional Activated Sludge Plants
III. Pure Oxygen Plants and Operational Control
If you are the operator of a package plant or oxidation ditch,
Volume I will provide you with the information you need to
know to operate your plant. Volumes II and III will help you
better understand your plant and do a better job. If you operate
a conventional activated sludge plant or a modification, Vol-
ume I will help you understand the activated sludge process
and Volume II will tell you how to operate your plant. Volume III
will explain to you alternative means of operational control that
may work very well for your plant. If you operate a pure oxygen
plant, Volume III will tell you what you need to know to operate
the pure oxygen system. All three parts contain information
important to the proper operation of your plant. Volume III also
contains information helpful to operators using the activated
sludge process to treat special wastes such as industrial
wastes.
The following list of objectives apply to the treatment plants
covered in each of the three parts. After completion of the
appropriate part on activated sludge you should be able to do
the following:
1. Explain the principles of the activated sludge process and
the factors that influence and control the process,
2. Inspect a new activated sludge facility for proper installa-
tion,
3. Place a new activated sludge process into service,
4. Schedule and conduct operation and maintenance duties,
5. Collect samples, interpret lab results, and make appropri-
ate adjustments in treatment processes,
6. Recognize factors that indicate an activated sludge pro-
cess is not performing properly, identify the source of the
problem, and take corrective action.
7. Conduct your duties in a safe fashion,
8. Determine aerator loadings and understand the applica-
tion of different loading guidelines,
9. Keep records for an activated sludge plant,
10. Identify the common modifications of the activated sludge
process, and
11. Review plans and specifications for an activated sludge
plant.
-------
Activated Sludge 231
GLOSSARY
Chapter 8. ACTIVATED SLUDGE
ABSORPTION (ab-SORP-shun)
ABSORPTION
Taking in or soaking up of one substance into the body of another by molecular or chemical action (as tree roots absorb dissolved
nutrients in the soil).
ACTIVATED SLUDGE (ACK-ta-VATE-ed sluj)
ACTIVATED SLUDGE
Sludge particles produced in raw or settled wastewater (primary effluent) by the growth of organisms (including zoogleal bacteria) in
aeration tanks in the presence of dissolved oxygen. The term "activated" comes from the fact that the particles are teeming with
bacteria, fungi, and protozoa. Activated sludge is different from primary sludge in that the sludge particles contain many living
organisms which can feed on the incoming wastewater.
ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS
(ACK-ta-VATE-ed sluj)
A biological wastewater treatment process which speeds up the decomposition of wastes in the wastewater being treated. Activated
sludge is added to wastewater and the mixture (mixed liquor) is aerated and agitated. After some time in the aeration tank, the
activated sludge is allowed to settle out by sedimentation and is disposed of (wasted) or reused (returned to the aeration tank) as
needed. The remaining wastewater then undergoes more treatment.
ADSORPTION (add-SORP-shun)
The gathering of a gas, liquid, or dissolved substance on the surface or interface zone of another substance.
ADSORPTION
AERATION LIQUOR (air-A-shun) AERATION LIQUOR
Mixed liquor. The contents of the aeration tank including living organisms and material carried into the tank by either untreated
wastewater or primary effluent.
AERATION TANK (air-A-shun) AERATION TANK
The tank where raw or settled wastewater is mixed with return sludge and aerated. The same as aeration bay, aerator or reactor.
AEROBES
Bacteria that must have molecular (dissolved) oxygen (DO) to survive.
AEROBES
AEROBIC DIGESTION
AEROBIC DIGESTION (AIR-O-bick)
The breaking down of wastes by microorganisms in the presence of dissolved oxygen. Waste sludge is placed in a large aerated
tank where aerobic microorganisms decompose the organic matter in the sludge. This is an extension of the activated sludge
process.
AGGLOMERATION (a-GLOM-er-A-shun) AGGLOMERATION
The growing or coming together of small scattered particles into larger floes or particles which settle rapidly. Also see FLOC.
AIR-LIFT
AIR-LIFT
A special type of pump. This device consists of a vertical riser pipe submerged in the wastewater or sludge to be pumped.
Compressed air is injected into a tail piece at the bottom of the pipe. Fine air bubbles mix with the wastewater or sludge to form a
mixture lighter than the surrounding water which causes the mixture to rise in the discharge pipe to the outlet. An air-lift pump works
similar to the center stand in a percolator coffee pot.
ALIQUOT (AL-li-kwot)
Portion of a sample.
ANAEROBES
Bacteria that do not need molecular (dissolved) oxygen (DO) to survive.
ALIQUOT
ANAEROBES
-------
232 Treatment Plants
BACTERIAL CULTURE (back-TEAR-e-al) BACTERIAL CULTURE
In the case of activated sludge, the bacterial culture refers to the group of bacteria classed as AEROBES and facultative organisms,
which covers a wide range of organisms. Most treatment processes in the United States grow facultative organisms which utilize the
carbonaceous (carbon compounds) BOD. Facultative organisms can live when oxygen resources are low. When "nitrification" is
required, the nitrifying organisms are OBLIGATE AEROBES (require oxygen) and must have at least 0.5 mg/L of dissolved oxygen
throughout the whole system to function properly.
BATCH PROCESS BATCH PROCESS
A treatment process in which a tank or reactor is filled, the water is treated, and the tank is emptied. The tank may then be filled and
the process repeated.
BIOMASS (BUY-o-MASS) BIOMASS
A mass or clump of living organisms feeding on the wastes in wastewater, dead organisms and other debris. This mass may be
formed for, or function as, the protection against predators and storage of food suplies. Also see ZOOGLEAL MASS.
BULKING (BULK-ing) BULKING
Clouds of billowing sludge that occur throughout secondary clarifiers and sludge thickeners when the sludge becomes too light and
will not settle properly.
CATHODIC PROTECTION (ca-THOD-ick) CATHODIC PROTECTION
An electrical system for prevention of rust, corrosion, and pitting of steel and iron surfaces in contact with water, wastewater or soil.
COAGULATION (ko-AGG-u-LAY-shun) COAGULATION
The use of chemicals that cause very fine particles to clump together into larger particles. This makes it easier to separate the solids
from the liquids by settling, skimming, draining or filtering.
COMPOSITE (PROPORTIONAL) COMPOSITE (PROPORTIONAL)
SAMPLE (com-POZ-it) SAMPLE
A composite sample is a collection of individual samples obtained at regular intervals, usually every one or two hours during a
24-hour time span. Each individual sample is combined with the others in proportion to the flow when the sample was collected. The
resulting mixture (composite sample) forms a representative sample and is analyzed to determine the average conditions during the
sampling period.
CONING (CONE-ing) CONING
Development of a cone-shaped flow of liquid, like a whirlpool, through sludge. This can occur in a sludge hopper during sludge
withdrawal when the sludge becomes too thick. Part of the sludge remains in place while liquid rather than sludge flows out of the
hopper. Also called "coring."
CONTACT STABILIZATION CONTACT STABILIZATION
Contact stabilization is a modification of the conventional activated sludge process. In contact stabilization, two aeration tanks are
used. One tank is for separate re-aeration of the return sludge for at least four hours before it is permitted to flow into the other
aeration tank to be mixed with the primary effluent requiring treatment.
DENITRIFICATION DENITRIFICATION
A condition that occurs when nitrate or nitrite ions are reduced to nitrogen gas and bubbles are formed as a result of this process.
The bubbles attach to the biological floes and float the floes to the surface of the secondary clarifiers. This condition is often the
cause of rising sludge observed in secondary clarifiers.
DIFFUSED-AIR AERATION DIFFUSED-AIR AERATION
A diffused air activated sludge plant takes air, compresses it, and then discharges the air below the water surface of the aerator
through some type of air diffusion device.
DIFFUSER DIFFUSER
A device (porous plate, tube, bag) used to break the air stream from the blower system into fine bubbles in an aeration tank or
reactor.
DISSOLVED OXYGEN DISSOLVED OXYGEN
Molecular oxygen dissolved in water or wastewater, usually abbreviated DO.
ENDOGENOUS (en-DODGE-en-us) ENDOGENOUS
A reduced level of respiration (breathing) in which organisms break down compounds within their own cells to produce the oxygen
they need.
-------
Activated Sludge 233
F/M RATIO F/M RATIO
Food to microorganism ratio. A measure of food provided to bacteria in an aeration tank.
Food = BOD, lbs/day
Microorganisms MLVSS, lbs
= Flow, MGD x BOD, mg/L x 8.34 lbs/gal
or
Volume, MG x MLVSS, mg/L x 8.34 lbs/gal
BOD, kg/day
MLVSS, kg
FACULTATIVE (FACK-ul-tay-tive) FACULTATIVE
Facultative bacteria can use either molecular (dissolved) oxygen or oxygen obtained from food materials such as sulfate or nitrate
ions. In other words, facultative bacteria can live under aerobic or anaerobic conditions.
FILAMENTOUS BACTERIA (FILL-a-MEN-tuss) FILAMENTOUS BACTERIA
Organisms that grow in a thread or filamentous form. Common types are thiothrix and actinomyces.
FLIGHTS FLIGHTS
Scraper boards, made from redwood or other rot-resistant woods or plastic, used to collect and move settled sludge or floating
scum.
FLOC FLOC
Groups or clumps of bacteria and particles that have come together and formed a cluster. Found in aeration tanks and secondary
clarifiers.
FOOD/MICROORGANISM RATIO FOOD/MICROORGANISM RATIO
Food to microorganism ratio. A measure of food provided to bacteria in an aeration tank.
Food _ BOD, lbs/day
Microorganisms MLVSS, lbs
Flow, MGD x BOD, mgIL x 8.34 lbs/gal
or
Volume, MG x MLVSS, mg/L x 8.34 lbs/gal
BOD, kg/day
MLVSS, kg
Commonly abbreviated F/M Ratio.
HEADER HEADER
A large pipe to which the ends of a series of smaller pipes are connected. Also called a "manifold."
MANIFOLD MANIFOLD
A large pipe to which the ends of a series of smaller pipes are connected. Also called a "header."
MEAN CELL RESIDENCE TIME (MCRT) MEAN CELL RESIDENCE TIME (MCRT)
An expression of the average time that a microorganism will spend in the activated sludge process.
MCRT days = Solids in Activated Sludge Process, lbs
Solids Removed from Process, lbs/day ^, ,
MECHANICAL AERATION MECHANICAL AERATION
The use of machinery to mix air and water so that oxygen can be absorbed into the water. Some examples are: paddle wheels,
mixers, or rotating brushes to agitate the surface of an aeration tank; pumps to create fountains; and pumps to discharge water
down a series of steps forming falls or cascades.
MICROORGANISMS (micro-ORGAN-is-ums) MICROORGANISMS
Very small organisms that can be seen only through a microscope. Some microorganisms use the wastes in wastewater for food
and thus remove or alter much of the undesirable matter.
MIXED LIQUOR MIXED LIQUOR
When the activated sludge in an aeration tank is mixed with primary effluent or the raw wastewater and return sludge, this mixture is
then referred to as mixed liquor as long as it is in the aeration tank. When the mixed liquor flows from the aeration tank it goes into
the secondary clarifiers or final sedimentation tanks. Mixed liquor also may refer to the contents of mixed aerobic or anaerobic
digesters.
-------
234 Treatment Plants
MIXED LIQUOR SUSPENDED SOLIDS MIXED LIQUOR SUSPENDED SOLIDS
(MLSS) (MLSS)
Suspended solids in the mixed liquor of an aeration tank.
MIXED LIQUOR VOLATILE SUSPENDED MIXED LIQUOR VOLATILE SUSPENDED
SOLIDS (MLVSS) SOLIDS (MLVSS)
The organic or volatile suspended solids in the mixed liquor of an aeration tank.
NITRIFICATION (NYE-tri-fi-KAY-shun) NITRIFICATION
A process in which bacteria change the ammonia and organic nitrogen in wastewater into oxidized nitrogen (usually nitrate). The
second-stage BOD is sometimes referred to as the "nitrification stage" (first-stage BOD is called the "carbonaceous stage").
OXIDATION (ox-i-DAY-shun) OXIDATION
Oxidation is the addition of oxygen, removal of hydrogen, or the removal of electrons from an element or compound. In wastewater
treatment, organic matter is oxidized to more stable substances. The opposite of REDUCTION.
POLYELECTROLYTE (POLY-electro-light) POLYELECTROLYTE
A high-molecular-weight substance that is formed by either a natural or synthetic process. Natural polyelectrolytes may be of
biological origin or derived from starch products, cellulose derivatives, and alignates. Synthetic polyelectrolytes consist of simple
substances that have been made into complex, high-molecular-weight substances. Often called a "polymer."
POLYMER (POLY-mer) POLYMER
A high-molecular-weight substance that is formed by either a natural or synthetic process. Natural polymers may be of biological
origin or derived from starch products, cellulose derivatives, and alignates. Synthetic polymers consist of simple substances that
have been made into complex, high-molecular-weight substances. Often called a "polyelectrolyte."
PROTOZOA (pro-toe-ZOE-ah) PROTOZOA
A group of microscopic animals (usually single-celled) that sometimes cluster into colonies.
REDUCTION (re-DUCK-shun) REDUCTION
Reduction is the addition of hydrogen, removal of oxygen, or the addition of electrons to an element or compound. Under anaerobic
conditions in wastewater, sulfate compounds or elemental sulfur are reduced to odor-producing hydrogen sulfide (H2S) or the
sulfide ion (S ). The opposite of OXIDATION.
RISING SLUDGE RISING SLUDGE
Rising sludge occurs in the secondary clarifiers of activated sludge plants when the sludge settles to the bottom of the clarifier, is
compacted, and then starts to rise to the surface, usually as a result of denitrification.
SECCHI DISC (SECK-key) SECCHI DISC
A flat, white disc lowered into the water by a rope until it is just barely visible. At this point, the depth of the disc from the water
surface is the recorded secchi disc reading.
SEIZING SEIZING
Seizing occurs when an engine overheats and a component expands so the engine will not run. Also called "freezing."
SEPTIC (SEP-tick) SEPTIC
This condition is produced by anaerobic bacteria. If severe, the wastewater turns black, gives off foul odors, contains little or no
dissolved oxygen and creates a heavy oxygen demand.
SHOCK LOAD SHOCK LOAD
The arrival at a plant of a waste which is toxic to organisms in sufficient quantity or strength to cause operating problems. Possible
problems include odors and solids in the effluent. Organic or hydraulic overloads can cause a shock load.
SLUDGE AGE SLUDGE AGE
A measure of the length of time a particle of suspended solids has been undergoing aeration in the activated sludge process.
Sludge Age, = Suspended Solids Under Aeration, lbs or kg
daVs Suspended Solids Added, lbs/day or kg/day
SLUDGE DENSITY INDEX (SDI) SLUDGE DENSITY INDEX (SDI)
This test is used in a way similar to the Sludge Volume Index (SVI) to indicate the settleability of a sludge in a secondary clarifier or
effluent. SDI = 100/SVI. Also see SLUDGE VOLUME INDEX (SVI).
-------
Activated Sludge 235
SLUDGE VOLUME INDEX (SVI) SLUDGE VOLUME INDEX (SVI)
This is a test used to indicate the settling ability of activated sludge (aerated solids) in the secondary clarifier. The test is a measure
of the volume of sludge compared to its weight. Allow the sludge sample from the aeration tank to settle for 30 minutes. Then
calculate SVI by dividing the volume (ml) of wet settled sludge by the weight (mg) of that sludge after it has been dried. Sludge with
an SVI of one hundred or greater will not settle as readily as desirable because it is as light or lighter than water.
SVI = Wet Settled Sludge, ml x 1000
Dried Sludge Solids, mg
STABILIZED WASTE STABILIZED WASTE
A waste that has been treated or decomposed to the extent that, if discharged or released, its rate and state of decomposition would
be such that the waste would not cause a nuisance or odors.
STEP-FEED AERATION STEP-FEED AERATION
Step-feed aeration is a modification of the conventional activated sludge process. In step aeration, primary effluent enters the
aeration tank at several points along the length of the tank, rather than all of the primary effluent entering at the beginning or head of
the tank and flowing through the entire tank.
SUPERNATANT (sue-per-NAY-tent) SUPERNATANT
Liquid removed from settled sludge. Supernatant commonly refers to the liquid between the sludge on the bottom and the scum on
the surface of an anaerobic digester. This liquid is usually returned to the influent wet well or to the primary clarifier.
TOC TOC
Total Organic Carbon. TOC measures the amount of organic carbon in water.
TURBIDITY METER TURBIDITY METER
An instrument for measuring the amount of particles suspended in water. Precise measurements are made by measuring how light
is scattered by the suspended particles. The normal measuring range is 0 to 100 and is expressed as Nephelometric Turbidity Units
(NTU's).
VOLUTE (vol-LOOT) VOLUTE
The spiral-shaped casing which surrounds a pump, blower, or turbine impeller and collects the liquid or gas discharged by the
impeller.
ZOOGLEAL MASS (ZOE-glee-al) ZOOGLEAL MASS
Jelly-like masses of bacteria found in both the trickling filter and activated sludge processes. These masses may be formed for or
function as the protection against predators and for storage of food supplies. Also see BIOMASS.
PZ\T-ee)
-------
236 Treatment Plants
CHAPTER 8. ACTIVATED SLUDGE
(Lesson 1 of 3 Lessons)
8.0 THE ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS
8.00 Wastewater Treatment by Activated Sludge
When wastewater enters an activated sludge plant, the pre-
treatment processes (Chapter 4) remove the coarse or heavy
solids (grit) and other debris, such as roots, rags, and boards.
Primary clarifiers (Chapter 5) remove much of the floatable and
settleable material. Normally settled wastewater is treated by
the activated sludge process, but in some plants the raw
wastewater flows from the pretreatment processes directly to
the activated sludge process.
8.01 Definitions
ACTIVATED SLUDGE (Fig. 8.1). Activated sludge consists
of sludge particles produced in raw or settled wastewater (pri-
mary effluent) by the growth of organisms (including zoogleal
bacteria) in aeration tanks in the presence of dissolved oxy-
gen. The term "activated" comes from the fact that the parti-
cles are teeming with bacteria, fungi, and protozoa.
ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS (Fig. 8.2). The activated
sludge process is a biological wastewater treatment process
that uses MICROORGANISMS1 to speed up decomposition of
wastes. When activated sludge is added to wastewater, the
microorganisms feed and grow on waste particles in the
wastewater. As the organisms grow and reproduce, more and
more waste is removed, leaving the wastewater partially
cleaned. To function efficiently, the mass of organisms (SOL-
IDS CONCENTRATION2) needs a steady balance of food
(FOOD/MICROORGANISM RATIO3) and oxygen.
8.02 Process Description
Secondary treatment in the form of the activated sludge
process (Figs. 8.3 and 8.4) is aimed at OXIDATION4 and
removal of soluble or finely divided suspended materials that
were not removed by previous treatment. Aerobic organisms
do this in a few hours as wastewater flows through an aera-
tion tank. The organisms STABILIZE5 soluble or finely di-
vided suspended solids by partial oxidation forming carbon
dioxide, water, and sulfate and nitrate compounds. The re-
maining solids are changed to a form that can be settled and
removed as sludge during sedimentation.
A£/?ATiON
TAN£
After the aeration period, the wastewater is routed to a
secondary settling tank for a liquid-organism (water-solids)
separation. Settled organisms are quickly returned to the
aeration tank as activated sludge. The remaining clarifier
effluent is usually chlorinated and discharged from the plant.
Conversion of dissolved and suspended material to settle-
abie_solidslFthe malrToBrective rif hioh-rate activ^teTsTuflgft
processes! while low-rate processes stress oxidation? The
oxidation may be by chemical or biological processes. In the
activated sludge process, the biochemical oxidation carried
out by living organisms is stressed. The same organisms also
are effective in conversion of substances to setteable solids if
the plant is operated properly.
When wastewater enters the aeration tanks, it is mixed with
the activated sludge to form a mixture of sludge, carrier water,
and influent solids. These solids come from roofs or streets in
combined sewer systems and also from the discharges from
homes, factories, and businesses. The activated sludge which
is added contains many different types of helpful living or-
ganisms that were grown during previous contact with waste-
water. These organisms are the workers in the treatment pro-
cess. They use the incoming wastes for food and as a source
of energy for their life processes and for the reproduction of
more organisms. These organisms will use more food con-
tained in the wastewater in treating the wastes. The activated
sludge also forms a lacy network or floe mass that entraps
many materials not used as food.
Some organisms (workers) will require a long time to use the
available food in the wastewater at a given waste concentra-
tion. Many organisms will compete with each other in the use
of available food (waste) to shorten the time factor and in-
crease the portion of waste stabilized. The ratio of food to
organisms is a primary control in the activated sludge process."
' Microorganisms (micro-ORGAN-is-ums). Very small organisms that can be seen only through a microscope. Some microorganisms use
the wastes in wastewater for food and thus remove or alter much of the undesirable matter.
2 Solids Concentration. The solids in the aeration tank carry microorganisms that feed on wastewater.
3 Food /Microorganism Ratio. Food to microorganism ratio. A measure of food provided to bacteria in an aeration tank.
Food _ BOD, Ibslday or kglday
Microorganisms MLVSS, lbs or kg
4 Oxidation (ox-i-DAY-shun). Oxidation is the addition of oxygen, removal of hydrogen, or the removal of electrons from an element or
compound. In wastewater treatment, organic matter is oxidized to more stable substances.
5 Stabilized Waste. A waste that has been treated or decomposed to the extent that, if discharged pr released, its rate and state of
decomposition would be such that the waste would not cause a nuisance or odors.
-------
Activated Sludge 237
~mv ; w.t ¦»«
^ •••:-
Opercularia
Rotifer
Rotifer and opercularia
Fig. 8.1 Microorganisms in activated sludge
Zoogleal mass
For information on the use of microorganisms to operate the activated sludge process, see Chapter 21, "Activated
Sludge.''
-------
238 Treatment Plants
AERATION TANK
WASTE
ACTIVATED
SLUDGE
(WAS)
SECONDARY CLARIFIER
EFFLUENT
INFLUENT
MIXED LIQUOR
RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE (RAS)
Fig. 8.2 Activated sludge process
-------
Activated Sludge 239
fgEATHENT PgQ6&4>6 PUNCTlOM
pe£T/?£Am£ur
influbnt
704A4A//2r//U, 00/T
PO£6/£//r %>/Z4Afr/?4iV)
GSMOVES &AA/P£<2£4V£L
(tfAMl WIAA/P /=//¦/-)
fgesueA/z iM5T£W4r&/2
i #£/M0t/j£0/A
M£ASUP£S % g^oePS F£{Y
e£Mot/as /AS.'S
r&SAre soups &SM&VZP
M^StAtBCt j &£MOK£S Sa60£A/0M0
4MC&S
$ 0/&SOZI/££> £&£/£*>
k:/ws PAr/vo&fA/zd sAcrae/A
Fig. 8.3 Flow diagram of a typical plant
-------
IO
£
PRIMARY
CLARIFIER
EXCESS
ACTIVATED
SLUDGE
RETURN
ACTIVATED
SLUDGE
SECONDARY
CLARIFIER
SUPERNATANT
ANAEROBIC
DIGESTER
(PRIMARY)
ANAEROBIC
DIGESTER
SECONDARY
EFFLUENT
RECEIVING
WATERS
SOLIDS TO
DISPOSAL
CHLORINATION
CHLORINE
CONTACT
PRETREATMENT
SOLIDS
DEWATERING
AERATION
TANK
S
£
3
-------
Activated Sludge 241
Organisms tend to increase with waste (food) toad and time
spent in the aeration tank. Under favorable conditions the
operator will remove (sludge wasting) the excess organisms to
maintain the required number of workers for effective waste
treatment. Therefore, removal of organisms from the treatment
process (sludge wasting) is a very important control technique.
Oxygen, usually supplied from air, is needed by the living
organisms for oxidation of wastes to obtain energy for growth.
Insufficient oxygen will slow down aerobic organisms, make
FACULTATIVE6 organisms work less efficiently, and favor pro-
duction of foul-smelling intermediate products of decomposi-
tion and incomplete reactions.
An increase in organisms in an aeration tank will require
greater amounts of oxygen. More food in the influent encour-
ages more organism activity and more oxidation; con-
sequently, more oxygen is required in the aeration tank. An
excess of oxygen is required for complete waste stabilization.
Therefore, the dissolved oxygen (DO) content in the aeration
tank is an essential control test. Some minimum level of oxy-
A/gen must be maintained to favor the desired type or organism
i' activity to achieve the necessary treatment efficiency.JilbfrOO.
in the aeration tank is tty low FlUWcurni io %a,hi
Vj. jbriYSLand the sludge FLOC8 will not settle in the secondary
clarifier. Also, if the _PQ is too high, pinpoint floe will devetoo-
and not to removed in the secondary Ciarlttef. I herefore. the
proper DO level must be maini&lrted so solids will settle prop-
erly and the plant effluent will be clear.
Flows must be distributed evenly among two or more similar
treatment units. If your plant is equipped with a splitter box or a
series of boxes, it will be necessary to periodically check and
estimate whether the flow is being split as intended.
Activated sludge solids concentrations in the aerator and the
secondary clarifier should be determined by the operator for
process control purposes. Solids are in a deteriorating condi-
tion as long as they remain in the secondary clarifier. Depth of
sludge blanket in the secondary clarifier and concentrations of
solids in the aerator are very important for successful wastewa-
ter treatment. Centrifuge tests will give a quick estimate of
solids concentrations and locations in the units. Precise solids
tests should be made periodically for comparison with cen-
trifuge solids tests. Before any changes are made in the mode
of operation, precise solids measurements should be obtained.
Settleability tests show the degree and volume of solids set-
tling that may be obtained in a secondary clarifier; however,
visual plant checks show what is actually happening.
Primary clarifiers are designed to remove material that set-
tles to the bottom or floats to the top. Activated sludge helps
this process along by collecting and AGGLOMERATING9 the
tiny particles in the primary effluent or raw wastewater so that
they will settle better. If for some reason the organisms fail to
make this change in the soluble solids, then the secondary
clarifier effluent quality will not be satisfactory. For the acti-
vated sludge process to work properly, the operator must con-
trol the number of oroflni'inn'' th° liTsrlv"^ mrygen in thr nrtrn
lion tanks, and the treatment tima whsn these factors are
under proper control, the organisms will convert soluble solids
and agglomerate the fine particles into a floe mass.
A floe mass is made up of millions of organisms (1012 to
1018/100 ml in a good activated sludge), including bacteria,
fungi, yeast, protozoa, and worms. When a floe mass is re-
turned to the aerator from the final clarifier, the organisms grow
as a result of taking food from the inflowing wastewater. The
surface of the floe mass is irregular and promotes the transfer
of wastewater pollutants into the solids by means of mechan-
ical entrapment, absorption, adsorption, or adhesion. Many
substances not used as food also are transferred to the floe
mass, thus improving the quality of the plant effluent.
Material taken into the floe mass is partially oxidized to form
cell mass and oxidation products. Ash or inorganic material
(silt and sand) taken in by the floe mass increase the density of
the mass. Mixing the contents of the aerator causes the floe
masses to bump into each other and form larger clumps. Even-
tually these masses become heavy enough to settle to the
bottom of the secondary clarifier where they can be removed
easily. This sludge now contains most of the organisms and
waste material that had been mixed in the wastewater.
The next step in the activated sludge process is removal of
sludge from the secondary clarifier. Some of the material is
converted and released to the atmosphere in the form of
stripped gases (carbon dioxide or other volatile gases not con-
verted and released in the aeration tank). That leaves water
and sludge solids. A certain amount of the solids (waste acti-
vated sludge) will be returned to the aerator to treat incoming
wastewater. The operator must pump these solids to the
aerator. The rest of the waste activated sludge must be re-
moved and disposed of so that it does not continue in the plant
flow. After the sludge solids have been removed from the final
clarifier, the treated wastewater moves to advanced waste
treatment processes and/or the disinfection process.
The successful operation of an activated sludge plant re-
quires the operator to be aware of the many factors influencing
the process and to check them repeatedly. To keep the or-
ganisms working in the activated sludge, you MUST provide a
8 Facultative (FACK-ul-tay-tive). Facultative bacteria can use either molecular (dissolved) oxygen or oxygen obtained from food materials
such as sulfate or nitrate tons. In other words, facultative bacteria can live under aerobic or anaerobic conditions.
7 Filamentous Bacteria (FILL-a-MEN-tuss). Organisms that grow In a thread or filamentous form. Common types are thiothrix and ac-
tlnomyces.
* Floe. Groups or clumps of bacteria and particles that have come together and formed a cluster. Found in aeration tanks and secondary
clarifiers.
* Agglomerate (a-QLOM-er-ATE). To cause the growing or coming together of small scattered particles Into larger floes or particles which
settle rapidly.
-------
242 Treatment Plants
suitable environment. High concentrations of acid, bases, and
other toxic substances are undesirable and may kill the work-
ing organisms. Uneven flows of wastewater may cause over-
feeding, starvation, and other problems that upset the acti-
vated sludge process. Failure to supply enough oxygen can
cause an unfavorable environment which results in decreased
organism activity.
While successful operation of an activated sludge plant in-
volves an understanding of many factors, actual control of the
process as outlined in this section is relatively simple. CON-
TROL CONSISTS OF MAINTAINING THE PROPER SOLIDS
(FLOC MASS) CONCENTRATION IN THE AERATOR FOR
THE WASTE (FOOD) INFLOW BY ADJUSTING THE WASTE
SLUDGE PUMPING RATE AND REGULATING THE OXYGEN
SUPPLY TO MAINTAIN A SATISFACTORY LEVEL OF DIS-
SOLVED OXYGEN IN THE PROCESS.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 269.
8.OA What is the purpose of the activated sludge process in
treating wastewater?
8.OB What is a stabilized waste?
8.0C Why is air added to the aeration tank in the activated
sludge process?
8.0D What happens to the air requirement in the aeration
tank when the strength (BOD) of the incoming water
increases?
8.0E What factors could cause an unsuitable environment for
the activated sludge process in an aeration tank?
8.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTROL
Effective control of the activated sludge process depends on
the operator's ability to interpret and adjust several interrelated
factors. Some of these factors are:
1. Effluent quality requirements.
2. Wastewater flow, concentration, and characteristics of the
wastewater received.
3. Amount of activated sludge (containing the working or-
ganisms) to be maintained in the process relative to inflow.
4. Amount of oxygen required to stabilize wastewater oxygen
demands and to maintain a satisfactory level of dissolved
oxygen to meet organism requirements.
5. Equal division of plant flow and waste load between dupli-
cate treatment units (two or more clarifiers or aeration
tanks).
6. Transfer of the pollutional material (food) from the wastewa-
ter to the floe mass (solids or workers) and separation of the
solids from the treated wastewater.
7. Effective control and disposal of inplant residues (solids,
scums, and supematants) to accomplish ultimate disposal
in a nonpollutional manner.
8. Provisions for maintaining a suitable environment for the
work force of living organisms treating the wastes. Keep
them healthy and happy.
Effluent quality requirements may be stated by your regula-
tory agency in terms of percentage removal of wastes. Current
regulations frequently specify allowable quantities of wastes
that may be discharged. These quantities are based upon flow
and concentrations of significant items such as solids, oxygen
demand, coliform bacteria, nitrogen, and oil as specified by
your regulatory agencies in your NPDES permit.
The effluent quality requirements in your NPDES permit
usually determine what kind of activated sludge operation you
can use and how tightly you must control the process. For
example, if an effluent containing 50 mgIL of suspended solids
and BOD (refers to five-day BOD) is satisfactory, a high-rate
activated sludge process will probably meet your needs. If the
limit is 10 mg IL, the high-rate process would not be suitable. If
a high degree of treatment is required, very close process
control and additional treatment after the activated sludge pro-
cess may be needed. Today secondary treatment plants are
expected to remove 85 percent of the BOD and provide an
effluent with a 30-day average BOD of less than 30 mgIL.
The treatment plant operator has little control over the
makeup or amount of influent coming into the treatment plant.
However, municipal ordinances may limit or forbid dumping
substances into the collection system if they could seriously
damage your treatment facilities or create safety hazards.
Even with these laws to protect the collection system, some
type of inspection program may be necessary (Chapter 27,
"Industrial Waste Monitoring"). You may have to work out
some additional plans for disposal, pretreatment, or controlled
discharge to be sure that substances harmful to your treatment
plant are diluted before they enter the plant.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 269.
8.1 A What two different ways may effluent quality require-
ments be stated by regulatory agencies?
8.1 B How might harmful industrial waste discharges be regu-
lated to protect an activated sludge process?
0M(7 Of l&hhDW 1 09 % VoMo
A£TiVATEP bttXVbZ
Please answer the discussion and review questions before
continuing with Lesson 2.
-------
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
Activated Sludge 243
Chapter 8. ACTIVATED SLUDGE
(Lesson 1 of 3 Lessons)
At the end of each lesson in this chapter you will find some
discussion and review questions that you should work before
continuing. The purpose of these questions is to indicate to you
how well you understand the material in the lesson. Write the
answers to these questions in your notebook before continu-
ing.
1. Sketch the activated sludge process.
2. Define activated sludge.
3. Define facultative bacteria.
4. Some activated sludge plants do not have a primary
clarifier. True or False?
5. What happens if the activated sludge retention time is too
long in the final clarifier?
6. How can the operator control the activated sludge process?
CHAPTER 8. ACTIVATED SLUDGE
(Lesson 2 of 3 Lessons)
8.2 PACKAGE PLANTS (Extended Aeration)
8.20 Purpose of Package Plants
8.200 Use of Package Plants
You may be assigned to operate a small extended aeration
plant (Fig. 8.5). You may not have laboratory facilities and may
not be supplied materials for simple tests, such as dissolved
oxygen (DO), pH, or settleable solids. Fortunately, this type of
plant is usually under a light load and/or sized for a long reten-
tion of the solids (extended aeration), and the SLUDGE AGEW
may be greater than ten days. The operation nf plants js
similar to the operation of any other activated sludae plant. A
nign quality effluent requires attention, understanding, and
good plant operation.
This type of plant comes in many sizes, but basically there
are just two compartments or tanks made from one large tank.
The larger compartment is used for aeration, and the smaller
one for clarification and settling. Usually provisions are not
made for a primary settling compartment. The plant may be
mechanically aerated or a small air compressor may provide
air through diffusers. The settling tank is usually a double-
hopper tank equipped with a pump or AIR-LIFP1 system for
the return of sludge from the hoppers of the settling tank back
to the aeration tank. Some plants have a third compartment
that is used for AEROBIC DIGESTION12 (Fig. 8.6).
8.201 Types of Package Plant Treatment Processes
(Fig. 8.7)
The most common types of treatment processes are the
extended aeration type, the contact stabilization type, and the
complete mix type. These processes are essentially modifica-
tions to the conventional activated sludge process and de-
scribe the structural arrangement of the aeration tank as well
as the various arrangements of process streams that are used
to provide process flexibility. Realistically, almost all package
plants are of the extended aeration type. They have long solids
retention times, high mixed liquor suspended solids and low
food/microorganism ratios.
1. Extended Aeration
Extended aeration is similar to conventional activated
sludge except that the bugs are retained in the aeration
tank longer and do not get as much food. The bugs get less
food because there are more of them to feed. Mixed liquor
suspended solids concentrations are from 2,000 to 5,000
mgIL. In addition to the bugs consuming the incoming food,
they, in turn, consume any stored food in the dead bugs.
The new products are carbon dioxide, water, and a biologi-
10 Sludge Age. A measure of the length of time a particle of suspended solids has been undergoing aeration in the activated sludge process.
Sludge Age, days = SusPended Solids Under Aeration, lbs or kg
Suspended Solids Added, lbs/day or kglday
,1 Air-Uft. A special type of pump. This device consists of a vertical riser pipe submerged in the wastewater or sludge to be pumped.
Compressed air is injected into a tail piece at the bottom of the pipe. Fine air bubbles mix with the wastewater or sludge to form a mixture
lighter than the surrounding water which causes the mixture to rise in the discharge pipe to the outlet. An air-lift pump works similar to the
center stand in a percolator coffee pot.
12 Aerobic Digestion (AIR-O-bick). The breaking down of wastes by microorganisms in the presence of dissolved oxygen. Waste sludge is
placed in a large aerated tank where aerobic microorganisms decompose the organic matter in the sludge. This is an extension of the
activated sludge process.
-------
244 Treatment Plants
(W
miiiUiiMiiHU
iiimmimiiM
fftl ::!l:l ill *
]j;j! ::: :
»!:::!:!:! ill is
11 liill! jii lj
lip jifi i i!.!1
iiiiijp
hi
wmmm
i"!
Hijlijfiiji} |{ i:
\V
Fig. 8.5 Package plant (two compartments)
-------
Activated Sludge 245
Fig. 8.6 Package plant (three compartments)
-------
246 Treatment Plants
AERATION
TANK OR
REACTOR
PRIMARY
CLARIFIER
SECONDARY
CLARIFIER
PLANT
INFLUENT
I PLANT
EFFLUENT
^/RETURN
ACTIVATED
SLUDGE
WASTE
ACTIVATED
SLUDGE
CONVENTIONAL ACTIVATED SLUDGE
PLANT
INFLUENT
AERATION
TANK OR
REACTOR
CLARIFIER
RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE
EXTENDED AERATION
WASTE
~ activated
SLUDGE
PRIMARY
CLARIFIER
PLANT
INFLUENT
WASTE
ACTIVATED
SLUDGE
RETURN
ACTIVATED
SLUDGE
AERATION
REGENERATION
CONTACT
OR STABILIZATION-
TANK OR
TANK
REACTOR
SECONDARY
CLARIFIER
PLANT
EFFLUENT
CONTACT STABILIZATION
PRIMARY
PLANT J \ CLARIFIER
INFLUENT
WASTE
ACTIVATED
SLUDGE
AERATION
TANK OR
REACTOR
RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE
COMPLETE MIX
SECONDARY
CLARIFIER
PLANT
'EFFLUENT
NOTE: ALL FOUR PLANTS HAVE AERATION HEADERS RUNNING THE LENGTH OF THE AERA HON TANK.
COMPLETE MIX ALSO HAS AERATION HEADERS RUNNING ACROSS THE AERATION TANK
AT REGULAR INTERVALS.
Fig. 8.7 Types of package aeration plants
-------
Activated Sludge 247
cally inert residue. Extended aeration does not produce as
much waste sludge as other processes; however, wasting
still is necessary to maintain proper control of the process.
2. Contact Stabilization
Contact stabilization is similar to conventional activated
sludge except that the capture of the waste material and the
digestion of that material by the bugs is done in different
aeration tanks. The bugs can "adsorb" the waste material
on the cell wall in only fifteen to thirty minutes, but it takes
several hours to "absorb' the material through the cell wall.
In conventional activated sludge, adsorption and absorp-
tion are done in one tank, therefore, the wastewater has to
remain there for a longer time. In both cases, the bugs flow
to the clarifier to be separated from the wastewater, but in
contact stabilization the settled bugs still have to digest their
food. Another aeration tank called a stabilization or re-
aeration tank is provided separately for this step. Here the
bugs digest the food and then are returned hungry to the
original aeration tank (contact tank) ready to eat more food.
The mixed liquor suspended solids (MLSS) concentration
of the contact tank should be maintained around 1,500 to
2,000 mg/L. If the MLSS gets too high, the sludge that the
microorganisms form is disposed of or "wasted" as in con-
ventional activated sludge.
In most package plants the adsorption/oxidation is
achieved in one tank.
3. Complete Mix
In an ideal complete-mix activated sludge plant, the con-
tents of the tank are completely mixed (the MLSS are uni-
formly mixed throughout the entire aeration tank). In order
to ensure that this is achieved, special arrangements are
often employed to UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTE THE IN-
FLUENT AND WITHDRAW THE EFFLUENT FROM THE
AERATION TANK. Attention to the tank shape and to inten-
sive mixing is important. There are some means which the
operator may use to evaluate the degree to which a particu-
lar process operates in the complete mix mode. First and
foremost, the entire contents of the tank should be as uni-
form as possible. This can be confirmed by measurements
of DO and suspended solids. If the tank is thoroughly
mixed, these measurements should be nearly uniform. The
settleability of the complete-mix sludges is generally well
within the accepted range of normal operation. The MLSS
in the aeration tank ranges from 2,000 to 5,000 mgIL.
Most package plants have one influent line and one in-
fluent port. The aeration compartment has one aeration
header and the tank contents are completely mixed in a
very short time. A limitation of the complete mix type is that
the process may be more susceptible to short-circuiting.
8.202 Aeration Methods
Two methods are commonly used to supply oxygen from the
air to the bacteria — MECHANICAL AERATION and DIF-
FUSED AERATION. Both methods are mechanical processes
with the difference being whether the mechanisms are at or in
the aerator or at a remote location.
Mechanical aeration devices agitate the water surface in the
aerator to cause spray and waves by paddle wheels (Fig. 8.8),
mixers, rotating brushes, or some other method of splashing
water into the air or air into the water where the oxygen can be
absorbed.
Mechanical aerators in the tank tend to be lower in installa-
tion and maintenance costs. Usually they are more versatile in
terms of mixing, production of surface area of bubbles, and
oxygen transfer per unit of applied power.
Diffused air systems use a device called a diffuser (Fig. 8.9)
which is used to break up the air stream from the blower sys-
tem into fine bubbles in the mixed liquor. The smaller the bub-
ble, the greater the oxygen transfer due to the greater surface
area of rising air bubbles surrounded by water. Unfortunately,
fine bubbles will tend to regroup into larger bubbles while rising
unless they are broken up by suitable mixing energy and turbu-
lence.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 270.
8.2A How many compartments are there in a typical package
extended aeration plant? What is the purpose of each
compartment?
8.2B What are some common characteristics of all package
aeration plants?
8.21 Pre-Start Check-Out
If the plant is being installed, a hole is dug large enough to
accommodate the plant. Usually the plant is brought to the site
by truck and placed in the excavation (hole) by a crane. The
inlet sewer and discharge lines are connected and the plant is
ready for service after power has been connected.
While the tank is empty, check the following:
1. Tank must be level from one end to the other.
2. If the tank is constructed of metal, is CATHODIC PROTEC-
TION13 required?
3. Condition of paint on exterior and interior.
4. Removal of all rocks and debris from both compartments.
5. If equipped with comminutor or grinder, check lubrication,
clearance of cutters, and operation.
6. Check aeration device:
a. Lubrication
b. Direction of rotation
c. Mechanical aeration — proper agitator depth
d. Compressor, if diffused air
(1) Air filter and oil bath
(2) Air header and valves
(3) Air lift tubes and valves
(4) Diffusers installed
(5) Swing header lifts easily and free
7. Record and file the following data:
a. Plant model and serial number
b. Two copies of plant operation and maintenance manual
c. Name plate data from equipment
(1) Comminutor
(2) Comminutor motor
(3) Aeration motor
(4) Compressor or agitator
(5) Amperage of running equipment
(6) Oils and greases specified for each unit
8. Check influent gate or valve for proper operation.
13 Cathodic Protection (ca-THOD-ick). An electrical system for prevention of rust, corrosion, and pitting of steel and iron surfaces in contact
with water, wastewater or soil.
-------
248 Treatment Plants
Fig. 8.8 ¦ Mechanical aeration device
(Permission ol INFILCO INC.)
-------
Activated Sludge 249
Fig. 8.9 Air diffuser
(Courtesy Paul Hallbach. National Training Center, Water Quality Offlca/EPA)
-------
250 Treatment Plants
8.22 Starting the Plant
(See Volume II, Chapter 11, for detailed instructions.) As
soon as the aeration compartment is full of wastewater, the
aerator compressor or agitator may be started. If the plant is
the diffused-air type with air-lifts for return sludge, the air line
valve to the air-lifts will have to be closed until the settling
compartment is filled. Otherwise all the air will attempt to go to
the empty compartment and none will go to the diffusers. Once
the settling compartment is filled from the overflow from the
aeration tank, the air lift valves may be opened. They will have
to be adjusted to return a constant stream of water and solids
to the aeration tank. This adjustment is usually two to three
turns open on the air valve to each air lift.
There may be a buildup of foam during the first week or so of
start-up. A one-inch (25 mm) water hose with a lawn sprinkler
may be used to keep it under control until sufficient mixed
liquor solids are obtained.
8.23 Operation of Aeration Equipment
Aeration equipment should be operated continuously. In a
diffused air system, the operator controls airflow tu ll iS'cffifuser
with the header control valve. This valve forces excess air to
the air lifts in the settling compartment. Good treatment rarely
results from interrupted operation and should not be at-
tempted. You can judge how well the aeration equipment is
working by the appearance of the water in the settling com-
partment and the effluent that goes over the weir. If the water is
murky or cloudy and the aeration compartment has a rotten
egg odor (HZS), not enough air is being supplied. The air
supplied or aeration rate should be increased. If the water is
clear in the settling compartment, the aeration rate is probably
sufficient. Try to maintain a DO level of around 2_mq/L
throughout tTufaeration tank If voLThave "a~DQ probeor lab '
equipment fcTrfieasure We DO. Try to measure the DO at
different locations in the aeration tank as well as from top to
bottom.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 270.
8.2C Why should package plants have cathodic protection?
8.2D Why should the valve to the air lift pumps be closed until
the settling compartment is filled?
8.2E What whould you do if the water in the aeration com-
partment was murky or cloudy and the aeration com-
partment had a rotten egg odor (H2S)?
8.24 Wasting Sludge
Many older package plants did not come equipped with
facilities for wasting sludge. The reason was that the extended
aeration system was considered capable of stabilizing the in-
fluent suspended solids to a level sufficient for a tolerable re-
lease to the receiving waters. Experience has shown that this
concept was wrong and that some sludge must be wasted
routinely to allow optimum plant performance. The operator
must waste a portion of the plant solids content out of the
system periodically. For best results, in terms of effluent qual-
ity, waste abouj five percent nf thfl 8011(18 each week during
summer operation to prevent excessive solids "burping."
To waste the excess activated sludge, turn off the return
pumps or air lifts for one hour and continue to let the rest of the
plant function. After one hour of not returning sludge, about five
percent of the waste solids in the settling compartment are
pumped out with a portable pump to a sand or soil drying bed.
The amount of solids pumped is determined by measuring the
depth of the sludge blanket and then lowering it five percent.
Record the pumping time and weekly waste solids for this time
period if results are satisfactory.
If your package activated sludge plant does not have an
aerobic digester, applying waste activated sludge to drying
beds may cause odor problems. If odors from waste sludge
drying beds are a problem, consider the following solutions:
1. Waste the excess activated sludge into an aerated, holding
tank. Thlstank can"6e pumped out and the sludge disposed
*oTTn an approved sanitary landfill. If aerated long enough,
the sludge could toe applied to drying beds.
2. The excess or waste activated sludge can be removed by a
septic tank pumper and disposed of in an approved sanitarv
—
3. Arrange for disposal of the excess activated sludge at a
nearby treatment plant.
Annually, check the bottom of the hoppers for rocks, sticks,
and grit deposits. Also check the tail pieces of the air lifts to be
sure that they are clear of rags and rubber goods and in proper
working condition.
Frequency and amount of wasting may be revised after sev-
eral months of operation by examining:
1. The amount of carryover of solids in the effluent.
2. The depth to which the solids settle in the settling compart-
ment when the aeration device is off (should be greater
than one-third of the distance from top to bottom).
3. The appearance of floe and foam in the aeration compart-
ment as to color, settleability, foam make-up, and excess
solids on water surface of the tank.
4. Results of laboratory testing (Section 8.26, page 252).
A white, fluffy foam indicates low solids content in the
aerator, while a brown, leathery foam suggests high solids
concentrations. If you notice high effluent solids levels at the
same time each day, the solids loading may be too great for
the final clarifier. Excessive solids indicate the mixed liquor
suspended solids concentration is too high for the flows and
more solids should be wasted.
8.25 Operation
8.250 Normal Operation
Package activated sludge plants should be checked every
day. Each visit should include the following:
1. Check the appearance of aeration and final clarification
compartment.
2. Check aeration unit for proper operation and lubrication.
3. Check return sludge line for proper operation. If the air lift is
not flowing properly, briefly close the outlet valve which
forces the air to go down and out the tail piece. This will
blow it out and clear any obstructions. Reopen the dis-
charge valve and adjust to desired return sludge flow.
4. Check comminuting device for lubrication and operation.
5. Hose down aeration tank and final compartment.
6. Brush weirs when necessary.
7. Skim off grease and other" floating material such as plastic
and rubber goods.
-------
Activated Sludge 251
8. Check plant discharge for proper appearances, grease, or
material of wastewater origin that is not desirable.
8.251 Abnormal Operation
Remember that changing conditions or abnormal conditions
can upset the microorganisms in the aeration tank. As the
temperature changes from season to season, the activity of the
organisms speeds up or slows down. Also the flows and waste
(food as measured by BOD and suspended solids) in the plant
influent changes seasonally. All of these factors require the
operator to gradually adjust aeration rates, return sludge rates
and wasting rates. Abnormal conditions may consist of high
flows or solids concentrations as a result of storms or weekend
loads. These problems require the operator and the plant to be
prepared and to do the best possible job with available
facilities.
Toxic wastes such as pesticides, detergents, solvents or
high or low pH levels can upset or kill the microorganisms in
the aeration tank. Plant effluent usually does not deteriorate
until after the toxic substance has passed through the plant. To
correct problems from toxic substances, try to locate the
source and prevent future discharges. If the microorganisms in
the aeration tank have been killed, try to build up the mi-
croorganisms as if you were working with a new plant.
An outstanding example of a toxic substance added by
operators is the uninhibited use of chlorine for odor control
(prechlorination). Chlorination is for disinfection. Chlorine is a
toxicant and should not be allowed to enter the activated
sludge process because it is not selective with respect to type
of organisms damaged. It may kill the organisms that you
should be retaining as workers. Chlorine is effective in disin-
fecting the plant effluent AFTER treatment by the activated
sludge process.
8.252 Troubleshooting
When problems develop in the activated sludge process, try
to identify the problem, the cause of the problem, and select
the best possible solution. Remember that the activated sludge
process is a biological process and may require from 3 days to
a week or longer to show any response to the proper corrective
action. Allow 7 or more days for the process to stabilize after
making a change in the treatment process.
1. Solids in the effluent.
a. If effluent appears turbid (muddy or cloudy), the return
activated sludge pumping rate is out of balances Try
increasing the return sludge rate. Also consider the
possibility of something toxic to the microorganisms or
a hydraulic overload wasfilnq out some of the solids.
b. If the activated sludge is not settling in the clarifier
(sludge bulking), several possible factors could be
causing this problem. Look for too low a solids level in
the system, strong stale septic influent, high grease
levels in influent, or alkaline wastes from a laundry.
c. If the solids level is too high in the sludge compartment
of the secondary clarifier, solids will appear in the
effluent. Try increasing the return sludge pumping rate.
d. If odors are present and aeration tank mixed liquor ap-
pears black as compared with the usual brown color, try
increasing aeration rates and look for septic dead
spots.
e. If light-colored floating sludge solids are observed on
the clarifier surface, try reducing the aeration rates. Try
to maintain the dissolved oxygen at around 2 mgIL
throughout the entire aeration tank. "
2. Odors
a. If the effluent is turbid and the aeration tank mixed liq-
uor appears black as compared with the usual brown
color, try increasing aeration rates and look for septic
dead spots? —-
b. If clumps of black solids appear on the clarifier surface,
try lipcraasing the return sludge rate. Also be sure the
sludge retuirT line is not plugged and that there are no
septic dead spots around tRe edges or elsewhere in the
clarifier.
c. .Examine method of wasting and disposing of waste
lictivaTgcrgfudge to be sure this is not the source of the
'odors.
d. Poor hnufjpkqftpino roc"lt in odors. Do not allow
solids to accumulate or debris removed from wastewa-
ter to sit around the plant in open containers.
3. Foaming/Frothing
a. If too much activated sludge was wasted, reduce wast-
ing rate.
b. If overaeration caused excessive foaming, reduce aer-
ation rates.
c. If plant is recovering from overload or septic conditions,
allow time for recovery.
Foaming can be controlled by water sprays until the
cause is corrected by reducing or stopping wasting and
building up solids levels in the aeration tank.
To learn more about the operation of an activated sludge
process under both normal and abnormal conditions, you may
refer to Volume II, Chapter 11, "Activated Sludge." There you
will also find a troubleshooting guide for activated sludge
plants.
8.253 Shutdown
Shutdown procedures depend on whether the plant is being
shut down because of operational problems, for maintenance
and repairs or for the off-season such as would be the case in
a resort area. Activated sludge microorganisms (like people)
die quickly from lack of oxygen if the aeration system is out of
service for a short time period. Whenever the tank must be
drained, try to determine the ground water level. A high ground
water level can float a tank and cause considerable damage to
structures and pipes. Diffusers should be clean before the tank
is returned to service. If the package plant is shut down during
the off-season, "mothball" the equipment to prevent damage
from weather and moisture. Exact procedures will depend on
location and climate.
8.254 Operational Strategy
This section provides a brief summary of the basic concepts
in the operation and control of the activated sludge process as
it relates to both package plants and oxidation ditches. The
following list outlines items that you the operator must consider
in the day-to-day operation of your treatment plant.
1. Do the influent flow characteristics vary significantly during
the year? Is your activated sludge process modification
adequate to provide suitable treatment for these varia-
tions?
2. Is adequate pre-treatment and collection system monitor-
ing being practiced to avoid downstream mechanical or
process failure?
-------
252 Treatment Plants
3. Are routine solids tests performed (centrifuge, settleability,
depth of blanket, visual observations) with results plotted
on graphs to assist you in determining if a change in the
process mode of operation is necessary?
4. Is suitable aeration time and mixing being provided to
allow adequate oxidation, conversion, and floe formation
of the solids?
5. Is adequate sludge wasting being practiced to properly
maintain a favorable food to microorganism balance
throughout the system?
6. If an increase or decrease in organisms results, is the
oxygen level adjusted accordingly to maintain proper sol-
ids settling and production of a clear final effluent?
7. Is the return sludge flow rate such that it allows for a high
concentration of solids which will reduce the amount of
water returned to the aerator?
8. Do you visit your plant on a regular basis to observe pro-
cess conditions, check equipment for proper operation,
lubricate and maintain equipment, clean process tanks
and related equipment?
9. When a problem develops in your activated sludge pro-
cess, do you refer to Section 8.252, "Troubleshooting?"
10. Do you avoid injuries by avoiding hazards and following
safe procedures?
11. Before leaving your plant for the day, do you make a final
and detailed check of the equipment for proper operation,
insure that flow rates are set properly, that flow gates are
set for possible storm and/or high flow conditions, that
timer controlled equipment and equipment alarms are set
properly, and that equipment is stored and buildings and
gates are properly locked?
8.26 Laboratory Testing
Testing for solids condition may be accomplished by the
settling test. Using a quart jar, take a sample from the aeration
compartment after the aeration device has been operating for
ten to fifteen minutes and fill the jar to the top. Let the jar stand
and watch the floe form and settle to the bottom of the jar. At
the end of thirty minutes, the jar should be approximately half
full of the settled solids, or slightly less, and have a chocolate
brown color with clear water above it. The solids should appear
granular. If the solids do not settle half way and the water
above them is cloudy or murky in appearance, a longer aera-
tion period, more air, or solids wasting is needed. If the solids
settle to less than a quarter of the jar's depth and the water
above the solids is murky or cloudy, no wasting of solids
should be done and the solids level in the aerator should be
allowed to increase.
If the solids settle to the bottom nf {ha jar with a clear liquor
nn too and stay down one hour and come" up in two hours, this
is an indication nf nnrxi pjwatinn Snlirls shnnlrt ntwflr ha al-
lowed to remain in the settling compartment longer than two
hours. If the solids should rise in one hour, this is an indication
usually of too much air, or too many solids. Make a slight
adjustment to reduce the air to the aeration compartment or
increase the return sludge rate.
Another possible cause of solids rising in one hour could be
that there are not enough solids under aeration. When this
happens the sludge will rise because of the high respiration
(breathing) rate of the overtaxed organisms and the rapid DO
depletion caused by these organisms in the settling compart-
ment. Under these circumstances you would want to try to
increase or build up the mixed liquor suspended solids. To
identify the cause of problems and select the proper solution,
you must keep good records and observe what is happening in
your plant.
The final clarifier should be equipped with a scum baffle. A
properly operated plant will produce some light, oxidizing floe
that will float to the surface of the settling compartment. A
scum baffle will prevent this flow from leaving the compartment
in the plant effluent. The better the treatment, the more likely
scum will develop, unless the unit is SEPTIC."
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 270.
8.2F How frequently should a package plant be visually
checked by an operator?
8.2G If it becomes necessary to waste sludge, how much
and when should it be wasted?
8.2H What should you do if you take a sample in a jar from
the aeration compartment and after 30 minutes
a. solids do not settle to the bottom half of the jar?
b. solids settle to the bottom and then float to the top?
8.27 Safety
Operators of wastewater treatment plants have one of the
worst safety records in the United States. If you are the
operator of a small package plant, you must be extremely care-
ful. Frequently you may be the only person at the plant and
there will be no one nearby to come to your rescue or help you
if you are hurt or seriously injured. THEREFORE, PRACTICE
SAFETY, AVOID HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS AND USE
SAFE PROCEDURES.
You can be killed by toxic gases (hydrogen sulfide), electric
shock and drowning. Slippery surfaces, falls and attempting to
lift heavy objects can cause serious injury. Cuts and bruises
can lead to infection and pathogens (disease-causing bacteria)
in wastewater can make you sick. Chlorine and dangerous lab
chemicals can blind you or seriously bum your skin. Whenever
you must enter a confined space or do any electrical
troubleshooting, know what you are doing and have help
standing by. If you must work alone doing routine operation
and maintenance, phone your office at regular intervals and
have someone check on you if you fail to report. You can avoid
injuries if you avoid hazards and follow safe procedures.
14 Septic (SEP-tlck). This condition Is produced by anaerobic bacteria. If severe, the wastewater turns black, gives off foul odors, contains
little or no dissolved oxygen and creates a heavy oxygen demand.
-------
Activated Sludge 253
8.28 Maintenance
Maintenance of equipment in package plants should follow
the manufacturer's instructions. Items requiring attention in-
clude:
1. Plant cleanliness. Wash down tank walls, weirs and chan-
nels to reduce the collection of odor-causing materials.
2. Aeration equipment
a. Air blowers and air diffusion units
b. Mechanical aerators
3. Air-lift pumps
4. Scum skimmer
5. Sludge scrapers
6. Froth spray system
7. Weirs, gates and valves
8. Raw wastewater pumps
8.29 Additional Reading
1. PACKAGE TREATMENT PLANTS OPERATIONS MAN-
UAL, Municipal Operations Branch, Office of Water Pro-
gram Operations, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Washington, D.C. 20460. EPA-430/9-77-005, April, 1977.
NOTE: This is an outstanding publication and if you are the
operator of a package activated sludge plant, you should
obtain this Operations Manual.
2. OPERATORS' POCKET GUIDE TO ACTIVATED SLUDGE
- PART II: PROCESS CONTROL AND TROUBLESHOOT-
ING. Available from STRAAM Engineers, Inc., 5505 S.E.
Milwaukie Avenue, P.O. Box 02201, Portland, Oregon
97202. Price: $1.50.
3. ACTIVATED SLUDGE PACKAGE PLANT OPERATION
MANUAL, prepared by Minnesota Pollution Control
Agency. Available from National Environmental Training
Association, 158 S. Napoleon Street, PO Box 346, Val-
paraiso, Indiana 46383. Price $10.00.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 270.
8.2I How can operators avoid being injured?
8.2J What safety precautions should be taken if you must
work alone?
gwp l&iho M 1qP^>
CM AdfiVArep hlWifc
Please answer the discussion and review questions before
continuing with Lesson 3.
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
Chapter 8. ACTIVATED SLUDGE
(Lesson 2 of 3 Lessons)
Write the answers to these questions in your notebook be-
fore continuing. The problem numbering continues from Les-
son 1.
7. What is a temporary way to control foaming in the aeration
compartment of a package plant?
8. How would you operate the aeration device in a package
plant?
9. How would you waste sludge in a package plant?
10. What items can cause problems for the operator of a
package aeration plant?
-------
254 Treatment Plants
CHAPTER 8. ACTIVATED SLUDGE
(Lesson 3 of 3 Lessons)
8.3 OXIDATION DITCHES
8.30 Use of Oxidation Ditches
8.300 Flow Path for Oxidation Ditches
The oxidation ditch (Fig. 8.10 and Table 8.1) is a modified
form of the activated sludge process and is usually operated in
the extended aeration mode.
The main parts of the oxidation ditch are the aeration basin
which generally consists of two channels placed side by side
and connected at the ends to produce one continuous loop of
the wastewater flow, a brush rotor assembly (Fig. 8.11), set-
tling tank, return sludge pump, and excess sludge handling
facilities.
There is usually no primary settling tank or grit removal sys-
tem used in this process. Inorganic solids such as sand, silt
and cinders are captured in the oxidation ditch and removed
during sludge wasting or cleaning operations. The raw waste-
water passes directly through a bar screen to the ditch. The bar
TABLE 8.1 PURPOSES OF PARTS IN AN OXIDATION
DITCH
Purpose
Provides detention time
where activated sludge mi-
croorganisms treat wastewa-
ter.
Causes surface aeration
which transfers oxygen from
air to water for respiration by
microorganisms. Also keeps
the contents of the ditch
mixed and moving.
Regulates how deep rotors sit
in the flow of wastewater. This
affects the amount of oxygen
dissolved in or transferred to
the water being treated. Over-
flow goes to final settling tank.
Allows activated sludge to be
separated from water being
treated. Clear effluent leaves
plant and settled activated
sludge is either returned to
oxidation ditch or wasted.
5. Return Sludge Pump Returns settled activated
sludge from final settling tank
to oxidation ditch or to excess
sludge handling facilities.
6. Excess Sludge Handling Treat waste activated sludge
Facilities for ultimate disposal.
screen is necessary for the protection of the mechanical
equipment such as rotor and pumps. Comminutors or bar-
minutors may be installed after the bar screen or instead of a
bar screen. The oxidation ditch forms the aeration basin and
here the raw wastewater is mixed with previously formed ac-
tive organisms. The rotor is the aeration device that entrains
(dissolves) the necessary oxygen into the liquid for microbial
life and keeps the contents of the ditch mixed and moving. The
velocity of the liquid in the ditch must be maintained to prevent
settling of solids, normally 1.0 to 1.5 feet per second (0.3 to
0.45 m/sec). The ends of the ditch are w"5H roun3e3Toprevent
eddying and dead areas, and the outside edges of the curves
are given erosion protection.
The mixed liquor flows from the ditch to a clarifier for separa-
tion. The clarified water passes over the effluent weir and is
chlorinated. Plant effluent is discharged to either a receiving
stream, percolation ditches, or a subsurface disposal or leach-
ing system. The settled sludge is removed from the bottom of
the clarifier by a pump and is returned to the ditch. Scum which
floats to the surface of the clarifier is removed and either re-
turned to the oxidation ditch for further treatment or disposed of
by burial.
Since the oxidation ditch is operated as a closed system, the
amount of volatile suspended solids will gradually increase. It
will periodically become necessary to remove some sludge
from the process. Wasting of sludge lowers the MLSS (Mixed
Liquor Suspended Solids) concentration in the ditch and keeps
the microorganisms more active. Control of sludge concentra-
tion and wasting of excess sludge is one of the reasons for the
high reductions possible by this process. Excess sludge may
be dried directly on sludge drying beds or stored in a holding
tank or in sludge lagoons for later disposal to larger treatment
plants or approved sanitary landfills.
The basic process design results in simple, easy operation.
A high mixed liquor suspended solids (MLSS) concentration,
usually between 2,000 to 5,000 mgIL, is carried in the ditch and
the plant may be capable of handling shock and peak loads
without upsetting plant operation. There is no foarh problem
after solids build up, as experienced with other types of acti-
vated sludge plants. Cold weather operation has less effect on
plant efficiency than~~~otiier brocelses because^nRoTiatqe
"number of microorganisms in the~ditch.
Operating plants in the United States are achieving BOD
removals of about 90 percent and as high as 98 percent.
8.301 Description of Oxidation Ditches
1. Plant flow 0.2 to 20.0 MGD (750 to
75,000 cu m/day)
2. BOD loading 10 to 50 lbs BOD/day per
1,000 cubic feet of ditch (200
to 800 kg/day per 1,000 cu m)
Part
1. Oxidation Ditch
2. Rotor
3. Level Control Weir
4. Final Settling Tank
-------
RETURN
SLUDGE PUMP
TO WASTE
ROTOR
SETTLED
SLUDGE
FINAL
SETTLING
TANK
INFLUENT
EFFLUENT
BAR
SCREEN
LEVEL
CONTROL
WEIR
DISINFECTION
OXIDATION DITCH
Fig. 8.10 Oxidation ditch plant
Source: "Oxidation Ditch" prepared by William L. Berk for the
New England Regional Wastewater Institute, South Portland,
Maine 04106 (August 1970).
>
o
<
a
w
c
Q.
to
CD
-------
256 Treatment Plants
i-
m~ .. v) - SLwwwtiwJFl. ,'Jk
I *' * r *
Brush rotor
Brush rotor
p--~rrm~-
Outboard bearing assembly
T-ff ¦ ¦¦¦•¦¦ t
r!TV' • * - »¦*»»» |
Brush rotor drive motor and
gear reducer assembly
Fig. 8.11 Brush rotor
-------
Activated Sludge 257
3. F/M ratio'5
4. MLSS concentration
5. Sludge age
6. Ditch detention time
7. Minimum velocity
8. 00 levels
9. Liquid level
0.03 to 0.1 lbs BOD/day/lb
MLVSS
2,000 to 5,000 mgIL
20 to 35 days
3 to 24 hours
1.0 fps (0.3 mps)
0.5 to 3.0 mgIL
3.0 to 7.0 feet (1 to 2 m)
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 270.
See Section 8.35, "Operational Criteria," for procedures to
calculate these items. Use of the F/M ratio and Sludge Age to
control the activated sludge process will be discussed in Vol-
ume II, Chapter 11.
8.31 Safety
Lost time, injury, and even death is the result of not being
concerned with applying the rules of safety to all activities in-
volved in operating and maintaining a plant. Practicing "safety"
is not just know what to do; it is a life-style. Personnel must not
only acquire this "life-style," but must also know what to do if
an accident occurs. Refer to Chapter 14, "Safety," for more
information.
Some safety precautions that should be observed at all
times when working in a treatment plant include:
1. Wear shoes with soles that retard slipping. Cork-inserted
composition soles provide the best traction for all-around
use.
2. Slippery algal growths should be scrubbed off and washed
away whenever they appear.
3. Keep all areas clear of spilled oil or grease. Use soap and
water, not gasoline or solvents, for cleaning.
4. Wear gloves when working with equipment or while in direct
contact with wastewater.
5. Do not leave tools, equipment and materials where they
could create a safety hazard.
6. Adequate lighting should be provided for night work and in
areas with limited existing lighting.
7. Ice conditions in winter require spiked shoes and the sand-
ing of icy areas if the ice cannot be thawed away with wash
water.
8. Remove only sections of handrails, deck plates or grating
necessary for the immediate job. Removed sections should
be properly stored out of the way and properly secured
against falling.
9. Do not walk on top of the oxidation ditch sidewalls; you may
slip and fall into the ditch.
8.3A
8.3B
List the major components of an oxidation ditch treat-
ment process.
Why are the ends of oxidation ditches well rounded?
8.3C Why should operators avoid walking on top of oxidation
ditch sidewalls?
8.32 Start-Up
There are two primary objectives of start-up. One is to make
certain that all mechanical equipment is operating properly.
The second is to develop a proper microbial floe (activated
sludge) in the oxidation ditch. This floe development is essen-
tial for the plant to succeed in reducing the quantities of pollut-
ing materials in the raw wastewater.
The start-up procedures presented here should be used
along with the manufacturer's start-up procedures for all com-
ponents of the plant. The plant operator, the contractor, en-
gineer and equipment manufacturer's representative should all
be present at the start-up.
During start-up of the plant, some construction may still be in
progress. Special care should be given to insure that all safety
procedures are followed at all times.
8.320 Pro-Start Inspection
The inlet structure should be checked for debris and all de-
bris cleaned from the structure prior to start-up.
The ditch structure should be cleaned of all debris prior to
start-up. Check the walkways to insure there are no debris that
can later fall into the channel. Inspect the influent and effluent
lines to be sure that they are free of debris.
If you are preparing to start a rotor that is a new installation,
one that has not been in operation for some time, or one that
has just been overhauled, a thorough inspection check should
be made prior to starting the rotor to prevent damage to the
rotor and injury to personnel.
Rotor check list.
1. The "on-off' switch is "OFF" and locked out.
2. Motor secured to gear reducer.
3. Gear reducer assembly secured to the mounting platform.
4. Rotor cylinder shaft secure to reducer coupling bolts.
5. Rotor blades and teeth secure to the cylinder.
6. Driver, rotor, bearings and stand(s) properly aligned.
7. Rotor turns with a reasonable pull on the cylinder.
8. Rotor anti-rotation screws properly adjusted.
18 FIM rath. Food to microorganism ratio.
Food = BOD, Ibslday
Microorganisms MLVSS, lbs
= Flow, MOD x BOD, mgIL x 8.34 ibalgal
(Ditch Volume, MQ x SS, mg/L x Volatile portion, decimal x 8.34 lbs/gal)
-------
258 Treatment Plants
9. Proper oil type and quantity in the reducer.
10. All bearings greased with the proper lubricant.
11. All lube oil line fittings tight.
12. Gear reducer housing air vent "open."
13. All bolts tight.
14. All tools and foreign material are clear of the rotor assem-
bly.
15. Safety guards over moving parts properly installed and
secure.
Following completion of the pre-start checks, the rotor as-
sembly is ready to start. Be sure all personnel are clear of the
rotor assembly. Turn the main power breaker "ON." The "on-
off" switch should now be positioned to "ON" and the rotor will
start.
If the rotor assembly is part of a new oxidation ditch installa-
tion, the following additional items should be done:
1. Start the rotor(s) with the rotor(s) out of the water.
2. Check and record the motor amperage and voltage on each
phase.
3. Check the rotation of the rotor and run the rotor for at least
one hour (see "bump start" below).
4. Recheck the rotor support bearing(s) and drive alignment
and realign if necessary according to manufacturer's in-
stallation drawings.
5. Tighten all nuts, bolts, and set screws to prepare the rotor
for regular operation.
Check and record the items noted under 8.330, "Normal
Operation, Records, Mechanical."
NOTE: When starting a new or recently overhauled rotor as-
sembly, a "bump start" is recommended BEFORE a
routine full start and run is attempted.
A "bump start" allows operation of the rotor assembly
for 2 to 3 seconds and is accomplished by briefly posi-
tioning the "on-off" switch to "ON" and immediately
returning it to the "OFF" position.
This short run-time will allow you to determine if the
rotor assembly operates freely and properly, operates
in the proper rotation, and will avoid extensive damage
to the rotor assembly if it is not properly installed.
Make sure the adjustable weir operates freely and does not
bind. Set the weir at the proper elevation in accordance with O
& M manual or manufacturer's instructions.
The clarifier structure and piping should be inspected and
cleared of all debris. All control gates and valves should be
checked for smooth operation and proper seating. Refer to
Chapter 5, "Sedimentation and Flotation," for proper clarifier
start-up procedures.
The return sludge and waste sludge systems should be ex-
amined for leakage and all valves should be operated one
complete cycle and set for normal operation. Pumps should be
manually operated with liquid in them to check proper opera-
tion. One pump should be operated and checked for vibration,
excess noise, overheating and the amperage reading record.
The same procedure should then be repeated for the second
pump with the first pump shut off. If your plant has waste
sludge treatment facilities (holding tanks, lagoons or drying
beds), operate the necessary valves to allow pumping to this
part of the plant. Operate each pump manually and note the
discharge. Shut both pumps off and return the valves to the
normal flow position for returning the settled sludge back to the
oxidation ditch.
8.321 Plant Start-Up
Start to fill ditch with water or wastewater. If possible, add a
water tank or two full of healthy seed activated sludge from a
nearby plant. Divert all wastewater to be treated into ditch. If
ditch was initially filled with wastewater and one or two days
were required to fill the ditch during hot weather, odor prob-
lems could develop. Start rotors when water level reaches bot-
tom of rotor blades.
During plant start-up, a dark gray color of the developing
MLSS may be seen. A dark gray color usually indicates a lack
of bacterial build-up in the mixed liquor. If this condition con-
tinues for more than several days, check your return sludge
system to see that it is operating properly.
Once the water reaches the rotors, do not start discharging
to the clarifier. Allow the wastewater to continue to fill the ditch
and to be treated. When the water level approaches the
maximum submergence of the rotors and the peak motor load,
then start allowing some of the water to be discharged to the
clarifier. During start up an unstable clarifier effluent may result
due to the inadequate biological treatment. As this effluent is
generally the discharged product (as final effluent), chlorina-
tion is to be used to reduce health hazards on the receiving
waters during this time. State regulatory agencies should be
contacted to insure that the receiving waters will not be harmed
as a result of heavily chlorinating the plant effluent.
During the period of start-up, wastewater testing procedures
should be initiated as soon as possible. The actual flow rates
should be recorded and also the incoming BOD and COD
levels.
Building up of the MLSS concentration is the most important
activity during the start-up process. At least three and possibly
up to fifteen days are required to build up the MLSS concentra-
tion. In the event the actual MLSS concentration cannot be
determined on a daily basis you should at least record daily the
results of the 30-minute sludge settleability tests. See Section
8.26, "Laboratory Testing." During this period, maintain the
highest possible return activated sludge rate.
Dissolved oxygen (DO) should be taken at a sampling loca-
tion approximately 15 feet (4.5 m) upstream from the rotor.
Until the desired MLSS concentration is reached and the 30-
minute sludge settleability volume reaches 20 percent, a
minimum DO concentration of 2.0 mg/L should be kept in the
ditch. Following this period, a lesser DO concentration may be
desired, but never less than 0.5 mg/L at a point 15 feet (4.5 m)
upstream of the rotors.
Following start-up, when the plant has stabilized, the solids
should settle rapidly in the clarifier leaving a clear, odorless
and stable effluent. The solids should look like the particles,
golden to rich dark brown in color, with sharply defined edges.
You should not expect immediate results from the start-up
procedures. Plant start-up takes time, sometimes over a month
if a "seed" activated sludge from another treatment plant is not
available. Also, some conditions may occur during start up that
would, under normal conditions, indicate a poorly operating
process such as light foaming in the ditch or a cloudy super-
natant in the settleable solids tests. These conditions should
only be temporary if the information in this section is applied
properly.
-------
Activated Sludge 259
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 270.
8.3D What are the two primary objectives of start-up?
8.3E What items or structures should be inspected during
the pre-start inspection?
8.3F During plant start-up, when should the rotors be
started?
8.3G When an oxidation ditch is operating properly, how
should the activated sludge solids appear?
8.33 Operation
8.330 Normal Operation
Process controls and operations of an oxidation ditch are
similar to the activated sludge process. To obtain maximum
performance efficiency, the following control methods must be
maintained:
1. Proper food supply (measured as BOD or COD) for the
microorganisms;
2. Proper DO levels in the oxidation ditch;
3. Proper ditch environment (no toxicants, and sufficient mi-
croorganisms to treat the wastes);
4. Proper ditch detention time to treat the wastes by control of
the adjustable weir; and
5. Proper water/solids separation in the clarifier.
Proper food supply for the microorganisms
Influent flows and waste characteristics are subject to limited
control by the operator. Municipal ordinances may prohibit dis-
charge to the collection system of materials damaging to
treatment structures or human safety. Control over wastes
dumped into the collection system requires inspection to insure
compliance. Alternate means of disposal, pretreatment, or con-
trolled discharge of significantly damaging wastes may be re-
quired in order to permit dilution to an acceptable level by the
time the waste arrives at the treatment plant. Refer to Chapter
27, "Industrial Waste Monitoring," for waste discharge control
methods.
Proper DO levels
Proper operation of the process depends on the rotor as-
sembly supplying the right amount of oxygen to the waste flow
in the ditch. For the best operation, a DO concentration of 0.5
to 2.0 mgIL should be maintained just upstream (15 feet or 4.5
m) of the rotors. Over-oxygenation wastes power and exces-
sive DO levels can cause a pinpoint floe to form which does not
settle and is lost over the weir in the settling tank. Control of
rotor oxygenation is achieved by adjusting the ditch outlet level
control weir.
The level or elevation of the rotors is fixed but the deeper the
rotors sit in the water, the greater the transfer of oxygen from
the air to the water (greater DO). The ditch outlet level control
weir regulates the level of water in the oxidation ditch.
Proper environment
The oxidation ditch process with its long-term aeration basin
is designed to carry MLSS concentrations of 2,000 to 5,000
mgIL. This provides a large organism mass in the system.
Performance of the ditch and ditch environment can be
evaluated by conducting a few simple tests and general obser-
vations. The color and characteristics of the floe in the ditch as
well as the clearness of effluent should be observed and re-
corded daily. Typical tests are settleable solids, DO upstream
of the rotor, pH and residual chlorine in the plant effluent.
These test procedures are outlined in Chapter 16, Laboratory
Procedures and Chemistry." Periodically laboratory tests such
as BOD, COD, suspended solids, volatile solids, total solids
and microscopic examinations should be performed by the
plant operator or an outside laboratory. The results will aid you
in determining the actual operating efficiency and performance
of the process.
Oxidation ditch solids are controlled by regulating the return
sludge rate and waste sludge rate. Remember that solids con-
tinue to deteriorate as long as they remain in the clarifier. Ad-
just the return sludge rate to return the microorganisms in a
healthy condition from the final settling tank to the oxidation
ditch. If dark solids appear in the settling tank, either the return
sludge rate should be increased (solids remaining too long in
clarifier) or the DO levels are too low in the oxidation ditch.
Adjusting the waste sludge rate regulates the solids concen-
tration (number of microorganisms) in the oxidation ditch. If the
surface of the ditch has a white, crisp foam, reduce the sludge
wasting rate. If the surface has a thick, dark foam, increase the
wasting rate. Waste activated sludge may be removed from
the ditch by pumping to a sludge holding tank, to sludge drying
beds, to sludge lagoons or to a tank truck. Ultimate disposal
may be to larger treatment plants or to approved sanitary land-
fills.
Remember that this is a biological treatment process and
several days may be required before the process responds to
operation changes. Make your changes slowly, be patient and
observe and record the results. Allow seven or more days for
the process to stabilize after making a change. For additional
information on the regulation of the process, see Section 8.26,
"Laboratory Testing," which discusses the use of the settling
test for operational control. For more details on controlling the
activated sludge process, see Volume II, Chapter 11.
Proper treatment time
Treatment time is directly related to the flow of wastewater.
Velocities in the ditch should be maintained between 1.0 to 1.5
feet per second (0.3 to 0.45 m/sec). With this in mind, the ditch
contents should travel the complete circuit of the ditch, or from
rotor to rotor, every 3 to 6 minutes.
Proper water/solids separation
MLSS which have entered and settled in the secondary
clarifier are continuously removed from the clarifier as return
sludge, by pump, for return to the oxidation ditch. Usually all
sludge formed by the process and settled in the clarifier is
returned to tne ancn. except when wasting sludge. Scum which
is captured on the surface of the clarifier also is removed from
the clarifier and either returned to the oxidation ditch for further
treatment or disposed of by burial.
Observations
Some aspects of the operation of your oxidation ditch plant
can be controlled and adjusted with the help of some general
observations. General observations of the plant are important
to help you determine whether or not your oxidation ditch is
operating as intended. These observations include color of the
mixed liquor in the ditch, odor at the plant site and clarity of the
ditch and sedimentation tank surfaces.
COLOR. You should note the color of the mixed liquor in the
ditch daily. A properly operating oxidation ditch plant mixed
liquor should have a medium to rich dark brown color. If the
-------
260 Treatment Plants
MLSS, following proper start-up, changes color from a dark
brown to aiight brown and the MLSS appear to^e WnnerThan
UsfereT the sludge waste rate may be too high which may
cause the plant to lose efficiency in removing waste materials.
By decreasing sludge waste rates before the color lightens too
hractCyou can insure thai the" plant effluent quality will riot
deteriorate due to low MLSS concentrations.
t If the MLSS becomes black, the ditch is not receiving
enough oxygen and has gone "anaerobic." The oxygen output
of the rotors must be increased to eliminate the black color and
return the process to normal aerobic operation. This is done by
increasing the submergence level of the rotor.
ODOR. When the oxidation ditch plant is operating properly,
there will be little or no odor. Odor, if detected, should have an
earthy smell. If an odor other than this is present, you should
check and determine the cause. Odor similar to rotten eggs
indicates that the ditch may be going anaerobic, requiring more
oxygen. The color of the MLSS could be black if this were the
case.
Odor may also be a sign of poor housekeeping. Grease and
solids buildup on the edge of the ditch or sedimentation tank
will go anaerobic and cause odors. With an oxidation ditch,
odors are much more often caused by poor housekeeping than
poor operation.
CLARITY. In a properly operating oxidation ditch a "layer" of
"clear" water or supernatant is usually visible a few feet up-
stream from the rotor. The depth of this relatively clear water
may vary from almost nothing to as much as two or more
inches (5 cm) above the mixed liquor.
Two other good indications of a properly operating oxidation
ditch are the clarity of the settling tank water surface and the
oxidation ditch surface free of foam buildup. Foam buildup in
the ditch (normally not enough to be a nuisance) is usually
caused by an insufficient MLSS concentration. Most frequently
foam buildup is only seen during plant start-up and will gradu-
ally disappear.
Clarity of the effluent from the secondary clarifier discharged
over the weirs is the best indication of plant performance. A
very clear effluent shows that the plant is achieving excellent
pollutant removals. A cloudy effluent often indicates a problem
with the plant operation.
RECORDS. Daily, or as scheduled, the items listed below
should be checked and a record made of these checks. Accu-
rate records are essential and invaluable in evaluating rotor
efficiency and in establishing normal operating conditions.
Check:
M«chanlcal
1. Motor
2. Motor
3. Motor
4. Motor
ITEM
CONDITION
High or uneven amperage
High temperature
Unusual noise
Operating hours
5. Gear reducer
6. Gear reducer
7. Gear reducer housing
8. Outboard bearing
9. Rotor
10. Rotor
Operation
11. DO concentrations
12. Ditch velocity
13. Ditch water level
14. Ditch surface condition
Unusual bearing or gear noise
Proper oil level via sight glass
or dip stick
Air vent pipe "open"
Unusual bearing noise
Unusual noise or vibration
Remove any debris caught in
rotor blades such as rags,
weeds, or plastic goods.
Use portable DO probe or per-
form Winkler lab test. DO
should be taken approxi-
mately 1,5 feet (4.5 mi UP-
STREAM of the rptoiXsL-Mairu
"tain O.iT to "2.0 tng/1 at this
'point.
1.0 to 1.5 fps (0.3 to 0.45 mps)
Read staff gage in ditch. Con-
vert this reading to brush
aerator submergence.
Neither white foam nor a
heavy brown scum
2,000 to 5,000 mg!L
15. Mixed Liquor Suspended
Solids concentration
(MLSS)
FINAL PLANT SURVEY. Before leaving for the day, one final
inspection should be made around the plant. The following
questions may help in seeing that you have left the plant in a
condition so that it will be operating properly the next time it is
attended.
1. Are there any pieces of equipment that are operating poorly
that may have to be checked before the next scheduled day
of operator attendance (hot bearings, loose belts)?
2. Are return sludge rates set at the correct level?
3. Are flowmeters clean and operating?
4. Are inlet gates set properly in case of high flows?
5. Has the rotor level of submergence been set properly?
6. If some equipment is time-clock controlled, are the time
clocks set?
7. If remote alarms are used to warn someone about equip-
ment failures, are these set properly?
8. Is equipment stored and locked so as to prevent van-
dalism?
9. Are outside lights on or set to come on?
Performance
Figure 8.12 shows the performance of an actual oxidation
ditch.
-------
INFLUENT BOD
INFLUENTSS
EFFLUENT BOD
EFFLUENT SS
DESIGN FLOW 1.3 MGD
JANUARY
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
Fig. 8.12 Actual performance of an oxidation ditch
-------
262 Treatment Plants
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 270.
8.3H How is the DO in the oxidation ditch regulated?
8.31 What should be the velocity in the ditch?
8.3J What observations should be made daily to help indi-
cate the performance of the oxidation ditch?
8.331 Abnormal Operation
In making the routine checks that are noted under Section
8.330, "Normal Operation, Records, Mechanical," you may
occasionally find some conditions to be abnormal. Serious
damage to the rotor assembly may result if the abnormal condi-
tion^) are not corrected as soon as possible.
Rotor assembly operation is ESSENTIAL for the efficient op-
eration of the oxidation ditch. Loss of rotor-generated mixing
and air entrainment to the mixed liquor in the ditch for an
extended period of time will turn your oxidation ditch activated
sludge process into an upset, bulking activated sludge pro-
cess.
Listed in Table 8.2 are some abnormal conditions, possible
causes, and your response to the conditions that will aid you in
the safe and efficient operation of the rotor.
Environmental factors that affect the wastewater treatment
process include temperature and precipitation. The wastewa-
ter temperature affects the activity of the microorganisms. Dur-
ing cold weather this reduced activity might lower the efficiency
of the treatment system. Besides biological effects of tempera-
ture, the flocculation and sedimentation of the mixed liquor
solids is not as effective at lower temperatures,
Ice buildup will hinder or stop altogether the proper operation
of mechanical parts such as rotors and sludge scraper
mechanisms. Chunks of ice may develop that float in the ditch
and eventually enter the area of the rotor assembly. Unless
adequate safeguards are provided, serious damage to the
rotor WILL result. Some of the safeguards that MUST be con-
sidered are:
1. The oxidation ditch in cold weather areas SHOULD BE
OPERATED FOR THE MAXIMUM DETENTION TIME
PRACTICAL in order to conserve as much heat in the
wastewater as possible. This action will inhibit ice chunk
formation.
2. The splashing and/or spraying action produced by the rotor
will allow ice to form on the rotor assembly, Serious consid-
eration must be given to covering the whole rotor assembly
with a structure made of wood, fiberglass or other suitable
material that will bridge over the ditch. Installations of this
type generally are not heated.
NOTE: If it is necessary to shut the rotor "OFF" for mainte-
nance, ICE WILL FORM ON THE ROTOR. Prior to
restarting the rotor, hose it off with water to thaw the
ice. Otherwise the ice could cause vibrations that
can damage the rotor.
CAUTION: Ice conditions in winter require spiked shoes
and sanding icy areas if the ice cannot be thawed
away with wash water.
In some treatment plants, very heavy rains or snow melts
cause flows to the treatment plant to exceed three to four times
design flow. This is generally accompanied by a weaker
wastewater in terms of BOD and COD due to the dilution effect
of the stormwater. These hydraulic overloads may exceed the
capacity of the clarifier to settle sludge solids properly. When
this occurs, extremely high BOD, COD and suspended solids
concentrations will be discharged to the receiving stream in the
final effluent and possible process upsets can occur if correc-
tive action is not taken. Chemicals such as alum, ferric
chloride, and polymers can be added to the final settling tank to
assist in settling solids during abnormal conditions. When
chemicals such as alum are used, the volume of return sludge
is increased and the pH of the sludge may be reduced.
Another method of preventing hydraulic overloads from
causing this discharge of high BOD, COD and suspended sol-
ids concentrations is to shut down one or more rotor as-
semblies in the ditch. This will allow the ditch to act as a large
settling tank, keeping the MLSS from flowing into the clarifier
where they could be washed out. When the plant flow de-
creases to more normal levels, the rotor(s) can then be re-
started to resume normal operation.
Other than the above corrective actions, without plant mod-
ifications there is not much the operator can do to offset the
changes in treatment efficiency caused by temperature
changes and high flows during abnormal conditions. However,
ice buildup can be controlled by frequent observation and re-
moval during cold periods. For persistent cold weather prob-
lems, construction of a LIGHTWEIGHT building over the ditch
and clarifier may be more economical in the long run than
fighting ice. The normal wastewater temperature will generally
supply sufficient heat inside a building to prevent ice from form-
ing.
Usually it is necessary to vary the amoung of MLSS in the
ditch as seasons change. Because the microorganisms are not
as active in winter at low temperatures, the MLSS will need to
be higher in the winter than in the summer if complete nitrifica-
tion is desired.
8.332 Shutdown
Shutdown of the oxidation ditch may be necessary for
emergency repairs. Try to schedule any shutdowns so the ac-
tivated sludge microorganisms will be without air for the
shortest possible time period. Problems such as odors and a
loss of the microorganism culture can start within two hours
after the rotors have been shut off. The microorganism culture
may start to deteriorate within 10 minutes, but can recover
quickly if the down time does not exceed four hours. If possi-
ble, try to keep one rotor operating at all times.
Shutdown of the rotor assembly is required when any main-
tenance function is performed to prevent injury to personnel.
a. Turn the "on-off" switch to "OFF."
b. Turn the main power breaker "OFF."
c. Lock-out and tag the main power breaker in the "OFF"
position.
Maintenance work may now be performed.
If the oxidation ditch treats seasonal loads and is shut down
during the off-season, protect equipment from the weather and
moisture.
8.333 Troubleshooting
Refer to Section 8.252, "Troubleshooting." The problems of
package aeration plants and the solutions are very similar to
those of oxidation ditches.
If floatables appear in the final settling tank, examine the
baffle around the level control weir. Since oxidation ditches do
not have primary clarifiers, plastic goods and other floatables
-------
Activated Sludge 263
TABLE 8.2 ABNORMAL BRUSH ROTOR OPERATION
ITEM
ABNORMAL CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
OPERATOR RESPONSE
Motor
Motor "off"
Ambient temperature in
switchboard panel or room
too high.
Reduce temperature with
fans.
Degree of rotor submer-
gence results in exces-
sive amperage draw.
Adjust rotor submergence.
Motor shorted or burned
out.
Check for overloading.
Repair motor.
Motor "hot" to the
touch
Dry bearings.
Lubricate bearings
Excessive grease.
Remove grease and grease
properly.
Worn bearings.
Excessive amperage draw
(motor load).
Replace bearings.
Adjust rotor submergence.
Gear Reducer
Grinding, chipping,
whirring or whining
noise
Low oil level.
Drain and/or refill.
Check for leakage and
make repairs.
Gear drive part(s) par-
tially or totally worn.
Replace worn parts.
Bearings
Grinding or bumping
noise
Insufficient bearing
grease.
Grease bearing(s)
routinely.
Worn bearing(8).
Replace bearing(s)
-------
264 Treatment Plants
can be a problem if the baffle is not properly adjusted.
8.334 Operational Strategy
Refer to Section 8.254, "Operational Strategy." The items
considered in the operational strategy for package aeration
plants are the same as those considered for oxidation ditches.
8.34 Maintenance
8.340 Housekeeping
A general cleanup each day at the plant is important. This
not only gives you a more pleasant place to work, but also
helps your plant perform better.
Daily cleanup usually includes removing and burying of de-
bris that rn^Traver^Ccuffiuiated on the bar screen; removaTof
grease and scum from the surface of the clarifier and
washdown or brushing down the ditch and clarifier weirs and
walls.
8.341 Equipment Maintenance
Regularly scheduled equipment maintenance must be per-
formed. As boring as some equipment manufacturer's instruc-
tional books may be, READ THEM\ Learn what they say. You
should check each piece of equipment daily to see that it is
functioning properly. You may have very few mechanical de-
vices in your oxidation ditch plant, but they are all important.
The rotors and pumps should be inspected to see that they are
operating properly. If pumps are clogged, the obstructions
should be removed. Listen for unusual noises. Check for loose
bolts. Uncovering a mechanical problem in its early stages
could prevent a costly repair or replacement at a later date.
Lubrication should also be performed with a fixed operating
schedule and properly recorded. Follow the lubrication and
maintenance instructions furnished with each piece of equip-
ment. If you are unable to find the instructions, write to the
manufacturer for a new set. Make sure that the proper lubri-
cants are used. Over-lubrication is wasteful and reduces the
effectiveness of lubricant seals and may cause overheating of
bearings or gears.
Painting should be done periodically. In addition to beautify-
ing your plant, it gives a good protective coating on all iron
and/or metal surfaces and will prolong the life of the metal.
NEVER PAINT OVER equipment identification tags! You will
regret it if you do.
You should make it your business to know the manufacturer
of every piece of equipment in your plant. Knowing the manu-
facturer and how to quickly contact the manufacturer may save
important time and money when equipment breakdowns oc-
cur.
1. Motors (See Chapter 15, "Maintenance," for additional de-
tails.)
Motors should be greased after about 2,000 hours of opera-
tion or as often as conditions and/or the manufacturer recom-
mends. The motor must be stopped when greasing begins.
Remove the filler and drain plugs, free the grease holes of
any hardened grease, add new grease through the filler hole
until it starts to come out of the drain hole. Start the motor and
let it run for about 15 minutes to expel any excess grease. Stop
the motor and install the filler and drain plugs.
Rotor assembly motors are generally very much exposed to
a high degree of moisture. For this reason the motor should be
checked at least yearly by an electrician to be sure all parts are
in good, working condition.
2. Gear Reducer
Generally all new oil-lubricated equipment has a "break-in"
period of about 400 hours. After this time the oil should be
drained from the gear reducer, the unit flushed and new oil
added. This procedure removes fine metal particles that have
worn off the internal components as a result of the initial close
tolerances as the equipment was "breaking-in." If large quan-
tities of fine metal particles are found after the "break-in"
period, the manufacturer should be consulted.
A high quality turbine-type oil is normally used in the gear
reducer assembly. Frequency of oil change is after about
1,400 hours of operation under normal service conditions.
3. Bearings
a. Gear Reducer Bearings
These bearings are generally greased twice per week
WHILE THE ROTOR ASSEMBLY IS IN OPERATION to insure
proper distribution of the lubricant.
Extension tubes or pipes are usually attached to the bearing
cap. A grease fitting is then installed on the other end of the
tube or pipe. This allows for safety when greasing the bearings
while the rotor is operating by extending the grease fitting away
from the hazardous area of the operating rotor. This grease
fitting modification may be used in other equipment applica-
tions where lubrication of running equipment would present a
safety hazard.
b. Rotor Intermediate and Outboard Bearings
These bearings are generally lubricated DAILY WHILE THE
ROTOR ASSEMBLY IS IN OPERATION.
In most bearing lubrication applications, over-lubrication is
wasteful and reduces the effectiveness of lubricant seals and
may cause overheating of bearings. Rotor intermediate and
outboard bearings ARE GENERALLY THE EXCEPTION. As a
rule, these bearings cannot be over-lubricated.
Some rotor bearings are protected by neoprene seals which
retain lubricant and keep out moisture. The rotor shaft may
have "slingers" near the bearing and a detachable shield may
cover the bearing. Be sure you do not over-lubricate and de-
stroy the seals.
4. Lubrication
Lubrication of this equipment in locations that have extreme
weather variations is critical. Oil and grease must be changed
with the proper type and grade, for the expected weather con-
ditions, as determined by the equipment manufacturer.
NOTE: The proper type and grade of oil is a necessity. If it is
too thin or too thick it will interfere with proper function-
ing of bearings and gears.
Bearing grease changes may be accomplished by flushing
the grease housing with a 30 to 90 weight oil. The oil is added
in the same manner as the grease.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 270.
8.3K What problems can be caused by ice during cold
weather?
8.3L Why are more microorganisms (higher MLSS) needed
in the ditch during cold weather than during warm
weather?
8.3M Why is a general cleartup each day at the plant impor-
tant?
-------
Activated Sludge 265
8.35 Operational Guidelines
8.350 English System
Section 8.301, "Description of Oxidation Ditches," lists op-
erational guidelines for an oxidation ditch plant. This section
outlines the procedures for you to follow to calculate the
guidelines for your oxidation ditch. The first step is to draw a
sketch of your oxidation ditch, to obtain the important dimen-
sions, and to record the appropriate flow and wastewater
characteristics.
1. Oxidation ditch dimensions
a.
Length, ft
= 200 ft
b.
Bottom, ft
= 8ft
c.
Height, ft
= 8ft
d.
Depth, ft
= 4ft
e.
Radius, ft
= 28 ft
f.
Slope
= 2
3)
l'MO FT.
2. Flow and waste characteristics
a. Flow, MGD, = 0.2 MGD
b. BOD, mg/L = 200 mg/L
c. Infl. SS, mg/L = 200 mg/L
d. MLSS, mg/L = 4,000 mg/L
e
Volatile Matter
in MLSS
= 70%
3. Calculate oxidation ditch volume in cubic feet and million
gallons.
a. Determine cross-sectional area.
Find average width of water in ditch, W in feet.
D
S
4ft
W, ft
= B
Area, sqft
= 8 ft +
2
= 8 ft + 2ft
= 10 ft
= WD
= 10ft x 4ft
= 40 sq ft
b. Determine the center line length of the ditch. Find the
length around the two ends.
Ends, L, ft
Total L, ft
= 2 7T R
= 2 x 3.14 x 28 ft
= 178 ft
= Ends L, ft + 2 L, ft
= 178 ft + 2 x 200 ft
— 578 ft
c. Calculate ditch volume.
Vol, cu ft = Length, ft x Area, sq ft
= 578 ft x 40 sq ft
= 23,120 cu ft
= 23.12 (1,000 cu ft)(read as 23.12 one
thousand cubic feet)
Vol, gal = 23,120 cu ft x 7.48 gal/cu ft
= 172,940 gal
= 0.173 MG
4. Calculate the BOD loading in pounds BOD per day and
pounds BOD per day per 1000 cu ft of ditch volume.
BOD Loading, = Flow, MGD x BOD, mg/L x 8.34 lbs/gal
lbs/day
= 0.2 MGD x 200 mg/L x 8.34
= 334 lbs BOD/day
BOD Loading, = BOD, lbs/day
?SKuft " Ditch Vol., 1,000 cu ft
334 lbs/day
23.12- (1,000 cu ft)
= 14 lbs BOD/day/1,000 cu ft
Remember that 1 liter = 1,000,000 mg and that
lbs _ lbs
gal day
lbs _ Mil. Gal w mg
x x
day
day Mil. mg
5. Determine the Food/Microorganism Ratio
a. Microorganisms are measured as pounds of Mixed
Liquor Volatile Suspended Solids under aeration in the
oxidation ditch. VM means Volatile Matter.
MLVSS, Km = Vol.. MG x MLSS, mg/L x VM x 8.34 lbs/gal
- 0.173 MG x 4,000 mg/L x 0.70 x 8.34 Iba/gal
= 4,040 Ibe
b. Calculate F/M Ratio
F = BOD, lbs/day
M MLVSS, lbs
_ 334 lbs BOD/day
4,040 lbs MLVSS
= 0.08 lbs BOD/day/lb MLVSS
6. Determine the Sludge Age, days.
a. Calculate pounds of solids under aeration
= Vol., MG x MLSS, mg/L x 8.34 lbs/gal
= 0.173 MG x 4,000 mg/L x 8.34 lbs/gal
= 5,770 lbs
b. Calculate solids fed to ditch, lbs/day
< Flow, MGD x Infl. SS, mg/L x 8.34 Iba/gal
Aeration
Solids, lbs
Solids
Added, fca/day
¦ 0.2 MGD x 200 mg/L x 8.34 be/gal
¦ 334 fca/day
-------
266 Treatment Plants
c. Calculate Sludge Age, days
Solids Under Aeration, lbs
Sludge Age,
Days
Solids Added, lbs/day
5,770 lbs
334 lbs/day
= 17 days
Calculate ditch detention time, hours.
Detention Time,
hours
_ Ditch Volume, MG x 24 hr/day
Flow, MGD
_ 0.173 MG x 24 hr/day
0.2 MGD
= 20.8 hours
8.351 Metric System
This section will show you how to calculate operational
criteria using the metric system. To start you must collect the
same basic information.
d
1. Oxidation ditch dimensions.
a. Length, m = 60 meters
b. Bottom, m = 2.5 meters
c. Height, m = 2.5 meters
d. Depth, m = 1.2 meters
e. Radius, m = 9 meters
KCWN
f. Slope = 2
2. Flow and waste characteristics.
a. Flow, cu m/day = 750 cu m/day
b. BOD, mgIL = 200 mgIL
c. Infl., SS, mg/L = 200 mgIL
d. MLSS, mg/L = 4,000 mg/L
e. Volatile Matter
in MLSS = 70%
3. Calculate oxidation ditch volume in cubic meters,
a. Determine cross-sectional area.
Find average width of water in ditch, w in meters.
W, m =B + 2
S
5)
«IM
»ium
: 2.5 m +
1.2 m
= 3.1 m
Area, sq m = W D
= 3.1 m x 1.2 m
= 3.72 sq m
b. Determine the center length of the ditch. Find the length
around the two ends.
Ends L, m = 2 w R
= 2 x 8.14 x 9 m
= 56.5 m
Total L, m = Ends L, m + 2 L, m
= 65.5 m + 2 x 60 m
= 176.5 m
c. Calculate ditch volume.
Vol, cu m = Length, m x Area, sq i
= 176.5 m x 8.72 sq m
= 657 cu m
= 0.657 (1,000 cu m)(read as
one thousand cubic meters)
4. Calculate the BOD loading in kg BOD per day and kg BOD
per day per 1,000 cu m of ditch volume.
BOD Loading, _ F,0Wi cujr, x BQD mg y 1 kg
kg/day
day
1000 L
1,000,000 mg 1 cu m
1 kg
1000 L
1 cu m
= 750 cu m x 200 HIS x.
day L 1,000,000 mg
= 150 kg BOD/day
BOD Loading _ BOD, kg/day
VOOOcu m Ditch Volume, 1,000 cum
150 kg/day
0.657 (1,000 cum)
= 228 kg BOD/day/1,000 cu m
5. Determine the Food/Microorganism Ratio.
a. Calculate kilograms of MLVSS under aeration in the
oxidation ditch
MLVSS, = Vol, cu m x MLSS, x VM x 1 k9
kg
x 1,000 L
L 1,000,000 mg 1 cu m
= 657 cu m x 4,000 m9xn7Qx 1 k9 y 1.000L
L 1,000,000 mg 1 cu m
= 1, 840 kg
b. Calculate F/M Ratio
F = BOD, kg/day
M MLVSS, kg
= 150 kg BOD/day
1,840 kg MLVSS
= 0.08 kg BOD/day/kg MLVSS
6. Determine the Sludge Age, days.
a. Calculate kilogram of solids under aeration
Aeration
Solids, kg
= Vol, cu m x MLSS, mg/L x
1 kg
y 1,000 L
1,000,000 mg 1 cu m
= 657 cu m x 4,000 mg/L x
1 kg 1,000 L
1,000,000 mg 1 cu m
= 2,628 kg
-------
Activated Sludge 267
b. Calculate solids fed to ditch, kg/day
k^day^^' = Flow' CU m/day X lnfl' SS' m9/L *
1 kg
1,000 L
1,000,000 mg 1 cu m
= 750 cu m/day x 200 mg/L x
1 kg
1,000 L
1,000,000 mg 1 cu m
= 150 kg/day
c. Calculate Sludge Age, days
Sludge Age, = Solids Under Aeration, kg
Days Solids Added, kg/day
= 2,628 Kgs
150 kg/day
= 17.5 days
7. Calculate ditch detention time, hours.
Detention _ Ditch Volume, cu m x 24 hr/day
Time' hours Flow, cu m/day
_ 657 cu m x 24 hr/day
750 cu m/day
= 21 hours
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 271.
8.3N Determine the BOD loading on an oxidation ditch in:
1. Pounds of BOD/day; and
2. Kilograms of BOD/day.
The inflow is 0.8 MGD and the influent BOD is 250
mg/L.
1 MGD = 3,785 cu m/day
8.4 REVIEW OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
As an operator you can be very helpful to design engineers
in pointing out some design features that would make your job
easier. This section indicates some of the items that you
should look for when reviewing plans and specifications for
expansion of existing or construction of new package plants
and oxidation ditches.
8.40 Package Plants
1. Is the plant designed for implementation of modifications
to the activated sludge process (adequate flexibility to ac-
commodate future treatment requirements)?
2. Are adequate standby units (equipment) designed into the
system?
3. Are ladders and walkways provided to allow easy access
to equipment, pipes, and valves for normal operation,
routine maintenance or repair?
4. Are adequate remote and local controls provided for the
mechanical equipment?
5. Is the equipment and related instrumentation designed to
operate at low flows and loads common in the early stages
of plant operation?
6. Are adequate dewatering systems provided to permit
rapid servicing of submerged equipment?
7. Is the chlorination facility flexible enough to allow for pre-
chlorination or return activated sludge chlorination and are
adequate control devices provided?
8. Is the treatment plant's total connected horsepower
adequate to allow operation of all equipment in parallel?
9. Are flow equalization facilities provided to handle high
flows during wet weather or industrial discharges?
10. Is adequate support equipment provided to allow easy and
safe removal of aeration diffusers?
11. Is a laboratory provided with appropriate equipment for
conducting at least minimum process control tests?
12. Are adequate sludge drying beds provided with considera-
tion given to wet weather conditions?
13. Is a sludge transfer pump provided to transfer sludge to
the drying beds?
14. Are the beds designed for easy removal of dried sludge
and are there provisions for proper disposal of the sludge?
15. Is there a provision for waste or digested sludge liquid
storage in lieu of or addition to sludge drying beds?
16. Is standby or auxiliary power provided?
8.41 Oxidation Ditches
1. Influent and return activated sludge fed to aeration reactor
should be located just upstream of a rotor assembly to
afford immediate mixing with mixed liquor in the channel.
2. Effluent from the aeration channel should be upstream of
the rotor and far enough upstream from the injection of the
influent and return activated sludge to prevent short-
circuiting.
3. Water level in the aeration channel should be controlled by
an adjustable weir. In calculating weir length, use
maximum raw flow plus maximum recirculated flow to pre-
vent excessive rotor immersions.
4. Walkways must be provided across the aeration channel
to provide access to the rotor for maintenance. The normal
location is upstream of the rotor. Location should be such
to prevent spray from the rotor on the walkway.
5. Horizontal baffles, placed within 15 feet (4.5 m)
downstream of the rotor should be used on all basins with
water depths over 6 feet (1.8 m) to provide proper mixing
of the entire depth of the basin.
6. In a single oxidation ditch or aeration channel, the rotor
drive assembly should be on the outboard side for ease of
access.
7. The ditch should be constructed with some type of lining.
Consideration should be given to the most economical
means of lining available in the particular plant location. As
typical liners, consideration could be given to gunite or
shotcrete, poured concrete or earthen walls, asphalt, or
precast concrete or tile.
8. All drive and gear assemblies should be elevated out of
the water and safe and easy access should be provided
for maintenance.
9. Standby or auxiliary power must be provided to operate
critical equipment.
-------
268 Treatment Plants
10. Floating aerators and related equipment should be pro-
vided in case of rotor failure in order to maintain adequate
treatment.
11. Secondary clarifier.
a. Surface Rate: 600 gal/day/sq ft (24 cu m/day/sq m)
based upon plant design flow. Where wide variations
in plant hydraulic loading are expected, care should
be taken to limit maximum instantaneous surface rate
to 1200 gal/day/sq ft (49 cu m/day/sq m).
b. Solids Loading: Normal oxidation ditch operation and
surface rates will prevent excessive solids loading to
the final clarifier. However, if complete nitrification is
required 12 months per year, the maximum instan-
taneous solids loading must not exceed 45 Ibs/day/sq
ft (200 kg/day/sq m).
c. Detention Time: Three hours based on plant design
flow. In no case however should the final clarifier have
a side water depth less than eight feet (2.4 m).
12. Effluent disposal.
a. Receiving Stream: The discharge pipe should be lo-
cated where flood water will not flow back into the
plant if there is a power outage or pump failure. Be
sure the outlet in the receiving waters is submerged to
reduce foam and scum problems.
b. Percolation Ditch: Design should be based on a perco-
lation rate of gallons per lineal foot of ditch. Provisions
must be made to prevent blowing sand and/or dirt
from entering the ditch.
13. Winter climates.
a. Provisions should be made to minimize detention
times in order to conserve as much heat as possible in
the wastewater.
b. Is it practical to cover the oxidation ditch? If not, con-
sider a large and a small ditch or a single ditch that
can be modified to use only half its total capacity.
c. Be sure that all equipment requiring normal mainte-
nance be housed and/or heated. This will extend the
useful life of the equipment and facilitates service
work. Changing a gear box, repairing a pipe, or install-
ing electrical components becomes a major task at
very low temperatures.
d. The rotor assembly should be provided with a light-
weight cover to prevent rotor icing.
e. Equip the clarifier with a light-weight tarpaulin to keep
heavy snow out of the clarifier and to reduce freezing
problems.
f. A subsurface disposal pipeline and percolation field
should be provided for effluent disposal in winter
months. A percolation ditch will freeze over in the win-
ter.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 271.
8.4A What provisions should be made to permit rapid servic-
ing of submerged equipment?
8.4B What items would you check when reviewing the loca-
tion of a walkway intended to provide access to the
rotor for maintenance?
8.5 METRIC CALCULATIONS
Refer to Section 8.35, "Operational Guidelines," for metric
calculations.
V OP l&fXM 3 OP
OH AtfiVAtep blWb
-------
Activated Sludge 269
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
(Lesson 3 of 3 Lessons)
Chapter 8. ACTIVATED SLUDGE
Write the answers to these questions in your notebook be-
fore continuing. The question numbering continues from Les-
son 2.
11. What happens to inorganic solids such as grit, sand and
silt that enter an oxidation ditch plant?
12. During plant start-up, what does a dark grey color in the
mixed liquor indicate and what would you do if this condi-
tion persists for more than several days?
13. During plant start-up, when should water be discharged to
the clarifier?
14. How can an operator determine if the sludge wasting rate
should be increased or decreased?
15. What would you do if solids were in the effluent of the final
settling tank during high flows caused by storms or during
high influent solids levels caused by the cleaning of the
collection system sewers?
Please work the objective test next.
SUGGESTED ANSWERS
Chapter 8. ACTIVATED SLUDGE
Answers to questions on page 242.
8.0A The purpose of the activated sludge process in treating
wastewater is to oxidize and remove soluble or finely
divided suspended materials that were not removed by
previous treatment.
8.0B A stablized waste is a waste that has been treated or
decomposed to the extent that, if discharged or re-
leased, its rate and state of decomposition would be
such that the waste would not cause a nuisance or
odors.
8.0C Air is added to the aeration tank in the activated sludge
process to provide oxygen to sustain the living or-
ganisms and for oxidation of wastes to obtain energy for
growth. The application of air also encourages mixing in
the aerator.
8.0D Air requirements increase when the strength (BOD) of
the incoming wastes increases because more food
(wastes) encourages biological activity (reproduction
and respiration).
8.0E Factors that could cause an unsuitable environment for
the activated sludge process in an aeration tank in-
clude:
1. High concentrations of acids, bases, and other toxic
substances.
2. Uneven flows of wastewater that cause overfeeding
or starvation.
3. Failure to supply enough oxygen.
Answers to questions on page 242.
8.1 A Effluent quality requirements may be stated by regula-
tory agencies in terms of percentage removal of wastes
or allowable quantities of wastes that may be dis-
charged.
8.1 B Harmful industrial waste discharges may be regulated
by preventing discharge to the collection system, requir-
ing pretreatment, or controlling the discharge in order to
protect an activated sludge process.
6NP OF AN^WetZ^
fO QV&hWO&b
IN ve&DH
-------
270 Treatment Plants
Answers to questions on page 247.
8.2A A typical package extended aeration plant may have
either two or three compartments. The purpose of each
compartment is:
1. Aeration. Aerate and mix waste to be treated with
activated sludge.
2. Clarification and Settling. Allow activated sludge to
be separated from water being treated. Clarified
effluent leaves plant and settled activated sludge is
returned to aeration tank to treat more wastewater.
3. Aerobic digestion (optional). Treatment of waste ac-
tivated sludge.
8.2B Common characteristics of all package aeration plants
include long solids retention times, high mixed liquor
suspended solids and low food/microorganism ratios.
Answers to questions on page 250.
8.2C Package plants should have cathodic protection to pre-
vent rust, corrosion, and pitting of steel and iron sur-
faces in contact with water, wastewater or soil.
8.2D The valve to the air lift pumps must be closed until the
settling compartment is filled or all of the air will attempt
to flow out the air lifts and no air will flow out the diffus-
es.
8.2E If the water in the aeration compartment was murky or
cloudy and the aeration compartment had a rotten egg
odor (H2S), you should increase the aeration rate.
Answers to questions on page 252.
8.2F A package plant should be visually checked by an
operator every day.
8.2G For best results, in terms of effluent quality, waste
about five percent of the solids each week during warm
weather operation.
8.2H a. If the solids do not settle in the jar, the aeration rate
should be increased.
b. If the solids settle and then float to the surface, the
aeration rate should be reduced a little each day
until the solids settle properly.
Answers to questions on page 253.
8.2I Operators can avoid being injured on the job by avoid-
ing hazardous conditions and using safe procedures.
8.2J If you must work alone, phone your office at regular
intervals and have someone check on you if you fail to
report.
eNP Of
f0 &VfcbT\OWh
IN
Answers to questions on page 257.
8.3A The major components of an oxidation ditch treatment
process include:
1. Oxidation ditch,
2. Rotor,
3. Level control weir,
4. Final settling tank,
5. Return sludge pump, and
6. Excess sludge handling facilities.
8.3B The ends of oxidation ditches are well rounded to pre-
vent eddying and dead areas.
8.3C Operators should avoid walking on top of oxidation
ditch sidewalls to avoid slipping and falling into the
ditch.
Answers to questions on page 259.
8.3D The two primary objectives of start-up are to:
1. Make certain that all mechanical equipment is
operating properly; and
2. Develop a proper microbial floe (activated sludge) in
the oxidation ditch.
8.3E The following items or structures should be inspected
during the pre-start inspection.
1. Inlet structure,
2. Oxidation ditch structure,
3. Rotor,
4. Adjustable weir,
5. Clarifier structure and piping, and
6. Return sludge and waste sludge systems.
8.3F During plant start up, start the rotors when the water
level in the ditch reaches the bottom of the rotors.
8.3G When an oxidation ditch is operating properly, the sol-
ids should look like particles, golden to rich dark brown
in color, with sharply defined edges.
Answers to questions on page 262.
8.3H The DO in the oxidation ditch is regulated by raising or
lowering the ditch outlet level control weir. This weir
controls the level of water in the ditch which in turn
regulates the degree of submergence of the rotors. The
greater the submergence, the more oxygen is trans-
ferred from the air.
8.3I
8.3J
The ditch velocity should be maintained between 1.0
and 1.5 fps (0.3 to 0.45 mps).
Daily observations of ditch color, odors, lack of foam on
the aerator surface and settling tank clarity help indicate
the performance of the oxidation ditch.
Answers to questions on page 264.
8.3K During cold weather ice buildup will hinder or stop al-
together the proper operation of mechanical parts such
as rotors and sludge scraper mechanisms.
8.3L More microorganisms are needed to treat the same
amount of wastes during cold weather than during
warm weather because the colder the water, the less
active the microorganisms.
8.3M A general cleanup each day provides a more pleasant
place to work and also improves plant performance.
-------
Activated Sludge 271
Answers to questions on page 267.
1. BOD Loading, lbs/day
2. BOD Loading, kg/day
8.3N
Known Unknown
Flow, MGD = 0.8 MGD
BOD, mgIL = 250 mgIL
1 MGD = 3,785 cu m/day
1. Determine BOD loading, lbs/day.
BOD Loading, = Flow, MGD x BOD, mgIL x 8.34 lbs/gal
lbs/day
= 0.8 MGD x 250 mg/i. x 8.34 lbs/gal
= 1.668 lbs BOD/day
2. Determine BOD Loading, kg/day.
a. Convert flow from MGD to cubic meters per day.
Flow, cu m/day = Flow, MGD x 3785 cu m/day
1 MGD
_ 0.8 MGD x 3785 cu m/day
1 MGD
= 3028 cu m/day
b. Calculate BOD loading, kg/day
BOD Loading, = Flow, cu m/day x BOD, mgIL
kg/day
1 kg
x 1,000 L
1,000,000 mg 1 cu m
= 3028 cu m/day x 250 mgIL
1 kg
1,000,000 mg
757 kg BOD/day
1,000 L
1 cu m
Answers to questions on page 26$.
8.4A Adequate dewatering systems should be provided to
permit rapid servicing of submerged equipment.
8.4B When reviewing the location of a walkway intended to
provide access to the rotor for maintenance, check:
1. Distance from walkway to rotor,
2. Normal location is upstream from rotor, and
3. Spray from the rotor will not fall on the walkway.
gNP OPAN^IAiefZ^
10 aue^Tioub
IN l&C&DH
-------
272 Treatment Plants
OBJECTIVE TEST
Chapter 8. ACTIVATED SLUDGE
Please write your name and mark the correct answers on the
bnswer sheet as directed at the end of Chapter 1. There may
be more than one correct answer to each question.
QUESTIONS 1 THROUGH 8 ARE MATCHING
DIRECTIONS: Match the word with the correct definition by
marking the number of the definition on the answer sheet op-
posite the number of the word.
EXAMPLE
QUESTIONS
Word Definition
1. Plant Operator 1. Advocate of higher taxes
2. Hard-working water quality protec-
2. Plant Superintendent tor
3. Manager ol athletic program
4. Person in charge of a treatment
plant
5. Uneducated individual
ANSWER SHEET
1.
2.
!1 •
.5
I i I
w\
Wv« I
MATCHING
Word
1. Aliquot^
2. Coning- x
3. Flights^
4. Roc
5. Meniscus
x
6. Orifice^
7. Protozoa*
8. Zoogleal Mass'
Definition
Airline schedule
Bacteria that have come together
and formed a cluster
Caused by sludge when removed
too quickly
Portion of a sample
Scraper boards used to remove
settled sludge to collection hoppers
A group of microscopic animals
found in treatment processes
A thin plate with a hole in the mid-
dle used to measure flow
Jelly-like substances of bacteria
Membranes in the membrane filter
5. The curved top of a column of liquid
in a tube
True-False
9. An activated sludge process is similar to a clarifier pro-
cess.
1. True
v2. False-/
10. Activated sludge contains bacteria, protozoa and rotifers.
1. True J
2. False
11. Secondary clarifiers receive aeration tank effluent.
1. True*/
2. False
12. Secondary clarifier effluent goesCrfrectly to receiving wa-
ters.
1. True
2. False*/
13. Oxygen is necessary for growth of(ir)organic activated
sludge.
1. True
2. False V
14. The operation of a package aeration plant is similar to the
operation of other activated sludge plants.
1. Truex/"
2. False
15. Good treatment of wastewater rarely results from inter-
rupted operation of aeration equipment and should not be
attempted.
Vf. True
2.
16. A white, fluffy foam indicates low solids content in the
aerator, while a brown, leathery foam suggests high solids
concentrations.
1. True*/
2. False
17. Testing of solids condition in an aeration tank may be
accomplished by the settling test.
1. Truei
2. False
18. In the settling test, if the solids settle to the bottom of the
jar with a clear liquor on top and the solids stay down one
hour and come up in two hours, this is an indication of poor
operation.
1. True
2. Falser
19. Operators of wastewater treatment plants have a very
good safety record.
1. True
2. Falser
20. A package activated sludge plant does not need a clarifier.
1. True
2. False J
21. The level control weir measures the flow into the oxidation
ditch.
1. True
2. Falser/
-------
Activated Sludge 273
22. Building up the MLSS concentration is the most important
activity during the start-up process in a package activated
sludge plant.
1. True */
2. False
23. In very cold winter climates the rotor should .not be
stopped because ice will form on the rotor assembly.
1. Truey"
2. False
Multiple Choice
24. Where does the term "activated" come from in the ACTI-
VATED sludge process?
1. Activated afr is used in the process.
Activated carbon Is used In the process.
The microorganisms must be activated before they
start treating the wastewater.
The plant must be activated before the wastewater is
treated.
The sludge particles are teeming with bacteria, fungi,
and protozoa.
V5
25. Which of the following factors could cause a demand tor
more oxygen (increase in aeration rates) , in an aeration
tank?
. Increase in food (BOD) in aeration tank influent.
2. Increase In inert or inorganic wastes.
^3. Increase in microorganisms.
4. Increase in pH.
5. Increase in toxic substances.
26. Before a package plant is started and before wastewater
is allowed to enter the aeration tank, which of the following
items should be checked?
v*i. Chips in the coating on a steel tank.
V2. Influent gate or valve for proper operation.
*3. Provisions for corrosion control of steel tanks.
4. Sludge age.
5. Tank level from one end to other.
27. A package aeration plant with the potential of odor com-
plaints from nearby homes can handle waste activated
sludge by
1. Applying sludge directly to drying beds.
2. Discharging waste activated sludge into a vacuum fit
3. Disposing of waste activated sludge In an incinerator.
Having septic tank pumper remove waste activated
sludge,
^ 5. Pumping waste activated sludge to aerated holding
tank tor disposal in a aanltaiy iandW.
28. Package planls usually
1. Have an extensive lab testing program.
, 2. Haveanopemtt«tth»ptort24fwuwaday.
^ 3. Operate aa extended aenilon plants.
4. Operate the rnrmm device ooniimua^
Waste about Ave percent of the softfii each week dur-
ing summer operation.
29. Solids In the effluent from a package aeration plant could
be caused by
V— 1. a strong stale septic influent.
v2. Either too high or too low a return sludge rate.
V 3. Either too high or too low an aeration rate.
v 4. Excessive plant inflows.
y5. Something toxic In the influent.
30. Odors from a package plant could be caused by
V1. Aeration rates being too low.
2. Excessive aeration rates.
V 3. Improper disposal of waste activated sludge.
"4. Plugged sludge return line.
y/S. Poor housekeeping.
31. Major components of an oxidation ditch wastewater treat-
ment plant include.
Bar screen.
^*2. Final settling tank.
3. Grit channel.
4. Primary clarifier.
—5. Rotors.
32. A pre-start inspection of an oxidation ditch structure
should include which of the following items?
1. Cleanliness of diffusers.
2. Making sure flights or scrapers move freely.
— 3. Operation of adjustable weir.
— 4. Proper direction of rotor rotation.
— 5. Removal of all debris from ditch.
33. Oxidation ditch solids (MLSS) concentrations are-con-
trolled by regulating
1. Aeration rates.
2. Operation of ditch skimmers.
3. Operation of ditch sludge scrapers.
.4. Return sludge rates,
— 5. Waste sludge rates.
34. Environmental factors that significantly affect an oxidation
ditch treatment process include
1. Air pollution.
<* 2. Ice.
^3. Precipitation and runoff.
V—-4. Temperature.
5. Wind.
35. Regular daily maintenance of oxidation ditches Includes
^1. Amoving andburying debris from bar screen.
V2. Removal of grease and scum from surface of final settl-
ing tank.
— 3. Removal of grit from bottom of dteh.
4. Replacing rotor blades.
VS. Washing down and/or brushing down of ditch and
END OF OBJECTIVE TEST
-------
CHAPTER 9
WASTE TREATMENT PONDS
by
A. Hiatt
-------
276 Treatment Plants
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 9. Waste Treatment Ponds
Page
OBJECTIVES 278
GLOSSARY 279
LESSON 1
9.1 Use of Ponds 281
9.2 History of Ponds in Waste Treatment 281
9.3 Pond Classifications and Applications 284
9.4 Explanation of Treatment Process 286
9.5 Pond Performance 288
LESSON 2
9.6 Starting the Pond 289
9.7 Daily Operation and Maintenance 290
9.70 Scum Control 290
9.71 Odor Control 290
9.72 Weed and Insect Control 290
9.73 Levee Maintenance 291
9.74 Headworks and Screening 291
9.75 Some Operating Hints 291
9.76 Abnormal Operation 292
9.77 Batch Operation 292
9.78 Shutting Down a Pond 292
9.79 Operating Strategy 293
9.8 Surface Aerators 293
9.9 Sampling and Analysis 296
9.90 Importance 296
9.91 Frequency and Location of Lab Samples 296
9.92 Expected Treatment Efficiencies 297
9.93 Response to Poor Pond Performance 299
9.10 Safety 299
-------
Ponds 277
LESSON 3
9.11 Review of Plans and Specifications 300
9.110 Location 300
9.111 Chemistry of Waste 300
9.112 Headworks and Screening 300
9.113 Flow-Measuring Devices 300
9.114 Inlet and Outlet Structures 301
9.115 Levees 301
9.116 Pond Depths 301
9.117 Fencing and Signs 306
9.118 Surface Aerators 306
9.119 Pond Loading (English and Metric Calculations) 306
9.12 Eliminating Algae from Pond Effluents 309
9.120 Pond Isolation 309
9.121 Water Hyacinth Culture 310
9.13 Acknowledgment 310
9.14 Additional Reading 310
9.15 Metric Calculations 310
9.16 Pond Attachment 312
-------
OBJECTIVES
Chapter 9. WASTE TREATMENT PONDS
Following completion of Chapter 9, you should be able to do
the following:
1. Explain how waste treatment ponds work and what factors
influence and control pond treatment processes,
2. Place a new pond into operation,
3. Schedule and conduct normal and abnormal operational
and maintenance duties,
4. Collect samples, interpret lab results, and make appropri-
ate adjustments in pond operation,
5. Recognize factors that indicate a pond is not performing
properly, identify the source of the problem, and take cor-
rective action,
6. Develop a pond operating strategy,
7. Conduct your duties in a safe fashion,
8. Determine pond loadings,
9. Identify the different types of ponds,
10. Keep records for a waste treatment pond facility, and
11. Review plans and specifications for new ponds.
-------
Ponds 279
GLOSSARY
Chapter 9. WASTE TREATMENT PONDS
ADVANCED WASTE TREATMENT ADVANCED WASTE TREATMENT
Any process of water renovation that upgrades treated wastewater to meet specific reuse requirements. May include general
cleanup of water or removal of specific parts of wastes insufficiently removed by conventional treatment processes.
ALGAE (AL-gee) ALGAE
Microscopic plants which contain chlorophyll and float or are suspended and live in water. They also may be attached to structures,
rocks or other similar substances.
BIOFLOCCULATION (BUY-o-flock-u-LAY-shun) BIOFLOCCULATION
The clumping together of fine, dispersed organic particles by the action of bacteria and algae. This results in faster and more
complete settling of the organic solids in wastewater.
CHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND or COD CHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND or COD
A measure of the oxygen-consuming capacity of inorganic and organic matter present in wastewater. COD is expressed as the
amount of oxygen consumed from a chemical oxidant in mg/L during a specific test. Results are not necessarily related to the
biochemical oxygen demand because the chemical oxidant may react with substances that bacteria do not stabilize.
COMPOSITE (PROPORTIONAL) SAMPLE COMPOSITE (PROPORTIONAL) SAMPLE
(com-POZ-it)
A composite sample is a collection of individual samples obtained at regular intervals, usually every one or two hours during a
24-hour time span. Each individual sample is combined with the others in proportion to the flow when the sample was collected. The
resulting mixture (composite sample) forms a representative sample and is analyzed to determine the average conditions during the
sampling period.
FACULTATIVE POND (FACK-ul-tay-tive) FACULTATIVE POND
The most common type of pond in current use. The upper portion (supernatant) is aerobic, while the bottom layer is anaerobic.
Algae supply most of the oxygen to the supernatant.
FREE OXYGEN FREE OXYGEN
Molecular oxygen available for respiration by organisms. Molecular oxygen is the oxygen molecule, 02, that is not combined with
another element to form a compound.
GRAB SAMPLE GRAB SAMPLE
A single sample taken at neither a set time nor flow.
MEDIAN MEDIAN
The middle measurement or value. When several measurements are ranked by magnitude (largest to smallest), half of the
measurements will be larger and half will be smaller.
MOLECULAR OXYGEN MOLECULAR OXYGEN
The oxygen molecule, 02, that is not combined with another element to form a compound.
PARALLEL OPERATION PARALLEL OPERATION
When wastewater being treated is split and a portion flows to one treatment unit while the remainder flows to another similar
treatment unit. Also see SERIES OPERATION.
PERCOLATION (PURR-ko-LAY-shun) PERCOLATION
The movement or flow of water through soil or rocks.
-------
280 Treatment Plants
pH pH
pH is an expression of the intensity of the alkaline or acidic strength of a liquid. Mathematically, pH is the logarithm (base 10) of the
reciprocal of the hydrogen ion concentration.
pH = Log J—
(H+)
The pH may range from 0 to 14, where 0 is most acid, 14 is most alkaline, and 7 is neutral. Natural waters usually have a pH
between 6.5 and 8.5.
PHOTOSYNTHESIS (foto-SIN-the-sis) PHOTOSYNTHESIS
A process in which organisms with the aid of chlorophyll (green plant enzyme) convert carbon dioxide and inorganic substances to
oxygen and additional plant material, utilizing sunlight for energy. Land plants grow by the same process.
POPULATION EQUIVALENT POPULATION EQUIVALENT
A means of expressing the strength of organic material in wastewater. In a domestic wastewater system, microorganisms use up
about 0.2 pounds of oxygen per day for each person using the system (as measured by the standard BOD test).
Pop. Equiv., = Flow, MGD x BOD, mgIL x 8.34 lbs/gal
persons 0 2 hjS BOD/day/person
RIPRAP RIPRAP
Broken stones, boulders, or other materials placed compactly or irregularly on levees or dikes for the protection of earth surfaces
against the erosive action of waves.
SERIES OPERATION SERIES OPERATION
When wastewater being treated flows through one treatment unit and then flows through another similar treatment unit. Also see
PARALLEL OPERATION.
SPLASH PAD SPLASH PAD
A structure made of concrete or other durable material to protect bare soil from erosion by splashing or falling water.
STABILIZED WASTE STABILIZED WASTE
A waste that has been treated or decomposed to the extent that, if discharged or released, its rate and state of decomposition would
be such that the waste would not cause a nuisance or odors.
STOP LOG STOP LOG
A log or board in an outlet box or device used to control the water level in ponds.
TERTIARY TREATMENT (TER-she-AIR-ee) TERTIARY TREATMENT
Any process of water renovation that upgrades treated wastewater to meet specific reuse requirements. May include general
cleanup of water or removal of specific parts of wastes insufficiently removed by conventional treatment processes. Typical
processes include chemical treatment and pressure filtration. Also called ADVANCED WASTE TREATMENT.
TOXIC (TOX-ick) TOXIC
Poisonous.
TOXICITY (tox-IS-it-tee) TOXICITY
A condition which may exist in wastes and will inhibit or destroy the growth or function of certain organisms.
h
IT,
-------
Ponds 281
CHAPTER 9. WASTE TREATMENT PONDS
USED FOR TREATMENT OF WASTEWATER AND OTHER WASTES
(Lesson 1 of 3 Lessons)
9.1 USE OF PONDS
Shallow ponds (three- to five-feet or 1 to 1.5 meters deep)
are often used to treat wasTewater and other wastes Instead of,
or in addition to, conventional waste treatment processes.
(See Figs. 9.1 and 9.2 for typical plant layouts and Table 9.1
for purpose of pond parts.) When discharged into ponds,
TABLE 9.1
Part
1. Flow Meter
2. Bar Screen
3. Pond Inlets
PURPOSE OF POND PARTS
Purpose
Measures and records flows
into pond.
Removes coarse material
from pond influent.
4. Pond Depth and Outlet
Control
5. Outlet Baffle
6. Dike or Levee
7. Transfer Line
8. Recirculation Line
9. Chlorination
10. Chlorine Contact Basin
11. Effluent Line
Distribute influent in pond.
Regulates outflow from pond
and depth of water in pond. Al-
lows pond to be drained for
cleaning and inspection.
Prevents scum and other sur-
face debris from flowing to
next pond or receiving waters.
Separates ponds and holds
wastewater being treated in
ponds.
Conveys wastewater from
one pond to another.
Returns pond effluent rich in
algae and oxygen from sec-
ond pond to first pond for
seeding, dilution and process
control.
Applies chlorine to treated
wastewater for disinfection
purposes.
Provides contact time for
chlorine to disinfect pond
effluent.
Conveys treated wastewater
to receiving waters, to point of
reuse (irrigation), or to land
disposal site.
wastes are treated or STABILIZED1 by several natural pro-
cesses acting at the same time. Heavy solids settle to the
bottom where they are decomposed by bacteria. Lighter sus-
pended material is broken down by bacteria in suspension.
Some wastewater is disposed of by evaporation from the pond
surface.
Dissolved nutrient materials, such as nitrogen and phos-
phorous, are utilized by green ALGAE2 which are actually mi-
croscopic plants floating and living in the water. The algae use
carbon dioxide (C02) and bicarbonate to build body proto-
plasm. In so growing, they need nitrogen and phosphorous in
their metabolism much as land plants do. Like land plants, they
release oxygen and some carbon dioxide as waste products.
Ponds can serve as very effective treatment facilities. Ex-
tensive studies of their performance have led to a better un-
derstanding of the natural processes by which ponds treat
wastes. Information is provided here on the natural processes
and ways operators can regulate pond processes for efficient
waste treatment.
9.2 HISTORY OF PONDS IN WASTE TREATMENT
The first wastewater collection systems in the ancient Orient
and in ancient Europe discharged wastewater into nearby
bodies of water. These systems accomplished their intended
purpose until overloading, as in modern systems, made them
objectionable.
In ancient times, ponds and lakes were purposefully fer-
tilized with organic wastes to encourage the growth of algae
which, in turn, greatly increased the production of fish due to
the food supply provided by the algae. This practice still con-
tinues and is a recognized art in Germany.
The first ponds constructed in the United States were built
for the purpose of keeping wastewaters from flowing into
places where they would be objectionable. Once built, these
ponds performed a treatment process that finally became rec-
ognized as such.
The tendency over the years has been to equate pond
treatment effiency with the non-emission of odors. Actually, the
opposite is true as the greatest organic load destroyed per unit
1 Stabilized Wastes. A waste that has been treated or decomposed to the extent that, if discharged or released, its rate and state of
decomposition would be such that the waste would not cause a nuisance or odors.
2 Algae (AL-gee). Microscopic plants which contain chlorophyll and float or are suspended and live in water. They also may be attached to
structures, rocks or other similar substances.
-------
IO
00
IO
EFF.
INF.
FLOW
METER
BAR SCREEN
i PONDS
CHLORINE CONTACT
BASIN
(D
»
3
-------
INF.
BIOLOGICAL
PROCESS
(REMOVE SUS-
PENDED AND
DISSOLVED
SOLIDS)
SCREENING,
GRIT REMOVAL
(REMOVE
COARSE
MATERIAL)
MEASURE,
RECORD
FLOW
SEDIMENTATION
(REMOVE
SETTLEABLE
AND FLOATING
MATERIALS)
(SOLIDS
DISPOSAL)
DISINFECTION
DIGESTION
AND
SLUDGE
HANDLING
3 PONDS
PRIMARY
TREATMENT
PRELIMINARY
TREATMENT
SECONDARY
TREATMENT
FLOW
METER
CHLORI NATION
INFLUENT
mmm
EFFLUENT
SOLIDS TO
DIGESTION
SOLIDS BACK
TO PRIMARY
TREATMENT
TJ
O
3
a
<0
Fig. 9.2 Typical plant; ponds after secondary treatment
to
00
u
-------
284 Treatment Plants
of area (high treatment efficiency) may be accompanied by
objectionable odors.
Since 1958, engineers have designed and constructed a
great number of ponds using research by qualified biological
consultants, current scientific knowledge of ponding, and the
experience of past successes and failures. When operated in a
knowledgeable and purposeful manner, these ponds have
Successfully performed a variety of functions.
As a complete process, the ponding of wastewater offers
many advantages for smaller installations. This is true pro-
vided that land is not costly and the location is isolated from
residential, commercial, and recreational areas. The advan-
tages are that a pond:
1. Does not require expensive equipment;
2. Does not require highly trained operating personnel;
3. Is economical to construct;
4. Provides treatment that is equal or superior to some con-
ventional processes;
5. Is a satisfactory method of treating wastewater on a tem-
porary basis;
— 6. Is adaptable to changing loads;
7. Is adaptable to land application;
8. Consumes little energy;
9. Serves as a wildlife habitat;
10. Has potentially an increased design life;
11. Has no sludge handling and disposal problems; and
12. Is probably the most trouble-free of any treatment process
when utilized correctly, PROVIDED A CONSISTENTLY
HIGH QUALITY EFFLUENT IS NOT REQUIRED.
The limitations are that a pond:
1. May emit odors;
2. Requires a large area of land;
3. Treats wastes somewhat dependent on climatic condi-
tions;
4. May contaminate groundwaters; and
5. May have high suspended solids levels in the effluent.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 313.
9.2A If a pond is giving off objectionable odors, are the
wastes being effectively treated? Explain your answer.
9.2B Discuss the advantages of ponds.
9.3 POND CLASSIFICATIONS AND APPLICATIONS
Ponding of raw wastewater, as a complete treatment pro-
cess, is used to treat the wastes of single families as well as
large cities up to the size of the city of Melbourne, Australia.
Currently a portion of Melbourne's wastewater is disposed of
on a 28,000 acre farm. During the dry season, most of the
treatment is accomplished by broad irrigation and grass filtra-
tion (flowing through grass lands) while during the wet season
most of the 130 MGD flow is handled by ponds and discharged
to receiving waters. Ponds designed to receive wastes with no
prior treatment are often referred to as "raw wastewater (sew-
age) lagoons" or "stabilization ponds" (Fig. 9.3). This requires
sizable areas of land.
Ponds are quite commonly used in series (one pond follow-
ing another) after a primary wastewater treatment plant to pro-
vide additional clarification, BOD removal, and disinfection.
These ponds are sometimes called "oxidation ponds." Pnnrls
.are sometimes used in series after a trickling filter plant, thus
pivin(f5'lDrnTT?f-7tH//>qH sometimes-
called "polishing ponds." Ponds placed in series with each
other can provide a high quality effluent which is acceptable for
discharge into most watercourses. If the detention time is long
enough, many ponds can meet fecal coliform standards.
A great many variations in ponds are possible due to differ-
ences in depth, operating conditions, and loadings. A bold line
of distinction among different types of ponds is often impossi-
ble. Current literature generally uses three broad pond classifi-
cations: AEROBIC, ANAEROBIC, and FACULTATIVE.
AEROBIC ponds are characterized by having dissolved
oxygen distributed throughout their contents practically all of
the time. They usually require an additional source of oxygen
to supplement the rather minimal amount that can be diffused
from the atmosphere at the water surface. The additional
source of oxygen may be supplied by algae during daylight
hours, by mechanical agitation of the surface, or by bubbling
air provided by compressors through the pond.
ANAEROBIC ponds, as the name implies, usually are with-
out any dissolved oxygen throughout their entire depth. Treat-
ment depends on fermentation of the sludge at the pond bot-
tom. This process can be quite odorous under certain condi-
tions, but it is highly efficient in destroying organic wastes.
Anaerobic ponds are mainly used for processing industrial
wastes, although some domestic-waste ponds become
anaerobic when they are badly overloaded.
FACULTATIVE (FACK-ul-TAY-tive) ponds are the most
common type in current use. The upper portion (supernatant)
of-thesa ponds is aerobic, while the bottom layer is anaerobic.
Algae supply most of the oxygen tojha supernatant.-Faculta-
tive ponds are most common Decause it is almost impossible
to maintain completely aerobic or anaerobic conditions all the
time at all depths of the pond.
Pond uses may be classified according to detention time. A
pond with a detention time of less than three days will perform
in ways similar to a sedimentation or settling tank. Some
growth of algae will occur in the pond, but it will not have a
major effect on the treatment of the wastewater.
Prolific growth of algae will be observed in ponds with deten-
tion periods from three to around twenty days, but large
amounts of algae will be found in the pond effluent. In some
effluents, the stored organic material may be greater than the
amount in the influent. Detention times in this range merely
allow the organic material to change form and delay problems
until the algae settle out in the receiving waters. Effluent BODs
may show considerable reductions from influent BODs, but this
is because BOD is a rate estimate (oxygen used during a
3 Tertiary (TER-she-AIR-ee). Tertiary refers to the third treatment process or the process following a secondary treatment process, such as a
trickling filter. Some refer to tertiary treatment as advanced waste treatment, meaning processes that remove wastes not commonly removed
by conventional (secondary) treatment processes.
-------
Ponds 285
INFLUENT
RAW
WASTE-
WATER
POND NO. 2
POND NO. 3
POND NO. 1
STABILIZATION PONDS IN SERIES
EFFLUENT
INFLUENT
RAW
WASTE-
WATER
POND NO. 1
POND NO. 2
STABILIZATION PONDS IN PARALLEL
EFFLUENT
INFLUENT
PRIMARY
CLARIFIER
POND NO. 2
POND NO. I
OXIDATION PONDS IN SERIES
TRICKLING
FILTER
PRIMARY
CLARIFIER
POND NO. 2
POND NO. 1
SECONDARY
CLARIFIER
POLISHING PONDS IN SERIES
Fig. 9.3 Pond Classifications
-------
286 Treatment Plants
five-day period). The rate of oxygen use is temporarily slowed
down, but will increase when anaerobic decomposition of set-
tled dead algae cells starts.
Longer detention periods in ponds provide time for the
sedimentation of algae. Usually, this will occur in ponds with
anaerobic conditions on the bottom and aerobic conditions on
the surface. Combined aerobic-anaerobic treatment provided
by long detention periods produces definite stabilization of the
ihfluent.
Controlled discharge ponds are facultative ponds with long
detention times of up to 180 days or longer. These ponds may
discharge effluent only once (fall) or twice (fall and spring) a
year.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 313.
9.3A What is the difference between raw wastewater (sew-
age) lagoons, oxidation ponds, and polishing ponds?
9.3B What is the difference between the terms "aerobic,"
"anaerobic," and "facultative" when applied to ponds?
9.3C How does the use of a pond vary depending on deten-
tion time?
9.4 EXPLANATION OF TREATMENT PROCESS
As mentioned in the previous section, waste disposal ponds
also are classified according to their dissolved oxygen content.
Oxygen in an aerobic pond is distributed throughout the entire
depth practically all the time. An anaerobic pond is predomi-
nantly without oxygen most of the time because oxygen re-
quirements are much greater than the oxygen supply. In a
facultative pond, the upper portion is aerobic most of the time,
whereas the bottom layer is predominantly anaerobic.
In aerobic ponds or in the aerobic layer of facultative ponds,
organic matter contained in the wastewaterjsfirst converted to
narhnn dioxide and ammonia, and finaiiyTtolitgaeinrthepres-
ence of sunlight. Algae are simple one-cell microscopic plants
which are essential to the successful operation of both aerobic
and facultative ponds.
By utilizing sunlight through PHOTOSYNTHESIS,4 the one-
celled plant uses the oxygen in the water molecule to produce
FREE OXYGEN,5 making it available to the aerobic bacteria
that inhabit the pond. Each pound of aloae in a healthy pond is
capable nf nrnrincinn i « pounds of nxx/nan on a normal sum-
mer day. Algae live on carbon dioxide and other nutrients in the
wastewater. Algae occur naturally in a pond without seeding
and multiply greatly under favorable conditions. Figure 9.4 il-
lustrates the role of algae in treating wastes in a pond.
In anaerobic ponds or in the anaerobic layer of facultative
ponds, the organic matter is first converted by a group of or-
ganisms called the "acid producers" to carbon dioxide, nitro-
gen, and organic acids. In an established pond, at the same
time, a group called the "methane fermenters" breaks down
the acids and other products of the first group to form methane
gas and alkalinity. Water is another end product of organic
decomposition. This process is described in Figure 9.4.
In a successful facultative pond, the processes characteris-
tic of aerobic ponds occur in the surface layers, while those
similar to anaerobic ponds occur in its bottom layers.
During certain periods, sludge decomposition in the
anaerobic zone is interrupted and it begins to accumulate. If
sludge accumulation occurs and decomposition does not set
in, it is probably due to a lack of the right bacteria, low pH,6
pressure of substances that slow or stop the process, or a low
temperature. Under these circumstances, the acid production
will continue at a slower rate, but the rate of gas (methane)
production slows down considerably.
Sludge storage in ponds is continuous with small amounts
stored during warm weather and larger amounts when it is
cold. During low temperatures, the bacteria cannot multiply
fast enough to handle the waste. When warm weather comes,
the "acid producers" begin to decompose the accumulated
sludge deposits built up during the winter. If the organic acid
production is too great, a lowered pH will occur with the pos-
sibilities of an upset pond and resulting hydrogen sulfide odors.
Hydrogen sulfide ordinarily is not a problem in properly de-
signed and bpsrated" ponds because it dissociates (divides)
into hydrogen and hydrosulfide ions at high pH and may form
insoluble metallic sulfides or sulfates, niis high degree of dis-
sociation and the formation of insoluble metallic sulfides are
the reasons that ponds having a pH above 8.5 do not emit
odors, even when hydrogen sulfide is present in relatively large
amounts. An exception occurs in northern climates during the
spring when the pH is low and the pond is just getting started,
then hydrogen sulfide odors can be a problem.
All of the organic matter that finds its way to the bottom of a
stabilization pond through the various processes of sludge de-
composition is subject to METHANE FERMENTATION, pro-
vided that proper conditions exist or become established. In
order for methane fermentation to exist, an abundance of or-
ganic matter must be deposited and continually converted to
organic acids. An abundant population of methane bacteria
must be present. They require a pH level of from 6.5 to 7.5
within the sludge, alkalinity of several hundred mg/L to buffer
(neutralize) the organic acids (volatile acid/alkalinity relation-
ship), and suitable temperatures. Once methane fermentation
is established, it accounts for a considerable amount nf tho
organic load removal?
4 Photosynthesis. A process in which organisms with the aid of chlorophyll (green plant enzyme) convert carbon dioxide and inorganic
substances to oxygen and additional plant material, utilizing sunlight for energy. Land plants grow by the same process.
Light
COj + Hfi ~ CH2Ox + 02
5 Free Oxygen. Molecular oxygen available for respiration by organisms. Molecular oxygen is the oxygen molecule, 02, that is not combined
with another element to form a compound.
6 pH. pH is an expression of the intensity of the alkaline or acid strength of a liquid. Mathematically, pH is the logarithm (base 10) of the
reciprocal of the hydrogen ion concentration.
pH = Log J—
(H+)
The pH may range from 0 to 14, where 0 is the most acid, 14 the most alkaline, and 7 is neutral. Most natural waters usually have a pH
between 6.5 and 8.5.
-------
Ponds 287
AEROBIC
ANAEROBIC
ALGAE OBTAIN
ENERGY FROM
SUNLIGHT
POND SURFACE
ALGAE
ALGAE, UTILIZING SUNLIGHT
THROUGH PHOTOSYNTHESIS,
USE THE OXYGEN IN THE
WATER MOLECULE TO
PRODUCE FREE OXYGEN
ALGAE LIVE
ON C02 AND
NUTRIENTS
_£
ORGANIC MATTER AND
INPUT OR
NUTRIENTS IN WASTES
INFLUENT "
BEING TREATED
AEROBIC
NUTRIENTS
AND AMMONIA
TO ALGAE
CARBON
DIOXIDE
OXYGEN
DEAD
CELLS
AEROBIC BACTERIA
IN POND USE (EAT)
WASTES AND NUTRIENTS
AEROBIC BACTERIA
REMOVE (BREATHE
OR RESPIRATE)
DISSOLVED OXYGEN
FROM WATER
BACTERIA
RELEASE
(RESPIRATION)
ANAEROBIC
NUTRIENTS
AND
k AMMONIA .
HYDROGEN
SULFIDE
CARBON
DIOXIDE
METHANE
ALKALINITY
WATER
DEAD
CELLS
METHANE
FERMENTING
BACTERIA
BREAK DOWN
ACIDS AND
OTHER PRO-
DUCTS TO
METHANE
GAS,C02> HjS,
ALKALINITY
AND WATER
INPUT OR
ORGANIC
ACIDS
INFLUENT
ACID-PRODUCING BACTERIA
CONVERT ORGANIC
^ ANAEROBIC >
BACTERIA
IN POND USE (EAT)
WASTES AND
V NUTRIENTS >
ORGANIC MATTER
AND NUTRIENTS
IN WASTES
BEING TREATED
ACID-PRODUCING BACTERIA
CONVERT ORGANIC
MATTER TO VOLATILE
ACIDS. COo, WATER AND
NITROGEN
Fig. 9.4 Process of decomposition in aerobic and anaerobic
layers of a pond
-------
288 Treatment Plants
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 313.
9.4A How is oxygen produced by algae?
9.4B Where does the algae found in a pond come from?
9.4C What happens to unstable organic matter in a pond?
9.5 POND PERFORMANCE
The treatment efficiencies that can be expected from ponds
vary more than most other treatment devices. Some of the
many variables are:
1. Physical Factors
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g-
h.
type of soil
surface area
depth
wind action
sunlight
temperature
short-circuiting
inflow variations
2. Chemical Factors
a. organic material
b. pH
c. solids
d. concentration and nature of waste
3. Biological Factors
a. type of bacteria
b. type and quantity of algae
c. activity of organisms
d. nutrient deficiencies
e. toxic concentrations
The performance expected from a pond depends largely
upon its design. The design, of course, is determined by the
waste discharge requirements or the water quality standards to
be met in the receiving waters. Overall treatment efficiency
may be about the same as primary treatment (only settling of
solids), or it may be equivalent to the best secondary biological
treatment plants. Some ponds, usually those located in hot,
arid areas, have been designed to take advantage of PERCO-
LATION7 and high evaporation rates so that there is no dis-
charge.
Depending on design, ponds can be expected to provide
BOD removals from 50 to 90 percent. Facultative ponds, under
jQormaLdesjgnJoads with 50 to 60 days' detention timeTltfiir
usually remove approxima!ety-90 to 95 percent of the cbliform
bacteria and, 70. to 80 percent of the BOD load approximately
80 percent of the time. Controlled discharge ponds with 180-
Ldetention times can produce BOD removals from 85 to
percentTToTdl susperidScTsoTrasTemovaTs from~8b to 95"per-"
cent, and fecal coliform reductions up to 99 percent.
Physical sedimentation by itself has been found to remove
approximately 90 percent of the suspended solids in three
days. About 80 percent of the dissolved organic solids can be
removed by biologic action in ten days. However, in a pond
with a healthy algae and bacteria population, a phenomenon
known as BIOFLOCCULATION8 can occur. This will remove
approximately 85 percent of both suspended and dissolved
solids within hours. Bioflocculation is accelerated by incres
temperature, wave acfionrand tTtgh'dissoTVSdTOTygerTcontent.
Pond detention times are sometimes specified by regulatory
agencies to assure adequate treatment and removal of bac-
teria. Many agencies specify effluent or receiving water quality
standards in terms of MEDIAN9 and maximum MPN (Most
Probable Number) values that should not be exceeded. In criti-
cal water use areas, chlorination or other means of disinfection
can be used to further reduce the coliform level (see Chapter
10, "Chlorination and Disinfection").
A pond is generally regarded as not fulfilling its function
when it creates a visual or odor nuisance, or leaves a high
BOD, solids, grease, or coliform-group bacteria concentration
in the discharge.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 313.
9.5A What is bioflocculation?
9.5B What biological factors influence the treatment effi-
ciency of a pond?
9.5C What factors indicate that a pond is not fulfilling its func-
tion (operating properly)?
m ofimrwtu&hMU
Please answer the discussion and review questions before
continuing with Lesson 2.
7 Percolation (PURR-ko-LAY-shun). The movement or flow of water through soil or rocks.
8 Bioflocculation (BUY-o-flock-u-LAY-shun). The clumping together of fine, dispersed organic particles by the action of bacteria and algae.
This results in faster and more complete settling of the organic solids in wastewater.
9 Median. The middle measurement or value. When several measurements are ranked by magnitude (largest to smallest), half of the
measurements will be larger and half will be smaller.
-------
Ponds 289
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
Chapter 9. WASTE TREATMENT PONDS
(Lesson 1 of 3 Lessons)
At the end of each lesson in this chapter, you will find some
discussion and review questions that you should work before
continuing. The purpose of these questions is to indicate to you
how well you understand the material in this lesson.
Write the answers to these questions in your notebook be-
fore continuing.
1. When wastewater flows through different treatment pro-
cesses in a plant, where might ponds be located?
2. Why are most ponds "facultative ponds"?
3. Where does the oxygen come from that is produced by
algae in a pond?
4. What is photosynthesis?
5. What are the three types of factors that may influence pond
performance?
CHAPTER 9. WASTE TREATMENT PONDS
(Lesson 2 of 3 Lessons)
9.6 STARTING THE POND
One of the most critical periods of a pond's life is the time
that it is first placed in operation. If at all possible, at least one
foot (n.a m) nf watar should be in the pond before wastes are
introduced. The water should be turned into the pond in ad-
vance to prevent odors developing from waste solids exposed
to the atmosphere. Thus a source of water should be available
when starting a pond.
A good practice is to start ponds during the warmer part of
the year because a shallow starting depth allows the contents
of the pond to cool too rapidly if nights are cold. Generally
speaking, the warmer the pond contents, the more efficient the
treatment processes.
Algal blooms normally will appear from seven to twelve days
after wastes are introduced into a pond, but it generally takes
at least sixty days to establish a thriving biological community.
A definite green color is evidence that a flourishing algae popu-
lation has been established. After this length of time has
elapsed, bacterial decomposition of bottom solids will usually
become established. This is generally evidenced by bubbles
coming to the surface near the pond inlet where most of the
sludge deposits occur. Although the bottom is anaerobic, travel
of the gas through the aerobic surface layers generally pre-
vents odor release.
Wastes should be discharged to the pnnd intermittently dur-
ing the first few weeks with constant monitoring of the pH. The
pH in the pona should be Kept above 7.5 if possible. Initially the
pH of the bottom sludge will be below 7 due to the digestion of
the sludge by acid-producing bacteria. If the pH starts to drop,
discharge to the pond should be diverted to another pond or
diluted with make-up water (water from another source) if
another pond is not available until the pH recovers. A high pH
is essential to encourage a balanced anaerobic fermentation
(bacterial decomposition) of bottom sludge. This high pH also
is indicative of high algal activity since removal of the carbon-
ate from the water in algal metabolism tends to keep the pH
high. A continuing low pH indicates acid production which will
cause odors. Soda ash (sodium bicarbonate) may be added to
the influent to a pond to increase the pH.
-------
290 Treatment Plants
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 313.
9.6A Why should at least one foot of fresh water cover the
pond bottom before wastes are introduced?
9.6B Why should ponds be started during the warmer part of
the year if at all possible?
9.6C What does a definite green color in a pond indicate?
9.6D When bubbles are observed coming to the pond sur-
face near the inlet, what is happening in the pond?
9.7 DAILY OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
BECAUSE PONDS ARE DECEPTIVELY SIMPLE, THEY
ARE PROBABLY NEGLECTED MORE THAN ANY OTHER
TYPE OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT PROCESS. Many of
the complaints that arise regarding ponds are the result of
neglect or poor housekeeping. Following are listed the day-
to-day operational and maintenance duties that will help to
insure peak treatment efficiency and to present your plant to its
neighbors as a well-run waste treatment facility. If problems
develop in a pond, refer to this section and Section 9.11, "Re-
view of Plans and Specifications," as troubleshooting guides.
9.70 Scum Control
Scum accumulation is a common characteristic of ponds
and is usually greatest in the spring of the year when the water
warms and vigorous biological activity resumes. Ordinarily,
wind action will dissipate scum accumulations and cause them
to settle; however, in the absence of wind or in sheltered areas,
other means must be used. If scum is not broken up, it will dry
on top and become crusted. Not only is the scum more difficult
to break up then, but a species of blue-green algae is apt to
become established on the scum. This can give rise to dis-
agreeable odors. If scum is allowed to accumulate, it can reach
proportions where it cuts off a significant amount of sunlight
from the pond. When this happens the production of oxygen by
algae is reduced and odor problems can result. Rafts of scum
cause a very unsightly appearance in ponds and can quite
likely become a source of botulism that will have a devastating
effect on waterfowl and shore birds which may be attracted to
the facility.
Many methods of breaking up scum have been used, includ-
ing agitation with garden rakes from the shore, jets of water
from pumps or tank trucks, and the use of outboard motors on
boats in large ponds. Scum is broken up most easily if it is
attended to promptly.
9.71 Odor Control
Eventually, at some time, odors probably will come from a
wastewater treatment plant no matter what kind of process is
used. Most odors are caused by overloading (see Section
9.119 to determine pond loading) or poor housekeeping prac-
tices and can be remedied by taking corrective measures. If a
pond is overloaded, stop loading and divert influent to other
ponds, if available, until the odor problem stops. Then gradu-
ally start loading the pond again. Once a pond develops odor
problems, it is more apt to cause trouble than other ponds.
There are times, such as when unexpected shutdowns oc-
cur, that plant processes may be upset and cause odors. For
these unexpected occurrences, it is strongly advised that a
careful plan for emergency odor control be available. Odors
usually occur during the spring warmup in colder climates be-
cause biological activity has been reduced during cold
weather. When the water warms, microorganisms become ac-
tive, use up all of the available dissolved oxygen, and odors
are produced under these anaerobic conditions.
There are several suggested ways to reduce odors in ponds.
These ways include recirculation from aerobic units, the use of
floating aerators, and heavy chlorination. Recirculation from an
aerobic pond to the inlet of an anaerobic pond (1 part recycle
flow to 6 parts influent flow) will reduce or eliminate odors.
Usually, floating aeration and chlorination equipment are too
expensive to have standing idle waiting for an odor problem to
develop. Odor-masking chemicals also have been promoted
for this purpose and have some uses for concentrated sources
of specific odors. However, in almost all cases, process proce-
dures of the type mentioned previously are preferable. In any
event, it is poor procedure to wait until the emergency arises to
plan for odor control. Often several days are needed to receive
delivery of materials or chemicals if they are required. Try to
have possible alternate methods of control ready to go in case
they are needed.
In some areas, sodium nitrate has been added to ponds as a
source of oxygen for microorganisms rather than sulfate com-
pounds, already in the water, thus preventing odors. To be
effective, sodium nitrate must be dispersed throughout the
water in the pond. Once mixed in the pond, it acts very quickly
because may common organisms (facultative groups) may use
the oxygen in nitrate compounds instead of dissolved oxygen.
Liquid sodium hypochlorite or chlorine solution is a faster act-
ing solution, but not necessarily the best chemical because it
will interfere with biological stabilization of the wastes.
9.72 Weed and Insect Control
Weed control is an essential part of good housekeeping and
is not a formidable task with modern herbicides and soil steril-
ants. Weeds around the edge are most objectionable because
they allow a sheltered area for mosquito breeding and scum
accumulation. In most average ponds, there has been little
need for mosquito control when edges are kept free of weed
growth. Weeds also can hinder pond circulation. Aquatic
weeds, such as tules, will grow in depths shallower than three
feet (1 m), so an operating pond level of at least this depth is
necessary. Tules may emerge singly or be well scattered, but
should be removed promptly by hand as they will quickly multi-
ply from the root system.
Mosquitoes will breed in sheltered areas of standing water
where there is vegetation or scum to which the egg rafts of the
female mosquito can become attached. These egg rafts are
fragile and will not withstand the action of disturbed water sur-
faces such as caused by wind action or normal currents. Keep-
ing the water edge clear of vegetation and keeping any scum
broken up will normally give adequate control. Shallow, iso-
lated pools left by the receding pond level should be drained or
sprayed with a larvacide.
Any of several minute shrimp-like animals may infest the
pond from time to time during the warmer months of the year
(March - November). These predators live on algae and at
times will appear in such numbers as to almost clear the pond
of algae. During the more severe infestations, there will be a
sharp drop in the dissolved oxygen of the pond, accompanied
by a lowered pH. This is a temporary condition because the
predators will outrun the algae supply, and there will be a mass
die-off of insects which will be followed by a rapid greening up
of the pond again. When the algae concentration in a pond is
low under these conditions, ponds operated on a batch basis
may find this a good time for release of water due to low
suspended solids values.
Ordinarily there should be no great concern about these
-------
Ponds 291
infestations because they soon balance themselves; however,
in the case of a heavily loaded pond, a sustained low dissolved
oxygen content may give rise to noxious odors. In that event,
any of several commercial sprays can be used to control the
shrimp-like animals.
Chironomid midges are often produced in wastewater ponds
in sufficient numbers to be serious nuisances to nearby resi-
dential areas, farm workers, recreation sites, and industrial
plants. When emerging in large numbers, they may also create
traffic hazards. At present the only satisfactory control is
through the use of insecticides. Control measures are time
consuming and may be difficult, particularly if there is a dis-
charge to a receiving stream. If possible, lower the level in the
ponds enough to contain a day's inflow before applying an
insecticide. Holding the insecticide for at least one day will kill
more insects and reduce the effect of the insecticide on receiv-
ing waters. For better results, insecticides should be applied on
a calm day and any recirculation pumps should be stopped.
CAUTION. Before attempting to apply any insecticide or pes-
ticide, contact your local official in charge of approving pes-
ticide applications. This person can tell you which chemicals
may be applied, the conditions of application, and safe proce-
dures.
9.73 Levee Maintenance
Levee slope erosion caused by wave action is probably the
most serious maintenance problem. If allowed to continue, it
will result in a narrowing of the levee crown which will make
accessibility with maintenance equipment most difficult.
If the levee slope is composed of easily erodible material,
the only long-range solution is the use of bank protection such
as stone RIPRAP10 or broken concrete rubble. Good sources
of bank-protection materials include small pieces of broken
street materials, curbs, gutters, and also bricks and other suit-
able materials from building demolition.
Portions of the pond levee or dike not exposed to wave
action should be planted with a low-growing spreading grass to
prevent erosion by surface runoff. Native grasses may natu-
rally seed the levees, or local highway departments may be
consulted for suitable grasses to control erosion. If necessary,
grass may have to be mowed to prevent it from becoming too
high. Do not allow grazing animals to control vegetation be-
cause they may damage the levees near the water line and
possibly complicate erosion problems.
Plants or grasses with long roots, such as willows and al-
falfa, should not be allowed to grow on levees because they
may damage the levees and possibly cause levee failure and
costly repair. Burrowing animals such as muskrats, badgers,
squirrels and gophers also may cause levees to fail. Remove
these animals from levees as soon as possible and repair their
burrowed holes immediately.
Levee tops should be crowned so that rain water will drain
over the side in a sheet flow. Otherwise the water may flow a
considerable distance along the levee crown and gather
enough flow to cause erosion when it finally spills over the side
and down the slope.
If the levees are to be used as roadways during wet weather,
they should be paved or well graveled.
If seepage or leakage from the ponds appears on the out-
side of levees, ask your engineer to investigate and solve this
problem before further damage occurs to the levee.
9.74 Headworks and Screening
Be sure to clean the bar screen as frequently as necessary.
The screen should be inspected at least once or twice a day
with more frequent visits during storm periods. Screenings
should be disposed of daily in a sanitary manner, such as by
burial, to avoid odors and fly breeding. A trench dug by a
backhoe near the bar screen provides a convenient location for
disposal by burial. Another method of disposal is to place
screenings in garbage cans and request that your local gar-
bage service dispose of the screenings at a sanitary-landfill
disposal site.
Many pond installations have grit chambers at the head-
works to protect raw-wastewater lift pumps or prevent plugging
of the influent lines. There are many types of grit-removal
equipment. Grit removed by the various types of mechanical
equipment or by manual means will usually contain small
amounts of organic matter and should therefore be disposed of
in a sanitary manner. Disposal by burial is the most common
method.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 313.
9.7A Why should scum not be allowed to accumulate on the
surface of a pond?
9.7B How can scum accumulations be broken up?
9.7C What are the causes of odors from a pond?
9.7D What precaution would you take to be prepared for an
odor problem which might develop?
9.7E Why are weeds objectionable in and around ponds?
9.7F How can weeds be controlled and removed in and
around ponds?
9.7G Why should insects be controlled?
9.7H Why should a pond be lowered before an insecticide is
applied?
9.75 Some Operating Hints
1. Anaerobic ponds should be covered and isolated for odor
control and followed by aerobic ponds. Floating polystyrene
planks can be used to cover anaerobic ponds and can be
painted white for protection from the sun. These will help to
confine odors and heat and tend to make the anaerobic
ponds more efficient.
2. Placing PONDS IN SERIES11 tends to cause the first pond
to become overloaded and may never allow it to recover;
the overload may be carried to the next pond in series.
PONOS IN SERIES
Ul u
10 Riprap. Broken stones, boulders, or other materials placed compactly or Irregularly on levees or dikes for the protection of earth surfaces
against the erosive action of waves.
-------
292 Treatment Plants
Feeding PONDS IN PARALLEL11 allows you to distribute
the incoming load evenly between units. Whether ponds
are operated in series or in parallel should depend on the
loading situation.
When operating ponds in series, the accumulation of solids
in the first pond may become a serious problem after a long
period of use. Periodically the flow should be routed around
the first pond. This pond should then be drained and the
solids removed and buried.
3. A large amount of recirculation, say 25 to 100 percent, can
be very helpful. This allows the algae and other aerobic
organisms to become thoroughly mixed with incoming raw
wastewater. At the same time, good oxygen transfer can be
attained by passing the incoming water over a deck and
down steps or other type of aerator. This procedure can
cause heat loss, however.
4. Heavy chlorination at the recirculation point can assist in
odor control, but will probably interfere with treatment.
5. As with any treatment process, it is necessary to measure
the important water quality indicators (DO and solids) at
frequent, regular intervals and plot them so that you have
some idea of the direction the process is taking in time to
take corrective action when necessary.
6. When solids start floating to the surface of a pond during
the spring or fall overturn, the pond may have to be taken
out of service and cleaned. Measurement of the sludge
depth on the bottom of a pond also will indicate when a
pond should be cleaned. Usually ponds are cleaned when
the wet sludge depth is over one-foot (0.3 m) deep.
7. Before applying insecticides or herbicides, be sure to check
with appropriate authorities regarding the long-term effects
of the pesticide you plan to use. Do not apply pesticides that
may be toxic to organisms in the receiving waters.
8. Algae in effluent. Unfortunately there is little an operator
can do by changing pond operating procedures to effec-
tively remove algae from a pond effluent. The best ap-
proach is to operate ponds in series and to draw off the
effluent below the surface by use of a good baffling ar-
rangement.
If the algae must be removed from the effluent of a pond,
additional facilities may be designed and constructed.
Techniques for eliminating algae from pond effluents in-
clude growing a water hyacinth culture in a special final
pond (see Section 9.12, "Eliminating Algae from Pond
Effluent"). Another possibility is constructing extra ponds
and using the Pond Isolation Process. Suitable effluents
have been obtained under favorable field conditions. Other
algae removal processes include microscreening, slow
sand filtration, dissolved air flotation, and algae harvesting.
In final ponds that are operated in series with periodic dis-
charges, alum may be added in doses of less than 20 mg/L
to improve effluent quality before discharge.
9.76 Abnormal Operation
Abnormal operation occurs when ponds are overloaded be-
cause the BOD loads are too high. Excessive BODs can occur
when influent loads exceed design capacity due to population
increases, industrial growth, or industrial dumps. Under these
conditions new facilities must be constructed or the BOD load-
ing must be reduced at the source, such as an industrial dump.
Another type of overloading can occur when too much flow is
diverted to one pond. This can happen when an operator acci-
dentally feeds one pond more than the other or when a pipe
opening is blocked by rags, solids or grit due to low pipe ve-
locities, and thus too much flow is diverted to another pond.
When this happens and the overloaded pond starts producing
odors, take the pond out of service and divert flows to the other
ponds until the overloaded pond recovers. Hopefully the ponds
in service will not become overloaded. Also be sure to remove
any rags, solids or grit which caused the overloading and in-
spect the other pipes to prevent this problem from happening
again in the other ponds.
Usually ponds do not become overloaded during storms and
periods of high runoff because there is not a significant in-
crease in the BOD loading on the ponds.
Large amounts of brown or black scum on the surface of a
pond is an indication that the pond is overloaded. Scum on the
surface of a pond often leads to odor problems. The best way
to control scum is to take corrective action as soon as possible
(see Section 9.70, "Scum Control").
During winter conditions the pond can become covered with
ice and snow. Sunlight is no longer available to the algae and
oxygen cannot enter the water from the atmosphere. Without
dissolved oxygen available for aerobic decomposition,
anaerobic decomposition of the solids occurs. Anaerobic de-
composition takes place slowly because of the low tempera-
tures. By keeping the pond surface at a high level, a longer
detention time and less heat loss will be obtained. During the
period of ice cover, odorous gases formed by anaerobic de-
composition accumulate under the ice and are dissolved into
the wastewater being treated.
Some odors may be observed in the spring just after the ice
cover breaks up because the pond is still in an anaerobic state
and some of these dissolved gases are being released. Melt-
ing of ice in the spring provides dilution water with a high
oxygen content, thus the ponds usually become facultative in a
few days after breakup of the ice if they are not organically
(BOD) overloaded.
9.77 Batch Operation
Some ponds do not discharge continuously. These ponds
may discharge only once (fall) or twice (fall and spring) a year.
Discharges should be made only when necessary and, if pos-
sible, during the nonrecreational season when flows are high in
the receiving waters.
If your pond is allowed to discharge intermittently (controlled
discharge), you must work closely with your pollution control
agency and be sure that you are in compliance with the Na-
tional Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) per-
mit. Before and during the discharge, samples should be col-
lected from the pond being emptied and from the receiving
waters both upstream and downstream from the point of dis-
charge. Samples are usually analyzed for DO, BOD, pH, total
suspended solids, and coliform-group bacteria.
Ponds should not be emptied too quickly. Usually ponds are
emptied in two weeks or less depending on how much water is
to be discharged. Normally one to one and a half feet (0.3 to
0.45 m) of water is left in the bottom of the pond.
9.78 Shutting Down a Pond
Ponds may be shut down for short periods of time without
any problems developing. For example, if flow to a pond must
be stopped to repair a pipe or a valve, no precautionary proce-
dures are necessary. If a pond is full and received no flows for
a long period of time, start up the pond with caution and gradu-
ally increase the load. If the full load is applied immediately, the
pond may become overloaded because the microorganism
population in the pond is low and insufficient to treat the load.
-------
Ponds 293
Stop all flow to a pond when emptying it to remove bottom
deposits, repair inlet or outlet structures, or repair levees. Drain
by use of discharge valves or pump water from one pond to
other ponds. Try to feed the other ponds equally to prevent
them from becoming overloaded. Frequently there is a time lag
between the overloading of a pond and the development of
problems. Therefore, watch the other ponds and lab results
closely for any signs (odors, low pH, low DO, drop in alkalinity,
loss of green color) of potential problems developing.
9.79 Operating Strategy
In order to prevent your ponds from developing odors or
discharging an effluent in violation of the NPDES permit re-
quirements, you should develop a plan to keep your ponds
operating as intended.
A. Maintain constant water elevations in the ponds.
If your NPDES permit allows the discharge of a pond into
receiving waters, keep a constant water level to help maintain
constant loadings. When the water surface elevation starts to
drop, look for the following possible causes:
1. Discharge valve open too far or a STOP LOG12 is missing;
2. Levees leaking due to animal burrows, cracks, soil settle-
ment or erosion; and
3. Inlet lines plugged or restricted and causing wastewater to
back up into the collection system.
When the water surface starts to rise, look for:
1. Discharge valve closed or lines plugged, and
2. Sources of infiltration.
NOTE: Under some conditions you may not want to maintain
constant water levels in your ponds. For example, you
may allow the water surface to fluctuate to
1. Control shoreline aquatic vegetation,
2. Control mosquito breeding and burrowing rodents,
3. Handle fluctuating inflows, and
4. Regulate discharge (continuous, intermittent or
seasonal).
B. Distribute inflow equally to ponds.
All ponds designed to receive the flow should receive the
same hydraulic and organic (BOD) loadings.
C. Keep pond levees or dikes in good condition.
Proper maintenance of pond levees can be a time-saving
activity. Regularly inspect levees for leaks and erosion and
correct any problems before they become serious. If erosion is
a problem at the water line, install riprap. Do not allow weeds to
grow along the water line and keep weeds on the levee
mowed. If insect larvae are observed on the pond surface,
spray with an appropriate insecticide before problems develop.
D. Observe and test pond condition.
Daily visual observations can reveal if a pond is treating the
wastewater properly. The pond should be a deep green color
indicating a healthy algae population. Scum and floating
weeds should be removed to allow sunlight to reach the algae
in the pond.
Once or twice a week tests should be conducted to deter-
mine pond dissolved oxygen level, pH and temperature.
Effluent dissolved oxygen should be measured at this time
also. Other effluent tests should be conducted at least weekly
and include BOD, suspended solids, dissolved solids,
coliform-group bacteria and chlorine residual. If ponds are op-
erated on a batch or controlled discharge basis, these effluent
tests will have to be determined only during periods of dis-
charge.
During warm summer months algae populations tend to be
high and may cause high suspended solids concentrations in
the effluent. An advantage of ponds in arid regions is that this
is also a period of high evaporation rates. Under these condi-
tions effluent flows may drop to almost zero or may be
stopped. In the fall and winter when the weather is cool and
sunlight is reduced, the algae population in ponds and thus the
suspended solids are reduced. This situation could allow
ponds to meet effluent requirements during this period.
If test results reveal that certain water quality indicators
(such as DO, BOD, pH or suspended solids) are tending to
move in the wrong direction, try to identify the cause and take
corrective action. Remember that ponds are a biological pro-
cess and that changes resulting from corrective action may not
occur until a week or so after changes were made.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 314.
9.7I Why are the contents of ponds recirculated?
9.7J When do ponds that are operated on a batch basis
discharge?
9.7K What factors would you consider when developing an
operating strategy for ponds?
9.8 SURFACE AERATORS (Figs. 9.5 and 9.6 and Table
9.2)
Surface aerators have been used in two types of applica-
tions:
1. To provide additional air for ponds during the night, during
cold weather, or for overloaded ponds; and
2. To provide a mechanical aeration device for ponds oper-
ated as an aerated lagoon. Aerated lagoons operate like
activated sludge aeration tanks without returning any set-
tled activated sludge.
12 Stop Log. A log or board in an outlet box or device used to control the water level in ponds.
-------
294 Treatment Plants
Fig. 9.5 Surface aerator
(Permission of EIMCO)
-------
Ponds 295
MOTOR
POWER CABLE
GUY WIRE
PROPELLER
FLOAT
DRAFT TUBE
Fig. 9.6 Floating surface aerator
(Permission ol Aqua-Jet)
-------
296 Treatment Plants
PURPOSE OF AERATOR PARTS
Purpose
Introduces oxygen into pond.
Provides energy to drive
aerator.
TABLE 9.2
Part
1. Aerator
2. Electric Motor
3. Drive Reduction
Gear Box
4. Draft Tube
5. Discharge Guide
6. Jacking Screw
FLOATING AERATOR
7. Pontoons or Floats
8. Guy Wires
9. Power Cable
10. Propeller
(aerator)
Converts torque from motor to
move aerator.
Conveys bottom contents of
pond to surface for aeration.
Regulates spray patterns for
oxygen transfer to water.
Adjusts aerator impeller level
in water to regulate oxygen
transfer.
COMPONENTS (additional)
Provide platform for motor.
Positions floats in ponds and
are anchored to pond levee.
Conveys power to motor.
Pumps water into air to be
aerated.
In both cases, the aerators are operated by time clocks with
established on-off cycles. Laboratory tests on the dissolved
oxygen in a pond indicate the time period for on and off cycles
to maintain aerobic conditions in the surface layers of the
pond. Adjustments in the on-off cycles are necessary when
changes occur in the quantity and quality of the influent and
seasonal weather conditions. Some experienced operators
have correlated their lab test results to pond appearance and
regulate the on-off cycles using the following rule: "If the pond
has foam on the surface, reduce the operating time of the
aerator; and if there is no evidence of foam on the pond sur-
face, increase the operating time of the aerator." If there is a
trace of foam on the surface, the operating time is satisfactory.
Surface aerators may be either stationary or floating. Main-
tenance of surface aerators should be conducted in accord-
ance with manufacturer's recommendations. Always turn off,
tag, and lock out electric current when repairing surface
aerators. Special precautions may be necessary to handle
problems with icing and winter maintenance. Overhead guy
wires have been used to prevent aerators from turning over
when iced up.
Another method of aerating ponds is by the use of air com-
pressors connected to plastic tubes placed across the pond
bottom. Holes are drilled in the plastic tubes which serve as
diffusers to disperse air in the pond. This method of aeration
requires less equipment maintenance than surface aerators,
but diffusers can become plugged and create maintenance
problems.
9.9 SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS
9.90 Importance
Probably the most important sampling that can be accom-
plished easily by any operator is routine pH and dissolved
oxygen analysis. A good practice is to take pH, temperature,
and dissolved oxygen tests several times a week, and occa-
sionally during the night. These values should be recorded
because they will serve as a valuable record of performance.
The time of day should be varied occasionally for the tests so
that the operator becomes familiar with the pond's characteris-
tics at various times of the day. Usually the pH and dissolved
oxygen will be lowest just at sunrise. Both will get progressively
higher as the day goes on, reaching their highest level in late
afternoon.
Be very careful to avoid getting any atmospheric oxygen into
the sample taken to measure dissolved oxygen. This is most
necessary when samples are taken in the early morning or if
the dissolved oxygen in the pond is low from overloading. If
possible, measure the dissolved oxygen with an electric probe,
being careful not to allow the membrane on the end of the
probe to be exposed to the atmosphere.
Ponds often have clearly developed individuality, each being
a biological community that is unique unto itself. Apparently
identical adjacent ponds receiving the same influent in the
same amount often have a different pH and a different dis-
solved oxygen content at any given time. One pond may gen-
erate considerable scum while its neighbor doesn't have any
scum. For this reason, EACH pond should be given routine pH
and dissolved oxygen tests. Such testing may indicate an un-
equal loading because of the internal clogging of influent or
distribution lines that might not be apparent from visual inspec-
tion. Tests also may indicate differences or problems that are
being created by a build-up of solids or solids recycling.
When an operator becomes familiar with operating a pond,
the results of some of the chemical tests can be related to
visual observations. A deep green sparkling color generally
indicates a high pH and a satisfactory dissolved oxygen con-
tent. A dull green color or lack of color generally indicates a
declining pH and a lowered dissolved oxygen content. A grey
color indicates the pond is being overloaded or not working
properly.
9.91 Frequency and Location of Lab Samples
The frequency of testing and expected ranges of test results
vary considerably from pond to pond, but you should establish
those ranges within which your pond functions properly. Test
results will also vary during the hours of the day. Table 9.3
summarizes the typical tests, locations, and frequency of sam-
pling.
Samples should always be collected from the same point or
location. Raw wastewater samples for pond influent tests may
be collected either at the wet well of the influent pump station
or at the inlet control structure. Samples of pond effluent
should be collected from the outlet control structure or from a
well-mixed point in the outfall channel. Pond samples may be
taken from the four corners of the pond. The samples should
be collected from a point eight feet (2.5 m) out from the water's
edge and one foot (0.3 m) below the water surface. Be careful;
try not to stir up material from the pond bottom. Do not collect
pond samples during or immediately after high winds or storms
because solids will be stirred up after such activity.
-------
Ponds 297
TABLE 9.3 FREQUENCY AND LOCATION OF LAB
SAMPLES
Test
Frequency"1 Location
Common Range
pH®
Weekly
Pond
7.5+
Dissolved
Oxygen (DO)a
Weekly
Pond
4- 12 mg/L
Effluent
4- 12 mg/L
Temperature
Weekly
Pond
BOC*
Weekly
Influent
100 - 300 mg/L
Effluent
20- 50 mg/L
Coliform Group
Weekly
Effluent
MPN > 24,000/100 mL
Bacteria
Chlorine Residual
Daily
Effluent
0.5 - 2.0 mg/L
Suspended Solids6
Weekly
Influent
100 - 350 mg/L
Effluent
40 - 80 mg/L
Dissolved Solids
Weekly
Influent
250 - 800 mg/L
a pH values above 9.0 and DO levels over 15 mgIL are not uncom-
mon.
b Contact your regulatory agency to determine whether effluent
samples should be filtered to remove algae before testing. If the
samples must be filtered, the agency will recommend the proper
procedures.
c Effluent suspended solids consist of algae, microorganisms and
other suspended matter.
d Tests may be less frequent for ponds with long detention times
(greater than 100 days).
BOD should be measured on a weekly basis. Samples
should be taken during the day at low flow, medium flow, and
high flow. The average of these three tests will give a reason-
able indication of the organic load of the wastewater being
treated. If it is suspected that the BOD varies sharply during
the day or from day to day, or if unusual circumstances exist,
the sampling frequency should be increased to obtain a clear
definition of the variations. If the pond DO level is supersatu-
rated (see Chapter 16, section on DO tests), the sample must
be aerated to remove the excess oxygen before the BOD test
is performed. A typical data sheet for a plant consisting mainly
of ponds is provided in the Appendix at the end of this chapter.
Figure 9.7 shows the influent and effluent BOD and suspended
solids values from an actual pond.
A GRAB SAMPLE13 is a single sample. Grab samples are
used to measure temperature, pH, dissolved oxygen and
chlorine residual. These tests must be performed immediately
after the sample is collected in order to obtain accurate results.
COMPOSITE SAMPLES14 of pond influent or effluent are col-
lected by gathering individual samples at regular intervals over
a selected period of time. The individual samples are then
mixed together proportionally to the flow at the time of sam-
pling. Pond samples may be composited by mixing equal por-
tions from the four corners of the pond. Composite samples
should be placed in a refrigerator or ice box as soon as possi-
ble after they are collected. BOD and suspended solids are
measured using composite samples.
Tests of pH, DO, and temperature are important indicators of
the condition of the pond, whereas BOD, coliform, and solids
tests measure the efficiency of the pond in treating wastes.
BOD is also used to calculate the loading on the pond.
In order to estimate the organic loading on the pond, the
operator must have some knowledge of the biochemical oxy-
gen demand (BOD) of the waste and the approximate average
daily flow. Influent BOD and solids will vary with time of day,
day of week, and season, but a pond is a good equalizer if not
overloaded.
Tests for pond alkalinity can provide helpful information to an
operator. After you have determined "normal" alkalinity levels
for your pond, a sudden change in alkalinity of 10 to 20 mg/L or
more may indicate that a problem is developing. A change in
alkalinity may be a warning that the pH of the pond could
change in a day or two if corrective action is not taken. If a
trend in changes in alkalinity continues in one direction for two
or three days, the cause of this change should be identified.
For useful results, the alkalinity test should be performed every
day.
9.92 Expected Treatment Efficiencies1 s
Table 9.4 is provided as a guide to indicate probable re-
moval efficiencies of typical ponds.
13 Grab Sample. A single sample taken at neither a set time nor flow.
14 Composite (Proportional) Sample (com-POZ-lt). A composite sample Is a collection of Individual samples obtained at regular Intervals,
usually every one or two hours during a 24-hour time span. Each Individual sample Is combined with the others in proportion to the flow when
the sample was collected. The resulting mixture (composite sample) forms a representative sample and is analyzed to determine the
average conditions during the sampling period.
u
Waste Removal, % = (ln' °ut) x 100%
In
See page 299 for example.
-------
600 - -
400 ¦ -
£
8*
«8
O
O
m
H
Z
UJ
3
_J
u.
z
5 200
E
O*
Q
»-
Z
UJ
3
u.
HI
UJ
3
_i
u.
UL
UJ
MOVING AVERAGE
INFLUENT SS
^INFLUENT BOD
EFFLUENT DO
^EFFLUENT SS
•' V
A—-EFFLUENT BOD
100
25 30
WEEK OF THE YEAR
Fig. 9.7 Pond influent and effluent BOD and suspended solids
values
-------
Ponds 299
TABLE 9.4 EXPECTED RANGES OF REMOVAL BY
PONDS
Detention Time
Expected Removal15
BOD
50 to 90%
BOD (FACULTATIVE POND)™
50 to
60 days
70 to 80%"
Coliform Bacteria
50 to
60 days
90 to 95%
(facultative pond)
Suspended Solids
After
3 days
90%
Dissolved Organic Solids
After
10 days
80%
The calculation of pond BOD removal efficiency is figured in
terms of the percentage of BOD removed.
Example:
The influent BOD to a series of ponds is 300 mg/L, and the
effluent BOD is 60 mg/L. What is the efficiency of BOD re-
moval?
BOD Removal, % = (ln' 0ut) x 100%
In
= (300 mg/L - 60 mg/L) x 100%
300 mg/L
= 240 x 100%
300 mg/L
= 0.80 x 100%
= 80%
9.93 Response to Poor Pond Performance
See Section 9.7, "Daily Operation and Maintenance," espe-
cially 9.75, "Some Operating Hints."
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 314.
9.8A Surface aerators have been used in what two types of
applications?
9.9A If the color of a pond is dull green or colorless, what is
happening in the pond?
9.9B Why should the pH, temperature, and dissolved oxygen
be measured in a pond?
9.9C If the pH and dissolved oxygen are dropping danger-
ously low in a pond, how can this situation be cor-
rected?
9.9D Influent BOD to a series of ponds is 200 mg/L. If the
BOD in the effluent of the last pond is 40 mg/L, what is
the BOD removal efficiency?
9.10 SAFETY
Even though a pond has little mechanical equipment, there
still are hazards. Catwalks should have guardrails and non-
skid walking surfaces. Headworks and any enclosed appurte-
nances should be well ventilated to prevent dangerous gas
accumulations.
WARNING
AN OPERATOR •SHOULD AUVVAVS
AOroAAPAWlEP \ HeLP&C WHtN
PECFOEMlMca ANAV TA^ THACV t-O
(7ANSeeoU6 ^IWCB POMP LOCATION'S
ACE U^UAHV QUITE IS.OL-AT&P.
Be very careful when removing debris from channels and
ponds. Do not attempt to lift too much. Make certain you have
secure footing so you won't slip and fall. Never stand in a boat
or lean over too far to one side, for you could fall into the pond
and also possibly tip over the boat. Always wear a life jacket
when in a boat.
Electrical wires and electrical equipment are always a
source of potential danger. Exercise caution when cutting
weeds or removing vegetation such as trees next to electrical
wires. Electrical wires in damp areas can be dangerous. Be
careful when spraying weeds around electrical wires and
equipment because the spray could act as a conductor. Al-
ways turn off, tag, and lock out electric current when repairing
surface aerators and other equipment operated by electricity.
When applying pesticides or herbicides, be sure they are
approved by the appropriate officials for your specific use and
FOLLOW THE DIRECTIONS EXACTLY. This includes follow-
ing the directions for using the proper mixing or preparing the
solution, applying the solution, disposing of any excess solu-
tion and the containers, and cleaning up before you go home.
Not only can you kill the target pest or weed, but carelessness
can harm nearby grasses, plants, trees, fishes, birds and even
people, including yourself. Also failure to follow directions may
result in harm to the algae and microorganisms in the pond.
Tetanus and typhoid are ever-present dangers when work-
ing around wastewater. Adequate precautions should be ob-
served by cleaning all cuts and scrapes and always washing
before eating or smoking.
Fences should surround ponds to keep unauthorized per-
sons and animals out of the pond area. They should be located
in such a manner that they will not interfere with mechanical or
hand maintenance of levee slopes.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 314.
9.1 OA What safety devices should be provided on catwalks
over ponds?
9.10B Why should an operator be accompanied by a helper
when performing any dangerous task?
BMP Of Li¥>OU %
Of %
ON
wweiftAHmrtbnc*i
Please answer the discussion and review questions before
continuing with Lesson 3.
16 Facultative Pond (FACK-ul-tay-tive). The most common type of pond in current use. The upper portion (supernatant) is aerobic while the
bottom layer is anaerobic. Algae supply most of the oxygen to the supernatant.
17 Expected removal approximately 80 percent of the time with poorer removals during the remainder of the time.
-------
300 Treatment Plants
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
Chapter 9. WASTE TREATMENT PONDS
(Lesson 2 of 3 Lessons)
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 314.
6. Why should water be introduced into a new pond before
any wastewater?
7. Why is good housekeeping an important factor in operat-
ing a properly functioning pond?
8. What precautions should be taken when applying an in-
secticide?
9. Why may chlorine compounds or chlorine solution not be
the best method of odor control in a pond?
10. What lab tests measure the condition of a pond?
11. Estimate the BOD removal efficiency of a series of ponds
if the influent BOD is 250 mgIL and the effluent BOD is 50
mgIL.
12. Why should fences be placed around ponds?
CHAPTER 9. WASTE TREATMENT PONDS
(Lesson 3 of 3 Lessons)
9.11 REVIEW OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A careful review of the plans and specifications of a pro-
posed pond can provide the operator an opportunity to suggest
design improvements and changes before construction which
will allow the operator and the ponds to do a better job.
Guidelines for reviewing plans and specifications are provided
in this section. If you are having trouble with an existing pond
or ponds, check the items discussed in this section for help in
locating possible sources of problems.
9.110 Location
The general considerations for the location of other types of
wastewater treatment plants also apply to the location of
ponds. Isolation should be as great as can be economically
provided. Attention to the direction of prevailing winds with due
regard for present and projected downwind residential, com-
mercial, and recreational development is of utmost impor-
tance.
Winds can have both favorable and unfavorable impacts on
ponds. Winds are desirable in terms of blowing surface scum
and weeds to one side of the pond where they can be re-
moved. Also winds can be helpful by mixing the contents of a
pond, such as DO, algae and incoming wastes. An undesirable
aspect of winds is the creation of waves which can erode the
pond levee. Both of these factors should be considered when
selecting the location of the ponds and the arrangement or
length of the ponds. If high winds are to be expected in the
area where ponds will be constructed, try to arrange the ponds
so the winds will blow across the short width of the pond rather
than the length in order to reduce levee erosion caused by
waves.
9.111 Chemistry of Waste
Before the design of any pond is undertaken, it should be
determined whether there are any POSSIBLE TOXIC18 EF-
FECTS (interfere with growth of algae or bacteria) from the
waste. Some natural water supplies may have a high sulfur
content or other chemicals that limit the possibility of desired
sludge decomposition.
Certain wastes, such as dairy products and wine products,
are difficult to treat because of their low pH. Any processing
waste must be carefully investigated before one can be certain
that it can be successfully treated by ponding. Some process
wastes contain powerful fungicides and disinfectants that may
have a great inhibitive effect on the biological activity in a pond.
Other wastes may have nutrient deficiencies that could inhibit
the growth of desirable types of algae.
9.112 Headworks and Screening
A headworks with a bar screen is desirable to remove rags,
bones, and other large objects that might lodge in pipes or
control structures.
A trash shredder is a luxury that may not be warranted. Any
material that gets past an adequate bar screen will, in all prob-
ability not harm the influent pump. Any fecal matter will be
pulverized when going through the pump.
9.113 Row-Measuring Devices
An influent-measuring device should be installed to give a
direct reading on the daily volume of wastes that are intro-
duced into the ponds. This information, along with a BOD
measurement of the influent, is required to estimate the or-
ganic loading on the pond. Comparison of influent and effluent
flow rates is necessary for estimating percolation and evapora-
tion losses.
A measuring device provides basic data for prediction of
future plant expansion needs or for detecting unauthorized or
abnormal flows. Reliable, well-kept records on flow volume
help justify budgets and greatly assist an engineer's design of
a plant expansion or new installation.
18 Toxic (TOX-Ick). Poisonous.
-------
Ponds 301
9.114 Inlet and Outlet Structures
Inlet structures should be simple, foolproof, and constructed
of standard manufactured articles so that replacement parts
are readily available. Telescoping friction-fit tubes (see Fig.
9.8) for regulating spill or discharge height should be avoided
because a biological growth may become attached and pre-
vent the tubes from telescoping if they are not cleaned regu-
larly. Occasional dosages of hypochlorite solution can effec-
tively discourage growths. Also the formation of ice can pre-
vent adjustment of the tubes. If freezing is a problem, a
polyethelyne floating ring around the friction tube of the tele-
scopic valve sprayed with urea can prevent freeze-ups. This
device will act as a floating baffle to keep scum and floating
debris from clogging up the tube and entering the effluent.
Figure 9.1 (page 282) shows four inlets to one pond. With
this type of installation, usually only one inlet valve is open at a
time. If all the valves were open, velocities in the pipes might
become too low and solids would settle out in the pipes. To
overcome low velocities, close all but one valve or recycle
pond effluent back to the inlet. When all inlet valves are open,
the load is more evenly distributed throughout the pond.
A submerged inlet will minimize the occurrence of floating
material and will help conserve the heat of the pond by intro-
ducing the warmer wastewater into the depths of the pond.
Warm wastewater introduced at the bottom of a cold water
mass will channel to the surface and spread unless it is
promptly and vigorously mixed with cold water. Warm waste-
water spilled onto the surface of the pond will spread out in a
thin layer on the surface and not contribute to the warmth of the
lower regions of the pond where heat is needed for bacterial
decomposition. Inlet and outlet structures should be so located
in relation to each other to minimize possible short-circuiting.
Outlet structures (Figs. 9.9 and 9.10) should consist of a
baffled and submerged pipe inlet to prevent scum and other
floating surface material from leaving the pond. The actual
level of the pond and rate of outflow can be controlled by the
use of flashboards in the outlet structure. A row boat may be
used when access to the outlet baffle in Figure 9.9 is required.
Valves that have stems extending into the stream flow
should be avoided. Stringy material and rags will collect, form
an obstruction, and may render the valve inoperative.
Free overfalls (Fig. 9.11) at the outlet should be avoided to
minimize release of odors, foaming, and gas entrapment which
may hamper pipe flows. Free overfalls should be converted to
submerged outfalls if they are causing nuisances and other
problems.
If a pond has a surface outlet, floating material can be kept
out of the effluent by building a simple baffle around the outlet.
The baffle can be constructed of wood or other suitable mate-
rial. This baffle should be securely supported or anchored.
9.115 Levees
The selection of the steepness of the levee slope must de-
pend on several variables. A steep slope erodes quicker from
wave wash unless the levee material is of a rocky nature or
else protected by riprap. However, a steep slope minimizes
waterline weed growth. Equipment operation and the perform-
ance of routine maintenance are more difficult on steep slopes.
A gentle slope will erode the least from wave wash. Also, it is
easier to operate equipment and easier to perform routine
maintenance on a gentle slope. However, waterline weed
growth will have a much greater opportunity to flourish.
Ensure that provisions are made to adequately compact
and/or seal the levee banks to prevent leaking. Pipes passing
through levees should be as close to horizontal as possible to
reduce the possibility of leaks. Also cut-off walls should be
installed when pipes pass through levees to prevent leakage
around the outside of the pipes. Proper compaction and seal-
ing is necessary around pipes, SPLASH PADS,™ cleanouts,
valves, inlet and outlet control structures, and also recircula-
tion, transfer and drain lines. Once a leak develops, stopping it
can be very difficult.
The top of the levee should be at least ten feet (3.1 m) wide
to allow for maintenance vehicles. Provisions should be made
for a rounded or sloping top to allow for drainage. Pave or
gravel the levee surface if it will be used as a roadway during
wet weather.
9.116 Pond Depths
The operational depth of ponds deserves considerable at-
tention. Depending upon conditions, ponds of less than three
feet (1 m) of depth may be completely aerobic if there are no
solids on the bottom (unlikely) because oi tne depth of sunlight
penetration. This means that the treatment of wastes is ac-
complished essentially by converting the wastes to algae cell
material. Ponds of this shallow depth with short detention times
are apt to be irregular in performance because algae blooms
will increase to such proportions that a mass die-off will occur.
When this happens, all algae sink to the bottom and thereby
add to the organic load. Such conditions could lead to the
creation of an anaerobic pond. The bottoms of shallow ponds
will become anaerobic when solids collect on the bottom and
after sunset.
Discharges from shallow, aerobic ponds contain large
amounts of algae. To operate efficiently, these ponds should
have some means of removing the algae grown in the pond
before the effluent is discharged to the receiving waters. If the
algae are not removed from the effluent, the organic matter in
the wastewater is not removed or treated and the problem is
merely transferred to some downstream pool. See Section
9.12, "Removal of Algae from Pond Effluents," for a discussion
of possible methods of algae removal.
An observed phenomenon of lightly loaded, shallow secon-
dary ponds and tertiary ponds is that they are apt to become
infested with filamentous algae and mosses that not only limit
the penetration of sunlight into the pond, but hamper circula-
tion of the pond's contents and clog inlet and outlet structures.
When the loading is increased, this condition improves be-
cause these algae and mosses require relatively clean water
(low nutrients) for their environment.
Pond depths of four feet (1.2 m) or more allow a greater
conservation of heat from the incoming wastes. This encour-
ages biological activity as the ratio between pond volume and
jmnri arag h mrra fpunrahin In facultative ponds. depths over
four feet 11.2 m) nrnvida physical storage for dissolved oxygen
accumulated during the day. The stored dissolved oxvoen car-
ries over through the night when no oxygen is released by the
algae, unless floating algae and poor circulation keep all the
oxygen near the surface. This physical storage of DO is very
important during the colder months when nights are long.
i» Splash Pad. A structure made of concrete or other durable material to protect bare soil from erosion by splashing or falling water.
-------
302 Treatment Plants
THREADED STEM
WHEEL HANDLE
VALVE BOX
V-NOTCH
FRICTION FIT
BETWEEN PIPES
POND
OUTLET
Fig. 9.8 Telescoping friction-fit tubes for regulating discharge.
These tubes must be exercised regularly to prevent becoming
stuck.
-------
VALVE
HANDLE
<>
OUTLET
BAFFLE
FLASH
BOARDS
SUBMERGED
PIPE INLET
TO OUTLET
STRUCTURE
OUTLET
VALVE
Fig. 9.9 Pond outlet structure
-------
304 Treatment Plants
FLASH
BOARDS
OUTLET PIPE
Fig. 9.10, Pond outlet control structure
-------
Ponds 305
M.
FOAM
STREAM
POND
FREE OVERFALL--UNDESIRABLE
SCUM BAFFLE
POND
STREAM
SUBMERGED OUTLET--NO FOAMING PROBLEMS
Fig. 9.11 Free overfall and submerged outlet
-------
306 Treatment Plants
A pond operating depth of at least three feet (1 m) is recom-
mended to prevent tule and cattail growth. Weeds that emerge
along the shore line can be effectively controlled by spraying
with any of several products available. Ponds designed for
depths less than three feet (1 m) should be lined to prevent
troublesome weed growth.
9.117 Fencing and Signs
The pond area must be surrounded by a fence capable of
keeping livestock out and discouraging trespassing. A gate
wide enough to allow mowing equipment and other mainte-
nance vehicles to enter the pond facility should be provided. All
access gates should have locks.
Signs should be posted along the fence around the ponds to
indicate the nature of the facility and to forbid trespassing. The
signs should not be more than 300 feet apart.
9.118 Surface Aerators
Provisions must be made for easy access and sufficient
space for maintenance and repair of fixed aerators. Alternate
anchor points should be installed in order to move floating
aerators. Also be sure the electrical cables are long enough to
permit easy movement of the aerator and large enough to
handle anticipated loads.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 314.
9.11A Why are some wastes not easily treated by ponds?
9.11B What is the minimum recommended pond operating
depth?
9.11C Why should the inlet to a pond be submerged?
9.11D Why should the outlet be submerged?
9.11E How could problems created by a surface outlet be
reduced or corrected?
9.11F Why should free overfalls be avoided?
9.11G Why are shallow ponds apt to be irregular in perform-
ance?
9.11H Why should the influent to a pond be metered?
9.119 Pond Loading (English and Metric Calculations)
The waste loading on a pond is generally spoken of in rela-
tion to its area, and may be stated in several different ways:
1. lbs of BOD per day per acre = lbs BOD/day/acre (This is
called "organic loading.");
2. inches (or feet) of depth added per day (This is called "hy-
draulic loading" or "overflow rate."); or
3. persons (or population served) per acre (This is called
"population loading.").
Detention time is related directly to pond hydraulic loading,
which is actually the rate of inflow of wastewater. It may be
expressed as million gallons per day (MGD), or as the number
of acre-inches per day or acre-feet per day (one acre-foot
covers one acre to a depth of one foot or twelve inches and is
equal to 43,560 cu ft). We must know the pond volume in order
to determine detention time; this is most easily computed on an
acre-foot basis.
A. Detention Time
Detention (in days) = Pond Volume
Influent Rate (ac-ft/day)
This equation does not take into consideration water which
may be lost through evaporation or percolation. Detention time
may vary from 30 to 120 days, depending on the treatment
requirements to be met. Controlled discharge ponds may have
minimum detention times of 180 days. Ponds whose dis-
charges are disposed of by land application may have 210-day
minimum detention times.
B. Population Loading
Loading calculated on a population-sej^gd hasip is ex-
pressed simpiyasT~ — ¦
No. of Persons per Acrs_= Population Served, persons
Area of Pond, ac
The population loading may vary from 50 to 500 persons per
acre, depending on many local factors.
C. Hydraulic Loading
The hydraulic loading or overflow rate is expressed as:
Inches per day = Inflow (ac-in per day)
Pond Area, ac
The hydraulic loading may vary from half an inch to several
inches per day, depending on the organic load of the influent.
NOTE: If the wastewater inflow rate is known in million gallons
per day (MGD), it can be converted to an equivalent
number of acre-inches per day as follows:
Inflow, acre-inches per day = (Inflow, MGD) x 36.820
If the pond detention time is known, the hydraulic loading
can also be calculated, as follows:
Inches per day = Depth of Pond, in
Detention Time, days
D. Organic Loading
The organic loading is expressed as:
Organic Load
(lbs BOD per= (BOD, mgIL) (Flow, MGD) (8.34 lbs/gal)21
Per acre> Pond area, ac
Typical organic loadings may range from 10 to 50 lbs BOD
per day per acre. Recirculation will help an overloaded pond.
20 , mgd = 1 >000,000 gal x 1 cu ft x 1 ac x 12 in = 36g acjn
day 7.48 gal 43,560 sq ft 1 ft day
21 Recall lbs/day = (Cone. mglM mg) (M gal/day) (8.34 lbs/gal)
-------
Ponds 307
EXAMPLE CALCULATIONS
NOTE TO OPERATOR: If you have difficulty following the
work shown in Example 1 below, you should refer to Section
9.16, "Pond Attachment," at the end of this chapter for further
details. If you have no trouble, continue with the lesson.
EXAMPLE NO. 1:
Use of the pond loading formulas can be illustrated by exam-
ining a typical situation. The following data should be obtained
so that all the calculations can be performed:
Essential Data
1. Depth of Pond = 4 feet
2. Width of Pond
Bottom =412 feet
Water Surface = 428 feet
Average Width = 420 feet
3. Length of Pond
Bottom = 667 feet
Water Surface = 683 feet
Average Length = 675 feet
4. Side Slopes s.
-------
308 Treatment Plants
the procedures for Example 1 and try to apply them to Example
2.
Suppose that a small wastewater treatment plant must be
completely shut down for major repairs that will require several
months of work. Enough vacant land is near the plant to enable
16 acres of temporary ponds to be constructed as raw waste-
water (sewage) lagoons. Determine if this is feasible, given the
following data:
Influent Rate = 1 MGD
Influent BOD = 150 mg/L
= 150 lbs BOD per million lbs of wastewater
Pond Area =16 acres
Average Operating = 42 inches = 42 in = 3.5 ft
DePth 12 in/ft
Assume that at least a 60-day detention period (average
time the wastewater must take to flow through the pond for
disinfection) is desired for bacterial die-off.
Assume that the organic loading (BOD) should not exceed
50 lbs per day per acre.
Calculate what the WASTE DETENTION TIME would be in
the pond:
One acre-foot = 325,829 gallons
Pond Volume, ac-ft = Pond Area, ac x Pond Depth, ft
= 16 ac x 3.5 ft
= 56 ac-ft
Influent Flow Rate = 1,000,000 gals per day
= 1,000,000 gpd
325,829 gal/ac-ft
= 3.07 ac-ft per day
56 ac-ft
Detention Time
3.07 ac-ft per day
18.2 days
Organic Loading,
lbs BOD/day
Thus the detention time would not be sufficient to satisfy
requirements. Increasing the depth to 5 feet would help.
Calculate the organic loading:
(BOD, mg/L) (Flow, MGD) (8.34 lbs/gal)
= (150 mg/L) (1 MGD) (8.34 lbs/gal)
= 1250 lbs BOD per day
The organic loading per acre of pond would be:
Organic Loading, _ Loading, lbs BOD/day
lbs BOD/day/ac Area, ac
_ 1250 lbs BOD per day
Therefore, the organic loading would exceed the desired
maximum of 50 lbs BOD/day/acre.
QUESTION
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on pages 314 and 315.
9.111 Given a pond receiving a flow of 2.0 MGD from 20,000
people. Influent BOD is 180 mg/L. Pond area is 24
acres, and the average operating depth is four feet.
Determine the detention time, organic loading, popula-
tion loading, and hydraulic loading.
EXAMPLE METRIC CALCULATIONS
EXAMPLE NO. 1
Use of the pond loading formulas can be illustrated by exam-
ining a typical situation. The following data should be obtained
so that all calculations can be performed:
Essential Data
1. Depth of Pond = 2.0 meters
2. Width of Pond
Bottom = 125 meters
Water Surface = 133 meters
Average Width = 129 meters
3. Length of Pond
Bottom = 200 meters
Water Surface = 208 meters
Average Length= 204 meters
^rPOND SURFACE
'"En
4. Side Slopes
(2 ft horizontal
to 1 ft vertical) = 2:1 2
16 ac
= 78.1 lbs BOD/day/ac
5. Influent Flow = 800 cubic meters per day
6. Influent BOD = 200 mg/i.
7. Population = 2000 persons
To calculate the loading criteria, first determine the pond
area and volume.
I. POND AREA, SQUARE METERS
Pond Area, sq m = (Average Width, m) (Average Length, m)
= (129 m) (204 m)
= 26,316 sq m
II. POND VOLUME, CUBIC METERS
Volume, cum = (Area, sq m) (Depth, m)
= (26,316 sq m) (2 m)
= 52,632 cu m
-------
Ponds 309
III. LOADING CRITERIA
1. DETENTION TIME
Pond Volume, cu m
Detention Time,
days
Flow Rate, cu m/day
52,632 cu m
800 cu m/day
= 66 days
2. POPULATION LOADING
Number of
Persons
per square
meter
Population Served by Sewer System, persons
Pond Area, sq m
2000 persons
26,316 sq m
= .076 persons/sq m
NOTE: If there is a significant waste flow from industry mixed
in with the domestic waste, an adjustment must be made to
take the industrial waste into consideration. This is usually
done by analyzing the industrial waste and converting it to a
population equivalent.
3. HYDRAULIC LOADING (OVERFLOW RATE)
Centimeters = Depth of Pond, cu m
P®r ^ Detention Time, days
_ (Depth, 2 m) (100 cm/m)
66 days
= 3.03 cm/day
4. ORGANIC LOADING
Organic Load, _ (BOO, mg/L) (Flow, cu m/day) (1 gm/1000 mg) (1000 Ucu m)
gm BOD/Day/sq m ~ :
" Area, sq m
200 mg/L x 800 cu m/day x 1 gm/1000 mg x 1000 L/cu m
26,316 sq m
= 6.1 gm BOO/day/sq m
EXAMPLE NO. 2:
Suppose that a small wastewater treatment plant must be
completely shut down for major repairs that will require several
months of work. Enough vacant land is near the plant to enable
65,000 square meters of temporary ponds to be constructed as
raw wastewater (sewage) lagoons. Determine if this is feasi-
ble, given the following data:
Influent Rate
Influent BOD
Pond Area
= 4,000 cu m/day
= 150 mg//.
= 65,000 square meters
Average Operating = 12 meters
Depth
Assume that at least a 60-day detention period (average
time the wastewater must take to flow through the pond for
disinfection) is desired for bacterial die-off.
Assume that the organic loading (BOD) should not exceed 5
grams per day per square meter.
Calculate what the WASTE DETENTION TIME would be in
the pond.
Pond Volume, cu m = Pond Area, sq m x Pond Depth, m
= 65,000 sq m x 1.2 m
= 78,000 cu m
Influent Flow Rate = 4,000 cu m/ddy
Detention Time, = Pond Volume, cu m
days Influent Flow, cu m/day
_ 78,000 cu m
4,000 cu m/day
19.5 days
Thus the detention time would not be sufficient to satisfy
requirements. Increasing the depth to 3.5 meters would help.
Calculate the organic loading:
^gir^BOCVday9 =
= (150 mg/L) (4000 cu m/day) (1 gm/1000 mg) (1000 L/cu m)
= 600,000 gm BOD per day
The organic loading per square meter of pond area would
be:
Organic Loading = Loading, gm BOD/day
gm BOD/day/sq m Area, sq m
_ 600,000 gm BOD/day
65,000 sq m
= 9.2 gm BOD/day/sq m
Therefore, the organic loading would exceed the desired
maximum of 5 gms BOD/day/acre.
9.12 ELIMINATING ALGAE FROM POND EFFLUENTS
Algae are usually present in the effluent from ponds with
continuous discharges. Algae can create undesirable impacts
on the receiving waters in terms of a loss of esthetic values,
increased turbidity, suspended solids and biochemical oxygen
demand, and also the development of nuisance conditions. In
most areas, the algae in the effluent increase the suspended
solids concentration to the point that the NPDES effluent limita-
tion on total suspended solids is exceeded, thus resulting in a
permit violation.
Researchers have attempted to develop cost-effective
treatment processes for removing algae from pond effluents.
These efforts have included the . use of centrifuges, chemical
coagulation, filtration, microstraining, magnetic separation,
and ultrafiltration. Although some of these processes have
been very effective, none of these techniques have achieved a
high level of acceptance due to the increased treatment costs
associated with the process. Two new processes appear to
have considerable potential for application — (1) pond isola-
tion, and (2) water hyacinth culture. Both of these biological
processes appear to be effective and fairly easy to operate and
maintain if the proper environmental conditions can be devel-
oped.
9.120 Pond Isolation
Pond isolation consists of the construction of one or two
additional ponds in sufficient size to hold at least 20 days of
flow. Proper operating procedures and necessary pond condi-
tions are still being researched at this time.
For additional information on the operation and maintenance
of isolation ponds, contact:
Professor William J. Oswald
University of California at Berkeley
Sanitary Engineering Research Laboratory
Berkeley, California 94720
-------
310 Treatment Plants
9.121 Water Hyacinth Culture
The water hyacinth is a large floating aquatic plant that can
quickly cover the water surface of shallow ponds under proper
conditions. Hyacinths are resistant to insects and disease, but
are sensitive to high salinity and low temperature.
Studies in Texas reveal that water hyacinth cultures can
effectively reduce the five-day biochemical oxygen demand
(BODs) and suspended solids (SS) in the effluent from faculta-
tive ponds. Alaae are removed from nnnrt effli iftnts hy water
hyacinth cultures because the hyacinths remove fmtriepts from
the~efflueritsTand afso" because the hyacinths-cover the water
SOTTace and prevent the algie froiri receiving any energy from
sunlight.. Thus, without nutrients and energy, the algae will"
become inactive and settle to the bottom of the hyacinth cul-
ture unit.
In a 30-foot by 210-foot (9 m by 63 m) pilot system operated
at an approximate depth of three feet (1 m) with a detention
time of five days and a flow rate of 20 gallons per minute
(1.2 Lis), removals of biochemical oxygen demand (BOD5)
and total suspended solids (TSS) were as follows:
BOD5, mgIL
TSS, mg/L
First Phase
In Out
22.5 5.2
43.0 7.0
Second Phase
In Out
46.5 5.7
117.0 7.5
The first phase ran from June, 1975, into February, 1976,
and the second from May through August, 1976.
Water hyacinth culture is feasible in regions where the cli-
mate is suitable. The plants are killed in a matter of hours when
surface water temperatures approach freezing, but active
growth will begin again when surface water temperatures ap-
proach 50°F (10°C).
Seasonal operation of water hyacinth culture ponds is pos-
sible in regions where conditions do not permit continuous
operation. During the off season, the wastewater would have
to be stored. Many ponds are allowed to discharge periodically
so facilities may already be available for storage. As a guide,
weather conditions suitable for the growing of water hyacinths
are similar to those for planting and growing corn.
At least two specially-engineered water hyacinth culture
ponds similar to the one shown in Figure 9.12 should be pro-
vided. Structures capable of preventing the escape of the
water hyacinths must be provided. If hyacinths escape and
cause problems in receiving waters, they should be contained
and controlled. Each culture pond should be drained and
cleaned once a year.
Provisions must be made to maintain a seed stock of water
hyacinths during the winter in the colder climates where stor-
age of wastewater is necessary. Reseed when water tempera-
tures increase to 50°F (10°C) in the spring. In ponds where
there is a continuous flow of influent, normal temperatures of
raw wastewaters are usually warm enough. Also,
greenhouses, solar panels, or cooling waters may provide suf-
ficient heat to maintain the water hyacinth culture during the
cool winter season. Digester gas, if available, can be burned to
heat water to maintain the culture. Another problem with water
hyacinths is the fact that odor problems have occurred at night
when photosynthesis stops.
Annually, water hyacinth culture ponds should be drained
and the plants and accumulated debris should be removed. In
areas where year-round production is feasible, at least two
culture units should be provided. Each one should be of
adequate size to treat the entire plant flow. Alternate operation
of culture ponds permits one to be drained and allowed to dry.
Dried plants and debris can be removed using either a
front-end loader or hay-baling equipment. Harvested dried
plants may be spread on farmland and plowed under for soil
improvement. Harvested plants also may be composted for
use in parks or disposed of in sanitary landfills. After the culture
pond has been cleaned, fill with water and add a few water
hyacinths from another culture pond.
For additional information on the operation and maintenance
of water hyacinth cultures, contact;
Mr. Ray Dinges
Health Program Specialist
Division of Wastewater Technology
and Surveillance
Texas Department of Health Resources
1100 West 49th Street
Austin, Texas 78756
9.13 ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Liberal use has been made of the many papers presented by
Professor W.J. Oswald of the University of California at Berke-
ley on the subject of the treatment of wastes by ponding.
9.14 ADDITIONAL READING
1. MOP 11, Chapter 13,* "Stabilization Lagoons."
2. NEW YORK MANUAL, page 71, "Stabilization Ponds."
3. TEXAS MANUAL, Chapter 16, "Stabilization Ponds."
4. STABILIZATION POND OPERATION AND MAINTE-
NANCE MANUAL, prepared by Minnesota Pollution Con-
trol Agency. Available from National Environmental Train-
ers Association, 158 South Napoleon Street, P.O. Box 346,
Valparaiso, Indiana 46383. Price $10.00
5. HOW TO IDENTIFY AND CONTROL WATER WEEDS AND
ALGAE, available from the Brown Deer Company, 9600 N.
Garden Drive, Mequon, Wisconsin 53092. Price $4.95.
6. STABILIZATION PONDS, AN OPERATIONS MANUAL by
Chuck Zickefoose and R.B. Joe Hayes for the Municipal
Operations Branch, Office of Water Program Operations,
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, D C
20460, August 1977.
7. "Advanced Wastewater Treatment Natures Way" (Water
Hyacinth) ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND TECHNOL-
OGY, Vol. 12, No. 9, September 1978, p. 1013.
'Depends on edition.
9.15 METRIC CALCULATIONS
Refer to Section 9.119, "Pond Loading," for metric calcula-
tions.
END OF LESSON 3 of 3 LESSONS
on
WASTE TREATMENT PONDS
Please answer the discussion and review questions before
working the Objective Test.
-------
Ponds
HYACINTH CULTURE UNIT
INFLUENT.
ISI
8
iuwuwui-h-Imi-ju i—( i—^ C-tta i—t i
T
DRAIN CHANNEL
INLET WEIR
DRAIN SUMP
~
ENTRY-EXIT
IIS
RAMP
5
TRANSFER PIPE
SLOTTED
>OUTLET PIPE % ||
~A-' v Cw't ? V I* *.1 > •»y?
*3>
ROCK
BARRIER
\
. . .
DRAIN
8
EFFLUENT
ifisili
!j >¦! v"'
INLET SIDE VIEW
Influent Inlet Weir
j/
5V y.y.VV.1.: V'Vj KllK j V ', » A s" "I" ' -'™
fT^ ¦ *'/ "*i V., - -
f " «
)
Drain Channel
Fig. 9.12 Water hyacinth culture unit
-------
312 Treatment Plants
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
Chapter 9. WASTE TREATMENT PONDS
(Lesson 3 of 3 Lessons)
Write the answers to these questions in your notebook be-
fore continuing. The problem numbering continues from Les-
son 2.
13. Why is it desirable for a pond to be isolated from neigh-
bors?
14. How can scum be prevented from leaving a pond?
15. How can erosion of levee slopes be controlled?
A pond receives an inflow of 0.01 MGD from 100 people.
The pond is 150 feet long, 150 feet wide, and 4 feet deep.
Influent BOD is 200 mgIL. Determine the following loading
criteria:
16. Detention time in days;
17. Population loading in persons per acre;
18. Hydraulic loading in inches per day; and
19. Organic loading in pounds of BOD applied per day per
acre.
PLEASE WORK THE OBJECTIVE TEST NEXT.
9.16 POND ATTACHMENT (Details of Example Calcula-
tions)
References: New York Manual, pages 215-219.
Chapter 17, "Basic Arithmetic and Treatment
Plant Problems.
Solution: Example 1
I. Pond Area, sq ft = (Average Width, ft) (Average Length, ft)
A. Calculate average width.
WATER SURFACE
428 FT
AVERAGE WIDTH
Average
Width, ft
Water Surface Width, ft + Bottom Width, ft
428 ft + 412 ft
840 ft
2
420 ft
428
412
840
420
2j840~
8_
04
4
00
B. Calculate average length.
LENGTH
WATER SURFACE» 683 FT
AVERAGE LENGTH
667 FT
Average
Length, _ Water Surface Length, ft + Bottom Length, ft
ft 2
= 683 ft + 667 ft
2
= 1350 ft
2
= 675 ft
683
667
1350
675
2)1350
12
15
14
10
10
Calculate pond area.
= (Average Width, ft) (Average Length, ft)
= (420 ft) (675 ft)
= 283,500 sq ft
Area,
sq ft
675
420
000
1350
2700
283,500
Units: When we multiply ft by ft, we obtain square feet or
ft2.
Area, acres = Area' ^ n
43,560 sq ft/ac
_ 283,500 sq ft
43,560 sq ft/ac
= 6.5 ac
6.508
43560)283500.
261360
22140 0
21780 0
360 00
000 00
360 000
348 480
11 520
Units: The sq ft on top (numerator) and bottom (de-
nominator) cancel out, and the /acre on the bottom
shifts to the top (numerator).
Our result is 6.508 acres, but we will round off our an-
swer to the nearest tenth (0.1), or 6.5. This is sufficient
accuracy.
Calculate pond volume.
= (Area, ac) (Depth, ft)
= (6.51 ac) (4 ft)
= 26.04 ac-ft
Pond Volume,
ac-ft
6.51
x 4
26.04
-------
Ponds 313
SUGGESTED ANSWERS
Chapter 9. WASTE TREATMENT PONDS
Answers to questions on page 284.
9.2A Probably. When the greatest organic load per unit of
area (high treatment efficiency) is destroyed, objection-
able odors may develop.
9.2B Advantages of ponds include low initial and operating
costs, and adaptability to fluctuating loads, provided
land is cheap.
Answers to questions on page 286.
9.3A The difference between raw wastewater (sewage) la-
goons, oxidation ponds, and polishing ponds is the
amount of treatment wastewater receives before reach-
ing the pond. Wastewater receiving no treatment flows
directly into a raw wastewater (sewage) lagoon. A pond
located after a primary clarifier or sedimentation tank is
called an "oxidation pond," and a "polishing pond" is
placed after a trickling filter or activated sludge plant.
9.3B AEROBIC ponds have DO distributed throughout the
pond; ANAEROBIC ponds do not contain any DO. Most
ponds are facultative and have aerobic (have DO) con-
ditions on the surface and are anaerobic (no DO) on the
bottom.
9.3C The use of a pond will depend on the detention period.
Ponds with detention times less than three days will act
like sedimentation tanks. In ponds with a detention
period from three to twenty days, the organic material in
the influent will be converted to algae, and high concen-
trations of algae will be found in the effluent. Ponds with
longer detention periods provide time for sedimentation
of algae and a better effluent.
Answers to questions on page 288.
9.4A Algae produce oxygen from the water (H20) molecule
through photosynthesis.
9.4B Algae simply appear in a pond on their own without
seeding. They are found in soil, water, and air and mul-
tiply under favorable conditions.
9.4C Organic matter in a pond is converted to carbon dioxide
and ammonia and, finally, in the presence of sunlight, to
algae. The organic matter in anaerobic bottom sections
is first converted by a group of organisms called "acid
producers" to carbon dioxide, nitrogen, and organic
acids. Next, a group called the "methane fermenters"
breaks down the acids and other products of the first
group to form methane gas. Another end product of
organic reduction is water.
Answers to questions on page 288.
9.5A Bioflocculation is a condition whereby organic materials
tend to be transferred from the dispersed form in
wastewater to settleable material by mechanical en-
trapment and assimilation.
9.5B Biological factors influencing the treatment efficiency of
a pond include the type of bacteria, type and quantity of
algae, activity of organisms, nutrient deficiencies, and
toxic substances.
9.5C A pond is not functioning properly when it creates a
visual or odor nuisance, or leaves a high BOD, solids,
grease, or coliform-group bacteria concentration in the
effluent unless it was designed to be anaerobic in the
first stages and aerobic in later ponds for final treat-
ment.
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN LESSON 1
Answers to questions on page 290.
9.6A At least one foot of water should cover the pond bottom
before wastes are introduced to prevent decomposing
solids from being exposed and causing odor problems.
9.6B Ponds should be started during the warmer months be-
cause higher temperatures are associated with efficient
treatment processes.
9.6C A definite green color in a pond indicates a flourishing
algae population and is a good sign.
9.6D When bubbles are observed coming to the pond sur-
face near the inlet, this indicates that the solids which
settled to the bottom are being decomposed anaerobi-
cally by bacterial action.
Answers to questions on page 291.
9.7A Scum should not be allowed to accumulate on the sur-
face of a pond because it is unsightly, may prevent
sunlight from reaching the algae, and an odor-
producing species of algae may develop on the scum.
Also scum can become a source of botulism.
9.7B Scum accumulations may be broken up with rakes, jets
of water, or by use of outboard motors.
9.7C Most odors are caused in ponds by overloading or poor
housekeeping.
9.7D To prepare for an odor problem, a careful plan for
emergency odor control must be developed. For exam-
ple, an odor control chemical should be available be-
fore an odor problem develops. Sodium nitrate or a
floating aerator will help control odors and improve
treatment of the wastewater.
9.7E Weeds are objectionable in and around ponds because
they provide a shelter for the breeding of mosquitoes
and scum accumulation and also hinder pond circula-
tion.
9.7F Weeds may be controlled by herbicides and soil steril-
ants.
9.7G Insects should be controlled because they may, in suf-
ficient numbers, be a serious nuisance to nearby resi-
dential areas, farm workers, recreation sites, industrial
plants, and drivers on highways.
9.7H A pond should be lowered before the application of an
insecticide to improve the mortality of insects and re-
duce the effect of the insecticide on the receiving wat-
ers by holding the wastewater at least one day. Lower-
ing of the pond also will dry up weeds and insects.
-------
314 Treatment Plants
Answers to questions on page 293.
9.7I The contents of ponds are recirculated to allow algae
and other aerobic organisms to become thoroughly
mixed with incoming raw wastewater.
9.7J Ponds that are operated on a batch basis may dis-
charge only once (fall) or twice (fall and spring) a year.
9.7K To develop an operating strategy for ponds, consider
the following factors:
1. Maintain constant water elevations in the ponds;
2. Distribute inflow equally to ponds;
3. Keep pond levees or dikes in good condition; and
4. Observe and test pond condition.
Answers to questions on page 299.
9.8A Surface aerators have been used to provide additional
air for ponds and air for ponds operated as aerated
lagoons.
9.9A When a pond turns dull green, grey, or colorless, gen-
erally the pH and dissolved oxygen have dropped too
low. This condition may be caused by overloading or
lack of circulation.
9.9B pH, temperature, and dissolved oxygen should be
measured to provide a record of pond performance and
to indicate the status (health) of the pond and whether
corrective action is or may be necessary. DO may be
expected to be low in the morning and increase with
sunlight hours.
9.9C When the pH and dissolved oxygen drop dangerously
low, the loading should be reduced or stopped. Recir-
culating water from a healthy pond to the problem pond
should help the situation. Recirculation from outlet to
inlet areas is beneficial for seeding, DO, and mixing.
9 90 BOD Removal, % = (ln ' °ut) x100%
In
= (200 mg/L - 40 mg/L) y 100%
200 mg/L
_ 160 mg/L x 100%
200 mg/L
= 0.80 x 100%
= 80%
Answers to questions on page 299.
9.1 OA Walkways over ponds should have handrails and
non-skid walking surfaces.
9.10B An operator should be accompanied by a helper when
performing any dangerous task because immediate
aid might prevent serious injury or loss of life.
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN LESSON 2
Answers to questions on page 306.
9.11A Some wastes are not easily treated by ponds because
they contain substances with interfering concentra-
tions which hinder algal or bacterial growth.
9.11B The minimum recommended pond operating depth is
three feet. At shallower depths, aquatic weeds be-
come a nuisance and pond performance is apt to be
irregular.
9.11C The inlet to a pond should be submerged to distribute
the heat of the influent as much as possible and to
minimize the occurrence of floating material.
9.11D The outlet of a pond should be submerged to prevent
the discharge of floating material.
9.11E The discharge of floating material over a surface outlet
may be corrected by constructing a baffle around the
outlet.
9.11F Free overfalls should be avoided to minimize odors,
foaming, and gas entrapment which may hamper the
flow of water in pipes. They are generally controlled
with pipes at the outfall.
9.11G Any shallow pond is apt to be irregular in performance
because the algae grow, die, and settle to the bottom,
thus creating a new organic load. Algae PRODUCE
and STORE organic matter that must be stabilized la-
ter. Objectionable "burps" of unstable material are
common in pond effluents.
9.11H The influent to a pond should be metered to justify
budgets, indicate unexpected fluctuations in flows
which may cause upsets, and provide data for future
expansion when necessary.
= 2.0 MGD
= 20,000 people
= 180 mg/L
= 24 acres
= 4 feet
Answers to questions on page 308.
9.111 Given: Flow
Population
Influent BOD
Pond Area
Average Depth
Reqd.: Detention Time
Organic Loading
Population Loading
Hydraulic Loading
Determine pond volume in acre-feet.
Volume, ac-ft = (Area, ac) (Depth, ft)
= (24 ac) (4 ft)
= 96 ac-ft
Convert flow rate from MGD to ac-ft per day.
Flow, ac-ft/day = 2-000'00° gal x cu ft x acre
day
= 6.1 ac-ft/day
Determine detention time in days.
_ Pond Volume, ac-ft
7.48 gal 43,560 sq ft
Detention Time,
days
Flow Rate, ac-ft/day
_ 96 ac-ft 15 7
6.1 ac-ft/day 6.1)96.0
61
= 157day8 So"
305
450
427
Calculate organic loading in pounds of BOD per day
per acre.
(BOD, mg/L) (Flow, MGD) (8.34 lbs/gal)
Area, ac
Organic Load,
lb BOD/day/ac
1801b v 2.0 MG y 8.34 Ibe v
1
M lb day
= 125 lb BOD/day/ac
gal
24 ac
-------
Ponds 315
Estimate the population loading in persons per acre.
Population Loading, = Population, parsons
per8on8'ac AreaTaic
_ 20,000 persons
24 ac
- 833 persons/ac
Calculate the hydraulic loading in inches per day.
Hydraulic Loading,
fn/day
3.057
15.7)48.0
47.1
Pond Depth, in
Detention Time, days
_ (4 ft) (12 in/ft)
15.7 days
= 48
15.7
= 3.06 in/day
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN LESSON 3
900
785
1150
OBJECTIVE TEST
Chapter 9. WASTE TREATMENT PONDS
Please write your name and mark the correct answers on the
answer sheet as directed at the end of Chapter 1. There may
be more than one correct answer to each question.
1 ¦ Scum is not allowed to enter a waste treatment pond.
\/l. True
2. False
2. Photosynthesis is a process requiring sunlight.
^1. True
2. False
3- Algae poisons a facultative pond.
1. True
V2. False
4. A waste treatment pond is a biological process.
VI. True
2. False
5. A pH of 7.0 represents an acid condition.
1. True
V2. False
6. Toxicity has to do with Insect growth.
1. True
v2. False
7. A scum raft is a piece of equipment used when collecting
samples from a pond.
1. True
V2. False
8. A "polishing pond" is a form of tertiary treatment.
V1. True
2. False
9. The depth of a waste treatment pond should be less than
three feet.
1. True
V2. False
10. Dissolved oxygen in a pond can be increased by wind
action.
v 1. True
2. False
11. A pond population loading is expressed in terms of the
number of persons per acre of pond surface.
\/l. True (£e>*'S'erc> , )
2. False /
12. Operation of a waste treatment pond does NOT require
expensive equipment.
V1. True
2. False
13. A waste treatment pond is economical to construct.
YA. True
2. False
14. Water hyacinth cultures have been used to produce
effluents free of algae.
n/1. True
2. False
15. When ponds are operated in series, the influent is split and
a portion Is diverted to each of two ponds.
1. True
V2. False
16. Usually ponds do not become overloaded during storms
and periods of high runoff.
»1. True
2. False
17. The effluent should leave the final pond
1. At the surface.
V2. Just below the surface with a scum baffle around the
outlet
3. At the bottom of the pond.
-------
316 Treatment Plants
18. The pond outfall should be
1. Free.
\fZ. Submerged.
3. Wherever it is convenient.
19. Minimum depth for weed control in a facultative pond
should be
1. 3 feet.
^2. 4 feet.
3. 5 feet.
20. Ponds are used to
1. Grow mosquitoes.
2. Grow tules.
3. ice skate on.
v4. Provide a surface for evaporation.
*-5. Store wastewater while it is treated.
21. Facultative ponds are
^l. Aerobic on the top and anaerobic on the bottom.
2. Completely aerobic.
3. Faulty operating ponds.
4. The most common type in current use.
5. Very shallow ponds.
22. Advantages of ponds for smaller installations include
^1. Capability to handle fluctuating hydraulic loads.
sjz. Low cost to build and operate.
3. No insect problems.
4. No maintenance.
<•/ 5. Satisfactory treatment of wastes.
23. Ponds are simple to operate. (Select best an-
swer.)
1. Deceptively
2. Not
3. Quite
V4. Sort of
5. Very
24. When starting a pond, wastewater should be added when
the
1. Bottom is covered with grass.
2. Mayor returns from his vacation.
V3. Pond bottom is covered with at least one foot of water.
4. Pond is empty.
5. Wind is blowing in the right direction.
25. Important operation and maintenance aspects of ponds
include control of
1. Drying beds.
V2. Odors.
-J 3. Scum.
4. Waste gas burner.
\/S. Weeds and Insects.
26. Scum rafts may be broken up by
1. A thrashing machine.
*2. Agitation with garden rakes.
3. Breaking down the bindings.
V 4. Jets of water from pumps.
x^5. The use of outboard motors on boats.
27. Ponds may not operate properly if
Vi. Temperature stays below freezing for a long time.
2. The influent contains a powerful fungicide.
'3. The influent has a high sulfur content.
4. The influent organic matter content fluctuates tremen-
dously every few days.
5. There is no scum blanket.
28. Observations which indicate that a pond is operating or
being maintained properly include
^1. A definite green color of the pond.
2. Duckweek floating on the pond surface.
3. Lots of mosquitoes swarming around the pond area.
4. Scum on the pond surface.
5. Tules growing along the edge of the pond.
29. To protect levee banks from erosion, the operator may
1. Add more soil to replace the material washed away,
v/ 2. Dump small pieces of broken street materials, curbs
and gutters along the water line.
\4 3. Place bricks and other materials from building demoli-
tion along the water line.
4. Plant tules along the water tine.
5. Release some beavers to repair the levee bank.
30. When ponds discharge only once or twice a year, dis-
charges may be made
1. During the recreation season.
2. When all the ponds are full.
3. When downstream water users need water.
V 4. When flows are high in the receiving waters.
v/5. With the approval of the state regulatory agency.
31. Pond performance can be indicated by what tests?
1. Carbon dioxide.
2. Dissolved oxygen.
3. Hardness.
4. Methane.
V 5. pH.
32. Pond performance depends on
1. Lack of short-circuiting.
V 2. pH.
^ 3. Sunlight.
^ 4. Surface area.
«/ 5. Type and quantity of algae.
33. Pond loadings may be expressed in
1. Acres of people per day.
2. Acres per day of BOD.
3. Gallons of BOD per day per acre.
\4. Pounds BOD/day/acre.
5. Persons per acre.
34. Dissolved oxygen in a pond is increased by
1. Algae liberating oxygen from the water molecule.
V2. Photosynthesis.
3. Sludge gases from bottom deposits floating to the sur-
face.
¦4 4. Surface aerators.
>4 5. Wind action.
-------
Ponds 317
35. Tests on samples FROM POND CONTENTS which reveal
if the pond is functioning properly include
v<1.
2.
^3.
V4.
n/5.
BOD.
Chlorine residual.
Coliforms.
DO.
PH.
36. Potentially hazardous duties an operator may have to.
conduct while working around ponds include
1. Collecting samples from a boat.
~ 2. Cutting weeds near electrical wires.
3. Entering an enclosed headworks structure.
4. Removing scum from the pond surface.
V 5. Spraying pesticides.
37. Estimate the population served if the inflow to a plant is 1.2
MGD. Assume a flow of 100 gallons per person per day.
1. 1200.
2. 6000.
V3. 12,000.
4. 120,000.
5. None of these.
09*S*
r/
38. Two ponds serve a summer resort and are operated in
series. They cover an area of 150 ft by 250 ft (average
width and length of both ponds combined). The average
depth is four feet, and the average inflow is 25,000 gpd.
The detention time is approximately
1. 20 days.
V2. 45 days.^
3. 50 days.
4. 55 days.
5. 80 days
jSH£e.*S_!2i±r
2, C, trcO 1 * (I
39. And when the influent BOD is 200 mg/L for the ponds in
problem 38, the organic loading is approximately
1. 40 lb BOD/day/ac.
ISOKT-SO-OyS-V*- AC.
2. 42 lb BOD/day/ac
3. 45 lb BOD/day/ac.
*"4. 48 lb BOD/day/ac.
0 zs xztfo
lb.
h. ho iu DV^L//uay/ou.^s. ' ' $
5. 70 lb BOD/day/ac.
Review Question:
40. Estimate the velocity in a grit channel if a stick travels 30
feet in 40 seconds.
1. 0.50 ft/sec.
*2. 0.75 ft/sec.
3. 1.00 ft/sec.
4. 1.25 ft/sec.
5. 1.33 ft/sec.
ft/
- 0
END OF OBJECTIVE TEST
-------
CLEANWATER, U.S.A.
WATER POLLUTION CONTROL PLANT
MONTHLY RECORD 19 OPERATOR:
TEMR
8 F
PH
D.O.
B.O.D.
cl2
CO
REMARKS
SUMMARY DATA
ir
K
It
UJ
o
z
Q
Z
o
z
Q
Z
O
z
O
7
H
H
ui
_l
O
%
e>°-
(£0
% REMOVAL B.O.D.
8I.G 7.
u
X
>
o
n
o
n
o
0.
O
n
O
0
O
n
Z
UJ
Z
UJ
CM
CM
CM
3
-I
J
Qv
UI •
UJ CD
U.-J
O
,0 ^
o2
V0-:
UjZ
z_
S(M
DETENTION TIME - DAYS
86.7
<
o
<
Q
lli
»
_ u.
1- o
—¦ u.
U. UJ
o
z
O
z
o
z
O
Z
O
z
O
z
U.
z
ui
UJ 0
EC 2
ii
ig
TomIS OPE6 IM tCfctCK ftl-L MWTH,
1
T
35
Mu.E«.V MOT 0PCKATE.D »UKlM6 MdMTH.
2
W
no
J*
•«»
9:30 A.M.
0.025
&8
70
7.C
7.1
.0.8
I.4-
163
32
35
3.2
62
-o-
-0-
eFFU4*«4* >*~£/£
_3
4
T
F
CLCAft
2:00 P.M
0.038
76
79
7.7
8.4
1.3
8.7
3S_
!•+
... _
5
S
»
6
s
7
M
ClCaA
10:00 A.M
0.026
70
74
7.G
8.1
1.2
7.6
•
8
T
9
W
ClCaU
io:3oa.m
0.02?
73
7.£
S.I
1.1
76
isa
29 ,
35
O.S
2400
-0-
-0-
10
T
11
F
ClBA*
MOT
3115 P.M
0.039
77
SO
7.6
a.3
1.5
II.2
12
S
13
s
14
M
CLKAR
S." 30 A.M.
0.023
70
75
7 ft
as
1.1
7.£
15
16
T
W
CLEAR
f: 30 P.M.
0.031
75
7
7.8
B4
1.7
I0.G
IG2
33
40
40
4.2.
700
- 0-
-0-
MttfftStt Ci* Kt «>T* TO 4©*/D»V
COST DATA
17
T
~3:30P~M.
ais
14.5"
40
14(5
23
MAN DAYS teU"5 PAYROLL
122.7£
18
F
6.037
74
8 5
7.8
2.1
2 b
POWER PURCHASED
34.80
19
S
to
s
40
OTHER UTILITIES (GAS.H20)
NONE
, MOdtM - NO ".*NT CHECK
GASOLINE,OIL, GREASE
NOME
22
T
CLEAR
r.oo a.m.
0.020
71
7G
7.6
6.4
I.O
7.8
40
b. b
23
W
CLEM
176:30 A.M.
O.02S
7a
¦?a
7.7
ft.4
I.O
8.1
178
30
40
5.0
fi
0-
-0-
EFFV_W "= 48 »»$/£
CHEMICALS a SUPPLIES
6S.30
24
25
T
((
~F
Clear
2.-J5 P.M.
0.035
80
67
7.8
8.5
1.3
11.4
40
3.ft
- - -
—
— -
MAINTENANCE
NONE
26
S
..
VEHICLE COSTS
48.70
27
S
NONE
28
M
.LEAP
IO:oo A.M.
0.02G
73
7?
7.7
8.5
I.I
8.6
40
4.7
ci4 Fee# hkte Bftctc Tt> iSVBW
OTHER
29
1
35
TOTAL
8 275.5c
^0
W
LE.AR
4:15 P.M.
0.03a
fll
rtfl
7,«
ft S
1.8
IS 3
IG8
35
35
1.1
6
-0-
-0-
EFFL-'S5 «¦ &T.Hffr/Ji
31
MA
¦ -
0.039
81
as
7.8
8.6
2.I
15.3
163
162
169
35
40
fe.ii
2400
-0-
-0-
OPERATING COST /CAPITA/MQ
8 C.^
fV I 11.
AVG.
LEA*
O .030
73
76"
"7.7"
8.3
1.3
9.2
31
37.2
2.7
&
£2
-0-
-0-
....
COST/1000 GAL. TREATED
# °-2H£
FLOW METER: ELECTRIC METER:
LAST 232C02. LAST 5,78
|„ 231672 5611
TOTAL 0-930 ur. mil T 40 1 161 = t440
CO
00
(D
0)
3
(D
3
2
a>
3
w
o
3
D
P
£U
CO
3"
(D
(D
>
"O
"0
m
z
o
X
-------
CHAPTER 10
DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
by
Leonard W. Horn
(With a special section by J.L. Beals)
Revised
by
Tom Ikesaki
-------
320 Treatment Plants
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 10. Disinfection and Chlorination
Revised by Tom Ikesaki
Page
OBJECTIVES 324
GLOSSARY 325
LESSON 1
10.0 Need for Disinfection 329
10.00 Effectiveness in Microorganism Removal by Various Treatment Processes 329
10.01 Disinfection 329
10.02 Reaction of Chlorine in Wastewater 331
10.020 Free Chlorine (Cl2) 331
10.021 Hypochlorite (OCI") 331
10.022 Chlorine Dioxide (CI02) 332
10.03 Reactions of Chlorine Solutions with Impurities in Wastewater 332
10.030 Inorganic Reducing Materials 332
10.031 Reaction with Ammonia 332
10.04 Hypochlorination of Wastewater 333
10.05 Factors Influencing Disinfection 333
10.06 Chlorine Requirements 333
LESSON 2
10.1 Points of Chlorine Application 336
10.10 Collection System Chlorination 336
10.11 Prechlorination 336
10.12 Plant Chlorination 336
10.13 Chlorination Before Filtration 336
10.14 Postchlorination 336
10.2 Chlorination Process Control 338
10.20 Chlorinator Control 338
10.200 Manual Control 338
10.201 Start-Stop Control 338
10.202 Step-Rate Control 338
-------
Disinfection 321
10.203 Timed-Program Control 338
10.204 Flow-Proportional Control 338
10.205 Chlorine Residual Control 338
10.206 Compound Loop Control 338
10.21 Chlorination Control Nomogram 339
10.22 Hypochlorinator Feed Rate and Control 341
10.23 Chlorine Solution Discharge Lines, Diffusers, and Mixing 342
10.230 Solution Discharge Lines 342
10.231 Chlorine Solution Diffusers 342
10.232 Mixing 342
10.24 Measurement of Chlorine Residual 342
10.25 Start-Up of Chlorinators 342
10.250 Gas Chlorinators 344
10.251 Liquid Chlorine Chlorinators 344
10.26 Normal and Abnormal Operation 345
10.260 Container Storage Area 345
10.261 Evaporators 345
10.262 Chlorinators, Including Injectors 347
10.27 Shutdown of a Chlorinator 349
10.270 Short-Term Shutdown 349
10.271 Long-Term Shutdown 349
10.28 Operational Strategy 349
10.29 Chlorine Troubleshooting Guide 350
LESSON 3
10.3 Chlorine Safety Program 354
10.30 Chlorine Hazards 354
10.31 Why Chlorine Must be Handled with Care 354
10.32 Protect Yourself from Chlorine 355
10.33 First Aid Measures 355
10.4 Chlorine Handling 356
10.40 Chlorine Containers 356
10.400 Cylinders 356
10.401 Ton Tanks 356
10.402 Chlorine Tank Cars 356
10.41 Removing Chlorine from Containers 362
10.410 Connections 362
10.411 Valves 362
10.412 Ton Tanks 362
i
-------
322 Treatment Plants
10.413 Railroad Tank Cars 362
10.42 Chlorine Leaks 364
LESSON 4
10.5 Chlorination Equipment and Maintenance 366
10.50 Chlorinators 366
10.51 Evaporators 366
10.52 Hypochlorinators 371
10.53 Chlorine Dioxide Facility 371
10.54 Installation and Maintenance 371
10.55 Installation Requirements 373
10.550 Piping, Valves, and Manifolds 373
10.551 Chlorinator Injector Water Supply 373
10.56 Review of Plans and Specifications 374
10.6 Other Uses of Chlorine 374
10.60 Odor Control 374
10.61 Protection of Structures 375
10.62 Aid to Treatment 375
10.620 Sedimentation and Grease Removal 375
10.621 Trickling Filters 375
10.622 Activated Sludge 375
10.623 Reduction of BOD 375
10.7 Acknowledgments 375
LESSON 5
10.8 Dechlorination 376
10.80 Need for Dechlorination 376
10.81 Sulfur Dioxide (S02) 376
10.810 Properties 376
10.811 Chemical Reaction of Sulfur Dioxide with Wastewater 377
10.812 Application Point 377
10.82 Sulfur Dioxide Hazards 377
10.820 Exposure Responses to Sulfur Dioxide 377
10.821 Detection of Leaks 378
10.822 What to Do in Case of Leaks 378
10.823 Employees Authorized to Work on Leaks 378
10.824 Safety with Sulfur Dioxide 378
10.825 First Aid 378
10.826 Emergency Safety Equipment 379
i
-------
Disinfection 323
10.83 Sulfur Dioxide Supply System 379
10.830 Sulfur Dioxide Containers 379
10.831 Supply Piping 379
10.832 Valves 379
10.84 Sulfonation System 380
10.840 Evaporator 380
10.841 Sulfonator 380
10.842 Injector 380
10.85 Sulfonator Controls 380
10.850 Sulfonator Feed-Rate Control 380
10.851 Control Facilities 380
10.852 Selection of Method of Control 381
10.86 Determination of Residual Sulfur Dioxide in Wastewater 381
10.87 Operation of Sulfonator Process 381
10.870 Start-Up of a New System 381
10.871 Start-Up of Gas Sulfonators 382
10.872 Troubleshooting the Gas Sulfonator System 383
10.873 Start-Up of Liquid Sulfonators 384
10.874 Troubleshooting the Liquid Sulfonator System 385
10.875 Normal and Abnormal Operation 386
10.876 Operational Strategy 386
10.877 Troubleshooting Sulfonation System 386
10.878 Sulfonation System Shutdown Procedures 387
10.88 Maintenance of the Sulfur Dioxide Systems 387
10.880 Supply Area 387
10.881 Piping 387
10.882 Evaporators 387
10.883 Sulfonators 387
10.9 Additional Reading 387
10.10 Metric Calculations 388
10.100 Conversion Factors 388
10.101 Problem Solutions 388
-------
324 Treatment Plants
OBJECTIVES
Chapter 10. DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
Following completion of Chapter 10, you should be able to
do the following:
1. Explain the principles of wastewater disinfection with
chlorine,
2. Control the chlorination process to obtain the desired
effluent disinfection,
3. Handle chlorine safely,
4. Detect chlorine leaks and take appropriate corrective ac-
tion,
5. Inspect new chlorination facilities for proper installation,
6. Schedule and conduct chlorination operation and mainte-
nance duties,
7. Recognize factors that indicate the chlorination process is
not performing properly, identify the source of the prob-
lem, and take corrective action,
8. Conduct your duties in a safe fashion,
9. Determine chlorine dosages,
10. Explain applications and limitations of uses of chlorine
other than for disinfection,
11. Keep records of chlorination operation, and
12. Safely operate and maintain a sulfur dioxide dechlorina-
tion system.
-------
Disinfection 325
GLOSSARY
Chapter 10. DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
QQT4iO~fOL\Wtt4& 'MVPO-
C-HLO B IN 4ipPlf
-------
326 Treatment Plants
CHLORINATION (KLOR-i-NAY-shun) CHLORINATION
The application of chlorine to water or wastewater, generally for the purpose of disinfection, but frequently for accomplishing other
biological or chemical results.
CHLORINE DEMAND CHLORINE DEMAND
Chlorine demand is the difference between the amount of chlorine added to wastewater and the amount of residual chlorine
remaining after a given contact time. Chlorine demand may change with dosage, time, temperature, pH, and nature and amount of
the impurities in the water.
Chlorine Demand, mgIL = Chlorine Applied, mgIL - Chlorine Residual, mgIL
CHLORINE REQUIREMENT CHLORINE REQUIREMENT
The amount of chlorine which is needed for a particular purpose. Some reasons for adding chlorine are reducing the number of
coliform bacteria (Most Probable Number), obtaining a particular chlorine residual, or destroying some chemical in the water. In
each case a definite dosage of chlorine will be necessary. This dosage is the chlorine requirement.
CHLORORGANIC (chlor-or-GAN-nick) CHLORORGANIC
Chlororganic compounds are organic compounds combined with chlorine. These compounds generally originate from, or are
associated with, living or dead organic materials.
COLIFORM (COAL-i-form) COLIFORM
One type of bacteria. The presence of coliform-group bacteria is an indication of possible pathogenic bacterial contamination. The
human intestinal tract is one of the main habitats of coliform bacteria. They may also be found in the intestinal tracts of warm-
blooded animals, and in plants, soil, air, and the aquatic environment. Fecal coliforms are those conforms found in the feces of
various warm-blooded animals; whereas the term "coliform" also includes other environmental sources.
COLORIMETRIC MEASUREMENT COLORIMETRIC MEASUREMENT
A means of measuring unknown concentrations of water quality indicators in a sample by measuring the sample's color intensity.
The color of the sample after the addition of specific chemicals (reagents), is compared with colors of known concentrations.
COMBINED AVAILABLE CHLORINE COMBINED AVAILABLE CHLORINE
The concentration of chlorine which is combined with ammonia (NH3) as chloramine or as other chloro derivatives, yet is still
available to oxidize organic matter.
COMBINED AVAILABLE RESIDUAL COMBINED AVAILABLE RESIDUAL
CHLORINE CHLORINE
That portion of the total residual chlorine which remains in water or wastewater at the end of a specified contact period and reacts
chemically and biologically as chloramines or organic chloramines.
COMBINED RESIDUAL CHLORINATION COMBINED RESIDUAL CHLORINATION
The application of chlorine to water or wastewater to produce a combined chlorine residual. The residual may consist of chlorine
compounds formed by the reaction of chlorine with natural or added ammonia (NH3) or with certain organic nitrogen compounds.
DECHLORINATION (dee-KLOR-i-NAY-shun) DECHLORINATION
The removal of chlorine from the effluent of a treatment plant.
DEGRADATION (de-gray-DAY-shun) DEGRADATION
The conversion of a substance to simpler compounds.
DEW POINT DEW POINT
The temperature to which air with a given quantity of water vapor must be cooled to cause condensation of the vapor in the air.
DISINFECTION (DIS-in-FECK-shun) DISINFECTION
The process designed to kill most microorganisms in wastewater, including essentially all pathogenic (disease-causing) bacteria.
There are several ways to disinfect, with chlorine being most frequently used in water and wastewater treatment plants. Compare
with STERILIZATION.
EDUCTOR (e-DUCK-tor) EDUCTOR
A hydraulic device used to create a negative pressure (suction) by forcing a liquid through a restriction, such as a Venturi. An
eductor or aspirator (the hydraulic device) may be used in the laboratory in place of a vacuum pump; sometimes used instead of a
suction pump.
ELECTRON ELECTRON
An extremely small (microscopic), negatively charged particle. An electron is much too small to be seen with a microscope.
-------
Disinfection 327
ENTERIC ENTERIC
Intestinal.
ENZYMES (EN-zimes) ENZYMES
Enzymes are organic substances which are produced by living organisms and speed up chemical changes.
FILAMENTOUS ORGANISMS (FILL-a-MEN-tuss) FILAMENTOUS ORGANISMS
Organisms that grow in a thread or filamentous form.
FREE AVAILABLE CHLORINE FREE AVAILABLE CHLORINE
The amount of chlorine available in water. This chlorine may be in the form of dissolved gas (Cl2), hypochlorous acid (HOCI), or
hypochlorite ion (OCI~), but does not include chlorine combined with an amine (ammonia or nitrogen) or other organic compound.
FREE AVAILABLE RESIDUAL CHLORINE FREE AVAILABLE RESIDUAL CHLORINE
That portion of the total residual chlorine remaining in water or wastewater at the end of a specified contact period. Residual chlorine
will react chemically and biologically as hypochlorous acid (HOCI) or hypochlorite ion (OCI~).
FREE CHLORINE FREE CHLORINE
Free chlorine is chlorine (Cl2) in a liquid or gaseous form. Free chlorine combines with water to form hypochlorous (HOCI) and
hydrochloric (HCI) acids. In wastewater free chlorine usually combines with an amine (ammonia or nitrogen) or other organic
compounds to form combined chlorine compounds.
FREE RESIDUAL CHLORINE FREE RESIDUAL CHLORINE
The result of the application of chlorine or chlorine compounds to water or wastewater to produce a free available chlorine residual
directly or through the destruction of ammonia (NH3) or certain organic nitrogenous compounds.
HEPATITIS HEPATITIS
Hepatitis is an acute viral infection of the liver. Yellow jaundice is one symptom of hepatitis.
HYPOCHLORINATION (hi-po-KLOR-i-NAY-shun) HYPOCHLORINATION
The application of hypochlorite compounds to water or wastewater for the purpose of disinfection.
HYPOCHLORINATORS (hi-poe-KLOR-i-NAY-tors) HYPOCHLORINATORS
Chlorine pumps or devices used to feed chlorine solutions made from hypochlorites such as bleach (sodium hypochlorite) or
calcium hypochlorite.
HYPOCHLORITE (hi-po-KLOR-ite) HYPOCHLORITE
Hypochlorite compounds contain chlorine and are used for disinfection. These compounds are similar to strong bleach. They are
available as liquids or solids (powder, granules and pellets) in barrels, drums and cans.
MPN (EM-PEA-EN) MPN
MPN is the Most Probable Number of coliform-group organisms per unit volume. Expressed as density or population of organisms
per 100 ml.
MOTILE (MO-till) MOTILE
Motile organisms exhibit or are capable of movement.
NITROGENOUS (nye-TROG-en-ous) NITROGENOUS
Nitrogenous compounds contain nitrogen.
NOMOGRAM NOMOGRAM
A chart or diagram containing three or more scales used to solve problems with three or more variables instead of using mathemati-
cal formulas.
ORTHOTOLIDINE (or-tho-TOL-i-dine) ORTHOTOLIDINE
Orthotolidine is a colorimetric indicator of chlorine residual. If chlorine is present, a yellow-colored compound is produced. This
method is no longer approved for tests of effluent chlorine residual.
OXIDIZING AGENT OXIDIZING AGENT
An oxidizing agent is any substance, such as oxygen (02) and chlorine (Cl2), that can add (take on) electrons. When oxygen or
chlorine is added to wastewater, organic substances are oxidized. These oxidized organic substances are more stable and less
likely to give off odors or to contain disease bacteria. The opposite of REDUCING AGENT.
-------
328 Treatment Plants
PARASITIC BACTERIA (PAIR-a-SIT-tick) PARASITIC BACTERIA
Parasitic bacteria are those bacteria which normally live off another living organism, known as the "host."
PATHOGENIC BACTERIA (path-o-JEN-nick) PATHOGENIC BACTERIA
Bacteria, viruses or cysts which can cause disease (typhoid, cholera, dysentery). There are many types of bacteria which do NOT
cause disease and which are NOT called pathogenic. Many beneficial bacteria are found in wastewater treatment processes
actively cleaning up organic wastes.
POSTCHLORINATION POSTCHLORINATION
The addition of chlorine to the plant discharge or effluent, FOLLOWING plant treatment, for disinfection purposes.
POTABLE WATER (POE-ta-bl) POTABLE WATER
Water that does not contain objectionable pollution, contamination, minerals, or infective agents and is considered safe for domestic
consumption.
PRECHLORINATION PRECHLORINATION
The addition of chlorine at the headworks of the plant PRIOR TO other treatment processes mainly for odor and corrosion control.
Also applied to aid disinfection, to reduce plant BOD load, to aid in settling, 1o control foaming in Imhoff units and to help remove oil.
REAGENT (re-A-gent) REAGENT
A substance which takes part in a chemical reaction and is used to measure, detect, or examine other substances.
REDUCING AGENT REDUCING AGENT
A reducing agent is any substance, such as the chloride ion (CI ~) and the sulfide ion (S~2), that can give up electrons. The opposite
of OXIDIZING AGENT.
RELIQUEFACTION (re-LICK-we-FACK-shun) RELIQUEFACTION
The return of a gas to a liquid. For example, a condensation of chlorine gas returning to the liquid form.
RESIDUAL CHLORINE RESIDUAL CHLORINE
Residual chlorine is the amount of chlorine remaining after a given contact time and under specified conditions.
ROTAMETER ROTAMETER
A device used to measure the flow rate of gases and liquids. The gas or liquid being measured flows vertically up a calibrated tube.
Inside the tube is a small ball or bullet-shaped float (it may rotate) that rises or falls depending on the flow rate. The flow rate may be
read on a scale behind the middle of the ball or the top of the float.
SAPROPHYTES (SAP-pro-fights) SAPROPHYTES
Organisms living on dead or decaying organic matter. They help natural decomposition of the organic solids in wastewater.
SEPTICITY (sep-TIS-it-tee) SEPTICITY
Septicity is the condition in which organic matter decomposes to form foul-smelling products associated with the absence of free
oxygen. If severe, the wastewater turns black, gives off foul odors, contains little or no dissolved oxygen and creates a heavy oxygen
demand.
STERILIZATION (stare-uh-luh ZAY-shun) STERILIZATION
The removal or destruction of all living microorganisms, including pathogenic and saprophytic bacteria, vegetative forms and
spores. Compare with DISINFECTION.
TITRATE (TIE-trate) TITRATE
To TITRATE a sample, a chemical solution of known strength is added on a drop-by-drop basis until a color change, precipitate, or
pH change in the sample is observed (end point). Titration is the process of adding the chemical solution to completion of the
reaction as signaled by the end point.
TOTAL RESIDUAL CHLORINE TOTAL RESIDUAL CHLORINE
The amount of chlorine remaining after a given contact time. The sum of the combined available residual chlorine and the free
available residual chlorine. Also see RESIDUAL CHLORINE.
-------
Disinfection 329
CHAPTER 10. DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
(Lesson 1 of 5 Lessons)
10.0 NEED FOR DISINFECTION
10.00 Effectiveness in Microorganism Removal by Vari-
ous Treatment Processes
Homes, hospitals and industrial facilities all discharge liquid
and solid waste materials into the wastewater collection sys-
tem. Diseases from human discharges may be transmitted by
wastewater. Typical disease-causing microorganisms include
bacteria, viruses, and parasites. These microorganisms are
commonly referred to as PATHOGENIC (disease-causing)
MICROORGANISMS.1 These microorganisms can cause the
following types of illnesses:
Bacteria-caused:
Salmonellosis
Shigellosis
Typhoid Fever
Cholera
Paratyphoid
Bacillary Dysentery
Virus-caused:
Polio
Infectious Hepatitis
Internal Parasite-caused:
Amoebic Dysentery
Ascaris (giant roundworm)
Giardiasis
Disease-producing microorganisms are potentially present
in all wastewaters. These microorganisms must be removed or
killed before treated wastewater can be discharged to the re-
ceiving waters. The purpose of disinfection is to destroy
pathogenic microorganisms and thus prevent the spread of
waterborne diseases.
PAT-*-t©
-------
330 Treatment Plants
treatment egoe&^5
PUN6TIOM
peeT/2£Ar/M£ur
influent
zmoi/es &>0r*,£46s, &w£//4£&jr
6CCE5NIM^I <1/4/// 7VA/AA/W/tZ, OjP/^
POSi/g/f TZr/ZMr/ZaiV)
esMoves \^£z.
(UAtfl r& IAA/P £/££¦)
£jS£6U£A/f, !VA*T£
$ M£IP6
OQ\X (2&/MOVAU
WfteQKfiOU
FLOW Mer&g M£ASUI?£S Z ff££0&PSFl&tV
0?/AM£V
7#gmf£ivr
6EPiM£N1XT|OM
AMP aorAriON
sezoA/mev
TeeAw&vr
e£MOVBS
HANPUIN^
r/?£AFS SOI/PS eernvep
ev ome# fieaaess'&s
Ul06\CHMmCM
i IWWW. PI&CPWW
#£/t40M£S &/SP&VP20
$ P/6£0/.L/££> S0/./0S
WMMMB /OZ/-S PAr/so#£A// sao^c/a
M£l/TJ2^JZ£S £y££S5
eppuiewT
Fig. 10.1 Typical flow diagram of wastewater treatment
plant
-------
Disinfection 331
One of the main uses of chlorine in wastewater treatment is
for disinfection. Chlorine is relatively easy to obtain and cheap
to manufacture. Even at relatively low dosages, chlorine is
extremely effective.
Today people are living more intimately with wastewater
than ever before. Wastewater effluent may be used for irrigat-
ing lawns, parks, cemeteries, freeway planting, golf courses,
college campuses, athletic fields, and other public areas. Rec-
reational lakes used for boating, swimming, water skiing, fish-
m
ing, and other water sports are frequently made up partially
and, in a few cases, solely of treated effluents. As public con-
tact has increased and diluting waters have decreased or be-
come of poor quality, it has become obvious that more consid-
eration must be given to disinfection practices.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 389.
10.0A What is the purpose of disinfection? Why is this impor-
tant?
10.0B How are pathogenic bacteria destroyed or removed
from water?
10.OC Why is chlorination used for disinfection?
10.0D Why are wastes not sterilized?
10.02 Reaction of Chlorine in Wastewater
Chlorine is applied to wastewater as FREE CHLORINE3
(Cl2), as HYPOCHLORITE4 ion (OCI~), or as chlorine dioxide
(CIO?)- In either the free chlorine or hypochlorite ion form,
chlorine is an extremely active chemical and acts as a potent
OXIDIZING AGENT.5 In the chlorine dioxide form, chlorine is
not as potent an oxidizing agent in the pH ranges commonly
found in most wastewaters. Since chlorine is very reactive, it is
often used up by side reactions before disinfection takes place.
These side reactions can be with such substances as organic
material, hydrogen sulfide, phenols, thiosulfate, and ferrous
iron. These side reactions occur first and use up a major por-
tion of the chlorine necessary to meet the CHLORINE DE-
MAND6 for a wastewater.
10.020 Free Chlorine (CI J
Free chlorine combines with water to form hypochlorous and
hydrochloric acids:
. Hypochlorous
Acid
Chlorine + Water;
, Hydrochloric
Acid
Cl2 + H20 ^ HOCI + HCI
In solutions that are dilute and have a pH above 4, the forma-
tion of HOCI (hypochlorous acid) is most complete and leaves
little Cl2 existing. The hypochlorous acid is a weak acid and is
very poorly dissociated (broken up) at levels below a pH of 6.
Thus any free chlorine or hypochlorite (OCI) added to water
will immediately form either HOCI or OCh and what will be
formed is controlled by the pH value of the water. This is ex-
tremely important since HOCI and OCh differ in disinfection
ability. HOCI has a greater disinfection potential than OCI .
Normally in wastewater with a pH of 7.3 (depends on tempera-
ture), 50 percent of the chlorine present will be in the form of
HOCI and 50 percent in the form of OCh. The higher the pH
level, the greater the percent of OCh.
10.021 Hypochlorite (OCI )
When hypochlorite compounds are used in wastewater, they
are usually in the form of sodium hypochlorite (NaOCI). Cal-
cium hypochlorite (Ca(OCI)2) normally is not used because of
its cost, sludge-forming characteristics and explosive nature.
The use of hypochlorite in wastewater follows the reaction
similar to that of chlorine gas.
Sodium . WalBr.
Hypochlorite + vva,er
NaOCI + H20 ¦
Hypochlorous Hypochlorite , Hydrogen
' Acid Ion Ion
^ Sodium
' Hydroxide
NaOH + HOCI + OCI + H +
The difference between chlorine gas and hypochlorite com-
pounds is in the side reactions formed. The reaction of chlorine
gas tends to decrease the pH which favors the HOCI
(hypochlorous acid) formation while the hypochlorite increases
the pH with the formation of hydroxyl ions (OH~) by the forma-
tion of sodium hydroxide. At a high pH of around 10, the
hypochlorous acid (HOCI) dissociates.
Hypochlorous _ Hydrogen Hypochlorite
Acid Ion Ion
HOCI ^ H+ + OCh
This pH condition lasts only a brief time at the contact of the
hypochlorite solution and the wastewater to be treated. Since
the hypochlorite ion (OCh) is a relatively ineffective disinfec-
tant, the sodium hypochlorite solution should be as dilute as
3 Free Chlorine. Free chlorine is chlorine (CI,) in a liquid or gaseous form. Free chlorine combines with water to form hypochlorous (HOCI)
and hydrochloric (HCI) acids. In wastewater free chlorine usually combines with an amine (ammonia or nitrogen) or other organic compounds
to form combined chlorine compounds.
4 Hypochlorite (hi-po-KLOR-ite). Hypochlorite compounds contain chlorine and are used for disinfection. These compounds are similar to a
strong bleach. They are available as liquids or solids (powder, granules, and pellets) in barrels, drums and cans.
5 Oxidizing Agent. An oxidizing agent is any substance, such as oxygen (02) and chlorine (Cl2), that can add (take on) electrons. When
oxygen or chlorine is added to wastewater, organic substances are oxidized. These oxidized organic substances are more stable and less
likely to give off odors or to contain disease bacteria. The opposite of REDUCING AGENT.
6 Chlorine Demand. Chlorine demand is the difference between the amount of chlorine added to wastewater and the amount of RESIDUAL
CHLORINE7 remaining after a given contact time. Chlorine demand may change with dosage, time, temperature, pH, and nature and amount
of impurities in water. Chlorine Demand, mgIL = Chlorine Applied, mg/L - Chlorine Residual, mg/L.
7 Residual Chlorine. Residual chlorine is the amount of chlorine remaining after a given contact time and under specified conditions.
-------
332 Treatment Plants
possible. This is extremely important in wastewater disinfec-
tion.
10.022 Chlorine Dioxide (CIO,)
Chlorine dioxide reacts in the following manner:
Chlorine Water Chlorate + Chlorite + Hydrogen
Dioxide Ion Ion Ions
2 CI02 + HjO - CI03- + CIO" + 2H+.
The oxidizing capability of chlorine dioxide is not all used in
wastewater treatment because reactions with the substances
(,REDUCING AGENTS8) in wastewater only cause the reduc-
tion of chlorine dioxide to chlorite.
Chlorine + Electron _ Chlorite
Dioxide Ion
CI02 + e~ — CI02
Therefore, chlorine dioxide is not as reactive as chlorine and
chlorine is a better oxidant. In waters with a pH above 8.5,
chlorine dioxide is a very effective disinfectant. Chlorine
dioxide usually does not react with ammonia.
Chlorine dioxide is very unstable and must be generated at
the plant site. Generally chlorine dioxide is prepared by the
injection of sodium chlorite into the chlorine solution line from a
chlorinator.
Sodium + Chlorine Sodium + Chlorine
Chlorite Chloride Dioxide
2 NaCI02 +- Cl2 — 2 NaCI + 2 CI02
Chlorine dioxide may find more applications in the water
treatment field than in wastewater treatment because chlorine
dioxide is less likely than chlorine to produce cancer-causing
compounds and to cause tastes and odors in water.
10.03 Reactions of Chlorine Solutions with Impurities in
Wastewater
Since wastewater contains a great number of complex sub-
stances and chemicals, many of these substances have a
serious effect on wastewater chlorination. A few of the major
impurities will be discussed in the following sections.
10.030 Inorganic Reducing Materials
Chlorine reacts rapidly with many reducing agents and more
slowly with others. These reactions complicate the use of
chlorine tor disinfecting purposes. One of the most widely
known inorganic reducing materials is hydrogen sulfide. Hy-
drogen sulfide reacts with chlorine to form sulfuric acid (sul-
fate) or elemental sulfur depending on the concentration of
hydrogen sulfide, pH and temperature.
1. Hydrogen Free + Water Sulfuric + Hydrochloric
Sulfide Chlorine Acid Acid
HjS + 4 Cl2 + 4 H20 - H2S04 + 8 HCI
2. w_.or . Free Hypochlorous . Hydrogen Elemental . Hydrochloric + wflter
Chlorine Acid Sulfide Sulfur Acid
H20 + Cl2 — HOCI + H2S -» S° + HCI + H20
1
One part of hydrogen sulfide (H2S) takes about 8.5 parts of
chlorine in equation 1 and 2.2 parts of chlorine in equation 2.
Since these reactions occur before a chlorine residual occurs,
the demand caused by the inorganic salts must be satisfied
first before any disinfection can take place. Ferrous iron, man-
ganese, and nitrite are examples of other inorganic reducing
agents that react with chlorine.
10.031 Reaction with Ammonia (NHJ
Since ammonia is present in all domestic wastewaters, the
reaction of ammonia with chlorine is of great significance.
When chlorine is added to waters containing ammonia, the
ammonia reacts with hypochlorous acid (HOCI) to form
monochloramine, dichloramine and trichloramine. The forma-
tion of these chloramines depends on the pH of the solution
and the initial chlorine-ammonia ratio.
Ammonia + Hypochlorous chloramine + Water
Acid
NH3 + HOCI —» NH2CI + H20 monochloramine
NH2CI + HOCI NHCI2 + H20 dichloramine
NHCI2 + HOCI —> NCIj + H20 trichloramine
In general at the pH levels that are usually found in wastewa-
ter (pH 6.5 to 7.5), monochloramine and dichloramine exist
together. At pH levels below 5.5, dichloramine exists by itself.
Below pH 4.0, trichloramine is the only compound found.
The mono- and dichloramine forms have definite disinfection
powers and are of interest in the measurement of chlorine
residuals. Dichloramine has a more effective disinfecting
power than monochloramine.
05*
+ AlO
If enough chlorine is added to react with the inorganic com-
pounds and NITROGENOUS9 compounds, then this chlorine
will react with organic matter to produce CHLORORGANIC10
compounds or other combined forms of chlorine, which have
slight disinfecting action. Then if enough chlorine is added to
8 Reducing Agent. A reducing agent is any substance, such as the chloride ion (Cl~) and the sulfide ion (S 2), that can give up electrons.
The opposite of OXIDIZING AGENT.
9 Nitrogenous (nye-TROG-en-ous). Nitrogenous compounds contain nitrogen.
10 Chiororganic (chlor-or-GAN-nick). Chiororganic compounds are organic compounds combined with chlorine. These compounds gener-
ally originate from, or are associated with, living or dead organic materials.
-------
Disinfection 333
react with all the above compounds, any additional chlorine will
exist as FREE AVAILABLE CHLORINE11 which has the high-
est disinfecting action (Fig. 10.2). This situation rarely exists in
wastewater that contains nitrogenous compunds. The term
BREAKPOINT CHLORINATION12 refers to the breakpoint
shown on Fig. 10.2.
The exact mechanism of this disinfection action is not fully
known. In some theories, chlorine is considered to exert a
direct action against the bacterial cell, thus destroying it.
Another theory is that the toxic character of chlorine inactivates
the ENZYMES13 upon which the living microorganisms are de-
pendent for utilizing their food supply. As a result, the or-
ganisms die of starvation. From the point of view of wastewater
treatment, the mechanism of the action of chlorine is much less
important than its effects as a disinfecting agent.
The demand by inorganic and organic materials is referred
to as "chlorine demand." The chlorine that remains in com-
bined forms having disinfecting properties plus any free
chlorine is referred to as "residual chlorine." The sum of the
chlorine demand and the chlorine residual is the chlorine dose.
Chlorine Dose = Chlorine Demand + Chlorine Residual
where
Chlorine Residual = Combined Chlorine Forms + Free Chlorine
10.04 Hypochlorination14 of Wastewater
Hypochlorination is usually not the most common method of
disinfection. Higher costs and the disinfecting deficiencies of
hypochlorination make chlorination the most effective method
in most cases. Some cities recently have switched to
hypochlorination for safety reasons because chlorine gas is
not involved. As previously described, when the pH is in-
creased, the hypochlorite ion (OCI ) formation is increased
and is less efficient than the hypochlorous acid (HOCI). How-
ever, when the hypochlorite solution is added to wastewater,
the solution becomes diluted with the pH usually approaching
that of the wastewater.
Hypochlorination will raise the pH of the wastewater being
treated. The rise in pH will decrease the effectiveness of the
hypochlorite, thereby requiring a higher dosage. This, in turn,
will increase the pH even more.
10.05 Factors Influencing Disinfection
Both CHLORINE ADDITION and CONTACT TIME are es-
sential for effective killing of pathogenic microorganisms. Ex-
perimental determination of the best combination of combined
residual chlorine and contact time is necessary to insure both
proper chlorine dose and minimum use of chlorine. Changes in
pH affect the disinfection ability of chlorine and the operator
must reexamine the best combination of chlorine addition and
contact time when the pH fluctuates. Critical factors influencing
disinfection are summarized as follows:
1. Injection point and method of mixing to get disinfectant in
contact with wastewater being disinfected.
2. Design (shape) of contact chambers are designed in vari-
ous sizes and shapes. Rectangular contact chambers often
allow short-circuiting and consequently reduced contact
times. Baffles often are installed to increase mixing action,
to obtain better distribution of disinfectant, and to reduce
short-circuiting which in turn increases contact time.
Pipelines have proved to be good contact chambers.
3. Contact time. With good initial mixing, the longer the con-
tact time, the better the disinfection. Most chlorine contact
basins are designed to provide a contact time of 30 min-
utes. In general, extending the chlorine contact time is more
effective than increasing the chlorine dose to improve disin-
fection.
4. Effectiveness of upstream treatment processes. The lower
the suspended solids and organic content of the wastewa-
ter, the better the disinfection.
5. Temperature. The higher the temperature, the more rapid
the rate of disinfection.
6. Dose rate and type of chemical. Normally the higher the
dose rate, the quicker the disinfection rate. The form or type
of chemical also influences the disinfection rate.
7. pH. The lower the pH, the better the disinfection.
10.06 Chlorine Requirements
The quantity of chlorine-demanding substances differs from
plant to plant, so that the amount of chlorine that has to be
added to insure proper disinfection also differs. The amount of
chlorine required to satisfy the chlorine-demanding substances
is called the CHLORINE DEMAND. This demand is equal to
the chlorine dose minus the chlorine residual.
Chlorine Demand = Chlorine Dose - Chlorine Residual
The chlorine residual is determined by one of several labora-
tory tests. The method of choice must be one of those ap-
proved by state and federal water pollution control agencies,
otherwise the results will not be recognized. These tests are
discussed in the laboratory section of this manual (Chapter
16). The amount of residual that one should maintain is deter-
mined by the desired microorganism population. The mi-
croorganism population is usually specified by State or Federal
NPDES Permit requirements. The microorganism population
usually is estimated by determining the MP/V15 of COL-
IFORM*6 -group organisms present. This determination does
not test for individual pathogenic microorganisms, but uses the
coliform group of organisms as the indicator organism. Col-
iform organisms usually are found in most wastewaters. See
Chapter 16 for the laboratory test to determine the MPN of
conforms present.
11 Free Available Chlorine. The amount of chlorine available in water. This chlorine may be in the form of dissolved gas (Cl2), hypochbrous
acid (HOCI), or hypochlorite (OCI ), but does not include chlorine combined with an amine (ammonia or nitrogen) or other organic
compound.
12 Breakpoint Chlorination. Addition of chlorine to water or wastewater until the chlorine demand has been satisfied and further additions of
chlorine result in a residual that is directly proportional to the amount added beyond the breakpoint.
13 Enzymes (EN-zimes). Enzymes are organic substances which are produced by living organisms and speed up chemical changes.
14 Hypochlorination (hi-po-KLOR-i-NAY-shun). The application of hypochlorite compounds to water or wastewater for the purpose of disin-
fection.
is MPN (EM-PEA-EN). MPN is the Most Probable Number of coliform-group organisms per unit volume. Expressed as density or population
of organisms per 100 ml.
is Coliform (COAL-i-form). One type of bacteria. The presence of coliform-group bacteria is an indication of possible pathogenic bacterial
contamination. The human intestinal tract is one of the main habitats of coliform bacteria. They may also be found in the intestinal tracts of
warm-blooded animals, and in plants, soil, air, and the aquatic environment. Fecal conforms are those conforms found in the feces of various
warm-blooded animals; whereas the term "coliform" also includes other environmental sources.
-------
334 Treatment Plants
COMBINED
RESIDUAL
CHLORINE
OXIDATION OF
COMBINED RES I -
DUAL MATERIALS
(CHLORAMINES)
CHLORINE
DEMAND
BREAKPOINT
FOR SECONDARY
WASTEWATER,
APPROXIMATELY
CHLORINE
RESIDUAL,
mg/l
FREE CHLORINE
RESIDUAL ON A
1 TO 1 BASIS
CHLORINE DOSAGE, mg/l
Fig. 10.2 Breakpoint chlorination curve
-------
Disinfection 335
Calculations to determine the chlorine dosage and chlorine
demand are illustrated in the following example problem.
EXAMPLE:
A chlorinator is set to feed 50 pounds of chlorine per 24
hours; the wastewater flow is at a rate of 0.85 MGD, and the
chlorine as measured by the chlorine residual test after thirty
minutes of contact time is 0.5 mgIL. Find the chlorine dosage
and chlorine demand in mg IL.
Chlorine Feed
or Dose, mg IL
Pounds of Chlorine
Million Pounds of Water
50 lbs chlorine/day
Chlorine
Demand, mg IL
(0.85 MG/day) (8.34 lbs/gal)
59 lbs chlorine/MG
8.34 lbs/gal
7.1 lbs chlorine/million pounds water
7.1 ppm (Parts Per Million parts)
7.1 mg IL
Chlorine Dose, mg/i.
7.1 mg IL - 0.5 mgIL
6.6 mg/l.
59.
0.85) 50.00
42 5
7 50
7 65
Chlorine Residual, mg IL
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 389.
10.0E
10.OF
10.0G
10.OH
10.01
What does chlorine produce when it reacts with or-
ganic matter and with nitrogenous compounds?
How much chlorine must be added to wastewater to
produce disinfecting action?
How is the chlorine demand determined?
How is the chlorine dosage determined?
Calculate the chlorine demand of treated domestic
wastewater if:
Flow Rate
Chlorinator
Residual
1.2 MGD
70 lbs of chlorine per 24 hours
0.4 mg IL after thirty minutes
The objective of disinfection is the destruction of pathogenic
bacteria, and the ultimate measure of the effectiveness is the
bacteriological result. The measurement of residual chlorine
does supply a tool for practical control. If the residual chlorine
value commonly effective in most wastewater treatment plants
ml
does not yield satisfactory bacteriological kills in a particular
plant, the residual chlorine that does must be determined and
used as a control in that plant. In other words, the 0.5 mg//.
residual chlorine, while generally effective, is not a rigid stan-
dard but a guide that may be changed to meet local require-
ments.
One special case would be the use of chlorine in the effluent
from a plant serving a tuberculosis hospital. Studies have
shown that a residual of at least 2.0 mgIL should be maintained
in the effluent from this type of institution, and that detention
time should be at least two hours at the average rate of flow
instead of the thirty minutes which is normally used for basis of
design. Two-stage chlorination may be particularly effective in
this case.
The following list of chlorine dosages provides a reasonable
guideline to produce chlorine residual adequate for applica-
tions indicated for domestic wastewaters. Individual plants
may require higher or lower dosages, depending upon type
and amount of suspended and dissolved organic compounds
in the chlorinated sample.
APPLICATION
Collection Systems
Slime Control
Corrosion Control
Odor Control
Treatment
Grease Removal
BOD Reduction
Inorganic Compounds
Filter Ponding
Filter Flies
Activated Sludge
Bulking
Digester
Supernatant
Foaming
Disinfection
Raw Wastewater
Primary-Clarifier Effluent
Chemical Precipitation
Trickling-Filter Effluent*
Activated-Sludge Effluent*
Advanced Waste Treatment
"After secondary clarification
DOSAGE RANGE, mg IL
1-15
10-25
10-25
1-10
1-10
2-12
1-10
0.5
1-10
20-150
2-20
10-30
5-20
2-6
3-20
2-8
1-5
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 389.
10.0J What is the objective of disinfection?
10.0K How is the effectiveness of the chlorination process for
a particular plant determined?
BHC
0? 9
OH C7|
Please answer the discussion and review questions before
continuing with Lesson 2.
-------
336 Treatment Plants
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
Chapter 10. DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
(Lesson 1 of 5 Lessons)
At the end of each lesson in this chapter, you will find dis-
cussion and review questions that you should work before con-
tinuing. The purpose of these questions is to indicate to you
how well you understand the material in the lesson.
Write the answers to these questions in your notebook be-
fore continuing.
1. Why must wastewaters be disinfected?
2. Why is chlorination used to disinfect wastewater?
3. To improve disinfection, which is more effective — increas-
ing the chlorine dose, or extending the chlorine contact
time?
4. What constituents in wastewater are mainly responsible for
the chlorine demand?
5. Calculate the chlorinator setting (lbs per 24 hours) to treat a
waste with a chlorine demand of 12 mg//., when a chlorine
residual of 2 mg/Z. is desired, if the flow is 1 MGD.
6. How do suspended and dissolved organic compounds in an
effluent affect disinfection?
CHAPTER 10. DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
(Lesson 2 of 5 Lessons)
10.1 POINTS OF CHLORINE APPLICATION (Fig. 10.3)
10.10 Collection System Chlorination
One of the primary benefits of up-sewer chlorination is to
prevent the deterioration of structures. Other benefits include
odor and septicity control, and possibly BOD reduction to de-
crease the load imposed on the wastewater treatment pro-
cesses. In some instances, the maximum benefit may result
from a single application of chlorine at a point on the main
intercepting sewer before the junction of all feeder sewer lines.
In others, several applications at more than one point on the
main intercepting sewer or at the upper ends of the feeder lines
may prove most effective. Due to high costs CHLORINATION
SHOULD BE CONSIDERED AS A TEMPORARY OR
EMERGENCY MEASURE IN MOST CASES, with emphasis
being placed on proper design of the system. Aeration also is
effective in controlling septic conditions in collection systems.
Although many problems result from improper design or de-
sign for future capacity requirements, the need for hydrogen
sulfide protection exists under the best of conditions in some
locations.
10.11 Prechlorination
"Prechlorination" is defined as the addition of chlorine to
wastewater at the entrance to the treatment plant, ahead of
settling units and prior to the addition of other chemicals. In
addition to its application for aiding disinfection and odor con-
trol at this point, prechlorination is applied to reduce plant BOD
load, as an aid to settling, to control foaming in Imhoff units,
and to help remove oil. Current trends are away from pre-
chlorination to up-sewer aeration or other chemical treatment
for control of odors.
10.12 Plant Chlorination
Chlorine is added to wastewater during treatment by other
processes, and the specific point of application is related to the
results desired. The purpose of plant chlorination may be for
control and prevention of odors, corrosion, sludge bulking, di-
gester foaming, filter ponding, filter flies, and as an aid in
sludge thickening. Here again, chlorination should be an
emergency measure. Extreme care must be exercised when
applying chlorine because it can interfere with or inhibit biolog-
ical treatment processes.
10.13 Chlorination Before Filtration
More stringent discharge requirements are causing many
agencies to provide filtration for solids removal before dis-
charge (Chapter 23). The better designs provide a means of
chlorinating the water before application to the filters to kill
algae and other large biological organisms. Prechlorination
tends to prevent the development of biological growths which
might cause short-circuiting or excessive backwashing in the
filter media. Postchlorination of the effluent from the filter would
be in addition to this application.
10.14 Postchlorination
"Postchlorination" is defined as the addition of chlorine to
municipal or industrial wastewater following other treatment
processes. This point of application should be before a
CHLORINE CONTACT UNIV and after the final settling unit in
the treatment plant. The most effective place for chlorine appli-
cation for disinfection is after treatment and on a well-clarified
effluent. Postchlorination is used primarily for disinfection. As a
result of chlorination for disinfection, some reduction in BOD
17 Chlorine Contact Unit. A baffled basin that provides sufficient detention time for disinfection to occur.
-------
Disinfection 337
COLLECTION SYSTEM
ODOR CONTROL
CORROSION CONTROL
PUMP STATION
PRECHLORINATION
ODOR CONTROL
CORROSION CONTROL
BOD REDUCTION
AID SEDIMENTATION
GREASE REMOVAL
SCREENS
REMOVAL
IN-PLANT
ODOR CONTROL
BOD REDUCTION
SEPTICITY CONTROL
SEDIMENTATION
AND FLOTATION
SLUDGE
DIGESTION
IN-PLANT
RETURN
SLUDGE
TRICKLING
FILTERS
ACTIVATED
SLUDGE
ODOR CONTROL
PSYCHODA FLY
CONTROL
PONDING
CONTROL
BOD REDUCTION
SEPTICITY
SLUDGE
BULKING
AID
SEDIMENTATION
SEDIMENTATION
SEDIMENTATION
MIXED LIQUOR
ODOR CONTROL
AID SEDIMENTATION
POSTCriLORINATION
DISINFECTION
CHLORINE
CONTACT
CHAMBER
Fig. 10.3 Points of chlorine application
-------
338 Treatment Plants
may be observed; however, chlorination is rarely practiced
solely for the purpose of BOD reduction.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 389.
10.1 A What is the purpose of up-sewer chlorination?
10.1 B Where should chlorine be applied in sewers?
10.1C What are the main reasons for prechlorination?
10.1 D Why might chlorine be added to wastewater during
treatment by other processes?
10.1E What is the objective of postchlorination?
10.2 CHLORINATION PROCESS CONTROL
10.20 Chlorinator Control
The control of chlorine flow to points of application is accom-
plished by six basic methods and a seventh method which
combines two of the basic six.
10.200 Manual Control
Feed-rate adjustment and starting and stopping of equip-
ment is done by hand.
10.201 Start-Stop Control
Feed-rate adjustment by hand, starting and stopping (by in-
terrupting injector water supply) controlled by starting of
wastewater pump, flow switch, and level switch.
10.202 Step-Rate Control
Chlorinator feed rate is varied according to the number of
wastewater pumps in service. As each pump starts, a pre-set
quantity of chlorine is added to the flow of chlorine existing at
starting time. This system can be applied conveniently with
installations using up to eight pumps.
10.203 Time-Program Control
Chlorine feed rate is varied on a timed step-rate basis regu-
lated to correspond to the times of flow changes or by using a
time-pattern transmitter which uses a revolving cam cut to
match a flow pattern.
10.204 Flow-Proportional Control
Chlorinator feed rate is controlled by a system which con-
verts wastewater flow information into a chlorinator control
value. This can be accomplished by a variety of flow-metering
equipment, including all process control instrumentation pres-
ently available and nearly all metering equipment now in use
on wastewater systems.
10.205 Chlorine Residual Control
Chlorine feed rate is controlled to a desired chlorine residual
(usually COMBINED AVAILABLE CHLORINE™) level. After
mixing and reaction time (about five minutes maximum), a
wastewater sample is TITRATED19 by an AMPEROMETRIC20
analyzer-recorder (or indicator). As the residual chlorine level
varies above or below the desired (set point) level, the
chlorinator is caused to change its feed rate to bring the
chlorine residual back to the desired level.
10.206 Compound Loop Control
Any "automatic" control system (step-rate, timed program,
flow proportional, or residual) can be employed in two ways:
(1) by positioning the feed-rate valve; or (2) by varying the
vacuum differential across the feed-rate valve. For instance, a
flow-proportional (or step-rate, or timed program) control sys-
tem may position the feed-rate valve, and a residual-control
system may vary the vacuum differential across the feed-rate
valve. Thus, changes in flow cause changes in feed-rate valve
position, but changes in chlorine demand may occur without
any flow change. When this happens, the residual analyzer
detects a change in chlorine residual and, by varying the vac-
uum differential across the feed-rate valve, causes the
chlorinator to change rates to meet the desired chlorine re-
sidual level.
Various combinations of compound loop control can be
employed. Generally speaking, the part of the system requiring
the fastest response should be applied to valve positioning
(since it responds faster). If flow changes are rapid, flow con-
trol should be by valve position. If flow and demand change
rates are nearly the same, the magnitude of change may dic-
tate the selection of control.
The selection of control methods should be based on treat-
ment costs and treatment results (required or desired). A
waste discharger must normally meet a disinfection standard.
A small treatment plant might do this with a compound loop
control system costing several thousand dollars, but may save
less than one hundred dollars a year in chlorine consumed. In
this case the expense would not be justified. A manual system,
which would meet the maximum requirements and over-
chlorinate at minimum requirement periods, might be used. It is
not unheard of for a plant to have maximum chlorine residual
requirements becaue of irrigation and/or marine life tolerances.
In these cases the uncontrolled or haphazard application of
chlorine cannot be considered, no matter how large the added
cost.
A specified chlorine residual level may be required at some
point downstream from the best residual control sample point.
In this case a residual analyzer should be used to monitor and
record residuals at this point. It may also be used to change the
control set point of the controlling residual analyzer.
Ultimate control of dosage for disinfection rests on the re-
sults desired, that is, the bacterial level or concentration ac-
ceptable or permissible at the point of discharge. Determina-
tion of chlorine requirements according to the current edition of
STANDARD METHODS FOR THE EXAMINATION OF WATER
AND WASTEWATER is the best method of control. You must
remember that the chlorine requirement or chlorine dose will
vary with wastewater flow, time of contact, temperature, pH,
and major waste constituents such as hydrogen sulfide, am-
monia, and amount of dead and living organic matter.
18 Combined Available Chlorine. The concentration of chlorine which is combined with ammonia (NHJ as chloramine or as other chloro
derivatives, yet is still available to oxidize organic matter.
19 Titrate (TIE-trate). To TITRATE a sample, a chemical solution of known strength is added on a drop-by-drop basis until a color change,
precipitate, or pH change in the sample is observed (end point). Titration is the process of adding the chemical solution to completion of the
reaction as signaled by the end point. ,
20 Amperometric (am-PURR-o-MET-rick). A method of measurement that records electric current flowing or generated, rather than recording
voltage. Amperometric titration is a means of measuring concentrations of certain substances in water.
-------
Disinfection 339
The chlorine requirements for various flow rates and contact
times can be determined on either a plant or a laboratory scale.
If the determination is made on a laboratory scale, you should
expect the plant requirements to be somewhat higher. This is
to be expected since the mixing and actual contact times can
be more carefully controlled in the laboratory. It is preferable
that the determinations be made by both methods and the
results compared. If the chlorine requirement as determined by
full plant tests is significantly greater than that determined by
laboratory testing, a wastage of chlorine is indicated. The two
major causes of a large discrepancy between laboratory and
plant results are poor mixing at the point of chlorine injection
and short-circuiting in the contact chamber. Either problem can
usually be solved at a relatively small expense as compared to
the savings which can be achieved by the reduced use of
chlorine.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 389.
10.2A How can chlorine gas feed be controlled?
10.2B Control of chlorine dosage depends on the bacterial
desired.
10.2C Define amperometric.
10.21 Chlorlnation Control Nomogram21
Determination of the chlorine residual may give information
that confirms the previous choice of dosage or indicates that
the dosage should be readjusted. The contact period must be
specified since longer contact periods increase chlorine up-
take.
Since feed rate is expressed in pounds per day, the rate
setting of the feeder must be calculated from determination of
chlorine required and the flow. The simplest means of making
the calculation is by a chlorination control nomogram taken
from the WPCF MANUAL OF PRACTICE NO. 11 (MOP 11),
1968 (Fig. 10.4). The following sequence is a guide to using
this nomogram:
1. Lay a straightedge (ruler) on point on Line A, representing
flow, and on point on Line B, representing CHLORINE RE-
QUIRED, 22 and read point on Line C, which shows setting
for chlorine feeder.
2. For any value in excess of maximum indicated on Scales A,
B, or C, introduce proper factor of ten or multiple thereof.
The application of a factor of ten will be presented later in
Example 2.
3. Greatest accuracy will be obtained when the angle of the
straightedge approaches a right angle with Line B. Multi-
pliers of ten may be applied to aid in accomplishing this
objective.
4. If straightedge does not cross all three scales, introduce
necessary factors of ten and move straightedge to point
where all three scales will be crossed.
Let's try some examples using Fig. 10.4. Assume the given
chlorine dosage was selected on the basis of preliminary tests
as capable of producing the desired results.
EXAMPLE 1
Given: Maximum Flow Rate = 0.5 MGD
Chlorine dosage = 1.0 mg/L
Procedure: Place one end of straightedge (ruler) on 0.5
MGD (Line A) and draw a line through the point
on Line B representing a chlorine dosage of 1.0
mg/L. Extend the line to Line C and read the
point indicating the chlorine feed rate.
Answer: Chlorine Feed Rate = 4.2 lbs per 24 hours
Check:
Chlorine
Feed = (Max. Flow, MGD) (Dosage, mg/L) (8.34 lbs/ gal)
Rate
= 0.5 MGX 1.0 -JDtf-3 x 8.34 M "J
day M mg gal u a
4.170
= 4.17, say 4.2 lbs per day
EXAMPLE 2
Given: Maximum Flow Rate = 5.0 MGD
Chlorine Dosage = 1.0 mg/L
Procedure: 5.0 MGD is off our scale on Line A. Reduce flow
by a factor of ten to 0.5 MGD, or 5.0 MGD/10 =
0.5 MGD. The problem is the same as Example
1, and the chart gives a chlorine feed rate of 4.2
lbs per 24 hrs. The flow rate is actually ten times
0.5 MGD (10 x 0.5 MGD = 5 MGD). Therefore
the required chlorine feed rate is 10 x 4.2 lbs per
24 hours (10 x 4.2 = 42) or 42 lbs per 24 hours.
Note: On a cold day, a 150-lb cylinder may not be
adequate to provide this feed rate because the
lines may freeze.
EXAMPLE 3
Given: Maximum Flow Rate = 0.4 MGD
Chlorine Dosage = 5.0 mg/L
Procedure: A line through a flow of 0.4 MGD (Line A) and 5.0
mg/L (Line B) misses line C. The chlorine dos-
age should be reduced by a factor of ten to be
able to use the nomogram.
21 Nomogram. A chart or diagram containing three or more scales used to solve problems with three or more variables instead of using
mathematical formulas.
22 Chlorine Requirement. The amount of chlorine which is needed for a particular purpose. Some reasons for adding chlorine are reducing
the number of coliform bacteria (Most Probable Number), obtaining a particular chlorine residual, or destroying some chemical in the water.
In each case a definite chlorine dosage will be necessary. This dosage is the chlorine requirement.
" Recall concentrations in mgIL are the same as mglM mg.
-------
340 Treatment Plants
10.0
9.0
100
8.0
0.2
200 y
£ 0.3
7.0
CM
UJ
6.0
_i 0.4
CL
Q
300
05
5.0
400 $
O 0.6
4.0 O
UJ
UJ
Ll_
u.
UJ
07
3.0
500
0 8
2.0
600
09
6944
Fig. 10.4 Chlorination control nomogram
(Source: WPCF MOP No. 11,1968)
-------
Disinfection 341
Chlorine Dosage = 5-0 mg/L = Q 5
10
1.7 lbs per 24 hours
(from chart)
= (10) (1.7 lbs per 24 hrs)
= 17 lbs per 24 hrs
Chlorine
Feed Rate
Actual
Feed Rate
The chlorine feed rate must be ten times the rate
from the chart because the chlorine required was
reduced by a factor of ten to use the chart.
The results from the chart should be checked using the
mathematical calculations used in Example 1 to avoid errors.
Note that the chlorine requirement should take into consid-
eration the chlorine demand so that a desired residual is
obtained after a given contact period. As discussed in Sec-
tion 10.06, chlorine requirements vary with the wastewater
characteristics, concentration, flow, and temperature. Ad-
justment of chlorine feeder rates to meet all these variations
is the ultimate goal of good operation practice. More frequent
adjustments are usually required for primary effluent than for
secondary effluent.
Suggested schedule for adjusting manual-feeder rates:
1. In large plants — at least every hour,
2. In medium-sized plants — every two to four hours, and
3. In small plants — every eight hours.
Other methods of chlorinator control have been described
in Section 10.20.
10.22 Hypochlorinator24 Feed Rate and Control
Chlorine for disinfection and other purposes is provided in
some plants by the use of hypochlorite compounds. The
amount of chlorine delivered depends on the type of hypochlo-
rite. For example, HTH (high test hypochlorite) contains 65
percent, by weight, of chlorine, and chlorinated lime contains
34 percent.
Manufacturers of hypochlorite compounds define available
chlorine as the amount of gaseous chlorine required to make
the equivalent hypochlorite chlorine. If you prepare a hypochlo-
rite solution for disinfection and immediately measure the
chlorine residual, you will find the chlorine residual about half
of the expected value based on the manufacturer s amount of
available chlorine. When hypochlorite is mixed with water, ap-
proximately half of the chlorine forms hydrochloric acid (HCI)
and the other half forms hypochlorite (OCh), the chlorine re-
sidual that you measured.
EXAMPLE:
A wastewater requires a chlorine feed rate of 17 lbs per day.
How many pounds of chlorinated lime will be required to pro-
vide the needed chlorine? Assume each pound of chlorinated
lime contains 0.34 lbs of available chlorine.
Chlorinated Lime = Chlorine Required, lbs/day
Feed Rate, lbs/day
Portion of Chlorine in lb of Hypochlorite
17 lbs/day
0.34
50 lbs/day
Hypochlorinators can be installed on either small systems or
large systems. Usually the larger systems use liquid chlorine
because of lower costs. However, some very large cities use
hypochlorite because it is safer. Treatment plants serving
these cities are located in highly populated areas where escap-
ing chlorine gas could threaten the lives of many people.
The items in feed systems of hypochlorinators and their con-
struction are discussed below.
1. Some type of storage system for the solution. The storage
container is made of corrosion-resistant materials such as
plastic or other similar materials.
2. Solution piping which is usually fiber glass or PVC
(polyvinyl chloride).
3. Diffusers that are made of the same material as the piping
systems.
4. Valves and EDUCTORS25 that are made of PVC.
5. Pumps that are made of corrosion-resistant materials.
Epoxy-lined systems have been successful.
6. Flow meters. These meters can be constructed using a
Hastelloy C straight-through metal tube ROTAMETER26
with the float position determined magnetically and the flow
rate transmitted either electrically or pneumatically.
7. Chlorine residual analyzers of the amperometric type are
commonly installed.
8. Automatic controls that consist of a hypochlorite flow con-
troller, recorder and totalizer, a ratio control station, and the
necessary electronic signal converters.
The feed system can usually be operated automatically or by
manual control. The operation of the hypochlorite system will
usually require twice the cost of that of the liquid chlorine sys-
tems. Maintenance of the hypochlorinator system requires
more operator-hours than do the liquid chlorine systems.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 390.
10.2D How is the rate of dosage for a chlorinator deter-
mined?
10.2E Determine the chlorine feed rate, pounds per 24
hours, if you are treating:
1. A flow of 0.5 MGD and the chlorine required is 1.0
mg/L.
2. Flow = 0.8 MGD and chlorine required = 4.0
mg/L.
3. Flow = 6 MGD and chlorine required = 25 mg/L.
10.2F How frequently should feeder rates be adjusted with
manual controls? Why?
10.2G How many pounds of HTH (high test hypochlorite)
should be used per day by a hypochlorinator dosing a
flow of 0.55 MGD at 12 mg/L of chlorine?
24 Hypochlorinator (hi-poe-KLOR-i-NAY-tor). A chlorine pump or device used to feed chlorine solutions made from hypochlorites such as
bleach (sodium hypochlorite) or calcium hypochlorite.
25 Eductor. A hydraulic device used to create a negative pressure (suction) by forcing a liquid through a restriction, such as a Venturi. An
eductor or aspirator (the hydraulic device) may be used in the laboratory in place of a vacuum pump; sometimes used instead of a suction
pump.
26 Rotameter. A device used to measure the flow rate of gases and liquids. The gas or liquid being measured flows vertically up a calibrated
tube. Inside the tube is a small ball or bullet-shaped float (it may rotate) that rises or falls depending on the flow rate. The flow rate may be
read on a scale behind the middle of the ball or the top of the float.
-------
342 Treatment Plants
10.23 Chlorine Solution Discharge Lines, Diffusers, and
Mixing
10.230 Solution Discharge Lines
Solution discharge lines are made from a variety of materials
depending upon the requirements of service. Two primary req-
uisites are that it must be resistant to the corrosive effects of
chlorine solution and of adequate size to carry the required
flows. Additional considerations are pressure conditions, flexi-
bility (if required), resistance to external corrosion and stresses
when underground or passing through structures, ease and
tightness of connections, and the adaptability to field fabrica-
tion or alteration.
Development of plastics in the past several years has con-
tributed greatly to chemical solution transmission. Polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) pipe and black polyethylene flexible tubing
have all but eliminated the use of rubber hose. Both are gener-
ally less expensive and both outlast rubber in normal service.
The use of hose is almost exclusively limited to applications
where flexibility is required or where extremely high back pres-
sures exist.
PVC and polyethylene can be field fabricated and altered.
PVC should be Schedule 80 to limit its tendency to cold flow
and partially collapse under vacuum conditions, or for higher
pressure ratings if required. Schedule 80 PVC may be
threaded and assembled with ordinary pipe tools or may be
installed using solvent-welded fittings.
Rubber-lined steel pipe has been used for many years
where resistance to external stresses is required. It cannot be
field fabricated or altered and is thus somewhat restricted in
application. PVC lining of steel pipe has not yet become eco-
nomically competitive, but other plastics, which can readily
compete with rubber lining and are adaptable to field fabrica-
tion and alteration, have been developed.
Never use neoprene hose to carry chlorine solutions be-
cause it will become hard and brittle in a short time.
10.231 Chlorine Solution Diffusers
These diffusers are normally constructed of the same mate-
rials used for solution lines. Their design is an extremely impor-
tant part of a chlorination program. This importance is almost
completely related to the mixing of the chlorine solution with
the wastewater being treated; however, strength and flexibility
also must be given consideration. In most CIRCULAR, FILLED
conduits flowing at 0.25 ft/sec (0.08 m/sec) or greater, a solu-
tion injected at the center of the pipeline will mix with the entire
flow after flowing ten pipe diameters downstream. Mixing in
open channels can be accomplished by the use of a hydraulic
jump (Fig. 10.5) or by sizing diffuser orifices so that a high
velocity (about 16 ft/sec or 4.8 m/sec) is attained at the diffuser
discharge. This accomplishes two things: (1) introducing a
pressure drop to get equal discharge from each orifice, and (2)
imparting sufficient energy to the surrounding wastewater to
complete the mixing. Generally speaking, a diffuser should be
supplied for each two to three feet (0.6 to 1 meter) of channel
depth. Diffusers should be placed across the width of the
channel rather than in the direction of flow. Mixing also can be
achieved by the use of high speed mechanical mixers specif-
ically designed for this purpose.
HIGH FLO*
VELOCITY
Fig. 10.5 Hydraulic jump
10.232 Mixing
Mixing as well as the speed of mixing are extremely impor-
tant ahead of a chlorine contact tank or a residual sampling
point. Since a contact tank is usually designed for low velocity,
little mixing occurs after wastewater enters it. Mixing must be
achieved before the contact tank is entered. The same is true
for a chlorine residual sampling point. If good mixing does not
occur somewhere upstream from the sampling point, erratic
results will be obtained by the residual analyzing system.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 390.
10.2H Why does little mixing of the chlorine solution with
wastewater occur in chlorine contact basins?
10.21 Chlorine solution discharge lines may be made of
or
10.24 Measurement of Chlorine Residual
Refer to Chapter 16, "Laboratory Procedures and Chemis-
try," for procedures to measure chlorine residual. Amperomet-
ric titration provides for the most convenient, and the most
repeatable results; however, the equipment costs are more
expensive than for the other methods. The starch-iodide test
can be used, but will have limited success in turbid or muddy
waters. DPD TESTS27 can be used and are less expensive
than the other methods, but this also is a colorimetric method.
The orthotolidine method is no longer a test that is recognized
by federal agencies. Figure 10.6 shows a typical automatic
chlorine residual analyzer.
10.25 Start-Up of Chlorinators
Before starting any chlorination system, read the plant Op-
eration and Maintenance Manual and the manufacturer's litera-
ture to become familiar with the equipment. Review the plans
or drawings of the facility. Determine what equipment,
pipelines, pumps, tanks and valves are to be placed into serv-
ice or are in service. The current status of the entire chlorina-
tion system must be known before starting or stopping any
portion of the system. During emergencies you must act
quickly and may not have time to check out each of the steps
outlined above, but you still must follow established proce-
dures.
HYDRAULIC
LOW FLO*
VELOCITY
27 DPD Tests. A colorimetric chlorine residual test. DPD stands for N, N-diethyl-p-phenylenediamine.
-------
Disinfection 343
ACID HFStRVO«
• CONSTANT «40 OCVft*
BUFFER RESERVOIR
BUFFER PUMP
STROKE ADJUSTMENT
41ft CHAMBER
PUMP FEtO
RATE CONTROL
115 VOLT
SUPPLY
SAMPLE
PRESSURE GAUGE
AIR BREAK
CONSTANT LEVEL
DILUTION BOX
ACID PUMP
STRODE ADJUSTTaCNT
FLOW METERS
GRIT STICK
GND
TEMP COMPENSATOR
CELL BLOCK-
PLUNGER
TO RECORDER
OR INDICATOR
ORIFICE
OVERFLOW DRAIN
AMPLE PUMP
UMP FEED
RATE CONTROL
REFERENCE ELECTRODE
MEASURING ELECTRODE
Fig. 10.6 Automatic chlorine residual analyzer
(Permission of Wallace & Tiernan Division, Penwatt Corporation)
-------
344 Treatment Plants
Procedures for start-up, operation, shutdown and
troubleshooting are outlined in this section and are intended to
be typical procedures for all types of chlorinators. For specific
directions, see manufacturer's literature and plant O and M
manual.
10.250 Gas Chlorinators
Start-up procedures for chlorinators using chlorine gas from
containers are outlined in this section.
1. Be sure chlorine gas valve at the chlorinator is closed.
This valve should have been closed since the chlorinator
is out of service.
2. All chlorine valves on the supply line should have been
closed during shutdown. Be sure they are still closed. If
any valves are required to be open for any reason, this
exception should be indicated by a tag on the valve.
3. Inspect all tubing, manifold and valve connections for po-
tential leaks and be sure all joints are properly gasketed.
4. Check chlorine-solution distribution lines to be sure that
system is properly valved to deliver chlorine solution to
desired point of application.
5. Open chlorine metering orifice slightly by adjusting
chlorine feed-rate control.
6. Start the injector water supply system. Usually the source
of water is plant effluent (with a minimum of suspended
solids) or potable water (after an AIR-GAP28 or air-break
system) supply. Injector water is pumped at an appropri-
ate flow rate and the flow through the injector creates
sufficient vacuum in the injector to draw chlorine. Chlorine
is absorbed and mixed in the water at the injector. This
chlorine solution is conveyed to the point of application.
7. Examine injector water supply system.
a. Note reading of injector-supply pressure gage. If read-
ing is abnormal (different from usual reading), try to
identify cause and correct.
b. Note reading of injector vacuum gage. If system does
not have a vacuum gage, have one installed. If the
vacuum reading is less than normal, the machine may
function at a lower feed rate, but will be unable to
deliver at rated capacity.
8. Inspect chlorinator vacuum lines for leaks.
9. Crack open the chlorine container valve and allow gas to
enter the line. Inspect all joints for leaks by placing an
ammonia-soaked rag near each joint. The formation of a
white cloud or vapor will indicate a chlorine leak. Start with
the valve at the chlorine container, move down the line
and check all joints between this valve and the next one
downstream. If the downstream valve passes the am-
monia test, open the valve and continue, to the next valve.
If there are no leaks to the chlorinator, continue with the
start-up procedure.
10. Inspect the chlorinator.
a. Chlorine gas pressure at the chlorinator should be
between 20 and 30 psi (1.4 to 2.1 kg/sq cm).
b. Operate chlorinator at complete range of feed rates.
c. Check operation on manual and automatic settings.
11. Chlorinator is ready for use. Log in the time the system is
placed into operation and the application point.
10.251 Liquid Chlorine Chlorinators
Start-up procedures for chlorinators using liquid chlorine
from containers are outlined in this section.
1. Inspect all joints, valves, manifolds and tubing connec-
tions in chlorination system, including application lines for
proper fit and for leaks. Make sure that all joints have
gaskets.
2. If chlorination system has been broken open or exposed to
the atmosphere, verify that the system is dry. Usually once
a system has been dried out, it is never opened again to
the atmosphere. However, if moisture enters the system in
the air or by any other means, it readily mixes with chlorine
and forms hydrochloric acid which will corrode the pipes,
valves, joints and fittings.
To verify that the system is dry, determine the DEW
POINT29 (must be lower than 40°F or 5°C). If not dry, turn
the evaporator on, pass dry air through the evaporator and
force this air through the system. If this step is omitted and
moisture is in the system, serious corrosion damage can
result and the entire system may have to be repaired.
3. Start up the evaporators. Fill the water bath and adjust the
device according to the manufacturer's directions.
4. Turn on the heaters on the evaporators.
5. Wait until the temperature of the evaporators reaches
180°F (82°C). This may take over an hour on large units.
6. Inspect and close all valves on the chlorine supply line.
7. Open the chlorine-metering orifice slightly. This is to pre-
vent damage to the rotameter.
8. Start the injector water supply system.
9. Examine injector water supply system.
a. Note reading of injector water supply pressure gage. If
gage reading is abnormal (different than usual read-
ing), try to identify the cause and correct it.
28 Air Gap. An open vertical drop, or vertical empty space, between a drinking (potable) water supply and the point of use in a wastewater
treatment plant. This gap prevents back siphonage because there is no way wastewater can reach the potable water. See Chapter 15,
Section 15.2, paragraph 18, "Air-Gap Separation Systems."
29 Dew Point Test. Dew point is the temperature to which air with a given quantity of water vapor must be cooled to cause condensation of the
vapor in the air. One way to measure the dew point is with a special dew point apparatus. This apparatus consists of a small box. The gas or
air being tested enters the box on one side and leaves on the opposite side. One of the other sides has an observation window. A polished
cup is inserted firmly in the top.
Pass a sample of air or gas being tested through this apparatus. Adjust the flow so it can be felt against wetted lips, but not readily felt by
the hand. Pour acetone into the cup. Allow the sample to pass through the cup for about five minutes. Add small amounts of crushed dry ice
to the acetone. Stir continuously with a thermometer. Carefully add dry ice to the acetone as necessary to slowly lower the temperature.
When dew or moisture first appears on the outside polished surface of the cup, read the temperature from the thermometer. This tempera-
ture is the DEW POINT. The lower the dew point, the less moisture in the air. The amount of moisture in the air can be determined from a dew
point temperature chart or table provided by manufacturers of dew point measuring equipment.
-------
Disinfection 345
b. Note reading of injector vacuum gage. If system does
not have a vacuum gage, have one installed. If the
vacuum reading is less than normal, the machine may
function at a lower feed rate, but will be unable to
deliver at rated capacity.
10. Inspect chlorinator vacuum lines for leaks.
11. Close all valves on the supply line.
12. Crack open the CHLORINE GAS LINE at the chlorine con-
tainer. All liquid chlorine systems should be checked by
using gas because of the danger of leaks (gas is less
dangerous). Inspect the joints between this valve and the
next one downstream. If this valve passes the ammonia
leak test, continue to the next valve down the line. Follow
this procedure until the evaporator is reached. Before al-
lowing chlorine to enter the evaporator and the chlorinator,
make sure that all valves between the evaporator and the
chlorinator are open. Heat in the evaporator will expand
the gas, and if the system is closed, there could be prob-
lems. Chlorine should never be trapped in a line between
the evaporator and the chlorinator.
13. If no problems develop, the gas line can be put in service
by opening the valve 11/2 to 2 turns.
14. Check the operation of the chlorinator.
a. Operate over complete range of chlorine feed rates.
b. Check operation on manual and automatic settings.
15. Inspect the liquid chlorine control valve. If OK, open the
liquid chlorine control valve.
16. After admitting liquid chlorine to the system, wait until the
temperature of the evaporator again reaches 180°F (82°C)
and full working pressure (100 psi or 7 kg/sq cm). Inspect
the evaporator by looking for leaks around pipe joints,
unions and valves.
17. The system is ready for normal operation.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 390.
10.2J What would you do before attempting to start any
chlorination system?
10.2K How is the chlorination system inspected for leaks?
10.26 Normal and Abnormal Operation
Normal operation of the chlorination process requires regu-
lar observation of facilities and a regular preventive mainte-
nance program. When something abnormal is observed or dis-
covered, corrective action must be taken. This section outlines
normal operation procedures and also responses to abnormal
conditions.
10.260 Container Storage Are a
Daily
1. Inspect building or area for ease of access by authorized
personnel to perform routine and emergency duties.
2. Be sure fan and ventilation equipment are operating prop-
erly.
3. Read scales, charts or meters at the same time every day
to determine use of chlorine and any other chemicals.
Notify plant superintendent when chlorine supply is low.
4. Look at least once per shift for chlorine and chemical leaks.
5. Try to maintain temperature of storage area below tempera-
ture of chlorinator room.
6. Determine manifold pressure before and after chlorine
pressure regulating valve.
7. Be sure all chlorine containers are properly secured.
Weekly
1. Clean building or storage area.
2. Check operation of chlorine leak-detector alarm.
Monthly
1. Exercise all valves, including flex connector's auxiliary,
manifold, filter bypass, and switchover valves.
2. Inspect all flex connectors and replace any that have been
kinked or flattened.
3. Inspect hoisting equipment.
a. Cables: frayed or cut.
b. Beams and hooks: cracked or bent.
c. Controls: operate properly; do not stick or respond
sluggishly; cords not frayed; safety chains or cables in
place.
4. Examine building ventilation.
a. Ducts and louvers: clean and operate freely.
b. Fans and blowers: operate properly; guards in place;
equipment properly lubricated.
5. Perform preventive maintenance as scheduled.
a. Lubricating equipment.
b. Repacking of valves and regulators.
c. Cleaning and replacing of valve seats and stems.
d. Cleaning filters and replacing glass wool. (CAUTION:
Glass wool soaked with liquid chlorine or chlorine im-
purities may burn your skin or give off sufficient chlorine
gas to be dangerous.)
e. Painting of equipment.
10.261 Evaporators
Evaporators are used to convert liquid chlorine to gaseous
chlorine for use by gas chlorinators.
Dally
1. Check evaporator water bath to be sure water level is at
midpoint of sight glass.
-------
346 Treatment Plants
2. Be sure water bath temperature is between 160 to 195°F
(71 to 91°C). Low alarm should sound at 160°F (71°C) and
high alarm should sound at 200°F (93°C).
3. Determine chlorine inlet pressure to evaporator. Pressure
should be same pressure as on supply manifold from con-
tainers (20 to 100 psi or 1.4 to 7 kg/sq cm).
4. Measure chlorine outlet temperature from evaporator. Typi-
cal range is 90 to 105°F (32 to 41°C). High alarm should
sound at 110°F (43°C). At low temperatures the chlorine
pressure-reducing valve (CPRV) will close due to the low
temperature in the water bath.
5. Check CPRV for open-closed position.
6. If evaporator is equipped with water bath recirculation pump
at back of evaporator, determine if pump is operating prop-
erly.
7. Look for leaks and repair any discovered.
Abnormal Evaporator Conditions
1. Evaporator water level low. Water level not visible in sight
glass!
Troubleshooting Measurements.
a. Determine actual level of water.
b. Measure temperature of water.
c. Check temperature and pressure of chlorine in
evaporator system and feed lines back to containers
and chlorinators for possible overpressure of system
(pressure should not exceed 100 psi or 7 kg/sq cm).
Corrective Action
a. If chlorine pressure on system is near or over 100 psi (7
kg/sq cm), close supply-container valves to stop
chlorine addition to the system, increase feed rate of
chlorinator to use chlorine in the system, and drop the
pressure back down to a safe range. NOTE: Alarm sys-
tem is usually set to sound at 110 psi (7.7 kg/sq cm). If
system pressure was at or over 110 psi (7.7 kg/sq cm),
inspect alarm circuit to determine failure of alarm.
b. If temperature of water bath is at an abnormal level, find
the cause. Water bath levels are usually set in the fol-
lowing sequence:
1) 160°F or 71°C: low temperature alarm.
2) 185 to 195°F or 85 to 91 °C: normal operating range.
3) 185°F or 85°C: actuates pressure reducing valve
(PRV) to open position.
4) 200°F or 93°C: high temperature alarm.
If water temperature is above 200°F (93°C), alarm
should have sounded. Open control switch on
evaporator heaters to stop current flow to heating ele-
ments. If temperature is in normal range, return to cor-
recting the original problem of a low water level.
c. Evaporator water levels are controlled by a solenoid
valve. First check to see if drain valve is fully closed and
then use the following steps.
1) Override solenoid valve and fill water bath to proper
level.
2) If water cannot be added, take evaporator out of
service:
a. Switch to another evaporator, or
b. Switch supply to gas side of containers.
3) Repair valve and actuating sensor.
2. Low water temperature in evaporator.
a. Check chemical (chlorine) flow-through rate. Rate may
have exceeded unit's capacity and may require two
evaporators to be on line to handle chemical feed rate.
b. Inspect immersion heaters for proper operation. First
examine control panel for thermal overload on breaker.
Most evaporators are equipped with two to three heat-
ing elements. An inspection of the electrical system will
indicate if the breakers are shorted or open and will
locate the problem. Replace any heating elements that
have failed.
c. If no spare evaporators are available, operate from the
valves on the chlorine gas supply. If necessary, reduce
the chlorine feed rate to keep the chlorination system
working properly.
3. No chlorine gas flow to the chlorinator.
a. Inspect pressure-reducing valve downstream from
evaporator and determine if valve is in the open or
closed position.
1) Valve may be closed due to low water temperature
in evaporator (less than 185°F or 85°C).
2) Valve may be closed due to loss of vacuum on sys-
tem or loss of continuity of electrical control circuits
which may have been caused by a momentary
power drop. Correct problem and reset valve.
3) Valve may be out of adjustment and restricting gas
flow through the valve due to a low pressure setting.
b. Inspect supply containers and manifold. Possible
sources of lack of chlorine gas flow to chlorinators in-
clude:
1) Containers empty.
2) Container chlorine supply lines incorrectly con-
nected to gas instead of liquid side of containers.
High flow rates of gas will freeze chlorine, thus frost-
ing valves and flex connectors.
3) Chlorine manifold filters plugged. Check pressure
upstream and downstream from filter. Pressure
drop should not exceed 10 psi (0.7 kg/sq cm). Frost
on manifold will indicate a restriction in the filters.
4) Inspect manifold and system for closed valves. Most
systems operate properly with all chlorine valves at
only ONE TURN OPEN position.
Monthly
1. Exercise all valves, including inlet, outlet, pressure reducing
(PRV), water, drain and fill valves.
2. Inspect evaporator cathode-protection meter (if so
equipped). Cathodic protection protects the metal water
tank (on SULFONATORS30) and piping from corrosion due
to electrolysis. Electrolysis is the flow of electrical current
and is the reverse of metal plating. In electrolysis, the flow
away of certain compounds from the metal causes corro-
sion and holes in a short time. This type of corrosion is
30 Sulfonators (see Section 10.8, "Dechlonnstion ) ars slrnilor to chlotinotofs.
-------
Disinfection 347
controlled by either a sacrificial anode made of magnesium
and zinc or by applied small electrical currents to suppress
or reverse the normal corroding current flow.
3. Check setting of PRV (pressure reducing valve) in order to
maintain desired pressure of chlorine gas to chlorinators.
4. Inspect heating and ventilation equipment in chlorinator
area.
5. Perform scheduled routine preventive maintenance.
a. Drain and flush water bath.
b. Clean evaporator tank.
c. Repack gasket and reseat pressure-reducing valves.
d. Check heater elements.
e. Replace anodes.
f. Paint system.
10.262 Chlorinators, Including Injectors
Daily
1. Check injector water-supply pressure. Pressures will range
from 40 to 90 psi (2.8 to 6.3 kg/sq cm) depending on sys-
tem.
2. Determine injector vacuum. Values will range from 15 to 25
inches (38 to 64 cm) of mercury.
3. Check chlorinator vacuum. Values will range from 5 to 10
inches (13 to 25 cm) of mercury.
4. Determine chlorinator chlorine-supply pressure. Values will
range from 20 to 40 psi (1.4 to 2.8 kg/sq cm).
5. Read chlorinator feed rate on rotameter tube. Is feed rate at
required level? Record rotameter reading and time.
6. Examine and record mode of control.
a. Manual
b. Automatic (single input)
c. Automatic (dual input)
7. Measure chlorine residual at application point.
8. Inspect system for chlorine leaks.
9. Inspect auxiliary components.
a. Flow signal input. Does chlorinator feed rate change
when flow changes? Chlorinator response is normally
checked by biasing (adjusting) flow signal which may
drive dosage control unit on chlorinator to full open or
closed position. When switch is released, chlorinator
will return to previous feed rate. During this operation
the unit should have responded smoothly through the
change. If the response was not smooth, look for me-
chanical problems of binding, lubrication, or vacuum
leaks.
b. If chlorinator also is controlled by a residual analyzer,
be sure the analyzer is working properly. Check the
following items.
1) Actual chlorine residual is properly indicated.
2) Recorder alarm set point.
3) Recorder control set point.
4) Sample water flow.
5) Sample water flow to cell block after dilution with
fresh water.
6) Adequate flow of dilution water.
7) Filter system and drain.
8) Cell block
a) Buffer pump and solution feed correct. Run pH
test of cell block.
b) Check amount of grit in cell block and add more
grit if amount is low. Grit is used to keep the
electrode free of slimes and chemical scales in
order to provide quick and accurate readings.
c) Cell block hydraulics purger.
9) Run comparison tests of chlorine residuals. Do tests
match with analyzer output readings?
10) If residual analyzer samples two streams, start
other stream flow and compare tested residual of
that stream with analyzer output readings. Stan-
dardize analyzer output readings against tested re-
siduals. Enter changes and corrections in log.
11) Change recorder chart daily.
12) Check recorder output signal controlling chlorinator
for control responses on feed rate. Correct feed
rates through ratio controller.
Weekly
1. Put chlorinator on manual control. Operate feed-rate ad-
justment through full range from zero to full scale (250,500,
1000, 2000, 4000, 6000, 8000, or 10,000 pounds/day). At
each end of scale check:
a. Chlorinator vacuum.
b. Injector vacuum.
c. Solution line pressure.
d. Chlorine pressure at chlorinator.
If any of the readings do not produce normal set points,
make proper adjustments.
1) Injector should produce necessary vacuum at
chlorinator (5 to 10 inches or 13 to 25 centimeters of
mercury).
2) Adjust PRV to obtain sufficient pressure and chemi-
cal feed for full feed-rate operation of chlorinator.
2. If unit performs properly through complete range of feed
rates, return unit to automatic control. If any problems
develop, locate source and correct.
3. Clean chlorine residual analyzer, including the following
items:
a. Clean filters.
b. Clean sample line.
c. Clean hydraulic dilution wells and baffles.
d. Flush discharge hoses and pipes.
e. Clean and flush cell block.
f. Fill buffer reservoirs.
g. Check buffer pump and feed rate.
h. Wipe machine clean and keep it clean.
Monthly
1. Exercise all chlorine valves.
2. Inspect heaters and room ventilation equipment.
3. Check chlorinator vent line to outside of structure for any
obstructions that could prevent free access to the atmos-
phere. Bugs and wasps like vent lines for nests.
-------
348 Treatment Plants
4. Inspect unit for vacuum leaks.
5. Clean rotameter sight glass.
6. Inspect all drain lines and hoses.
7. Perform scheduled routine maintenance.
a. Disassemble, clean and regasket chlorinator (once a
year).
b. Repack seat and stem of valves.
c. Inspect tubing and fittings for leaks. Wash and dry thor-
oughly before reassembling.
d. Inspect control system.
1) Electrical and electronics
2) Pneumatics
3) Lubrication
4) Calibration of total system
e. Chlorine analyzer.
1) Lubrication of chart drives, filter drives and pumps.
2) Clean and flush all piping and hoses, filters, tubing,
cell blocks and hydraulic chambers.
3) Replace electrodes in cell block.
4) Replace buffer pumps and system solenoids. Clean
acid and iodide reservoirs.
5) Calibrate unit with known standards.
6) Repaint unit.
f. Inspect safety equipment, including self-contained
breathing equipment and repair kits.
Possible Abnormal Conditions
1. Chlorine leak in chlorinator.
Shut off gas flow to chlorinator. Leave injector on line. Allow
chlorinator to operate and empty chlorine gas for three to
five minutes with zero psi showing on the chlorine pressure
gage. Repair leak or switch to another chlorinator and re-
pair leak.
2. Gas pressure too low, less than 20 psi (1.4 kg/sq cm).
Alarm indicated. Check chlorine supply:
a. Empty containers, switch to standby units.
b. Evaporator shut down. See section 10.261,
"Evaporators."
c. Inspect manifold for closed valves or restricted filters.
Correct by switching to another manifold or setting
valves and controls to proper position.
3. Injector vacuum too low.
a. Adjust injector to achieve required vacuum.
b. Inspect injector water supply system.
1) Pump off: start pump.
2) Strainers dirty: clean strainers.
3) Pump worn out and will not deliver appropriate flow
and pressure to injector: use other unit and/or repair
or replace pump.
c. Inspect solution line discharge downstream from injec-
tor. Check for the following items:
1) Valve closed or partially closed.
2) Line broken or restriction reducing flow or increas-
ing back pressure.
3) Diffuser plugged, thus restricting flow and creating a
higher back pressure on discharge line and injector.
Clean diffuser and flush pipe.
4. Low Chlorine Residual. Alarm indicator is on from chlorine
residual analyzer.
Determine actual chlorine residual and compare with re-
sidual reading from chlorine analyzer. If residual analyzer is
off, recalibrate analyzer and readjust. If chlorine residual
analyzer is correct and chlorine residual is low, check the
following items:
a. Sample pump
1) Operation, flow and pressure.
2) Sample lines clean and free of solids or algae that
could create a chlorine demand.
3) Strainer dirty and restricting flow, thus preventing
adequate pressure (15 to 20 psi or 1.0 to 1.4 kg/sq
cm) at analyzer.
b. Control system if chlorinator is on automatic control. If
chlorine feed rate remains too low, take chlorinator off
of automatic control and switch to manual control. Set
chlorinator to proper feed rate as determined by previ-
ous adequate feed rates (see Section 10.28, "Opera-
tional Strategy").
c. Chlorine demand higher than the amount one
chlorinator can supply. Place additional chlorinator on
line.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 390.
10.2L Normal operation of a chlorinator includes daily in-
spection of what facilities or areas?
10.2M What is the purpose of evaporators?
10.2N What abnormal conditions could be encountered
when operating an evaporator?
10.2O How can you determine if chlorine residual analyzer is
working properly?
10.2P What are possible chlorinator abnormal conditions?
-------
Disinfection 349
10.27 Shutdown of a Chlorinator
10.270 Short-Term Shutdown
The following is a typical procedure for shutting down a
chlorinator for a time period of less than one week.
1. Close chlorine-container gas outlet valve.
2. Allow chlorine gas to completely evacuate the system
through the injector. Chlorine gas pressure gages will fall to
zero psi on the manifold and the chlorinator.
3. Close chlorinator gas discharge valve. The chlorinator may
remain in this condition indefinitely and is ready to be
placed back in service by reopening the chlorinator dis-
charge valve and chlorine-container gas outlet valve. After
these valves have been reopened, inspect for chlorine
leaks throughout the chlorination system.
10.271 Long-Term Shutdown
1. Perform steps one, two and three above for short-term
shutdown.
2. Turn off chlorinator power switch, lock out and tag.
3. Secure chlorinator gas manifold and chlorinator valve in
closed position.
10.28 Operational Strategy
The operator should strive to keep the chlorination system
well maintained and operational. There will be occasions when
pieces of equipment will be out of service for maintenance and
repair. These activities should be scheduled during the times
of the year when demands on the chlorination system are low.
Plants may be required to provide chlorination services for:
1. Disinfection: postchlorination of effluent.
2. Process Control: activated sludge and trickling filter treat-
ment processes.
3. Odor Control: usually seasonal during the warmer
months from May through October.
4. Dechlorination: usually seasonal during July through
November (see Section 10.8, "Dechlori-
nation." Chlorination and dechlorination
facilities are similar).
Under these circumstances, maintenance of chlorination
facilities requiring tearing down, cleaning, repairing and reas-
sembling should be done during the winter months of
November through April. If a chlorination unit fails, there will be
standby capabilities for at least post-chlorination to disinfect
the plant effluent. Even if all systems fail, the operator is still
expected to meet discharge disinfection requirements. A sup-
ply of HTH or other dry hypochlorite compound should be
available for emergencies of this nature because dry hypochlo-
rite compounds can be fed manually while repairs are being
made. A table of dosages or calculation procedures and a
calibrated measuring container should be available so the
proper dosage of chemical can be applied.
Usually wastewater treatment plants are designed and
equipped with standby or backup capabilities so at least the
effluent can be disinfected. In this case, two areas could cause
trouble:
1. Run out of chlorine.
This problem is strictly the operator's problem. You are
the only person who maintains the chlorine supply inven-
tory. Vou must request more chlorine with sufficient lead
time for the vendor to acquire and deliver the chlorine.
Therefore, your plant should never run out of chlorine or
any other chemical.
Care must also be exercised that the connected contain-
ers do not empty and that sufficient containers are con-
nected so that the maximum dosage rates can be achieved
without exceeding maximum withdrawal rates from the
connected containers. Weighing scales or automatic
switchover equipment should always be provided. The lat-
ter is highly desirable particularly when the plant is unat-
tended part of the day. Even in this case, it is important to
note when the switchover has occurred so that the empty
containers can be replaced with full ones before the second
set empties.
2. Failure of automatic control equipment.
Assume you are operating a chlorination system on
"auto" control to meet NPDES-permit coliform require-
ments. A 4.5 mgIL chlorine residual must be maintained at
the outlet of the chlorine contact basin to meet this require-
ment at your plant. If the plant operators have recorded the
past chlorinator feed rates every two hours during daily
routine checks, a history of feed rates at various times dur-
ing the day will have been established for "auto" control.
With this information available, manual operation only re-
quires setting the feed rate to correspond to the same hour
and flow conditions. Daily flows at most treatment plants
are consistent (except during storm flows) where feed rates
are known for every day of the year. By reviewing dates for
the same day for three previous weeks, the information
below can be obtained and calculations can be made for
intermediate hours (1000 and 1200 hours). To calculate
these suggested manual feed rates, determine the average
feed rate between the 0900 and 1100 average feed rates
and also between the 1100 and 1300 average feed rates.
See Chapter 17, "Basic Arithmetic and Treatment Plant
Problems" for procedures on how to calculate the average
(Section 17.4).
Two
Thraa
Suggoatad
Last
WMki
WMki
Manual
Tim*
WNk
Ago
Ago
Avaraga
Faod Rataa
0900
1055 lb/day
1065 lb/day
1060 lb/day
1060 lb/day
1060 lb/day
1000
—
—
—
1500 tb/day
1100
1900 lb/day
1900 lb/day
1800 tb/day
1900 lb/day
1900 lb/day
1200
—
—
—
—
1900 lb/day
1300
1800 lb/day
1850 lb/day
1850 lb/day
1850 tb/day
1850 ib/day
By recording readings of chlorine feed rates, it is very simple
to manually program equipment and maintain high plant per-
formance during instrumentation or equipment failures. In this
example, note that the suggested feed rate is adjusted manu-
ally every hour in an attempt to provide adequate disinfection
at all times.
-------
350 Treatment Plants
10.29 Chlorine Troubleshooting Guide
CHLORINE CONTACT CHAMBER
Operating Symptoms
Increase in coliform level
Probable Cause
Low residual
Organic strength increase in effluent
Mixing problems
Drop in chlorine residual
Short-circuiting
Solids accumulation in chamber
Large variation in flow (surges)
Diffuser plugged
Organic strength increase
Solids accumulation in chamber
Flow change
Equipment failure
Increase in chlorine residual Organic strength decrease
Flow change
BREAKOUT OF CHLORINE31 Overfeeding chlorine
Insufficient flow in injector water supply
Mixing
Diffuser
Remedy
Increase chlorine dose.
Improve biological treatment process in-
cluding secondary clarification and/or in-
crease chlorine dose.
Baffle the chamber.
Install mixer.
Install baffles.
Take chamber out of service and clean.
Change to steady flow.
Clean diffuser.
Increase dosage. Inspect rest of plant for
possible problems. Check dischargers into
the system, especially industrial dis-
charges.
Take chamber out of service and clean.
Adjust dosage for flow.
Repair.
Lower dosage.
Correct dosage.
Decrease chlorine feed rate.
Increase flow in injector water supply
Turn off mixer because mixing can encour-
age release of chlorine gas under breakout
conditions. If chlorine gas continues to be
released, corrosion damage can occur to
mixer and structure.
Lower diffuser.
or
Install a larger diffuser to cover a bigger
area.
3' Breakout of Chlorine. A point at which chlorine leaves solution as a gas because chlorine feed rate is too high. The solution is saturated and
cannot dissolve any more chlorine.
-------
Disinfection 351
CHLORINATOR AND EVAPORATOR
Operating Symptoms
Loss of chlorine pressure at the
chlorinator
Liquid through manometer
Loss of vacuum
High vacuum
Misting
Low temperature alarm on evaporator
Chlorinator will not come up to full feed.
Gas pressure adequate
Chlorinator feeds OK at high rates but
will not control feed at low rates.
Chlorinator controls OK at low feeds but
are erratic when full feed is attempted.
Injector vacuum is OK
Chlorinator does not feed. Gas pressure
is adequate. Injector vacuum OK
A variable vacuum-control chlorinator
formerly working normally, now won't go
below about 30% feed. Signal levels OK
A variable vacuum-control chlorinator
reaches full feed, but won't go below
about 45 to 50% feed. CPRV is OK
Probable Cause
Plugged chlorine gas filter on gas phase
Out of chlorine
Supply valve closed or partly closed
Defective evaporator
Dosage too high
Plugged diffuser
Injector problems
Loss of water pressure
Vacuum leak in chlorinator
Loss of chlorine supply
Defective evaporator
Evaporator undersized
Water bath
Power loss
Heater element burned out
Injector vacuum does not develop
Chlorinator pressure reducing valve
(CPRV) not working properly
Possibly a bad diaphragm in vacuum
Reducing valve is causing bypassing of
V-notch control valve
Not enough chlorine for demand
Dirty CPRV or partially clogged gas line
Tube connection from upstream of V
notch to top of differential valve is dis-
connected or leaking
CPRV not throttling sufficiently for low
feeds
Signal vacuum is too high because of air
leak through diaphragm or control vac-
uum check valve is bypassing restrictor
Remedy
Clean filter.
Switch to another container.
Open valve.
Repair evaporator.
Lower dosage. Use another chlorinator.
Repair diffuser.
Repair injector.
Check water supply.
Locate and stop leak. Usually leak is
caused by unseated rotameter tube,
leaky gasket or ruptured diaphragm.
Check supply system.
Repair evaporator.
Operate two evaporators or reduce
chlorine feed rate.
Clean water bath.
Check electrical system.
Repair by replacing heater element.
Repair injector. Clean piping.
Clean CPRV. Check for leaks in CPRV
diaphragm.
Replace diaphragm.
Replace valve.
Clean CPRV cartridge.
Clean high-pressure gas line.
Supply adequate chlorine gas pressure.
Reconnect tube line.
Replace tube if cracked, kinked or defec-
tive at ends.
Tighten tube nuts.
Clean CPRV cartridge.
Readjust CPRV bias.
Replace diaphragm, gasket or stem as
tests indicate source of leak.
Clean and dry or replace filter disc.
Clean converter nozzle.
-------
352 Treatment Plants
CHLORINE SUPPLY SYSTEM
Operating Symptoms
Discoloration at joint. Green scum on
cadmium plating gone and replaced by
reddish color
Small droplet of liquid on joint
Leaks at gas gages or pressure switches
Gooey, taffy-like mass
High-pressure alarm
Cold or freezing areas on the supply sys-
tem
Probable Cause
Leaks
Leaks
Leaks
Moisture in supply
Defective silver diaphragm on gage or
pressure switch
Restriction in line
Withdrawal rate too rapid
Remedy
Repair by replacing.
Repair as quickly as possible.
Repair gage or pressure switch.
Clean filters. Taffy caused in manufactur-
ing process.
Repair diaphragm or switch.
Repair.
Lower withdrawal rate.
Place more chlorine containers on line.
-------
Disinfection 353
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 390.
10.2R What are two areas that could hinder your ability to
meet NPDES-permit coliform requirements when your
plant is equipped with standby or backup capabilities?
10.2Q List the steps for a short-term shutdown of a
chlorinator.
Please answer the discussion and review questions before
continuing with Lesson 3.
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
Write the answers to these questions in your notebook be-
fore continuing. The problem numbering continues from Les-
son 1.
Chapter 10. DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
(Lesson 2 of 5 Lessons)
10. Determine the chlorine feed rate for a flow of 0.75 MGD
and a chlorine dosage of 18 mg/L?
7. Where might chlorine be applied in the treatment of
wastewater?
8. Where is chlorine usually applied for disinfection pur-
poses?
9. What is the ultimate control of chlorine dosage for disinfec-
tion?
11. Why must the chlorine solution be well mixed with the
wastewater?
12. What precautions would you take before starting any
chlorination system?
13. When should the maintenance and repair of chlorination
systems be scheduled?
-------
354 Treatment Plants
CHAPTER 10. DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
(Lesson 3 of 5 Lessons)
10.3 CHLORINE SAFETY PROGRAM
Every good safety program begins with cooperation be-
tween the employee and the employer. The employee must
take an active part in the overall program. The employee must
be responsible and should take all necessary steps to prevent
accidents. This begins with the attitude that as good an effort
as possible must be made by everyone. Safety is everyone's
problem. The employer also must take an active part by sup-
porting safety programs. There must be funding to purchase
equipment and to enforce safety regulations required by OSHA
and industrial safety programs. The following items should be
included in all safety programs.
1. Establishment of a safety program.
2. Written rules.
3. Periodic hands-on training using safety equipment:
a) Leaks-detection equipment
b) Gas masks
c) Atmospheric monitoring devices
4. Establishment of emergency procedures for chlorine leaks
and first aid.
5. Establishment of a maintenance and calibration program
for safety devices and equipment.
All persons handling chlorine should be thoroughly aware of
its hazardous properties. Personnel should know the location
and use of the various pieces of protective equipment and be
instructed in safety procedures. In addition, an emergency
procedure should be established and each individual should
be instructed how to follow the procedures. An emergency
checklist also should be developed and available. For addi-
tional information on this topic, see the Water Pollution Control
Federation's Manual of Practice No.1, SAFETY IN WASTEWA-
TER WORKS, and the Chlorine Institute's CHLORINE MAN-
UAL, 4th edition.32 Also see Chapter 14, "Plant Safety and
Good Housekeeping."
10.30 Chlorine Hazards
Chlorine is a gas, heavier than air, extremely toxic and cor-
rosive in moist atmospheres. Dry chlorine gas can be safely
handled in steel containers and piping, but with moisture must
be handled in corrosion-resisting materials such as silver,
glass, teflon, and certain other plastics. Chlorine gas at con-
tainer pressure should never be piped in silver, glass, teflon, or
any other plastic material. Even in dry atmospheres, the gas is
very irritating to the mucous membranes of the nose, to the
throat, and to the lungs; a very small percentage in the air
causes severe coughing. Heavy exposure can be fatal. (See
Table 10.1).
WARNING I
VW&Nfchrt&EINer A MAY £ONTAlK)
CWLORIN& SA4, OP&NTM& DOOf? 4UGUTL-V
ANP CV\&CK fCfc TMg Of- CWLOCINEr.
IM&ve-g 60 Ij^TO A ROOM COMTAIMIMGx
CWIOJ2iM£4A4> \A)rm.WA12MfDL
IN T-HE- AIK Wl-TWOUT A SELF-CONTAIMfrP All?
4UFWLV, PiaOTEOWe CI_OTH/N£> ANP A4-&L-P
-STaNPIN
-------
Disinfection 355
iting, and difficulty in breathing. Chlorine is particularly irritating
to persons suffering from asthma and certain types of chronic
bronchitis. Liquid chlorine causes severe irritation and blister-
ing on contact with the skin.
10.32 Protect Yourself From Chlorine
Every person working with chlorine should know the proper
ways to handle it, should be trained in the use of self-contained
breathing apparatus, and should know what to do in case of
emergencies.
Self-contained air supply and demand-breathing equipment
must fit properly and be used properly. Pressure demand and
rebreather kits may be safer. Pressure demand units use more
air from the air bottle which reduces the time a person may
work on a leak.
Before entering an area with a chlorine leak, wear protective
clothing. Gloves and a rubber suit will prevent chlorine from
contacting the sweat on your body and forming hydrochloric
acid. Rubber suits are very cumbersome, but should be worn
when the weather is hot and humid and the chlorine concentra-
tion is high. Otherwise, use your own judgment regarding
whether or not to wear protective clothing.
The best protection that one can have when dealing with
chlorine is to respect it. Each individual should practice rules of
safe handling and good PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.
Prevention is the best emergency tool you have.
Plan ahead.
1. Have your fire department tour the area so that they know
where the facilities are located. Give them a clearly
marked map indicating the location of the chlorine storage
area, chlorinators, and gas masks.
2. Have emergency drills using chlorine gas masks and
chlorine repair kits.
3. Have a supply of ammonia available to detect chlorine
leaks.
4. Write emergency procedures:
Prepare a CHLORINE EMERGENCY LIST of names or
companies and phone numbers of persons to call during
an emergency. This list should include:
a. Fire department,
b. Chlorine emergency personnel, and
c. Chlorine supplier.
5. Follow established procedures during all emergencies.
a, Never work alone during chlorine emergencies.
b. Obtain help immediately and quickly repair the prob-
lem. PROBLEMS DO NOT GET BETTER.
c. Only authorized and properly trained persons with
adequate equipment should be allowed in the danger
area to correct the problem.
d. If you are caught in a chlorine atmosphere without a
gas mask, shallow breathing is safer than breathing
deeply. Recovery depends upon the duration and
amount of chlorine inhaled, so it is important to keep
that amount as small as possible.
e. If you discover a chlorine leak, leave the area im-
mediately unless it is a very minor leak. Small leaks
can be found by using a rag soaked with ammonia. A
white gas will form near the leak so it can be located
and corrected.
f. Notify your police department that you need help if it
becomes necessary to stop traffic on roads and to
evacuate persons in the vicinity of the chlorine leak.
6. Develop emergency evacuation procedures for use during
a serious chlorine leak. Coordinate these procedures with
your police department and other officials.
7. Post emergency procedures in all operating areas.
8. Inspect equipment and routinely make any necessary re-
pairs.
9. At least twice weekly, inspect area where chlorine is
stored and where chlorinators are located. Remove all
obstructions from the area.
10. Schedule routine maintenance on ALL chlorine equipment
at least once every six months or more frequently.
11. Have health appraisal for employees on chlorine
emergency duty. All those who have heart and respiratory
problems should not be allowed on emergency teams.
Remember:
Small amounts of chlorine cause large problems. Leaks
never get better.
10.33 First Aid Measures
Mild Cases
Whenever you have a mild case of chlorine exposure which
does happen from time to time around chlorination equipment,
you should first leave the contaminated area. Move slowly,
breathe lightly without exertion, remain calm, keep warm and
resist coughing. Notify other operators and have them repair
the leak immediately.
If clothing has been contaminated, remove as soon as pos-
sible. Otherwise the clothing will continue to give off chlorine
gas which will irritate the body even after leaving the contami-
nated area. Immediately wash off area affected by chlorine.
Shower and put on clean clothes.
If victim has slight throat irritation, immediate relief can be
accomplished by drinking milk. Drinking spirits of peppermint
also will help reduce throat irritation.
— WAKNINO |
'&A4 AAA4K&AJZ& USUALLY
lMA>PeOUAtt ANP IN ^ITXIAT/OM^
\NUfcPB- CRL-OCINe- L.&AK4 0££UtZANPA£&
r-W&EeFORg NOT K&OOMMmVEPfbK U4-E
UMPg^R ANV
CC>N1XIN£P At £ OR OXV^ifc-M «UPfW-fN»P£
0C?£AT>AIN<3- APPA2ATU5 A&r EKoMMfrlOfcO.
-------
356 Treatment Plants
Extreme Cases
1. Follow established emergency procedures.
2. Always use proper safety equipment. Do not enter area
without gas masks with a self-contained breathing ap-
paratus.
3. Remove patient from affected area immediately.
4. First aid:
a. Remove contaminated clothes to prevent clothing giv-
ing off chlorine gas which will irritate the body.
b. Keep patient warm and cover with blankets if neces-
sary.
c. Place patient in a comfortable position on back.
d. EYES\
If even a small amount of chlorine gets into the eyes,
they should be flushed with water. The flushing should
continue so that all traces of chlorine are flushed from
the eyes.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 390.
10.3A What are the hazards of chlorine gas?
10.3B What type of breathing apparatus is recommended
when repairing a chlorine leak?
10.3C What first aid measures should be taken if a person
comes in contact with chlorine?
10.4 CHLORINE HANDLING
10.40 Chlorine Containers
10.400 Cylinders
Cylinders containing 100- to 150-pounds (45- to 68-kg) of
chlorine are convenient for very small treatment plants with
capacities less than 0.5 MGD (1890 cu m/day). These cylin-
ders are usually of seamless steel construction (Fig. 10.7).
A Jusible plug is placed in the valve below the valve seat
ig. 10.8). This plug is a safety device. The fusible metal
softens or melts at 158° to 165°F (70° to 74°C) to prevent
buildup of excessive pressures and the possibility of rupture
due to a fire or high surrounding temperatures.
Cylinders will not explode and can be handled safely.
The following are procedures for handling chlorine cylinders.
1. Move cylinders with a properly balanced hand truck with
clamp supports that fasten at least two-thirds of the way up
the cylinder.
2. 100- and 150-pound (45- to 68-kg) cylinders can be rolled in
a vertical position. Lifting of these cylinders should be
avoided except with approved equipment. Never lift with
chains, rope slings, or magnetic hoists.
3. Protective cap should always be replaced when moving a
cylinder.
4. Cylinders should be kept away from direct heat (steam
pipes or radiators).
5. Cylinders should be stored in an upright position.
6. Cylinders must be firmly secured to an immovable object.
10.401 Ton Tanks
Ton tanks are of welded construction and have a loaded
weight of as much as 3700 pounds (1680 kg). They are about
80 inches (200 cm) in length and 30 inches (75 cm) in outside
diameter. The ends of the tanks are crimped inward to pro-
vided a substantial grip for lifting clamps (Fig. 10.9).
The following are some characteristics of and procedures for
handling ton tanks.
Most ton tanks have eight openings for fusible plugs and
valves (Figs. 10.9 and 10.10). Generally, two operating valves
are located on one end near the center. There are six or eight
fusible metal safety plugs, three or four on each end. These
are designed to melt within the same temperature range as the
safety plug in the cylinder valve.
j^WARNINQ^J
IT V&KV IMPORTANT T-MAT F-U^l&Lt
PIU64 4-HOULP NOT B£r fAMP£-pErP WVT-H
UNPP12 ANY ClCCUM^TANcre^ ANP TUATTW&
1AMK ^AOULD MOT BE: HEATED. ONCefUl^
R-UCa OPBNfr, ALL Cif- fA£ OALOPlNC IN THE
TANK VJ\LL B£ ttlJEASb&Z?.
Ton tanks are shipped by rail in multi-unit tank cars. They
also may be transported by truck or semi-trailer.
Ton tanks should be handled with a suitable lift clamp in
conjunction with a hoist or crane of at least two-ton capacity
(Fig. 10.9).
Ton tanks should be stored and used on their sides, above
the floor or ground, on steel or concrete supports. They should
not be stacked more than one high.
Ton tanks should be placed on trunnions (pivoting mounts)
which are equipped with rollers so that the withdrawal valves
may be positioned one above the other. The upper valve will
discharge chlorine gas, and the lower valve will discharge liq-
uid chlorine (see Fig. 10.9). Trunnion rollers should not exceed
3-1/2 inches (9 cm) in diameter so that the containers will not
rotate too easily and be turned out of position. Roller shafts
should be equipped with a zerk-type lubrication fitting. Roller
bearings are not advised because of the ease with which they
rotate. Locking devices should be used when these rules are
observed to prevent ton tanks from rolling while connected.
10.402 Chlorine Tank Cars
Chlorine tank cars are of 16-, 30-, 55-, 85-, or 90-ton capac-
ity. All have four-inch (10 cm) cork board insulation protected
by a steel jacket. The dome of the standard car contains four
angle valves plus a safety valve. The two angle valves located
on the axis line of the tank are equipped for discharging liquid
chlorine. The two angle valves at right angles to the axis of the
tank deliver gaseous chlorine (Fig. 10.11).
Unloading of tank cars should be performed by trained per-
sonnel in accordance with Interstate Commerce Commission
(ICC) regulations.
In most situations, chlorine is withdrawn from tank cars as a
liquid and then passed through chlorine evaporators. Some-
times DRY air is passed into the tank car through one of the
gas valves to assist in liquid withdrawal. This practice is re-
ferred to as AIR PADDING.3*
14 Air Padding. Pumping dry air Into a container to assist with the withdrawal of a liquid or to force a liquid gas such as chlorine or sulfur
dioxide out of a container.
-------
Disinfection 357
Chlorine Cylinder
Protection
Hood
Valve
Neck Ring
Cylinder
Body
—¦ Foot Ring
Net
Cylinder
Contents
Approx.
Tare,
Lbs.*
Dimensions,
Inches
A
B
100 Lbs.
73
8 V«
54'A
1 50 Lbs.
92
10V«
54 Vi
•Stamped tare weight on cylinder shoulder
does not include valve protection hood.
Fig. 10.7 Chlorine cylinder
(Courtesy of PPG Industries, Inc., Chemical Division)
-------
358 Treatment Plants
GASKET
Poured Type Fusible Plug
Screwed Type Fusible Plug
STANDARD CYLINDER VALVE
r$TEM
' \. J
PACKING GLAND
PACKING NUT
PACKING
PACKING COLLAR
OUTLET CAP
(Special straight threads)
Fig. 10.8 Standard cylinder valve
(Reproduced with permission of the Dow Chemical Company (1959, 1966))
-------
Disinfection 359
Protection-
Hood
Chlorine'
Liquid
Net Weight of Chlorine. . ,2000 lbs. 2-Ton Minimum 1%«"
Tare Wt. of Tank (average) 1550 Jbs. Capacity Hoist 7
-------
360 Treatment Plants
Ton Tank Valve
100 and 150 lb. Cylinder Valve
-Stem-
Packing Gland Nut
Packing Gland
Ring Packing
Packing Retainer
Cap
Disc
Fusible Plug
Special 3/4" Straight Thread
Body
Standard 3/4" Pipe Thread
kw—
Fig. 10.10
Comparison of ton tank valve with cylinder valve
(Courtesy of PPG Industries, Inc., Chemical Division)
-------
-EXPANSION CHAMMI (HEATH*
1/ CMO VALVf)
SAaOMCTttC LEG*
VALVE
VALVES
CHLORINE
GAGE—s.
hi car
DOME . FLANGE
COVER-«\uNfONS
LIQUID
VALVE
LIQUID
CHLORINE
FLEXIBLE
CONNECTOftS
LIQUID CHLORINE
TO PROCESS
(PREFERRED METHOD)
CHLORINE GAS TO PROCESS
I
THERMOMETER
STEAM
^CHLORINE GAGE
^/-CONDENSATE
VVVVVSAVVOOvVs
5V
(NO VALVE)
SEAL POT (NO TRAP)
VVWWVVVVWV
i«-AIR LINE
TO GAS
VALVE
A
SHUT OFF VALVES
CHECK f tEUEf VALVE -165 LBS
jry-SHUT OFF VALVE
|t-OIL-WATER SEPARATOR
GAGE /®iSS^-A,R COMPRESSOR ONOFF CONTROL
v 0 125-150 LBS PRESSURE
\WV\WV wwvvwvwwvwW
REGENERATIVE TTPE AIR
DRYERS - 40° DEW POINT
Fig. 10.11 Typical chlorine tank car unloading arrangement
(Reproduced with permission of The Dow Chemical Company (1959, 1966)}
-------
362 Treatment Plants
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 390.
10.4A How may chlorine be delivered to a plant?
10.4B What is the purpose of the fusible plug?
10.41 Removing Chlorine From Containers
10.410 Connections
Outlet threads on container valves are not tapered pipe
threads. Use fittings and gaskets for connections furnished by
your chlorine supplier or chlorinator equipment manufacturer.
Do not try to use regular pipe thread fittings. Whenever a new
connection is made, a new gasket should be used.
Flexible 3/8-inch 2000-pound (psi) (0.95 cm, 140 kg/sq cm)
annealed (hardened) copper tubing is recommended for con-
nections between chlorine containers and stationary piping.
Care should be taken to prevent sharp bends in the tubing
because this will weaken it and eventually the tubing will start
leaking. Many operators recommend use of a sling to hold the
tubing when disconnecting it from an empty cylinder to prevent
the tubing from flopping around and getting kinked or getting
dirt inside it.
A shutoff valve is needed after the container valve or at
beginning of stationary piping to simplify changing of contain-
ers.
10.411 Valves
Do not use wrenches longer than six inches (15 cm), pipe
wrenches, or wrenches with an extension on container valves.
To unseat, strike end of wrench with heel of hand to rotate the
valve stem in a counterclockwise direction. Then open slowly.
One complete turn permits maximum discharge. Do not
force valve beyond this point.
If valve is too tight to open, loosen the packing gland nut
(Fig. 10.10) slightly to free the stem.
10.412 Ton Tanks
One-ton tanks (Fig. 10.9) must be PLACED ON THEIR
SIDES WITH THE VALVES IN A VERTICAL POSITION. Con-
nect the flexible tubing to the TOP VALVE to remove chlorine
gas from a tank. The BOTTOM VALVE is used to remove liquid
chlorine and is used only with a chlorine evaporator. The
valves are similar to those on the smaller chlorine cylinders
(fusible plugs are not located at valves on ton containers) and
must be handled with the same care.
10.413 Railroad Tank Cars
Unloading of tank cars must be performed by trained per-
sonnel in accordance with Interstate Commerce Commission
(ICC) regulations. Figure 10.12 shows the layout of a facility for
unloading a railroad tank car. This section lists the procedures
to follow to safely receive, connect and disconnect railroad
tank cars. Your facility may be slightly different. This procedure
can be made more specific for your facility by numbering each
valve in the procedures.
Receiving Tank Cars
1. Inspect and refuse delivery if car is damaged or has corro-
sion that would make it unsafe. Once the tank car has been
uncoupled, the railroad is relieved of all responsibility.
Check that the invoice numbers match with the numbers on
the car.
2. Spot the tank car so the draw bridge matches up or lines up
with the car carwalk.
3. Verify that the railroad has set the brakes.
4. Set two wheel chocks, one before and one after, on the rail
nearest the chlorine tower.
5. Place warning light and sign one car length from tank car.
6. Close and lock derailing mechanism.
7. Record on log sheet the date and time the tank car arrived
and was accepted or rejected on treatment plant property.
8. Sign name on log sheet.
Connecting Tank Cars
1. Material needed before leaving office.
a. Keys to tool locker on chlorine tower.
b. Electrical safety tag.
c. A buddy; no one is to work alone on the chlorine tow-
er.
2. Verify that valves are closed.
3. Tag pad air compressor so it will not be turned off during
purging operations.
4. Check eyewash and shower for operation.
5. Put on escape respirator.
6. Lower and lock down draw bridge.
7. Check that initial valves are closed.
8. Open pad air valve if pad is higher than chlorine.
9. Open tank car lid and verify that all car valves are closed.
10. Remove plug from tank car valve farthest from the chlorine
tower and install gage assembly.
11. Record pressure.
12. Install flex air hose.
13. Open valves to initiate purging of chlorine flex line. Valves
should be opened only slightly until the chlorine flex line is
completely connected.
14. Remove plug from tank car valve and connect chlorine flex
line. USE A NEW LEAD WASHER IN THE AMMONIA
COUPUNG.
15. After no leaks can be heard from connections, close
valves.
16. Remove flex air hose.
17. Open valve on tank car. TEST WITH AMMONIA GAS.
-------
MAIN RAILROAD LINE
CAUTION
SIGNS v-
TANK CAR DOME
r=L
DERAIL'
SWITCH
LOCK &
SIGNAL
BARRIER
STOP
50 FT
BLUE
LIGHT
CAUTION
SIGNS
UNLOADING
PLATFORM
Fig-
10.12 Layout for unloading railroad tank car
-------
364 Treatment Plants
18. Open valves. TEST WITH AMMONIA GAS.
19. Record downstream pressure.
20. Open valves. This will connect chlorine tower to chlorine
building.
21. Store all gear and lock tool cabinet.
22. Remove compressor tag.
23. Change sign on valves.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Disconnecting Tank Cars
1. Materials needed before leaving office.
a. Keys to tool locker on chlorine tower.
b. Electrical safety tag.
c. A buddy; no one is to work alone on the chlorine tow-
er.
2. Verify valves are closed.
3. Tag pad air compressor so it will not be turned off during
purging operations.
4. Check eyewash and shower for operation.
5. Put on escape respirator.
6. Close valve that disconnects the chlorine tower from the
chlorine building.
7. Verify that pad air pressure is higher than liquid chlorine
line.
8. Open pad air supply valve to chlorine tower.
9. Install flex air hose.
10. Open valves that will allow the air to force the chlorine
back into the tank car.
11. Wait five minutes.
12. Close valve on chlorine tank car.
13. Close valves and then crack open slightly. Loosen am-
monia coupling and test with ammonia gas until no
chlorine gas is escaping.
14. Remove chlorine flex line.
15. Reassemble and cap chlorine flex line and verify that no
air is escaping.
16. Close tank car valve farthest from the chlorine tower.
17. Remove gage assembly slowly and test with ammonia
gas. Put cap on gage assembly.
18. Put plugs back in chlorine tank car valves and secure lid.
DON'T LEAVE VALVE HANDLE IN CHLORINE TANK CAR
19. Close valves.
20. Remove flex air hose.
21. Store all gear and lock tool cabinet.
22. Raise and lock draw bridge.
23. Change Department of Transportation placards to read
"danger chlorine empty."
24. Place warning light and sign at the end of the spur.
25. Place wheel chocks at the end of the spur.
26. Unlock and open derailing mechanism.
27. Remove compressor tag.
Verify that valves are properly tagged.
Call railroad and notify them to pick up empty tank car.
Record name of railroad official contacted.
Record date and time of disconnect on log sheet.
32. Sign Bill of Lading.
33. Sign name on log sheet to indicate that job is completed.
10.42 Chlorine Leaks
Chlorine leaks must be taken care of immediately or they will
become worse.
Corrective measures should be undertaken only by trained
operators wearing proper safety equipment. All operators
should be trained to safely repair chlorine leaks.
All other persons should leave the danger area until condi-
tions are safe again.
If the leak is large, all persons in the adjacent areas should
be warned and evacuated. Obtain police help. You must al-
ways consider your neighbors ... PEOPLE, animals, and
plants.
1. BEFORE ANY NEW SYSTEM IS PUT INTO SERVICE, it
should be cleaned, dried, and tested for leaks. Pipelines
may be cleaned and dried by flushing and steaming from
the high end to allow condensate and foreign materials to
drain out. After the empty line is heated thoroughly, dry air
may be blown through the line until it is dry. After drying,
the system may be tested for tightness with 150 psi (10.5
kg/sq cm) dry air. Leaks may be detected by application of
soapy water to the outside of joints. Small quantities of
chlorine gas may now be introduced into the line, the test
pressure built up with air, and the system tested for leaks.
Whenever a new system is tested for leaks, at least one
chlorinator should be on the line to withdraw chlorine from
the system in case of a leak. The same is true in case of
an emergency leak at any installation. If a chlorinator is not
running, at least one or more should be started. Prefera-
bly, all available chlorinators should be put on the tine.
2. TO FIND A CHLORINE LEAK, tie a rag on a stick, DIP THE
RAG35 in a strong ammonia solution, and hold the rag
near the suspected points. White fumes will indicate the
exact location of the leak. Location of leaks by this method
may not be possible for large leaks which diffuse the gas
over large areas. Do not use an ammonia spray bottle
because the entire room could turn white if it is full of
chlorine gas.
3. IF THE LEAK IS IN THE EQUIPMENT in which chlorine is
being used, close the valves on the chlorine container at
once. Repairs should not be attempted while the equip-
ment is in service. All chlorine piping and equipment that is
Record date and time job was completed on log sheet. 28.
Sign name on log sheet. 29.
Record date and time tank car was placed in service. 30.
Record date and time tank car was taken out of service. 31.
38 A one-Inch (2.5 cm) paint brush may be used Instead of a rag.
-------
Disinfection 365
to be repaired by welding should be flushed with water or
steam. Before returning equipment to use, it MUST be
cleaned, dried, and tested as previously described.
4. IF THE LEAK IS IN A CHLORINE CYLINDER OR CON-
TAINER, use the emergency repair kit supplied by most
chlorine suppliers. These kits can be used to stop most
leaks in a chlorine cylinder or container and can usually be
delivered to a plant within a few hours if one is not already
at the site of the leak. IT IS ADVISABLE TO HAVE
EMERGENCY REPAIR KITS AVAILABLE AT YOUR
PLANT AT ALL TIMES AND TO TRAIN PERSONNEL IN
THEIR USE. Location of such kits should be posted out-
side chlorine storage areas.
5. If chlorine is escaping as a liquid from a cylinder or a ton
tank, turn the container so that the leaking side is on top.
In this position, the chlorine will escape only as a gas, and
the amount which escapes will be only 1/15 as much as if
the liquid chlorine were leaking. Keeping the chlorinators
running also will reduce the amount of chlorine gas leaking
out of a container. Increase the feed rate to cool the supply
tanks as much as possible.
6. FOR SITUATIONS IN WHICH A PROLONGED OR UN-
STOPPABLE LEAK is encountered, emergency disposal
of chlorine should be provided. Chlorine may be absorbed
in solutions of caustic soda, soda ash, or agitated hyd-
rated lime slurries (Table 10.2). Chlorine should be
passed into the solution through an iron pipe or a properly
weighted rubber hose to keep it immersed in the absorp-
tion solution. The container should not be immersed be-
cause the leaks will be aggravated due to the corrosive
effect, and the container may float when partially empty. In
some cases it may be advisable to move the container to
an isolated area. Discuss the details of such precautions
with your chlorine supplier.
7. NEVER PUT WATER ON A CHLORINE LEAK. A mixture
of water and chlorine will increase the rate of corrosion of
the container and make the leak larger. Besides, water
may warm the chlorine, thus increasing the pressure and
forcing the chlorine to escape faster.
8. LEAKS AROUND VALVE STEMS can often be stopped by
closing the valve or tightening the packing gland nut.
Tighten the nut or stem by turning it clockwise.
9. LEAKS AT THE VALVE DISCHARGE OUTLET can often
be stopped by replacing the gasket or adapter connection.
10. LEAKS AT FUSIBLE PLUGS AND CYLINDER VALVES
usually require special handling and emergency equip-
ment. Call your chlorine supplier immediately and obtain
an emergency repair kit for this purpose if you do not have
a kit readily available.
11. PIN HOLE LEAKS in the walls of cylinder and ton tanks
can be stopped by using a clamping pressure saddle with
a turn-buckle available in repair kits. This is only a tempo-
rary measure, and the container must be emptied as soon
as possible.
If a repair kit is not available, use your ingenuity. One
operator stopped a pin hole leak temporarily until a repair
kit arrived by placing several folded layers of neoprene
packing over a leak, a piece of scrap steel plate over the
packing, wrapping a chain around the cylinder and steel
plate, and applying leverage pressure with a crowbar.
12. A LEAKING CONTAINER must not be shipped. If the con-
tainer leaks or if the valves do not work properly, keep the
container until you receive instructions from your chlorine
supplier for returning it. If a chlorine leak develops in
transit, keep the vehicle moving until it reaches an open
area.
13. Do not accept delivery of containers showing evidence of
leaking, stripped threads, or abuse of any kind.
14. If a chlorine container develops a leak, be sure your
supplier does not charge you for the unused chlorine.
15. Chlorine leaks may be detected by sniffleators and other
detection devices. Alarm systems may be connected to
these devices. Be sure to follow manufacturer's recom-
mendations regarding frequency of checking and testing
detection devices and alarm systems.
TABLE 10.2 CHLORINE ABSORPTION SOLUTIONS*
Absorption Solution
Alkali
(lb)
Water
(9«l)
Caustic Soda (100%)
a
125
40
b
188
60
c
2500
800
Soda Ash
a
300
100
b
450
150
c
6000
2000
Hydrated Lime"
a
125
125
b
188
188
c
2500
2500
Chlorine Container Size (lb net):
a = 100, b = 150, c = 2000
QUESTION
Write your answer in a notebook and then compare your
answer with the one on page 390.
10.4C How would you look for a chlorine leak?
Mf/iW ? OF **
Please answer the discussion and review questions before
continuing with Lesson 4.
* Source: The Chlorine Institute.
** Hydrated IIme solution must be continuously and vigorously agi-
tated while chlorine is to be absorbed.
-------
366 Treatment Plants
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
Chapter 10. DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
(Lesson 3 of 5 Lessons)
Write the answers to these questions in your notebook be-
fore continuing. The problem numbering continues from Les-
son 2.
14. What type of breathing apparatus should be worn when
entering an area in which chlorine gas is present?
15. Why should clothing be removed from a person who has
been in an area contaminated with liquid or gaseous
chlorine?
16. How could your police department assist you in the event
of a serious chlorine leak?
17. Why should chlorine containers and cylinders be stored
where they won't be heated?
18. Why are slings used to hold chlorine tubing when chang-
ing chlorine cylinders?
19. Why should water never be poured on a chlorine leak?
20. How would you attempt to repair a pin hole leak in a
chlorine cylinder?
CHAPTER 10. DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
(Lesson 4 of 5 Lessons)
10.5 CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT AND MAINTENANCE
(by J.L. Beals)
10.50 Chlorinators
Chlorine usually is delivered by vacuum-solution feed
chlorinators (Figs. 10.13 and 10.14). The chlorine gas is con-
trolled, metered, introduced into a stream of injector water, and
then conducted as a solution to the point of application.
The primary advantage of vacuum operation is safety. If a
failure or breakage occurs in the vacuum system, the
chlorinator either stops the flow of chlorine into the equipment
or allows air to enter the vacuum system rather than allowing
chlorine to escape into the surrounding atmosphere. In case
the chlorine inlet shutoff fails, a vent valve discharges the in-
coming gas to the outside of the chlorinator building.
The operating vacuum is provided by a hydraulic injector.
The injector operating water absorbs the chlorine gas, and the
resultant chlorine solution is conveyed to a chlorine diffuser
through corrosion-resistant conduit.
A vacuum chlorinator also includes a vacuum regulating
valve to dampen fluctuations and give smooth operation. A
vacuum relief prevents excessive vacuum within the equip-
ment.
A typical vacuum control chlorinator is shown in Figs. 10.13
and 10.14 and the purposes of the parts are listed in Table
10.3. Chlorine gas flows from a chlorine container to the gas
inlet (see Fig. 10.14). After entering the chlorinator the gas
passes through a spring-loaded pressure regulating valve
which maintains the proper operating pressure. A rotameter is
used to indicate the rate of gas flow. The rate is controlled by a
V-notch variable orifice. The gas then moves to the injector
where it is dissolved in water and leaves the chlorinator as a
chlorine solution (HOCI) ready for application.
10.51 Evaporators
Chlorine evaporators are installed in treatment plants where
large quantities of chlorine are used. An evaporator (Fig.
10.15) is a hot water heater surrounding a steel tank. Water is
usually heated by electricity. Heat in the water is transferred to
the liquid chlorine in an inner steel tank. Water bath heaters
are used to provide an even distribution of heat around the
center tank to eliminate the problem of hot spots on the inner
tank. Elimination of hot spots makes the evaporator easier to
control and reduces the danger of overheating the chlorine and
causing pressurization of chlorine by expansion.
Liquid chlorine containers are connected to the chlorine sys-
tem through the liquid valve. When the liquid chlorine flowing
from the container reaches the evaporator, the liquid chlorine
vaporizes. The temperature of the chlorine gas is around 110
to 120°F (43 to 49°C). Chlorine gas flows from the evaporator
to the gas manifold. Chlorine gas manifolds have gas filters to
remove small particles from the gas.
When the temperature of the water in the evaporator water
jacket reaches a preset level, valves operate (open and close)
to allow chlorine gas to flow to the chlorinators. If the water
temperature falls below the set point, a valve closes to prevent
the carry-over of liquid chlorine to the chlorinator.
The level of liquid chlorine in the evaporator tank is automat-
ically regulated by pressure from the chlorination system de-
mand for chlorine. When the chlorine demand is high, pressure
at the liquid chlorine supply containers exceeds the evaporator
gas pressure and liquid chlorine flows into the inner tank. As
the chlorine demand decreases, the evaporator's inner-tank
chlorine gas pressure increases from the vaporization of the
liquid chlorine. This increased pressure reduces the liquid
chlorine flow into the evaporator. Equilibrium usually is ob-
tained when the liquid flow rate and rate of vaporization are
equal.
-------
Disinfection 367
VENT—-
STANDBY
TO GAS INLET
PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVE
RFMOTE FROM
CONTROL MODULE
STANDARD
VACUUM
REGULATOR-
CHECK UNIT
GAS
Supply
Fig. 10,13 Chlorinator gas pressure controls
(Permission o! Wallace & Tiernan Division, Penwalt Corporation)
-------
DIFFERENTIAL REGULATING
VALVE
VACUUM RELIEF
VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
V-NOTCH
VACUUM GAUGE
VARIABLE
ORIFICE
v-MANUAL
' FEED-RATE
ADJUSTER
HEATER
ROTAMETER
SOLUTION DISCHARGE
f
LEGEND
I I GAS
[~~~1 WATER
mm SOLUTION
CONTROL MODULE
INJECTOR VACUUM GAUGE
GAS INLET
COMBINATION
INJECTOR 8
DIAPHRAGM
CHECK-VALVE
INJECTOR WATER
SUPPLY
Fig. 10.14 Vacuum-solution feed chlorinator
(Permission of Wallace & Tieman Division, Penwalt Corporation)
-------
Disinfection 369
TABLE 10.3 CHLORINATOR PARTS AND PURPOSE
(Figures 10.13 and 10.14)
Part Purpose
1. Pressure Gage (Not
shown on Fig. 10.13)
2. Gas Supply
3. Vacuum Regulator-check
Unit
4. Standby Pressure Relief
5. Vent
6, Gas Inlet
7. Heater
6. Vacuum Gage
9. Rotameter Tube and
Float
10. Differential Regulating
(Reducing) Valve
Indicates chlorine gas pres-
sure at chlorinator system
from chlorine manifold and
supply (20 psi minimum and
40 psi maximum or 2.4 kg/sq
cm minimum and 4.8 kg/sq
cm maximum).
Provides source of chlorine
gas from containers to
chlorinator system.
Maintains a constant vacuum
on chlorinator.
Relieves excess gas pressure
on chlorinator.
Discharges any excess
chlorine gas (pressure) to at-
mosphere outside of chlorina-
tion building.
Allows entrance of chlorine
gas to chlorinator. Gas flows
from chlorine container
through supply line and gas
manifold to inlet.
Prevents RELIQUEFAC-
TION36 of chlorine gas.
Indicates vacuum on chlo-
rinator system.
Indicate chlorinator feed rate
by reading top of float or cen-
ter of ball for rate marked on
tube.
Regulates (reduces) chlo-
rinator chlorine gas pressure.
Acts as a safety device in
case supply manifold chlorine
11. V-notch Plug and Vari-
able Orifice
12. Vacuum Relief Valve
13. Vacuum Relief
14. Injector Vacuum Gage
15. Diaphragm Check-valve
16. Manual Feed-rate Adjus-
ter
17. Injector Water Supply
18. Injector
19. Solution Discharge
vacuum regulator-check unit
fails to prevent excessive
chlorine pressures reaching
chlorinator.
Control chlorine feed rate by
regulating flow of chlorine
gas. A wide V-notch in the
plug allows high feed rates
through the orifice and a small
V-notch in the plug provides
low feed rates.
Relieves excess vacuum by
allowing air to enter system
and reduce vacuum.
Provides source of air to re-
duce excess vacuum.
Indicates vacuum on system.
Regulates chlorinator vacuum
which in turn adjusts chlo-
rinator feed rate. Receives
signal from chlorine feed rate
controls and then adjusts feed
rate by regulating vacuum.
Regulates chlorine feed rate
manually. Most chlorination
systems have automatic
feed-rate controls with a
manual override.
Provides source of water for
chlorine solution. Must pro-
vide sufficient pressure and
volume to operate injector.
Mixes or injects chlorine gas
into water supply.
Creates sufficient vacuum to
operate chlorinator and to pull
metered amount of chlorine
gas.
Discharges solution mixture
of chlorine and water.
38 Reliquefactlon (re-LICK-we-FACK-shun). The return of a gas to a liquid. For example, a condensation of chlorine gas returning to a liquid
form.
-------
370 Treatment Plants
PRESSURE SWITCH
ANO DIAPHRAGM S
RELIEF
VALVE"
RE MOM 81 i RISER
HOT WATER BATH TANK
VENT ANO OVERFLOW -
CONNECTION
ELECTRIC IMMERSION
HEATER
ALTERNATE I'LIOUIO
INLET (MUST BE
USEOFOR PARALLEL _
CONNECTION OF TWO
OR MORE EV*PQRATO«)
Fig. 10.15 Evaporator
(Permission of Wallace & Tiernan Division, Pen wall Corporation)
-------
Disinfection 371
When chlorine gas leaves the evaporator and passes
through the gas pressure-reducing valve, the chlorine gas en-
ters the inlet block on the chlorinator. The chlorinator meters
the chlorine gas at the desired dosage rate to the injector. A
heater at the chlorinator inlet block vaporizes any liquid drop-
lets that may have carried over from the evaporator. Try to
keep the chlorinator room 10°F (6°C) warmer than the storage
or evaporator room to prevent reliquefaction of chlorine gas
back to liquid chlorine.
10.52 Hypochlorinators (hi-poe-KLOR-i-NAY-tors)
"Hypochlorinators" are chlorine pumps or devices used to
feed chlorine solutions made from hypochlorites such as
bleach (sodium hypochlorite) or calcium hypochlorite. Hypo-
chlorite compounds are available as liquids or various forms of
solids (powder, pellets), and in a variety of containers or in
bulk. Hypochlorination systems consist of a water meter and a
diaphragm metering pump. The pump feeds a hypochlorite
solution in proportion to the wastewater flow.
10.53 Chlorine Dioxide Facility (Fig. 10.16)
Most existing chlorination units may be used to produce
chlorine dioxide. In addition to the existing chlorination system,
a diaphragm pump, solution tank, mixer, chlorine dioxide
generating tower and electrical controls are needed. The dia-
phragm pump and piping must be made of corrosion resistant
materials because of the corrosive nature of chlorine dioxide.
Usually PVC or polyethylene pipe is used.
Special consideration must be given when handling sodium
chlorite. Sodium chlorite is usually supplied as a salt and is
very combustible around organic compounds. Whenever spills
occur, sodium chlorite must be neutralized with anhydrous
sodium sulfite. Combustible materials (including gloves)
should not be worn when handling sodium chlorite. If sodium
chlorite comes in contact with clothing, the clothes should be
removed immediately and soaked in water to remove all traces
of sodium chlorite or they should be burned immediately. Due
to the hazards of safely handling sodium chlorite, chlorine
dioxide has not been widely used to treat wastewater.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 390.
10.5A How is chlorine delivered (fed) to the point of applica-
tion?
10.5B Why has chlorine dioxide not been widely used to treat
wastewater?
10.54 Installation and Maintenance
The following are some features of importance when work-
ing with chlorine facilities. Also examine these items when re-
viewing plans and specifications.
1. Chlorinators should be located as near point of application
as possible.
2. If possible, there should be a separate room for
chlorinators and chlorine container storage (above
ground) to prevent chlorine gas leaks from damaging
equipment and harming personnel. There should be no
access to this room from a room containing equipment or
where personnel work.
3. Ample working space around the equipment and storage
space for spare parts should be provided.
4. There should be an ample supply of water to operate
chlorinator at required capacity under maximum pressure
conditions at the chlorinator injector discharge.
5. The building should be adequately heated. The tempera-
ture of the chlorine cylinder and chlorinator should be
above 50°F (10°C). Line heaters may be used to keep
chlorine piping and chlorinator at higher temperatures to
prevent condensing of gas into liquid in the pipelines and
chlorinator. The maximum temperature at which a chlorine
cylinder is stored should not exceed 100°F (43°C).
6. It is not advisable to draw more than one pound of chlorine
per °F (0.8 kg/°C) AMBIENT TEMPERATURE37 from any
one 100- to 150-pound (45 and 68 kg) cylinder in a 24-
hour period because of the danger of freezing and slowing
up the chlorine flow. With ton containers, the limit of
chlorine gas is about 8 pounds of chlorine per day per °F
(6.4 kg/°C) ambient temperature. When evaporators are
provided, these limitations do not apply.
7. There should be adequate light.
8. There should be adequate ventilation. Continuous ventila-
tion is desirable. Forced ventilation must be provided to
remove gas if a large leak develops. The outlet of a forced
ventilation system must be near the floor because chlorine
is 2.5 times heavier than air. Use a pressurized fan (keep
room under slight positive pressure). Do not suck air from
the room through the fan, because chlorine gas can dam-
age the fan motor. Louvers or vents should swing out and
always be open, or open automatically. It should be im-
possible to lock the louvers shut.
9. Adequate measuring and controlling of chlorine dosage is
required. Scales and recorders indicating loss in weight
are desirable as a continuous check and as a record of the
continuity of chlorination. RECORD weights daily.
10. There should be continuity of chlorination. When chlorina-
tion is practiced for disinfection, it is needed continuously
for the protection of downstream water users. Therefore,
arrange that chlorination will function for 1440 minutes per
day. To secure continuous chlorination, the chlorine gas
lines from cylinders should feed to the manifold so that the
cylinders can be removed without interrupting feed of gas.
Duplicate units with automatic cylinder switchover should
be provided. Hypochlorinators are sometimes used during
emergencies.
11. For additional information on chlorinator maintenance,
refer to Chapter 15, "Maintenance."
37 Ambient Temperature (AM-bee-ent). Temperature of the surroundings.
-------
372 Treatment Plants
C102 SOLUTION TO
TREATMENT PROCESS
CI2 GAS
SUPPLY
cio2
REACTOR
CHLORINATOR
WATER
SUPPLY TO
CHLORINATION
METERING
PUMP
CHLORINE SOLUTION
SODIUM CHLORITE
SOLUTION TANK
NaCIO
Fig. 10.16 Chlorine dioxide facility
Source: AN ASSESSMENT OF OZONE AND CHLORINE
DIOXIDE TECHNOLOGIES FOR TREATMENT OF
MUNICIPAL WATER SUPPLIES, EXECUTIVE
SUMMARY. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, EPA-600/8-78-018, October
1978.
-------
Disinfection 373
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on pages 390 and 391.
10.5C Why should chlorinators be in a separate room?
10.5D Why is room temperature important for proper
chlorinator operation?
10.5E Why should not more than one pound of chlorine per
day per °F (0.8 kg/°C) ambient temperature be drawn
from any one cylinder?
10.5F Why is adequate ventilation important in a chlorinator
room?
10.5G How can chlorinator rooms be ventilated?
10.5H How can chlorination rates be checked against the
chlorinator setting?
10.51 Why should chlorination be continuous?
10.5J How can continuous chlorination be achieved?
10.55 Installation Requirements
(Portions of these paragraphs are from Section A of
Wallace & Tiernan Catalog Sheet Nos. 5.110 and
5.111. They are reproduced with the permission of
Wallace & Tiernan Division, Penwalt Corporation)
10.550 Piping, Valves and Manifolds
After you have determined (a) the availability of various
types of chlorine containers and selected the type most suited
to your particular needs, (b) the inventory required and the
space needed, (c) the method of handling the containers, and
(d) the type of weighing scales to be used, the final step in
regard to chlorine supply is to plan the required piping.
CONNECTIONS AT CONTAINERS: Standard practice is to
connect an auxiliary tank valve (either union- or yoke-type) to
the container valve to facilitate changing containers, to
minimize the release of gas when containers are changed, and
to serve as a shut-off valve in the event the container valve is
defective. From this auxiliary valve a flexible connection is
used to connect to the manifold or, in the case of small in-
stallations, directly to the chlorinator.
CONNECTIONS AT CHLORINATOR: In general, small
chlorinators are equipped to receive a flexible connection di-
rectly from the chlorine container and no other piping is neces-
sary. Larger chlorinators may use a flexible connection from a
manifold, if located close to the container, or may employ pip-
ing from the manifold to the chlorinator where the distance is
greater.
CONNECTIONS AT EVAPORATOR: Where evaporators
are used, the piping from the manifold to the evaporator carries
liquid chlorine. The piping from the evaporator to the
chlorinator carries chlorine gas. Evaporators normally are fur-
nished with all necessary immediate valves and fittings.
PIPING — MATERIALS AND JOINTS: Best practice calls
for the use of seamless carbon steel (Schedule 80) pipe for
conducting chlorine gas or liquid and fittings that are 3000 lb
forged steel. Except in unusual cases, the size will be 3/4 or 1
inch (1.9 to 2.5 cm). In most installations, it will be found practi-
cal to use threaded joints. These joints should be put together
using teflon tape as a joint lubricant. Unions of the flanged,
ammonia type, two-bolt oval are recommended. For pipe sizes
larger than one inch (2.5 cm) in diameter, a four-bolt oval
should be used. Froryi the standpoint of maintenance, line
valves should be kept to a minimum. Insulation is required only
in those unusual cases where it is necessary to prevent
chlorine gas lines from becoming chilled or liquid lines from
becoming overheated.
PIPING — CHLORINE GAS: It is important to observe the
correct temperature conditions in conducting chlorine gas from
the location of the containers to the point of use. To avoid
difficulty with reliquefaction of chlorine, piping and control
equipment should be at a higher temperature than that of the
chlorine containers. In general, a difference of 5 to 10°F (3 to
6°C) is recommended. It is preferable to run chlorine gas lines
overhead through relatively warm areas rather than along the
floor or through basement areas where lower temperatures
may be encountered.
When it is not possible to secure suitable temperature condi-
tions, the use of an external chlorine-pressure reducing valve
near the containers is recommended.
The use of a chlorine-pressure reducing valve is also rec-
ommended in those localities where severe temperature
changes are likely to be encountered during a 24-hour period.
PIPING — LIQUID CHLORINE: In the case of liquid
chlorine, it is important to avoid conditions that will encourage
vaporization. Thus it is important to keep liquid chlorine lines
as cool as, or cooler than, the containers. Avoid running liquid
chlorine lines through overheated areas where gasification is
likely to take place.
Valves in liquid chlorine lines should be kept to a minimum.
This is particularly important to avoid situations where it is easy
to close two valves in a line thus trapping liquid which, upon an
increase in temperature, may develop dangerous pressures.
The use of an expansion chamber is recommended where
traps occur in the line or where it is necessary to run lines a
considerable distance. As the name implies, the chamber pro-
vides an area for expansion in the event that valves at both
ends of the line are closed.
VALVES AND MANIFOLDS: Chlorine valves consist of the
following: (a) auxiliary tank valves for use at the container, (b)
header valves for use on or in conjunction with manifolds, (c)
line valves for insertion in liquid and gas lines for shut-off pur-
poses, and (d) pressure reducing valves to reduce the pres-
sure in gas lines where necessary. Manifolds are assemblies
designed to receive the flexible connections from the con-
tainer, generally provide a shutoff valve, and include the
means of connecting to the chlorinator piping. They are avail-
able in types and sizes to accommodate any required number
of containers and may be mounted in any convenient manner.
10.551 Chlorinator Injector Water Supply
The injector operating water supply serves to produce the
vacuum under which vacuum chlorinators function and to dis-
solve the chlorine and discharge it as a solution at the point of
application. The quantity of water required and the minimum
pressure at which it is supplied depend upon:
1. Maximum chlorinator feed rate, and
2. Back pressure at injector discharge (pressure at point of
chlorine application, plus friction loss in solution line, and
plus or minus elevation differences between injector and
point of application).
Water quantity and pressure can vary from one to two gpm
(4.5 to 11 cu m/day) at 15 psi (1 kg/sq cm) (for 10 lbs/day (4.5
kg/day) at 0 back pressure) and up to 360 gpm (1960 cu
m/day) at 60 psi (4 kg/sq cm) (8000 lbs/day (3630 kg/day) at 20
psi (1.4 kg/sq cm) back pressure). In some extremely high
-------
374 Treatment Plants
back pressure situations, injector water up to 300 psi (21 kg/sq
cm) may be required. These conditions do not occur often in
wastewater treatment installations, and back pressures ex-
ceeding 20 psi (1.4 kg/sq cm) (except in force-main applica-
tion) are uncommon.
Plant effluent is used frequently as injector operating water.
When this is the case, a pump is usually required to provide the
required quantity and pressure. If a pump is used exclusively
for injector operation, it should be designed for 25 to 50 per-
cent overcapacity to allow for wear. Injector water is often
supplied from a service water system also providing water for
other purposes. If a potable water supply is the only source of
injector water, precautions must be taken to insure against
direct cross-connections between wastewater and potable
water to prevent contamination of the potable water. (Consult
your local public health authority.)
Injector water requirements vary so widely depending upon
make, model, capacity, and back pressure that it is advisable
to consult the chlorinator manufacturer if a new system is to be
installed or if an existing system must be altered and any of
these operating conditions are to be changed.
10.56 Review of Plans and Specifications
See the previous two sections, 10.54 and 10.55, for items
that should be considered when reviewing plans and specif-
ications.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 391.
10.5K What is the best piping material for conducting
chlorine gas or liquid?
10.5L Plant is used frequently as the
chlorinator injector water supply.
10.6 OTHER USES OF CHLORINE
10.60 Odor Control
Chlorination is used to inhibit the growth of odor-producing
bacteria and to destroy hydrogen sulfide (H2S), the most com-
mon odor nuisance, which has the smell of rotten eggs. Hydro-
gen sulfide, in addition to creating an odor nuisance, can be an
explosion hazard when mixed with air in certain concentra-
tions. Breathing H2S can impair your ability to smell, and too
much will paralyze your respiratory center, causing death in
severe cases. It also can cause corrosion of metals and con-
crete, being particularly damaging to electrical equipment even
in low concentrations.
The presence of hydrogen sulfide may be found in signifi-
cant quantities in any collection and treatment system where
sufficient time is allowed for its development. It may be ex-
pected to be present most often in new systems where flows
are extremely low in comparison with design capacity, and
particularly in lift stations where pump operating cycles may be
at a low frequency. Collection systems which serve large areas
often allow time for H2S development even when operating at
design capacity.
The purpose of this section is not to discuss the reasons for
odor production, but rather their elimination or control by
chlorination; however, the correction of an odor problem will
usually require a decision being made between system modifi-
cation and treatment. Sometimes both may be required.
Choices of this type often hinge on the costs involved, and it
will frequently be found that modifications to major system
components are far more costly than treatment. When this is
the case, chlorination is usually the most economical solution.
Other solutions include the use of air or ozone.
Sulfide compounds and gases develop whenever given time
to do so. The rate of sulfide production increases with tempera-
ture (about 7 percent on the average with each 1°C increase in
wastewater temperature).
Hydrogen sulfide odors can be inactivated by chlorination at
levels well below the chlorine demand point. This is commonly
referred to as "sub-residual chlorination." The reason that this
is true is based on the fact that the Cl2 + H2S reaction pre-
cedes most other chlorine-consuming reactions. Since it is
known that bacterial kills occur at sub-residual levels, it is logi-
cal that odor-producing bacteria can be reduced in numbers
without satisfying the chlorine demand. This can be accom-
plished without significantly interfering with organisms benefi-
cial to the treatment processes.
The quantities of chlorine required to accomplish control of
odors vary widely from plant to plant and at any given plant
fluctuate over a broad range. Hydrogen sulfide is generally
found in higher concentrations when flows are low. For this
reason it is usually not economical to chlorinate for odor control
in direct proportion to flow. To establish a basis for treatment,
tests should be run over periods which include all the various
conditions which could possibly affect odor production.
When the requirements are known, the primary concern is to
apply chlorine at the proper location. The best locations are
generally up-sewer ahead of the plant influent structures, and
up-sewer ahead of lift stations. This is done to allow mixing and
reaction time before the waste reaches a point of agitation.
Sometimes force mains empty into the gravity sections of a
collection system several hours after pumping. If odor prob-
lems result, a treatment point should be placed upstream at a
point where the sewer is still under pressure and flowing full;
thus treatment can be completed before odors are released to
the atmosphere.
Hydrogen sulfide should not be considered merely an odor
nuisance. Always keep in mind that it can create an explosion
hazard, it can paralyze your respiratory center, and it should
always be considered a source of corrosion. For these rea-
sons, odor masking agents should not be used except possibly
as additional treatment for odors not eliminated by chlorination.
Excessive use of masking agents could prevent detection of a
serious problem condition.
-------
Disinfection 375
10.61 Protection of Structures
The destruction of hydrogen sulfide in wastewater also re-
duces the production of sulfuric acid that is highly corrosive to
sewer systems and structures. This is particularly significant
where temperatures are high and time of travel in the sewer
system is unusually long. The treatment is similar to that for
odor control: chlorination sufficient to prevent hydrogen sulfide
formation or to destroy hydrogen sulfide that has been pro-
duced (about 2 mg/Z. chlorine per mgIL of hydrogen sulfide).
Sulfide problems also may be corrected by oxygenation in
sewers. The choice between oxygenation and chlorination will
usually depend on the costs and safety risks involved. Chlorin-
ation is effective and cheaper than oxygenation, but chlorine
leaks can be a serious hazard to the public.
10.62 Aid to Treatment
Among its many uses, chlorine improves treatment effi-
ciency in the following ways.
10.620 Sedimentation and Grease Removal
Prechlorination at the inlet of a settling tank improves clarifi-
cation by improving settling rate, reducing SEPTICITY38 of raw
wastewater, and increasing grease removal. Maximum grease
removal is achieved when chlorination is combined
with aeration ("aerochlorination"). This is an expensive proce-
dure, and some studies have indicated that benefits are mini-
mal. Generally, grease removal in this manner is considered a
beneficial side effect or "bonus" reaction to chlorine which is
essentially applied for other reasons. Excess chlorination
ahead of secondary processes can inhibit the bacterial action
critical to the process and decrease sedimentation efficiency.
10.621 Trickling Filters
Continuous chlorination at the filter influent controls slime
growths and destroys filter fly larvae (Psychoda). Generally the
chlorine is applied to produce a residual of 0.5 mgIL (continu-
ous) at the orifices or nozzles. Caution should be used be-
cause some filter growth may be severely damaged by exces-
sive chlorination. Suspended solids will increase in a trickling
filter effluent after chlorination for filter fly control. Also, it will be
difficult to evaluate filter performance on the basis of BOD
removals because chlorine can interfere with the BOD test. As
a general statement, it would be well to look closely at load-
ings, operation, and general adequacy of the process when
filter fly chlorination is continuously necessary, because con-
tinuous chlorination may be an expensive alternative for
adequate design and operation.
10.622 Activated Sludge
Chlorination of return sludge reduces bulking of activated
sludge that is caused by overloading. The point of application
should be where the return sludge will be in contact with the
chlorine solution for about one minute before the sludge is
mixed with the incoming settled wastewater. Chlorine is also
commonly used to control FILAMENTOUS ORGANISMS.39
Again, chlorine used in this manner is an expensive alternative
for adequate design and operation. The main effort should be
directed toward process improvement, considering chlorina-
tion mainly as an emergency solution. Never forget that
chlorine is toxic to organisms that are needed to treat the in-
coming wastes.
10.623 Reduction of BOD
The reduction of BOD by chlorination has been explored by
numerous investigators. These individuals have proposed four
types of reactions to explain the reduction of BOD level.
1. Direct oxidation.
Chlorine is an oxidizing agent and directly oxidizes the
wastes instead of the organisms.
2. Formation with nitrogen compounds of bactericidal
chloramines by substitution of chlorine for hydrogen.
3. Formation with carbon compounds of substances that are
no longer decomposable by substitution of chlorine for hy-
drogen.
4. Addition of chlorine to unsaturated compounds to form
non-decomposable substances.
These investigators have demonstrated that chlorination of
raw wastewater can produce the following effects.
1. Reduce BOD by at least 2 mgIL for each mg IL of chlorine
absorbed up to the point at which a residual is produced.
2. The reduction is increased with increasing chlorine dos-
ages. This addition is not without limits.
3. The reduction seems to be permanent.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 391.
10.6A How can hydrogen sulfide odors be controlled? Why?
10.6B How can sulfuric acid damage to structures be
minimized or eliminated? Why?
10.7 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Portions of the information contained in this chapter were
taken in part from Chapter 17, "Disinfection and Chlorination,"
Water Pollution Control Federation MANUAL OF PRACTICE
NO. 11; and from Chapter 7, "Chlorination of Sewage," MAN-
UAL OF INSTRUCTION FOR SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT
OPERATORS (New York Manual). Both publications are excel-
lent references for additional study. Mr. J.L. Beals provided
many helpful comments.
Please answer the discussion and review questions before
continuing.
38 Septicity (sep-TIS-it-tee). Septicity is the condition in which organic matter decomposes to form foul-smelling products associated with the
absence of tree oxygen. If severe, the wastewater turns black, gives off foul odors, contains little or no dissolved oxygen and creates a heavy
oxygen demand.
39 Filamentous Organisms (FILL-a-MEN-tuss). Organisms that grow in a thread or filamentous form.
-------
376 Treatment Plants
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
Chapter 10. DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
(Lesson 4 of 5 Lessons)
Write the answers to these questions in your notebook be-
fore continuing. The problem numbering continues from Les-
son 3.
21. How is the rate of chlorine gas flow in a chlorinator con-
trolled?
22. How often should the weights of chlorine cylinders be re-
corded?
23. Why must chlorination be continuous?
24. Why should the temperature of chlorine piping and control
equipment be higher than the temperature of the chlorine
containers?
25. Why must direct cross-connections between a public
water supply and the injector water supply be avoided?
26. What is "sub-residual chlorination?"
27. Why should sulfide production be controlled?
CHAPTER 10. DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
(Lesson 5 of 5 Lessons)
10.8 DECHLORINATION40
10.80 Need for Dechlorination
Receiving waters such as streams, rivers and lakes provide
habitat for fish and numerous other types of aquatic or-
ganisms. The need for protection of this environment from
toxic substances (such as chlorine) has prompted regulatory
agencies to require that no measurable chlorine residual be
allowed to enter receiving waters in the effluents from waste-
water treatment plants. Removal of chlorine from treatment
plant effluents is called "dechlorination."
Dechlorination may be achieved by the following treatment
processes:
1. Long detention periods. Prolonged detention periods pro-
vide sufficient time for dissipation of residual chlorine.
2. Aeration. Bubbling air through the water with a chlorine
residual in the last portion of long, narrow chlorine contact
basins will remove a chlorine residual.
3. Sunlight. Chlorine may be destroyed by sunlight. This is
accomplished by spreading the chlorinated effluent in a thin
layer and by exposing it to sunlight.
4. Activated carbon. Residual chlorine can be removed from
water by absorption on activated carbon.
5. Chemical reactions. Sulfur dioxide (S02) is frequently used
because it reacts instantaneously with chlorine on approxi-
mately a one-to-one basis (1 mgIL S02 will react with and
remove 1 mg IL chlorine residual). Other chemicals include
sodium sulfite (Na2S03), sodium bisulfite (NaHS03),
sodium metabisulfite (Na2S205), and sodium thiosulfate
(Na2S203).
A chemical reaction using sulfur dioxide is the most common
treatment process used to dechlorinate the effluent from
treatment plants.
While high chlorine residuals (2.5 to 12.0 mgIL) often are
required to meet the MPN coliform requirements set by the
public health agencies, fish and wildlife agencies have re-
quired dechlorination to protect aquatic life in receiving waters
below the plant discharge. Aquatic life, such as salmon, trout,
and similar fish, can only tolerate trace (0.01 mg IL) amounts of
chlorine.
"Dechlorination" is the physical or chemical removal of all
traces of residual chlorine remaining after the disinfection pro-
cess and prior to the discharge of the effluent to the receiving
waters. This is commonly accomplished by the use of sulfur
compounds such as sulfur dioxide, sodium sulfite or sodium
metabisulfite. Activated carbon has been used, but was found
to be extremely expensive in large applications.
Sulfur dioxide is the most popular method used for dechlo-
rination to date. The reason for the popularity of sulfur dioxide
is that it uses existing chlorination equipment and makes ex-
tensive training of operators unnecessary. This section will
discuss the use of sulfur dioxide for dechlorination and only
briefly mention other methods.
10.81 Sulfur Dioxide (S02)
10.810 Properties
Sulfur dioxide is a colorless gas with a characteristic pun-
gent (sharp, biting) odor. SOz may be cooled and compressed
to a liquid. When the gas is compressed to a liquid, a colorless
liquid is formed. As with chlorine, when sulfur dioxide is in a
closed container the liquid and gas normally are in equilibrium.
40 Dechlorination (dee-KLOR-i-NAY-shun). The removal of chlorine from the effluent of a treatment plant.
-------
Disinfection 377
The pressure within the container bears a definite relation to
the container's ambient temperature. This relationship is very
similar to chlorine.
Sulfur dioxide is neither flammable nor explosive in either
form, gas or liquid. Dry gaseous sulfur dioxide is not corrosive
to most metals; however, in the presence of moisture it forms
sulfuric acid (H2S04) and is extremely corrosive. Due to this
corrosive action, similar materials and equipment are used for
the storage and application of both sulfure dioxide and
chlorine. The sulfonator's diaphragms are manufactured to
handle sulfur dioxide rather than chlorine.
Sulfur dioxide gas is more soluble in water than chlorine.
Approximately one pound per gallon can be absorbed at 60°F
(16°C). As the temperature increases, sulfur dioxide's solubility
in water decreases. When dissolved in water, sulfur dioxide
forms a weak solution of sulfurous acid (H2S03).
The density of sulfure dioxide is very similar to chlorine; so
much so, that it is possible to use a chlorine rotameter to
measure the flow of sulfur dioxide gas without much difficulty.
When using the chlorine rotameter, multiply the chlorine read-
ing by 0.95 to obtain the pounds per day of sulfur dioxide used.
10.811 Chemical Reaction of Sulfur Dioxide with Waste-
water
The chemical reaction of dechlorination results in the con-
version of all active positive chlorine ions to the nonactive
negative chloride ions. The reaction of sulfur dioxide (S02) with
chlorine is as follows:
S02 + H20 - H2S03 + HOCI — h2so4 + HCI.
The formation of sulfuric acid (H2S04) and hydrochloric acid
(HCI) from this reaction is not harmful because of the small
amount of acid produced. The pH of the effluent is not changed
significantly unless the alkalinity is very low.
With combined chloramine,
NH2CI + H2S03 + H20 — NH4HS04 + HCI.
Similar reactions are formed with dichloramine and nitrogen
trichloride. If some organic materials are present, the reaction
rate may change so that an excess of sulfur dioxide may have
to be applied. The chemical reaction between chlorine and
sulfur dioxide is approximately one to one. For example, a
chlorine residual of 4 mgIL would require a sulfur dioxide dose
of 4 mg/L. The chemical reaction occurs almost instantane-
ously.
Where it may be desirable not to use sulfur dioxide for safety
reasons (use of a liquid rather than toxic SO, gas), it may be
useful to substitute sodium sulfite (Na,S03) or sodium
metabisulfite (NajSjOj). The reaction then "becomes:
Na2S03 + Cl2 + HjO -» Na2S04 + 2 HCI.
When using sodium sulfite, the reaction requires 1.78
pounds of pure sodium sulfite per pound of chlorine. The
speed of reaction is similar to that of sulfure dioxide. Both
sodium sulfite and sodium metabisulfite require liquid storage
tanks and feed pumps, but evaporators are not needed.
10.812 Application Point
The typical application point is just prior to the discharge of
the effluent to the receiving waters. This allows time for
maximum disinfection of the effluent. The point of application
should be where the flow is turbulent and short-circuiting
should not exist. Since the dechlorination reaction requires a
relatively short time period, contact basins are not needed.
Often it is not feasible to have the point of application at the
remote location where the effluent is discharged to the receiv-
ing waters. Since the prime consideration is the removal of
chlorine residual, this removal can be accomplished at the
plant site when necessary.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 391.
10.8A Why are the effluents from some treatment plants de-
chlorinated?
10.8B List the treatment processes that may be used to de-
chlorinate a plant effluent.
10.8C What happens when sulfur dioxide gas comes in con-
tact with moisture?
10.8D The reaction of sulfure dioxide (S02) with chlorine
produces sulfuric acid (H2S04) and hydrochloric acid
(HCI). Will these reactions cause a drop in the effluent
10.82 Sulfur Dioxide Hazards
10.820 Exposure Responses to Sulfur Dioxide
Sulfur dioxide is extremely hazardous and must be handled
with caution. Exercise extreme caution when working with sul-
fur dioxide, just like you would when handling chlorine.
Sulfur dioxide has a very strong, pungent odor. When you
smell sulfur dioxide, notify your supervisor and get help. If
qualified and authorized to do so, locate and repair the leak.
If you inhale sulfur dioxide gas, sulfurous acid will form on
the moist mucous membranes in your body and cause severe
irritation or more serious harm. The greater the exposure, the
more serious the damage to your body. Exposure to high
doses of sulfur dioxide can cause death due to lack of oxygen,
chemical bronchopneumonia with severe bronchiolitis may be
fatal several days later. In the event sulfur dioxide is inhaled,
remove the victim to fresh air, use artificial respiration if neces-
sary and contact a doctor. Table 10.4 summarizes the impacts
of the various concentrations of sulfur dioxide on the human
body.
Sulfur dioxide gas is heavier than air and, therefore, will
settle in low areas. Due to its low vapor pressure, the liquid
changes quickly to gas when liberated, and this gas also will
settle in low areas or confined spaces.
Suitable safety equipment, similar to that used in case of
chlorine leaks, must be available whenever the potential exists
for contact with sulfur dioxide. Gas masks with a self-contained
air supply must be readily available.
Liquid sulfur dioxide has additional hazards which are as-
sociated with any compressed or liquified gas:
1. Containers burst or safety devices activate if the liquid is
overpressurized or excessively heated,
2. Violent chemical reactions result if water is sucked back
into the chemical (sulfur dioxide) in the container, and
3. Body tissue freezes when in contact with a liquified gas.
-------
378 Treatment Plants
TABLE 10.4 IMPACT OF SULFUR DIOXIDE ON THE
HUMAN BODY
CONCENTRATION
3-5 ppm
8-12 ppm
IMPACT
Lowest concentration detectable by odor
Lowest concentration immediately
irritating to throat
Lowest concentration immediately
irritating to eyes 20 ppm
Lowest concentration causing coughing 20 ppm
Maximum allowable concentration tor
8-hr exposure 10 ppm
Maximum allowable concentration for
1-hr exposure 50-100 ppm
Tolerable briefly 150 ppm
Immediately dangerous concentration 400-500 ppm
10.821 Detection of Leaks
The pungent odor of sulfur dioxide can be detected
whenever there is a leak somewhere in the system. The loca-
tion of even the smallest leak may be readily found by the use
of ammonia vapor dispensed from an aspirator or squeeze
bottle in the area where a leak is suspected. If the room is full
of gas, an aspirator bottle will not work because the entire
room could become filled with white fumes. Leaks also are
detected by the use of an ammonia swab, prepared by soaking
a cloth with ammonia solution. When the ammonia vapor
passes the leak, a dense white fume forms. This procedure is
exactly the same as that used for detecting chlorine leaks.
NEVER USE SOAPY WATER TO LOOK FOR A LEAK.
WATER COMBINES WITH SULFUR DIOXIDE TO FORM
SULFURIC ACID WHICH IS VERY CORROSIVE AND WILL
MAKE ANY LEAK WORSE.
10.822 What to Do in Case of Leaks
The possibility of having a leak in the system is always
present; therefore, be prepared for any emergency. Leaks
occurring because of broken lines, broken sight glass, or
leaking joints must be handled as rapidly as possible. When
these emergencies occur, only authorized employees should
attempt to stop a leak. If there is any question regarding the
size of the leak, gas masks with a self-contained breathing
apparatus must be worn. When working on any leak, the
buddy system must be used. NEVER WORK ALONE ON
LEAKS. When serious leaks occur, the source of the sulfur
dioxide should be shut off before attempting to solve the prob-
lem.
If the leak is a minor one, the supply valve near the leak
can be turned off and the leak repaired. If the leak is near or
at the valve, always turn the supply off at the source, such as
a cylinder or tank car.
If the leak occurs in the cylinder, the most common shutoff
area is at the valve. You can use the chlorine emergency kit
that is described in the chlorine sections of this chapter.
When the emergency equipment is installed, the container
should be returned to the supplier as quickly as possible,
provided the supplier is nearby and the container can be
returned safely. Otherwise empty the container as quickly as
possible.
Ton tank leaks occur mainly at the valves and can be re-
paired with emergency kits. Leaky tank car valves are the
only tank car leaks that can be repaired.
10.823 Employees Authorized to Work on Leaks
All employees that must work around sulfur dioxide should
have a regular medical checkup. No one with breathing prob-
lems, heart disorders, or similar handicaps should attempt to
correct leaks.
In order to be considered qualified, operators must meet the
following conditions:
1. Trained in the use of emergency equipment,
2. Good physical and mental health, and
3. Understand that the leak emergency must be stopped by
a team consisting of at least two individuals.
10.824 Safety with Sulfur Dioxide
Every good safety program begins with the cooperation of
the management and the operator. The operator must take
an active part in the safety program and management must
support the efforts of the operator. The operator is responsi-
ble for taking all necessary steps to prevent accidents. This
begins with the proper attitude. All the laws in the world are
not enough if both management and operators don't enforce
the use of them. OSHA and INDUSTRIAL SAFETY programs
were developed for safety reasons. THE BEST SAFETY
PROGRAM IS TO STOP ACCIDENTS BEFORE THEY
HAPPEN. A safety program should be started and items that
should be included are:
1. Establish a safety program
a. Develop emergency procedures with police and fire
departments
b. List doctors' phone numbers
c. List fire department's phone number
d. List ambulance service's phone number
e. Establish procedure on how to make an emergency
phone call
1) Give the location where accident happened — ad-
dress
2) Instruct where the accident took place in the plant
and/or where the injured party can be located
2. Prepare written rules to cover the above points
3. Participate in periodic training, including hands-on use of
safety equipment
a. Leak repair equipment
b. Gas masks
c. Use and maintenance of detection equipment
4. Conduct a maintenance program for safety equipment
10.825 First Aid
Importance of First Aid
Whenever anyone is overcome by sulfur dioxide, remove
the person from the contaminated area and wash the affected
parts of the body with large amounts of water. If the
clothing is affected, the clothes should be removed and
washed thoroughly. If the individual is burned, even slightly,
get medical attention from a doctor.
YOU ARE NOT A DOCTOR AND SHOULD NOT APPLY
ANY MEDICATION
-------
Disinfection 379
Keep the individual warm and in a reclining position with
head and shoulders slightly elevated. Keep the individual
quiet and urge the person to resist coughing if possible.
Asphyxiation
Usually cases of asphyxiation are rare due to the pungent
odor of sulfur dioxide. If the individual has stopped breathing,
remove the person from the contaminated area and start arti-
ficial respiration immediately. Have someone call the fire de-
partment, because they are experts and have the necessary
equipment to handle this type of emergency. Get the indi-
vidual to a doctor as soon as possible.
Eyes
If sulfur dioxide gets into the eyes, wash eyes immediately
with large amounts of water from an eye wash or running water
hose. Keep the eyelids open while washing and wash for at
least 15 minutes. Do not give medication. Transport to a doctor
as soon as possible.
Skin
If sulfur dioxide gets on the skin, wash off immediately with
large amounts of water. Remove any clothing that has been
contaminated. If a burn has occurred, transport the injured
person to a doctor for treatment and care.
10.826 Emergency Safety Equipment
Gas Masks
All wastewater treatment plants should have a self-
contained air breathing apparatus for use with chlorine leaks.
These masks are adequate for use during sulfur dioxide leaks.
CANISTER MASKS ARE NOT ADEQUATE FOR SEVERE
CHLORINE OR SULFUR DIOXIDE LEAKS. THIS TYPE OF
EQUIPMENT SHOULD NOT BE NEAR THE PLANT BE-
CAUSE IT MAY LEAD TO SERIOUS ACCIDENTS DUE TO
LACK OF OXYGEN OR EXCESSIVE AMOUNTS OF TOXIC
GASEOUS CHEMICALS. The recommended type of breathing
apparatus is the unit that has its own air or oxygen supply.
There are two types of self-contained breathing apparatus.
One contains thirty minutes of compressed air and is the same
as those used by the fire departments. Pressure-demand units
are considered safer than the demand-breathing type. The
other uses a canister to manufacture oxygen and is completely
self-contained. This device is sometimes called a "rebreather
kit."
Container Emergency Kits
The following container emergency kits are available for
specified applications.
1. 150-lb Cylinders
The CHLORINE INSTITUTE EMERGENCY KIT-A contains
equipment to stop leaks at the valve, fusible plug, and the
tank itself.
2. Ton Tanks
The CHLORINE INSTITUTE EMERGENCY KIT-B contains
equipment to stop leaks at the valve, fusible plug, and tank.
3. Tank Cars and Tank Trucks
The CHLORINE INSTITUTE EMERGENCY KIT-C contains
the equipment to stop leaks only at the valve and the safety
valve.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 391.
10.8E What happens when you inhale sulfur dioxide gas?
10.8F How can a sulfur dioxide leak be detected?
tfrr
KIT
10.83 Sulfur Dioxide Supply System
10.830 Sulfur Dioxide Containers
Sulfur dioxide containers and handling facilities are the
same as for chlorine. Review Figures 10.7, 10.8, 10.9, 10.10
and 10.11 for pictures and drawings of chlorine containers and
handling facilities. Reread Section 10.4, "Chlorine Handling,"
for a review of the different types of containers and facilities.
There are two important differences between the use of
chlorine and sulfur dioxide:
1. Withdrawal rates of sulfure dioxide from containers are
slightly lower than the rates for chlorine, and
2. Valves in sulfur dioxide systems should be made of 316
stainless steel with teflon seats.
10.831 Supply Piping
The piping system should be the same as that required for
chlorine. Sulfur dioxide usually is not corrosive to most metals
when dry. In reality, you don't find completely dry sulfur dioxide
gas. There is always some trace of moisture. When sulfur
dioxide becomes moist, it is very corrosive, and most metals
cannot stand the corrosive action. The best material to use
from the source of supply to the sulfonators is Schedule 80
seamless carbon steel pipe with 3000-pound forged steel fit-
tings. Avoid the use of bushings by using reducing fittings in-
stead. All unions should be of the ammonia type with lead
gasket joints. Never use ground joint unions.
In some installations, plastic material has been used to con-
nect the sulfonators to the source of supply. Plastic material is,
however, ideally suited to carry the sulfur dioxide solution to
the point of application.
10.832 Valves
All material used in the valving system should be approved
by the Chlorine Institute. There have been problems using
bronze bodies and monel stems and seats. Better results have
been obtained using 316 stainless steel with teflon seats. Plas-
tic valves such as PVC have been used on solution lines with
good results.
-------
380 Treatment Plants
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 391.
10.8G Why should the piping system carrying sulfur dioxide
gas be heated to room temperature?
10.8H How can cylinders be Kept from falling over or being
knocked down?
10.84 Sulfonation System41
10.840 Evaporator
The evaporator is nothing more than a heating system de-
signed to increase the temperature of the liquid sulfur dioxide
to the point where it will become a gas.
Liquid sulfur dioxide is piped from the source containers to
the sulfur dioxide evaporator. This evaporator is a tank im-
mersed in a constant-temperature hot water bath. The water in
the bath is heated to approximately 180°F (82°C). This heat
converts the liquid to gas. Liquid sulfur dioxide enters the
evaporator at the bottom and sulfur dioxide gas leaves from
the top. Due to the construction of the equipment, the gas and
liquid are almost at equilibrium.
10.841 Sulfonator
The sulfonator is very similar to a chlorinator, except the
orifice and rotameter are different and the diaphragms are
manufactured to handle sulfur dioxide rather than chlorine. Ac-
tually a sulfonator is a sulfur dioxide gas-metering device. To
achieve accuracy with safety while in use, a sulfonator should
have:
1. Indicating meter (Rotameter),
2. Sulfur dioxide metering orifice (V-Notch),
3. Manual or automatic feed rate adjuster,
4. Vacuum differential-regulating valve,
5. Pressure-vacuum relief valve, and
6. Injector
The sulfur dioxide feeding system is found in various sizes.
These sizes refer to the maximum amount of chemical that can
be fed through the control system in ibs per day. The most
common of these are:
100 Ibs per day 45 kg/day
200 90
250 115
400 180
2000 900
8000 3600
For any size, there are a variety of sizes of rotameters that
can be used.
10.842 Injector
The heart of any system is the injector. This injector is
merely an aspirator that creates a vacuum in the low pressure
area of the barrel. The vacuum is regulated by an orifice open-
ing and the water flowing through the throat of the aspirator.
The vacuum of the injector allows the chemical to flow from the
storage supply through the sulfonator, the metering device,
and into the injector. At the injector, the sulfur dioxide gas is
dissolved in water to form sulfurous acid. This will now be
referred to as the "sulfur dioxide solution." This solution flows
to the point of application.
Injector system design list includes:
1. Injector water-pressure gage,
2. Injector vacuum gage for remote injector installations,
3. Injector vacuum line shut-off valve at the remote injector
location,
4. Sulfur dioxide solution pressure gage located immediately
downstream of the injector to indicate injector back-
pressure (this is not required on fixed throat injector sys-
tems),
5. Injector water-pressure switch for low water pressure
alarm, and
6. Injector water flow meters for multiple sulfonator systems.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 391.
10.81 What is the purpose of the sulfur dioxide evaporator?
10.8J What happens at the injector of a sulfonation system?
10.65 Sulfonator Controls
10.850 Sulfonator Feed-Rate Control
The control of sulfur dioxide flow to point of application in
plant effluent is accomplished very much like controlling
chlorine flow. Control of the sulfur dioxide feed rate (dosage) to
the plant effluent to remove chlorine residual depends on:
1. Chlorine residual, mgIL,
2. Plant flow rate, MGD, and
3. Amount (if any) of chlorine to be remaining after addition of
sulfur dioxide.
10.851 Control Facilities
Most modern installations do not use manual control of
equipment for normal operation. But from time to time, equip-
ment failures occur and make the use of manual controls nec-
essary. Switching from automatic to manual control is usually a
matter of turning a set screw or thumb screw to release a
spring or some similar mechanism (the procedure depends on
the type of sulfonator). Operating under this mode or condition
requires the operator to change the dose rate manually every
time there is a flow change or a chlorine residual change. This
is accomplished by turning the control knob to adjust to the
proper dose rate of sulfur dioxide.
To determine the manual setting on a sulfonator, follow the
steps outlined in the example calculation. Initially a safety fac-
tor of 3.0 mgIL of sulfur dioxide more than the chlorine residual
is applied. As experience is gained, the 3.0 mgIL excess may
be gradually reduced to the level actually needed.
41 Evaporators and sulfonators used in sulfonation systems consist of essentially the same equipment as used in chiorinatlon systems. Review
Figures 10.13, 10.14 and 10.15 tor drawings of chiorinatlon equipment used in sulfonation systems.
-------
Disinfection 381
EXAMPLE
A plant with a 2 MGD flow has an effluent residual chlorine of
4.5 mgIL. Sulfur dioxide should be applied at 3.0 mg/L more
than the chlorine residual. Determine the sulfonator feed rate
in pounds of sulfur dioxide per day.
Known Unknown
Flow, MGD = 2 MGD Sulfonator Feed Rate
Effl. CI. Res., mg IL = 4.g mg IL in pounds S02/day
S02 Dose, mg//. - CI. Res. + 3.0
Determine the sulfonator feed rate.
Feed Rate, = (Flow, MGD) (Dose, mg//.)(8.34 lbs/gal)
lbs/day
- (2 MGD)(4.5 mg IL + 3.0 mg/Z_)(8.34 lbs/gal)
= 125 lbs/day or 57 kg/day
If plant inflow or chlorine residual changes, repeat calcula-
tions and readjust sulfonator feed rate.
Refer to Section 10.20, "Chlorinator Control," for a review
of the various types of control facilities.
10.852 Selection of Method of Control
The method used in the operation is usually selected by the
design engineer on the basis of a combination of cost and
desired effect. A plant that is under strict requirements may
use the compound loop system and could also, if funds were
short, use a manually paced instrument. The cost must be
determined to be reasonable before equipment is selected
and installed. If operators are not at the plant 24 hours a day,
then one of the automatic control modes should be consid-
ered. Even if the operator is present, automatic controls are
still the best system.
10.86 Determination of Residual Sulfur Dioxide in
Wastewater
Residual sulfur dioxide in plant effluent must be measured
to be sure the sulfonator is not overdosing and wasting sulfur
dioxide. A residual of 0.5 mg/l or less is satisfactory. Gener-
ally, aquatic life can withstand sulfur dioxide concentrations
below 20 mg/l; however, this level in an effluent is obviously
wasteful. The method for testing residual sulfur dioxide is
similar to that for measuring chlorine residual. This technique
involves using the amperometric titration procedure. The
method used is the back titration approach. The procedure is
as follows:
1. Place a 200 ml sample of wastewater in the titrator.
2. Start the agitator.
3. Add 5 ml of 0.00564 N phenylarsene oxide (PAO) solution
to the sample and mix.
4. Add 4 ml pH 4.0 buffer solution (or enough to attain a pH
of between 3.5 and 4.2) to sample and mix.
5. Adjust microammeter pointer so that it reads about 20 on
the scale.
6. Add 0.282 N iodine solution in small increments from 1 ml
pipet.
7. Any residual sulfur dioxide will take all of the one ml of
iodine solution. The end point will be a deflection to the
right by the microammeter and will remain to the right.
8. Note the amount of iodine solution used. This amount
should be greater than 1 ml if there is to be any residual.
The calculation will be:
Total sulfur dioxide = ml PAO - (4.5)(ml iodine solution)
residual, mg IL
This calculation assumes a 200 ml sample and a PAO
solution with a 0.00564 N and an iodine solution that is
0.0282 N.
The excess iodine measures the sulfur dioxide present in
the sample.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 391.
10.8K Control of the sulfur dioxide feed rate (dosage) to the
plant effluent to remove chlorine residual depends
on what factors?
10.8L A treatment plant with a 1.5 MGD flow has an
effluent chlorine residual of 3.5 mg IL. Apply sulfur
dioxide at a dose rate of 3.0 mg IL more than the
chlorine residual. Determine the sulfonator feed rate
in pounds of sulfur dioxide per day.
10.8M Why is the residual sulfur dioxide measured in the
plant effluent?
10.87 Operation of Sulfonation Process
10.870 Start-Up of a New System
Before any new system is started, the operators should
study the piping system so they know where the shutoff valves
are located. A safety program should be discussed, designed,
and implemented.
The system should be cleaned, dried, and tested for leaks.
Pipelines can be cleaned and dried by flushing with a cleaning
solvent, steaming the line with super hot (dry) steam from the
high (elevation) side of the system and allowing the conden-
sate and foreign material to drain out. Heat the entire line and
blow dry air from one end of the line to the other. Purge line
with nitrogen gas. Test the dry air for any moisture by running
DEW POINT TEST42 using padding air compressor air supply.
After drying the system for the first time, test the system for
leaks. Pressurize the system with air to 150 psi (10.5 kg/sq
cm), making sure the air is dry. Maintain the pressure for 24
42 Dew Point Test. Dew point is the temperature to which air with a given quantity of water vapor must be cooled to cause condensation of the
vapor in the air. One way to measure the dew point is with a special dew point apparatus. This apparatus consists of a small box. The gas or
air being tested enters the box on one side and leaves on the opposite side. One of the other sides has an observation window. A polished
cup is inserted firmly in the top.
Pass a sample of air or gas being tested through the apparatus. Adjust the flow so it can be felt against wetted lips, but not readily felt by
the hand. Pour acetone into the cup. Allow the sample to pass through the cup for about five minutes. Add small amounts of crushed dry ice
to the acetone. Stir continuously with a thermometer. Carefully add dry ice to the acetone as necessary to slowly lower the temperature.
When dew or moisture first appears on the outside polished surface of the cup, read the temperature from the thermometer. This tempera-
ture is the DEW POINT. The lower the dew point, the less moisture in the air. The amount of moisture in the air can be determined from a dew
point temperature chart or table provided by manufacturers of dew point measuring equipment.
-------
382 Treatment Plants
hours. Some drop in pressure may occur as a result of hot
compressor air cooling in the system. If there is a pressure
drop due to a leak, inspect for leaks at the joints and valves by
using soapy water. After this procedure indicates that the sys-
tem has passed the test, small amounts of sulfur dioxide may
be used. When this is done for the first time, be certain that gas
masks are handy. At the first sign of odor, close the supply
system. Recheck the system for leaks. Remember: A sul-
fonator should be used during this check-out; otherwise there
will be no place for the sulfur dioxide to go. If a leak develops,
the sulfonator should be set at the highest possible feed rate in
order to drain (empty) the system of sulfur dioxide so the leak
may be repaired.
10.871 Start-Up of Gas Sulfonators
Start-up procedures for sulfonators using sulfur dioxide gas
from containers are outlined in this section.
1. Be sure sulfur dioxide gas valve at the sulfonator is closed.
This valve should have been closed already since the sul-
fonator is out of service.
2. All sulfur dioxide valves on the supply line should have
been closed during shutdown. Be sure they are still
closed. If any valves are required to be open for any rea-
son, this exception should be indicated by a tag on the
valve.
3. Inspect all tubing, manifold and valve connections for po-
tential leaks and be sure all joints are properly gasketed.
4. Check sulfur dioxide solution distribution lines to be sure
that system is properly valved to deliver sulfur dioxide so-
lution to desired point of application.
5. Open sulfur dioxide metering orifice slightly by adjusting
sulfur dioxide feed-rate control.
6. Start the injector water supply system. Usually the source
of water is plant effluent (with a minimum of suspended
solids) or potable water (after an air-gap system) supply.
The supply water is pumped at an appropriate flow rate
and pressure through the injector which creates sufficient
vacuum in the injector to draw sulfur dioxide gas. Sulfur
dioxide is absorbed and mixed in the water at the injector.
The sulfur dioxide solution then is conveyed to the point of
application in the plant effluent.
7. Examine injector water supply system.
a. Note reading of injector supply pressure gage. If read-
ing is abnormal (different from usual reading), try to
identify cause and correct.
b. Note reading of injector vacuum gage. If the vacuum
reading is less than normal, the machine may function
at a lower feed rate but will be unable to deliver at
rated capacity.
8. Inspect sulfonator vacuum lines for leaks.
9. Crack open the sulfur dioxide container valve and allow
gas to enter the line. Inspect all joints for leaks by placing
an ammonia-soaked rag near each joint. A white cloud will
reveal the location of a leak. Start with the valve at the
sulfur dioxide container, move down the line and check all
joints between this valve and the next one downstream. If
the downstream valve passes the ammonia test, open the
valve and continue to the next valve. If there are no leaks
to the sulfonator, continue with the start-up procedure.
10. Inspect the sulfonator.
a. Sulfur dioxide gas pressure at the sulfonator should
be between 20 and 30 psi (1.4 to 2.1 kg/sq cm).
b. Operate sulfonator at complete range of feed rates.
c. Check operation on manual and automatic settings.
11. Sulfonator is ready for use. Log in the time sulfonator was
placed into service.
-------
Disinfection 383
10.872 Troubleshooting the Gas Sulfonator Systems
Operating Symptoms
Injector vacuum reading low
Probable Cause
Hydraulic system
Flow restricted
Low pressure
High pressure
Back pressure
Leaking joints
Sulfonator will not reach maximum output
Sulfonator will feed OK at maximum output,
but will not control at low rates
Low flow of water
Missing gasket
Faulty injector (no vacuum)
Restriction in supply (no S02)
Faulty sulfonator
Leaks
Wrong orifice
Vacuum regulating valve
If equipped with SPRV (Sulfonator Pres-
sure Reducing Valve)
Sulfonator does not feed
Supply
Piping
Variable vacuum control, formerly working
well, now will not go below 30% feed. Sig-
nal OK
Variable vacuum control reaches full feed,
but will not go below 50% feed. SPRV OK
SPRV
Signal vacuum too high
Variable vacuum control won't go to
feed. Gas pressure OK. SPRV OK
Freezing of manometer
full Plugged restrictor
Air leak in signal
Rate too high
Restriction in manometer orifice
Remedy
Check injector water supply system
Adjust injector orifice
Close throat
Open throat
Change injector and/or increase water sup-
ply to injector
Increase pump output
Repair joint
Repair injector system
Find restriction in supply system
Check for vacuum leaks
Repair leaks
Install proper orifice
Repair diaphragm
Check valve capsule
Clean SPRV cartridge, SPRV diaphragm,
and SPRV gaskets
Renew SOz supply
Open valve
Clean filter
Clean SPRV
Hole in diaphragm
Clean dirty filter disks
Clean converter nozzle
Clean restrictor
Repair air leak
Lower rate
Clean piping
-------
384 Treatment Plants
10.873 Start-Up of Liquid Sulfonators
Start-up procedures for sulfonators using liquid sulfur
dioxide from containers are outlined in this section.
1. Inspect all joints, valves, manifolds and tubing connec-
tions in sulfonation system, including application lines, for
proper fit and for leaks. Make sure that all joints have
gaskets.
2. If sulfonation system has been broken open or exposed to
the atmosphere, verify that the system is dry. Usually once
a system has been dried out, it is never opened again to
the atmosphere. However, if moisture enters the system in
the air or by any other means, it readily mixes with sulfur
dioxide and forms sulfuric acid which will corrode the
pipes, valves, joints and fittings.
To verify that the system is dry, determine the dew point
(must be lower than 40°F or 5°C). If not dry, turn the
evaporator on, pass dry air through the evaporator and
force this air through the system. If this step is omitted and
moisture is in the system, serious corrosion damage can
result and the entire system may have to be repaired.
3. Start up the evaporators. Fill the water bath and adjust the
device according to the manufacturer's directions.
4. Turn on evaporator heaters. Wait until the temperature of
the evaporator reaches 180°F (82°C) before proceeding to
next step.
5. Inspect and close all valves on the sulfur dioxide supply
line.
6. Open the sulfur dioxide metering orifice slightly. This is to
prevent damage to the rotameter.
7. Start the injector water supply system.
8. Examine injector water supply system.
a. Note reading of injector water supply pressure gage. If
reading is abnormal (different from usual reading), try
to identify cause and correct.
b. Note reading of injector vacuum gage. If the vacuum
reading is less than normal, the machine may function
at a lower feed rate, but will be unable to deliver at
rated capacity.
9. Inspect sulfonator vacuum lines for leaks.
10. Close all valves on the supply line.
11. Crack open the G^S LINE at the sulfur dioxide container.
All liquid sulfur dioxide systems should be checked out
using gas because of the danger of leaks and also gas is
less dangerous. Inspect the joints between this valve and
the next one downstream. If this valve passes the am-
monia leak test, continue to the next valve down the line.
Follow this procedure until the evaporator is reached. Be-
fore allowing sulfur dioxide to enter the evaporator and the
sulfonator, make sure that all valves between the
evaporator and the sulfonator are open. Heat in the
evaporator will expand the gas and, if the system is
closed, there could be problems. Sulfur dioxide should
never be trapped in a line between the evaporator and the
sulfonator because heat could expand the gas to the point
where pressure levels are dangerous.
12. If no problems develop, the gas line can be put in service
by opening the valve 11/2 to 2 turns.
13. Check the operation of the sulfonator.
a. Operate over complete range of sulfur dioxide feed
rates.
b. Check operation on manual and automatic settings.
14. Inspect the liquid sulfur dioxide control valve. If OK, open
the liquid sulfur dioxide control valve.
15. After admitting liquid sulfur dioxide to the system, wait until
the temperature of the evaporator again reaches 180°F
(82°C). Inspect the evaporator.
16. The system is ready for normal operation.
-------
Disinfection 385
10.874 Troubleshooting the Liquid Sulfonator System
Operating Symptoms Probable Cause
Loss of S02 pressure at the sulfonator Plugged S02 filter on supply line
Liquid through manometer
Loss of vacuum
High vacuum
Misting
Low temperature alarm on evaporator
S02 supply out
Supply valve closed
Rate too high
Reliquefaction
Water bath temperature off
Defective evaporator
Plugged diffuser, high back pressure
Injector
Loss of water pressure
Supply of SOz
Defective evaporator
Water bath temperature off
Remedy
Switch to another sulfonator and clean
filter
Change S02 supply
Check valve and system
Lower rate or use another sulfonator
Piping exposed to cold air; heat piping
or room
Adjust temperature setting
Put another evaporator on line. Repair
evaporator
Repair diffuser
Repair injector
Check booster pump
Check water supply
Check supply
Check for closed valves
Lower feed rates
Check evaporator
Put another evaporator on line
Set too low for rate being passed
Defective water bath
Switch to gas feed from supply
-------
386 Treatment Plants
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 392.
10.8N What is the probable cause of joints leaking sulfur
dioxide gas?
10.80 Why should sulfur dioxide never be trapped in a line
between the evaporator and the sulfonator?
10.875 Normal and Abnormal Operation
The following observations of gages should be checked
routinely for proper operation.
Evaporator
1. Water level: Indicates the level of water in the water bath.
The level should be in the center of the sight glass.
2. Water temperature: Normal operating range is 180 to 195°F
(82 to 91°C).
3. Gas temperature: Normal operating range is 90° to 105°F
(32 to 41 °C). As impurities are deposited on the evaporator
wall, the gas will show a drop in temperature. With experi-
ence, the operator should be able to determine when the
evaporator needs cleaning.
4. Gas pressure: Should read the same pressure as the sup-
ply cylinder or tank.
5. Cathodic protection: The purpose of cathodic protection is
to protect the water bath from corrosion damage. The meter
should normally read in the 50 to 200 range.
Sulfonator
1. Rotameter: The rotameter indicates the dosage rate of sul-
fur dioxide and can be set manually or automatically; it
should read the same as the established feed rate.
2. Gas pressure: This pressure is normally 20 to 30 psi (1.4 to
2.1 kg/sq cm).
3. Injector suction: Check to see if the unit fluctuates a lot. If it
does, the injector water supply should be inspected for the
cause.
Procedures and equipment for operating and maintaining
chlorination and sulfonation systems are very similar. How-
ever, you also should be aware of the differences.
1. Sulfonator control valve diaphragms are made from differ-
ent material to handle sulfur dioxide, but they may be used
for chlorine also. The reverse is not true. Chlorinator control
valve diaphragms cannot be used for sulfur dioxide.
2. Chlorinators used as sulfonators cannot deliver the full
rated capacity of sulfur dioxide. For example, a chlorinator
rated to deliver 2000 pounds (909 kg) of chlorine per day
can only deliver approximately 1900 pounds (864 kg) of
sulfur dioxide per day. A chlorinator rated at 10,000 pounds
(4545 kg) of chlorine per day can deliver only 8,000 pounds
(3636 kg) of sulfur dioxide per day.
3. Sulfur dioxide gas pressures from sulfur dioxide containers
are lower than chlorine gas pressures at the same tempera-
ture. Sulfur dioxide does not vaporize at the same rate as
chlorine at the same temperature. Therefore, sulfur dioxide
containers are occasionally padded on the gas side with
nitrogen to force liquid sulfur dioxide from a container to the
evaporator. Consequently reliquefaction sometimes is a
problem in the supply lines between the evaporator and the
sulfonator.
For additional information on normal and abnormal opera-
tion of a sulfonator, see Section 10.26, "Normal and Abnormal
Operation of Chlorinators."
10.876 Operational Strategy
For information on the operational strategy for sulfonators,
refer to the section on chlorinators, Section 10.28, "Opera-
tional Strategy."
10.877 Troubleshooting Sulfonation System
Operating Symptom Probable Cause
Residual chlorine at outfall Improper mixing
Broken diffuser
Feed rate too low
Increased plant inflow
Chlorine demand increase
Remedy
Check for stratification of S02
Repair diffuser
Increase feed rate
Increase S02 feed rate
Increase S02 feed rate or decrease rate
or decrease chlorine feed rate if appro-
priate
-------
Disinfection 387
10.878 Sulfonation System Shutdown Procedures
Sulfonator system
1. Shut off the sulfur dioxide supply. If the down time is for a
brief period, the supply can be shut off at the valve near the
sulfonator. If the down time is for a day or more, it is better
to shut the supply valve at the source. This allows all the
sulfur dioxide to be removed from the system.
2. If the equipment is to be dismantled, wait until the sulfur
dioxide supply pressure gage reads zero. Then, remove the
flexible connection at the source while still running the
equipment. Attach the dry air to this connection. This will
insure that all traces of sulfur dioxide are evacuated.
3. After you are sure that all traces of sulfur dioxide are gone,
the injector may be turned off. This will secure the installa-
tion. The dry air supply also should be turned off at this
time.
4. Secure the open end by putting a plug on the flexible con-
nection end. This will prevent moisture from entering the
piping.
5. Begin repairs.
Evaporator
If the system is to be shut down for an extended period, it is a
good idea to secure the evaporator. In order to do this, drain
the evaporator and flush the system with cold water to remove
any foreign material. Never leave any sulfur dioxide trapped in
the equipment, especially between valves.
10.88 Maintenance of the Sulfur Dioxide Systems
10.880 Supply Area
1. The area should be kept clean and free of unused objects.
2. All lifting devices such as hand trucks and hoists should be
properly maintained. A maintenance program should be es-
tablished.
3. Ventilation system should be periodically inspected for
proper operation. Be sure that the fan is running when the
switch is in the "ON" position.
4. A record should be kept of all maintenance and repairs.
10.881 Piping
1. Inspect piping periodically, and, if any discoloration ap-
pears, the piping should be replaced and tested. Repair any
leaks discovered during inspection.
2. All joints should be tested periodically.
3. All fittings, when taken apart, should be checked for wear.
Those that are worn must be changed. Proper gaskets
should be available for use. Use new gaskets.
4. Whenever joints are opened, they should be plugged im-
mediately. This should be done to prevent moisture from
getting into the system and causing serious damage.
5. The flexible connection should be properly stored and dried
before each use. Change the flexible connection periodi-
cally and throw away the old one.
6. A record should be kept of all maintenance and repairs.
10.882 Evaporator
1. The evaporator should be cleaned every six months. If the
supply of sulfur dioxide is dirty, it should be done more
frequently.
2. After the evaporator has been cleaned in place for approx-
imately 10 to 12 cleanings, it should be completely taken
apart and cleaned. This should be done every five years on
a mandatory basis regardless of the cleaning schedule.
3. The manufacturer's cleaning procedure should be followed.
4. New gaskets should be used.
5. A record of maintenance and repairs should be kept.
NEVER USE OLD, WORN PARTS.
10.883 Sulfonators
1. Sulfonators should be cleaned every year, or more fre-
quently if necessary.
2. Manufacturer's cleaning procedure should be followed.
3. Never use old, worn parts.
4. A record should be kept of ail maintenance and repairs.
QUESTIONS
Write your answers in a notebook and then compare your
answers with those on page 392.
10.8P List the gages that should be checked routinely for
proper operation of an evaporator.
10.8Q What are the major differences between sulfonation
and chlorination procedures and equipment?
10.8R What areas of the sulfur dioxide system should be
included in the maintenance program?
10.9 ADDITIONAL READING
1. MOP 11, Chapter 16, "Disinfection" and Chapter 27, "Odor
Control.*"
2. NEW YORK MANUAL, Chapter 7, "Chlorination."
3. TEXAS MANUAL, Chapter 21, "Chlorination."
4. CHLORINE MANUAL (4th Edition), The Chlorine Institute,
Inc., 342 Madison Avenue, New York, New York 10017.
Price, $3.00.
5. SAFETY IN WASTEWATER WORKS, MOP No. 1, Water
Pollution Control Federation, 2626 Pennsylvania Avenue,
N.W., Washington, D.C. 20037. Price to WPCF members,
$1.00; others $2.00.
6. BASIC GAS CHLORINATION WORKSHOP, Ontario Water
Resources Committee (now Ministry of the Environment of
Canada), Parts I, II, III and IV in JAWWA, Vol. 64, May,
June, August, and October, 1972 or Manual may be ob-
tained from Ontario Ministry of Government Services, Pub-
lications Centre, 387 MacDonald Block, Toronto, Ontario
M7A 1N8 CANADA. Price $2.00.
7. CHLORINE - SAFE HANDLING, PPG Industries, Inc.,
Chemical Division, One Gateway Center, Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania 15222.
-------
388 Treatment Plants
8. STANDARD METHODS FOR THE EXAMINATION OF
WATER AND WASTEWATER, produced by APHA, AWWA,
and WPCF, Water Pollution Control Federation, 2626
Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20037.
Price $28.00 to members, prepaid only; otherwise $35.00.
Indicate your member association when ordering.
* Depends on edition.
Films on chlorine safety also are available from the Chlorine
Institute and PPG Industries, Inc.
10.10 METRIC CALCULATIONS
This section contains the solutions to all problems in this
chapter using metric calculations.
10.100 Conversion Factors
lb/day x 0.454 = kg/day
kg/day x 2.205 = lb/day
MGD x 3785 = cu m/day
cu m/day x 0.000264 = MGD
1000 L = 1 cu m
10.101 Problem Solutions
1. A chlorinator is set to feed 25 kilograms of chlorine per 24
hours; the wastewater flow is at a rate of 3200 cu m/day,
and the chlorine as measured by the chlorine residual test
after 30 minutes of contact time is 0.5 mgIL. Find the
chlorine dosage and chlorine demand in mg/L.
Known
Unknown
Chlorine Feed, kg/day = 25 kg/day 1. Chlorine Dose, mg/L
Flow, cu m/day = 3200 cu m/day 2. Chlorine Demand, mg/L
Chlorine Residual, mg/L = 0.5 mg/L
1. Calculate the chlorine dose in mg/L
Chlorine Feed _ Chlorine Feed, kg/day x 1000 gm/kg x 1000 mg/gm
or Dose, mg/L ~ ~ tttt
Flow, cu m/day x 1000 cu m
= 25 kg/day x 1000 gm/kg x 1000 mg/gm
3200 cu m/day x 1000 1/cu m
= 7.8 mg/L
2. Determine the chlorine demand in mg/L.
Demand mg/L = chlo"ne Dose, mg/L - Chlorine Residual, mg/L
= 7.8 mg/L - 0.5 mg/L
= 7.3 mg/L
2. Calculate the chlorinator setting (kg per 24 hours) to treat a
waste with a chlorine demand of 10 mg/L, when a chlorine
residual of 1 mg/L is desired if the flow is 2500 cu m per
day.
Known
Unknown
Chlorine Demand, mg/L = 10 mg/L Chlorinator Setting,
Chlorine Residual, mg/L = 1 mg/L kg/24 hr
Flow, cu m/day - 2500 cu m/day
Calculate the chlorinator setting in kg per 24 hours.
Chlorine Dose, mg/L = Chlorine + Chlorine
Demand, mg/L Residual, mg/L
= 10 mg/L + 1 mg/L
= 11 mg/L
Chlorinator Chlorine P| cum 1000 L 1 kg
Setting, kg/day Dose, mg/L ow' . x x , ~
a * ' s day cum 1,000,000 mg
11 m9 . 2500 curn x 1000 L
1 kg
L day
• 27.5 kg/day
¦ 27.5 kg/24 hours
cu m 1,000,000 mg
3. A plant with a flow of 8000 cu m per day has an effluent
chlorine residual of 4.5 mg/L. Sulfur dioxide should be
applied at 3.0 mg/L more than the chlorine residual. Deter-
mine the sulfonator feed rate in kilograms of sulfur dioxide
per day.
Known
Flow, cu m/day
Effl. CI. Res., mg/L
SO2 Dose, mg/L
Unknown
= 8000 cu m/day Sulfonator Feed Rate
= 4.5 mg/L in kilograms SO, per
= CI. Res. + 3.0 day
Determine sulfonator feed rate in kilograms of S02 per day.
1000 l x 1 kg
day
Feed
Rate,
kg/day
Flow,-C-U m x Dose,™?
1 cu m 1,000,000 mg
= 8000 x (4.5 "'a +3.0 '"a) x
day L L 1 cu m 1,000,000 mg
= 60 kg/day
END OF LESSON 5 OF 5 LESSONS
ON
DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
Please answer the discussion and review questions before
continuing.
-------
Disinfection 389
DISCUSSION AND REVIEW QUESTIONS
Chapter 10. DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
(Lesson 5 of 5 Lessons)
Write the answers to these questions in your notebook be-
fore continuing. The problem numbering continues from Les-
son 4.
28. Where is the typical application point for sulfur dioxide to
dechlorinate a plant effluent?
29. What should you do when you smell or discover a sulfur
dioxide leak?
30. Why should flexible connections be used between a rail-
road tank car containing sulfur dioxide and the unloading
structure?
31. What are some of the probable causes of a chlorine re-
sidual in the outfall of a plant with a dechlorination sys-
tem?
SUGGESTED ANSWERS
Chapter 10. DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
Answers to questions on page 331.
10.0A The purpose of disinfection is to destroy pathogenic
organisms. This is important to prevent the spread of
waterborne diseases.
10.0B Pathogenic bacteria are destroyed or removed from
water by (1) physical removal through sedimentation
or filtration, (2) natural die-away in an unfavorable en-
vironment by storage and (3) destruction through
chemical treatment.
10.0C Chlorine is used for disinfection because it meets the
general requirements of disinfection so well, and be-
cause it has been found to be the most economically
useful and available chemical for disinfection.
10.0D Sterilization of wastes is impractical and unnecessary
and may be detrimental to other treatment processes
that are dependent on the activity of nonpathogenic
saprophytes.
Answers to questions on page 335.
10.0E Chlorine reacts with organic matter to form chloror-
ganic compounds, and with nitrogenous compounds
to form chloramines.
10.0F To produce an effective disinfecting action, sufficient
chlorine must be added after the chlorine demand is
satisfied to produce a chlorine residual likely to persist
through the contact period.
10.0G Chlorine = Chlorine - Chlorine
Demand Dose Residual
10.OH Chlorine = Chlorine + Chlorine
Dose Demand Residual
10.01 Chlorine
Dose, mgIL
Chlorine
Demand,
mg//.
70 lb/day
= 7.0
lb
(1.2 MG/day) (8.34 Ib/G)
= 7.0 mgIL
= Chlorine Dose - Chlorine Residual
= 7.0 mgIL - 0.4 mgIL
= 6.6 mgIL
M lb
Answers to questions on page 335.
10.0J The objective of disinfection is the destruction of
pathogenic bacteria, and the ultimate measure of the
effectiveness is the bacteriological result.
10.0K The ultimate measure of effectiveness is the bac-
teriological result. The residual chlorine that yields
satisfactory bacteriological results in a particular plant
must be determined and used as a control in that
plant.
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN LESSON 1
Answers to questions on page 338.
10.1 A The purpose of up-sewer chlorination is to control
odors and septicity, prevent deterioration of struc-
tures, and decrease BOD load.
10.1B Chlorine should be applied in sewers where odor and
H2S control is necessary. These locations may be at
several points in the main intercepting sewer or at the
upper ends of feeder lines.
10.1C Prechlorination provides partial disinfection and odor
control.
10.1D Plant chlorination provides control of odors, corrosion,
sludge bulking, digester foaming, filter ponding, filter
flies, or sludge thickening. Be careful that chlorination
does not interfere with biological treatment processes.
10.1 E Postchlorination is employed primarily for disinfection.
Answers to questions on page 339.
10.2A Chlorine gas feed can be controlled by manual, start-
stop, step-rate, timed program, flow proportional,
chlorine residual, and compound loop controls.
10.2B Control of chlorine dosage depends on the bacterial
REDUCTION desired.
10.2C "Amperometric titration" is a means of measuring
concentrations of substances in water, such as the
chlorine residual.
-------
390 Treatment Plants
Answers to questions on page 341.
10.2D Feed in pounds per day can be calculated from the
chlorine requirement and the rate of flow by the use of
a chlorination control nomogram.
10.2E (1) 4.2 lbs per 24 hrs
(2) 27 lbs per 24 hrs
(3) 1250 lbs per 24 hrs
10.2F Large plants: at least every hour
Medium-sized plants: every 2 to 4 hours
Small plants: every 8 hours
In small plants chlorine costs are relatively low in
comparison to labor costs necessary for frequent ad-
justment.
10.2G Find chlorine dosage in pounds per day.
Chlorine = Chlorine x F!ow MGD x 8 34 ibs/gal
Dosage, Dose, mgIL
lbs/day = 12 mg/L x 0 55 MGD x 8 34 |bs/ga|
= 55 lbs/day
HTH Feed
Rate,
lbs/day
Chlorine Required, lbs/day
Portion of Chlorine in pounds of HTH
55 lbs/day
0.65
85 lbs/day
Answers to questions on page 342.
10.2H Little mixing of chlorine solution with wastewater oc-
curs in chlorine contact basins because of the low-flow
velocities in a basin.
10.2I Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or black polyethylene flexible
tubing. Rubber-lined steel pipe has been used, but
rubber hose is rarely used today.
Answers to questions on page 345.
10.2J Before attempting to start any chlorination system,
read the plant Operation and Maintenance Manual
and the manufacturer's literature to become familiar
with the equipment. Review the plans or drawings of
the facility. Determine what equipment, pipelines,
pumps, tanks and valves are to be placed into service
or are in service. The current status of the entire sys-
tem must be known before starting or stopping any
portion of the system.
10.2K Inspect the chlorination system for leaks by placing an
ammonia-soaked rag near each joint and valve. A
white cloud or vapor will reveal a chlorine leak.
Answers to questions on page 348.
10.2L Normal operation of a chlorinator includes daily in-
spection of container storage area, evaporators, and
chlorinators, including injectors.
10.2M Evaporators are used to convert liquid chlorine to
gaseous chlorine for use by gas chlorinators.
10.2N Abnormal conditions that could be encountered when
operating an evaporator include, (1) too low a water
level, (2) low water temperatures, and (3) no chlorine
gas flow to chlorinator.
10.20 The chlorine residual analyzer can be tested by
measuring the chlorine residual and comparing this
result with actual residual indicated by analyzer.
10.2P Possible chlorinator abnormal conditions include (1)
chlorine leaks, (2) chlorine gas pressure too low, (3)
injector vacuum too low, and (4) chlorine residual low.
Answers to questions on page 353.
10.2Q Perform the following steps for the short-term shut-
down of a chlorinator:
1. Close chorine-container gas outlet valve,
2. Allow chlorine gas to completely evacuate the sys-
tem through the injector, and
3. Close chlorinator gas discharge valve.
10.2R Two areas that could hinder an operator's ability to
meet NPDES coliform permit requirements when the
plant is equipped with standby or backup capabilities
are (1) running out of chlorine, and (2) failure of au-
tomatic control equipment.
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN LESSON 2
Answers to questions on page 354.
10.3A Chlorine gas is extremely toxic and corrosive in moist
atmospheres.
10.3B A properly fitting self-contained air or oxygen supply
type of breathing apparatus, pressure demand, or re-
breather kits are recommended when repairing a
chlorine leak.
10.3C First aid measures depend on the severity of the con-
tact. Remove the victim from the gas area and keep
the victim warm and quiet. Call a doctor and fire de-
partment immediately. Keep the patient breathing.
Answers to questions on page 362.
10.4A Chlorine may be delivered to a plant in 100- or 150-
pound cylinders, ton containers, or tank cars.
10.4B Fusible plugs are provided as a safety device to pre-
vent the building up of excessive pressures and the
possibility of rupture due to a fire or high surrounding
temperatures.
Answers to questions on page 365.
10.4C To look for a chlorine leak, wear a self-contained
breathing apparatus to enter the area if the leak is
severe. A rag or paint brush dipped in a strong solu-
tion of ammonia water and moved around the area will
locate the leak if the room is not full of chlorine gas.
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN LESSON 3
Answers to questions on page 371.
10.5A Chlorine is normally delivered (fed) to the point of ap-
plication as a solution feed (under-vacuum); however
in some cases it is fed as a direct feed (under pres-
sure).
10.5B Due to the hazards of safely handling sodium chlorite,
chlorine dioxide has not been widely used to treat
wastewater.
Answers to questions on page 373.
10.5C Chlorinators should be in a separate room because
chlorine gas leaks can damage equipment and are
hazardous to personnel.
10.5D Room temperature is important for proper chlorinator
operation to prevent clogging, chlorine ice formation,
and condensation in lines and chlorinator.
-------
Disinfection 391
10.5E Not more than one pound of chlorine per day per °F
(0.8 kg/°C) ambient temperature should be drawn from
a chlorine cylinder because of the danger of freezing
and slowing up of chlorine flow.
10.5F Adequate ventilation is important in a chlorinator room
to remove any leaking chlorine gas.
10.5G Chlorinator rooms can be ventilated using forced venti-
lation with the outlet near the floor because chlorine is
heavier than air.
10.5H Chlorination rates can be checked by use of scales
and recorders to measure weight loss.
10.51 Disinfection by chlorination must be continuous for
the protection of downstream water users.
10.5J Continuous chlorination can be achieved by the use of
a cylinder feed manifold so cylinders can be removed
without interrupting feed of gas and also through pro-
vision of duplicate units or emergency hypo-
chlorinators.
Answers to questions on page 374.
10.5K The best material for conducting chlorine gas or liquid
is seamless carbon steel (Schedule 80).
10.5L Plant effluent is used frequently as the chlorinator in-
jector water supply.
Answers to questions on page 375.
10.6A Hydrogen sulfide odors can be controlled through
chlorination by the reaction with sulfide and the delay
of decomposition and stabilization. Sulfide should be
controlled because it smells like rotten eggs, is a
source of corrosion, can paralyze your respiratory
tract, and can form explosive mixtures with air.
10.6B Sulfuric acid damage to structures can be minimized
by chlorination or oxygenation which destroys hydro-
gen sulfide. Hydrogen sulfide produces sulfuric acid
which damages sewer systems and structures.
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN LESSON 4
Answers to questions on page 371.
10.8A The effluents from some treatment plants are de-
chlorinated to protect fish and other aquatic organisms
from toxic chlorine residuals.
10.8B Dechlorination processes include:
1. Long detention periods,
2. Aeration,
3. Sunlight,
4. Activated carbon, and
5. Chemical reactions, including sulfur dioxide.
10.8C When sulfur dioxide gas comes in contact with mois-
ture, very corrosive sulfuric acid (H2S04) is formed.
10.8D No, sulfuric acid (H2S04) and hydrochloric acid (HCI)
will not lower the pH of the effluent significantly be-
cause of the small amount of acid produced.
Answers to questions on page 377.
10.8E When you inhale sulfur dioxide gas, sulfurous acid will
form on the moist mucous membranes in your body
and cause severe irritation or more serious harm. Ex-
posure to high doses of sulfur dioxide can cause
death.
10.8F A sulfur dioxide leak can be detected by soaking a
cloth with ammonia solution and holding the cloth near
suspected areas. A dense white fume will form near
the leak. An aspirator or squeeze bottle may be used if
the leak is small.
Answers to questions on page 380.
10.8G The piping system carrying sulfur dioxide gas should
be heated to room temperature and kept at 80 to 90°F
(27 to 32°C) to prevent reliquefaction (gas changing
back to liquid again).
10.8H Use a safety chain or clamp to prevent either empty or
full cylinders from falling over or being knocked over.
Answers to questions on page 380.
10.81 The purpose of the sulfur dioxide evaporator is to heat
liquid sulfur dioxide until it is converted to a gas.
10.8J At the injector, the sulfur dioxide gas is dissolved in
water to form sulfurous acid. This sulfur dioxide solu-
tion flows to the point of application.
Answers to questions on page 381.
10.8K Control of the sulfur dioxide feed rate (dosage) to the
plant effluent to remove chlorine residual depends on:
1. Chlorine residual, mg/L,
2. Plant flow rate, MGD, and
3. Amount (if any) of chlorine to be remaining after
addition of sulfur dioxide.
10.8L Determine the sulfonator feed rate.
Known Unknown
.Flow, MGD = 1.5 MGD Sulfonator feed rate
Effl. CI. Res., mg/L = 3.5 mg/L in Pounds scVday
S02 Dose, mg/L = ci. Res., mg/i.
+ 3.0 mg/i.
Determine the feed rate.
Feed Rate, lbs/day = (Flow, MGD) (Dose, mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
= (1.5 MGD) (3.5 mgIL + 3.0 m/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
= 82 lbs/day or 180 kg/day
10.8M Residual sulfur dioxide is measured in the plant
effluent to be sure the sulfonator is not overdosing
and wasting sulfur dioxide.
-------
392 Treatment Plants
Answers to questions on page 386.
10.8N The probable cause of joints leaking sulfur dioxide gas
is a missing gasket.
10.80 Sulfur dioxide should never be trapped in a line be-
tween the evaporator and the sulfonator because heat
in the evaporator will expand the gas and the pressure
could reach dangerous levels.
Answers to questions on page 387.
10.8P Gages that should be checked routinely for proper op-
eration of an evaporator include (1) water level, (2)
gas temperature, (3) water temperature, (4) gas pres-
sure, and (5) cathodic protection.
10.8Q Major differences between sulfonation and chlorina-
tion procedures and equipment include (1) sulfonator
control valve diaphragms are made of different mate-
rial than chlorinators, (2) chlorinators used as sul-
fonators cannot deliver full rated capacity of sulfur
dioxide, and (3) sulfur dioxide gas pressures from sul-
fur dioxide containers are lower than chlorine gas
pressures at the same temperature.
10.8R Areas that should be included in the maintenance pro-
gram for the sulfure dioxide system include (1) supply
area, (2) piping, (3) evaporator, and (4) sulfonator.
END OF ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS IN LESSON 5
OBJECTIVE TEST
Chapter 10. DISINFECTION AND CHLORINATION
Please write your name and mark the correct answers on the
answer sheet as directed at the end of Chapter 1. There may
be more than one correct answer to each question.
1. Pathogenic bacteria can cause disease in humans.
V1. True
2. False
2. Chlorine is an irritant to breathing organs of the body.
^1. True
2. False
3. Chlorine is only applied at the treatment plant influent
(prechlorination) or at the effluent (postchlorination).
1. True
2. False
4. When chlorine combines with moisture, the resulting mix-
ture is corrosive.
^ 1. True
2. False
5. Leaking chlorine cylinders may be shipped if they are
properly tagged.
1. True
yj 2. False
6. Effluent from a wastewater treatment plant must be
sterilized in order to protect the downstream users of the
receiving waters.
1. True
si 2. False
7. Sulfur dioxide smells like chlorine.
1. True
¦4 2. False
8. You should never tamper with or apply heat to the fusible
plug of a chlorine container.
Vi. True
2. False
9. Postchlorination is generally more effective in a well-
clarified effluent than in a turbid one.
Vi. True
2. False
10. Hypochlorite compounds are available only in liquid form.
^1. True
2. False
11. Hydrogen sulfide is found in most collection systems.
V1, True
2. False
12. Chlorine is toxic.
Vl. True
2. False
13. Postchlorination is used to disinfect the effluent from a
wastewater treatment plant.
^1. True
2. False
14. Knowledge of first aid is required of a competent treatment
plant operator.
>*1. True
2. False
15. Never use soapy water to look for a sulfur dioxide leak.
True
^2. False
-------
Disinfection 393
16. To protect the health of downstream water users, treat-
ment plant effluents must be
1. Sterilized.
V 2. Disinfected.
17. An operator should never enter a room containing high
concentrations of chlorine gas without
^1. A self-contained air or oxygen supply.
v 2. Help standing by.
3. Notifying proper authorities.
"^4. Protective clothing.
18. Disease-producing bacteria are called
1. Coliform.
2. Facultative.
3. Parasitic.
^4. Pathogenic.
5. Saprophytes.
19. Reduction in the number of organisms in wastewater may
be accomplished by
1. Adding orthotolidine.
v 2. Postchlorination.
3. Prechlorination.
4. Providing chlorine contact time.
5. Sedimentation.
20. Chlorine may be applied for H2S control in the
1. Aeration tank.
^ 2. Collection lines.
3. Plant effluent.
^ 4. Plant headworks.
5. Trickling filter.
21. Chlorine cylinders
^ 1. Can be handled safely.
2. Can easily be lifted by one person.
^ 3. Contain a fusible metal safety plug.
4. Should be rolled horizontally.
5. Should be stored at temperatures above 50°F (10°C)
and kept away from steam pipes.
22. Chlorine should be applied continuously to
1. Keep the chlorine pipes from developing leaks.
2. Keep the chlorine supplier in business.
^ 3. Keep the plant effluent disinfected.
4. Keep the plant equipment from breaking down.
^ 5. Protect the downstream water users.
23. Field chlorination studies have shown that
1. Actual contact time in most chlorine chambers is the
same as the theoretical contact time.
2. Chlorine feed rates required to produce a desired disin-
fection level are constant from day to day.
3. Chlorine residuals can be increased without limit and
the coliform densities will always continue to be re-
duced with each increase in residual.
4. Constant vigilance is required to maintain a consis-
tently high degree of disinfection at most wastewater
treatment plants.
^ 5. Thorough mixing of chlorine solution with wastewater is
essential to achieve maximum efficiency of coliform kill
for a given chlorine dosage.
24. Chforinators should be located
V1. In a room that will not allow chlorine to leak into rooms
where operators work or where controls and equipment
are located.
V2. In a separate room.
V 3. In an adequately heated room.
/ 4. Near point of application.
5. Outdoors.
25. Hydrogen sulfide
1. Can form an explosive mixture with air.
*2. Can paralyze your respiratory system,
v 3. Causes odors.
^ 4. Is associated with corrosion.
5. Smells like chlorine.
26. Dechlorination of plant effluent may be achieved by
^1. Activated carbon.
V2. Aeration.
V3. Chemical reactions.
4. Flotation.
5. Sedimentation.
27. Liquid sulfur dioxide hazards include
1. An odor like chlorine.
> 2. Body tissues freeze when in contact with liquid sulfur
dioxide.
3. Containers can burst if the liquid is excessively heated.
4. Violent burning on contact with air.
v5. Violent chemical reactions result if water is sucked
back into sulfur dioxide in a container.
28. Parts of a sulfonation system include
"f 1. Evaporator.
^ 2. Injector.
3. Respirator.
^4. Rotameter.
v'5. Sulfonator.
29. If a sulfonator will not reach maximum output, probable
causes include
1. Chlorine residual too low.
V2. Faulty injector.
^3. Faulty sulfonator.
4. Restriction in supply line.
5. Temperature too high in room with sulfur dioxide con-
tainer.
30. What should be the approximate chlorine feed rate for a
flow of 2.0 MGD and a chlorine dosage of 12 mg/L?
y1. 200 lbs/24 hr
2. 100 lbs/24 hr
3. 24 lbs/24 hr
4. 12 lbs/24 hr
-------
394 Treatment Plants
Review Questions:
A rectangular sedimentation tank 10 feet deep, 30 feet wide,
and 120 feet long handles a flow of 3 MGD.
31. The detention time is
1. 1.5 hr.
2. 2.0 hr.
v/3. 2.15 hr.
4. 2.25 hr.
5. 2.5 hr.
•-D
3 , *£>
if$
32. The surface loading rate is approximately
1. 500 gpd/sq ft.
2. 600 gpd/sq ft.
3. 700 gpd/sq ft.
>tA. 800 gpd/sq ft.
5. 900 gpd/sq ft.
ID'K}C X\2 ~
END OF OBJECTIVE TEST
and
END OF VOLUME I
!
%
You may work the final exam and correct your own answers
if you wish.
-------
Disinfection 395
CONGRATULATIONS
You've worked hard and completed a very difficult program.
-------
FINAL EXAMINATION
AND
SUGGESTED ANSWERS
FOR
VOLUME I
-------
398 Treatment Plants
FINAL EXAMINATION
VOLUME I
This final examination was prepared TO HELP YOU review
the material in Volume I. The questions are divided into four
types:
1. True-false,
2. Multiple choice,
3. Problems, and
4. Short answer.
To work this examination:
1. Write the answer to each question in your notebook.
2. After you have worked a group of questions (you decide
how many), check your answers with the suggested an-
swers at the end of this exam, and
3. If you missed a question and don't understand why, reread
the material in the manual.
You may wish to use this examination for review purposes
when preparing for civil service and certification examinations.
Since you have already completed this course, you do not
have to send your answers to California State University, Sac-
ramento.
True-False
1. A treatment plant operator may work for an industry.
1. True
2. False
2. Every operator has a responsibility to insure that treatment
plants are a safe place to work and visit.
1. True
2. False
3. Floatable solids are easy to measure.
1. True
2. False
4. An industry discharging into municipal collection and
treatment systems must have an NPDES permit.
1. True
2. False
5. Always wash your hands thoroughly before eating or
smoking.
1. True
2. False
6. Electrical power must always be shut off before working
on equipment.
1. True
2. False
7. Barminutors and comminutors are installed for different
purposes.
1. True
2. False
8. The effluent from primary clarifiers is usually clearer than
effluent from secondary clarifiers.
1. True
2. False
9. To start a clarifier, fill the tank with water and turn on the
sludge collector mechanism.
1, True
2. False
10. In a large plant the number of secondary clarifiers on line
may change with increases and decreases in seasonal
flows or condition of the solids in the secondary system.
1. True
2. False
11. Secondary clarifiers allow for liquid-solids separation in
secondary biological treatment processes.
1. True
2. False
12. Primary clarifier effluent is the same as trickling filter in-
fluent in some treatment plants.
1. True
2. False
13. Rotating biological contactors treat wastewater by a pro-
cess similar to the trickling filter process.
1. True
2. False
14. Rotating biological contactors usually treat wastewater as
a single-stage process.
1. True
2. False
15. More food (waste) in the influent to an aeration tank will
require a decrease in the oxygen supply to the tank.
1. True
2. False
-------
Final Exam 399
16. Most package plants are of the extended aeration type of
activated sludge process.
1. True
2. False
17. Oxidation ditches are usually operated in the complete mix
mode.
1. True
2. False
18. In very cold climates the whole rotor assembly should be
left uncovered to reduce ice problems.
1. True
2. False
19. Some ponds have been designed to take advantage of
percolation and high evaporation rates so that there is no
discharge.
1. True
2. False
20. A waste treatment pond is a biological process.
1. True
2. False
Multiple Choice
1. Organic wastes are in the effluents from which of the fol-
lowing industries?
1. Dairy
2. Fruit packing
3. Gravel washing
4. Paper
5. Petroleum
2. Solids are commonly classified as
1. Inorganic and dissolved.
2. Inorganic and suspended.
3. Inorganic and organic.
4. Organic and dissolved.
5. Organic and suspended.
3. Hydrogen sulfide gas may
1. Cause odor problems.
2. Create a toxic atmosphere.
3. Damage concrete in plant.
4. Make wastes more difficult to treat.
5. Produce an explosive and flammable condition.
4. The purpose of primary sedimentation is to remove
1. Pathogenic bacteria.
2. Roots, rags, cans and large debris.
3. Sand and gravel.
4. Settleable and floatable materials.
5. Suspended and dissolved solids.
5. The main operational factors for a barminutor include
1. Amount of debris in wastewater.
2. Head loss through the unit.
3. Location of unit with respect to grit channel.
4. Number of units in service.
5. Removal of floatables.
6. When starting or placing a comminutor in service, which of
the following items would you perform?
1. Adjust cutter blades if necessary.
2. Check appearance and sound of comminutor.
3. Check for proper positioning of inlet and outlet gates.
4. Inspect for proper lubrication and oil leaks.
5. Look for frayed cables.
7. Toxic wastes entering a treatment plant may be detected
by observing the
1. Changes in color of incoming wastewater.
2. Movements of pointer on the toxic waste recorder.
3. Recordings of high or low influent pH.
4. Bulking of sludge in the clarifier.
5. Smell of odors.
8. Which of the following factors influence the settleability of
solids in a clarifier?
1. Detention time
2. Flow velocity and/or turbulence
3. Movement of sludge scrapers
4. Short-circuiting
5. Temperature
9. Suspended solids in the effluent from a trickling filter plant
may be caused by
1. Flotation of solids in the primary clarifier.
2. Heavy sloughing from the filters.
3. Precipitation of solids in the secondary clarifier.
4. Shock loading oh the trickling filter.
5. Short-circuiting through the secondary clarifier.
10. When operating a trickling filter, the operator should
1. Adjust the process to obtain the best possible results
for the least cost.
2. Bubble oxygen up through the filter.
3. Maintain ae/obic conditions in the filter.
4. Rotate the distributor as fast as possible to better spray
settled wastewater over the media.
5. Use the lowest recirculation rates that will yield good
results to conserve power.
11. Which of the fallowing items should be checked before
starting a rotating biological contactor process?
1. Biomass
2. Clearances
3. Lubrication
4. Safety
5. Tightness
12. What could be the cause of the slime on the media of a
rotating biological contactor appearing shaggy with a
brown-to-gray color?
1. BOD overloading
2. Fluctuating influent flows
3. High pH values
4. Proper operation
5. Toxic substances in influent
13. An operator must be aware of which of the following safety
hazards when working around rotating biological contac-
tors?
1. Infections in cuts or open wounds.
2. Loose electrical connections and bare wires.
3. Slippery surfaces caused by water, oil, or grease.
4. Slow-moving parts or equipment.
5. Waterborne diseases.
-------
400 Treatment Plants
14. How is excess activated sludge wasted and disposed of
from package plants?
1. Aerated in a holding tank and then disposed of in an
approved sanitary landfill.
2. At a nearby treatment plant.
3. By incineration.
4. Removal by a septic tank pumper.
5. Treated by gravity thickening and anaerobic digestion.
15. Maintenance of equipment in package operation plants
includes
1. Adjusting aeration equipment.
2. Changing oil in speed reducer.
3. Inspecting air-lift pump.
4. Regulating scum skimmer.
5. Washing tank walls and channels.
16. Which of the following factors could cause a demand for
more oxygen (increase in aeration rates) in an aeration
tank?
1. Increase in food (BOD) in aeration tank influent.
2. Increase in inert or inorganic wastes.
3. Increase in microorganisms.
4. Increase in pH.
5. Increase in toxic substances.
17. Pond performance depends on
1. Lack of short-circuiting.
2. pH.
3. Sunlight.
4. Surface area.
5. Type and quantity of algae.
18. An increase in plant effluent coliform level could be
caused by
1. Increase in effluent BOD.
2. Low chlorine residual.
3. Mixing problems.
4. Short-circuiting in contact chamber.
5. Solids accumulation in contact chamber.
19. Low sulfonator injector vacuum reading could be caused
by
1. High back pressure.
2. Low flow of injector water.
3. Missing gasket.
4. Restricted injector flow.
5. Wrong orifice.
20. Chlorine may be applied for hydrogen sulfide control in the
1. Aeration tank.
2. Collection lines.
3. Plant effluent.
4. Plant headworks.
5. Trickling filter.
Short Answer
1. Define the following terms:
a. Aerobic bacteria
b. Biochemical oxygen demand
c. Coliform bacteria
d. Septic
2. Why should digester gas and air not be allowed to mix?
3. How can explosive conditions develop around bar screens
and racks?
4. How can an operator regulate the flow velocity through a
grit channel?
5. What is the purpose of a cyclone grit separator?
6. Define alkalinity.
7. List five water quality indicators used to measure clarifier
efficiencies.
8. What areas should be studied when reviewing plans and
specifications for a treatment plant?
9. What items should be checked daily when operating a
trickling filter?
10. How would you attempt to avoid or correct a ponding prob-
lem on a trickling filter?
11. Define the following terms:
a. Grab sample, and
b. Inhibitory substances.
12. How can the development of biological slimes be encour-
aged when starting a new rotating biological contactor?
13. How is the activated sludge process controlled?
14. What items should the operator control to maintain the
proper environment in an oxidation ditch?
15. List five advantages of ponds.
16. Why are weeds objectionable in and around ponds?
17. Why should the inlet to a pond be submerged?
18. Define the term "air gap."
19. How is the chlorine demand determined?
20. Where is chlorine usually applied for disinfection pur-
poses?
Problems
1. Eight cubic feet of screenings were removed by a plant
that treats a flow of 2 MGD during a 24-hour period. How
many cubic feet of screenings were removed per MG of
flow?
2. Estimate the flow velocity in a grit channel if a stick travels
36 feet in 30 seconds.
3. A circular clarifier with a diameter of 50 feet and a depth of
10 feet treats a flow of 2 MGD. Determine:
a. Detention time, hours, and
b. Surface loading, gpd/sq ft.
4. A trickling filter 80 feet in diameter and 4 feet deep treats a
flow of 2.4 MGD with a BOD of 120 mgIL. Determine:
a. Hydraulic loading, gpd/sq ft, and
b. Organic loading, lbs BOD/day/1000 cu ft
-------
Final Exam 401
5. A rotating biological contactor treats a flow of 2 MGD with
a soluble BOD of 80 mg/L. The media surface area is
500,000 sq ft. Determine:
a. Hydraulic loading, gpd/sq ft, and
b. Organic loading, lbs BOD/day/1000 sq ft.
6. An oxidation ditch has a volume of 20,000 cubic feet. The
inflow is 0.2 MGD with a BOD of 200 mgIL and suspended
solids of 210 mgIL. The mixed liquor suspended solids
concentration is 3,500 mg/L with a volatile matter content
of 70 percent. Determine the BOD loading in pounds per
day per 1000 cubic feet, F/M ratio, sludge age and deten-
tion time.
7. A waste treatment pond treats a flow of 0.1 MGD with a
BOD of 180 mgIL. The area of the pond is 3 acres. What is
the organic loading on the pond?
8. Calculate the setting on a chlorinator (pounds of chlorine
per 24 hours) that treats a flow of 2 MGD. The chlorine
demand is 9 mg/L and the desired residual is 1 mg/L.
SUGGESTED ANSWERS FOR FINAL
EXAMINATION
VOLUME I
T rue-False
1. True Treatment plant operators work for industry, sani-
tation districts and cities.
2. True Everyone has a responsibility to be sure that
treatment plants are a safe place to work and visit.
3. False Floatable solids are very difficult to measure.
4. False An industry discharging into municipal collection
and treatment systems need not obtain an NPDES
permit but must meet certain specified pretreat-
ment standards.
5. True Always wash your hands thoroughly before eating
or smoking.
6. True Electrical power must always be shut off before
working on equipment.
7. False Barminutors and comminutors are installed for the
SAME purpose, to shred solids and leave them in
wastewater.
8. False The effluent from secondary clarifiers is usually
clearer than effluent from primary clarifiers.
9. False To start a clarifier make sure everything is OK,
including the collector mechanism, and then fill the
tank with water.
10. True In a large plant the number of secondary clarifiers
on line should change with changes in flows or the
condition of the solids.
11. True Secondary clarifiers allow for liquid-solids separa-
tion in secondary biological treatment processes.
12. True Primary clarifier effluent and trickling filter influent
can be the same in some plants.
13. True Rotating biological contactors treat wastewater by
a process similar to the trickling filter process.
14. False The rotating biological contactor process is usually
divided into four stages.
15. False More food (waste) in the influent to an aeration
tank will require an increase in the oxygen supply
to the tank.
16. True Most package plants are of the extended aeration
type of activated sludge process.
17. False Oxidation ditches are usually operated in the ex-
tended aeration mode.
18. False The rotor assembly should be covered in very cold
climates to reduce ice problems.
19. True Some ponds have been designed so that there is
no discharge.
20. True A waste treatment pond is a biological process.
Multiple Choice
1. 1,2,4,5 Gravel washing produces inorganic wastes
while the other four industries produce
mainly organic wastes.
2. 3 Solids may be classified as either (1) inor-
ganic and organic, or (2) dissolved and sus-
pended.
3. 1,2, 3, 4, 5 Hydrogen sulfide gas is very dangerous and
could cause all of the problems listed.
4. 4 The purpose of primary sedimentation is to
remove settleable and floatable materials.
5. 1, 2, 4 Location of unit and removal of floatables
are important, but not main operational fac-
tors.
6. 1, 2, 3, 4 Comminutors do not have cables, they are
found on barminutors.
7. 1, 3, 4, 5 Toxic waste recorders are not available
today because of the differences in the
many toxic wastes that might enter a plant.
8. 1, 2, 4, 5 Movement of sludge scrapers does not in-
fluence settleability of solids.
9. 2, 4, 5 Solids in the effluent from a trickling filter
plant may be caused by sloughing, shock
loads, and short-circuiting.
-------
402 Treatment Plants
10. 1, 3, 5
11. 2, 3, 4, 5
12. 4
13. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
14. 1, 2, 4
15. 1, 3, 4, 5
16. 1, 3
17. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
18. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
19. 1, 2, 4
20. 2, 4
Short Answer
1. Define the following terms:
a. Aerobic bacteria. Bacteria which will live and repro-
duce only in an environment containing oxygen which
is available for their respiration (breathing), such as
atmospheric oxygen or oxygen dissolved in water.
b. Biochemical oxygen demand. The rate at which mi-
croorganisms use oxygen in water or wastewater
while stabilizing decomposable organic matter under
aerobic conditions.
c. Coliform bacteria. The presence of coliform-group
bacteria is an indication of possible pathogenic bacte-
rial contamination.
d. Septic. This condition is produced by anaerobic bac-
teria. If severe, the wastewater turns black, gives off
foul odors, contains little or no dissolved oxygen and
creates a heavy oxygen demand.
2. Do not allow digester gas and air to mix because this
mixture is extremely explosive.
3. Explosive conditions can develop around bar screens and
racks because of the possibility of explosive materials and
gases from industrial discharges and the accumulation of
hydrogen sulfide.
4. Flow velocities in grit channels may be regulated by the
number of units in service and by using bricks or cinder
blocks to change the cross-sectional shape or area.
5. The purpose of a cyclone grit separator is to separate grit
from wastewater and organic material.
6. Alkalinity is the capacity of water or wastewater to neu-
tralize acids.
7. Clarifier efficiencies are measured by the settleable solids,
suspended solids, total solids, biochemical oxygen de-
mand and coliform bacteria tests.
8. When reviewing plans and specifications for a treatment
plant, carefully study those areas influencing how the plant
will be operated and maintained. Also look carefully for
potential safety hazards.
9. Items that should be checked daily when operating a trick-
ling filter include:
1. Any indication of ponding,
2. Filter flies,
3. Odors,
4. Plugged orifices,
5. Roughness or vibration of the distributor arms, and
6. Leakage past the seal.
10. Ponding problems on trickling filters may be avoided or
corrected by
1. Maintaining the proper organic and hydraulic loadings,
2. Being sure the media is of proper size, and
3. Preventing accumulation of fibers or trash in the filter
voids.
11. a. Grab Sample. A single sample of wastewater taken at
neither a set time nor flow.
b. Inhibitory Substances. Materials that kill or restrict the
ability of organisms to treat wastes.
12. Development of biological slimes can be encouraged by
regulating the flow rate and strength of the wastewater
applied to nearly constant levels by the use of recirculation
if available. Maintaining building temperatures at 65°F
(18°C) or higher will help. The best rotating speed is one
which will shear off growth at a rate which will provide a
constant "hungry and reproductive" film of mi-
croorganisms exposed to the wastewater being treated.
13. Control of the activated sludge process consists of main-
taining the proper solids (floe mass) concentration in the
aerator for the waste (food) inflow by adjusting the waste
sludge pumping rate and regulating the oxygen supply to
maintain a satisfactory level of dissolved oxygen in the
process.
14. To maintain the proper environment in an oxidation ditch,
the operator should
1. Observe the clearness of the effluent and the color and
characteristics of the floe in the ditch,
2. Control oxidation ditch solids by regulating the return
sludge rate and waste sludge rate,
3. Prevent toxic substances from reaching the ditch, and
4. Maintain the proper level of dissolved oxygen.
For good trickling filter operation, maintain
aerobic conditions in the filter and adjust the
process and recirculation rates to produce
good results at the least cost.
Check all items but 1, biomass, which won't
develop until after the rotating biological
contactor has been in operation.
Proper operation is the cause of the slime
appearing shaggy with a brown-to-gray
color.
All of the items listed are potential safety
hazards around rotating biological contac-
tors.
Incineration and gravity thickening usually
are not used to treat waste activated sludge
from package plants.
All items are part of equipment maintenance
in a package aeration plant except that
speed reducers are used with rotating
biological contactors.
An increase in food and an increase in mi-
croorganisms will cause a demand for more
oxygen.
Pond performance depends on all five fac-
tors.
An increase in plant effluent coliform level
could be caused by any or all of the five
factors listed.
Injector vacuum reading low could be
caused by high back pressure, low flow or
restricted injector flow.
Chlorine may be applied for hydrogen sul-
fide control in the collection lines and plant
head works.
-------
Final Exam 403
15. Five advantages of ponds include:
1. Expensive equipment not required,
2. Highly trained operators not essential,
3. Economical to construct,
4. Little energy consumed, and
5. No sludge handling and disposal problems.
16. Weeds are objectionable in and around ponds because
they provide a shelter for the breeding of mosquitoes and
scum accumulation and also hinder pond circulation.
17. The inlet to a pond should be submerged to distribute the
heat of the influent water as much as possible and to
minimize the occurrence of floating material.
18. Air Gap. An open vertical drop, or vertical empty space,
between a drinking (potable) water supply and the point of
use in a wastewater treatment plant.
19. Chlorine Demand = Chlorine Dose - Chlorine Residual.
20. Chlorine is usually applied after the other treatment pro-
cesses for disinfection purposes.
Problems
1.
Known
Screenings, cu ft
Flow, MGD
Time, hr
or
8 cu ft
2 MGD
24 hr
1 day
Unknown
Screenings, cu ft/MG
Calculate the screenings removed in cubic feet of
screenings per million gallons of flow.
Screenings,^ = Screenings, cu ft
MG Flow, MGD x Time, day
_ 8 cu ft
2 MG/day x 1 day
= 4 cu ft/MG
Unknown
= 36 ft Velocity, ft/sec
= 30 sec
Velocity, ft/sec
2. Known
Distance, ft.
Time, sec
Estimate the flow velocity in the grit channel.
Distance Traveled, ft
Time, sec
= 36 ft
30 sec
= 1.2 ft/sec
3. Known Unknown
Diameter, ft = 50 ft a. Detention time, hrs
Depth, ft = 10 ft b. Surface loading,
Flow, MGD = 2 MGD gpd/sq ft
a. Estimate the detention time in hours.
Detention
Time, hrs
Tank Vol, cu ft x 7.5 gal/cu ft x 24 hr/day
Flow, gal/day
(»r/4)(50 ft)2 (10 ft) x 7.5 gal/cu ft x 24 hr/day
2,000,000 gal/day
b. Calculate the surface loading in gallons per day per
surface square foot.
Flow, gpd
Surface Loading,
gpd/sq ft
Area, sq ft
2,000,000 gpd
(ir/4)(50 ft)2
1,020 gpd/sq ft
4. Known Unknown
Diameter, ft = 80 ft a. Hydraulic Loading,
Depth, ft = 4 ft gpd/sq ft
Flow, MGD = 2.4 MGD b. Organic Loading,
BOD, mgIL = 120 mg/L lbs BOD/day/100 cu ft
a. Calculate the hydraulic loading in gallons per day per
square foot of filter surface area.
Hydraulic Loading, _
gpd/sq ft
b.
Flow, gpd
Surface Area, sq ft
= 2,400,000 gpd
(u74)(80 ft)2
_ 2,400,000 gpd
5.027 sq ft
= 477 gpd/sq ft
Estimate the organic loading in pounds of BOD per day
per 1,000 cubic feet of media.
Organic
Loading,
lbs BOD/day
1000 cu ft
BOD, lbs/day
Volume of Media (In 1000 cu ft)
(Flow, MGD) (BOD, mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
(n74) (Diameter, ft)2 (Depth, ft)
(2.4 MGD) (120 mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
(tt/4) (80 ft)2 (4 ft)
2402 lbs BOD/day
20,106 cu ft
_ 2402 lbs BOD/day
20,106 (1000 cu ft)
= 120 lbs BOD/day/1000 cu ft
5.
Known
Flow, MGD = 2 MGD
Soluble BOD, mg/L «= 80 mg/L
Surface Area, sq ft = 500,000
sq ft
Unknown
Hydraulic Loading,
gpd/sq ft
Organic Loading,
lbs BOD/day/
1000 sq ft
a. Calculate the hydraulic loading in gallons per day per
square foot of media surface area.
Hydraulic Loading,
gpd/sq ft
= 1.8 hours
= Flow, gpd
Surface Area, sq ft
= 2,000,000 gpd
500,000 sq ft
= 4 gpd/sq ft
-------
Treatment Plants
b. Estimate the organic loading in pounds of BOD per
day per 1,000 square feet of media surface area.
Organic
Loading,
lbs BOD/day
1,000 sq ft
BOD, lbs/day
Surface Area (in 1000 sq ft)
= (Flow, MGD) (BOD, mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
Surface Area (in 1000 sq ft)
(2 MGD) (80 mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
500 (1000 sq ft)
= 2.7 lbs BOD/day/1000 sq ft
Known
Unknown
Ditch Volume, cu ft = 20,000 cu ft a. BOD Loading,
or
Flow, MGD
BOD, mg/L
SS, mg/L
MLSS, mg/L
VM, %
0.15 MG
0.2 MGD
200 mg/L
210 mg/L
3500 mg/L
70%
lbs/day/1000 cu ft
b. F/M Ratio
c. Sludge Age, days
d. Detention Time, hrs
a. Calculate the BOD loading in pounds of BOD per day
per 1000 cubic feet of ditch.
BOD Loading,
lbs BOD/day
1000 cu ft
BOD, lbs/day
Ditch Volume, 1000 cu ft
= (Flow, MGD) (BOD, mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
Volume (in 1000 cu ft)
= (0.2 MGD) (200 mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
20,000 cu ft
333.6 lbs BOD/day
20.0 (1000 cu ft)
= 16.7 lbs BOD/day/1000 cu ft
b. Determine the Food/Microorganism Ratio.
F _ BOD, lbs/day
lT MLVSS, lbs
(Flow, MGD) (BOD, mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
(Vol., MG) (MLSS, mg/L) (VM) (8.34 lbs/gal)
(0.2 MGD) (200 mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
(0.15 MG) (3500 mg/L) (0.70) (8.34 lbs/gal)
333.6 lbs BOD/day
~3065 lbs MLVSS
= 0.11 lbs BOD/day/lb MLVSS
c. Estimate the sludge age in days.
Sludge Age, _ Solids Under Aeration, lbs
days Solids Added, lbs/day
= (Vol., MG) (MLSS, mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
(Flow, MGD) (Infl. SS, mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
= (0.15 MG) (3500 mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
(0.2 MGD) ( 210 mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
= 4379 lbs
350 lbs/day
= 12.5 days
d. Calculate the detention time in hours.
Detention _ (Ditch Volume, MG) (24 hr/day)
Time, hours
Flow, MGD
= (0.15 MG) (24 hr/day)
0.2 MGD
= 18 hours
7.
Known
Flow, MGD
BOD, mg/L
Area, acres
= 0.1 MGD
= 180 mg/L
= 3 acres
Unknown
Organic Loading,
lbs BOD/day/ac
Calculate the organic (BOD) loading on the pond in pounds
per day per acre.
Organic Loading, _ (Flow, MGD) (BOD, mg/L), (8.34 lbs/gal)
lbs BOD/day/ac
acres
(0.1 MGD) (180 mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
3 acres
= 150 lbs BOD/day
3 acres
= 50 lbs BOD/day/ac
8.
Known
Unknown
Flow, MGD = 2 MGD Chlorinator Setting,
CI Demand, mg/L = 9 mg/L lbs/24 hours
CI Residual, mg/L = 1 mg/L
a. Estimate the chlorine dose in mg//_.
CI Dose, mg/L = CI Demand, mg/L + CI Residual, mg/L
= 9 mg/L + 1 mg/L
= 10 mg/L
b. Calculate the chlorinator setting in pounds of chlorine
per 24 hours.
S1bs/24 hr = (Fl0W' MG°) (Dose' m9^) <8-34 lbs/gal)
= (2 MGD) (10 mg/L) (8.34 lbs/gal)
= 167 lbs/day
or =170 lbs/24 hours
-------
GLOSSARY
A Summary of the Words Defined
in
OPERATION OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANTS
-------
406 Treatment Plants
Project Pronunciation Key
by Warren L. Prentice
The Project Pronunciation Key is designed to aid you in the
pronunciation of new words. While this key is based primarily
on familiar sounds, it does not attempt to follow any particular
pronunciation guide. This key is designed solely to aid
operators in this program.
You may find it helpful to refer to other available sources for
pronunciation help. Each current standard dictionary contains
a guide to its own pronunciation key. Each key will be different
from each other and from this key. Examples of the difference
between the key used in this program and the Webster's NEW
WORLD DICTIONARY "Key"1 are shown below;
In using this key, you should accent (say louder) the syllable
which appears in capital letters. The following chart is pre-
sented to give examples of how to pronounce words using the
Project Key.
SYLLABLE
WORD
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
acid
AS
id
coagulant
CO
AGG
you
lent
biological
BUY
0
LODGE
ik
cull
The first word, ACID, has its first syllable accented. The
second word, COAGULANT, has its second syllable ac-
cented. The third word, BIOLOGICAL, has its first and third
syllables accented.
We hope you will find the key useful in unlocking the pro-
nunciation of any new word.
Te r m
Proje c t Key
Web s te r Key
acid
AS-id
a sad
c o I i f o r m
COA L-i-for m
k o - ld-f o r m
biological
B U Y-o-LO DG E -i k-c u II
b i-e-l a j-i-ka I
1 The Webster's NEW WORLD DICTIONARY,
availability to the operator.
College Edition,
1968, was chosen rather than an unabridged
dictionary because of Its
-------
Glossary 407
GLOSSARY
ABS ABS
Alkyl Benzene Sulfonate. A type of surfactant, or surface active agent, present in synthetic detergents in the United States before
1965. ABS was especially troublesome because it caused foaming and resisted breakdown by biological treatment processes. ABS
has been replaced in detergents by linear alkyl sulfonate (LAS) which is biodegradable.
ABSORPTION (ab-SORP-shun) ABSORPTION
Taking in or soaking up of one substance into the body of another by molecular or chemical action (as tree roots absorb dissolved
nutrients in the soil).
ACID ACID
(1) A substance that tends to lose a proton. (2) A substance that dissolves in water with the formation of hydrogen ions. (3) A
substance containing hydrogen which may be replaced by metals to form salts.
ACIDITY ACIDITY
The capacity of water or wastewater to neutralize bases. Acidity is expressed in milligrams per liter of equivalent calcium carbonate.
Acidity is not the same as pH because water does not have to be strongly acidic (low pH) to have a high acidity. Acidity is a measure
of how much base can be added to a liquid without causing a great change in pH.
ACTIVATED SLUDGE (ACK-ta-VATE-ed slug) ACTIVATED SLUDGE
Sludge particles produced in raw or settled wastewater (primary effluent) by the growth of organisms (including zoogleal bacteria) in
aeration tanks in the presence of dissolved oxygen. The term "activated" comes from the fact that the particles are teeming with
bacteria, fungi, and protozoa. Activated sludge is different from primary sludge in that the sludge particles contain many living
organisms which can feed on the incoming wastewater.
ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS (ACK-ta-VATE-ed sluj) ACTIVATED SLUDGE PROCESS
A biological wastewater treatment process which speeds up the decomposition of wastes in the wastewater being treated. Activated
sludge is added to wastewater and the mixture (mixed liquor) is aerated and agitated. After some time in the aeration tank, the
activated sludge is allowed to settle out by sedimentation and is disposed of (wasted) or reused (returned to the aeration tank) as
needed. The remaining wastewater then undergoes more treatment.
ADSORPTION (add-SORP-shun) ADSORPTION
The gathering of a gas, liquid, or dissolved substance on the surface or interface zone of another substance. nf
ADVANCED WASTE TREATMENT ADVANCED WASTE TREATMENT
Any process of water renovation that upgrades treated wastewater to meet specific reuse requirements. May Include general
cleanup of water or removal of specific parts of wastes insufficiently removed by conventional treatment processes. Typical
processes include chemical treatment and pressure filtration. Also called TERTIARY TREATMENT.
AERATION (air-A-shun) AERATION
The process of adding air. In wastewater treatment, air is added to freshen wastewater and to keep solids in suspension. With
mixtures of wastewater and activated sludge, adding air provides mixing and oxygen for the microorganisms treating the wastewa-
ter.
AERATION LIQUOR (air-A-shun) AERATION LIQUOR
Mixed liquor. The contents of the aeration tank including living organisms and material carried into the tank by either untreated
wastewater or primary effluent.
AERATION TANK (air-A-shun) AERATION TANK
The tank where raw or settled wastewater is mixed with return sludge and aerated. The same as aeration bay, aerator, or reactor.
-------
408 Treatment Plants
AEROBES AEROBES
Bacteria that must have molecular (dissolved) oxygen (DO) to survive.
AEROBIC (AIR-O-bick) AEROBIC
A condition in which "free" or dissolved oxygen is present in the aquatic environment.
AEROBIC BACTERIA (AIR-O-bick back-TEAR-e-ah) AEROBIC BACTERIA
Bacteria which will live and reproduce only in an environment containing oxygen which is available for their respiration (breathing),
namely atmospheric oxygen or oxygen dissolved in water. Oxygen combined chemically, such as in water molecules (HzO), cannot
be used for respiration by aerobic bacteria.
AEROBIC DECOMPOSITION (AIR-O-bick) AEROBIC DECOMPOSITION
The decay or breaking down of organic material in the presence of "free" or dissolved oxygen.
AEROBIC DIGESTION (AIR-O-bick) AEROBIC DIGESTION
The breakdown of wastes by microorganisms in the presence of dissolved oxygen. Waste sludge is placed in a large aerated tank
where aerobic microorganisms decompose the organic matter in the sludge. This is an extension of the activated sludge process.
AEROBIC PROCESS (AIR-O-bick) AEROBIC PROCESS
A waste treatment process conducted under aerobic (in the presence of "free" or dissolved oxygen) conditions.
AGGLOMERATION (a-GLOM-er-A-shun) AGGLOMERATION
The growing or coming together of small scattered particles into larger floes or particles which settle rapidly. Also see FLOC.
AIR BINDING AIR BINDING
The clogging of a filter, pipe or pump due to the presence of air released from water.
AIR GAP
AIR GAP AIR GAP
Dflttwmo
WATCH
An open vertical drop, or vertical empty space, between a drinking (potable) water A
supply and the point of use in a wastewater treatment plant. This gap prevents u^aAr
back siphonage because there is no way wastewater can reach the drinking water.
own
tank
AIR LIFT AIR LIFT
A special type of pump. This device consists of a vertical riser pipe submerged in the wastewater or sludge to be pumped.
Compressed air is injected into a tail piece at the bottom of the pipe. Fine air bubbles mix with the wastewater or sludge to form a
mixture lighter than the surrounding water which causes the mixture to rise in the discharge pipe to the outlet. An airlift pump works
similar to the center stand in a percolator coffee pot.
AIR PADDING AIR PADDING
Pumping dry air into a container to assist with the withdrawal of a liquid or to force a liquid gas such as chlorine or sulfur dioxide out
of a container.
ALGAE (AL-gee) ALGAE
Microscopic plants which contain chlorophyll and float or are suspended and live in water. They also may be attached to structures,
rocks, or other similar substances.
ALIQUOT (AL-li-kwot) ALIQUOT
Portion of a sample.
ALKALI ALKALI
Any of certain soluble salts, principally of sodium, potassium, magnesium, and calcium, that have the property of combining with
acids to form neutral salts and may be used in chemical processes such as water or wastewater treatment.
ALKALINITY (AL-ka-LIN-ity) ALKALINITY
The capacity of water or wastewater to neutralize acids. This capacity is caused by the water's content of carbonate, bicarbonate,
hydroxide, and occasionally borate, silicate, and phosphate. Alkalinity is expressed in milligrams per liter of equivalent calcium
carbonate. Alkalinity is not the same as pH because water does not have to be strongly basic (high pH) to have a high alkalinity.
Alkalinity is a measure of how much acid can be added to a liquid without causing a great change in pH.
-------
Glossary 409
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (AM-bee-ent) AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
Temperature of the surroundings.
AMPEROMETRIC (am-PURR-o-MET-rick) AMPEROMETRIC
A method of measurement that records electric current flowing or generated, rather than recording voltage. Amperometric titration is
a means of measuring concentrations of certain substances in water.
ANAEROBES ANAEROBES
Bacteria that do not need molecular (dissolved) oxygen (DO) to survive.
ANAEROBIC (AN-air-O-bick) ANAEROBIC
A condition in which "free" or dissolved oxygen is NOT present in the aquatic environment.
ANAEROBIC BACTERIA (AN-air-O-bick back-TEAR-e-ah) ANAEROBIC BACTERIA
Bacteria that live and reproduce in an environment containing no "free" or dissolved oxygen. Anaerobic bacteria obtain their oxygen
supply by breaking down chemical compounds which contain oxygen, such as sulfate (S04).
ANAEROBIC DECOMPOSITION (AN-air-O-bick) ANAEROBIC DECOMPOSITION
The decay or breaking down of organic material in an environment containing no "free" or dissolved oxygen.
ANAEROBIC DIGESTION (AN-air-O-bick) ANAEROBIC DIGESTION
Wastewater solids and water (about 5% solids, 95% water) are placed in a large tank where bacteria decompose the solids in the
absence of dissolved oxygen. At least two general groups of bacteria act in balance: (1) SAPROPHYTIC bacteria break down
complex solids to volatile acids, and (2) METHANE FERMENTERS break down the acids to methane, carbon dioxide, and water.
ANHYDROUS (an-HI-drous) ANHYDROUS
Very dry. No water or dampness is present.
ANION ANION
A negatively charged ion in an electrolyte solution, attracted to the anode under the influence of electric potential.
ASEPTIC (a-SEP-tick) ASEPTIC
Free from the living germs of disease, fermentation or putrefaction. Sterile.
ASPIRATE (ASS-per-RATE) ASPIRATE
Use of a hydraulic device (aspirator or eductor) to create a negative pressure (suction) by forcing a liquid through a restriction, such
as a Venturi. An aspirator (the hydraulic device) may be used in the laboratory in place of a vacuum pump; sometimes used instead
of a sump pump.
BOD (BEE-OH-DEE) BOD
Biochemical Oxygen Demand. The rate at which microorganisms use the oxygen in water or wastewater white stabilizing decom-
posable organic matter under aerobic conditions. In decomposition, organic matter serves as food for the bacteria and energy
results from its oxidation.
BTU (BEE-TEA-YOU) BTU
British Thermal Unit. The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of one pound of water one degree Fahrenheit.
BACTERIA (back-TEAR-e-ah) BACTERIA
Bacteria are living organisms, microscopic in size, which consist of a single cell. Most bacteria utilize organic matter for their food
and produce waste products as the result of their life processes.
BACTERIAL CULTURE (back-TEAR-e-al) BACTERIAL CULTURE
In the case of activated sludge, the bacterial culture refers to the group of bacteria classed as AEROBES, and facultative organisms,
which covers a wide range of organisms. Most treatment processes in the United States grow facultative organisms which utilize the
carbonaceous (carbon compounds) BOD. Facultative organisms can live when oxygen resources are low. When "nitrification" is
required, the nitrifying organisms are OBLIGATE AEROBES (require oxygen) and must have at least 0.5 mgJL of dissolved oxygen
throughout the whole system to function properly.
BAFFLE BAFFLE
A flat board or plate, deflector, guide or similar device constructed or placed in flowing water, wastewater, or slurry systems to cause
more uniform flow velocities, to absorb energy, and to divert, guide, or agitate liquids.
-------
410 Treatment Plants
BASE BASE
A compound which dissociates in aqueous solution to yield hydroxy! ions.
BATCH PROCESS BATCH PROCESS
A treatment process in which a tank or reactor is filled, the water is treated, and the tank is emptied. The tank may then be filled and
the process repeated.
BIOASSAY (BUY-o-ass-SAY) BIOASSAY
(1) A way of showing or measuring the effect of biological treatment on a particular substance or waste, or (2) a method of
determining toxic effects of industrial wastes or other wastes by using live organisms such as fish for test organisms.
BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND (BOD) BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND (BOD)
The rate at which microorganisms use the oxygen in water or wastewater while stabilizing decomposable organic matter under
aerobic conditions. In decomposition, organic matter serves as food for the bacteria and energy results from its oxidation.
BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND (BOD) TEST BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND (BOD) TEST
A procedure that measures the rate of oxygen use under controlled conditions of time and temperature. Standard test conditions
include dark incubation at 20°C for a specified time (usually five days).
BIODEGRADABLE (BUY-o-dee-GRADE-able) BIODEGRADABLE
Organic matter that can be broken down by bacteria to more stable forms which will not create a nuisance or give off foul odors.
BIODEGRADATION (BUY-o-de-grah-DAY-shun) BIODEGRADATION
The breakdown of organic matter by bacteria to more stable forms which will not create a nuisance or give off foul odors.
BIOFLOCCULATION (BUY-o-flock-u-LAY-shun) BIOFLOCCULATION
The clumping together of fine, dispersed organic particles by the action of certain bacteria and algae. This results in faster and more
complete settling of the organic solids in wastewater.
BIOMASS (BUY-o-MASS) BIOMASS
A mass or clump of living organisms feeding on the wastes in wastewater, dead organisms and other debris. This mass may be
formed for, or function as, the protection against predators and storage of food supplies. Also see ZOOGLEAL MASS.
BLANK BLANK
A bottle containing only dilution water or distilled water, but the sample being tested is not added. Tests are frequently run on a
SAMPLE and a BLANK and the differences compared.
BLINDING BLINDING
The clogging of the filtering medium of a microscreen or a vacuum filter when the holes or spaces in the media become sealed off
due to grease or the material being filtered.
BOUND WATER BOUND WATER
Water contained within the cell mass of sludges or strongly held on the surface of colloidal particles.
BREAKOUT OF CHLORtNE BREAKOUT OF CHLORINE
A point at which chlorine leaves solution as a gas because the chlorine feed rate is too high. The solution is saturate and cannot
dissolve any more chlorine.
BREAKPOINT CHLORINATION BREAKPOINT CHLORINATION
Addition of chlorine to water or wastewater until the chlorine demand has been satisfied and further additions of chlorine result in a
residual that is directly proportional to the amount added beyond the breakpoint.
BUFFER BUFFER
A solution or liquid whose chemical makeup neutralizes acids or bases without a great change in pH.
BUFFER ACTION BUFFER ACTION
The action of certain ions in solution in opposing a change in hydrogen-ion concentration.
BUFFER CAPACITY BUFFER CAPACITY
A measure of the capacity of a solution or liquid to neutralize acids or bases. This is a measure of the capacity of water or
wastewater for offering a resistance to changes in pH.
-------
Glossary 411
BUFFER SOLUTION BUFFER SOLUTION
A solution containing two or more substances which, in combination, resist any marked change in pH following addition of moderate
amounts of either strong acid or base.
BULKING (BULK-ing) BULKING
Clouds of billowing sludge that occur throughout secondary clarifiers and sludge thickeners when the sludge becomes too light and
will not settle properly.
CALORIE (KAL-o-ree) CALORIE
The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of one gram of water one degree Celsius.
CARBONACEOUS STAGE (car-bun-NAV-shus) CARBONACEOUS
A stage of decomposition that occurs in biological treatment processes when aerobic bacteria, using dissolved oxygen, change
carbon compounds to carbon dioxide. Sometimes referred to as "first-stage BOD" because the microorganisms attack organic or
carbon compounds first and nitrogen compounds later. Also see NITRIFICATION STAGE.
CATHODIC PROTECTION (ca-THOD-ick) CATHODIC PROTECTION
An electrical system for prevention of rust, corrosion, and pitting of steel and iron surfaces in contact with water, wastewater or soil.
CATION EXCHANGE CAPACITY CATION EXCHANGE CAPACITY
The ability of a soil or other solid to exchange cations (positive ions such as calcium, Ca+2) with a liquid.
CAVITATION (CAV-i-TAY-shun) CAVITATION
The formation and collapse of a gas pocket or bubble on the blade of an impeller. The collapse of this gas pocket or bubble drives
water into the impeller with a terrific force that can cause pitting on the impeller surface.
CENTRATE CENTRATE
The water leaving a centrifuge after most of the solids have been removed.
CENTRIFUGE CENTRIFUGE
A mechanical device that uses centrifugal or rotational forces to separate solids from liquids.
CHEMICAL EQUIVALENT CHEMICAL EQUIVALENT
The weight in grams of a substance that combines with or displaces one gram of hydrogen. Chemical equivalents usually are found
by dividing the formula weight by its valence.
CHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND or COD CHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND or COD
A measure of the oxygen-consuming capacity of inorganic and organic matter present in wastewater. COD is expressed as the
amount of oxygen consumed from a chemical oxidant in mgIL during a specific test. Results are not necessarily related to the
biochemical oxygen demand because the chemical oxidant may react with substances that bacteria do not stabilize.
CHEMICAL PRECIPITATION CHEMICAL PRECIPITATION
(1) Precipitation induced by addition of chemicals. (2) The process of softening water by the addition of lime or lime and soda ash as
the precipitants.
CHLORAMINES (KLOR-a-means) CHLORAMINES
Chloramines are compounds formed by the reaction of chlorine with ammonia.
CHLORINATION (KLOR-i-NAY-shun) CHLORINATION
The application of chlorine to water or wastewater, generally for the purpose of disinfection, but frequently for accomplishing other
biological or chemical results.
CHLORINE DEMAND CHLORINE DEMAND
Chlorine demand is the difference between the amount of chlorine added to wastewater and the amount of residual chlorine
remaining after a given contact time. Chlorine demand may change with dosage, time, temperature, pH, and nature and amount of
the impurities in the water.
Chlorine Demand, mgIL = Chlorine Applied, mgIL - Chlorine Residual, mg/L
CHLORINE REQUIREMENT CHLORINE REQUIREMENT
The amount of chlorine which is needed for a particular purpose. Some reasons for adding chlorine are reducing the number of
coliform bacteria (Most Probable Number), obtaining a particular chlorine residual, or destroying some chemical in the water. In
each case a definite dosage of chlorine will be necessary. This dosage is the chlorine requirement.
-------
412 Treatment Plants
CHLORORGANIC (chloro-or-GAN-nick) CHLORORGANIC
Chlororganic compounds are organic compounds combined with chlorine. These compounds generally originate from, or are
associated with, living or dead organic materials.
CILIATES (SILLY-ates) CILIATES
A class of protozoans distinguished by short hairs on all or part of their bodies.
CLARIFICATION (KLAIR-i-fi-KAY-shun) CLARIFICATION
Any process or combination of processes the main purpose of which is to reduce the concentration of suspended matter in a liquid.
CLARIFIER (KLAIR-i-fire) CLARIFIER
Settling Tank, Sedimentation Basin. A tank or basin in which wastewater is held for a period of time, during which the heavier solids
settle to the bottom and the lighter material will float to the water surface.
COAGULANT AID COAGULANT AID
Any chemical or substance used to assist or modify coagulation.
COAGULANTS (co-AGG-you-lents) COAGULANTS
Chemicals that cause very fine particles to clump together into larger particles. This makes it easier to separate the solids from the
liquids by settling, skimming, draining or filtering.
COAGULATION (co-AGG-you-LAY-shun) COAGULATION
The use of chemicals that cause very fine particles to clump together into larger particles. This makes it easier to separate the solids
from the liquids by settling, skimming, draining or filtering.
COLIFORM (COAL-i-form) COLIFORM
One type of bacteria. The presence of coliform-group bacteria is an indication of possible pathogenic bacterial contamination. The
human intestinal tract is one of the main habitats of coliform bacteria. They may also be found in the intestinal tracts of warm-
blooded animals, and in plants, soil, air, and the aquatic environment. Fecal conforms are those coliforms found in the feces of
various warm-blooded animals; whereas the term "coliform" also includes other environmental sources.
COLLOIDS (KOL-loids) COLLOIDS
Very small, finely divided solids (particles that do not dissolve) that remain dispersed in a liquid for a long time due to their small size
and electrical charge.
COLORIMETRIC MEASUREMENT COLORIMETRIC MEASUREMENT
A means of measuring unknown concentrations of water quality indicators in a sample by measuring the sample's color intensity.
The color of the sample after the addition of specific chemicals (reagents) is compared with colors of known concentrations.
COMBINED AVAILABLE CHLORINE COMBINED AVAILABLE CHLORINE
The concentration of chlorine which is combined with ammonia (NH3) as chloramine or as other chloro derivatives, yet is still
available to oxidize organic matter.
COMBINED AVAILABLE RESIDUAL CHLORINE COMBINED AVAILABLE RESIDUAL CHLORINE
That portion of the total residual chlorine which remains in water or wastewater at the end of a specified contact period and reacts
chemically and biologically as chloramines or organic chloramines.
COMBINED RESIDUAL CHLORINATION COMBINED RESIDUAL CHLORINATION
The application of chlorine to water or wastewater to produce a combined chlorine residual. The residual may consist of chlorine
compounds formed by the reaction of chlorine with natural or added ammonia (NH3) or with certain organic nitrogen compounds.
COMBINED SEWER COMBINED SEWER
A sewer designed to carry both sanitary wastewaters and storm- or surface-water runoff.
COMMINUTION (com-mi-NEW-shun) COMMINUTION
Shredding. A mechanical treatment process which cuts large pieces of wastes into smaller pieces so they won't plug pipes or
damage equipment. COMMINUTION and SHREDDING usually mean the same thing.
COMMINUTOR (com-mi-NEW-ter) COMMINUTOR
A device to reduce the size of the solid chunks in wastewater by shredding (comminuting). The shredding action is like many
scissors cutting or chopping to shreds all the large influent solids material.
-------
Glossary 413
COMPOSITE (PROPORTIONAL) SAMPLE (com-POZ-it) COMPOSITE (PROPORTIONAL) SAMPLE
A composite sample is a collection of individual samples obtained at regular intervals, usually every one or two hours during a
24-hour time span. Each individual sample is combined with the others in proportion to the flow when the sample was collected. The
resulting mixture (composite sample) forms a representative sample and is analyzed to determine the average conditions during the
sampling period.
COMPOUND COMPOUND
A pure substance composed of two or more elements whose composition is constant. For example, table salt (sodium chloride - Na
CI) is a compound.
CONING (CONE-ing) CONING
Development of a cone-shaped flow of liquid, like a whirlpool, through sludge. This can occur in a sludge hopper during sludge
withdrawal when the sludge becomes too thick. Part of the sludge remains in place white liquid rather than sludge flows out of the
hopper. Also called "coring."
CONTACT STABILIZATION CONTACT STABILIZATION
Contact stabilization is a modification of the conventional activated sludge process. In contact stabilization, two aeration tanks are
used. One tank is for separate re-aeration of the return sludge for at least four hours before it is permitted to flow into the other
aeration tank to be mixed with the primary effluent requiring treatment.
CONTINUOUS PROCESS CONTINUOUS PROCESS
A treatment process in which water is treated continuously in a tank or reactor. The water being treated continuously flows into the
tank at one end, is treated as it flows through the tank, and flows out the opposite end as treated water.
CONVENTIONAL TREATMENT CONVENTIONAL TREATMENT
The pretreatment, sedimentation, flotation, trickling filter, activated sludge and chlorination wastewater treatment processes.
CROSS CONNECTION CROSS CONNECTION
A connection between drinking (potable) water and an unsafe water supply. For example, if you have a pump moving nonpotable
water and hook into the drinking water system to supply water for the pump seal, a cross connection or mixing between the two
water systems can occur. This mixing may lead to contamination of the drinking water.
CRYOGENIC (cry-o-JEN-nick) CRYOGENIC
Low temperature.
DO (DEE-OH) DO
Abbreviation of Dissolved Oxygen. DO is the atmospheric oxygen dissolved in water or wastewater.
DATEOMETER (day-TOM-uh-ter) DATEOMETER
A small calendar disc attached to motors and equipment to indicate the year in which the last maintenance service was performed.
DECHLORINATION (dee-KLOR-i-NAY-shun) DECHLORINATION
The removal of chlorine from the effluent of a treatment plant.
DECIBEL DECIBEL
A unit for expressing the relative intensity of sounds on a scale from zero for the average least perceptible sound to about 130 for the
average pain level.
DECOMPOSITION, DECAY DECOMPOSITION, DECAY
Processes that convert unstable materials into more stable forms by chemical or biological action. Waste treatment encourages
decay in a controlled situation so that material may be disposed of in a stable form. When organic matter decays under anaerobic
conditions (putrefaction), undesirable odors are produced. The aerobic processes in common use for wastewater treatment produce
much less objectional odors.
DEGRADATION (de-grah-DAY-shun) DEGRADATION
The conversion of a substance to simpler compounds.
DENITRIFICATION DENITRIFICATION
A condition that occurs when nitrite or nitrate ions are reduced to nitrogen gas and bubbles are formed as a result of this process.
The bubbles attach to the biological floes and float the floes to the surface of the secondary clarifiers. This condition is often the
cause of rising sludge observed in secondary clarifiers.
-------
414 Treatment Plants
DENSITY (DEN-sit-tee) DENSITY
A measure of how heavy a substance (solid, liquid or gas) is for its size. Density is expressed in terms of weight per unit volume, that
is, grams per cubic centimeter or pounds per cubic foot. The density of water (at 4°C or 39°F) is 1.0 gram per cubic centimeter or
about 62.4 pounds per cubic foot.
DESICCATOR (DESS-i-KAY-tor) DESICCATOR
A closed container into which heated weighing or drying dishes are placed to cool in a dry environment. The dishes may be empty or
they may contain a sample. Desiccators contain a substance, such as anhydrous calcium chloride, which absorbs moisture and
keeps the relative humidity near zero so that the dish or sample will not gain weight from absorbed moisture.
DETENTION TIME DETENTION TIME
The time required to fill a tank at a given flow or the theoretical time required for a given flow of wastewater to pass through a tank.
DETRITUS (dee-TRI-tus) DETRITUS
The heavy, coarse mixture of grit and organic material carried by wastewater.
DEW POINT DEW POINT
The temperature to which air with a given quantity of water vapor must be cooled to cause condensation of the vapor in the air.
DEWATER DEWATER
To remove or separate a portion of the water present in a sludge or slurry.
DEWATERABLE DEWATERABLE
This is a property of a sludge related to the ability to separate the liquid portion from the solid, with or without chemical conditioning.
A material is considered dewaterable if water will readily drain from it.
DIAPHRAGM PUMP DIAPHRAGM PUMP
The pump in which a flexible diaphragm, generally of rubber or equally flexible material, is the operating part. It is fastened at the
edges in a vertical cylinder. When the diaphragm is raised suction is exerted, and when it is depressed, the liquid is forced through a
discharge valve.
DIFFUSED-AIR AERATION DIFFUSED-AIR AERATION
A diffused air activated sludge plant takes air, compresses it, and then discharges the air below the water surface of the aerator
through some type of air diffusion device.
DIFFUSER DIFFUSER
A device (porous plate, tube, bag) used to break the air stream from the blower system into fine bubbles in an aeration tank or
reactor.
DIGESTER (die-JEST-er) DIGESTER
A tank in which sludge is placed to allow decomposition by microorganisms. Digestion may occur under anaerobic (more common)
or aerobic conditions.
DISCHARGE HEAD DISCHARGE HEAD
The pressure (in feet (meters) or pounds per square inch (kilograms per square centimeter)) on the discharge side of a pump. The
pressure can be measured from the center line of the pump to the hydraulic grade line of the water in the discharge pipe.
DISINFECTION (dis-in-FECT-shun) DISINFECTION
The process designed to kill most microorganisms in wastewater, including essentially all pathogenic (disease-causing) bacteria.
There are several ways to disinfect, with chlorine being most frequently used in water and wastewater treatment plants. Compare
with STERILIZATION.
DISSOLVED OXYGEN DISSOLVED OXYGEN
Molecular oxygen dissolved in water or wastewater, usually abbreviated DO.
DISTILLATE (DIS-tuh-late) DISTILLATE
In the distillation of a sample, a portion is evaporated; the part that is condensed afterwards is the distillate.
DISTRIBUTOR DISTRIBUTOR
The rotating mechanism that distributes the wastewater evenly over the surface of a trickling filter or other process unit. Also see
FIXED SPRAY NOZZLE.
-------
Glossary 415
DOCTOR BLADE DOCTOR BLADE
A blade used to remove any excess solids that may cling to the outside of a rotating screen.
DROOP DROOP
The difference between the actual value and the desired value (or set point) characteristics of proportional controllers that do not
incorporate reset action. Also called OFFSET.
DYNAMIC HEAD DYNAMIC HEAD
When a pump is operating, the vertical distance (in feet or meters) from a point to the energy grade lines. Also see TOTAL
DYNAMIC HEAD and STATIC HEAD.
EDUCTOR (e-DUCK-tor) EDUCTOR
A hydraulic device used to create a negative pressure (suction) by forcing a liquid through a restriction, such as a Venturi. An
eductor or aspirator (the hydraulic device) may be used in the laboratory in place of a vacuum pump; sometimes used instead of a
suction pump.
EFFLORESCENCE (EF-low-RESS-ense) EFFLORESCENCE
The powder or crust formed on a substance when moisture is given off upon exposure to the atmosphere.
EFFLUENT (EF-lu-ent) EFFLUENT
Wastewater or other liquid — raw, partially or completely treated — flowing FROM a basin, treatment process, or treatment plant.
ELECTRO-CHEMICAL PROCESS ELECTRO-CHEMICAL PROCESS
A process that causes the deposition or formation of a seal or coating of a chemical element or compound by the use of electricity.
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC FORCES ELECTRO-MAGNETIC FORCES
Forces resulting from electrical charges that either attract or repel particles. Particles with opposite charges are attracted to each
other. For example, a particle with positive charges is attracted to a particle with negative charges. Particles with similar charges
repel each other. A particle with positive charges is repelled by a particle with positive charges and a particle with negative charges
is repelled by another particle with negative charges.
ELECTROLYSIS (ELECT-TROLLEY-sis) ELECTROLYSIS
The decomposition of material by an electric current.
ELECTROLYTE (ELECT-tro-LIGHT) ELECTROLYTE
A substance which dissociates (separates) into two or more ions when it is dissolved in water.
ELECTROLYTIC PROCESS (ELECT-tro-LIT-ick) ELECTROLYTIC PROCESS
A process that causes the decomposition of a chemical compound by the use of electricity.
ELECTRON ELECTRON
An extremely small (microscopic), negatively charged particle. An electron is much too small to be seen with a microscope.
ELEMENT ELEMENT
A substance which cannot be separated into substances of other kinds by ordinary chemical means. For example, sodium (Na) is an
element.
ELUTRIATION (e-LOO-tree-A-shun) ELUTRIATION
The washing of digested sludge in plant effluent. The objective is to remove (wash out) fine particulates and/or alkalinity in sludge.
This process reduces the demand for conditioning chemicals and improves settling or filtering characteristics of the solids.
EMULSION (e-MULL-shun) EMULSION
A liquid mixture of two or more liquid substances not normally dissolved in one another, but one liquid held in suspension in the
other.
END POINT END POINT
Samples are titrated to the end point. This means that a chemical is added, drop by drop, to a sample until a certain color change
(blue to clear, for example) occurs which is called the END POINT of the titration, In addition to a color change, an end point may be
reached by the formation of a precipitate or the reaching of a specified pH. An end point may be detected by the use of an electronic
device such as a pH meter.
-------
416 Treatment Plants
ENDOGENOUS (en-DODGE-en-us) ENDOGENOUS
A reduced level of respiration (breathing) in which organisms break down compounds within their own cells to produce the oxygen
they need.
ENERGY GRADE LINE (EGL) ENERGY GRADE LINE (EGL)
A line that represents the elevation of energy head (in feet) of water flowing in a pipe, conduit or channel. The line is drawn above the
hydraulic grade line a distance equal to the velocity head of the water flowing at each section or point along the pipe or channel.
ENTERIC ENTERIC
Intestinal.
ENZYMES (EN-zimes) ENZYMES
Enzymes are organic substances which are produced by living organisms and speed up chemical changes.
EQUALIZING BASIN EQUALIZING BASIN
A holding basin in which variations in flow and composition of liquid are averaged. Such basins are used to provide a flow of
reasonably uniform volume and composition to a treatment unit. Also called a balancing reservoir.
ESTUARIES (ES-chew-wear-eez) ESTUARIES
Bodies of water which are located at the lower end of a river and are subject to tidal fluctuations.
EVAPOTRANSPIRATION (e-VAP-o-trans-spi-RAY-shun) EVAPOTRANSPIRATION
The total water removed from an area by transpiration (plants) and by evaporation from soil, snow and water surfaces.
EXPLOSIMETER EXPLOSIMETER
An instrument used to detect explosive atmospheres. When the Lower Explosive Limit (L.E.L.) of an atmosphere is exceeded, an
alarm signal on the instrument is activated.
F/M RATIO F/M RATIO
Food to microorganism ratio. A measure of food provided to bacteria in an aeration tank.
Food BOD, lbs/day
Microorganisms MLVSS, lbs
= Flow, MGD x BOD, mg/L x 8.34 lbs/gal
Volume, MG x MLVSS, mg/L x 8.34 lbs/gal
or = BOD, kg/day
MLVSS, kg
FACULTATIVE (FACK-ul-TAY-tive) FACULTATIVE
Facultative bacteria can use either molecular (dissolved) oxygen or oxygen obtained from food materials such as sulfate or nitrate
ions. In other words, facultative bacteria can live under aerobic or anaerobic conditions.
FACULTATIVE POND (FACK-ul-TAY-tive) FACULTATIVE POND
The most common type of pond in current use. The upper portion (supernatant) is aerobic, while the bottom layer is anaerobic.
Algae supply most of the oxygen to the supernatant.
FILAMENTOUS BACTERIA (FILL-a-MEN-tuss) FILAMENTOUS BACTERIA
Organisms that grow in a thread or filamentous form. Common types are thiothrix and actinomyces.
FILTER AID FILTER AID
A chemical (usually a polymer) added to water to help remove fine colloidal suspended solids.
FIXED FIXED
A sample is "fixed" in the field by adding chemicals that prevent the water quality indicators of interest in the sample from changing
before final measurements are performed later in the lab.
FIXED SPRAY NOZZLE FIXED SPRAY NOZZLE
Cone-shaped spray nozzle used to distribute wastewater over the filter media, similar to a lawn sprinkling system. A deflector or
steel ball is mounted within the cone to spread the flow of wastewater through the cone, thus causing a spraying action. Also see
DISTRIBUTOR.
-------
Glossary 417
FLAME POLISHED FLAME POLISHED
Melted by a flame to smooth out irregularities. Sharp or broken edges of glass (such as the end of a glass tube) are rotated in a
flame until the edge melts slightly and becomes smooth.
FLIGHTS FLIGHTS
Scraper boards, made from redwood or other rot-resistant woods or plastic, used to collect and move settled sludge or floating
scum.
FLOC FLOC
Groups or clumps of bacteria and particles that have come together and formed a cluster. Found in aeration tanks and secondary
clarifiers.
FLOCCULATION (FLOCK-you-LAY-shun) FLOCCULATION
The gathering together of fine particles to form larger particles.
FLOW-EQUALIZATION SYSTEM FLOW-EQUALIZATION SYSTEM
A device or tank designed to hold back or store a portion of peak flows for release during low-flow periods.
FOOD/MICROORGANISM RATIO FOOD/MICROORGANISM RATIO
Food to microorganism ratio. A measure of food provided to bacteria in an aeration tank.
Food BOD, lbs/day
Microorganisms MLVSS, lbs
= Flow, MGD X BOD, mgIL x 8.34 lbs/gal
Volume, MG x MLVSS, mgIL x 8.34 lbs/gal
or = BOD, kg/day
MLVSS, kg
Commonly abbreviated F/M Ratio.
FORCE MAIN FORCE MAIN
A pipe that conveys wastewater under pressure from the discharge side of a pump to a point of gravity flow.
FREE AVAILABLE CHLORINE FREE AVAILABLE CHLORINE
The amount of chlorine available in water. This chlorine may be in the form of dissolved gas (Cl2), hypochlorous acid (HOCI), or
hypochlorite ion (OCI~), but does not include chlorine combined with an amine (ammonia or nitrogen) or other organic compound.
FREE AVAILABLE RESIDUAL CHLORINE FREE AVAILABLE RESIDUAL CHLORINE
That portion of the total residual chlorine remaining in water or wastewater at the end of a specified contact period. Residual chlorine
will react chemically and biologically as hypochlorous acid (HOCI) or hypochlorite ion (OCh).
FREE CHLORINE FREE CHLORINE
Free chlorine is chlorine (Cl2) in a liquid or gaseous form. Free chlorine combines with water to form hypochlorous (HOCI) and
hydrochloric (HCI) acids. In wastewater free chlorine usually combines with an amine (ammonia or nitrogen) or other organic
compounds to form combined chlorine compounds.
FREE OXYGEN FREE OXYGEN
Molecular oxygen available for respiration by organisms. Molecular oxygen is the oxygen molecule, 02, that is not combined with
another element to form a compound.
FREE RESIDUAL CHLORINATION FREE RESIDUAL CHLORINATION
The application of chlorine or chlorine compounds to water or wastewater to produce a free available chlorine residual directly or
through the destruction of ammonia (NH3) or certain organic nitrogenous compounds.
FREEBOARD FREEBOARD
±
The vertical distance from the normal water surface to the top of the confining wall. -;
S3
XT
FREEBOARD
$
i
water-depth
I'i
y
>
FRICTION LOSS FRICTION LOSS
The head lost by water flowing in a stream or conduit as the result of the disturbances set up by the contact between the moving
water and its containing conduit and by intermolecular friction.
-------
418 Treatment Plants
GASIFICATION (GAS-i-fi-KAY-shun) GASIFICATION
The conversion of soluble and suspended organic materials into gas during anaerobic decomposition. In clarifiers the resulting gas
bubbles can become attached to the settled sludge and cause large clumps of sludge to rise and float on the water surface. In
anaerobic sludge digesters, this gas is collected for fuel or disposed of using the waste gas burner.
GRAB SAMPLE
A single sample of wastewater taken at neither a set time nor flow.
GRAVIMETRIC
GRAB SAMPLE
GRAVIMETRIC
A means of measuring unknown concentrations of water quality indicators in a sample by WEIGHING a precipitate or residue of the
sample.
GRIT
GRIT REMOVAL
GRIT
The heavy mineral material present in wastewater, such as sand, eggshells, gravel, and cinders.
GRIT REMOVAL
Grit removal is accomplished by providing an enlarged channel or chamber which causes the flow velocity to be reduced and allows
the heavier grit to settle to the bottom of the channel where it can be removed.
GROWTH RATE GROWTH RATE
An experimentally determined constant to estimate the unit growth rate of bacteria while degrading organic wastes.
HEAD HEAD
A term used to describe the height or energy of water above a point. A head of water may be measured in either height (feet or
meters) or pressure (pounds per square inch or kilograms per square centimeter). Also see DISCHARGE HEAD, DYNAMIC HEAD,
STATIC HEAD, SUCTION HEAD, SUCTION LIFT and VELOCITY HEAD.
-J.
HEAD LOSS
HEAD LOSS
HEAD LOSS
An indirect measure of loss of energy or pressure. Flowing water will lose some of
its energy when it passes through a pipe, bar screen, comminutor, filter or other
obstruction. The amount of energy or pressure lost is called "head loss." Head loss
is measured as the difference in elevation between the upstream water surface
and the downstream water surface and may be expressed in feet or meters.
HEADER HEADER
A large pipe to which the ends of a series of smaller pipes are connected. Also called a "manifold."
HEADWORKS HEADWORKS
The facilities where wastewater enters a wastewater treatment plant. The headworks may consist of bar screens, comminutors, a
wet well and pumps.
HEPATITIS HEPATITIS
Hepatitis is an acute viral infection of the liver. Yellow jaundice is one symptom of hepatitis.
HUMUS SLUDGE HUMUS SLUDGE
The sloughed particles of biomass from trickling filter media that are removed from the water being treated in secondary clarifiers.
HYDRAULIC GRADE LINE (HGL) HYDRAULIC GRADE LINE (HGL)
The surface or profile of water flowing in an open channel or a pipe flowing partially full. If a pipe is under pressure, the hydraulic
grade line is at the level water would rise to in a small tube connected to the pipe. To reduce the release of odors from wastewater,
the water surface should be kept as smooth as possible.
HYDRAULIC LOADING HYDRAULIC LOADING
Hydraulic loading refers to the flows (MGD or cu m/day) to a treatment plant or treatment process. Detention times, surface loadings
and weir overflow rates are directly influenced by flows.
HYDROGEN ION CONCENTRATION (H+) HYDROGEN ION CONCENTRATION (H+)
The weight of hydrogen ion in moles per liter of solution. Commonly expressed as the pH value, which is the logarithm of the
reciprocal of the hydrogen-ion concentration.
pH = log
(H+)
-------
Glossary 419
HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2S) HYDROGEN SULFIDE (HZS)
Hydrogen sulfide is a gas with a rotten egg odor. This gas is produced under anaerobic conditions. Hydrogen sulfide is particularly
dangerous because it dulls your sense of smell so that you don't notice it after you have been around it for a while and because the
odor is not noticeable in high concentrations. The gas is very poisonous to your respiratory system, explosive, flammable and
colorless.
HYDROLOGIC CYCLE (Hl-dro-loj-ic) HYDROLOGIC CYCLE
The process of evaporation of water into the air and its return to earth by precipitation (rain or snow). This process also includes
transpiration from plants, groundwater movement and runoff into rivers, streams and the ocean.
HYDROLYSIS (hi-DROL-e-sis) HYDROLYSIS
The addition of water to the molecule to break down complex substances into simpler ones.
HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM
In a hydrostatic sludge removal system, the surface of the water in the clarifier is higher than the surface of the water in the sludge
well or hopper. This difference in pressure head forces sludge from the bottom of the clarifier to flow through pipes to the sludge well
or hopper.
HYGROSCOPIC (HI-grow-SKOP-ic) HYGROSCOPIC
A substance that absorbs or attracts moisture from the air.
HYPOCHLORINATION (hi-po-KLOR-i-NAY-shun) HYPOCHLORINATION
The application of hypochlorite compounds to water or wastewater for the purpose of disinfection.
HYPOCHLORINATORS (hi-poe-KLOR-i-NAY-tors) HYPOCHLORINATORS
Chlorine pumps or devices used to feed chlorine solutions made from hypochlorites such as bleach (sodium hypochlorite) or
calcium hypochlorite.
HYPOCHLORITE (hi-po-KLOR-ite) HYPOCHLORITE
Hypochlorite compounds contain chlorine and are used for disinfection. They are available as liquids or solids (powder, granules,
and pellets) in barrels, drums, and cans.
IMHOFF CONE IMHOFF CONE
A clear, cone-shaped container marked with graduations. The cone is used to
measure the volume of settleable solids in a specific volume of wastewater.
IMPELLER IMPELLER
A rotating set of vanes designed to Impel rotation of a mass of fluid.
IMPELLER PUMP IMPELLER PUMP
Any pump in which the water is moved by the continuous application of power from some mechanical source.
INCINERATION INCINERATION
The conversion of dewatered sludge cake by combustion (burning) to ash, carbon dioxide and water vapor.
INDICATOR (CHEMICAL) INDICATOR (CHEMICAL)
A substance that gives a visible change, usually of color, at adesired point in a chemical reaction, generally at a specified end point.
INDOLE (IN-dole) INDOLE
An organic compound (C8H7N) containing nitrogen which has an ammonia odor.
INFILTRATION (IN-fill-TRAY-shun) INFILTRATION
The seepage of groundwater into a sewer system, including service connections. Seepage frequently occurs through defective or
cracked pipes, pipe joints, connections or manhole walls.
INFLOW INFLOW
Water discharged into the sewer system from sources other than regular connections. This includes flow from yard drains,
foundation drains and around manhole covers. Inflow differs from infiltration in that it is a direct discharge into the sewer rather than
a leak in the sewer itself.
INFLUENT (IN-flu-ent) INFLUENT
Wastewater or other liquid — raw or partially treated — flowing INTO a reservoir, basin, treatment process, or treatment plant.
-------
420 Treatment Plants
INHIBITORY SUBSTANCES INHIBITORY SUBSTANCES
Materials that kill or restrict the ability of organisms to treat wastes.
INOCULATE (in-NOCK-you-late) INOCULATE
To introduce a seed culture into a system.
INORGANIC WASTE INORGANIC WASTE
Waste material such as sand, salt, iron, calcium, and other mineral materials which are only slightly affected by the action of
organisms. Inorganic wastes are chemical substances of mineral origin; whereas organic wastes are chemical substances usually
of animal or vegetable origin. Also see NONVOLATILE MATTER.
INTERFACE INTERFACE
The common boundary layer between two fluids such as a gas (air) and a liquid (water) or a liquid (water) and another liquid (oil).
IONIC CONCENTRATION IONIC CONCENTRATION
The concentration of any ion in solution, generally expressed in moles per liter.
IONIZATION IONIZATION
The process of adding electrons to, or removing electrons from, atoms or molecules, thereby creating ions. High temperatures,
electrical discharges, and nuclear radiation can cause ionization.
JAR TEST JAR TEST
A laboratory procedure that simulates coagulation/flocculation with differing chemical doses. The purpose of the procedure is to
ESTIMATE the minimum coagulant dose required to achieve certain water quality goals. Samples of water to be treated are placed
in six jars. Various amounts of chemicals are added to each jar, stirred and the settling of solids is observed. The lowest dose of
chemicals that provides satisfactory settling is the dose used to treat the water.
JOULE Gewel) JOULE
A measure of energy, work or quantity of heat. One joule is the work done when the point of application of a force of one newton is
displaced a distance of one meter in the direction of the force.
KJELDAHL NITROGEN (KELL-doll) KJELDAHL NITROGEN
Organic and ammonia nitrogen.
LAUNDERS (LAWN-ders) LAUNDERS
Sedimentation tank effluent troughs.
LIMIT SWITCH LIMIT SWITCH
A device that regulates or controls the travel distance of a chain or cable.
LINEAL (LIN-e-al) LINEAL
The length in one direction of a line. For example, a board 12 feet long has 12 lineal feet in its length.
LIQUEFACTION (LICK-we-FACK-shun) LIQUEFACTION
The conversion of large solid particles of sludge into very fine particles which either dissolve or remain suspended in wastewater.
LOADING LOADING
Quantity of material applied to a device at one time.
M or MOLAR M or MOLAR
A molar solution consists of one gram molecular weight of a compound dissolved in enough water to make one liter of solution. A
gram molecular weight is the molecular weight of a compound in grams. For example, the molecular weight of sulfuric acid (H2S04)
is 98. A 1M solution of sulfuric acid would consist of 98 grams of H2S04 dissolved in enough distilled water to make one Ifter of
solution.
MBAS MBAS
Methylene Blue Active Substance. Another name for surfactants, or surface active agents, is methylene blue active substances.
The determination of surfactants is accomplished by measuring the color change in a standard solution of methylene blue dye.
MPN (EM-PEA-EN) MPN
MPN is the Most Probable Number of coliform-group organisms per unit volume. Expressed as a density or population of organisms
per 100 ml.
-------
Glossary 421
MANIFOLD
A large pipe to which the ends of a series of smaller pipes are connected. Also called a "header."
MANIFOLD
MANOMETER
MANOMETER (man-NAH-met-ter)
An instrument for measuring pressure. Usually a glass tube filled with a liquid and used to measure the difference in pressure across
a flow-measuring device such as an orifice or Venturi meter. The instrument used to measure blood pressure is a type of
manometer.
VENTURI METER
£
6
MANOMETER
MASKING AGENTS
MASKING AGENTS
Substances used to cover up or disguise unpleasant odors. Liquid masking agents are dripped into the wastewater, sprayed into the
air, or evaporated (using heat) with the unpleasant fumes or odors and then discharged into the air by blowers to make an
undesirable odor less noticeable.
MEAN CELL RESIDENCE TIME (MCRT) MEAN CELL RESIDENCE TIME (MCRT)
An expression of the average time that a microorganism will spend in the activated sludge process.
MCRT days = Solids in Activated Sludge Process, lbs
Solids Removed from Process, lbs/day
MECHANICAL AERATION
MECHANICAL AERATION
The use of machinery to mix air and water so that oxygen can be absorbed into the water. Some examples are: paddle wheels,
mixers, or rotating brushes to agitate the surface of an aeration tank; pumps to create fountains; and pumps to discharge water
down a series of steps forming falls or cascades.
MEDIA
MEDIA
The material in a trickling filter on which slime organisms grow. As settled wastewater trickles over the media, slime organisms
remove certain types of wastes thereby partially treating the wastewater. Also the material in a rotating biological contactor or in a
gravity or pressure filter.
MEDIAN MEDIAN
The middle measurement or value. When several measurements are ranked by magnitude (largest to smallest), half of the
measurements will be larger and half will be smaller.
MENISCUS (meh-NIS-cuss) MENISCUS
The curved top of a column of liquid (water, oil, mercury) in a small tube. When the liquid wets the sides of the container (as with
water), the curve forms a valley. When the confining sides are not wetted (as with mercury), the curve forms a hill or upward bulge.
WATER
(READ
BOTTOM)
MERCURY
m
(READ
TOP)
MERCAPTANS (mer-CAP-tans)
Compounds containing sulfur which have an extremely offensive skunk odor.
MERCAPTANS
MESOPHILIC BACTERIA
MESOPHILIC BACTERIA (mess-O-FILL-lick)
Medium temperature bacteria. A group of bacteria that grow and thrive in a moderate temperature range between 68°F (20°C) and
113°F (45°C). The optimum temperature range for these bacteria in anaerobic digestion is 85°F (30°C) to 100T (38°C).
-------
422 Treatment Plants
MICRON (MY-kron) MICRON
A unit of length. One millionth of a meter or one thousandth of a millimeter. One micron equals 0.00004 of an inch.
MICROORGANISMS (micro-ORGAN-is-sums) MICROORGANISMS
Very small organisms that can be seen only through a microscope. Some microorganisms use the wastes in wastewater for food
and thus remove or alter much of the undesirable matter.
MICROSCREEN MICROSCREEN
A device with a fabric straining media with openings usually between 20 and 60 microns. The fabric is wrapped around the outside of
a rotating drum. Wastewater enters the open end of the drum and flows out through the rotating screen cloth. At the highest point of
the drum the collected solids are backwashed by high-pressure water jets into a trough located within the drum.
MILLIGRAMS PER LITER, mgIL (MILL-i-GRAMS per LEET-er) MILLIGRAMS PER LITER, mg/L
A measure of the concentration by weight of a substance per unit volume. For practical purposes, one mgIL is equal to one part per
million parts (ppm). Thus a liter of water with a specific gravity of 1.0 weighs one million milligrams; and if it contains 10
milligrams of dissolved oxygen, the concentration is 10 milligrams per million milligrams, or 10 milligrams per liter (10 mg/L), or 10
parts of oxygen per million parts of water, or 10 parts per million (10 ppm).
MILLIMICRON (MILL-e-MY-cron) MILLIMICRON
One thousandth of a micron or a millionth of a millimeter.
MIXED LIQUOR MIXED LIQUOR
When the activated sludge in an aeration tank is mixed with primary effluent or the raw wastewater and return sludge, this mixture is
then referred to as mixed liquor as long as it is in the aeration tank. Mixed liquor also may refer to the contents of mixed aerobic or
anaerobic digesters.
MIXED LIQUOR SUSPENDED SOLIDS (MLSS) MIXED LIQUOR SUSPENDED SOLIDS(MLSS)
Suspended solids in the mixed liquor of an aeration tank.
MIXED LIQUOR VOLATILE SUSPENDED MIXED LIQUOR VOLATILE SUSPENDED
SOLIDS (MLVSS) SOLIDS (MLVSS)
The organic or volatile suspended solids in the mixed liquor of an aeration tank.
MOLECULAR OXYGEN MOLECULAR OXYGEN
The oxygen molecule, 02, that is not combined with another element to form a compound.
MOLECULAR WEIGHT MOLECULAR WEIGHT
The molecular weight of a compound in grams is the sum of the atomic weights of the elements in the compound. The molecular
weight of sulfuric acid (H2S04) in grams is 98.
Atomic Number Molecular
Element Weight of Atoms Weight
H 1 2 2
S 32 1 32
O 16 4 64
98
MOLECULE (MOLL-uh-kule) MOLECULE
A molecule is the smallest portion of an element or compound that still retains or exhibits all the properties of the substance.
MOTILE (MO-till) MOTILE
Motile organisms exhibit or are capable of movement.
MOVING AVERAGE MOVING AVERAGE
To calculate the moving average for the last 7 days, add up values for the last 7 days and divide by 7. Each day add the most recent
day to the sum of values and subtract the oldest value. By using the 7-day moving average, each day of the week is always
represented in the calculations.
MUFFLE FURNACE MUFFLE FURNACE
A small oven capable of reaching temperatures up to 600°C. Muffle furnaces are used in laboratories for burning or incinerating
samples to determine the amounts of volatile solids and/or fixed solids in samples of wastewater.
MULTI-STAGE PUMP MULTI-STAGE PUMP
A pump that has more than one impeller. A single-stage pump has one impeller.
-------
Glossary 423
N or NORMAL N or NORMAL
A normal solution contains one gram equivalent weight of a reactant (compound) per liter of solution. The equivalent weight of an
acid is that weight which contains one gram atom of ionizable hydrogen or its chemical equivalent. For example, the equivalent
weight of sulfuric acid (H2S04) is 49 (98 divided by 2 because there are two replaceable hydrogen ions). A 1 N solution of sulfuric
acid would consist of 49 grams of H2S04 dissolved in enough water to make one liter of solution.
NPDES PERMIT NPDES PERMIT
National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System permit is the regulatory agency document designed to control all discharges of
pollutants from point sources into U.S. waterways. NPDES permits regulate discharges into navigable waters from all point sources
of pollution, including industries, municipal treatment plants, large agricultural feed lots and return irrigation flows.
NEUTRALIZATION (new-trall-i-ZAY-shun) NEUTRALIZATION
Addition of an acid or alkali (base) to a liquid to cause the pH of the liquid to move towards a neutral pH of 7.0.
NITRIFICATION (NYE-tri-fi-KAY-shun) NITRIFICATION
A process in which bacteria change the ammonia and organic nitrogen in wastewater into oxidized nitrogen (usually nitrate). The
second-stage BOD is sometimes referred to as the "nitrification stage" (first-stage BOD is called the "carbonaceous stage").
NITRIFYING BACTERIA NITRIFYING BACTERIA
Bacteria that change the ammonia and organic nitrogen in wastewater into oxidized nitrogen (usually nitrate).
NITROGENOUS (nye-TROG-en-ous) NITROGENOUS
Nitrogenous compounds contain nitrogen.
NOMOGRAM NOMOGRAM
A chart or diagram containing three or more scales used to solve problems with three or more variables instead of using mathemati-
cal formulas.
NONCORRODIBLE NONCORRODIBLE
A material that resists corrosion and will not be eaten away by wastewater or chemicals in wastewater.
NONSPARKING TOOLS NONSPARKING TOOLS
These tools will not produce a spark during use.
NONVOLATILE MATTER NONVOLATILE MATTER
Material such as sand, salt, iron, calcium, and other mineral materials which are only slightly affected by the action of organisms.
Volatile materials are chemical substances usually of animal or vegetable origin. Also see INORGANIC WASTE.
NUTRIENT CYCLE NUTRIENT CYCLE
The transformation or change of a nutrient from one form to another until the nutrient has returned to the original form, thus
completing the cycle. The cycle may take place under either aerobic or anaerobic conditions.
NUTRIENTS NUTRIENTS
Substances which are required to support living plants and organisms. Major nutrients are carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, sulfur,
nitrogen and phosphorus. Nitrogen and phosphorus are difficult to remove from wastewater by conventional treatment processes
because they are water soluble and tend to recycle. Also see NUTRIENT CYCLE.
0 & M MANUAL (Operation and Maintenance Manual) O & M MANUAL
A manual which outlines procedures for operators to follow to operate and maintain a specific wastewater treatment plant and the
equipment in the plant.
OSHA OSHA
The Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1980 (OSHA) is a law designed to protect the health and safety of
industrial workers and treatment plant operators. It regulates the design, construction, operation and maintenance of industrial
plants and wastewater treatment plants. The Act does not apply directly to municipalities at present (1980), EXCEPT in those states
that have approved plans and have asserted jurisdiction under Section 18 of the OSHA Act. However, wastewater treatment plants
have come under stricter regulation in all phases of activity as a result of OSHA standards.
OBLIGATE AEROBES OBLIGATE AEROBES
Bacteria that must have molecular (dissolved) oxygen (DO) to reproduce.
ODOR PANEL ODOR PANEL
A group of people used to measure odors.
-------
424 Treatment Plants
OFFSET OFFSET
The difference between the actual value and the desired value (or set point) characteristic of proportional controllers that do not
incorporate reset action. Also called DROOP.
OLFACTOMETER (ol-FACT-tom-meter) OLFACTOMETER
A device used to measure odors in the field by diluting odors with odor-free air.
ORGANIC WASTE ORGANIC WASTE
Waste material which comes mainly from animal or vegetable sources. Organic waste generally can be consumed by bacteria and
other small organisms. Inorganic wastes are chemical substances of mineral origin.
ORGANISM ORGANISM
Any form of animal or plant life. Also see BACTERIA.
ORIFICE (OR-uh-fiss) ORIFICE
An opening in a plate, wall or partition. In a trickling filter distributor, the wastewater passes through an orifice to the surface of the
filter media. An orifice flange set in a pipe consists of a slot or hole smaller than the pipe diameter. The difference in pressure in the
pipe above and below the orifice may be related to flow in the pipe.
ORTHOTOLIDINE (or-tho-TOL-i-dine) ORTHOTOLIDINE
Orthotolidine is a colorimetric indicator of chlorine residual. If chlorine is present, a yellow-colored compound is produced. This
method is no longer approved for tests of effluent chlorine residual.
OVERFLOW RATE OVERFLOW RATE
One of the guidelines for the design of settling tanks and clarifiers in treatment plants.
Overflow Rate, gpd/sq ft = Flow, gallons/day
Surface Area, sq ft
OXIDATION (ox-i-DAY-shun) OXIDATION
Oxidation is the addition of oxygen, removal of hydrogen, or the removal of electrons from an element or compound. In wastewater
treatment, organic matter is oxidized to more stable substances. The opposite of REDUCTION.
OXIDATION-REDUCTION POTENTIAL OXIDATION-REDUCTION POTENTIAL
The electrical potential required to transfer electrons from one compound or element (the oxidant) to another compound or element
(the reductant) and used as a qualitative measure of the state of oxidation in wastewater treatment systems.
OXIDIZED ORGANICS OXIDIZED ORGANICS
Organic materials that have been broken down in a biological process. Examples of these materials are carbohydrates and proteins
that are broken down to simple sugars.
OXIDIZING AGENT OXIDIZING AGENT
An oxidizing agent is any substance, such as oxygen (02) and chlorine (Cl2), that can add (take on) electrons. When oxygen or
chlorine is added to wastewater, organic substances are oxidized. These oxidized organic substances are more stable and less
likely to give off odors or to contain disease bacteria. The opposite of REDUCING AGENT.
OZONIZATION (O-zoe-nie-ZAY-shun) OZONIZATION
The application of ozone to water, wastewater, or air, generally for the purposes of disinfection or odor control.
PACKAGE TREATMENT PLANT PACKAGE TREATMENT PLANT
A small wastewater treatment plant often fabricated at the manufacturer's factory, hauled to the site, and installed as one facility.
The package may be either a small primary or a secondary wastewater treatment plant.
PARALLEL OPERATION PARALLEL OPERATION
When wastewater being treated is split and a portion flows to one treatment unit while the remainder flows to another similar
treatment unit. Also see SERIES OPERATION.
PARASITIC BACTERIA (PAIR-a-SIT-tick) PARASITIC BACTERIA
Parasitic bacteria are those bacteria which normally live off another living organism, known as the "host."
-------
Glossary 425
PATHOGENIC BACTERIA (path-o-JEN-nick) PATHOGENIC BACTERIA
Bacteria, viruses or cysts which can cause disease (typhoid, cholera, dysentery). There are many types of bacteria which do NOT
cause disease and which are NOT called pathogenic. Many beneficial bacteria are found in wastewater treatment processes
actively cleaning up organic wastes.
PERCENT SATURATION PERCENT SATURATION
The amount of a substance that is dissolved in a solution compared with the amount that could be dissolved in the solution,
expressed as a percent.
Percent Saturation, % = Amount of Sub, that is Dissolved x 100%
Amount that Could be Dissolved in Solution
PERCOLATION (PURR-ko-LAY-shun) PERCOLATION
The movement or flow of water through soil or rocks.
PERISTALTIC PUMP (peri-STALL-tick) PERISTALTIC PUMP
A type of positive displacement pump.
pH (PEA-A-ch) pH
pH is an expression of the intensity of the alkaline or acid condition of a liquid. Mathematically, pH is the logarithm (base 10) of the
reciprocal of the hydrogen ion concentration.
pH = Log J_
(H+)
The pH may range from 0 to 14, where 0 is most acid, 14 most alkaline, and 7 is neutral. Natural waters usually have a pH between
6.5 and 8.5.
PHENOL (FEE-noll) PHENOL
An organic compound that is a derivative of benzene.
PHENOLPHTHALEIN ALKALINITY PHENOLPHTHALEIN ALKALINITY
A measure of the hydroxide ions plus one half of the normal carbonate ions in aqueous suspension. Measured by the amount of
sulfuric acid required to bring the water to a pH value of 8.3, as indicated by a change in color of phenolphthalein. It is expressed in
milligrams per liter of calcium carbonate.
PHOTOSYNTHESIS (foto-SIN-the-sis) PHOTOSYNTHESIS
A process in which organisms with the aid of chlorophyll (green plant enzyme) convert carbon dioxide and inorganic substances to
oxygen and additional plant material, utilizing sunlight for energy. All green plants grow by this process.
PHYSICAL WASTE TREATMENT PROCESS PHYSICAL WASTE TREATMENT PROCESS
Physical waste treatment processes include use of racks, screens, comminutors, and clarifiers (sedimentation and flotation).
Chemical or biological reactions are not an important part of a physical treatment process.
PLUG FLOW PLUG FLOW
A type of flow that occurs in tanks, basins or reactors when a slug of wastewater moves through a tank without ever dispersing or
mixing with the rest of the wastewater flowing through the tank.
DIRECTION
OF FLOW
PLUG FLOW
POLLUTION POLLUTION
Any change in the natural state of water which interferes with its beneficial reuse or causes failure to meet water-quality require-
ments.
POLYELECTROLYTE (POLY-electro-light) POLYELECTROLYTE
A high-molecular-weight substance that is formed by either a natural or synthetic process. Natural polyelectrolytes may be of
biological origin or derived from starch products, cellulose derivatives, and alignates. Synthetic polyelectrolytes consist of simple
substances that have been made into complex, high-molecular-weight substances. Often called a "polymer."
-------
426 Treatment Plants
POLYMER (POLY-mer) POLYMER
A high-molecular-weight substance that is formed by either a natural or synthetic process. Natural polymers may be of biological
origin or derived from starch products, cellulose derivatives, and alignates. Synthetic polymers consist of simple substances that
have been made into complex, high-molecular-weight substances. Often called a "polyelectrolyte."
POLYSACCHARIDE (polly-SAC-a-ride) POLYSACCHARIDE
A carbohydrate such as starch, insulin or cellulose.
PONDING PONDING
A condition occurring on trickling filters when the hollow spaces (voids) become plugged to the extent that water passage through
the filter is inadequate. Ponding may be the result of excessive slime growths, trash, or media breakdown.
POPULATION EQUIVALENT POPULATION EQUIVALENT
A means of expressing the strength of organic material in wastewater. In a domestic wastewater system, microorganisms use up
about 0.2 pounds of oxygen per day for each person using the system (as measured by the standard BOD test).
Pop Equiv ¦= Flow, MGD x BOD, mg/L x 8.34 lbs/gal
persons 0.2 lbs BOD/day/person
POSTCHLORINATION POSTCHLORINATION
The addition of chlorine to the plant discharge or effluent, FOLLOWING plant treatment, for disinfection purposes.
POTABLE WATER (POE-ta-bl) POTABLE WATER
Water that does not contain objectionable pollution, contamination, minerals, or infective agents and is considered safe for domestic
consumption.
PRE-AE RATION PRE-AERATION
The addition of air at the initial stages of treatment to freshen the wastewater, remove gases, add oxygen, promote flotation of
grease, and aid coagulation.
PRECHLORINATION PRECHLORINATION
The addition of chlorine at the headworks of the plant PRIOR TO other treatment processes mainly for odor and corrosion control.
Also applied to aid disinfection, to reduce plant BOD load, to aid in settling, to control foaming in Imhoff units and to help remove oil.
PRECIPITATE (pre-SIP-i-TATE) PRECIPITATE
To separate (a substance) out in solid form from a solution, as by the use of a reagent. The substance precipitated.
PRECOAT PRECOAT
Application of a free-draining, non-cohesive material such as diatomaceous earth to a filtering media. Precoating reduces the
frequency of media washing and facilitates cake discharge.
PRETREATMENT PRETREATMENT
The removal of metal, rocks, rags, sand, eggshells, and similar materials which may hinder the operation of a treatment plant.
Pretreatment is accomplished by using equipment such as racks, bar screens, comminutors, and grit removal systems.
PRIMARY TREATMENT PRIMARY TREATMENT
A wastewater treatment process that takes place in a rectangular or circular tank and allows those substances in wastewater that
readily settle or float to be separated from the water being treated.
PROCESS VARIABLE PROCESS VARIABLE
A physical or chemical quantity which is usually measured and controlled.
PROTEINACEOUS (PRO-ten-NAY-shus) PROTEINACEOUS
Materials containing proteins which are organic compounds containing nitrogen.
PROTOZOA (pro-toe-ZOE-ah) PROTOZOA
A group of microscopic animals (usually single-celled) that sometimes cluster into colonies.
PRUSSIAN BLUE PRUSSIAN BLUE
A paste or liquid used to show a contact area. Used to determine if gate valve seats fit properly.
PSYCHROPHILIC BACTERIA (sy-kro-FILL-lick) PSYCHROPHILIC BACTERIA
Cold temperature bacteria. A group of bacteria that grow and thrive in temperatures below 68°F (20°C).
-------
Glossary 427
PURGE PURGE
To remove a gas or vapor from a vessel, reactor or confined space.
PUTREFACTION (PEW-tree-FACK-shun) PUTREFACTION
Biological decomposition of organic matter with the production of ill-smelling products associated with anaerobic conditions.
PUTRESCIBLE (pew-TRES-uh-bull) PUTRESCIBLE
Material that will decompose under anaerobic conditions and produce nuisance odors.
PYROMETER (pie-ROM-uh-ter) PYROMETER
An apparatus used to measure high temperatures.
RACK RACK
Evenly spaced parallel metal bars or rods located in the influent channel to remove rags, rocks, and cans from wastewater.
RAW WASTEWATER RAW WASTEWATER
Plant influent or wastewater before any treatment.
REAGENT (re-A-gent) REAGENT
A substance which takes part in a chemical reaction and is used to measure, detect, or examine other substances.
RECALCINE (re-CAL-seen) RECALCINE
A lime-recovery process in which the calcium carbonate in sludge is converted to lime by heating at 1800°F (980°C).
RECARBONATION (re-CAR-bun-NAY-shun) RECARBONATION
A process in which carbon dioxide is bubbled through the water being treated to lower the pH.
RECEIVING WATER RECEIVING WATER
A stream, river, lake or ocean into which treated or untreated wastewater is discharged.
RECHARGE RATE RECHARGE RATE
Rate at which water is added beneath the ground surface to replenish or recharge groundwater.
RECIRCULATION RECIRCULATION
The return of part of the effluent from a treatment process to the incoming flow.
REDUCING AGENT REDUCING AGENT
A reducing agent is any substance, such as the chloride ion (Cl~) and sulfide ion (S-2), that can give up electrons. The opposite of
OXIDIZING AGENT.
REDUCTION (re-DUCK-shun) REDUCTION
Reduction is the addition of hydrogen, removal of oxygen, or the addition of electrons to an element or compound. Under anaerobic
conditions in wastewater, sulfate compounds or elemental sulfur are reduced to odor-producing hydrogen sulfide (H2S) or the
sulfide ion (S 2). The opposite of OXIDATION.
RELIQUEFACTION (re-LICK-we-FACK-shun) RELIQUEFACTION
The return of a gas to a liquid. For example, a condensation of chlorine gas returning to the liquid form.
REFRACTORY MATERIALS (re-FRACK-tory) REFRACTORY MATERIALS
Material difficult to remove entirely from wastewater such as nutrients, color, taste- and odor-producing substances and some toxic
materials.
REPRESENTATIVE SAMPLE REPRESENTATIVE SAMPLE
A portion of material or water identical in content to that in the larger body of material or water being sampled.
RESIDUAL CHLORINE RESIDUAL CHLORINE
Residual chlorine is the amount of chlorine remaining after a given contact time and under specific conditions.
RESPIRATION RESPIRATION
The process in which an organism uses oxygen for its life processes and gives off carbon dioxide.
-------
428 Treatment Plants
RETENTION TIME RETENTION TIME
The time water, sludge or solids are retained or held in a clarifier or sedimentation tank. See DETENTION TIME.
RIPRAP RIPRAP
Broken stones, boulders, or other materials placed compactly or irregularly on levees or dikes for the protection of earth surfaces
against the erosive action of waves.
RISING SLUDGE RISING SLUDGE
Rising sludge occurs in the secondary clarifiers of activated sludge plants when the sludge settles to the bottom of the clarifier, is
compacted, and then starts to rise to the surface, usually as a result of denitrification.
ROTAMETER ROTAMETER
A device used to measure the flow rate of gases and liquids. The gas or liquid being measured flows vertically up a calibrated tube.
Inside the tube is a small ball or a bullet-shaped float (it may rotate) that rises or falls depending on the flow rate. The flow rate may
be read on a scale behind the middle of the ball or the top of the float.
ROTARY PUMP ROTARY PUMP
A type of displacement pump consisting essentially of elements rotating in a pump case which they closely fit. The rotation of these
elements alternately draws in and discharges the water being pumped. Such pumps act with neither suction nor discharge valves,
operate at almost any speed, and do not depend on centrifugal forces to lift the water.
ROTIFERS (ROE-ti-fers) ROTIFERS
Microscopic animals characterized by short hairs on their front end.
SAR (Sodium Adsorption Ratio) SAR
This ratio expresses the relative activity of sodium ions in the exchange reactions with soil. The ratio is defined as follows:
SAR = Na
[V2 (Ca + Mg)
where Na, Ca, and Mg are concentrations of the respective ions in milliequivalents per liter of water.
Na, meqIL = Na. mg,/. Qa meq//_ = Ca, mg L
23.0 mg/meq 20.0 mg/meq
Mg, meq/i. = Mg, mg;/.
12.15 mg/meq
SCFM SCFM
Cubic Feet of air per Minute at Standard conditions of temperature and pressure.
SVI (Sludge Volume Index) SVI
This is a test used to indicate the settling ability of activated sludge (aerated solids) in the secondary clarifier. The test is a measure
of the volume of sludge compared with its weight. Allow the sludge sample from the aeration tank to settle for 30 minutes. Then
calculate SVI by dividing the volume (ml) of wet settled sludge by the weight (mg) of that sludge after it has been dried. Sludge with
an SVI of one hundred or greater will not settle as readily as desirable because it is as light as or lighter than water.
SVI = ^et Settled Sludge, ml x 1000
Dried Sludge Solids, mg
SANITARY SEWER (SAN-eh-tare-ee SUE-er) SANITARY SEWER
A sewer intended to carry wastewater from homes, businesses, and industries. Storm water runoff should be collected and
transported in a separate system of pipes.
SAPROPHYTIC ORGANISMS (SAP-pro-FIT-tik) SAPROPHYTIC ORGANISMS
Organisms living on dead or decaying organic matter. They help natural decomposition of the organic solids in wastewater.
SCREEN SCREEN
A device used to retain or remove suspended or floating objects in wastewater. The screen has openings that are generally uniform
in size. It retains or removes objects larger than the openings. A screen may consist of bars, rods, wires, gratings, wire mesh, or
perforated plates.
SEALING WATER SEALING WATER
Water used to prevent wastewater or dirt from reaching moving parts. Sealing water is at a higher pressure than the wastewater it is
keeping out of a mechanical device.
-------
Glossary 429
SECCHI DISC (SECK-key) SECCHI DISC
A flat, white disc lowered into the water by a rope until it is just barely visible. At this point, the depth of the disc from the water
surface is the recorded secchi disc reading.
SECONDARY TREATMENT SECONDARY TREATMENT
A wastewater treatment process used to convert dissolved or suspended materials into a form more readily separated from the
water being treated. Usually the process follows primary treatment by sedimentation. The process commonly is a type of biological
treatment process followed by secondary clarifiers that allow the solids to settle out from the water being treated.
SEED SLUDGE SEED SLUDGE
In wastewater treatment, seed, seed culture or seed sludge refers to a mass of sludge which contains very concentrated populations
of microorganisms. When a seed sludge is mixed with the wastewater or sludge being treated, the process of biological decomposi-
tion takes place more rapidly.
SEIZING SEIZING
Seizing occurs when an engine overheats and a component expands so the engine will not run. Also called "freezing."
SEPTIC (SEP-tick) SEPTIC
This condition is produced by anaerobic bacteria. If severe, the wastewater turns black, gives off foul odors, contains little or no
dissolved oxygen and creates a heavy oxygen demand.
SEPTICITY (sep-TIS-it-tee) SEPTICITY
Septicity is the condition in which organic matter decomposes to form foul-smelling products associated with the absence of free
oxygen. If severe, the wastewater turns black, gives off foul odors, contains little or no dissolved oxygen and creates a heavy oxygen
demand.
SERIES OPERATION SERIES OPERATION
When wastewater being treated flows through one treatment unit and then flows through another similar treatment unit. Also see
PARALLEL OPERATION.
SET POINT SET POINT
The position at which the control or controller is set. This is the same as the desired value of the process variable.
SEWAGE SEWAGE
The used water and solids from homes that flow to a treatment plant. The preferred term is wastewater.
SHEAR PIN SHEAR PIN
A straight pin with a groove around the middle that will weaken the pin and cause it to fail when a certain load or stress is exceeded.
The purpose of the pin is to protect equipment from damage due to excessive loads or stresses.
SHOCK LOAD SHOCK LOAD
The arrival at a plant of a waste which is toxic to organisms in sufficient quantity or strength to cause operating problems. Possible
problems include odors and sloughing off of the growth or slime on the trickling-filter media. Organic or hydraulic overloads also can
cause a shock load.
SHORT-CIRCUITING SHORT-CIRCUITING
A condition that occurs in tanks or ponds when some of the water or wastewater travels faster than the rest of the flowing water.
SHREDDING SHREDDING
Comminution. A mechanical treatment process which cuts large pieces of wastes into smaller pieces so they won't plug pipes or
damage equipment. SHREDDING and COMMINUTION usually mean the same thing.
SIDESTREAM SIDESTREAM
Wastewater flows that develop from other storage or treatment facilities. This wastewater may or may not need additional treatment.
SIGNIFICANT FIGURE SIGNIFICANT FIGURE
The number of accurate numbers in a measurement. If the distance between two points is measured to the nearest hundredth and
recorded as 238.41 feet, the measurement has five significant figures.
SINGLE-STAGE PUMP SINGLE-STAGE PUMP
A pump that has only one impeller. A multi-stage pump has more than one impeller.
-------
430 Treatment Plants
SKATOLE (SKATE-tole) SKATOLE
An organic compound (C9H9N) containing nitrogen which has a fecal odor.
SLAKE SLAKE
To become mixed with water so that a true chemical reaction takes place, such as in the slaking of lime.
SLOUGHINGS (SLUFF-ings) SLOUGHINGS
Trickling-filter slimes that have been washed off the filter media. They are generally quite high in BOD and will lower efftuent quality
unless removed.
SLUDGE (sluj) SLUDGE
The settleable solids separated from liquids during processing or the deposits of foreign materials on the bottoms of streams or
other bodies of water.
SLUDGE AGE SLUDGE AGE
A measure of the length of time a particle of suspended solids has been undergoing aeration in the activated sludge process.
Sludge Age days = Suspended Solids Under Aeration, lbs or kg
Suspended Solids Added, lbs/day or kg/day
SLUDGE DENSITY INDEX (SDI) SLUDGE DENSITY INDEX (SDI)
This test is used in a way similar to the Sludge Volume Index (SVI) to indicate the settleability of a sludge in a secondary clarifier or
effluent. SDI = 100/SVI. Also see SLUDGE VOLUME INDEX (SVI).
SLUDGE DIGESTION SLUDGE DIGESTION
The process of changing organic matter in sludge into a gas or a liquid or a more stable solid form. These changes take place as
microorganisms feed on sludge in anaerobic (more common) or aerobic digesters.
SLUDGE GASIFICATION SLUDGE GASIFICATION
A process in which soluble and suspended organic matter are converted into gas by anaerobic decomposition. The resulting gas
bubbles can become attached to the settled sludge and cause large clumps of sludge to rise and float on the water surface.
SLUDGE VOLUME INDEX (SVI) SLUDGE VOLUME INDEX (SVI)
This is a test used to indicate the settling ability of activated sludge (aerated solids) in the secondary clarifier. The test is a measure
of the volume of sludge compared with its weight. Allow the sludge sample from the aeration tank to settle for 30 minutes. Then
calculate SVI by dividing the volume (ml) of wet settled sludge by the weight (mg) of that sludge after it has been dried. Sludge with
an SVI of one hundred or greater will not settle as readily as desirable because it is as light as or lighter than water.
SVI = We* Settled Sludge, ml x 1000
Dried Sludge Solids, mg
SLUDGE-VOLUME RATIO (SVR) SLUDGE-VOLUME RATIO (SVR)
The volume of sludge blanket divided by the daily volume of sludge pumped from the thickener.
SLUGS SLUGS
Intermittent releases or discharges of industrial wastes.
SLURRY (SLUR-e) SLURRY
A thin watery mud or any substance resembling it (such as a grit slurry or a lime slurry).
SODIUM ADSORPTION RATIO (SAR) SODIUM ABSORPTION RATIO (SAR)
This ratio expresses the relative activity of sodium ions in the exchange reactions with soil. The ratio is defined as follows:
SAR =
[Vz (Ca + Mg)]1/2
where Na, Ca, and Mg are concentrations of the respective ions in milliequivalents per liter of water.
Na, meqIL = Na'm9/L Ca, meq/L = C^mg/L
23.0 mg/meq 20.0 mg/meq
Mg, meqIL = M?img/L-—
12.15 mg/meq
SOLUBLE BOD SOLUBLE BOD
Soluble BOD is the BOD of water that has been filtered in the standard suspended solids test.
-------
Glossary 431
SOLUTE SOLUTE
The substance dissolved in a solution. A solution is made up of the solvent and the solute.
SOLUTION SOLUTION
A liquid mixture of dissolved substances. In a solution it is impossible to see all the separate parts.
SPECIFIC GRAVITY SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Weight of a particle or substance in relation to the weight of water. Water has a specific gravity of 1.000 at 4°C (or 39°F). Wastewater
particles usually have a specific gravity of 0.5 to 2.5.
SPLASH PAD SPLASH PAD
A structure made of concrete or other durable material to protect bare soil from erosion by splashing or falling water.
STABILIZE STABILIZE
To convert to a form that resists change. Organic material is stabilized by bacteria which convert the material to gases and other
relatively inert substances. Stabilized organic material generally will not give off obnoxious odors.
STABILIZED WASTE STABILIZED WASTE
A waste that has been treated or decomposed to the extent that, if discharged or released, its rate and state of decomposition would
be such that the waste would not cause a nuisance or odors.
STANDARD SOLUTION STANDARD SOLUTION
A solution in which the exact concentration of a chemical or compound is known.
STANDARDIZE ' STANDARDIZE
(1) To compare with a standard. In wet chemistry, to find out the exact strength of a solution by comparing with a standard of known
strength. This information is used to adjust the strength by adding more water or more of the substance dissolved. (2) To compare
an instrument or device with a standard. This helps you to adjust the instrument so that it reads accurately or to prepare a scale,
graph or chart that is accurate.
STASIS (STAY-sis) STASIS
Stagnation or inactivity of the life processes within organisms.
STATIC HEAD STATIC HEAD
When water is not moving, the distance (in feet or meters) from a point to the water surface.
STATOR STATOR
That portion of a machine which contains the stationary (non-moving) parts that surround the moving parts.
STEP-FEED AERATION STEP-FEED AERATION
Step-feed aeration is a modification of the conventional activated sludge process. In step aeration, primary effluent enters the
aeration tank at several points along the length of the tank, rather than all of the primary effluent entering at the beginning or head of
the tank and flowing through the entire tank.
STERILIZATION (star-uh-luh-ZAY-shun) STERILIZATION
The removal or destruction of all living microorganisms, including pathogenic and saprophytic bacteria, vegetative forms and
spores. Compare with DISINFECTION.
STETHOSCOPE STETHOSCOPE
An instrument used to magnify sounds and convey them to the ear.
STOP LOG STOP LOG
A log or board in an outlet box or device used to control the water level in ponds.
STORM SEWER STORM SEWER
A separate sewer that carries runoff from storms, surface drainage, and street wash, but does not include domestic and industrial
wastes.
STRIPPED GASES STRIPPED GASES
Gases that are released from a liquid by bubbling air through the liquid or by allowing the liquid to be sprayed or tumbled over media.
-------
432 Treatment Plants
STRIPPED ODORS STRIPPED ODORS
Odors that are released from a liquid by bubbling air through the liquid or by allowing the liquid to be sprayed and/or tumbled over
media.
STUCK STUCK
Not working. A stuck digester does not decompose organic matter properly. The digester is characterized by low gas production,
high volatile acid to alkalinity relationship, and poor liquid-solids separation. A digester in a stuck condition is sometimes called a
"sour" or "upset" digester.
SUCTION HEAD SUCTION HEAD
The pressure (in feet (meters) or pounds per square inch (kilograms per square centimeter)) on the suction side of a pump. The
pressure can be measured from the center line of the pump UP TO the elevation of the hydraulic grade line on the suction side of the
pump.
SUCTION LIFT SUCTION LIFT
The NEGATIVE pressure (in feet (meters) or inches (centimeters) of mercury vacuum) on the suction side of the pump. The pressure
can be measured from the center line of the pump DOWN to the elevation of the hydraulic grade line on the suction side of the pump.
SUPERNATANT (sue-per-NAY-tent) SUPERNATANT
Liquid removed from settled sludge. Supernatant commonly refers to the liquid between the sludge on the bottom and the scum on
the surface of an anaerobic digester. This liquid is usually returned to the influent wet well or to the primary clarifier.
SURFACE LOADING SURFACE LOADING
Surface loading is calculated by dividing the flow into a sedimentation tank or a clarifier by the surface area of the unit.
Surface Loading, gpd/sq ft = Flow, gpd
Surface Area, sq ft
SURFACTANT SURFACTANT
Abbreviation for surface-active agent. The active agent in detergents that possesses a high cleaning ability.
SUSPENDED SOLIDS SUSPENDED SOLIDS
(1) Solids that either float on the surface of, or are in suspension in, water, wastewater, or other liquids, and which are largely
removable by laboratory filtering. (2) The quantity of material removed from wastewater in a laboratory test, as prescribed in
STANDARD METHODS FOR THE EXAMINATION OF WATER AND WASTEWATER and referred to as nonfilterable residue.
TOC TOC
Total Organic Carbon. TOC measures the amount of organic carbon in water.
TERTIARY TREATMENT (TER-she-AIR-ee) TERTIARY TREATMENT
Any process of water renovation that upgrades treated wastewater to meet specific reuse requirements. May include general
cleanup of water or removal of specific parts of wastes insufficiently removed by conventional treatment processes. Typical
processes include chemical treatment and pressure filtration. Also called ADVANCED WASTE TREATMENT.
THERMOPHILIC BACTERIA (thermo-FILL-lick) THERMOPHILIC BACTERIA
Hot temperature bacteria. A group of bacteria that grow and thrive in temperatures above 113°F (45°C). The optimum temperature
range for these bacteria in anaerobic decomposition is 120°F (49°C) to 135' F (57°C).
THIEF HOLE THIEF HOLE
A digester sampling well.
THRESHOLD ODOR THRESHOLD ODOR
The minimum odor of a sample (gas or water) that can just be detected after successive odorless (gas or water) dilutions.
TIME LAG TIME LAG
The time required for processes and control systems to respond to a signal or to reach a desired level.
TITRATE (TIE-trate) TITRATE
To TITRATE a sample, a chemical solution of known strength is added on a drop-by-drop basis until a color change, precipitate, or
pH change in the sample is observed (end point). Titration is the process of adding the chemical solution to completion of the
reaction as signaled by the end point.
-------
Glossary 433
TOTAL DYNAMIC HEAD (TDH) TOTAL DYNAMIC HEAD (TDH)
When a pump is lifting or pumping water, the vertical distance (in feet or meters) from the elevation of the energy grade line on the
suction side of the pump to the elevation of the energy grade line on the discharge side of the pump.
TOTAL RESIDUAL CHLORINE TOTAL RESIDUAL CHLORINE
The amount of chlorine remaining after a given contact time. The sum of the combined available residual chlorine and the free
available residual chlorine. Also see RESIDUAL CHLORINE.
TOTALIZER TOTALIZER
A device that continuously sums or adds the flow into a plant in gallons or million gallons or some other unit of measurement.
TOXIC (TOX-ick) TOXIC
Poisonous.
TOXICITY (tox-IS-it-tee) TOXICITY
A condition which may exist in wastes and will inhibit or destroy the growth or function of certain organisms.
TRANSPIRATION (TRAN-spear-RAY-shun) TRANSPIRATION
The process by which water vapor is lost to the atmosphere from living plants.
TRICKLING FILTER TRICKLING FILTER
A treatment process in which the wastewater trickles over media that provide the opportunity for the formation of slimes or biomass
which contain organisms that feed upon and remove wastes from the water treated.
TRICKLING-FILTER MEDIA TRICKLING-FILTER MEDIA
Rocks or other durable materials that make up the body of the filter. Synthetic (manufactured) media have been used successfully.
TRUNK SEWER TRUNK SEWER
A sewer that receives wastewater from many tributary branches or sewers and serves a large territory and contributing population.
TURBID TURBID
Having a cloudy or muddy appearance.
TURBIDITY METER TURBIDITY METER
An instrument for measuring the amount of particles suspended in water. Precise measurements are made by measuring how light
is scattered by the suspended particles. The normal measuring range is 0 to 100 and is expressed as Nephelometric Turbidity Units
(NTU's).
TURBIDITY UNITS TURBIDITY UNITS
Turbidity units, if measured by nephelometric (reflected light) instrumental procedure, are expressed in nephelometric turbidity units
(NTU). Those turbidity units obtained by other instrumental methods or visual methods are expressed in Jackson Turbidity Units
(JTU) and sometimes as Formazin Turbidity Units (FTU). The FTU nomenclature comes from the Formazin polymer used to
prepare the turbidity standards for instrument calibration. Turbidity units are a measure of the cloudiness of water.
TWO-STAGE FILTERS TWO-STAGE FILTERS
Two filters are used. Effluent from the first filter goes to the second filter, either directly or after passing through a clarifier.
ULTRIFICATION ULTRIFICATION
A membrane process used for the removal of organic compounds in an aqueous (watery) solution.
UPSET UPSET
An upset digester does not decompose organic matter properly. The digester is characterized by low gas production, high volatile
acid/alkalinity relationship, and poor liquid-solids separation. A digester in an upset condition is sometimes called a "sour" or "stuck"
digester.
VELOCITY HEAD VELOCITY HEAD
A vertical height (in feet or meters) equal to the square of the velocity of flowing water divided by twice the acceleration due to gravity
(V2/2g).
VOLATILE (VOL-a-til) VOLATILE
A volatile substance is one that is capable of being evaporated or changed to a vapor at relatively low temperatures.
-------
434 Treatment Plants
VOLATILE ACIDS
VOLATILE ACIDS
Acids produced during digestion. Fatty acids which are soluble in water and can be steam-distilled at atmospheric pressure. Also
called "organic acids." Volatile acids are commonly reported as equivalent to acetic acid.
VOLATILE LIQUIDS
VOLATILE SOLIDS
VOLATILE LIQUIDS
Liquids which easily vaporize or evaporate at room temperature.
VOLATILE SOLIDS
Those solids in water, wastewater, or other liquids that are lost on ignition of the dry solids at 550°C.
VOLUMETRIC VOLUMETRIC
A means of measuring unknown concentrations of water quality indicators in a sample BY DETERMINING THE VOLUME of titrant or
liquid reagent needed to complete particular reactions.
VOLUTE (vol-LOOT) VOLUTE
The spiral-shaped casing which surrounds a pump, blower, or turbine impeller and collects the liquid or gas discharged by the
impeller.
WASTEWATER WASTEWATER
The used water and solids from a community that flow to a treatment plant. Storm water, surface water, and groundwater infiltration
also may be included in the wastewater that enters a plant. The term "sewage" usually refers to household wastes, but this word is
being replaced by the term "wastewater."
WATER HAMMER WATER HAMMER
The sound like someone hammering on a pipe that occurs when a valve is opened or closed very rapidly. When a valve position is
changed quickly, the water pressure in a pipe will increase and decrease back and forth very quickly. This rise and fall in pressures
can do serious damage to the system.
WEIR (weer)
WEIR
(1) A wall or plate placed in an open channel and used to measure the flow. The depth of the flow over the weir can be used to
calculate the flow rate, or a chart or conversion table may be used. (2) A wall or obstruction used to control flow (from clarifiers) to
assure uniform flow and avoid short-circuiting.
WEIR DIAMETER (weer)
Many circular clarifiers have a circular weir within the outside edge of
the clarifier. All the water leaving the clarifier flows over this weir. The
diameter of the weir is the length of a line from one edge of a weir to
the opposite edge and passing through the center of the circle formed
by the weir.
WEIR DIAMETER
DIANETeft
CROSS SECTION
WEIR, PROPORTIONAL
WEIR, PROPORTIONAL (weer)
A specially shaped weir in which the flow through the weir is directly proportional to the head.
WET OXIDATION WET OXIDATION
A method of treating or conditioning sludge before the water is removed. Compressed air is blown into the liquid sludge. The air and
sludge mixture is fed into a pressure vessel where the organic material is stabilized. The stabilized organic material and inert
(inorganic) solids are then separated from the pressure vessel effluent by dewatering in lagoons or by mechanical means.
WET WELL WET WELL
A compartment or room in which wastewater is collected. The suction pipe of a pump may be connected to the wet well or a
submersible pump may be located in the wet well.
Y, GROWTH RATE Y, GROWTH RATE
An experimentally determined constant to estimate the unit growth rate of bacteria while degrading organic wastes.
ZOOGLEAL FILM (ZOE-glee-al) ZOOGLEAL FILM
A complex population of organisms that form a "slime growth" on the trickling-filter media and break down the organic matter in
wastewater. These slimes consist of living organisms feeding on the wastes in wastewater, dead organisms, silt, and other debris.
"Slime growth" is a more common word.
ZOOGLEAL MASS (ZOE-glee-al) ZOOGLEAL MASS
Jelly-like masses of bacteria found in both the trickling filter and activated sludge processes. These masses may be formed for or
function as the protection against predators and for storage of food supplies. Also see BIOMASS.
-------
Index 435
SUBJECT INDEX
VOLUME I
A
Abnormal operation
activated sludge, 251
aerated grit chambers, 87
chlorination, 345
chlorinators, 345, 346, 348
grit channels, 85
oxidation ditches, 262, 263
ponds, 292
primary treatment, 118
rotating biological contactors, 218
sedimentation, 118
sulfonator, 386
trickling filters, 176
Activated carbon, dechlorination, 376
Activated sludge
Also see Package aeration plants
and Chapters 11 and 21
abnormal operation, 251
aeration methods, 43, 247
aeration tank, 44, 241
aerobic digestion, 243
bulking, 251
centrifuge tests, 241
chlorination, 251
clarifiers, 130, 134, 236, 241, 251, 252
cold weather, 251
complete mix, 246, 247
contact stabilization, 246, 247
contact time, 236, 241, 252
control of process, 241, 242
conventional activated sludge, 230
also see Chapter 11
description, 42, 236
diffusers, 247, 249, 267
dissolved oxygen, 241
efficiency of process, 242
effluent, 241, 242, 250, 251
energy use, 267
extended aeration, 243, 246
flow diagram, 35, 239, 240
foam, 250, 251
food/microorganism ratio, 236, 257
housekeeping, 251,253
hydraulic loading, 241, 242, 251
influent, 236, 242
industrial waste treatment, 230, 242, 267
also see Chapter 21
inspecting new facilities, 247
layout, 35, 238, 240, 246
maintenance, 247, 250, 253, 267
mass, 241
mechanical aeration, 247, 248
microorganisms, 236, 237, 241, 242, 251
mixed liquor suspended solids, 243, 247, 252
mixing, 241
odors, 241, 250, 251
operation, 242, 250, 267
operational strategy, 242, 251
organisms, 241,242
oxidation, 236
oxidation ditch, 254
oxygen requirements, 241, 242
package plants, 42, 243
plans and specifications, 267
pretreatment requirements, 236, 241
pure oxygen, 230
also see Chapter 21
purpose, 236, 243
record keeping, 247, 250, 252
removal efficiencies, 42
removal of sludge, 43
return sludge, 134, 250, 251
safety, 242, 252
sampling, 252
secondary clarifiers, 236, 241, 251, 252
settleability tests, 241, 252
shutdown, 251
sludge age, 243
sludge blanket, 241
sludge pumps, 130
sludge removal, 130
sludge wasting, 43, 134, 241, 243, 250, 252
solids, 134, 241
stabilize, 236
start up, 247, 250
storm flows, 251
temperature, 251
toxic wastes, 242, 251
trend chart, 252
troubleshooting, 251
types of processes, 243
visual inspection, 250, 252
wasting sludge, 43, 134, 241, 243, 250, 252
zoogleal bacteria, 236
Advanced waste treatment, 37, 49
Aerated grit chamber, 85
Aerated pond, 293
Aeration systems, activated sludge, 43, 247
Aeration tank appearance, activated sludge, 250, 252
Aeration tanks, activated sludge, 44, 241
Aerobic digestion
also see Chapter 12
description, 45,243
package plant, 243
sludge disposal, 51
sludge handling, 45
Aerobic ponds, 45
Aerobic process
activated sludge, 42, 227
-------
436 Treatment Plants
ponds, 275
rotating biological contactor, 42, 197
trickling filter, 42, 155
Agglomerate, 241
Air flotation, 136
Air gap, 344
Air-lift pumps, 243
Air padding, 356
Algae, 21, 281
Alkalinity test
see Chapter 16
Ambient temperature, 371
Amoebic dysentery, 329
Amperometric, 338
Anaerobic digester
see Chapter 12
Anaerobic digestion
also see Chapter 12
description, 45
mixing, 45
sludge disposal, 50
sludge handling, 45
Anaerobic ponds, 45, 284, 286, 287
Annual operating reports
see Chapter 19
Ascaris (giant roundworm), 329
Axial flow pumps
see Chapter 15
B
BOD, 39, 174
BOD, soluble, 210
Bacillary dysentery, 329
Bar screens
automatic controls, 68
cleaning methods, 62
description, 37, 62
disposal of screenings, 64, 68, 69
failure, 64
head loss, 64, 68
layout, 65
maintenance, 64, 68
manually cleaned, 64, 66
mechanically cleaned, 66, 67
operation, 68
operational strategy, 93
parts, 67
purpose, 67
safety, 64, 67
shutdown, 68
start up, 68
troubleshooting, 68
Barminutor
description, 38, 77
head loss, 77
maintenance, 77
operational strategy, 93
parts, 77
picture, 78, 79, 80
purpose, 77
safety, 77
shutdown, 77
start up, 77
troubleshooting, 77
Batch feed, ponds, 286, 290, 292
Beds, sludge
see Chapter 12
Belt drives, pump maintenance
see Chapter 15
Biochemical oxygen demand, 39, 174
Biodegradable, 202
Bioflocculation, 288
Biological contactors
abnormal operation, 218
advantages, 210
alkalinity, 214
biomass, 213, 216
bulkhead, 202, 214
clarifiers, 202
clearances, 213
cold weather, 202
contact time, 214
covered, 202, 210, 222
description, 202, 204, 205
drive units, 210, 220, 221
efficiency of process, 210, 214
effluent, 210, 214, 216
energy use, 210
equalization tanks, 210, 216
flow diagram, 203
flow equalization tanks, 210, 216
growth, 202, 216
holding tanks, 202
housekeeping, 219
hydraulic balance, 213
hydraulic loading, 210, 214, 222, 223
influent, 214, 216
industrial waste treatment, 214
inspecting new contactors, 213
layout, 207
limitations, 210
loadings, 222
lubrication, 213, 218, 219
maintenance, 210, 213, 218, 219
media, 202, 205, 206, 216, 219
metric calculations, 223, 224
nitrogen removal, 210, 214, 222, 223
odors, 216, 217, 218
operation, 213
operational strategy, 213
organic loading, 210, 214, 216, 222, 223
parts, 208
performance, 214
pH, 214
plans and specifications, 222
power outage, 218
pretreatment requirements, 210
purpose, 208
recirculation, 213, 214, 216
record keeping, 213
rotation of media, 213
safety, 213, 218, 222
sampling, 214
shutdown, 218
slime growth, 202, 213, 216
sloughing, 202, 213, 216, 218
sludge deposits, 216
speed of rotation, 213
stages, 202
start up, 210
sulfur compounds, 216
supernatant treatment, 216
temperature, 202, 213, 214, 222
time of contact, 214
toxic wastes, 216
trend chart, 215
troubleshooting, 213, 214, 217, 220
underdrain, 208
visual inspection, 213, 216, 217
Biological filter
-------
rotating biological contactor, 42
trickling filter, 42
Biological growth
rotating biological contactor, 202, 216
trickling filter, 161
Biological process, effects of industrial wastes
see Toxic wastes
Biological treatment, 30, 42
Biomass, rotating biological contactor, 213, 216
Blowers, activated sludge, 247
also see Chapter 11
Bourdon tube
see Chapter 26
Breakout of chlorine, 350
Breakpoint chlorination, 333
Bubble pipe, level measurement
see Chapter 15
Bulking
also see Chapter 11
sludge, 120
toxic waste, 120
C
Carbon absorption, physical chemical treatment
see Chapter 28
Carbon regeneration, physical chemical treatment
see Chapter 28
Carbon usage, management
see Chapter 28
Cathodic protection, 247, 386
Centrifugal pumps
see Chapter 15
Centrifuges
operation, see Chapter 22
sludge dewatering, 45
Chemical characteristics, wastewater, 16
Chemical conditioning
see Chapter 22
Chemical feed, physical chemical treatment
see Chapters 23 and 28
Chlorination
abnormal operation, 345
activated sludge, 375
application points, 335, 336
BOD reduction, 375
baffles, 333
breakout of chlorine, 350
breakpoint, 333, 334
chlorinator control, 338
collection system, 336
contact time, 333
container storage, 345
containers, 356
control of process, 338
corrosion control, 375
description, 329
diffusers, 342
disinfection, 50, 349
dosage, 335, 338
emergency repair kits, 365
evaporators, 345
flow diagram, 330
gas, 344
grease, 375
hypochlorination, 333, 341
injectors, 344, 347
leaks, 364
liquid, 344
measurement of residual, 342
mixing, 333, 339, 342, 350
nomogram, 339
odor control, 349, 374
operation, 345
operational strategy, 349
pH, 331, 333
plans and specifications, 371, 374
plant chlorination, 336
points of application, 336
postchlorination, 336
prechlorination, 336
process control, 338, 349
protection of structures, 375
purpose, 329
reactions of chlorine, 331
record keeping, 371
repair kits, 365
requirements, 333
residual, 338
safety, 354
also see Chlorine safety
sedimentation, 375
short-circuiting, 333, 339, 350
shutdown, 349
solution lines, 342
start up, 342, 344
storage for containers, 345
temperature, 333
trickling filters, 171, 375
troubleshooting, 350, 351, 352
water supply, 344
Chlorinators
abnormal operation, 345, 346, 348
chlorine residual control, 338
compound-loop control, 338
connections, 362
container storage, 345
controls, 338, 367
corrosion, 346
description, 366
dew point test, 344
differences, 386
electrolysis, 346
evaporators, 344, 345, 366, 370
filters, 366
flow-proportional control, 338
gas, 344
injectors, 344, 347, 373
installation, 371, 373
leaks, 344, 364
liquid, 344
maintenance, 366, 371
manual control, 338, 349
moisture, 344
operation, 345
operational strategy, 349
orifice, 366
parts, 369
piping, 323
plans and specifications, 371, 374
purpose, 366
record keeping, 371
residual control, 338, 347
safety, 354
also see Chlorine safety
shutdown, 349
start up, 342, 344
start-stop control, 338
step-rate control, 338
storage of containers, 345
temperature, 371
-------
438 Treatment Plants
timed-program control, 338
troubleshooting, 346, 350, 351, 352
vacuum system, 366, 368
valves, 362, 373
vent lines, 347
ventilation, 371
water supply, 344, 371, 373
Chlorine
absorption solution, 365
activated sludge, 375
air padding, 356
alarm systems, 365
ammonia, 332
application, 335
BOD reduction, 375
breakout, 350
breakpoint, 333
chloramines, 332
chlorine dioxide, 332
cleaning lines, 364
connections, 362
contact chamber, 350
contact time, 333
container storage, 345
containers, 356
corrosion control, 375
cylinders, 356
demand, 331
diffusers, 342
disinfection, 50, 331
disposal, 365
dosage, 335, 338
emergency procedures, 355
emergency repair kits, 365
evaporators, 345, 366, 370
first aid, 355
free chlorine, 331
fusible plug, 356
gas, 344
grease, 375
handling, 356
hypochlorite, 331
injectors, 347
leak detection, 365
leaks, 355, 364
liquid, 344
manifolds, 373
mixing, 333, 342
odor control, 374
pH, 333
physiological response, 354
piping, 373
properties, 354
protection of structures, 375
protective clothing, 355
railroad tank cars, 356, 362
reactions, 331, 332
record keeping, 371
repair kits, 365
residual, 333, 338, 342
safety, 354
also see Chlorine safety
sedimentation, 375
solution lines, 342
tank cars, 356, 362
temperature, 333, 371
ton tanks, 356
trickling filters, 375
troubleshooting, 350
valves, 362, 373
ventilation, 371
use, 331
weigh, 371
Chlorine demand
trickling filter, 174
wastewater, 331
Chlorine dioxide
disinfection, 331, 332
facility, 371
handling sodium chlorite, 371
hazards, 371
installation, 371
layout, 371
maintenance, 371
pH, 332
reactions, 332
sodium chlorite, 371
system parts, 371
water treatment, 332
Chlorine measurement, 338, 342
Chlorine requirement, test, 331, 339
Chlorine residual, test, 331
Chlorine safety
absorption solution, 365
alarm systems, 365
breathing apparatus, 355
calibration of equipment, 354
chlorine properties, 354
cleaning lines, 364
disposal, 365
emergency procedures, 355
emergency repair kits, 365
equipment calibration, 354
first aid, 354, 355
fusible plug, 356
handling chlorine, 356
handling sodium chlorite, 371
hazards, 354
leak detection, 365
leaks, 354, 355, 364
physiological response, 354
planning, 355
program, 354
protective clothing, 355
railroad tank cars, 356, 362
repair kits, 365
rules, 354
sodium chlorite, 371
tank cars, 356, 362
training, 354
Chlororganic, 332
Cholera, 18, 329
Clarifier
drawing, 40, 41
effluent, 108, 121
influent, 121
primary, 39, 108
removal efficiencies, 39
scum removal, 39
secondary, 39, 43, 108
sludge, 108
sludge removal, 39
Clarity, 174
Classifier, grit, 88, 90
Closed impeller
see Chapter 15
Coagulation, 137
Coarse screens, 62
Conforms, 174, 333
Collection system, 29
-------
index 439
Collector mechanism, sludge
start up, 116
troubleshooting, 123
Colloids, 136
Combined sewers, 29
Comminutor
description, 38, 69
drawing, 71, 72, 73, 74
head loss, 77
mercury seal, 75, 76
operation, 77
operational strategy, 93
parts, 75
purpose, 69, 75
safety, 75, 77
section view, 71, 72, 73, 74
shutdown, 77
start up, 77
troubleshooting, 77
Community relations, management responsibilities, 6
Completely mixed system, activated sludge, 246, 247
Composite sample, 121, 214, 297
Conditioning sludge
see Chapters 12 and 22
Contact, chlorine disinfection, 333, 350
Contact stabilization, activated sludge, 246, 247
Control methods, activated sludge, 241, 242
Conventional activated sludge
see Chapter 11
Conventional treatment, 49
Conversion units
see Chapter 17
Covered activated sludge, oxygen activated sludge
see Chapter 21
Covers, anaerobic digester
see Chapter 22
Cycle
natural purification, 1, 20
nutrient, 20
Cyclone grit separators
description, 87
disposal, 90
layout, 88
maintenance, 90
operation, 90
parts, 90
purpose, 87, 90
section drawing, 89
shutdown, 90
start up, 90
D
DO, 174
DPD tests, 342
Data collection and laboratory control
see Chapter 16
Dechlorination, 37, 50, 376
Density, 127
Detention time
activated sludge clarifiers, 130
aeration tanks, 236, 241
calculation, 127
definition, 39
measurement, 128
primary sedimentation, 39, 127
trickling filter clarifiers, 130
Detritus, 91
Dew point test, 344
Dewatering, sludge, 45
Diaphragm bulb, level measurement
see Chapter 15
Diffusers, activated sludge, 247, 249, 267
Digester cleaning, maintenance
see Chapter 12
Digester gas
see Chapter 12
Digestion
aerobic, 45
anaerobic, 45
Discharge permits, 21
Diseases, 329
Disinfection
chlorine, 50
chlorine dioxide, 371
chlorine residual, 335
effluent, 37, 50, 349
flow diagram, 330
importance, 331
purpose, 329, 335
Disposal
also see Chapters 13, 22 and 25
effluent, 50
grit, 38, 62, 83, 93
screening, 37, 64, 69
scum, 108
sludge, 108
solids, 45, 50
Dissolved air flotation, 136
also see Chapter 22
Dissolved oxygen
activated sludge, 241
ponds, 284, 286, 296, 297, 301
rotating biological contactor, 214
test, see Chapter 16
trickling filter, 174
Dissolved solids, in wastewater, 19
Distribution, trickling filter, 161, 183, 189
Distributors, trickling filter, 161, 183, 189
Domestic wastes, 17
Domestic wastewater, characteristics, 17
Dosing tanks, trickling filter, 167, 168
Drying, sludge, 45
also see Chapter 12
Dysentery, 18, 329
E
Eductor, 341
Efficiency of processes
activated sludge, 242
oxidation ditch, 254, 259, 260, 262
package aeration, 242
ponds, 288, 297, 299
primary treatment, 112
rotating biological contactors, 210, 214
sedimentation, 112
trickling filters, 173
Effluent disposal, 50
Electric transmitters
see Chapters 15 and 26
Electrical safety
see Chapter 14
Electrolysis, 346
Elutriation, sludge
see Chapters 12 and 22
Emergency planning
see Chapter 19
Employment for operators, 1, 6, 7
Emulsions, 136
Enclosure, rotating biological contactor, 202, 210,222
Energy
activated sludge, 267
-------
440 Treatment Plants
oxidation ditches, 259, 267
package aeration, 267
ponds, 284
rotating biological contactors, 210
trickling filters, 167, 172, 175
Engines
see Chapter 15
Enzymes, 333
Equalization tanks, 210
Erosion, ponds, 291, 301
Explosimeters, 94
Extended aeration, activated sludge, 243, 246
F
Facultative bacteria, 241
Facultative ponds, 49
Fecal coliform test
see Chapter 16
Filamentous bacteria, 241, 375
Filamentous growth, bulking
see Chapter 11
Filter press
operation, see Chapter 22
sludge dewatering, 45
Filter staging, trickling filter, 169, 170
Filters
see Chapters 22 and 23
Fire control, safety
see Chapter 14
First aid program
see Chapter 14
chlorine, 355
sulfur dioxide, 378
Flame trap, anaerobic digester
see Chapter 12
Flies, trickling filter, 178
Flights, 116
Float mechanism, level measurement
see Chapter 15
Floating covers, anaerobic digester
see Chapter 12
Floating sludge
see Chapter 11
Floe, 241
Flocculation, 137
Flotation
also see Chapter 28
chemical, 136
description, 136
dissolved air, 136
pressure, 137
purpose, 108
vacuum, 137
Flow diagram
activated sludge, 239, 240
chlorination, 330
chlorine dioxide, 382
combined sedimentation-digestion unit, 138
disinfection, 330
oxidation ditch, 254, 255
package aeration, 244, 245
ponds, 282, 283
pretreatment, 63
primary treatment, 109, 110
rotating biological contactors, 203
sedimentation, 109, 110
trickling filters, 162
Flow equalization, 210
Flow measurement, 39
Flow meter, 39
Flow proportioning, sampling, 121, 214, 297
F:M ratio
activated sludge, 257
oxygen activated sludge
see Chapter 22
Foaming
see Chapters 11 and 12
Food to microorganism ratio, 257
G
Gasification, 118
Giardiasis, 329
Glossary, 405
Grab sample, 214, 297
Grit
aerated removal, 38
chambers, 38
channels, 38
cleaning channels, 83
cyclone removal, 87
definition, 38, 81
disposal, 38, 62, 93
quantities, 91
removal, 38, 81
transport, 38
washing, 38
Grit chambers, aerated
abnormal operation, 87
description, 85
drawing, 86
grit removal, 87
operation, 87
parts, 87
purpose, 87
shutdown, 87
start up, 85
Grit channels
abnormal operation, 85
aerated grit chamber, 85
cleaning, 83
dead spots, 83
deflector, 83
description, 81
disposal of grit, 83
drawing, 82, 84, 86
example problems, 83
grit removal, 83
maintenance, 85
measuring velocity, 83
operation, 85
operational strategy, 83
parts, 81
plans and specifications, 94
purpose, 81
safety, 85
shutdown, 85
start up, 85
troubleshooting, 83
velocity, 81
Grit classifier, 88, 90
Grit washer
description, 91
maintenance, 91
operation, 91
parts, 91
purpose, 91
safety, 91
section drawing, 92
shutdown, 91
Groundwater recharge, wastewater, 50
-------
H
Head works, 38
Heat exchanger, anaerobic digester
see Chapter 12
Hepatitis, 18, 329
High rate
anaerobic digesters
see Chapter 12
activated sludge
see Chapter 11
trickling filter, 169, 186
Housekeeping, 219, 251, 253, 290
Hydraulic loading
activated sludge, 241, 242, 251
clarifiers, 122, 123
rotating biological contactors, 210, 214, 222, 223
sedimentation, 122, 123
trickling filters, 175, 186, 187
Hydraulic overloads
see Operational strategy
Hydrogen sulfide
collection systems, 29
hazards, 18,124
problems, 18
Hydrogen sulfide removal, digester gas
see Chapter 12
Hydrostatic system, 130
Hypochlorinators
control, 341
description, 341, 371
eductors, 341
emergency use, 349
feed rate, 341
flow meters, 341
hypochlorite, 331, 371
maintenance, 341
piping, 341
pH, 331
purpose, 333
safety, 333, 341
storage, 341
valves, 341
Hypochlorite, 331, 371
I
Icing
oxidation ditch, 262
trickling filter, 179
Imhoffcone, 19
Imhoff tank
operation, 145
process equipment, 145
section, 145
Impacts of waste discharges
algae, 21
human health, 18
nutrients, 18
odors, 17
oxygen depletion, 17
pathogenic bacteria, 18
sludge and scum, 17
toxic substances, 18
Impellers, open and closed
see Chapter 15
Incineration
also see Chapter 22
description, 45
sludge, 45
Industrial waste treatment
also see Chapter 28
Index 441
activated sludge, 230, 242, 267
also see Chapter 21
oxidation ditches, 259
ponds, 300
rotating biological contactors, 214
trickling filters, 167, 180
Industrial wastes, 16
Industrial wastewater flows, 29
Infectious hepatitis, 18, 329
Infiltration, 29, 179
Influent, 29
Inhibitory substances, 216
Inorganic compounds, in wastewater, 20
Inorganic wastes, 16
Insect control
ponds, 290
trickling filters, 172, 178
Inspecting new facilities
activated sludge, 247
clarifiers, 116
cyclone grit separator, 90
grit channels, 85
oxidation ditches, 257
ponds, 289
rotating biological contactors, 213
sedimentation basins, 116
trickling filters, 171
J
Jobs for operators, 1, 6, 7
K
Kjeldahl nitrogen
see Chapter 16
Kraus process, activated sludge
see Chapter 11
L
Laboratory
see Chapter 16
Lagoons, 284
see Ponds
Land disposal, effluent, 50, 284
Land treatment, 284
also see Chapter 25
Landfill, 51
Launders, 128
Lift station, 30
Lifting, safe practices
see Chapter 14
M
MPN, 333
Magnetic meters
see Chapter 15
Maintenance
also see Chapters 15 and 29
activated sludge, 247, 250, 253, 267
aerobic digestion
see Chapter 12
anaerobic digester
see Chapter 12
bar screens, 64
barminutors, 77
chlorinators, 366, 371
chlorine dioxide, 371
comminutors, 77
cyclone grit separators, 90
disinfection, 366, 371
grit channels, 85
-------
442 Treatment Plants
grit washer, 91
hypochlorinators, 341
mechanically cleaned screens, 67
oxidation ditch, 264, 267
oxygen activated sludge
see Chapter 21
package aeration, 247, 250, 253, 267
ponds, 290, 291, 293, 296, 301
primary treatment, 117, 124, 136
pumps
see Chapter 15
racks, 64
record keeping, 124
rotating biological contactors, 210, 213, 218, 219
sedimentation, 117, 124, 136
sulfonator, 387
trickling filters, 183
Manpower needs, 6
Masking agent, 143, 178
Mean cell residence time
see Chapter 11
Media
rotating biological contactor, 42, 202
trickling filter, 42, 161, 164, 165, 166, 186
Median, 288
Mesophilic process, anaerobic digester
see Chapter 12
Methane gas, 45
Metric conversion factors
also see Chapter 17
chlorination, 388
dechlorination, 388
preliminary treatment, 95
primary treatment, 146
rotating biological contactors, 223, 224
sedimentation, 146
Metric problem solutions
also see Chapter 17
chlorination, 388
dechlorination, 388
oxidation ditches, 266
ponds, 308, 310
preliminary treatment, 94
primary treatment, 146
rotating biological contactors, 223, 224
sedimentation, 146
trickling filters, 187, 189
Microorganisms
in wastewater, 329
removal by treatment, 329
Mixed flow pumps
see Chapter 15
Mixed liquor, 43
Mixing, anaerobic digestion, 45
Molecule, 127
Most probable number, 333
Multiple hearth incinerator
see Chapter 22
N
NPDES permits, 21, 333
National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
permits, 21,333
National Safety Council, 61
Natural purification cycle, 1, 20
Nephelometry
see Chapter 16
Neutralization, 216
Nitrification, 187, 214
Nitrogen
cycle, 20
test in wastewater
see Chapter 16
Nomogram, chlorination control, 339, 340
Nuclear power plants, 17
Nutrient cycle, 20
Nutrient removal
see Volume III
O
Objectives of operators, 23
Occupational safety and health act
see Chapter 14
Odor
activated sludge, 241, 250, 251
chlorination, 374
disinfection, 374
masking, 143, 178
oxidation ditch, 258, 259, 260, 262
ponds, 281, 284, 286, 289, 290, 291, 292, 293
rotating biological contactor, 216, 217, 218
trickling filter, 178, 189
Odor control, 374
also see Chapter 20
Open impeller
see Chapter 15
Operation
activated sludge, 242, 250, 267
bar screens, 68
barminutors, 77
chlorinators, 345
comminutors, 69, 77
cyclone grit separators, 90
grit channels, 85
grit washer, 91
oxidation ditch, 259, 260, 264, 265
package aeration, 250
ponds, 290, 291
primary treatment, 117, 126, 134
racks, 68
rotating biological contactors, 213, 267
sedimentation, 117, 126, 134
sulfonators, 381,386
trickling filters, 167, 172, 175
Operation problems
see Troubleshooting
Operational strategy
activated sludge, 242, 251
bar screens, 93
barminutors, 93
chlorination, 349
comminutors, 93
grit channels, 93
hydraulic overloads, see process
organic overloads, see process
oxidation ditch, 251, 264
package aeration, 251
ponds, 293
primary treatment, 117
racks, 93
rotating biological contactors, 213
screens, 93
sedimentation, 117
sulfonator, 386
trickling filters, 175
Operators
jobs, 1, 6, 7
objectives, 23
salary, 1
Organic compounds in wastewater, 20
-------
Index 443
Organic overloads
see Operational strategy
Overflow rate, weir, 128
Oxidation, 236
Oxidation ditches
abnormal operation, 262, 263
activated sludge, 257
aeration basin, 254
BOD loading, 254, 265
bulking, 262
bump start, 258
chlorination, 258
clarifiers, 258, 259, 262, 268
cold weather, 254, 262, 268
contact time, 257, 259, 262, 266, 268
cover, 262
description, 254
dissolved oxygen, 258, 259, 260
dimensions, 265
ditch, 254, 260
efficiency of process, 254, 259, 260, 262
effluent, 254, 258, 260, 262, 268
energy use, 259, 267
F/M ratio, 257, 265
floe, 257, 259
flow diagram, 254, 255
foam, 260
food, 259
food to microorganism ratio, 257, 265
gear reducer, 260, 263, 264, 267
housekeeping, 257, 260, 264
hydraulic loading, 254, 262
ice buildup, 262, 268
industrial waste treatment, 259
influent, 254, 259, 262, 265
inspecting new facilities, 257
layout, 255
lining, 267
loadings, 254, 257
lubrication, 258, 264
maintenance, 264, 267
metric system, 266, 268
microorganisms, 262
mixed liquor, 254, 258, 259, 260, 262
nitrogen removal, 262
odors, 258, 259, 260, 262
operation, 259, 260, 264, 265
operational strategy, 251, 264
organic loading, 254, 265
oxygen, 259, 260
parts, 254
performance, 254, 259, 261
pinpoint floe, 259
plans and specifications, 257, 267
power outage, 267, 268
purpose, 254
pumps, 258
record keeping, 258, 259, 260
return sludge, 254, 258, 259
rotor, 254, 256, 257, 258, 259, 262, 263, 264
safety, 257, 267
sampling, 258, 259
scum, 254, 259
secondary clarifiers, 259, 268
seed activated sludge, 258
settleability tests, 258
settling tank, 254
shock loads, 254
shutdown, 262
slingers, 264
sludge age, 266
solids, 259, 268
start up, 257, 258
temperature, 254, 262
toxic wastes, 254, 259
trend chart, 261
troubleshooting, 260, 262
velocity, 254, 257, 259, 260
visual inspection, 258, 259, 260
waste sludge, 254, 258, 259, 260
weir, 258
Oxidation ponds, 49, 284
Oxidizing agent, 331
Oxygen activated sludge
see Chapter 21
Ozone
disinfection
see Chapter 20
odor control
see Chapter 20
P
Package aeration plants
also see Activated sludge
abnormal operation, 251
aeration methods, 243, 247
aerobic digestion, 243
bulking, 251
chlorination, 251
clarifiers, 251, 252
cold weather, 251
complete mix, 246, 247
contact stabilization, 246, 247
contact time, 243, 252
description, 243
diffusers, 243, 247, 249, 267
efficiency of process, 242
effluent, 243, 250, 251
energy use, 267
extended aeration, 243, 246
flow diagram, 244, 245
foam, 250, 251
housekeeping, 251, 253
hydraulic loading, 251
industrial waste treatment, 230, 242, 267
also see Chapter 21
influent, 236, 242
inspecting new facilities, 247
layout, 244, 245, 246
maintenance, 247, 250, 253, 267
mechanical aeration, 243, 247, 248
microorganisms, 236, 237, 241, 242, 251
mixed liquor suspended solids, 243, 247, 252
odors, 250, 251
operation, 250, 267
operational strategy, 251
parts, 244, 245
plans and specifications, 267
pretreatment requirements, 236, 241
purpose, 243
record keeping, 247, 250, 252
return sludge, 250, 251
safety, 252
sampling, 252
secondary clarifiers, 251, 252
settleability tests, 241, 252
shutdown, 251
sludge age, 243
start up, 247, 250
storm flows, 251
-------
444 Treatment Plants
temperature, 251
toxic wastes, 242, 251
trend chart, 252
troubleshooting, 251
types of plants, 243
visual inspection, 250, 252
wasting sludge, 243, 250, 251, 252
Package treatment plant
activated sludge, 243
combined sedimentation-digestion unit, 138
oxidation ditch, 254
Parallel operation
ponds, 291
trickling filters, 180
Parasites, 329
Paratyphoid, 329
Parshall flume, 39
Particle settling, 126
Particle size, primary sedimentation, 126
Pathogenic bacteria, 50, 329
Pay for operators, 1
Percolation, wastewater, 146, 288
Permits, effluent discharge, 21
Personal hygiene, 61
PH
definition, 286
ponds, 286, 289, 296, 297
rotating biological contactors, 214
test
see Chapter 16
trickling filter effluent, 174
pH effects
ponds, 286
rotating biological contactor, 214
pH measurement
see Chapter 16
Phosphorus
see Chapter 24
Photosynthesis, 49, 286
Physical chemical treatment
see Chapters 23 and 28
Physical treatment, 161
Physiological response
chlorine, 354
sulfur dioxide, 378
Plans and specifications
activated sludge, 267
bar screens, 94
chlorination, 371, 374
chlorinators, 371, 374
grit channels, 94
oxidation ditch, 257, 267
package aeration, 267
ponds, 300
primary treatment, 134
racks, 94
rotating biological contactors, 222
screens, 94
sedimentation, 134
sulfonators, 371, 374
trickling filters, 188
wet wells, 94
Polio, 18, 329
Polishing ponds, 284
Pollution, 16
Polymer feed, operation
see Chapter 23
Ponding, trickling filter, 176, 181
Ponds
abnormal operation, 292
acid production, 286
advantages, 284
aerobic ponds, 284, 286, 287
algae, 281, 289, 292, 301
alkalinity, 297
anaerobic ponds, 284, 286, 287
arithmetic, 312
BOD loading, 292, 293
batch operation, 286, 290, 292
bioflocculation, 288
chlorination, 290, 292
classification, 284, 285
cleaning, 292, 293
cold weather, 286, 289, 290, 292, 296, 301
color, 289, 290, 293
controlled discharge, 286, 288, 292
cover, 291
depth, 289, 290, 301
description, 49, 281, 286
detention time, 284, 286, 288, 289, 299, 306
dissolved oxygen, 284, 286, 296, 297, 301
efficiency of process, 288, 297, 299
effluent, 284, 292, 293, 297, 298, 309
energy use, 284
facultative ponds, 284, 286, 287
fencing, 306
filamentous algae, 301
flow diagram, 32, 282, 283
headworks, 291, 300
history, 281
housekeeping, 290
hydraulic loading, 292, 293, 306
industrial waste treatment, 300
influent, 297, 298
insect control, 290
inspecting new facilities, 289
land, 284
layout, 32, 282, 283
levee maintenance, 291, 301
limitations, 284
loadings, 292, 293, 306
maintenance, 290, 291, 293, 296, 301
mechanical aeration, 284
methane fermentation, 286
metric calculations, 308, 310
mosquito control, 296
nutrients, 281, 288, 300
odors, 281, 284, 286, 289, 290, 291, 292, 293
operation, 290, 291
operational strategy, 293
organic loading, 292, 293, 306
oxidation ponds, 284
parallel operation, 291
parts, 281
performance, 288, 296
pH, 286, 289, 296, 297
plans and specifications, 300
polishing ponds, 284
pond isolation, 309
population loading, 306
purpose, 281
recirculation, 290, 291, 292, 301, 306
record keeping, 296, 300, 318
removal efficiencies, 297, 299
safety, 299
sampling, 296
scum control, 290, 292
series operation, 291
short-circuiting, 301
shutdown, 292
-------
signs, 301
start up, 289
surface aerators, 290, 293, 306
temperature, 286, 289, 290, 292, 296, 297, 301
toxic wastes, 288, 292, 300
trend chart, 298
troubleshooting, 290, 292, 299
tules, 290, 306
use of ponds, 281, 284
visual inspection, 289, 290, 293, 296
water hyacinth culture, 310
weed control, 290
Population equivalent, 307
Positive displacement pumps
see Chapter 15
Power outage, 118, 218
Pre-aeration
description, 93
purpose, 93
Preliminary treatment, 30
Preserving samples
see Chapter 16
Pretreatment
activated sludge, 236, 241
bar screens, 62
barminutors, 77
comminutors, 69
cyclone grit separators, 87
domestic wastes, 30, 37, 61
grit removal, 81
industrial wastes
see Chapters 27 and 28
pre-aeration, 93
purpose, 61
racks, 62
rotating biological contactor, 210
Preventive maintenance
see Chapter 15
Primary sedimentation
definition, 39
detention time, 39
Primary treatment
abnormal operation, 118
description, 30, 39, 108
detention time, 127
efficiency of process, 122, 129
effluent, 121
flow diagram, 109, 110
hydraulic load, 123
influent, 121
maintenance, 117,124, 136
operation, 117, 126, 134
operational strategy, 117
overflow rate, 128
parts, 111, 112, 114
performance, 129
plans and specifications, 134
pumping, 123
purpose, 108, 114
record keeping, 124, 153
safety, 116, 124, 136
sampling, 121
section, 111
shutdown, 117
sludge and scum pumping, 123
solids loading, 129
start up, 116
surface loading, 128
toxic wastes, 118,120
troubleshooting, 118, 119, 122
weir overflow rate, 128
Process control
see Operation and Operational strategy
Public relations, 6
Pump station, 30
Pumping
scum, 123
sludge, 123
Pumps
see Chapter 15
Purification cycle, 1
Purpose of treatment process
activated sludge, 236, 243
bar screens, 67
barminutors, 77
chlorination, 329
comminutors, 69, 75
cyclone grit separators, 87, 90
dechlorination, 37, 50, 376
disinfection, 329, 335
flotation, 108
grit channels, 81
grit washers, 91
hypochlorination, 333
oxidation ditch, 254
package aeration, 243
ponds, 281
pretreatment, 61
primary treatment, 108,114
racks, 67
rotating biological contactors, 208
sedimentation, 108, 114
trickling filters, 165
Pyrometer, 213
Q
Qualifications for operators, 5
R
Racks
see Bar screens
Radioactive wastes, 17
Receiving waters
algae, 21
human health, 18
nutrients, 18
odors, 17
oxygen depletion, 17
pathogenic bacteria, 18
sludge and scum, 17
toxic substances, 18
Recharge, groundwater, 50
Recirculation
ponds, 290, 291, 292, 301, 306
rotating biological contactor, 213, 214, 216
trickling filter, 167, 172, 174, 176,185
Reclamation
see Chapter 25
Record keeping
activated sludge, 247, 250, 252
chlorination, 371
chlorinators, 371
oxidation ditch, 258, 259, 260
package aeration, 247, 250, 252
ponds, 296, 300, 318
primary treatment, 153
rotating biological contactors, 213
sedimentation, 153
sulfonator, 387
trickling filters, 195
-------
446 Treatment Plants
Records and reports
see Chapter 19
Reducing agent, 332
Reliquefaction, 369
Retention time, 130
Reuse
see Chapter 25
Review of plans and specifications
activated sludge, 267
bar screens, 94
chlorination, 371, 374
chlorinators, 371, 374
grit channels, 94
oxidation ditch, 257, 267
package aeration, 267
ponds, 300
primary treatment, 134
racks, 94
rotating biological contactors, 222
screens, 94
sedimentation, 134
sulfonators, 371, 374
trickling filters, 188
wet wells, 94
Riprap, 291
Rotameter, 341
Rotating biological contactor
abnormal operation, 218
advantages, 210
alkalinity, 214
biomass, 213, 216
bulkhead, 202, 214
clarifiers, 202
clearances, 213
cold weather, 202
contact time, 214
covered, 202, 210, 222
description, 42, 202, 204, 205
dissolved oxygen, 214
drive units, 210, 220, 221
efficiency of process, 210, 214
effluent, 210, 214, 216
energy use, 210
equalization tanks, 210, 216
flow diagram, 203
flow equalization tanks, 210, 216
growth, 202, 216
holding tanks, 202
housekeeping, 219
hydraulic balance, 213
hydraulic loading, 210, 214, 222, 223
industrial waste treatment, 214
influent, 214, 216
inspecting new contactors, 213
layout, 207
limitations, 210
loadings, 222
lubrication, 213, 218, 219
maintenance, 210 213, 218, 219
media, 202, 205, 206, 216, 219
metric calculations, 223, 224
nitrogen removal, 210, 214, 222, 223
odors, 216, 217, 218
operation, 213
operational strategy, 213
organic loading, 210, 214, 216, 222, 223
parts, 208
performance, 214
pH, 214
plans and specifications, 222
power outage, 218
pretreatment requirements, 210
purpose, 208
recirculation, 213, 214, 216
record keeping, 213
rotation of media, 213
safety, 213, 218, 222
sampling, 214
shutdown, 218
slime growth, 202, 213, 216
sloughing, 202, 213, 216, 218
sludge deposits, 216
speed of rotation, 213
stages, 202
start up, 210
sulfur compounds, 215
supernatant treatment, 216
temperature, 202, 213, 214, 222
time of contact, 214
toxic wastes, 216
trend chart, 215
troubleshooting, 213, 214, 217, 220
underdrain, 208
visual inspection, 213, 216, 217
Roughing filter, trickling filter, 169
S
SVI, 134
Safety hazards
also see Chapter 14 and Chlorine safety
activated sludge, 242, 252
bar screens, 64, 67
barminutors, 77
causes, 60
chlorination, 354
chlorinators, 354
chlorine, 354
clarifiers, 124, 136
comminutors, 75, 77
cyclone grit separators, 90
grit channels, 85
grit washer, 91
hypochlorinators, 333, 341
National Safety Council, 60
oxidation ditch, 257, 267
package aeration, 252
ponds, 299
primary treatment, 124, 136
racks, 64
rotating biological contactors, 213, 218, 222
sedimentation, 124, 136
sulfur dioxide, 377, 378, 379
trickling filters, 185, 189
Safety program
see Chapter 14
Salmonellosis, 329
Sample size
see Chapter 16
Sampling
also see Chapter 16
activated sludge, 252
combined sedimentation-digestion unit, 141
composite, 121, 214, 297
grab, 214, 297
oxidation ditch, 258, 259
package aeration, 252
ponds, 296
primary treatment, 121
rotating biological contactors, 214
sedimentation, 121
-------
Index 447
trickling filters, 173, 175
Sand drying beds, 45
Sanitary landfill, 51
Sanitary sewers, 29
Saprophytes, 329
Screening
disposal, 37, 64, 69
quantity, 69
wastewater, 37
Screens
see Bar screens
Screw lift pumps
see Chapter 15
Scum
pumping, 123
receiving water, 17
removal, 124
Scum and foam control, anaerobic digester
see Chapter 12
Secondary clarifiers
activated sludge, 130
description, 43
operation, 130
oxidation ditches, 258, 259, 262, 268
sludge collection, 130, 131, 132, 133
trickling filter, 130
Secondary treatment, 30, 42, 161, 202, 236
Sedimentation
abnormal operation, 118
description, 108
detention time, 127
drawing, 40, 41, 109, 110
efficiency of process, 39, 112, 129
effluent, 121
flow diagram, 109, 110
hydraulic load, 123
influent, 121
maintenance, 117, 124, 136
operation, 117,126, 134
operational strategy, 117
overflow rate, 128
parts, 111, 112, 114
performance, 129
plans and specifications, 134
primary clarifiers, 127
pumping, 123
purpose, 108, 114
record keeping, 124, 153
safety, 116, 124, 136
sampling, 121
scum removal, 39, 123
secondary clarifiers, 30, 43, 130
section, 111
short-circuiting, 127
shutdown, 117
sludge and scum pumping, 39, 123
solids loading, 129
start up, 116
surface loading, 128
temperature, 127
toxic wastes, 118, 120
troubleshooting, 118, 119, 122
types of units, 126
weir overflow rate, 128
Sedimentation-digestion unit
abnormal operation, 144
description, 138
digestion, 143
efficiency of process, 138, 140
flow diagram, 138
maintenance, 144
operation, 143
operational strategy, 144
parts, 140
purpose, 140
safety, 144
sampling, 141
section, 139
sedimentation, 143
shutdown, 144
start up, 140
troubleshooting, 144
Septic, 252
Septic tanks, 146
Septicity, 118, 375
Series operation
ponds, 291
trickling filters, 180
Settleable solids, 174
Settleability test, 241, 252
also see Chapter 16
Settling
see Sedimentation
Settling tanks
activated sludge, 236, 241, 251, 252
oxidation ditches, 258, 259, 262, 268
oxygen activated sludge
see Chapter 21
package aeration plants, 251, 252
rotating biological contactors, 202
trickling filter, 130
Settling velocity
grit, 83
particles, 126
Sewer systems, 29
Sewer-use ordinance, 181
also see Chapter 27
Shigellosis, 329
Shock load, 175
Short-circuiting
clarifiers, 127
density, 127
ponds, 301
sedimentation, 127
temperature, 127
Shredding, 37
Shutdown
activated sludge, 251
aerated grit chambers, 87
bar screen, 68
barminutors, 77
chlorination, 349
chlorinators, 349
comminutors, 77
cyclone grit separators, 90
grit channels, 85
grit washer, 91
oxidation ditch, 262
package aeration, 251
ponds, 292
primary treatment, 117
rotating biological contactors, 218
sedimentation, 117
sulfonator, 387
trickling filters, 172
SI system
see Metric
Sixty-minute settling test, activated sludge, 241, 252
Slingers, 264
Sloughings, 130
-------
448 Treatment Plants
Sludge
definition, 39, 123
dewatering, 45
digestion, 45
disposal, 45
gravity dewatering, 45
heat drying and incineration, 45
incineration, 45
lagoons, 45
multiple hearth incinerators
see Chapter 22
pumping, 123
receiving waters, 17
wet oxidation, 49
Sludge age, activated sludge, 243
Sludge blanket, 241
Sludge bulking
activated sludge, 251
toxic waste, 120
Sludge collection
collector failure, 120, 123
primary sedimentation, 123
secondary sedimentation, 130, 131, 132, 133
start up, 116
Sludge density index
activated sludge, 234
test, 234
Sludge deposits, ponds, 286
Sludge dewatering, 45
also see Chapters 12 and 22
Sludge disposal, 45
Sludge handling
also see Chapters 12 and 22
aerobic digester, 45, 243
anaerobic digester, 45
primary sedimentation, 123
Sludge pumping
anaerobic digester
see Chapter 12
failure, 120
operation problems, 120
primary sedimentation, 123
Sludge thickening and conditioning
see Chapter 22
Sludge treatment
see Chapters 12 and 22
Sludge volume index
activated sludge, 134
test, 134
Snails, trickling filter problems, 176
Sodium chlorite, 371
Sodium hypochlorite disinfection, maintenance, 371
Soil conditioner, 51
Solar heat, 214
Solids
also see Chapter 22
dewatering, 45
digestion, 45
disposal, 30, 45, 50
dissolved, 19
filterable residue, 19
floatable, 20
handling, 45, 46, 47
inorganic, 20
land application
see Chapter 22
loading on clarifiers, 129
nonfilterabie residue, 19
nonsettleable, 19
organic, 20
settleable, 19
suspended solids, 19
test in wastewater, 19
total, 19
wastewater characteristics, 19
Solids accumulation, rotating biological contactor, 216
Solids loading
activated sludge clarifiers, 130
dissolved-air flotation, 129
secondary clarifiers, 129
sludge thickening, 129
Soluble BOD, 210
Specific gravity, 126
Stabilization ponds, 49, 284
Stabilized waste, 236, 281
Standard rate
anaerobic digester
see Chapter 12
trickling filter, 169, 186
Start up
activated sludge, 247, 250
aerated grit chambers, 85
bar screens, 68
barminutors, 77
chlorination, 342, 344
chlorinators, 342, 344
comminutors, 77
cyclone grit separators, 90
grit channels, 85
oxidation ditch, 257, 258
package aeration, 247, 250
ponds, 289
primary treatment, 116
rotating biological contactors, 210
sedimentation, 116
sulfonator, 381, 382, 384
trickling filters, 171
Sterilization, 50, 329
Storm sewers, 29
Storm water, 179
Sulfonator
abnormal operation, 386
controls, 380
dechlorination, 376
diaphragm, 377
differences, 386
emergency safety equipment, 379
evaporator, 380, 387
feed-rate control, 380
leaks, 382
maintenance, 387
operation, 381, 386
operational strategy, 386
pipeline cleaning, 381
record keeping, 387
shutdown, 387
start up, 381, 382, 384
troubleshooting, 383, 385, 386
water supply, 382
Sulfur dioxide
application point, 377
chemical reactions, 377
containers, 379
controls, 380
dechlorination, 37, 50, 376
detection of leaks, 378
emergency safety equipment, 379
evaporator, 380, 387
feed rate, 380
first aid, 378
-------
flow measurement, 377
hazards, 377
injector, 380
leaks, 378
maintenance, 387
odor, 376, 377
physiological response, 378
piping, 379
properties, 376, 377
purpose, 376
reactions, 377
repair kit, 378, 379
residual, 381
safety, 377, 378, 379
shutdown, 387
start up, 381, 384
sulfonator, 380
supply system, 379
troubleshooting, 383, 385, 386
use, 37, 50
valves, 379
Supernatant, 45
Surface aerators, ponds
applications, 293
description, 294, 295
operating time, 296
parts, 296
purpose, 296
Surface loading
activated sludge clarifiers, 130
clarifiers, 128
trickling filter clarifiers, 130
Suspended solids, 173
T
Temperature effect
activated sludge, 251
anaerobic digester
see Chapter 12
chlorination, 333
clarifiers, 127
oxidation ditches, 262
ponds, 286, 289, 292
rotating biological contactor, 213, 214, 254
sedimentation, 127
short-circuiting, 127
trickling filter, 167, 176, 179
Terminology, wastewater treatment, 405
Tertiary treatment, 37, 49, 284
Tests
activated sludge, 252
combined sedimentation-digestion unit, 141
effluent disposal
see Chapter 13
oxidation ditches, 258, 259
package aeration, 252
ponds, 296
primary sedimentation, 121
rotating biological contactors, 214
trickling filters, 173, 175
Thermal wastes, 17
Thermophilic process, anaerobic digester
see Chapter 12
Titrate, 338
Total coliform, test
see Chapter 16
Toxic wastes
activated sludge, 242, 251
combined sedimentation-digestion unit, 144
general, 17
oxidation ditch, 254, 259
package aeration, 242, 251
ponds, 288, 292, 300
primary treatment, 118, 120
rotating biological contactors, 216
sedimentation, 118, 120
trickling filters, 167, 180
Training opportunities, 7
Treatment plant operator
duties, 1, 5, 6
employers, 1
pay, 1
Treatment plants, 30
Treatment processes, 30
Trend chart
activated sludge, 252
oxidation ditches, 261
ponds, 298
rotating biological contactors, 215
trickling filters, 176, 177
Trickling filters
abnormal operation, 176, 179
chlorination, 171, 178, 180, 181
clarifiers, 130
classification of filters, 169
cold weather, 179
cold weather, 179
covered, 178, 189
distribution system, 161, 183, 189
dosing tanks, 167, 168
downstream process problems, 181
efficiency of process, 173
effluent, 171, 173
energy use, 167,172, 175
filter flies, 178
flow diagram, 162
growth removal, 173
high-rate filters, 169, 186
hydraulic loading, 175, 186, 187
industrial waste treatment, 167, 180
influent, 173, 179
inspecting new filters, 171
layout, 163
loadings, 186
maintenance, 183
media, 161, 186
odors, 178, 189
operation, 167, 172, 175
operational strategy, 175
organic loading, 175, 187, 188
parallel operation, 180
parts, 165
performance, 173
plans and specifications, 188
ponding, 176, 181
recirculation, 167, 172, 174, 176, 185
record keeping, 195
roughing filters, 169
safety, 185, 189
sampling, 173, 175
section, 164
series operation, 180
shutdown, 172
site, 188
sloughing, 167, 173
snails, 176
stages, 169, 170
standard-rate filters, 169, 186
start up, 171
temperature, 167, 176, 179
-------
450 Treatment Plants
toxic wastes, 167, 180
trend chart, 176, 177
troubleshooting, 173, 176, 179, 181
underdrains, 161, 185
upstream process problems, 181
ventilation, 167, 178
visual inspection, 175
zoogleal film, 161
Troubleshooting
activated sludge, 251
bar screens, 68
barminutors, 77, 93
chlorination, 350, 351, 352
chlorinators, 346, 350, 351, 352
chlorine, 350
combined sedimentation-digestion unit, 144
comminutors, 77, 93
grit channels, 77, 93
oxidation ditch, 260, 262
package aeration, 251
ponds, 290, 292, 299
primary treatment, 118, 119, 122
rotating biological contactors, 213, 214, 217, 220
sedimentation, 118, 119, 122
sludge collector, 120
sludge pump, 120
sulfonator, 383, 385, 386
sulfur dioxide, 383, 385, 386
trickling filters, 173, 176, 179, 181
Turbidity test
see Chapter 16
Typhoid fever, 18, 329
U
Ultrification, 309
V
Vacuum filtration
operation
see Chapters 12 and 22
sludge dewatering, 45
Valves, maintenance
see Chapters 15 and 29
Velocity of settling
grit, 83
particles, 126
Ventilation, safety, 94
Venturi meters, 39
Viruses in wastewater, 329
Visual inspection
activated sludge, 250, 252
oxidation ditch, 258, 259, 260
package aeration, 250, 252
ponds, 289, 290, 293, 296
rotating biological contactors, 213, 216, 217
trickling filters, 175
Volatile acids, test
see Chapter 16
W
Washing, grit, 91
Waste discharges, 16
Waste treatment ponds, 30, 32, 49
Wastewater characteristics, 18
Wastewater treatment objectives, 16, 23
Wastewater treatment processes, introduction, 25
Wasting activated sludge, 250
Water, 16
Water Pollution Control Federation, safety surveys, 61
Water quality protector, 4
Weirs
diameter, 128
flow measuring, 39
Weir overflow rates
activated sludge clarifiers, 130
primary clarifiers, 128
trickling filter clarifiers, 130
Wet oxidation, 49
Wet wells
review of plans and specs, 94
White biomass, rotating biological reactors, 216
White foam, activated sludge, 250
Z
Zoogleal film, 161
-------
NOTES
------- |
|